YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Technical Manual
Technical reference for YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A AC Drive for Elevator Applications Technical Manual with 472 pages, 915 tables, safety notices, searchable navigation and precise source-page references.
- Chapters
- 1
- Pages
- 472
- Language
- English
- Format

Complete web edition
The complete manual in one reading flow
Pages follow the exact source order. Searchable text is also available for every page.
Complete document
Pages 1 to 472
Source page
Page 1
COSMOS(A4)(英文)新CI 初版 2011.3
YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A
AC Drive for Elevator Applications
Technical Manual
Type: CIMR-LC Models: 200 V Class: 1.5 to 110 kW 400 V Class: 1.5 to 110 kW
To properly use the product, read this manual thoroughly and retain for easy reference, inspection, and maintenance. Ensure the end user receives this manual.
Receiving 11
Mechanical Installation 22
Electrical Installation 33
Start-Up Programming & 44 Operation
Parameter Details 55
Troubleshooting 66 Periodic Inspection & 77 Maintenance Peripheral Devices & 88 Options
Specifications AA
Parameter List BB MEMOBUS/Modbus CC Communications
Standards Compliance DD MANUAL NO. SIEP C710616 33J Quick Reference Sheet EE
Source page
Page 2
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 2 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Copyright © 2009 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Yaskawa. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because Yaskawa is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, Yaskawa assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
2 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 3
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 3 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Quick Reference
Drive a Synchronous PM Motor
L1000A can operate synchronous PM motors. Refer to Flowchart C: Auto-Tuning for PM Motors on page97.
Perform Auto-Tuning Automatic tuning sets motor parameters. Refer to Types of Auto-Tuning on page99.
Maintenance Check Using Drive Monitors Use drive monitors to check fans, capacitors, and other components may require maintenance. Refer to Performance Life Monitors Maintenance Monitors on page301.
Fault Display and Troubleshooting Refer to Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors on page262 and Setup Troubleshooting and Possible Solutions on page145.
Standards Compliance
Refer to European Standards on page430 and UL and CSA Standards on page437. YEG
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 3
| Drive a Synchronous PM Motor | Column |
|---|---|
| L1000A can operate synchronous PM motors. Refer to Flowchart C: Auto-Tuning for PM Motors on page97. |
| Perform Auto-Tuning |
|---|
| Automatic tuning sets motor parameters. Refer to Types of Auto-Tuning on page99. |
| Maintenance Check Using Drive Monitors |
|---|
| Use drive monitors to check fans, capacitors, and other components may require maintenance. Refer to Performance Life Monitors Maintenance Monitors on page301. |
| Fault Display and Troubleshooting |
|---|
| Refer to Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors on page262 and Setup Troubleshooting and Possible Solutions on page145. |
| Standards Compliance | Column |
|---|---|
| Refer to European Standards on page430 and UL and CSA Standards on page437. | YEG |
Source page
Page 4
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 4 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 5
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 5 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Table of Contents
Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
i. PREFACE & GENERAL SAFETY............................................................................ 13 i.1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Applicable Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Terms and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 i.2 General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Supplemental Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Safety Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 General Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Motor Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Drive Label Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1. RECEIVING .............................................................................................................. 23 1.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1.2 General Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 L1000A Model Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Control Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 1.3 Model Number and Nameplate Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Model Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 1.4 Component Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Exploded Views of Drive Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Front Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2. MECHANICAL INSTALLATION............................................................................... 35 2.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 2.2 Mechanical Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Installation Orientation and Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Instructions on Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Digital Operator Remote Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
3. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION................................................................................ 45 3.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 3.2 Standard Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 3.3 Main Circuit Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 3.4 Terminal Block Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 5
Source page
Page 6
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 6 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
3.5 Terminal Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Removing/Reattaching the Terminal Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 3.6 Digital Operator and Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Removing/Reattaching the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Removing/Reattaching the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 3.7 Main Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Main Circuit Terminal Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Main Circuit Terminal and Motor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 3.8 Control Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Control Circuit Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Terminal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Switches and Jumpers on the Terminal Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
3.9 Control I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Setting Sink/Source with Input Terminals SN and SP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Sinking/Sourcing Mode Selection for Safe Disable Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 MEMOBUS/Modbus Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 3.10 Connect to a PC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 3.11 Wiring Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
4. START-UP PROGRAMMING & OPERATION ........................................................ 77 4.1 Section Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 4.2 Using the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Keys and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 The Drive and Operation Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 ALARM (ALM) LED Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Menu Structure for Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 4.3 The Drive and Programming Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Navigating the Drive and Programming Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 Changing Parameter Settings or Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Simplified Setup Using the Setup Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 4.4 Start-Up Flowcharts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Flowchart A: Installation, Wiring, Basic Setup for Motor and Elevator . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Power On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Control Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Motor Rotation Direction Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 PG Encoder Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Digital Operator Display Unit Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Flowchart B: Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96 Flowchart C: Auto-Tuning for PM Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Flowchart D: PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 4.5 Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Types of Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Before Auto-Tuning the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Auto-Tuning Interruption and Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Auto-Tuning Operation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Parameter Settings during Induction Motor Auto-Tuning: T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Parameter Settings during PM Motor Auto-Tuning: T2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
6 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 7
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 7 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Up and Down Commands and Speed Reference Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Speed Selection Using Digital Inputs (b1-01 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Multi-Function Terminal Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Accel/Decel Ramp and Jerk Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Elevator Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Inspection Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Brake Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Adjustments for Elevator Ride Comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Rescue Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Brake Response Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 4.7 Setup Troubleshooting and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Cannot Change Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Motor Does Not Rotate Properly after Pressing RUN Button or after Entering External Up/Down Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Motor is Too Hot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Drive Does Not Allow Selection the Desired Auto-Tuning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Encoder Offset (E5-11) Set During Auto-Tuning (Rotational or Stationary) Consistently Differs by 30 Degrees or More . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Electrical Noise From Drive or Output Lines When the Drive is Operating . . . . . . . . 146 A Residual Current Device (RCD, RCM) Trips during Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 The Safety Controller Does Not Recognize Safe Disable Monitor Output Signals (Terminals DM+ and DM-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Riding Comfort Related Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 4.8 Verifying Parameter Settings and Backing Up Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Backing Up Parameter Values: o2-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Parameter Access Level: A1-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Password Settings: A1-04, A1-05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
5. PARAMETER DETAILS......................................................................................... 151 5.1 A: Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 A1: Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 A2: User Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
5.2 b: Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 b1: Operation Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 b2: Magnetic Flux Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 b4: Delay Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 b6: Dwell Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 b7: Droop Control (CLV/PM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 b8: Energy Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 5.3 C: Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 C1: Acceleration and Deceleration Ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 C2: Jerk Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 C3: Slip Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 C4: Torque Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 C5: Speed Control Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 C6: Carrier Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 5.4 d: Reference Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 d1: Speed Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 d6: Field Forcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 5.5 E: Motor Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 E1: V/f Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 E2: Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 E3: V/f Pattern for Motor 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 7
Source page
Page 8
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 8 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
E4: Motor 2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 E5: PM Motor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 5.6 F: Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 F1: Encoder/PG Feedback Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 F3: Digital Input Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 F4: Analog Monitor Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 F5: Digital Output Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 F6: Communication Option Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 CANopen Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 5.7 H: Terminal Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 H1: Multi-Function Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 H2: Multi-Function Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 H3: Multi-Function Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 H4: Multi-Function Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 H5: MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 5.8 L: Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 L1: Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209 L2: Undervoltage Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 L3: Stall Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 L4: Speed Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 L5: Automatic Fault Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 L6: Torque Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 L7: Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 L8: Drive Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 5.9 n: Special Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
n1: Hunting Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 n2: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 n5: Inertia Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 n6: Online Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 n8: PM Motor Control Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 n9: Current Detection Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 5.10 o: Operator Related Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 o1: Digital Operator Display Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 o2: Digital Operator Keypad Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 o3: Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 o4: Maintenance Monitor Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 5.11 S: Elevator Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 S1: Brake Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 S2: Slip Compensation for Elevators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 S3: Start/Stop Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 S4: Rescue Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 S5: Short Floor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249 S6: Faults for Elevator Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 T: Motor Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 5.12 U: Monitor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 U1: Operation Status Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 U2: Fault Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 U3: Fault History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 U4: Maintenance Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258 U6: Control Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
8 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 9
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 9 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6. TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................................... 259 6.1 Section Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 6.2 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Alarm and Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 6.3 Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 6.4 Alarm Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 6.5 Operator Programming Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 6.6 Auto-Tuning Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 6.7 Copy Function Related Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Tasks, Errors, and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 6.8 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Fault Occurs Simultaneously with Power Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 If the Drive Still has Power After a Fault Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Viewing Fault Trace Data After Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Fault Reset Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
7. PERIODIC INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE ....................................................... 295 7.1 Section Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 7.2 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Recommended Daily Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Recommended Periodic Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 7.3 Periodic Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 7.4 Drive Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Number of Cooling Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Cooling Fan Component Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Cooling Fan Replacement: CIMR-L20018 to 20075 and 40006 to 40039 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Cooling Fan Replacement: CIMR-L20085, 20115, 40045, and 40060 . . . 307 Cooling Fan Replacement: CIMR-L40075 and 40091 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Cooling Fan Replacement: CIMR-L20145 to 20415, and 40112 to 40216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 7.5 Drive Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Serviceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Terminal Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Replacing the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
8. PERIPHERAL DEVICES & OPTIONS .................................................................. 319 8.1 Section Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 8.2 Drive Options and Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 8.3 Connecting Peripheral Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 8.4 Option Card Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Prior to Installing the Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Installing the Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 8.5 Installing Peripheral Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Dynamic Braking Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Installing a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Installing a Magnetic Contactor at the Power Supply Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Connecting an AC or DC Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 9
Source page
Page 10
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 10 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Connecting a Noise Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339 Installing Input Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Attachment for External Heatsink Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 Installing a Motor Thermal Overload (oL) Relay on the Drive Output . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
A. SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................. 343 A.1 Three-Phase 200 V Class Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 A.2 Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 A.3 Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 A.4 Drive Watt Loss Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 A.5 Drive Derating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Rated Current Depending on Carrier Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Carrier Frequency Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Temperature Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Altitude Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
B. PARAMETER LIST................................................................................................. 351 B.1 Understanding the Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Control Modes, Symbols, and Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 B.2 Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 B.3 Parameter Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 A: Initialization Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 b: Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 C: Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 d: Speed References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 E: Motor Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 F: Option Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 H: Multi-Function Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 L: Protection Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373 n: Advanced Performance Set-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 o: Operator Related Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 S: Elevator Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 T: Motor Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 U: Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387 B.4 Control Mode Dependent Parameter Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 A1-02 (Control Mode) Dependent Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Motor 2 Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 B.5 Defaults by Drive Model Selection (o2-04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 B.6 Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03). . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
C. MEMOBUS/MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS.......................................................... 399 C.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 C.2 Communication Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 C.3 Connecting to a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Network Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Wiring Diagram for Multiple Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Network Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 C.4 MEMOBUS/Modbus Setup Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 C.5 Drive Operations by MEMOBUS/Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Observing the Drive Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 Controlling the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 C.6 Communications Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Command Messages from Master to Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Response Messages from Drive to Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
10 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 11
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 11 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
C.7 Message Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Message Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Slave Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Function Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Error Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 C.8 Message Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Reading Drive MEMOBUS/Modbus Register Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Writing to Multiple Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Torque Compensation Through MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications . . . . . . . . . . 412 C.9 MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Command Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Monitor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Broadcast Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Fault Trace Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Alarm Register Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 C.10 Enter Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Enter Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Parameter H5-11 and the Enter Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
C.11 Communication Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 MEMOBUS/Modbus Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Slave Not Responding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 C.12 Self-Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
D. STANDARDS COMPLIANCE ................................................................................ 427 D.1 Section Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 D.2 European Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 EMC Directive Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 D.3 UL and CSA Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 UL Standards Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Installing Input Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 CSA Standards Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Drive Motor Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 D.4 Safe Disable Input Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Safety Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Using the Safe Disable Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 D.5 EN81-1/20 Conform Circuit with one Motor Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450 D.6 EN81-20 Conform Circuit with No Motor Contactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
E. QUICK REFERENCE SHEET ................................................................................ 453 E.1 Drive and Motor Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Drive Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Motor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 E.2 Basic Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 V/f Pattern Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Motor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Multi-Function Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Multi-Function Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Multi-Function Photocoupler Outputs (P1-C1, P2-C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 11
Source page
Page 12
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 12 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Monitor Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455 E.3 User Setting Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Index .............................................................................................................................460
Revision History .............................................................................................................471
12 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 13
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 13 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Preface & General Safety
This section provides safety messages pertinent to this product that, if not heeded, may result in fatality, personal injury, or equipment damage. Yaskawa is not responsible for the consequences of ignoring these instructions.
i.1 PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 i.2 GENERAL SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 13
Source page
Page 14
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 14 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
i.1 Preface
i.1 Preface
Yaskawa manufactures products used as components in a wide variety of industrial systems and equipment. The selection and application of Yaskawa products remain the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer or end user. Yaskawa accepts no responsibility for the way its products are incorporated into the final system design. Under no circumstances should any Yaskawa product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety control. Without exception, all controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and fail safely under all circumstances. All systems or equipment designed to incorporate a product manufactured by Yaskawa must be supplied to the end user with appropriate warnings and instructions as to the safe use and operation of that part. Any warnings provided by Yaskawa must be promptly provided to the end user. Yaskawa offers an express warranty only as to the quality of its products in conforming to standards and specifications published in the Yaskawa manual. NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IS OFFERED. Yaskawa assumes no liability for any personal injury, property damage, losses, or claims arising from misapplication of its products. This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable application of L1000A-Series Drives. Read this manual before attempting to install, operate, maintain, or inspect a drive and keep it in a safe, convenient location for future reference. Be sure you understand all precautions and safety information before attempting application.
Applicable Documentation The following manuals are available for L1000A series drives:
L1000A Series AC Drive Quick Start Guide DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALM Read this manual first. This guide is packaged together with the product. It contains basic information required to install and wire R E E S S FC E 1 TRUN SE F TN 2RL TO OEEPR YEG t p h r e e p d a r r iv e e t , h i e n d a r d iv d e it i f o o n r a to t r a i n a l o r v u e n r v w ie it w h o th f e f a a u p l p t l d ic ia a g ti n o o n s a ti n c d s, f m or a i b n a t s e i n c a o n p c e e r , a a t n io d n p . arameter settings. Use the information in this book to C2S/0NI0:MV (cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640) (cid:1640) W (cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640) R RWdpTmnAbpim R HTb 3 n oee i leo o P f e s s ea a i o a t A - wut cp s ep ac ak i h wci tno A tt hr ke e des or a a e R tm 5a s ar c oe e n n sA e m s o lt r up s ne fm d e i gunwof N n fua ea r o 2 er h ri gSaf pn nt e n enrm ha 5 o, i A I puai i c u t 4n d l et t .N cp elaf e o . 5 t 5t0yg e t e 0 e o e le d D c k .0 o gs mr Gb t s r rs W0 t Vfh or ir u r o e v fd oi e o wn i r 2 r f e n cic / u f o m sr u 3 r a m il o n ra 1 c aer t c . s citi e edo ns 7 ann q a e F t h s sn gndg u o k ipt s n .h on u i u W b A a t rm s m ee hae c c e ct c e a h lom A i f k a s t o ts l . o tu y il. d oer ni w rnperrng ii, gp vttcs.l e yh, . (cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640) (cid:1640) (cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640) A (cid:3522) LAdlPaàAepuc R SDd(cid:5994)(cid:12642)(cid:1996) (cid:14110)(cid:2071)(cid:11781) (cid:2061)4(cid:2000)(cid:2875)(cid:12708) a â 0 i ns na e e top e r V u l (cid:2052)(cid:2055)(cid:13594)(cid:1987) (cid:2150)(cid:4702)(cid:6335)(cid:4374) it 0(cid:7671) (cid:1991) d b sa e ett v seur (cid:1939)sri l V r uèé lee ' (cid:2021) (cid:2000)(cid:2017) (cid:2587)(cid:2691) (cid:2115)(cid:2158)(cid:5343) es nrqa a E t f l o (cid:7496)(cid:9878)(cid:14810) rs ec nn e u a dl g r (cid:1983) (cid:1989)(cid:2021)(cid:1983) e 5(cid:1996) (cid:2159)(cid:8016) u pl i h éti r (cid:2071) e (cid:13502) m s (cid:3261)(cid:5607) r a R erc (cid:5621) mreér (cid:2018) e (cid:1983)(cid:2051)(cid:2054) ae (cid:1940) (cid:2098)(cid:6924) p ev (cid:2150) cree qrd e (cid:5337) r d ao (cid:1994) ao, (cid:13594)(cid:2640)(cid:2030)(cid:1998) T (cid:12679)(cid:1940)(cid:2564) 5 h g t u5r nd s (cid:2115) u nn (cid:2014) tiip a e (cid:2011) c erv t (cid:1941)(cid:13594)(cid:2019) i (cid:12841)(cid:12457) (cid:12785) m e (cid:2025) ud I om a o (cid:2159) uv (cid:2017) oeC d S (cid:2000) edr (cid:7726)(cid:2025) (cid:1940)(cid:2061) nl (cid:10018) t ua i dtreei (cid:1989)(cid:2098) ié nd (cid:4723) le én o h r (cid:1983) r .(cid:3304)(cid:9173)(cid:12708) (cid:2580) (cid:2061) d e S c u a i s sun (cid:2025) néa (cid:6345) la (cid:2008)Naeot (cid:1941) at (cid:2022)(cid:11898)(cid:6335) (cid:2981) v (cid:11541) te,u ce td c (cid:4240) e nlu (cid:2002) M e a eeu (cid:2055) p m xs (cid:2026)(cid:2004)(cid:5343) (cid:13657) so (cid:1985) u h sn n u (cid:3623) d to (cid:2017) é P n rme (cid:5381) oé a 5(cid:2054)(cid:2026) (cid:1991) a (cid:4240) t rba uer E e (cid:2026) d .a (cid:3261)(cid:1994) x nc pi l o r v (cid:2005) o r (cid:1998)(cid:14110) e (cid:3623) 'e s i s(cid:1981) t i ts (cid:1940) g r ag (cid:2703)(cid:2011) i n et N a pè t n (cid:3586)(cid:2019)(cid:7671) eo (cid:2026) 4 iie t es (cid:13594) g (cid:2053) e en (cid:3165)(cid:2000) ss o lui0 (cid:5842) nt (cid:1941)(cid:2022) at (cid:1940) T e r r a u a (cid:7726) r (cid:2026) 0 (cid:1983) l d mé (cid:2041) c ra , (cid:11921) t (cid:10)(cid:2021) P (cid:3252) c l peo Ve ’el (cid:2025)(cid:2)(cid:2120) l (cid:1941) ve a h er (cid:2004)e e l (cid:6399) c u N (cid:2053)(cid:2) u (cid:3356) s.ioef t e (cid:2587) té (cid:2)(cid:2144) o u f Pirct (cid:6560) tu (cid:2041) o (cid:2)(cid:1941) e (cid:2981) d r rs u v e J (cid:5448)(cid:2)(cid:2150) . et i n ce . T (cid:2061) (cid:2004) el (cid:4795) rp c (cid:13375) l t (cid:8016) .3 , (cid:2107) e i n t u u (cid:11922) q (cid:1941) 1 (cid:5397) i (cid:13373) szo t (cid:1991) r e (cid:2078) 4ue (cid:2043)(cid:14805)(cid:3962) n 7 r (cid:6034)(cid:2115) 0e (cid:1998)(cid:2061) - (cid:4094) 1 (cid:2159) . (cid:2019)(cid:1941) L Th 1 i 0 s 0 m 0A an S u e a r l i e p s r o A v C id D es r i d v e e t a T i e le c d h n in ic fo al r m M a a t n io u n a l o ( n t h p i a s r b am oo e k t ) er settings, drive functions, and MEMOBUS/Modbus specifications. Use this manual to expand drive functionality and to take advantage of higher performance features. Symbols Note: Indicates a supplement or precaution that does not cause drive damage. TERMS Indicates a term or definition used in this manual. Terms and Abbreviations • Drive: Yaskawa L1000-Series Drive TERMS • BCD: Binary Coded Decimal • H: Hexadecimal Number Format • IGBT: Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor • kbps: Kilobits per Second • MAC: Media Access Control • Mbps: Megabits per Second • PG: Pulse Generator • r/min: Revolutions per Minute • V/f: V/f Control • OLV: Open Loop Vector Control • CLV: Closed Loop Vector Control • CLV/PM: Closed Loop Vector Control for PM • PM motor: Permanent Magnet Synchronous motor (an abbreviation for IPM motor or SPM motor) • IPM motor: Interior Permanent Magnet Motor (e.g., Yaskawa SSR1 Series and SST4 Series motors) • SPM motor: Surface mounted Permanent Magnet Motor (e.g., Yaskawa SMRA Series motors) Trademarks • EnDat is a trademark of Heidenhain Corporation. • HIPERFACE is a trademark of SICK STEGMANN GmbH & Co., KG. • CANopen is a trademark of CAN in Automation (CiA). • Other companies and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks of those companies. 14 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALM ES F C 1 F2 RLOE YEG RESETRUN SETNTOEPR C2S/0NI0:MV (cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640) (cid:1640) W (cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640) R RWdpTmnAbpim R HTb 3 n oee i l eo o P f e s s ea a i o a t A - wut cp s ep ac ak i h wci tno A t t h r ke e d es or a a e R tm 5 a s ar c oe e n n sA e m s o lt r u p s ne fm d e i gunw of N n fua ea r o 2 er h ri gS af pn nt e n en rm ha 5 o , i A I pua i i c u t 4n d l et t .N cp elaf e o . 5 t 5 t0yg e t e 0 e o e le d D c k .0 o gs mr Gb t s r rs W0 t Vfh or ir u r o e v fd oi e o wn i r 2 r f e n cic / u f o m sr u 3 r a m i l o n r a 1 c aer t c . s cit i e edo n s 7 ann q a e F t h s sn gndg u o k ipt s n .h on u i u W b A a t rm s m ee hae c c e ct c e a h lom A i f k a s t o t s l . o tu y il. d oe r ni w rn perrng ii, g p vttcs. l e yh, . (cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640) (cid:1640) (cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640) A (cid:3522) LAdlPaàAepuc R SDd (cid:5994)(cid:12642)(cid:1996) (cid:14110)(cid:2071)(cid:11781) (cid:2061)4(cid:2000)(cid:2875)(cid:12708) a â 0 i n s na e e top e r V u l (cid:2052) (cid:2055)(cid:13594)(cid:1987) (cid:2150)(cid:4702)(cid:6335)(cid:4374) it 0(cid:7671) (cid:1991) d b sa e ett v seur (cid:1939)s ri l V r uèé le e ' (cid:2021) (cid:2000)(cid:2017) (cid:2587)(cid:2691) (cid:2115)(cid:2158)(cid:5343) e s nr qa a E t f l o (cid:7496)(cid:9878)(cid:14810) rs ec n n e u a dl g r (cid:1983) (cid:1989)(cid:2021)(cid:1983) e 5 (cid:1996) (cid:2159)(cid:8016) u pl i h é t i r (cid:2071) e (cid:13502) m s (cid:3261)(cid:5607) r a R erc (cid:5621) m reér (cid:2018) e (cid:1983)(cid:2051)(cid:2054) ae (cid:1940) (cid:2098)(cid:6924) p ev (cid:2150) c ree q rd e (cid:5337) r d ao (cid:1994) ao, (cid:13594)(cid:2640)(cid:2030)(cid:1998) T (cid:12679) (cid:1940)(cid:2564) 5 h g t u5r nd s (cid:2115) u nn (cid:2014) tiip a e (cid:2011) c erv t (cid:1941)(cid:13594)(cid:2019) i (cid:12841) (cid:12457) (cid:12785) m e (cid:2025) ud I om a o (cid:2159) uv (cid:2017) o eC d S (cid:2000) edr (cid:7726)(cid:2025) (cid:1940)(cid:2061) n l (cid:10018) t u a i dt ree i (cid:1989)(cid:2098) i é nd (cid:4723) le é n o h r (cid:1983) r . (cid:3304)(cid:9173)(cid:12708) (cid:2580) (cid:2061) d e S c u a i s s un (cid:2025) né a (cid:6345) l a (cid:2008)Naeot (cid:1941) a t (cid:2022)(cid:11898)(cid:6335) (cid:2981) v (cid:11541) te,u ce td c (cid:4240) e nlu (cid:2002) M e a eeu (cid:2055) p m xs (cid:2026)(cid:2004)(cid:5343) (cid:13657) so (cid:1985) u h sn n u (cid:3623) d to (cid:2017) é P n rme (cid:5381) oé a 5(cid:2054)(cid:2026) (cid:1991) a (cid:4240) t rb a uer E e (cid:2026) d .a (cid:3261) (cid:1994) x nc p i l o r v (cid:2005) o r (cid:1998)(cid:14110) e (cid:3623) 'e s i s(cid:1981) t i t s (cid:1940) g r a g (cid:2703) (cid:2011) i n et N a pè t n (cid:3586)(cid:2019)(cid:7671) eo (cid:2026) 4 i i e t es (cid:13594) g (cid:2053) e e n (cid:3165) (cid:2000) ss o lui0 (cid:5842) nt (cid:1941)(cid:2022) at (cid:1940) T e r r a u a (cid:7726) r (cid:2026) 0 (cid:1983) l d mé (cid:2041) c ra , (cid:11921) t (cid:10)(cid:2021) P (cid:3252) c l pe o Ve ’ el (cid:2025)(cid:2)(cid:2120) l (cid:1941) ve a h e r (cid:2004) e e l (cid:6399) c u N (cid:2053)(cid:2) u (cid:3356) s.ioef t e (cid:2587) té (cid:2)(cid:2144) o u f Pir ct (cid:6560) tu (cid:2041) o (cid:2) (cid:1941) e (cid:2981) d r rs u v e J (cid:5448)(cid:2)(cid:2150) . et i n ce . T (cid:2061) (cid:2004) e l (cid:4795) rp c (cid:13375) l t (cid:8016) .3 , (cid:2107) e i n t u u (cid:11922) q (cid:1941) 1 (cid:5397) i (cid:13373) szo t (cid:1991) r e (cid:2078) 4ue (cid:2043)(cid:14805)(cid:3962) n 7 r (cid:6034)(cid:2115) 0e (cid:1998) (cid:2061) - (cid:4094) 1 (cid:2159) . (cid:2019)(cid:1941) | L1000A Series AC Drive Quick Start Guide |
|---|---|
| Read this manual first. This guide is packaged together with the product. It contains basic information required to install and wire the drive, in addition to an overview of fault diagnostics, maintenance, and parameter settings. Use the information in this book to prepare the drive for a trial run with the application and for basic operation. | |
| L1000A Series AC Drive Technical Manual (this book) | |
| This manual provides detailed information on parameter settings, drive functions, and MEMOBUS/Modbus specifications. Use this manual to expand drive functionality and to take advantage of higher performance features. |
| Column | Column | DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALM ES F C 1 F2 RLOE RESETRUN SETNTOEPR |
|---|---|---|
| C2S/0NI0:MV (cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640) (cid:1640) W (cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640) R RWdpTmnAbpim R HTb 3 n oee i l eo o P f e s s ea a i o a t A - wut cp s ep ac ak i h wci tno A t t h r ke e d es or a a e R tm 5 a s ar c oe e n n sA e m s o lt r u p s ne fm d e i gunw of N n fua ea r o 2 er h ri gS af pn nt e n en rm ha 5 o , i A I pua i i c u t 4n d l et t .N cp elaf e o . 5 t 5 t0yg e t e 0 e o e le d D c k .0 o gs mr Gb t s r rs W0 t Vfh or ir u r o e v fd oi e o wn i r 2 r f e n cic / u f o m sr u 3 r a m i l o n r a 1 c aer t c . s cit i e edo n s 7 ann q a e F t h s sn gndg u o k ipt s n .h on u i u W b A a t rm s m ee hae c c e ct c e a h lom A i f k a s t o t s l . o tu y il. d oe r ni w rn perrng ii, g p vttcs. l e yh, . (cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640) (cid:1640) (cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640) A (cid:3522) LAdlPaàAepuc R SDd (cid:5994)(cid:12642)(cid:1996) (cid:14110)(cid:2071)(cid:11781) (cid:2061)4(cid:2000)(cid:2875)(cid:12708) a â 0 i n s na e e top e r V u l (cid:2052) (cid:2055)(cid:13594)(cid:1987) (cid:2150)(cid:4702)(cid:6335)(cid:4374) it 0(cid:7671) (cid:1991) d b sa e ett v seur (cid:1939)s ri l V r uèé le e ' (cid:2021) (cid:2000)(cid:2017) (cid:2587)(cid:2691) (cid:2115)(cid:2158)(cid:5343) e s nr qa a E t f l o (cid:7496)(cid:9878)(cid:14810) rs ec n n e u a dl g r (cid:1983) (cid:1989)(cid:2021)(cid:1983) e 5 (cid:1996) (cid:2159)(cid:8016) u pl i h é t i r (cid:2071) e (cid:13502) m s (cid:3261)(cid:5607) r a R erc (cid:5621) m reér (cid:2018) e (cid:1983)(cid:2051)(cid:2054) ae (cid:1940) (cid:2098)(cid:6924) p ev (cid:2150) c ree q rd e (cid:5337) r d ao (cid:1994) ao, (cid:13594)(cid:2640)(cid:2030)(cid:1998) T (cid:12679) (cid:1940)(cid:2564) 5 h g t u5r nd s (cid:2115) u nn (cid:2014) tiip a e (cid:2011) c erv t (cid:1941)(cid:13594)(cid:2019) i (cid:12841) (cid:12457) (cid:12785) m e (cid:2025) ud I om a o (cid:2159) uv (cid:2017) o eC d S (cid:2000) edr (cid:7726)(cid:2025) (cid:1940)(cid:2061) n l (cid:10018) t u a i dt ree i (cid:1989)(cid:2098) i é nd (cid:4723) le é n o h r (cid:1983) r . (cid:3304)(cid:9173)(cid:12708) (cid:2580) (cid:2061) d e S c u a i s s un (cid:2025) né a (cid:6345) l a (cid:2008)Naeot (cid:1941) a t (cid:2022)(cid:11898)(cid:6335) (cid:2981) v (cid:11541) te,u ce td c (cid:4240) e nlu (cid:2002) M e a eeu (cid:2055) p m xs (cid:2026)(cid:2004)(cid:5343) (cid:13657) so (cid:1985) u h sn n u (cid:3623) d to (cid:2017) é P n rme (cid:5381) oé a 5(cid:2054)(cid:2026) (cid:1991) a (cid:4240) t rb a uer E e (cid:2026) d .a (cid:3261) (cid:1994) x nc p i l o r v (cid:2005) o r (cid:1998)(cid:14110) e (cid:3623) 'e s i s(cid:1981) t i t s (cid:1940) g r a g (cid:2703) (cid:2011) i n et N a pè t n (cid:3586)(cid:2019)(cid:7671) eo (cid:2026) 4 i i e t es (cid:13594) g (cid:2053) e e n (cid:3165) (cid:2000) ss o lui0 (cid:5842) nt (cid:1941)(cid:2022) at (cid:1940) T e r r a u a (cid:7726) r (cid:2026) 0 (cid:1983) l d mé (cid:2041) c ra , (cid:11921) t (cid:10)(cid:2021) P (cid:3252) c l pe o Ve ’ el (cid:2025)(cid:2)(cid:2120) l (cid:1941) ve a h e r (cid:2004) e e l (cid:6399) c u N (cid:2053)(cid:2) u (cid:3356) s.ioef t e (cid:2587) té (cid:2)(cid:2144) o u f Pir ct (cid:6560) tu (cid:2041) o (cid:2) (cid:1941) e (cid:2981) d r rs u v e J (cid:5448)(cid:2)(cid:2150) . et i n ce . T (cid:2061) e l rp c l | C2S/0NI0:MV (cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640) (cid:1640) W (cid:1640)(cid:1640) R RWdpTmnAbpim R HTb 3 n oee i l eo o P f e s s ea a i o a t A - wut cp s ep ac ak i h wci tno A t t h r ke e d es or a a e R tm 5 a s ar c oe e n n sA e m s o lt r u p s ne fm d e i gunw of N n fua ea r o 2 er h ri gS af pn nt e n en rm ha 5 o , i A I pua i i c u t 4n d l et t .N cp elaf e o . 5 t 5 t0yg e t e 0 e o e le d D c k .0 o gs mr Gb t s r rs W0 t Vfh or ir u r o e v fd oi e o wn i r 2 r f e n cic / u f o m sr u 3 r a m i l o n r a 1 c aer t c . s cit i e edo n s 7 ann q a e F t h s sn gndg u o k ipt s n .h on u i u W b A a t rm s m ee hae c c e ct c e a h lom A i f k a s t o t s l . o tu y il. d oe r ni w rn perrng ii, g p vttcs. l e yh, . (cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640) (cid:1640) (cid:1640)(cid:1640)(cid:1640) A (cid:3522) LAdlPaàAepuc R SDd (cid:5994)(cid:12642)(cid:1996)(cid:2061)4 a â 0 i n s na e e top e r V u l (cid:13594)(cid:1987)(cid:4374) it 0(cid:1991) d b sa e ett v seur (cid:1939)s ri l V r uèé le e ' (cid:2000) (cid:2587)(cid:2691) e s nr qa a E t f l o (cid:9878)(cid:14810) rs ec n n e u a dl g r (cid:1989)(cid:2021) e (cid:1996) u pl i h é t i r (cid:2071) e (cid:13502) m s r a R erc (cid:5621) m reér e (cid:1983)(cid:2051) ae (cid:1940) p ev (cid:2150) c ree q rd er d ao ao, (cid:13594)(cid:2640)(cid:2030) T (cid:12679) 5 h g t u5r nd s (cid:2115) u nn tiip a e c erv t (cid:1941)(cid:13594) i (cid:12457) m e (cid:2025) ud I om a o (cid:2159) uv o eC d Sedr (cid:7726)(cid:2025) n lt u a i dt ree i (cid:1989)(cid:2098) i é ndle é n o h r r . (cid:3304)(cid:12708) d e S c u a i s s un (cid:2025) né al a (cid:2008)Naeota t (cid:2022)(cid:6335) v te,u ce td c (cid:4240) e nlu M e a eeu (cid:2055) p m xs (cid:2026)(cid:5343) so u h sn n u (cid:3623) d toé P n rme (cid:5381) oé a 5(cid:1991) at rb a uer E e (cid:2026) d .a (cid:3261) x nc p i l o r v (cid:2005) o re 'e s i s(cid:1981) t i t s (cid:1940) g r a g (cid:2703) i n et N a pè t n (cid:3586) eo4 i i e t es (cid:13594) g (cid:2053) e e n (cid:3165) ss o lui0 (cid:5842) nt at T e r r a u a (cid:7726) r (cid:2026) 0 l d mé (cid:2041) c ra , (cid:11921) t Pc l pe o Ve ’ el (cid:2025)(cid:2120) l ve a h e r (cid:2004) e e l (cid:6399) c u N us.ioef t e (cid:2587) té (cid:2144) o u f Pir ct (cid:6560) tu o (cid:1941) ed r rs u v e J (cid:5448)(cid:2150) . et i n ce . T (cid:2061) e l rp c l |
Source page
Page 15
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 15 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
i.2 General Safety
i.2 General Safety
Supplemental Safety Information
General Precautions • The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details. Replace the covers or shields before operating the drive and run the drive according to the instructions described in this manual. • Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only and may not apply to all products to which this manual is applicable. • The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the manual may be changed without notice to improve the product and/ or the manual. • When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual number shown on the front cover. • If nameplate becomes worn or damaged, order a replacement from your Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office. WA RNING Read and understand this manual before installing, operating or servicing this drive. The drive must be installed according to this manual and local codes. The following conventions are used to indicate safety messages in this manual. Failure to heed these messages could result in serious or fatal injury or damage to the products or to related equipment and systems.
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WA RNING Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE Indicates a property damage message.
NOTICE: may also be indicated by a bold key word embedded in the text followed by an italicized safety message.
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 15
| General Precautions |
|---|
| • The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details. Replace the covers or shields before operating the drive and run the drive according to the instructions described in this manual. • Any illustrations, photographs, or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only and may not apply to all products to which this manual is applicable. • The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the manual may be changed without notice to improve the product and/ or the manual. • When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss, contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual number shown on the front cover. • If nameplate becomes worn or damaged, order a replacement from your Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office. |
| WA RNING |
|---|
| Read and understand this manual before installing, operating or servicing this drive. The drive must be installed according to this manual and local codes. The following conventions are used to indicate safety messages in this manual. Failure to heed these messages could result in serious or fatal injury or damage to the products or to related equipment and systems. |
| DANGER |
|---|
| Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. |
| WA RNING |
|---|
| Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. |
| CAUTION |
|---|
| Indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. |
| NOTICE |
|---|
| Indicates a property damage message. |
Source page
Page 16
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 16 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
i.2 General Safety
Safety Messages
Heed the safety messages in this manual. Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual.
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not connect or disconnect wiring or service the drive while the power is on. Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before touching any components.
WA RNING Sudden Movement Hazard
The drive system or elevator may start unexpectedly upon application of power, resulting in death or serious injury. • Clear all personnel from the drive, motor, and machine area before applying power. • Secure covers, couplings, shaft keys, and machine loads before applying power to the drive. Ensure there are no short circuits between the main circuit terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) or between the ground and main circuit terminals before restarting the drive.
Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death and will cause damage to equipment. System may start unexpectedly upon application of power when the Auto-restart function is enabled resulting in death or serious injury. Use care when enabling Auto-restart as this function may cause unintended start of the elevator.
Use parameter S1-12 to enable/disable automatic switching of the Motor Contactor Control output signal during Auto-Tuning. When using setting S1-12 = 1 or 2, ensure that the multi-function output terminals are properly wired and in the correct state before setting parameter S1-12. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive, serious injury or death.
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not attempt to modify or alter the drive in any way not explained in this manual. Yaskawa is not responsible for damage caused by modification of the product made by the user. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from operation of damaged equipment. Do not operate equipment with covers removed.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual.
16 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| DANGER |
|---|
| Heed the safety messages in this manual. Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual. Electrical Shock Hazard Do not connect or disconnect wiring or service the drive while the power is on. Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before touching any components. |
| WA RNING |
|---|
| Sudden Movement Hazard The drive system or elevator may start unexpectedly upon application of power, resulting in death or serious injury. • Clear all personnel from the drive, motor, and machine area before applying power. • Secure covers, couplings, shaft keys, and machine loads before applying power to the drive. Ensure there are no short circuits between the main circuit terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) or between the ground and main circuit terminals before restarting the drive. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death and will cause damage to equipment. System may start unexpectedly upon application of power when the Auto-restart function is enabled resulting in death or serious injury. Use care when enabling Auto-restart as this function may cause unintended start of the elevator. Use parameter S1-12 to enable/disable automatic switching of the Motor Contactor Control output signal during Auto-Tuning. When using setting S1-12 = 1 or 2, ensure that the multi-function output terminals are properly wired and in the correct state before setting parameter S1-12. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive, serious injury or death. Electrical Shock Hazard Do not attempt to modify or alter the drive in any way not explained in this manual. Yaskawa is not responsible for damage caused by modification of the product made by the user. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from operation of damaged equipment. Do not operate equipment with covers removed. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual. |
Source page
Page 17
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 17 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
i.2 General Safety
If the motor is coasting, make sure the power to the drive is turned on and the drive output has completely stopped before closing the load switch. Do not connect or disconnect wiring to the drive or motor while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level. Do not operate equipment with covers removed. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual. Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing, and wear eye protection before beginning work on the drive. Do not change wiring, remove covers, connectors or options cards, or attempt to service the drive with power applied to the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all power to the drive and check for unsafe voltages before servicing.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the equipment. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives.
Fire Hazard Drive Short-Circuit Current Rating
Install adequate branch circuit protection according to applicable local codes and this Installation Manual. Failure to comply could result in fire and damage to the drive or injury to personnel. The device is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200 V class) and 480 Vac maximum (400 V class), and 600 Vac maximum (600 V class) when protected by branch circuit protection devices specified in this manual.
Applications using a braking option should wire a thermal relay so that the output contactor opens when the thermal relay trips. Inadequate braking circuit protection could result in death or serious injury by fire from overheating resistors.
Do not use improper combustible materials. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire. Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible material.
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 17
| WA RNING |
|---|
| When a drive is running a PM motor, voltage continues to be generated at the motor terminals after the drive is shut off while the motor coasts to stop. Take the precautions described below to prevent shock and injury: • In applications where the machine can still rotate even though the drive has fully stopped a load, install a switch to the drive output side to disconnect the motor and the drive. • Do not allow an external force to rotate the motor beyond the maximum allowable speed or to rotate the motor when the drive has been shut off. • Wait for at least the time specified on the warning label after opening the load switch on the output side before inspecting the drive or performing any maintenance. • Do not open and close the load switch while the motor is running, as this can damage the drive. If the motor is coasting, make sure the power to the drive is turned on and the drive output has completely stopped before closing the load switch. Do not connect or disconnect wiring to the drive or motor while the power is on. Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level. Do not operate equipment with covers removed. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual. Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing, and wear eye protection before beginning work on the drive. Do not change wiring, remove covers, connectors or options cards, or attempt to service the drive with power applied to the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all power to the drive and check for unsafe voltages before servicing. Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the equipment. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives. Fire Hazard Drive Short-Circuit Current Rating Install adequate branch circuit protection according to applicable local codes and this Installation Manual. Failure to comply could result in fire and damage to the drive or injury to personnel. The device is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200 V class) and 480 Vac maximum (400 V class), and 600 Vac maximum (600 V class) when protected by branch circuit protection devices specified in this manual. Applications using a braking option should wire a thermal relay so that the output contactor opens when the thermal relay trips. Inadequate braking circuit protection could result in death or serious injury by fire from overheating resistors. Do not use improper combustible materials. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire. Attach the drive to metal or other noncombustible material. |
Source page
Page 18
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 18 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
i.2 General Safety
NOTICE Equipment Hazard
Do not modify the drive circuitry. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty.
Yaskawa is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking circuit. Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive, circuit boards, and option cards.
Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry. If a fuse is blown or equipment for residual current monitoring/detection (RCM/RCD) is tripped, check the wiring and the selection of the peripheral devices. Check for short circuits or ground faults on the secondary side of fuses and equipment for residual current monitoring/ detection (RCM/RCD), and check the wiring and the selection of peripheral devices. Remove the cause of the problem and then turn the power supply on again. If the cause cannot be identified, do not turn on the power supply or attempt to operate the equipment.
Do not restart the drive or immediately operate the peripheral devices if a fuse is blown or equipment for residual current monitoring/detection (RCM/RCD) is tripped. Check the wiring and the selection of peripheral devices to identify the cause. Contact your supplier before restarting the drive or the peripheral devices if the cause cannot be identified.
Do not operate damaged equipment. Failure to comply could result in further damage to the equipment. Do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts.
Do not lift the drive up while the cover is removed. This can damage the terminal board and other components. Do not expose the drive to halogen group disinfectants.
Failure to comply may cause damage to the electrical components in the drive. Do not pack the drive in wooden materials that have been fumigated or sterilized. Do not sterilize the entire package after the product is packed.
18 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| NOTICE |
|---|
| Equipment Hazard Do not modify the drive circuitry. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking circuit. Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive, circuit boards, and option cards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry. If a fuse is blown or equipment for residual current monitoring/detection (RCM/RCD) is tripped, check the wiring and the selection of the peripheral devices. Check for short circuits or ground faults on the secondary side of fuses and equipment for residual current monitoring/ detection (RCM/RCD), and check the wiring and the selection of peripheral devices. Remove the cause of the problem and then turn the power supply on again. If the cause cannot be identified, do not turn on the power supply or attempt to operate the equipment. Do not restart the drive or immediately operate the peripheral devices if a fuse is blown or equipment for residual current monitoring/detection (RCM/RCD) is tripped. Check the wiring and the selection of peripheral devices to identify the cause. Contact your supplier before restarting the drive or the peripheral devices if the cause cannot be identified. Do not operate damaged equipment. Failure to comply could result in further damage to the equipment. Do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts. Do not lift the drive up while the cover is removed. This can damage the terminal board and other components. Do not expose the drive to halogen group disinfectants. Failure to comply may cause damage to the electrical components in the drive. Do not pack the drive in wooden materials that have been fumigated or sterilized. Do not sterilize the entire package after the product is packed. |
Source page
Page 19
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 19 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
i.2 General Safety
General Application Precautions
Motor Selection Drive Capacity
The output current should not exceed 150% of the drive rated current. Select a drive that can output enough current when accelerating a load at 100%. For specialized motors, make sure that the motor rated current is less than the rated output current for the drive.
Starting Torque The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted to the drive's overload current rating (150% rated current for 60 s). The overload rating for the drive determines the starting and accelerating characteristics of the motor. Expect lower torque than when running from line power. To get more starting torque, use a larger drive or increase both the motor and drive capacity.
Stopping Emergency Stop When the drive faults out, a protective circuit is activated and drive output is shut off. This, however, does not stop the motor immediately. A mechanical brake may be required to stop the motor if Emergency Stop deceleration is insufficient.
Mechanical Brake A mechanical brake is required to prevent the elevator from free falling during a drive fault condition.
Repetitive Starting/Stopping Elevators and other applications with frequent starts and stops often approach 150% of their rated current values. Heat stress generated from repetitive high current will shorten the life span of the IGBTs. The expected lifetime for the IGBTs is about 3 million start and stop cycles with a default carrier frequency of 2 kH z (CIMR-L20346, 20415 to 40216), 5 kHz (CIMR-L40112 to 40216), or 8 kHz (CIMR-L20008 to 20115, 40005 to 40091) and a 150% peak current. Yaskawa recommends lowering the carrier frequency, particularly when audible noise is not a concern. It is beneficial to reduce the load, increase the acceleration and deceleration times, or switch to a larger drive to help keep peak current levels under 150%. Be sure to check the peak current levels when starting and stopping repeatedly during the initial test run, and make adjustments accordingly.
Installation Enclosure Panels Keep the drive in a clean environment by installing the drive in an enclosure panel or selecting an installation area free of airborne dust, lint, and oil mist. Be sure to leave the required space between drives to provide for cooling, and take proper measures so the ambient temperature remains within allowable limits and keep flammable materials away from the drive. Yaskawa offers protective designs for drives that must be used in areas subjected to oil mist and excessive vibration. Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent for details.
Installation Direction NOTICE: Install the drive upright as specified in the manual. Refer to Mechanical Installation on page 37 for more information on installation. Failure to comply may damage the drive due to improper cooling. Settings
DC Injection Braking NOTICE: Excessive current during DC Injection Braking and excessive duration of DC Injection Braking can cause motor overheating. Adjust DC Injection parameters to prevent motor overheating.
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 19
Source page
Page 20
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 20 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
i.2 General Safety
Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp
Acceleration and deceleration times are affected by the amount of torque generated by the motor, the load torque, and the inertia moment. Set a longer accel/decel time when Stall Prevention is enabled. The accel/decel times are lengthened for as long as the Stall Prevention function is in operation. Install one of the available braking options or increase the capacity of the drive for faster acceleration and deceleration. General Handling
Selecting a Molded Case Circuit Breaker or RCD/RCM Devices Where an RCD (residual current device) or RCM (residual current monitor) at the drive power supply side is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, only an RCD or RCM of type B according to IEC/EN 60755 is allowed. Select a MCCB (Molded Case Circuit Breaker) or RCD/RCM with a rated current that is 1.5 to 2 times higher than the rated current of the drive in order to avoid nuisance trips caused by harmonics in the drive input current. Also refer to Installing a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) on page 336.
Transporting the Drive NOTICE: Never steam clean the drive. During transport, keep the drive from coming into contact with salts, fluorine, bromine, phthalate ester, and other such harmful chemicals. Failure to comply may damage the drive.
20 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 21
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 21 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
i.2 General Safety
Motor Application Precautions
Standard Induction Motors Insulation Tolerance
NOTICE: Consider motor voltage tolerance levels and motor insulation in applications with an input voltage of over 440 V or particularly long wiring distances. NOTICE: Ensure that the motor is suitable for inverter duty and/or the motor service factor is adequate to accommodate the additional heating with the intended operating conditions. A motor connected to a PWM drive may operate at a higher temperature than a utility-fed motor and the operating speed range may reduce motor cooling capacity. High-Speed Operation NOTICE: Mechanical damage may occur with the motor bearings and dynamic balance of the machine when operating a motor beyond its rated speed. Operate the motor within specifications to prevent motor damage. Low-Speed Range The cooling fan of a standard motor should sufficiently cool the motor at the rated speed. As the self-cooling capability of such a motor reduces with the speed, applying full torque at low speed will possibly damage the motor. Reduce the load torque as the motor slows to prevent motor damage from overheat. Use a motor designed specifically for operation with a drive when 100% continuous torque is needed at low speeds.
Torque Characteristics Torque characteristics differ compared to operating the motor directly from line power. The user should have a full understanding of the load torque characteristics for the application.
Vibration and Shock The drive allows selection of high carrier PWM control and low carrier PWM control. Selecting high carrier PWM can help reduce motor oscillation. If resonance occurs, install shock-absorbing rubber mounts around the base of the motor and utilize the Jump frequency selection to prevent continuous operation in the resonant frequency ranges.
Audible Noise Noise created during run varies by the carrier frequency setting. When using a high carrier frequency, audible noise from the motor is comparable to the motor noise generated when running from line power. Operating above the rated r/min, however, can create unpleasant motor noise.
Precautions for PM Motors NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Improper sequencing of output motor circuits could result in damage to the drive. Do not connect electromagnetic switches or magnetic contactors to the output motor circuits without proper sequencing. Do not open the main circuit between the drive and the motor while the PM motor is rotating. • Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent if you plan to use any PM motor not endorsed by Yaskawa. • When using a holding brake, release the brake prior to starting the motor. Failure to set the proper timing can result in speed loss.
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 21
Source page
Page 22
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 22 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
i.2 General Safety
Drive Label Warnings
| DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALM F1 F2 ESC RLOE RESET ENTER RUN STOP |
|---|
| C2S/0N I0: MV R3P-hAasAe2 5A.50k0W2/31.7FkWAA ●● ● ● ● W ●●● ● RWdpTmnAbpim R HTb nl e io ee o o f e e s s a a i o a t A c w ut p s e ac pa k i w c i tn o t t h r kd e e e s or a e R t m 5 a s a eo r c e n n m e s o l r tu p n e sf m d i u g wn of N n f u a e a r o r e h r i ag Sf p n nt e n en rm h ao i , I p ua i i c u t 4 n d l e t t N c p e e l af o . t 5 t0 y g e t e o ee le d D c . 0 o g s m r G b t s r r s t V o h fr r i u re ov f d o i e o nw i rn f er c i c u f o m sr u r i o l a m n r aecr at cs i tc i e e d n s oq n an a et h s s g nu o g nd ip t s n .h o ni u u b a r t s m e mh ee c a c e ct e h acm lo i f k s a t o t . s lo t u y li . d e or in w rn e p r n r g i i g , p v t t s c . l e y, h . ●● ● ● ● ●●●● ● A 危 LAdlPaàAepuc R SDd 据通け 高イ触 を4さ保遮 a â 0 e s a e i nn o t p e r V u l ら え れ 電 ン 守断 外 it 0 が 温 dsa b e t v te s u r e s l ir V r uè 'é el e 付 な さて 中 バ ・後 e s r nq a a E t f l o 級 注 . rs e c e n nu a dlr g け い おない e ー 点5 u pl i hé r t i イ e 険 m s 分意 a r R e rc 感 r m e r é で 、 e いよ る ae 検 タ p ev ン c r 運 ee q dr e 待 r d a o く ,o a 電 事び こ T 、 上 h 5g t u 5r n d s バ 転 u n n っ pii t a e だ c e vr t 。電 と i 配 部 me の u d I mo a o ー の u v て o e C d S さ r e d 源 、 を l 線 n t u a d i t e r e i タ お前 i é nd 実 é n e lo h r い r . 確 遮 両 を e d S c u i a に s n u s の n é a 施 l a そ Na t 。 o e a t 認 断 側 行 v e t ,u は c t e d c 場 e ln u し M e e a e u れ px m s す 後 面 う os u h sn 必 u n 合 d t o て é P n e m ré o a る は 5 場 が a r t b a ず u er E e は d . a 分 く x c n i pl o r vo r こ 高 合 e ' e 取 s i s あ t i s t 、 gr g a 以 だ i n te N a p t èn と 温 は e o4 扱 i e i t es 電 g り e e n 内 さ o ss i ul0n t 。 に 、 ta T e r 説 r a u a 源 r は 0 い d lm é ま cr , a t ( な 出 Pc l pe 明 V o e ’ e l のフ l 。 ev a h e r す e e l c u N り 力 su .i 書 eof t e 中 t é ロ u o f P i rt c ま ut o 側対 。 ed r r を s v u e J 性ン . e t i n ce . T す e l r 開応 p c 読 l t 点 . 3 , ト e i n tu u q 。 1 閉) i む s zo t が e r カ 4ue 器 n こ 7 r |
Source page
Page 23
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 23 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Receiving
This chapter explains how to inspect the drive upon receipt, and gives an overview of the different enclosure types and components.
1.1 SECTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 1.3 MODEL NUMBER AND NAMEPLATE CHECK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 1.4 COMPONENT NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 23
Source page
Page 24
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 24 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
1.1 Section Safety
1.1 Section Safety
Always hold the case when carrying the drive. Carrying the drive by the front cover may cause the main body of the drive to fall, resulting in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
Equipment Hazard
Do not connect electromagnetic switches or magnetic contactors to the output motor circuits without proper sequencing. Improper sequencing of output motor circuits could result in damage to the drive. Do not open the main circuit between the drive and the motor while the PM motor is rotating. Improper sequencing of output motor circuits could result in damage to the drive.
Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry. A motor connected to a PWM drive may operate at a higher temperature than a utility-fed motor and the operating speed range may reduce motor cooling capacity. Ensure that the motor is suitable for drive duty and/or the motor service factor is adequate to accommodate the additional heating with the intended operating conditions.
24 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| CAUTION |
|---|
| Crush Hazard Always hold the case when carrying the drive. Carrying the drive by the front cover may cause the main body of the drive to fall, resulting in minor or moderate injury. |
| NOTICE |
|---|
| Equipment Hazard Do not connect electromagnetic switches or magnetic contactors to the output motor circuits without proper sequencing. Improper sequencing of output motor circuits could result in damage to the drive. Do not open the main circuit between the drive and the motor while the PM motor is rotating. Improper sequencing of output motor circuits could result in damage to the drive. Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry. A motor connected to a PWM drive may operate at a higher temperature than a utility-fed motor and the operating speed range may reduce motor cooling capacity. Ensure that the motor is suitable for drive duty and/or the motor service factor is adequate to accommodate the additional heating with the intended operating conditions. |
Source page
Page 25
1.2 General Description
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 25 gnivieceR SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 25 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 1.2 General Description L1000A Model Overview Table 1.1 L1000A Models Three-Phase 200 V Class Three-Phase 400 V Class Motor Power (kW) Drive Model Rated Ou ( t A pu ) t Current Drive Model Rated Ou ( t A pu ) t Current 1.5 20008 8<1> 40005 4.8<1> 2.2 20011 11<1> 40006 5.5<1> 4.0 20018 17.5<1> 40009 9.2<1> 5.5 20025 25<1> 40015 14.8<1> 7.5 20033 33<1> 40018 18<1> 11 20047 47<1> 40024 24<1> 15 20060 60<1> 40031 31<1> 18.5 20075 75<1> 40039 39<1> 22 20085 85<1> 40045 45<1> 30 20115 115<1> 40060 60<1> 37 20145 145<2> 40075 75<1> 45 20180 180<2> 40091 91<1> 55 20215 215<2> 40112 112<2> 75 20283 283<2> 40150 150<2> 90 20346 346<2> 40180 180<2> 110 20415 415<2> 40216 216<2> <1> These values assume the carrier frequency is not set higher than 8 kHz. <2> These values assume the carrier frequency is not set higher than 5 kHz. Note: The drive automatically decreases the rated output current when setting higher carrier frequency. 1
| Motor Power (kW) | Three-Phase 200 V Class | Column | Three-Phase 400 V Class | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Drive Model | Rated Output Current (A) | Drive Model | Rated Output Current (A) | |
| 1.5 | 20008 | 8<1> | 40005 | 4.8<1> |
| 2.2 | 20011 | 11<1> | 40006 | 5.5<1> |
| 4.0 | 20018 | 17.5<1> | 40009 | 9.2<1> |
| 5.5 | 20025 | 25<1> | 40015 | 14.8<1> |
| 7.5 | 20033 | 33<1> | 40018 | 18<1> |
| 11 | 20047 | 47<1> | 40024 | 24<1> |
| 15 | 20060 | 60<1> | 40031 | 31<1> |
| 18.5 | 20075 | 75<1> | 40039 | 39<1> |
| 22 | 20085 | 85<1> | 40045 | 45<1> |
| 30 | 20115 | 115<1> | 40060 | 60<1> |
| 37 | 20145 | 145<2> | 40075 | 75<1> |
| 45 | 20180 | 180<2> | 40091 | 91<1> |
| 55 | 20215 | 215<2> | 40112 | 112<2> |
| 75 | 20283 | 283<2> | 40150 | 150<2> |
| 90 | 20346 | 346<2> | 40180 | 180<2> |
| 110 | 20415 | 415<2> | 40216 | 216<2> |
Source page
Page 26
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 26 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
1.2 General Description
Control Mode Selection
Table 1.2 gives an overview of the L1000A motor control method (control modes) and their various features.
Table 1.2 Control Modes and their Features Motor Type Induction Motors Ma P g e n rm et a M n o en to t rs Comments Control Mode V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM - Parameter Setting A1-02 = 0 A1-02 = 2 A1-02 = 3 A1-02 = 7 Default Setting is V/f Control.
Basic Description V/f control Open Loop Vector Closed Loop Ve C ct l o o r s e c d o n L tr o o o l p f or - control Vector control PM motors Type of Applications Motor Type IM IM IM PM - PG Option Card N/A N/A YES YES - Speed Control Range 1:40 1:200 1:1500 1:1500 May fluctuate with characteristics and motor temperature. Speed Accuracy ±2 to 3% ±0.2% ±0.02% ±0.02% f S l p u e c e tu d a d te e v w ia it t h io c n h w ar h a e c n te o ri p s e ti r c a s t i a n n g d a m t c o o to n r s t t a e n m t p sp er e a e t d u . r e M . ay Cha C ra o c n t t e r r o i l s tics Speed Response (ap 3 p H ro z x .) 10 Hz 100 Hz<1> 100 Hz<1> M c v a a n a ry x f i . o n f l g r l e o m q w u o . e t T o n h r c e y c h s o p a f r e a a e c d s t p e r e r e i e s s d p ti o c r n e s f s a e e n r m e d n a t c e y e m f s l p i u g e c n r t a a u t l a u t t r h e e a . w t i t t h h e drive Starting Torque 150% at 3 Hz 200% at 0.3 Hz 2 0 0 r 0 / % m i a n t 2 0 0 r 0 / % mi a n t M Pe a r y fo f r l m uc a t n u c a e t e m w a i y t h d i c f h fe a r r a b c y te c r a is p t a ic c s i t a y n . d motor temperature. • Stationary • Stationary • Rotational • Rotational Stator Auto-Tuning Line to line • Stationary • Stationary Resistance Automatically adjusts parameter settings that concern resistance • Line to line • Line to line • Encoder Offset electrical characteristics of the motor. resistance resistance • Rotational Back EMF Constant Sets the maximum torque for the motor to protect the load Torque Limit N/A YES YES YES and connected machinery. Controls the load sharing between two motors that drive Droop Function N/A N/A YES YES the same mechanical system. Energy-Saving N/A N/A N/A YES Saves energy by always operating the motor at its Control maximum efficiency. Application-Specific Improves speed accuracy when the load changes by Inertia Compensation N/A N/A YES YES compensating effects of the system inertia. YES YES DC Injection at Start (DC injection (DC injection YES YES Builds up motor torque during stop in order to prevent and Stop/Position movement of the elevator when the brake is released at Lock braking at start and braking at start and (Position Lock) (Position Lock) start and applied at stop. stop) stop) Torque Avoids rollback at start using the analog signal from an N/A N/A YES YES Compensation external load cell connected to the drive. Prevents roll back at start without any external load Anti Roll Back N/A N/A N/A YES signal. Slip Compensation YES YES N/A N/A Adjusts the leveling speed reference in order to improve the stopping accuracy. Short Floor YES YES YES YES O sp p e t e i d m i i s z e n s o t t h r e e a s c to h p e p d i . ng time at rides where the nominal <1> For drives with B or earlier as the design revision order, 50 Hz is required. The design revision order and software version are printed on the nameplate affixed to the side of the drive. Refer to Model Number on page 28 for details.
26 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Motor Type | Column | Induction Motors | Column | Column | Permanent Magnet Motors | Comments |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Control Mode | V/f | OLV | CLV | CLV/PM | - | |
| Parameter Setting | A1-02 = 0 | A1-02 = 2 | A1-02 = 3 | A1-02 = 7 | Default Setting is V/f Control. | |
| Basic Description | V/f control | Open Loop Vector control | Closed Loop Vector control | Closed Loop Vector control for PM motors | - | |
| Type of Applications | Motor Type | IM | IM | IM | PM | - |
| PG Option Card | N/A | N/A | YES | YES | - | |
| Control Characteristics | Speed Control Range | 1:40 | 1:200 | 1:1500 | 1:1500 | May fluctuate with characteristics and motor temperature. |
| Speed Accuracy | ±2 to 3% | ±0.2% | ±0.02% | ±0.02% | Speed deviation when operating at constant speed. May fluctuate with characteristics and motor temperature. | |
| Speed Response | 3 Hz (approx.) | 10 Hz | 100 Hz<1> | 100 Hz<1> | Max. frequency of a speed reference signal that the drive can follow. The speed response may fluctuate with varying motor characteristics and temperature. | |
| Starting Torque | 150% at 3 Hz | 200% at 0.3 Hz | 200% at 0 r/min | 200% at 0 r/min | May fluctuate with characteristics and motor temperature. Performance may differ by capacity. | |
| Application-Specific | Auto-Tuning | Line to line resistance | • Rotational • Stationary • Line to line resistance | • Rotational • Stationary • Line to line resistance | • Stationary • Stationary Stator Resistance • Encoder Offset • Rotational Back EMF Constant | Automatically adjusts parameter settings that concern electrical characteristics of the motor. |
| Torque Limit | N/A | YES | YES | YES | Sets the maximum torque for the motor to protect the load and connected machinery. | |
| Droop Function | N/A | N/A | YES | YES | Controls the load sharing between two motors that drive the same mechanical system. | |
| Energy-Saving Control | N/A | N/A | N/A | YES | Saves energy by always operating the motor at its maximum efficiency. | |
| Inertia Compensation | N/A | N/A | YES | YES | Improves speed accuracy when the load changes by compensating effects of the system inertia. | |
| DC Injection at Start and Stop/Position Lock | YES (DC injection braking at start and stop) | YES (DC injection braking at start and stop) | YES (Position Lock) | YES (Position Lock) | Builds up motor torque during stop in order to prevent movement of the elevator when the brake is released at start and applied at stop. | |
| Torque Compensation | N/A | N/A | YES | YES | Avoids rollback at start using the analog signal from an external load cell connected to the drive. | |
| Anti Roll Back | N/A | N/A | N/A | YES | Prevents roll back at start without any external load signal. | |
| Slip Compensation | YES | YES | N/A | N/A | Adjusts the leveling speed reference in order to improve the stopping accuracy. | |
| Short Floor | YES | YES | YES | YES | Optimizes the stopping time at rides where the nominal speed is not reached. |
Source page
Page 27
1.3 Model Number and Nameplate Check
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 27 gnivieceR SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 27 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 1.3 Model Number and Nameplate Check Please perform the following tasks after receiving the drive: • Inspect the drive for damage. If the drive appears damaged upon receipt, contact the shipper immediately. • Verify receipt of the correct model by checking the information on the nameplate. • If you have received the wrong model or the drive does not function properly, contact your supplier. Description Drive Cont f r o o r ll e R r e P sc o u w e e r O S p u e p ra p t l i y o n Cable Quick Start Guide YEG Quick Start Guide - Quantity 1 1 1 Nameplate Figure1.1 YEG Design revision order AC drive model MODEL : CIMR-LC4A0009BAA REV : A MAX APPLI. MOTOR : 4kW Normal Duty Amps / I O n u p t u p t u s t p s e p c e if c ic if a ic t a io t n io s ns I O N U P T U P T UT : : A A C C 3 3 P P H H 3 0 8 -4 0 8 -4 0 8 V 0 0 V - 2 5 0 0 0 /6 H 0 z H 9 z . 2 1 A 0.4A 7 IN J D 4 .C 8 ONT.EQ. S H o e f a tw vy a r D e u v ty e r A si m on ps MASS : 3.5 kg PRG : 7010 15 Lot number O / N : FILE NO : E131457 Serial number S / N : IE2 Loss 1.9% PASS IP20 1 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN 2-1 Kurosaki-shiroishi, Yahatanishi-Ku, Kitakyushu 806-0004 Japan <1> <1> The address of the head office of Yaskawa Electric Corporation (responsible for product liability) is shown on the nameplate. Figure 1.1 Nameplate Information
| Description | C Drive | ontroller Power Supply Cable for Rescue Operation | Quick Start Guide |
|---|---|---|---|
| - | YEG | Quick Start Guide | |
| Quantity | 1 | 1 | 1 |
Source page
Page 28
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 28 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
1.3 Model Number and Nameplate Check
Model Number
CIMR - L C 4 A 0009 B A A
Drive L S 1 e 0 ri 0 e 0 s A No. C Sp u e st c o if m ic i a z t e io d ns No. E T nc y l p o e sure D Re e v s i i s g i n o n
No. R C e o g d i e on A S M t o a d n e d l a s r d in m odel B C I I P P 2 2 0 0 < < 1 2 > > Order C Europe compliance with F IEC/EN 61508 SIL3 Safety Integrity Level 3 No. E Sp n e vi c ro ifi n c m at e io n n ta l < 3> A Standard YEG No. Voltage Class 2 3-phase, 200-240 Vac 4 3-phase, 380-480 Vac Refer to Table 1.3. <1> These units fulfill IP20 requirements and provide wire bending space (space between terminals and cable entry point) as recommended in the IEC/EN 61800-5. <2> These units fulfill IP20 requirements, but the wire bending space provided is lower than recommended in the IEC/EN 61800-5. <3> Contact Yaskawa for information about using drives in environments other than specified in this manual. Model Number and Specifications Table 1.3 Model Number and Specifications Three-Phase 200 V Class Three-Phase 400 V Class Drive Model Max. Mo ( t k o W r C ) apacity Rated Out ( p A u ) t Current Drive Model Max. Mo ( t k o W r C ) apacity Rated Out ( p A u ) t Current
20008 1.5 8 40005 1.5 4.8 20011 2.2 11 40006 2.2 5.5 20018 4.0 17.5 40009 4.0 9.2 20025 5.5 25 40015 5.5 14.8 20033 7.5 33 40018 7.5 18 20047 11 47 40024 11 24 20060 15 60 40031 15 31 20075 18.5 75 40039 18.5 39 20085 22 85 40045 22 45 20115 30 115 40060 30 60 20145 37 145 40075 37 75 20180 45 180 40091 45 91 20215 55 215 40112 55 112 20283 75 283 40150 75 150 20346 90 346 40180 90 180 20415 110 415 40216 110 216
28 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Customized Specifications |
|---|---|
| A | Standard model |
| F | Models in compliance with IEC/EN 61508 SIL3 Safety Integrity Level 3 |
| No. | Enclosure Type |
|---|---|
| B | IP20 <1> |
| C | IP20 <2> |
| No. | Region Code |
|---|---|
| C | Europe |
| No. | Environmental Specification <3> |
|---|---|
| A | Standard |
| No. | Voltage Class |
|---|---|
| 2 | 3-phase, 200-240 Vac |
| 4 | 3-phase, 380-480 Vac |
| Three-Phase 200 V Class | Column | Column | Three-Phase 400 V Class | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Drive Model | Max. Motor Capacity (kW) | Rated Output Current (A) | Drive Model | Max. Motor Capacity (kW) | Rated Output Current (A) |
| 20008 | 1.5 | 8 | 40005 | 1.5 | 4.8 |
| 20011 | 2.2 | 11 | 40006 | 2.2 | 5.5 |
| 20018 | 4.0 | 17.5 | 40009 | 4.0 | 9.2 |
| 20025 | 5.5 | 25 | 40015 | 5.5 | 14.8 |
| 20033 | 7.5 | 33 | 40018 | 7.5 | 18 |
| 20047 | 11 | 47 | 40024 | 11 | 24 |
| 20060 | 15 | 60 | 40031 | 15 | 31 |
| 20075 | 18.5 | 75 | 40039 | 18.5 | 39 |
| 20085 | 22 | 85 | 40045 | 22 | 45 |
| 20115 | 30 | 115 | 40060 | 30 | 60 |
| 20145 | 37 | 145 | 40075 | 37 | 75 |
| 20180 | 45 | 180 | 40091 | 45 | 91 |
| 20215 | 55 | 215 | 40112 | 55 | 112 |
| 20283 | 75 | 283 | 40150 | 75 | 150 |
| 20346 | 90 | 346 | 40180 | 90 | 180 |
| 20415 | 110 | 415 | 40216 | 110 | 216 |
Source page
Page 29
1.4 Component Names
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 29 gnivieceR SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 29 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 1.4 Component Names This section gives an overview of the drive components described in this manual. Note: 1. Refer to Using the Digital Operator on page 81 for a description of the operator keypad. 2. The drive may have no cooling fans or only one cooling fan depending on the model. Exploded Views of Drive Components Three-Phase AC 200 V CIMR-L20008B to 20075B Three-Phase AC 400 V CIMR-L40005B to 40039B Figure1.2 YEG A B C D I J E K F L 1 G M H A - Fan finger guard <1> H - Rubber bushing B - Cooling fan <1> I - Front cover C - Mounting hole J - USB port (type-B) D - Heatsink K - Digital Operator E - Port CN19 cover L - Terminal cover F - Terminal board M - Terminal cover screw G - Bottom cover <1> Drive models CIMR-L20018B, 40006B, and 40009B have a single cooling fan. Drive models CIMR-L20008B, 20011B, and 40005B do not have a cooling fan or fan finger guard. Figure 1.2 Exploded View of Drive Components (CIMR-L20025B)
Source page
Page 30
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 30 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
1.4 Component Names
Three-Phase AC 200 V CIMR-L20085B, 20115B Three-Phase AC 400 V CIMR-L40045B to 40091B
Figure1.3 YEG A
G F J H K E
L I
O M N
A - Fan finger guard I - Front cover screw B - Cooling fan J - Digital operator C - Mounting hole K - Drive Cover D - Heatsink L - Terminal cover E - Port CN19 cover M - Bottom front cover F - Terminal board N - Bottom cover G - Front cover O - Rubber bussing H - USB port (type-B) Figure 1.3 Exploded View of Drive Components (CIMR-L20085B)
30 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 31
1.4 Component Names
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 31 gnivieceR SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 31 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Three-Phase AC 200 V CIMR-L20145C to 20283C Three-Phase AC 400 V CIMR-L40112C to 40180C Figure1.4 E YEG A F B G C H I J D L K P O M N A - Mounting hole I - USB port (type-B) 1 B - Heatsink J - Digital operator C - Port CN19 cover K - Front cover screw D - Terminal board L - Drive cover E - Fan finger guard M - Terminal cover F - Cooling fan N - Bottom front cover G - Fan unit O - Bottom cover H - Front cover P - Rubber bussing Figure 1.4 Exploded View of Drive Components (CIMR-L20150C)
Source page
Page 32
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 32 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
1.4 Component Names
Three-Phase AC 200 V CIMR-L20346C, 20415C Three-Phase AC 400 V CIMR-L40216C
Figure1.5 E YEG A
B G
C H I J K
P N O
A - Mounting hole J - USB port (type-B) B - Heatsink K - Digital operator C - Port CN19 cover L - Front cover screw D - Terminal board M - Drive cover E - Fan finger guard N - Terminal cover F - Cooling fan O - Bottom front cover G - Fan unit case P - Bottom cover H - Circulation fan<1> Q - Rubber bussing I - Front cover <1> Drive models CIMR-L20346C and 20415C come with a built-in circulation fan. Figure 1.5 Exploded View of Drive Components (CIMR-L20216C)
32 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 33
1.4 Component Names
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 33 gnivieceR SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 33 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Front Views Figure1.6 CIMR-L(cid:2)2(cid:3)0018B CIMR-L(cid:2)2(cid:3)0145C H H I I A J A B J C B D K C E D K E F F G YEG A - Terminal board connector F - Main circuit terminal (Refer to Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal on page 66) B - DIP switch S2 (Refer to MEMOBUS/ G - Protecting cover to prevent miswiring Modbus Termination on page 74) C - Jumper S3 (Refer to Sinking/Sourcing H - Option card connector (CN5-C) Mode Selection for Safe Disable Inputs on page 73) D - Ground terminal I - Option card connector (CN5-B) E - Terminal board (Refer to Control J - Option card connector (CN5-A) Circuit Wiring on page 67) Figure 1.6 Front View of Drives 1
Source page
Page 34
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 34 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
1.4 Component Names
34 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 35
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 35 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Mechanical Installation
This chapter explains how to properly mount and install the drive.
2.1 SECTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 2.2 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 35
Source page
Page 36
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 36 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
2.1 Section Safety
2.1 Section Safety
WA RNING Fire Hazard
Provide sufficient cooling when installing the drive inside an enclosed panel or cabinet. Failure to comply could result in overheating and fire. When multiple drives are placed inside the same enclosure panel, install proper cooling to ensure air entering the enclosure does not exceed 50°C.
Do not carry the drive by the front cover or the terminal cover. Failure to comply may result in minor or moderate injury from the main body of the drive falling.
NOTICE Equipment Hazard
Prevent foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings from falling into the drive during drive installation and project construction. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. Place a temporary cover over the top during installation. Be sure to remove the temporary cover before start-up, as the cover will reduce ventilation and cause the unit to overheat. Observe proper electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures when handling the drive. Failure to comply could result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Operating the motor in the low-speed range diminishes the cooling effects, increases motor temperature, and may lead to motor damage by overheating. Reduce the motor torque in the low-speed range whenever using a standard blower cooled motor. If 100% torque is required continuously at low speed, consider using a special drive or vector-control motor. The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer. If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than the rated speed, consult with the manufacturer.
Continuously operating an oil-lubricated motor in the low-speed range may result in motor failure. When the input voltage is 440 V or higher or the wiring distance is greater than 100 meters, pay special attention to the motor insulation voltage or use a drive-rated motor with reinforced insulation. Failure to comply could lead to motor winding failure. Motor vibration may increase when operating a machine in variable-speed mode, if that machine previously operated at a constant speed.
Install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base. The motor may require more acceleration torque with drive operation than with a commercial power supply. Set a proper V/f pattern by checking the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the motor. Never lift the drive up while the cover is removed. This can damage the terminal board and other components.
Improper application of peripheral devices could result in malfunction of drive due to electrical interference. Follow manufacturers recommendations when installing electrical devices near the drive and take precautions to shield the drive from electrical interference.
36 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| WA RNING |
|---|
| Fire Hazard Provide sufficient cooling when installing the drive inside an enclosed panel or cabinet. Failure to comply could result in overheating and fire. When multiple drives are placed inside the same enclosure panel, install proper cooling to ensure air entering the enclosure does not exceed 50°C. |
| CAUTION |
|---|
| Crush Hazard Do not carry the drive by the front cover or the terminal cover. Failure to comply may result in minor or moderate injury from the main body of the drive falling. |
| NOTICE |
|---|
| Equipment Hazard Prevent foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings from falling into the drive during drive installation and project construction. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. Place a temporary cover over the top during installation. Be sure to remove the temporary cover before start-up, as the cover will reduce ventilation and cause the unit to overheat. Observe proper electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures when handling the drive. Failure to comply could result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry. Operating the motor in the low-speed range diminishes the cooling effects, increases motor temperature, and may lead to motor damage by overheating. Reduce the motor torque in the low-speed range whenever using a standard blower cooled motor. If 100% torque is required continuously at low speed, consider using a special drive or vector-control motor. The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer. If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than the rated speed, consult with the manufacturer. Continuously operating an oil-lubricated motor in the low-speed range may result in motor failure. When the input voltage is 440 V or higher or the wiring distance is greater than 100 meters, pay special attention to the motor insulation voltage or use a drive-rated motor with reinforced insulation. Failure to comply could lead to motor winding failure. Motor vibration may increase when operating a machine in variable-speed mode, if that machine previously operated at a constant speed. Install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base. The motor may require more acceleration torque with drive operation than with a commercial power supply. Set a proper V/f pattern by checking the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the motor. Never lift the drive up while the cover is removed. This can damage the terminal board and other components. Improper application of peripheral devices could result in malfunction of drive due to electrical interference. Follow manufacturers recommendations when installing electrical devices near the drive and take precautions to shield the drive from electrical interference. |
Source page
Page 37
2.2 Mechanical Installation
| Environment | Conditions |
|---|---|
| Installation Area | Indoors |
| Ambient Temperature | IP20 enclosure: -10 to +50°C Drive reliability improves in environments without wide temperature fluctuations. When using the drive in an enclosure panel, install a cooling fan or air conditioner in the area to ensure that the air temperature inside the enclosure does not exceed the specified levels. Do not allow ice to develop on the drive. |
| Humidity | 95% RH or less and free of condensation |
| Storage Temperature | -20 to 60°C |
| Surrounding Area | Install the drive in an area free from: • oil mist and dust • metal shavings, oil, water or other foreign materials • radioactive materials • combustible materials (e.g., wood) • harmful gases and liquids • excessive vibration • chlorides • direct sunlight |
| Altitude | 1000 m or lower, up to 3000 m with derating (Refer to Drive Derating Data on page348.) |
| Vibration | 10 to 20 Hz at 9.8 m/s2 20 to 55 Hz at 5.9 m/s2 (CIMR-L20008 to 20180, 40005 to 40150) 2.0 m/s2 (CIMR-L20215 to 20415, CIMR-L40180 to 40216) |
| Orientation | Install the drive vertically to maintain maximum cooling effects. |
Source page
Page 38
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 38 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
2.2 Mechanical Installation
Installation Orientation and Spacing
Figure2.1 OK Not OK Not OK
Figure 2.1 Correct Installation Orientation Installation Spacing
Figure 2.2 shows the installation distance required to maintain sufficient space for airflow and wiring.
Figure2.2 Side Clearance Top/Bottom Clearance A C YEG
A B B C D D
A - 50 mm minimum C - 120 mm minimum B - 30 mm minimum D - Airflow direction Figure 2.2 Correct Installation Spacing
38 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 39
2.2 Mechanical Installation
Source page
Page 40
2.2 Mechanical Installation
Digital Operator Remote Usage
Remote Operation
The digital operator mounted on the drive can be removed and connected to the drive using an extension cable up to 3 m long to facilitate operation when the drive is installed in a location where it cannot be easily accessed. The digital operator can also be permanently mounted in remote locations such as panel doors using an extension cable and an installation support set (depending on the installation type). Note: Refer to Drive Options and Peripheral Devices on page 322 for information on extension cables and installation support sets. Figure2.5 Drive Operator
Comm. Port S/N : J007XE273710001
common_ TMonly Communication Cable Connector Figure 2.5 Communication Cable Connection
Digital Operator Remote Installation Digital Operator Dimensions
S/N : J007XE273710001
Figure 2.6 Digital Operator Dimensions
40 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 09 87 12.2 1.6 Installation holes (2-M3 screws, depth 5) 60 7.9 44 Minimum 50 Unit: mm 51 SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 40 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 YEG
Source page
Page 41
2.2 Mechanical Installation
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 41 lacinahceM noitallatsnI Installation Types and Required Materials The digital operator mounts to an enclosure two different ways: 1. External/face-mount installs the operator outside the enclosure panel 2. Internal/flush-mount installs the operator inside the enclosure panel Table 2.2 Digital Operator Installation Methods and Required Tools Installation Method Description Installation Support Sets Model Required Tools Simplified installation with the digital External/Face-Mount operator is mounted on the outside of - - Phillips screwdriver (#1) the panel with two screws. Installation Support Set A (for mounting with screws through EZZ020642A Phillips screwdriver (#1, #2) Encloses the digital operator in the holes in the panel) Internal/Flush-Mount panel. The digital operator is flush with the outside of the panel. (for u I s n e s t w al i l t a h t i t o h n re S a u d p e p d o s r t t u S d e s t t h B at are EZZ020642B Phillips screwdriver (#1) Wrench (7 mm) fixed to the panel) NOTICE: Prevent foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings from falling into the drive during installation and project construction. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. Place a temporary cover over the top of the drive during installation. Remove the temporary cover before drive start-up, as the cover will reduce ventilation and cause the drive to overheat. External/Face-Mount 1. Cut an opening in the enclosure panel for the digital operator as shown in Figure 2.8. 2. Position the digital operator so the display faces outwards, and mount it to the enclosure panel as shown in Figure 2.7. Figure2.6 Digital Operator M3 × 6 Phillips recessed pan head machine screw × 2 Enclosure panel common_TMonly Figure 2.7 External/Face-Mount Installation Figure2.7 22 2 22 14 Figure 2.8 Panel Cut-Out Dimensions (External/Face-Mount Installation) 87 2 22 62 SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 41 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 YEG Unit: mm
| Installation Method | Description | Installation Support Sets | Model | Required Tools |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| External/Face-Mount | Simplified installation with the digital operator is mounted on the outside of the panel with two screws. | - | - | Phillips screwdriver (#1) |
| Internal/Flush-Mount | Encloses the digital operator in the panel. The digital operator is flush with the outside of the panel. ( | Installation Support Set A (for mounting with screws through holes in the panel) | EZZ020642A | Phillips screwdriver (#1, #2) |
| Installation Support Set B for use with threaded studs that are fixed to the panel) | EZZ020642B | Phillips screwdriver (#1) Wrench (7 mm) |
Source page
Page 42
2.2 Mechanical Installation
Internal/Flush-Mount
An internal flush-mount requires an installation support set that must be purchased separately. Contact a Yaskawa representative to order an installation support set and mounting hardware. Figure 2.9 illustrates how to attach the Installation Support Set A. 1. Cut an opening in the enclosure panel for the digital operator as shown in Figure 2.10. 2. Mount the digital operator to the installation support. 3. Mount the installation support set and digital operator to the enclosure panel. Figure2.8 Enclosure panel Digital Operator M4 × 10 Installation Support Set A Phillips truss head screw × 4 (for panel widths between 1 and 1.6) M3 (cid:152)(cid:2)6 Phillips recessed pan head machine screw × 2 common_TMonly
Figure 2.9 Internal/Flush Mount Installation Note: Use a gasket between the enclosure panel and the digital operator in environments with a significant amount of dust or other airborne debris. Figure2.9
Figure 2.10 Panel Cut-Out Dimensions (Internal/Flush-Mount Installation)
42 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 021 45 59+ 00.5 5.0+98 0 SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 42 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 YEG Unit : mm
| Column | Column | Column | 5.0+98 0 021 | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 5.0+98 0 | ||||
| 45 59+0.5 0 | 45 |
Source page
Page 43
2.2 Mechanical Installation
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 43 lacinahceM noitallatsnI Exterior and Mounting Dimensions Figure 1 2 Table 2.3 Dimensions: 200 V Class C D I r M iv R e - M L od 2 e l Figure W H D W1 H0 Dim H e 1 nsions H (m 2 m) H3 D1 t1 t2 d W ( e k i g g ) ht 0008 140 260 147 122 - 248 6 - 38 5 - M5 3.2 0011 140 260 147 122 - 248 6 - 38 5 - M5 3.2 0018 140 260 164 122 - 248 6 - 55 5 - M5 3.5 0025 1 140 260 167 122 - 248 6 - 55 5 - M5 4.0 0033 140 260 167 122 - 248 6 - 55 5 - M5 4.0 0047 180 300 187 160 - 284 8 - 75 5 - M5 5.6 0060 220 350 197 192 - 335 8 - 78 5 - M6 8.7 0075 2 220 365 197 192 350 335 8 15 78 5 - M6 9.7 2H W1 1H 0H H t1 D1 W D 3H W1 4-d Figure 2 1H 2H H 4-d t1 W D1 D YEG Figure 3 1H 2H 0H 3H H SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 43 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 W1 4-d t2 YEG t1 D1 Max 10 W Max 10 D
| Column | 1H | H |
|---|---|---|
| W |
| Column | 1H | 0H | H |
|---|---|---|---|
| W |
| 1H | 0H | Column |
|---|---|---|
| 2H 3H |
| Drive Model CIMR-L2 | Dimensions (mm) Figure W H D W1 H0 H1 H2 H3 D1 t1 t2 | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Weight d (kg) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| H D | W1 H0 | H1 | H2 | H3 | D1 | t1 t2 | |||
| 0008 0011 0018 0025 0033 0047 0060 | 140 140 140 1 140 140 180 220 | 260 147 | 122 - | 248 | 6 | - | 38 | 5 - | M5 3.2 |
| 260 147 | 122 - | 248 | 6 | - | 38 | 5 - | M5 3.2 | ||
| 260 164 | 122 - | 248 | 6 | - | 55 | 5 - | M5 3.5 | ||
| 260 167 | 122 - | 248 | 6 | - | 55 | 5 - | M5 4.0 | ||
| 260 167 | 122 - | 248 | 6 | - | 55 | 5 - | M5 4.0 | ||
| 300 187 | 160 - | 284 | 8 | - | 75 | 5 - | M5 5.6 | ||
| 350 197 | 192 - | 335 | 8 | - | 78 | 5 - | M6 8.7 | ||
| 0075 | 2 220 | 365 197 | 192 350 | 335 | 8 | 15 | 78 | 5 - | M6 9.7 |
Source page
Page 44
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 44 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
2.2 Mechanical Installation
C D I r M iv R e - M L od 2 e l Figure W H D W1 H0 Dim H e 1 nsions H (m 2 m) H3 D1 t1 t2 d W ( e k i g g ) ht 0085 254 534 258 195 400 385 7.5 134 100 2.3 2.3 M6 23 0115 279 614 258 220 450 435 7.5 164 100 2.3 2.3 M6 28 0145 329 630 283 260 550 535 7.5 80 110 2.3 2.3 M6 40 0180 329 630 283 260 550 535 7.5 80 110 2.3 2.3 M6 40 3 0215 450 705 330 325 705 680 12.5 163 130 3.2 3.2 M10 81 0283 450 705 330 325 705 680 12.5 163 130 3.2 3.2 M10 86 0346 500 800 350 370 800 773 13 238 130 4.5 4.5 M12 105 0415 500 800 350 370 800 773 13 238 130 4.5 4.5 M12 105 Table 2.4 Dimensions: 400 V Class C D I r M iv R e - M L od 4 e l Figure W H D W1 H0 Dim H e 1 nsions H (m 2 m) H3 D1 t1 t2 d W ( e k i g g ) ht 0005 140 260 147 122 - 248 6 - 38 5 - M5 3.2 0006 140 260 164 122 - 248 6 - 55 5 - M5 3.4 0009 140 260 164 122 - 248 6 - 55 5 - M5 3.5 0015 140 260 167 122 - 248 6 - 55 5 - M5 3.9 1 0018 140 260 167 122 - 248 6 - 55 5 - M5 3.9 0024 180 300 167 160 - 284 8 - 55 5 - M5 5.4 0031 180 300 187 160 - 284 8 - 75 5 - M5 5.7 0039 220 350 197 192 - 335 8 - 78 5 - M6 8.3 0045 254 465 258 195 400 385 7.5 65 100 2.3 2.3 M6 23 0060 279 515 258 220 450 435 7.5 65 100 2.3 2.3 M6 27 0075 329 630 258 260 510 495 7.5 120 105 2.3 3.2 M6 39 0091 329 630 258 260 510 495 7.5 120 105 2.3 3.2 M6 39 3 0112 329 630 283 260 550 535 7.5 80 110 2.3 2.3 M6 43 0150 329 630 283 260 550 535 7.5 80 110 2.3 2.3 M6 45 0180 450 705 330 325 705 680 12.5 163 130 3.2 3.2 M10 85 0216 500 800 350 370 800 773 13 238 130 4.5 4.5 M12 103
44 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Drive Model CIMR-L2 | Figure | Dimensions (mm) | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Weight (kg) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| W | H | D | W1 | H0 | H1 | H2 | H3 | D1 | t1 | t2 | d | |||
| 0085 | 3 | 254 | 534 | 258 | 195 | 400 | 385 | 7.5 | 134 | 100 | 2.3 | 2.3 | M6 | 23 |
| 0115 | 279 | 614 | 258 | 220 | 450 | 435 | 7.5 | 164 | 100 | 2.3 | 2.3 | M6 | 28 | |
| 0145 | 329 | 630 | 283 | 260 | 550 | 535 | 7.5 | 80 | 110 | 2.3 | 2.3 | M6 | 40 | |
| 0180 | 329 | 630 | 283 | 260 | 550 | 535 | 7.5 | 80 | 110 | 2.3 | 2.3 | M6 | 40 | |
| 0215 | 450 | 705 | 330 | 325 | 705 | 680 | 12.5 | 163 | 130 | 3.2 | 3.2 | M10 | 81 | |
| 0283 | 450 | 705 | 330 | 325 | 705 | 680 | 12.5 | 163 | 130 | 3.2 | 3.2 | M10 | 86 | |
| 0346 | 500 | 800 | 350 | 370 | 800 | 773 | 13 | 238 | 130 | 4.5 | 4.5 | M12 | 105 | |
| 0415 | 500 | 800 | 350 | 370 | 800 | 773 | 13 | 238 | 130 | 4.5 | 4.5 | M12 | 105 |
| Drive Model CIMR-L4 | Figure | Dimensions (mm) | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Weight (kg) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| W | H | D | W1 | H0 | H1 | H2 | H3 | D1 | t1 | t2 | d | |||
| 0005 | 1 | 140 | 260 | 147 | 122 | - | 248 | 6 | - | 38 | 5 | - | M5 | 3.2 |
| 0006 | 140 | 260 | 164 | 122 | - | 248 | 6 | - | 55 | 5 | - | M5 | 3.4 | |
| 0009 | 140 | 260 | 164 | 122 | - | 248 | 6 | - | 55 | 5 | - | M5 | 3.5 | |
| 0015 | 140 | 260 | 167 | 122 | - | 248 | 6 | - | 55 | 5 | - | M5 | 3.9 | |
| 0018 | 140 | 260 | 167 | 122 | - | 248 | 6 | - | 55 | 5 | - | M5 | 3.9 | |
| 0024 | 180 | 300 | 167 | 160 | - | 284 | 8 | - | 55 | 5 | - | M5 | 5.4 | |
| 0031 | 180 | 300 | 187 | 160 | - | 284 | 8 | - | 75 | 5 | - | M5 | 5.7 | |
| 0039 | 220 | 350 | 197 | 192 | - | 335 | 8 | - | 78 | 5 | - | M6 | 8.3 | |
| 0045 | 3 | 254 | 465 | 258 | 195 | 400 | 385 | 7.5 | 65 | 100 | 2.3 | 2.3 | M6 | 23 |
| 0060 | 279 | 515 | 258 | 220 | 450 | 435 | 7.5 | 65 | 100 | 2.3 | 2.3 | M6 | 27 | |
| 0075 | 329 | 630 | 258 | 260 | 510 | 495 | 7.5 | 120 | 105 | 2.3 | 3.2 | M6 | 39 | |
| 0091 | 329 | 630 | 258 | 260 | 510 | 495 | 7.5 | 120 | 105 | 2.3 | 3.2 | M6 | 39 | |
| 0112 | 329 | 630 | 283 | 260 | 550 | 535 | 7.5 | 80 | 110 | 2.3 | 2.3 | M6 | 43 | |
| 0150 | 329 | 630 | 283 | 260 | 550 | 535 | 7.5 | 80 | 110 | 2.3 | 2.3 | M6 | 45 | |
| 0180 | 450 | 705 | 330 | 325 | 705 | 680 | 12.5 | 163 | 130 | 3.2 | 3.2 | M10 | 85 | |
| 0216 | 500 | 800 | 350 | 370 | 800 | 773 | 13 | 238 | 130 | 4.5 | 4.5 | M12 | 103 |
Source page
Page 45
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 45 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Electrical Installation
This chapter explains proper procedures for wiring the control circuit terminals, motor, and power supply.
3.1 SECTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 3.2 STANDARD CONNECTION DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 3.3 MAIN CIRCUIT CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 3.4 TERMINAL BLOCK CONFIGURATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.5 TERMINAL COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 3.6 DIGITAL OPERATOR AND FRONT COVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 3.7 MAIN CIRCUIT WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 3.8 CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 3.9 CONTROL I/O CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 3.10 CONNECT TO A PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 3.11 WIRING CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 45
Source page
Page 46
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 46 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
3.1 Section Safety
3.1 Section Safety
Do not change wiring, remove covers, connectors or options cards, or attempt to service the drive with power applied to the drive. Disconnect all power to the drive, and lock out the power source. After shutting off the power wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive front cover safety label. Measure the DC bus voltage for unsafe voltages to confirm safe level before servicing to prevent electric shock The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. Failure to comply will result in serious injury or death from electric shock.
WA RNING
Sudden Movement Hazard Operating a drive with untested emergency circuits could result in death or serious injury.
Verify all drive emergency stop wiring and additional emergency circuits before operating the drive. Ensure start/stop, I/O and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before energizing or running the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment. Ensure holding brake circuits are properly configured, load equipment may fall or drop during power loss or drive fault, which could result in death or serious injury. • Provide a separate holding brake if necessary. • Always construct the external sequence to confirm that the holding brake is activated in the event of an emergency, a power failure, or an abnormality in the drive. • If using the drive with an elevator, provide safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator from dropping.
Electrical Shock Hazard Do not operate equipment with covers removed. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual. Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal.
Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case. Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing, and wear eye protection before beginning work on the drive. Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the equipment. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives. Make sure the protective earthing conductor complies with technical standards and local safety regulations.
When an EMC filter is installed, the leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA. Therefore according to IEC/EN 61800-5, an automatic power supply interruption in case of a broken earthing conductor must be provided. Alternatively a protective earthing conductor with a cross section of at least 10 mm2 (Cu) or 16 mm2 (Al) must be used.
46 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| DANGER |
|---|
| Electrical Shock Hazard Do not change wiring, remove covers, connectors or options cards, or attempt to service the drive with power applied to the drive. Disconnect all power to the drive, and lock out the power source. After shutting off the power wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive front cover safety label. Measure the DC bus voltage for unsafe voltages to confirm safe level before servicing to prevent electric shock The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. Failure to comply will result in serious injury or death from electric shock. |
| WA RNING |
|---|
| Sudden Movement Hazard Operating a drive with untested emergency circuits could result in death or serious injury. Verify all drive emergency stop wiring and additional emergency circuits before operating the drive. Ensure start/stop, I/O and safety circuits are wired properly and in the correct state before energizing or running the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from moving equipment. Ensure holding brake circuits are properly configured, load equipment may fall or drop during power loss or drive fault, which could result in death or serious injury. • Provide a separate holding brake if necessary. • Always construct the external sequence to confirm that the holding brake is activated in the event of an emergency, a power failure, or an abnormality in the drive. • If using the drive with an elevator, provide safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator from dropping. Electrical Shock Hazard Do not operate equipment with covers removed. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual. Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal. Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case. Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing, and wear eye protection before beginning work on the drive. Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the equipment. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives. Make sure the protective earthing conductor complies with technical standards and local safety regulations. When an EMC filter is installed, the leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA. Therefore according to IEC/EN 61800-5, an automatic power supply interruption in case of a broken earthing conductor must be provided. Alternatively a protective earthing conductor with a cross section of at least 10 mm2 (Cu) or 16 mm2 (Al) must be used. |
Source page
Page 47
3.1 Section Safety
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 47 noitallatsnI lacirtcelE SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 47 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 WA RNING Use appropriate equipment for residual current monitoring/detection (RCM/RCD). This drive can cause a residual current with a DC component in the protective earthing conductor. Where a residual current operated protective or monitoring device is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, always use an RCM or RCD of type B according to IEC/EN 60755. Improper equipment grounding may cause dangerous electrical potentials on equipment chassis, which could result in death or serious injury. Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire. Make sure all ground terminals have been properly grounded. Always ground the ground terminal. (200 V Class: Ground to 100 Ω or less, 400 V Class: Ground to 10 Ω or less). Sudden Movement Hazard Comply with proper wiring practices. The motor may run in reverse if the phase order is backward, causing incorrect elevator direction movement and injury to personnel. Connect motor input terminals U, V and W to drive output terminals U/T1,V/T2, and W/T3. The phase order for the drive and motor should match. Install a properly controlled contactor on the input-side of the drive for applications where power should be removed from the drive during a fault condition. Improper equipment sequencing could result in death or serious injury. Fire Hazard Drive Short-Circuit Current Rating Install adequate branch circuit protection according to applicable local codes and this Installation Manual. Failure to comply could result in fire and damage to the drive or injury to personnel. The device is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200 V class) and 480 Vac maximum (400 V class) when protected by branch circuit protection devices specified in this manual. Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque. Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections. Improperly tightened terminal screws can also cause erroneous equipment operation. Do not use improper combustible materials in drive installation. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire. Attach the drive or braking resistors to metal or other noncombustible material. 3 Do not use an improper voltage source. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire. Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power. The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect a braking resistor directly to any other terminals. Improper wiring connections could result in death or serious injury by fire. Do not connect the AC power line to the output motor terminals of the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output terminals. • Do not connect AC line power to output terminals U, V, and W. • Make sure that the power supply lines are connected to main circuit input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 (or R/L1 and S/ L2 for single-phase power).
| WA RNING |
|---|
| Use appropriate equipment for residual current monitoring/detection (RCM/RCD). This drive can cause a residual current with a DC component in the protective earthing conductor. Where a residual current operated protective or monitoring device is used for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, always use an RCM or RCD of type B according to IEC/EN 60755. Improper equipment grounding may cause dangerous electrical potentials on equipment chassis, which could result in death or serious injury. Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire. Make sure all ground terminals have been properly grounded. Always ground the ground terminal. (200 V Class: Ground to 100 Ω or less, 400 V Class: Ground to 10 Ω or less). Sudden Movement Hazard Comply with proper wiring practices. The motor may run in reverse if the phase order is backward, causing incorrect elevator direction movement and injury to personnel. Connect motor input terminals U, V and W to drive output terminals U/T1,V/T2, and W/T3. The phase order for the drive and motor should match. Install a properly controlled contactor on the input-side of the drive for applications where power should be removed from the drive during a fault condition. Improper equipment sequencing could result in death or serious injury. Fire Hazard Drive Short-Circuit Current Rating Install adequate branch circuit protection according to applicable local codes and this Installation Manual. Failure to comply could result in fire and damage to the drive or injury to personnel. The device is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 240 Vac maximum (200 V class) and 480 Vac maximum (400 V class) when protected by branch circuit protection devices specified in this manual. Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque. Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections. Improperly tightened terminal screws can also cause erroneous equipment operation. Do not use improper combustible materials in drive installation. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire. Attach the drive or braking resistors to metal or other noncombustible material. Do not use an improper voltage source. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire. Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power. The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2. Do not connect a braking resistor directly to any other terminals. Improper wiring connections could result in death or serious injury by fire. Do not connect the AC power line to the output motor terminals of the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output terminals. • Do not connect AC line power to output terminals U, V, and W. • Make sure that the power supply lines are connected to main circuit input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 (or R/L1 and S/ L2 for single-phase power). |
Source page
Page 48
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 48 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
3.1 Section Safety
Carrying the drive by the front cover may cause the main body of the drive to fall, resulting in minor or moderate injury. Always hold the case when carrying the drive.
NOTICE Equipment Hazard
Only connect recommended devices to the drives braking transistor terminals. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking circuit. Carefully review instruction manual TOBP C720600 0 when connecting a braking option to the drive. Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or large-current electrical equipment. Improper equipment grounding could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to electrical interference.
Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry. Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage. Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive.
Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring. Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive. Do not modify the drive circuitry. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified.
Check all the wiring to ensure that all connections are correct after installing the drive and connecting any other devices. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. Connect braking circuits to the drive as shown in the I/O wiring examples. Improperly wiring braking circuits could result in damage to the drive or equipment.
Do not check or test control circuit signals while the drive is running. Improper use of test equipment could result in damage to the drive circuitry by short circuit. Standard motors used with PWM drives may experience winding failures due to surge voltages, when input line voltage is greater than 480 V or motor wire distance is greater than 100 meters. Select a motor design with insulation tolerant of surge voltages and drive-rated motor for use with PWM drives.
Failure to comply could lead to motor winding failure. Do not connect control circuit ground terminals to the drive enclosure. Improper drive grounding can cause control circuit malfunction. Do not use the negative DC bus terminal “-” as a ground terminal. This terminal is at high DC voltage potential. Improper wiring connections could damage the drive.
Before applying power to the drive, use power-off resistance checks to check for short-circuits between (R/L1, S/ L2, and T/L3) or between main circuit terminals and ground. Failure to comply may result in damage to the drive from short-circuit.
48 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| CAUTION |
|---|
| Crush Hazard Carrying the drive by the front cover may cause the main body of the drive to fall, resulting in minor or moderate injury. Always hold the case when carrying the drive. |
| NOTICE |
|---|
| Equipment Hazard Only connect recommended devices to the drives braking transistor terminals. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking circuit. Carefully review instruction manual TOBPC7206000 when connecting a braking option to the drive. Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or large-current electrical equipment. Improper equipment grounding could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to electrical interference. Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry. Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage. Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive. Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring. Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive. Do not modify the drive circuitry. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified. Check all the wiring to ensure that all connections are correct after installing the drive and connecting any other devices. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. Connect braking circuits to the drive as shown in the I/O wiring examples. Improperly wiring braking circuits could result in damage to the drive or equipment. Do not check or test control circuit signals while the drive is running. Improper use of test equipment could result in damage to the drive circuitry by short circuit. Standard motors used with PWM drives may experience winding failures due to surge voltages, when input line voltage is greater than 480 V or motor wire distance is greater than 100 meters. Select a motor design with insulation tolerant of surge voltages and drive-rated motor for use with PWM drives. Failure to comply could lead to motor winding failure. Do not connect control circuit ground terminals to the drive enclosure. Improper drive grounding can cause control circuit malfunction. Do not use the negative DC bus terminal “-” as a ground terminal. This terminal is at high DC voltage potential. Improper wiring connections could damage the drive. Before applying power to the drive, use power-off resistance checks to check for short-circuits between (R/L1, S/ L2, and T/L3) or between main circuit terminals and ground. Failure to comply may result in damage to the drive from short-circuit. |
Source page
Page 49
3.1 Section Safety
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 49 noitallatsnI lacirtcelE SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 49 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 NOTICE Prevent foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings from falling into the drive during drive installation and project construction. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. Place a temporary cover over the top during installation. Be sure to remove the temporary cover before start-up, as the cover will reduce ventilation and cause the unit to overheat. Improper application of devices on drive output circuits can damage the drive. Do not connect unapproved LC or RC interference suppression filters, capacitors, ground fault circuits, or overvoltage protection devices to the output of the drive. Insulate shields with heat shrink tubing or tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment. Improper wiring practices could result in drive or equipment damage due to short circuit. 3
| NOTICE |
|---|
| Prevent foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings from falling into the drive during drive installation and project construction. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. Place a temporary cover over the top during installation. Be sure to remove the temporary cover before start-up, as the cover will reduce ventilation and cause the unit to overheat. Improper application of devices on drive output circuits can damage the drive. Do not connect unapproved LC or RC interference suppression filters, capacitors, ground fault circuits, or overvoltage protection devices to the output of the drive. Insulate shields with heat shrink tubing or tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment. Improper wiring practices could result in drive or equipment damage due to short circuit. |
Source page
Page 50
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 50 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
3.2 Standard Connection Diagram
3.2 Standard Connection Diagram
Connect the drive and peripheral devices as shown in Figure 3.1. It is possible to set and run the drive via the digital operator without connecting digital I/O wiring. This section does not discuss drive operation; Refer to Start-Up Programming & Operation on page 77 for instructions on operating the drive.
50 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 51
3.2 Standard Connection Diagram
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 51 noitallatsnI lacirtcelE SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 51 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Figure3.1 T f c o o e r n r c m n o e i n n c n a t e l p s c o - t w i , n + e g 1 r o , s p + u t 2 p io , p n B ly s 1 . l , i N n B e e 2 s v e a to r r e UU DC (o p re ti a o c n t ) or XX <1> The (o rm pt a io l n re ) lay YEG these terminals Jumper B (o r p a t k io in n g ) resistor<2><3> W p ou o i t w r p in e u g r t t i s o s e t t q r h i u g e e g d n e r c r i e e ve d s . h w o h u e l n d < a s 1 h f 2 u a > t u o lt ff 2MCCB sr t1 11 ++2 Main C ++ ir 1 cuit − B1 B2 U/T1 U Motor Three-phase E R LCB (MCCB) MC Fuse EMC R/L1 Drive V W / / T T 2 3 W V M p 2 5 o 0 0 w 0 /6 e 0 t r o s H u 2 z p 4 p 0 ly V S T Filter S T/ / L L 3 2 Control Circuit <4> Shielded I s f u r p u p n l n y i , n a g s fr te o p m - d a o 4 w 0 n 0 t r V a n p s o f w or e m r er Ground Cable is needed to reduce the voltage MCMB 2MCCB THRX OFF ON MC to 200 V. Up command / Stop S1 Option card connectors B Th ra e k rm ing a l r r e e s la is y to t r r ip u n c i o t nta M ct C T S H A RX Down command / Stop S2 C C N N 5 5 - - C B 1 2 SA Nominal Speed S3 CN5-A TRX M T C R M X A SA I In n t s e p r e m c e t d io ia n t e O S pe pe ra e t d io 1 n S S 4 5 T ju e m rm pe in r a a l n b d o a sw rd i tch F co a n u t l a t c re t lay (de M d fa u ig u lt i i l t - t a f s u l e n in t c t p i t n i u o g t n s ) Leveling Speed S6 Off On D T Ju e IP m rm p S . e w R r i t e S c s 3 h . S O 2 n/Off Not Used S7 H Si 1 n , k H /S 2 o urce Sel. Not Used S8 SN S s (d e in e le k fa c / u t i S o lt: n o S u w i r n c ir k e e ) m li < n o k 5 d > e S S C P M M M C A B F 2 3 (m 5 0 a 0 i u n V l . t V d 5 r a c e , c V l a , m d y m a c o , a x u 1 x 1 t . 0 p A 1 u m t A A < ) 11> +24 V M1 Multi-function relay output (Brake Release Command) Shield ground terminal M2 2 3 (m 5 0 0 in V . V d 5 a c , c V , m d m a c, a x 1 x 1 . 0 A 1 m A A) <6> 2 kΩ +V Power supply +10.5 Vdc, max. 20 mA M M 3 4 M 2 3 5 0 u 0 l V t i V d -f c a u , c n m , c m t a io x a n x 1 . r e A 1 l a A y output (Motor Contactor Close Command) A1 Analog Input 1 (Speed Bias) (min. 5 Vdc, 10 mA) a M n u a lt lo i-f g u n in c p ti u o t n s -10 to +10 Vdc (20 kΩ) M5 Multi-function relay output (Drive Ready) A A C 2 A -1 n 0 a t l o o g + I 1 n 0 p u V t d 2 c ( N (2 o 0 t k u Ω se ) d) M6 2 3 (m 5 0 0 in V . V d 5 a c , c V , m d m a c, a x 1 x 1 . 0 1 A m A A) 0 V P1 < − 6 V > Pow T e e r ( r s 1 m u 2 i p n 0 p a Ω l t y io , , n 1 -1 / r 2 0 e . W s 5 is ) V to d r c, max. 20 mA P C 2 1 P P (D h h u o o r t t i o o n g C C F o o u r u e p p q l l e e u r r e 2 1 ncy Output) D 5 2 (d i t t g e o o i f t a 4 5 a u 8 0 l l o t V m u s d t A e p c t u tin t g) DIP C2 (not used) R++ Switch S2 R(cid:16)(cid:16) M c E o M m m O a m x B . . U R 1 S 1 S 5 / 4 M . 8 2 o 5 k d / B 4 b 2 u p 2 s s S S ++ (cid:16) <7> FM −FM + M ( - O 1 u 0 u l t t t i p o -f u u + t n 1 S c 0 p t i V o e n e d d c a ) n (2 a m lo A g ) ou < t 1 pu 0 t > 1 IG AM AC −AM + M (O u u lt t i p -f u u t n C c u tio rr n e n a t n ) alog output 2 H1<8> 0 V -10 to +10 Vdc (2mA) H2 E (G) Safe Disable inputs <9> DM++ shielded line HC DM−− EDM (Safety Electronic Device Monitor) c tw on is t t r e o d l - c p ir a c i u r i s t h te ie r l m de in d a l l ine 3 main circuit terminal Figure 3.1 Drive Standard Connection Diagram (example: CIMR-L20033) <1> Remove the jumper when installing a DC reactor. Models CIMR-L20085 through 20415 and 40045 through 40216 come with a built-in DC reactor. <2> Set L8-55 to 0 to disable the protection function of the built-in braking transistor of the drive when using an optional regenerative converter or dynamic braking option. <3> Set up a thermal relay sequence to disconnect drive main power in the event of an overheat condition on the dynamic braking option. <4> Supplying power to the control circuit separately from the main circuit requires a 24 V power supply (option). <5> This figure illustrates an example of a sequence input to S1 through S8 using a non-powered relay or an NPN transistor. Install the wire link between terminals SC-SP for Sink mode, between SC-SN for Source mode, or leave the link out for external power supply. Never short terminals SP and SN, as it will damage the drive. <6> The maximum output current capacity for the +V and -V terminals on the control circuit is 20 mA. Never short terminals +V, -V, and AC, as it can cause erroneous operation or damage the drive. <7> Set DIP switch S2 to the ON position to enable the termination resistor in the last drive in a MEMOBUS/Modbus network. <8> Use jumper S3 to select between Sink mode, Source mode or external power supply for the Safe Disable inputs. <9> Disconnect the wire jumper between H1 - HC and H2 - HC when utilizing the Safe Disable input. <10> Monitor outputs work with devices such as analog frequency meters, ammeters, voltmeters, and wattmeters. They are not intended for use as a feedback-type of signal. <11> Wire fault contact outputs MA, MB, and MC. Wire so that a fault will open the safety circuit and interrupt drive output.
| Column | MCMB 2MCCB THRX OFF ON MC SA Braking resistor unit MC | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| Thermal relay trip contact THRX 1 2 SA TRX MCMA SA TRX |
| Column | n | S2 S3 S4 |
|---|---|---|
| S5 S6 S7 | ||
| S8 SN | ||
| 2 kΩ | ||
| R R(cid:16)(cid:16) | ||
| S++ | ||
| S(cid:16) |
| Column | Column | Column | C1 |
|---|---|---|---|
| P2 C2 |
| AM | Column | Column | − + |
|---|---|---|---|
| AC | −AM + |
Source page
Page 52
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 52 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
3.2 Standard Connection Diagram
52 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 53
3.3 Main Circuit Connection Diagram
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 53 noitallatsnI lacirtcelE SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 53 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 3.3 Main Circuit Connection Diagram Refer to the Figure 3.2 when wiring the main circuit of the drive. Connections may vary based on drive capacity. The DC power supply for the main circuit also provides power to the control circuit. NOTICE: Do not use the negative DC bus terminal “-” as a ground terminal. This terminal is at high DC voltage potential. Improper wiring connections could damage the drive. NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Separate motor and/or braking circuit wiring (terminals, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +3, +2, +1,(-), B1, B2, from all other wiring. Place motor wiring within its own conduit or cable tray with appropriate divider, and use shielded motor cable where appropriate. Improper wiring practices could result in malfunction of drive due to electrical interference. CIMR-L20008 to 20075 CIMR-L20085, 20115 CIMR-L40005 to 40039 CIMR-L40045, 40060 B1 B2 B1 B2 +1 +1 +2 Relay Current DC Relay Current sensor reactor sensor R/L1 U/T1 R/L1 U/T1 S/L2 + V/T2 S/L2 + V/T2 T/L3 W/T3 T/L3 W/T3 - - YEG Gate board C b o o n a t r r d ol Operator Gate board C b o o n a t r r d ol Operator CIMR-L20145 to 20180 CIMR-L20215 to 20415 CIMR-L40075 to 40112 CIMR-L40150 to 40216 +3 +3 +1 +1 Relay Relay DC Current DC Current reactor sensor reactor sensor R/L1 U/T1 R/L1 U/T1 S/L2 + V/T2 S/L2 + V/T2 T/L3 W/T3 T/L3 W/T3 - YEG - YEG 3 Gate board C b o o n a t r r d ol Operator 2 P S 4 o u w p V p e l r y Gate board C b o o n a t r r d ol Operator Figure 3.2 Drive main circuit configurations
| CIMR-L20008 to 20075 CIMR-L40005 to 40039 | CIMR-L20085, 20115 CIMR-L40045, 40060 |
|---|---|
| B1B2 +1 +2 Relay Current sensor R/L1 U/T1 + S/L2 V/T2 T/L3 W/T3 - Control Gate board board Operator | B1B2 +1 Relay DC Current reactor sensor R/L1 U/T1 S/L2 + V/T2 T/L3 W/T3 - YEG Control Gate board Operator board |
| CIMR-L20145 to 20180 CIMR-L40075 to 40112 | CIMR-L20215 to 20415 CIMR-L40150 to 40216 |
| +3 +1 Relay DC Current reactor sensor R/L1 U/T1 + S/L2 V/T2 T/L3 W/T3 YEG - Control Gate board Operator board | +3 +1 Relay DC Current reactor sensor R/L1 U/T1 + S/L2 V/T2 T/L3 W/T3 - YEG 24 V Control Power Gate board Operator Supply board |
Source page
Page 54
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 54 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
3.4 Terminal Block Configuration
3.4 Terminal Block Configuration
Figure 3.3 shows the different main circuit terminal arrangements for the drive capacities. Figure3.2
CIMR-L(cid:2)2(cid:2)0008, 0011, 0018 CIMR-L(cid:2)2(cid:2)0025, 0033 CIMR-L(cid:2)2(cid:2)0047 CIMR-L(cid:2)4(cid:2)0005, 0006, 0009 CIMR-L(cid:2)4(cid:2)0015, 0018 CIMR-L(cid:2)4(cid:2)0024, 0031, 0039 B1 B2 - B1 B2
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 - B1 B2 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 +1 +2 R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 - +1 +2 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3 S/L2 T/L3 +1 +2 U/T1 V/T2 W
CIMR-L(cid:2)2(cid:2)0060, 0075 CIMR-L(cid:2)2(cid:2)0085, 0115 CIMR-L(cid:2)4(cid:2)0045, 0060 +1 +2 B1 B2
YEG
CIMR-L(cid:2)4(cid:2)0075, 0091 CIMR-L(cid:2)2(cid:2)0145, 0180, 0215, 0283, 0316, 0415 CIMR-L(cid:2)4(cid:2)0112, 0150, 0180, 0216<1>
Figure 3.3 Main Circuit Terminal Block Configuration <1> Terminal board design differs slightly for models CIMR-L20215 through 20415, and 40180 through 40216.
54 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 55
3.5 Terminal Cover
Source page
Page 56
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 56 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
3.5 Terminal Cover
2. Pull forward on the terminal cover to free it from the drive. Figure3.6
YEG
Figure 3.7 Removing the Terminal Cover Reattaching the Terminal Cover Models CIMR-L20008 to 20075 and 40005 to 40039 Power lines and signal wiring should pass through the opening provided. Refer to Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal on page 66 and Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal on page 70 for details on wiring.
NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Separate motor and/or braking circuit wiring (terminals, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +3, +2, +1,(-), B1, B2, from all other wiring. Place motor wiring within its own conduit or cable tray with appropriate divider, and use shielded motor cable where appropriate. Improper wiring practices could result in malfunction of drive due to electrical interference. Reattach the terminal cover after completing the wiring to the drive and other devices. Figure3.7
Connect ground wiring first, followed by the main circuit, and then wire the control circuit. P ex o i w t t e h r r o lin u e g s h a th n e d o s p ig e n n a in l g w i p ri r n o g v ided. YEG Figure 3.8 Reattaching the Terminal Cover Models CIMR-L20085 to 20180 and 40045 to 40150 After wiring the terminal board and other devices, double-check connections and reattach the terminal cover. Refer to Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal on page 66 and Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal on page 70 for details on wiring. Figure3.8
Connect ground wiring first, followed by the main circuit, YEG and then wire the control circuit. Power lines and signal wiring exit through the opening provided. Figure 3.9 Reattaching the Terminal Cover
56 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 57
3.6 Digital Operator and Front Cover
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 57 noitallatsnI lacirtcelE SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 57 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 3.6 Digital Operator and Front Cover Detach the digital operator from the drive for remote operation or when opening the front cover to install an option card. Note: Be sure to remove the digital operator prior to opening or reattaching the front cover. Leaving the digital operator plugged into the drive when removing the front cover can result in erroneous operation caused by a poor connection. Firmly fasten the front cover back into place before reattaching the digital operator. Removing/Reattaching the Digital Operator Removing the Digital Operator While pressing on the tab located on the right side of the digital operator, pull the digital operator forward to remove it from the drive. Figure3.9 YEG Figure 3.10 Removing the Digital Operator Reattaching the Digital Operator Insert the digital operator into the opening in the top cover while aligning it with the notches on the left side of the opening. Next, press gently on the right side of the operator until it clicks into place. Figure3.10 YEG Figure 3.11 Reattaching the Digital Operator 3
Source page
Page 58
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 58 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
3.6 Digital Operator and Front Cover
Removing/Reattaching the Front Cover
Removing the Front Cover Models CIMR- L20008 to 20075 and 40005 to 40039
After removing the terminal cover and the digital operator, loosen the screw that affixes the front cover (model CIMR-L20047, 40024, and 40031 does not use a screw to affix the front cover). Pinch inwards on the tabs found on each side of the front cover, then pull forward to remove it from the drive. Figure3.11
YEG
Figure 3.12 Remove the Front Cover (Models CIMR-L20008 to 20075 and 40005 to 40039) Models CIMR-L20085 to 20415 and 40045 to 40216 1. Remove the terminal cover and the digital operator. 2. Loosen the installation screw on the front cover. 3. Use a straight-edge screwdriver to loosen the hooks on each side of the cover that hold it in place. Figure3.12
Hook Hook Front cover Free hooks on both installation screw sides of the cover
Figure 3.13 Remove the Front Cover (Models CIMR-L20085 to 20415 and 40045 to 40216) 4. Unhook the left side of the front cover then swing the left side towards you as shown in Figure 3.14 until the cover comes off. Figure3.13
Figure 3.14 Remove the Front Cover (Models CIMR-L20085 to 20415 and 40045 to 40216)
58 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 59
3.6 Digital Operator and Front Cover
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 59 noitallatsnI lacirtcelE SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 59 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Reattaching the Front Cover Models CIMR-L20008 to 20075 and 40005 to 40039 Reverse the instructions given in Remove the Front Cover (Models CIMR-L20008 to 20075 and 40005 to 40039) on page 58 to reattach the front cover. Pinch inwards on the hooks found on each side of the front cover while guiding it back into the drive. Make sure it clicks firmly into place. Models CIMR-L20085 to 20415 and 40045 to 40216 1. Slide the front cover so the hooks on the top connect to the drive. Figure3.14 Figure 3.15 Reattach the Front Cover (Models CIMR-L20085 to 40216 and 40045 to 40150) 2. After connecting the hooks to the drive, press firmly on the cover to lock it into place. 3
Source page
Page 60
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 60 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
3.7 Main Circuit Wiring
3.7 Main Circuit Wiring
This section describes the functions, specifications, and procedures required to safely and properly wire the main circuit in the drive.
NOTICE: Only connect recommended devices to the drives braking transistor terminals. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking circuit. Carefully review instruction manual TOBP C720600 0 when connecting a braking option to the drive. NOTICE: Do not use the negative DC bus terminal “-” as a ground terminal. This terminal is at high DC voltage potential. Improper wiring connections could damage the drive. NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Separate motor and/or braking circuit wiring (terminals, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, +3, +2, +1,(-), B1, B2, from all other wiring. Place motor wiring within its own conduit or cable tray with appropriate divider, and use shielded motor cable where appropriate. Improper wiring practices could result in malfunction of drive due to electrical interference. NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Comply with proper wiring practices. The motor may run in reverse if the phase order is backward, causing incorrect elevator direction movement. Connect motor input terminals U, V and W to drive output terminals U/T1,V/T2, and W/ T3. The phase order for the drive and motor should match. NOTICE: Do not solder the ends of wire connections to the drive. Soldered wiring connections can loosen over time. Improper wiring practices could result in drive malfunction due to loose terminal connections. NOTICE: Do not switch the drive input to start or stop the motor. Frequently switching the drive on and off shortens the life of the DC bus charge circuit and the DC bus capacitors, and can cause premature drive failures. For the full performance life, refrain from switching the drive on and off more than once every 30 minutes. Main Circuit Terminal Functions Table 3.1 Main Circuit Terminal Functions
Terminal Type C 20 la 0 s V s Model 20008 to 20075 20085, 20115 20145 to 20415 Function Page C 40 la 0 s V s CIMR-L 40005 to 40039 40045, 40060 40075 to 40216 R/L1 S/L2 Main circuit power supply input Connects line power to the drive 51 T/L3 U/T1 V/T2 Drive output Connects to the motor 51 W/T3 B1 Available for connecting a braking resistor or a B2 Braking resistor Not available braking resistor unit option 334 +2 • DC reactor connection (+1, Not available +1 +2) (remove the shorting bar For connection between +1 and +2) DC power supply input • DC power supply input • of the drive to a DC power supply (terminals +1 - • D (+ C 1 , p - o ) wer supply input (+1, -) • B (+ r 1 a , k - in ) g unit connection • o an f d d y - n a a r m e i n c o b t r U ak L i n a g p p o r p o t v io e n d s ) 338 +3 Not available (+3, -) - Grounding terminal 65 Note: Use terminal B1 and - terminals when installing the braking unit (CDBR type) to the drives with built-in braking transistor (20008 to 20115, 40005 to 40060). Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque Use the tables in this section to select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals.
Gauges listed in the tables are for use in the United States. Note: 1. Wire gauge recommendations based on drive continuous current ratings using 75°C 600 Vac vinyl-sheathed wire assuming ambient temperature within 40°C and wiring distance less than 100 m (328 ft.). 2. Terminals B1, B2, -, +1, +2, and +3, are for connecting a DC reactor, braking resistor or DC power supply. Do not connect other nonspecific devices to these terminals.
60 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Terminal | Column | Type | Column | Column | Function | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 200 V Class | Model CIMR-L | 20008 to 20075 | 20085, 20115 | 20145 to 20415 | ||
| 400 V Class | 40005 to 40039 | 40045, 40060 | 40075 to 40216 | |||
| R/L1 | Main circuit power supply input | Connects line power to the drive | 51 | |||
| S/L2 | ||||||
| T/L3 | ||||||
| U/T1 | Drive output | Connects to the motor | 51 | |||
| V/T2 | ||||||
| W/T3 | ||||||
| B1 | Braking resistor | Not available | Available for connecting a braking resistor or a braking resistor unit option | 334 | ||
| B2 | ||||||
| +2 | • DC reactor connection (+1, +2) (remove the shorting bar between +1 and +2) • DC power supply input (+1, -) | Not available | For connection • of the drive to a DC power supply (terminals +1 and - are not UL approved) • of dynamic braking options | 338 | ||
| +1 | DC power supply input (+1, -) | • DC power supply input (+1, -) • Braking unit connection (+3, -) | ||||
| - | ||||||
| +3 | Not available | |||||
| - | Grounding terminal | 65 |
Source page
Page 61
3.7 Main Circuit Wiring
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 61 noitallatsnI lacirtcelE SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 61 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 • Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge when the voltage drop is greater than 2% of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is suitable for the terminal block. Use the following formula to calculate the amount of voltage drop: Line drop voltage (V) = 3 × wire resistance (Ω/km) × wire length (m) × current (A) × 10-3 • Refer to instruction manual TOBP C720600 0 for braking transistor option or braking resistor option wire gauges. • Use terminal +1 and the negative terminal when connecting a regenerative converter or a regen unit. • Use terminal B1 and - terminals when installing the braking unit to the drives with built-in braking transistor (20008 to 20115, 40005 to 40060). • Refer to UL Standards Compliance on page 437 for information on UL compliance. Yaskawa recommends using closed-loop crimp terminals on all drive models. UL/cUL approval requires the use of closed-loop crimp terminals when wiring the drive main circuit terminals on models CIMR-L20085 to 20415 and 40045 to 40216. Use only the tools recommended by the terminal manufacturer for crimping. Refer to Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Size on page 441 for closed-loop crimp terminal recommendations. The wire gauges listed in the following tables are Yaskawa recommendations. Refer to local codes for proper wire gauge selections. Three-Phase 200 V Class Table 3.2 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications (Three-Phase 200 V Class) CI M M o R d - e L l Terminal Recomm m en m d 2 ed Gauge Ap G p m a li u m c g a 2 e ble S S c i r z e e w N Ti g T m o h r t ( q e lb n u . i i e n n g .) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 2.5 to 6 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 2.5 to 6 20008 -, +1, +2 - 2.5 to 6 M4 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3) B1, B2 - 2.5 to 6 2.5<1> 2.5 to 6 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 2.5 to 6 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 2.5 to 6 20011 -, +1, +2 - 2.5 to 6 M4 (10 1 . . 6 2 t t o o 1 1 3 .5 .3) B1, B2 - 2.5 to 6 2.5<1> 2.5 to 6 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4 2.5 to 6 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 2.5 to 6 20018 -, +1, +2 - 4 to 6 M4 (10 1 . . 6 2 t t o o 1 1 3 .5 .3) B1, B2 - 2.5 to 6 4<1> 4 to 6 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 4 to 16 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 4 to 16 2.1 to 2.3 M4 20025 -, +1, +2 - 6 to 16 (18.6 to 20.4) B1, B2 - 4 to 6 6<2> 6 to 10 M5 (17 2 . . 7 0 t t o o 2 2 2 .5 .1) 3 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 6 to 16 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 10 6 to 16 2.1 to 2.3 M4 20033 -, +1, +2 - 16 (18.6 to 20.4) B1, B2 - 4 to 6 2.0 to 2.5 10 6 to 10 M5 (17.7 to 22.1) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 16 16 to 25 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 16 16 to 25 M6 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) -, +1, +2 - 16 to 25 20047 2.7 to 3.0 B1, B2 - 6 to 10 M5 (23.9 to 26.6) 16 10 to 16 M6 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 25 16 to 25 9.9 to 11.0 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 16 16 to 25 M8 (87.6 to 97.4) -, +1, +2 - 25 20060 2.7 to 3.0 B1, B2 - 10 to 16 M5 (23.9 to 26.6) 5.4 to 6.0 16 16 to 25 M6 (47.8 to 53.1)
| Model CIMR-L | Terminal | Recommended Gauge mm2 | Applicable Gauge mm2 | Screw Size | Tightening Torque Nm (lb.in.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 20008 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | M4 | 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| 2.5<1> | 2.5 to 6 | ||||
| 20011 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | M4 | 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| 2.5<1> | 2.5 to 6 | ||||
| 20018 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 4 | 2.5 to 6 | M4 | 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | - | 4 to 6 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| 4<1> | 4 to 6 | ||||
| 20025 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 6 | 4 to 16 | M4 | 2.1 to 2.3 (18.6 to 20.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 6 | 4 to 16 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | - | 6 to 16 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 4 to 6 | |||
| 6<2> | 6 to 10 | M5 | 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1) | ||
| 20033 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 10 | 6 to 16 | M4 | 2.1 to 2.3 (18.6 to 20.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 10 | 6 to 16 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | - | 16 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 4 to 6 | |||
| 10 | 6 to 10 | M5 | 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1) | ||
| 20047 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 16 | 16 to 25 | M6 | 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 16 | 16 to 25 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | - | 16 to 25 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 6 to 10 | M5 | 2.7 to 3.0 (23.9 to 26.6) | |
| 16 | 10 to 16 | M6 | 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) | ||
| 20060 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 25 | 16 to 25 | M8 | 9.9 to 11.0 (87.6 to 97.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 16 | 16 to 25 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | - | 25 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 10 to 16 | M5 | 2.7 to 3.0 (23.9 to 26.6) | |
| 16 | 16 to 25 | M6 | 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) |
Source page
Page 62
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 62 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
3.7 Main Circuit Wiring
CI M M o R d - e L l Terminal Recomm m en m d 2 ed Gauge Ap G p m a li u m c g a 2 e ble S S c i r z e e w N Ti g T m o h r t ( e q lb n u . i i e n n g .) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35 25 to 35 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 25 25 to 35 M8 9.9 to 11.0 (87.6to 97.4) -, +1, +2 - 25 to 35 20075 2.7 to 3.0 B1, B2 - 16 M5 (23.9 to 26.6) 16 16 to 25 M6 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35 25 to 50 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 35 25 to 50 20085 -, +1 - 35 to 50 M8 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) B1, B2 - 16 to 50 16 16 to 25 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 50 35 to 70 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 50 35 to 70 18 to 23 20115 -, +1 - 50 to 70 M10 (159 to 204) B1, B2 - 25 to 70 9 to 11 25 25 M8 (79.7 to 97.4) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 70 50 to 95 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 70 50 to 95 18 to 23 20145 -, +1 - 35 to 95 M10 (159 to 204) +3 - 50 to 95 9 to 11 35 25 to 35 (79.7 to 97.4) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 95 70 to 95 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 95 70 to 95 18 to 23 20180 -, +1 - 35 to 95 M10 (159 to 204) +3 - 50 to 95 9 to 11 50 25 to 50 (79.7 to 97.4) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 95 × 2P 95 to 150 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 95 × 2P 95 to 150 M12 32 to 40 (283 to 354) -, +1 - 70 to 150 20215 +3 - 35 to 150 M10 18 to 23 (159 to 204) 32 to 40 95 95 to 150 M12 (283 to 354) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 95 × 2P 95 to 150 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 95 × 2P 95 to 150 M12 32 to 40 (283 to 354) -, +1 - 70 to 150 20283 18 to 23 +3 - 70 to 150 M10 (159 to 204) 95 95 to 150 M12 32 to 40 (283 to 354) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 240 95 to 300 32 to 40 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 240 95 to 300 M12 (283 to 354) -, +1 - 125 to 300 20346 18 to 23 +3 - 70 to 300 M10 (159 to 204) 32 to 40 120 120 to 240 M12 (283 to 354) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 120 × 2P 95 to 300 32 to 40 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 300 95 to 300 M12 (283 to 354) -, +1 - 150 to 300 20415 +3 - 70 to 300 M10 18 to 23 (159 to 204) 120 120 to 240 M12 32 to 40 (283 to 354) <1> When using the wire of this gauge in accordance with IEC/EN 61800-5-1, install an ELCB. <2> When using the wire of this gauge in accordance with IEC/EN 61800-5-1, install an ELCB, or use copper wire of 10 mm2 (AWG 8). Note: When connecting peripheral devices and options to the terminals -, +1, +3, B1, and B2, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. For more information, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. 62 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Model CIMR-L | Terminal | Recommended Gauge mm2 | Applicable Gauge mm2 | Screw Size | Tightening Torque Nm (lb.in.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 20075 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 35 | 25 to 35 | M8 | 9.9 to 11.0 (87.6to 97.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 25 | 25 to 35 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | - | 25 to 35 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 16 | M5 | 2.7 to 3.0 (23.9 to 26.6) | |
| 16 | 16 to 25 | M6 | 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) | ||
| 20085 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 35 | 25 to 50 | M8 | 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 35 | 25 to 50 | |||
| -, +1 | - | 35 to 50 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 16 to 50 | |||
| 16 | 16 to 25 | ||||
| 20115 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 50 | 35 to 70 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 50 | 35 to 70 | |||
| -, +1 | - | 50 to 70 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 25 to 70 | |||
| 25 | 25 | M8 | 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) | ||
| 20145 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 70 | 50 to 95 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 70 | 50 to 95 | |||
| -, +1 | - | 35 to 95 | |||
| +3 | - | 50 to 95 | |||
| 35 | 25 to 35 | 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) | |||
| 20180 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 95 | 70 to 95 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 95 | 70 to 95 | |||
| -, +1 | - | 35 to 95 | |||
| +3 | - | 50 to 95 | |||
| 50 | 25 to 50 | 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) | |||
| 20215 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 95 × 2P | 95 to 150 | M12 | 32 to 40 (283 to 354) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 95 × 2P | 95 to 150 | |||
| -, +1 | - | 70 to 150 | |||
| +3 | - | 35 to 150 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) | |
| 95 | 95 to 150 | M12 | 32 to 40 (283 to 354) | ||
| 20283 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 95 × 2P | 95 to 150 | M12 | 32 to 40 (283 to 354) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 95 × 2P | 95 to 150 | |||
| -, +1 | - | 70 to 150 | |||
| +3 | - | 70 to 150 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) | |
| 95 | 95 to 150 | M12 | 32 to 40 (283 to 354) | ||
| 20346 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 240 | 95 to 300 | M12 | 32 to 40 (283 to 354) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 240 | 95 to 300 | |||
| -, +1 | - | 125 to 300 | |||
| +3 | - | 70 to 300 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) | |
| 120 | 120 to 240 | M12 | 32 to 40 (283 to 354) | ||
| 20415 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 120 × 2P | 95 to 300 | M12 | 32 to 40 (283 to 354) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 300 | 95 to 300 | |||
| -, +1 | - | 150 to 300 | |||
| +3 | - | 70 to 300 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) | |
| 120 | 120 to 240 | M12 | 32 to 40 (283 to 354) |
Source page
Page 63
3.7 Main Circuit Wiring
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 63 noitallatsnI lacirtcelE SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 63 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Three-Phase 400 V Class Table 3.3 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications (Three-Phase 400 V Class) CI M M o R d - e L l Terminal Recomm m en m d 2 ed Gauge Ap G p m a li u m c g a 2 e ble S S c i r z e e w N Ti g T m o h r t ( e q lb n u . i i e n n g .) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 2.5 to 6 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 2.5 to 6 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 5 -, +1, +2 - 2.5 to 6 M4 (10 1 . . 6 2 t t o o 1 1 3 .5 .3) B1, B2 - 2.5 to 6 2.5<1> 2.5 to 6 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 2.5 to 6 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 2.5 to 6 40009 -, +1, +2 - 2.5 to 6 M4 (10 1 . . 6 2 t t o o 1 1 3 .5 .3) B1, B2 - 2.5 to 6 2.5<1> 2.5 to 6 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2.5 2.5 to 16 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2.5 2.5 to 16 2.1 to 2.3 M4 40015 -, +1, +2 - 4 to 16 (18.6 to 20.4) B1, B2 - 4 to 6 2.0 to 2.5 2.5<1> 2.5 to 6 M5 (17.7 to 22.1) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 4 2.5 to 16 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 4 2.5 to 16 2.1 to 2.3 M4 40018 -, +1, +2 - 4 to 16 (18.6 to 20.4) B1, B2 - 4 to 6 2.0 to 2.5 4<1> 4 to 6 M5 (17.7 to 22.1) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 6 6 to 16 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 6 to 16 M5 3.6 to 4.0 (31.8 to 35.4) -, +1, +2 - 6 to 16 40024 2.7 to 3.0 B1, B2 - 6 to 10 M5 (23.9 to 26.6) 6<2> 6 to 10 M6 (47 5 . . 8 4 t t o o 5 6 3 .0 .1) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 10 10 to 16 3.6 to 4.0 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 6 6 to 16 M5 (31.8 to 35.4) -, +1, +2 - 6 to 16 40031 2.7 to 3.0 B1, B2 - 6 to 10 M5 (23.9 to 26.6) 5.4 to 6.0 10 6 to 16 M6 (47.8 to 53.1) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 16 16 to 25 5.4 to 6.0 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 16 16 to 25 M6 (47.8 to 53.1) -, +1, +2 - 16 to 25 40039 B1, B2 - 6 to 10 M5 2.7 to 3.0 (23.9 to 26.6) 16 10 to 16 M6 5.4 to 6.0 3 (47.8 to 53.1) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 16 10 to 50 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 16 10 to 50 40045 -, +1 - 16 to 50 M8 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) B1, B2 - 10 to 50 16 10 to 16 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 16 16 to 50 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 25 16 to 50 40060 -, +1 - 25 to 50 M8 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) B1, B2 - 16 to 50 16 16 to 25 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 25 16 to 70 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 25 25 to 70 40075 -, +1 - 25 to 70 M8 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) +3 - 16 to 70 16 16 to 25 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 35 25 to 70 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 35 25 to 70 40091 -, +1 - 25 to 70 M8 (79. 9 7 t t o o 1 9 1 7.4) +3 - 25 to 70 16 16 to 25
| Model CIMR-L | Terminal | Recommended Gauge mm2 | Applicable Gauge mm2 | Screw Size | Tightening Torque Nm (lb.in.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 40005 40006 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | M4 | 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| 2.5<1> | 2.5 to 6 | ||||
| 40009 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | M4 | 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| 2.5<1> | 2.5 to 6 | ||||
| 40015 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 16 | M4 | 2.1 to 2.3 (18.6 to 20.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 16 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | - | 4 to 16 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 4 to 6 | |||
| 2.5<1> | 2.5 to 6 | M5 | 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1) | ||
| 40018 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 4 | 2.5 to 16 | M4 | 2.1 to 2.3 (18.6 to 20.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 4 | 2.5 to 16 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | - | 4 to 16 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 4 to 6 | |||
| 4<1> | 4 to 6 | M5 | 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1) | ||
| 40024 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 6 | 6 to 16 | M5 | 3.6 to 4.0 (31.8 to 35.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 6 | 6 to 16 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | - | 6 to 16 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 6 to 10 | M5 | 2.7 to 3.0 (23.9 to 26.6) | |
| 6<2> | 6 to 10 | M6 | 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) | ||
| 40031 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 10 | 10 to 16 | M5 | 3.6 to 4.0 (31.8 to 35.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 6 | 6 to 16 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | - | 6 to 16 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 6 to 10 | M5 | 2.7 to 3.0 (23.9 to 26.6) | |
| 10 | 6 to 16 | M6 | 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) | ||
| 40039 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 16 | 16 to 25 | M6 | 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 16 | 16 to 25 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | - | 16 to 25 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 6 to 10 | M5 | 2.7 to 3.0 (23.9 to 26.6) | |
| 16 | 10 to 16 | M6 | 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) | ||
| 40045 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 16 | 10 to 50 | M8 | 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 16 | 10 to 50 | |||
| -, +1 | - | 16 to 50 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 10 to 50 | |||
| 16 | 10 to 16 | ||||
| 40060 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 16 | 16 to 50 | M8 | 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 25 | 16 to 50 | |||
| -, +1 | - | 25 to 50 | |||
| B1, B2 | - | 16 to 50 | |||
| 16 | 16 to 25 | ||||
| 40075 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 25 | 16 to 70 | M8 | 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 25 | 25 to 70 | |||
| -, +1 | - | 25 to 70 | |||
| +3 | - | 16 to 70 | |||
| 16 | 16 to 25 | ||||
| 40091 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 35 | 25 to 70 | M8 | 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 35 | 25 to 70 | |||
| -, +1 | - | 25 to 70 | |||
| +3 | - | 25 to 70 | |||
| 16 | 16 to 25 |
Source page
Page 64
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 64 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
3.7 Main Circuit Wiring
| Model CIMR-L | Terminal | Recommended Gauge mm2 | Applicable Gauge mm2 | Screw Size | Tightening Torque Nm (lb.in.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 40112 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 50 | 35 to 95 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 50 | 35 to 95 | |||
| -, +1 | - | 50 to 95 | |||
| +3 | - | 25 to 95 | |||
| 25 | 25 | ||||
| 40150 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 70 | 50 to 95 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 70 | 70 to 95 | |||
| -, +1 | - | 35 to 95 | |||
| +3 | - | 50 to 95 | |||
| 35 | 25 to 35 | ||||
| 40180 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 95 | 35 to 95 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 95 | 35 to 95 | |||
| -, +1 | - | 35 to 150 | |||
| +3 | - | 25 to 70 | |||
| 50 | 50 to 150 | ||||
| 40216 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 120 | 95 to 300 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 120 | 95 to 300 | |||
| -, +1 | - | 70 to 300 | |||
| +3 | - | 35 to 300 | |||
| 70 | 70 to 240 |
Source page
Page 65
3.7 Main Circuit Wiring
| Cable Length | 50 m (164 ft.) or less | 100 m (328 ft.) or less | Greater than 100 m (328 ft.) |
|---|---|---|---|
| Carrier Frequency | 15 kHz or less | 5 kHz or less | 2 kHz or less |
Source page
Page 66
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 66 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
3.7 Main Circuit Wiring
Wiring the Main Circuit Terminal
Figure3.16
A - Protecting Cover Figure 3.17 Protecting Cover to Prevent Miswiring (CIMR-L20047)
Main Circuit Connection Diagram Refer to Main Circuit Connection Diagram on page 53 when wiring terminals on the main power circuit of the drive.
66 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 67
3.8 Control Circuit Wiring
| Type | No. | Terminal Name (Function) | Function (Signal Level) Default Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Digital Inputs | S1 | Up Command (Closed: Up, Open: Stop) | Photocoupler 24 Vdc, 8mA Use the wire link between terminals SC and SN or between SC and SP to select sinking or sourcing, and to select the power supply. | 367 |
| S2 | Down Command (Closed: Down, Open: Stop) | |||
| S3 | Multi-function input 1 (Nominal Speed) | |||
| S4 | Multi-function input 2 (Inspection Operation) | |||
| S5 | Multi-function input 3 (Intermediate Speed 1) | |||
| S6 | Multi-function input 4 (Leveling Speed) | |||
| S7 | Multi-function input 5 (Not used) | |||
| S8 | Multi-function input 6 (Not used) | |||
| Digital Input Power Supply | SC | Multi-function input common | 24 Vdc, 150 mA (only when DI-A3 is not used) Use the wire jumper between terminals SC and SN or between SC and SP to select sinking or sourcing, and to select the power supply. | 73 |
| SN | 0 V | |||
| SP | +24 Vdc | |||
| Safe Disable Inputs | H1 | Safe Disable input 1 | 24 Vdc, 8 mA One or both open: Drive output disabled Both closed: Normal operation Internal impedance: 3.3 kΩ Off time of at least 1 ms Set the S3 jumper to select sinking or sourcing, and to select the power supply. | 446 |
| H2 | Safe Disable input 2 | |||
| HC | Safe Disable function common | Common for the Safe Disable function | ||
| Analog Inputs | +V | Power supply for analog inputs | 10.5 Vdc (max allowable current 20 mA) | 157 |
| -V | Power supply for analog inputs | -10.5 Vdc (max allowable current 20 mA) | - | |
| A1 | Multi-function analog input 1 (Speed reference bias) | -10 to 10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc (input impedance: 20 kΩ) | 157 204 | |
| A2 | Multi-function analog input 2 (Not used) | -10 to 10 Vdc, 0 to 10 Vdc (input impedance: 20 kΩ) | 157 205 | |
| AC | Analog input common | 0 V | 157 | |
| E (G) | Ground for shielded lines and option cards | - | - |
Source page
Page 68
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 68 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
3.8 Control Circuit Wiring
Output Terminals
68 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Type | No. | Terminal Name (Function) | Function (Signal Level) Default Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Fault Relay | MA | N.O. | 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A; 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA | 195 |
| MB | N.C. output | |||
| MC | Fault output common | |||
| Multi-Function Relay Output | M1 | Multi-function relay output 1 (Brake release command) | Contact relay output 30 Vdc, 10 mA to 1 A 250 Vac, 10 mA to 1 A Minimum load: 5 Vdc, 10 mA | 195 |
| M2 | ||||
| M3 | Multi-function relay output 2 (Output contactor close command) | |||
| M4 | ||||
| M5 | Multi-function relay output 3 (Drive ready) | |||
| M6 | ||||
| Multi-Function Photocoupler Output | P1 | Photocoupler output 1 (During Frequency output) | 48 Vdc, 2 to 50 mA | - |
| C1 | ||||
| P2 | Photocoupler output 2 (Not Used/Through Mode) | |||
| C2 | ||||
| Monitor Output | FM | Analog monitor output 1 (Output speed) | -10 to +10 Vdc or 0 to +10 Vdc | 207 |
| AM | Analog monitor output 2 (Output current) | |||
| AC | Monitor common | 0 V | - | |
| Safety Monitor Output | DM+ | Safety monitor output | Outputs status of Safe Disable function. Up to +48 Vdc 50 mA | 449 |
| DM- | Safety monitor output common |
| Type | No. | Signal Name | Function (Signal Level) | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication <1> | R+ | Communications input (+) | MEMOBUS/Modbus communication: Use an RS-485 or RS-422 cable to connect the drive. | RS-485/422 MEMOBUS/Modbus communication protocol 115.2 kbps (max.) |
| R- | Communications input (-) | |||
| S+ | Communications output (+) | |||
| S- | Communications output (-) | |||
| IG | Shield ground | 0 V |
Source page
Page 69
3.8 Control Circuit Wiring
| Terminal Termi Block | Screw nal Size | Tightening Torque Nm (lb.in.) | Bare Wire Terminal | Column | Ferrule-Type Terminal | Column | Wire Type |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Applicable Wire Size mm2 (AWG) | Recommended Wire Size mm2 (AWG) | Applicable Wire Size mm2 (AWG) | Recommended Wire Size mm2 (AWG) | ||||
| S1 to S8, SN V+, AC, V-, FM, AM, P2-C2, HC, TB1, TB2 DM+, DM-, I TB3, TB4 S+, S-, MA, M1-M2, M M5-M E (G | , SC, SP, A1, A2, P1-C1, H1, H2, G, R+, R-, - MB, MC, 3-M4, 6 ) | - | Stranded wire: 0.2 to 1.0 (24 to 17) Solid wire: 0.2 to 1.5 (24 to 16) | 0.75 (18) 1.0 (16) | 0.25 to 0.5 (24 to 20) | 0.5 (20) | Shielded wire, etc. |
| TB5 E (G | ) M3.5 | 0.5 to 1.0 (4.4 to 8.9) | 0.5 to 2 (20 to 14) | 1.25 (12) | - | - |
Source page
Page 70
3.8 Control Circuit Wiring
Ferrule-Type Wire Terminals
Yaskawa recommends using CRIMPFOX 6, a crimping tool manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT, to prepare wire ends with insulated sleeves before connecting to the drive. Refer to Table 3.9 for dimensions. Figure3.18 d1
d2 Figure 3.19 Ferrule Dimensions Table 3.9 Ferrule Terminal Types and Sizes
Size mm2 (AWG) Type L (mm) d1 (mm) d2 (mm) Manufacturer 0.25 (24) AI 0.25-8YE 12.5 0.8 2.0 0.34 (22) AI 0.34-8TQ 12.5 0.8 2.0 PHOENIX CONTACT AI 0.5-8WH 0.5 (20) AI 0.5-8OG 14 1.1 2.5 Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal This section describes the proper procedures and preparations for wiring the control terminals.
NOTICE: Connect the shield of shielded cable to the appropriate ground terminal. Improper equipment grounding could result in drive or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips. NOTICE: Separate wiring for output terminals MA, MB, MC, M1 and M2 from wiring to other control circuit lines. Improper wiring practices could result in drive or equipment malfunction or nuisance trips. NOTICE: Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, -, +1, +2) and other high-power lines. Improper wiring practices could result in drive malfunction due to electrical interference. NOTICE: Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals. Improper application of peripheral devices could result in drive performance degradation due to improper power supply. NOTICE: Do not exceed 50 meters (164 ft.) for the control line between the drive and the operator when using an analog signal from a remote source to supply the frequency reference. Failure to comply could result in poor system performance. NOTICE: Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring. Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires, and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive. NOTICE: Insulate shields with tape or shrink tubing to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment. Improper wiring practices could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to short circuit.
70 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual mm 8 L SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 70 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 YEG
| Size mm2 (AWG) | Type | L (mm) | d1 (mm) | d2 (mm) | Manufacturer |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0.25 (24) | AI 0.25-8YE | 12.5 | 0.8 | 2.0 | PHOENIX CONTACT |
| 0.34 (22) | AI 0.34-8TQ | 12.5 | 0.8 | 2.0 | |
| 0.5 (20) | AI 0.5-8WH AI 0.5-8OG | 14 | 1.1 | 2.5 |
Source page
Page 71
3.8 Control Circuit Wiring
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 71 noitallatsnI lacirtcelE SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 71 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Wire the control circuit only after terminals have been properly grounded and main circuit wiring is complete. Refer to Figure 3.20 and Figure 3.21 for details. Prepare the ends of the control circuit wiring as shown in Figure 3.22. Refer to Wire Size on page 69. NOTICE: Use shielded twisted-pair cables as indicated to prevent operating faults. Improper wiring practices could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to electrical interference. Connect control wires as shown in Figure 3.20. Figure3.19 Push wire end into terminal Control Wires YEG Terminal Board Figure 3.20 Terminal Board Wiring Guide To disconnect control wires from the terminals use the procedure described in Figure 3.21. Grasp the wire where it enters the terminal with a pair of pliers, then use a straight-edge screw driver to release the terminal and pull the wire out. If it fits tightly, e.g. if ferrules are used, turn the wire for about 45° and then pull it gently out. Use this procedure to remove the wire jumper between terminals HC, H1 and H2 that is preinstalled at shipping. Figure3.20 Push down to open the terminal Turn the wire 45 and pull it out of the terminal. 45 Use a screwdriver with a blade width of max 2.5 mm and a thickness of max 0.4 mm Control Wires Terminal Board YEG Figure 3.21 Removing Wires from the Terminal Board When connecting control wires to the terminals, use shielded twisted-pair wires (treating wire ends as shown in Figure 3.22 and connect the shield to the ground terminal (E [G]) of the drive. Figure3.21 E B A C 3 D A - Drive side D - Shield sheath (insulate with tape or heat-shrink tubing) B - Insulation E - Shield C - Control device side Figure 3.22 Preparing the Ends of Shielded Cables NOTICE: Do not exceed 50 meters (164 ft.) for the control line between the drive and the operator when using an analog signal from a remote source to supply the frequency reference. Failure to comply could result in poor system performance.
Source page
Page 72
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 72 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
3.8 Control Circuit Wiring
Switches and Jumpers on the Terminal Board
The terminal board is equipped with several switches used to adapt the drive I/Os to the external control signals. Figure 3.23 shows the location of these switches. Refer to Control I/O Configuration on page 73 for setting instructions. Figure3.22 YEG
Jumper S3 Terminal H1/H2 Sink/Source Sel.
E(G) HC H1 H2 DM+ DM- IG R+ R- S+ S- M3 M4 M6 V+ AC V- A1 A2 FM AM AC P1 C1 P2 C2 M1 M2 M5 DIP Switch S2 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 SN SC SP MA MB MC RS-422/485 Termination Resistor Off On
Figure 3.23 Locations of Jumpers and Switches on the Terminal Board
72 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 73
3.9 Control I/O Configuration
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 73 noitallatsnI lacirtcelE SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 73 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 3.9 Control I/O Configuration Setting Sink/Source with Input Terminals SN and SP Use the wire jumper between terminals SC and SP or SC and SN to select between Sink mode, Source mode or external power supply for the digital inputs S1 to S8 as shown in Table 3.10 (Default: Sink mode, internal power supply). NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Do not short terminals SP and SN. Failure to comply will damage the drive. Table 3.10 Digital Input Sink / Source / External Power Supply Selection Drive Internal Power Supply (Terminal SN and SP) External 24 Vdc Power Supply S7 S7 S8 S8 Sinking Mode (NPN) SN SN SC SC 24 Vdc 24 Vdc SP External SP 24 Vdc ±10% S7 S7 S8 S8 Sourcing Mode (PNP) SN SN SC SC 24 Vdc 24 Vdc SP External SP 24 Vdc ±10% Sinking/Sourcing Mode Selection for Safe Disable Inputs Use jumper S3 on the terminal board to select between Sink mode, Source mode or external power supply for the Safe Disable inputs H1 and H2 as shown in Table 3.11 (Default: Sink mode, internal power supply). Table 3.11 Safe Disable Input Sink / Source / External Power Supply Selection Drive Internal Power Supply External 24 Vdc Power Supply 3 Jumper S3 Jumper S3 24 Vdc 24 Vdc HC HC External 24 Vdc Sinking Mode H1 H1 H2 H2 Jumper S3 Jumper S3 24 Vdc 24 Vdc HC HC External 24 Vdc Sourcing Mode H1 H1 H2 H2
| Column | Drive Internal Power Supply (Terminal SN and SP) | External 24 Vdc Power Supply |
|---|---|---|
| Sinking Mode (NPN) | S7 S8 SN SC 24 Vdc SP | S7 S8 SN SC 24 Vdc External SP 24 Vdc ±10% |
| Sourcing Mode (PNP) | S7 S8 SN SC 24 Vdc SP | S7 S8 SN SC 24 Vdc External SP 24 Vdc ±10% |
| S8 | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| SN SC | ||||
| SC |
| S8 | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| SN SC |
| S8 | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| SN SC | |||
| SC |
| S8 | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| SN SC |
| Column | Drive Internal Power Supply | External 24 Vdc Power Supply |
|---|---|---|
| Sinking Mode | Jumper S3 24 Vdc HC H1 H2 | Jumper S3 24 Vdc HC External 24 Vdc H1 H2 |
| Sourcing Mode | Jumper S3 24 Vdc HC H1 H2 | Jumper S3 24 Vdc HC External 24 Vdc H1 H2 |
| H1 | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| H2 |
Source page
Page 74
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 74 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
3.9 Control I/O Configuration
MEMOBUS/Modbus Termination
This drive is equipped with a built in termination resistor for the RS-422/485 communication port. DIP switch S2 enables or disabled the termination resistor as shown in Table 3.12. The OFF position is the default. The termination resistor should be placed to the ON position when the drive is the last in a series of slave drives. Refer to Switches and Jumpers on the Terminal Board on page 72 for locating switch S2.
Table 3.12 MEMOBUS/Modbus Switch Settings S2 Position Description ON Internal termination resistor ON OFF Internal termination resistor OFF (default setting) Note: Refer to MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications on page 399 for details on MEMOBUS/Modbus.
74 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| S2 Position | Description |
|---|---|
| ON | Internal termination resistor ON |
| OFF | Internal termination resistor OFF (default setting) |
Source page
Page 75
3.10 Connect to a PC
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 75 noitallatsnI lacirtcelE SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 75 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 3.10 Connect to a PC This drive is equipped with a USB port (type-B). The drive can connect to a USB port on a PC using a USB 2.0, AB-type cable (sold separately). After connecting the drive to a PC, Yaskawa DriveWizard Plus software can be used to monitor drive performance and manage parameter settings. Contact Yaskawa for more information on DriveWizard Plus. Download and install the USB driver before connecting L1000A to a PC with the USB cable. The driver is available at www.yaskawa.eu.com Figure3.23 USB Cable (Type-AB) (Type-B) (Type-A) PC YEG Figure 3.24 Connecting to a PC (USB) 3
Source page
Page 76
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 76 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
3.11 Wiring Checklist
3.11 Wiring Checklist
No. Item Page Drive, peripherals, option cards 1 Check drive model number to ensure receipt of correct model. -
2 Make sure you have the correct braking resistors, DC reactors, noise filters, and other peripheral devices installed. 322 3 Check the option card model number. 322 Installation area and physical setup 4 Ensure that the area surrounding the drive complies with specifications. 37 Power supply voltage, output voltage 5 The voltage from the power supply should be within the input voltage specification range of the drive. 176
6 The voltage rating for the motor should match the drive output specifications. 27 386 27 7 Verify that the drive is properly sized to run the motor. 386 Main circuit wiring 8 Confirm proper branch circuit protection as specified by national and local codes. 50 9 Properly wire the power supply to drive terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. 53 Properly wire the drive and motor together. 10 The motor lines and drive output terminals R/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 should match in order to produce the desired phase order. If the phase order 64 is incorrect, the drive will rotate in the opposite direction. 11 Use 600 Vac vinyl-sheathed wire for the power supply and motor lines. 60 Use the correct wire gauges for the main circuit. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page60. 60 • Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge when the voltage drop is greater than 2% of motor 12 rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is suitable for the terminal block. Use the following formula to calculate the amount of voltage drop: 60 Line drop voltage (V) = 3 × wire resistance (Ω/km) × wire length (m) × current (A) × 10-3 • If the cable between the drive and motor exceeds 50 m (164 ft.), adjust the carrier frequency set to C6-02 accordingly. 65 13 Properly ground the drive. Review page 65. 65 Tightly fasten all terminal screws (control circuit terminals, grounding terminals). 14 Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page60. 60 15 Install a magnetic contactor when using a dynamic braking option. Properly install the resistor and ensure that overload protection shuts off the 334 power supply using the magnetic contactor. 16 Verify phase advancing capacitors, input noise filters, or residual current devices are NOT installed on the output side of the drive. - Control circuit wiring 17 Use twisted-pair line for all drive control circuit wiring. 67 18 Connect the shields of shielded wiring to the ground terminal (E [G] ). 70 19 Properly wire any option cards. 69 Check for any other wiring mistakes. 20 - Only use a multimeter to check wiring. Properly fasten the control circuit terminal screws in the drive. 21 Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page60. 60 22 Pick up all wire clippings. - 23 Ensure that no frayed wires on the terminal block are touching other terminals or connections. - 24 Properly separate control circuit wiring and main circuit wiring. - 25 Analog signal line wiring should not exceed 50 m (164 ft.). - 26 Safe Disable input wiring should not exceed 30 m (98 ft.). - 27 Check the logic of the Safe Disable monitor output signals (terminals DM+ and DM-). 446
76 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Column | No. | Item | Page |
|---|---|---|---|
| Drive, peripherals, option cards | |||
| 1 | Check drive model number to ensure receipt of correct model. | - | |
| 2 | Make sure you have the correct braking resistors, DC reactors, noise filters, and other peripheral devices installed. | 322 | |
| 3 | Check the option card model number. | 322 | |
| Installation area and physical setup | |||
| 4 | Ensure that the area surrounding the drive complies with specifications. | 37 | |
| Power supply voltage, output voltage | |||
| 5 | The voltage from the power supply should be within the input voltage specification range of the drive. | 176 | |
| 6 | The voltage rating for the motor should match the drive output specifications. | 27 386 | |
| 7 | Verify that the drive is properly sized to run the motor. | 27 386 | |
| Main circuit wiring | |||
| 8 | Confirm proper branch circuit protection as specified by national and local codes. | 50 | |
| 9 | Properly wire the power supply to drive terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. | 53 | |
| 10 | Properly wire the drive and motor together. The motor lines and drive output terminals R/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 should match in order to produce the desired phase order. If the phase order is incorrect, the drive will rotate in the opposite direction. | 64 | |
| 11 | Use 600 Vac vinyl-sheathed wire for the power supply and motor lines. | 60 | |
| 12 | Use the correct wire gauges for the main circuit. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page60. • Consider the amount of voltage drop when selecting wire gauges. Increase the wire gauge when the voltage drop is greater than 2% of motor rated voltage. Ensure the wire gauge is suitable for the terminal block. Use the following formula to calculate the amount of voltage drop: Line drop voltage (V) = 3 × wire resistance (Ω/km) × wire length (m) × current (A) × 10-3 • If the cable between the drive and motor exceeds 50 m (164 ft.), adjust the carrier frequency set to C6-02 accordingly. | 60 60 65 | |
| 13 | Properly ground the drive. Review page 65. | 65 | |
| 14 | Tightly fasten all terminal screws (control circuit terminals, grounding terminals). Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page60. | 60 | |
| 15 | Install a magnetic contactor when using a dynamic braking option. Properly install the resistor and ensure that overload protection shuts off the power supply using the magnetic contactor. | 334 | |
| 16 | Verify phase advancing capacitors, input noise filters, or residual current devices are NOT installed on the output side of the drive. | - | |
| Control circuit wiring | |||
| 17 | Use twisted-pair line for all drive control circuit wiring. | 67 | |
| 18 | Connect the shields of shielded wiring to the ground terminal (E [G] ). | 70 | |
| 19 | Properly wire any option cards. | 69 | |
| 20 | Check for any other wiring mistakes. Only use a multimeter to check wiring. | - | |
| 21 | Properly fasten the control circuit terminal screws in the drive. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page60. | 60 | |
| 22 | Pick up all wire clippings. | - | |
| 23 | Ensure that no frayed wires on the terminal block are touching other terminals or connections. | - | |
| 24 | Properly separate control circuit wiring and main circuit wiring. | - | |
| 25 | Analog signal line wiring should not exceed 50 m (164 ft.). | - | |
| 26 | Safe Disable input wiring should not exceed 30 m (98 ft.). | - | |
| 27 | Check the logic of the Safe Disable monitor output signals (terminals DM+ and DM-). | 446 |
Source page
Page 77
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 77 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Start-Up Programming & Operation
This chapter explains the functions of the digital operator and provides programming instructions for initial drive operation.
4.1 SECTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 4.2 USING THE DIGITAL OPERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 4.3 THE DRIVE AND PROGRAMMING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 4.4 START-UP FLOWCHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
4.5 AUTO-TUNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 4.6 SETUP PROCEDURE FOR ELEVATOR APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 4.7 SETUP TROUBLESHOOTING AND POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 4.8 VERIFYING PARAMETER SETTINGS AND BACKING UP CHANGES. . . . . . . 149
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 77
Source page
Page 78
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 78 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.1 Section Safety
4.1 Section Safety
Do not change wiring, remove covers, connectors or options cards, or attempt to service the drive with power applied to the drive. Disconnect all power to the drive, and lock out the power source. After shutting off the power wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive front cover safety label. Measure the DC bus voltage for unsafe voltages to confirm safe level before servicing to prevent electric shock The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. Failure to comply will result in serious injury or death from electric shock.
WA RNING Sudden movement Hazard
Do not perform elevator test operations or drive setup when the elevator is occupied. The elevator car may not stop properly during test operation resulting in serious injury to personnel. Additionally, ensure these parameters are set correctly and tested before operating an occupied elevator: • parameter o1-20 (Traction Sheave Diameter) • parameter S5-11 (Deceleration Distance), or • parameter S5-12 (Stop Distance) Use the Initial Pole Search Status Signal (H2- = 61) to interlock the brake to ensure the brake is not released before the Initial Magnetic Pole Search is completed.
Failure to comply may cause inadvertent elevator movement resulting in serious injury. This safety message is applicable under these conditions: -When applying a PM motor, with an external brake sequence, and the PG-F3 option is not being used. Ensure all personnel are clear of the motor and elevator before Auto-Tuning. The motor or equipment may suddenly rotate during the Auto-Tuning process, which may result in serious personal injury or death. Electrical Shock Hazard
• If the motor is coasting, make sure the power to the drive is turned on and the drive output has completely stopped before closing the load switch.
78 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| DANGER |
|---|
| Electrical Shock Hazard Do not change wiring, remove covers, connectors or options cards, or attempt to service the drive with power applied to the drive. Disconnect all power to the drive, and lock out the power source. After shutting off the power wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive front cover safety label. Measure the DC bus voltage for unsafe voltages to confirm safe level before servicing to prevent electric shock The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. Failure to comply will result in serious injury or death from electric shock. |
| WA RNING |
|---|
| Sudden movement Hazard Do not perform elevator test operations or drive setup when the elevator is occupied. The elevator car may not stop properly during test operation resulting in serious injury to personnel. Additionally, ensure these parameters are set correctly and tested before operating an occupied elevator: • parameter o1-20 (Traction Sheave Diameter) • parameter S5-11 (Deceleration Distance), or • parameter S5-12 (Stop Distance) Use the Initial Pole Search Status Signal (H2- = 61) to interlock the brake to ensure the brake is not released before the Initial Magnetic Pole Search is completed. Failure to comply may cause inadvertent elevator movement resulting in serious injury. This safety message is applicable under these conditions: -When applying a PM motor, with an external brake sequence, and the PG-F3 option is not being used. Ensure all personnel are clear of the motor and elevator before Auto-Tuning. The motor or equipment may suddenly rotate during the Auto-Tuning process, which may result in serious personal injury or death. Electrical Shock Hazard When a drive is running a PM motor, voltage continues to be generated at the motor terminals after the drive is shut off while the motor coasts to stop. Take the precautions described below to prevent shock and injury: • In applications where the machine can still rotate even though the drive has fully stopped a load, install a switch to the drive output side to disconnect the motor and the drive. • Do not allow an external force to rotate the motor beyond the maximum allowable speed or to rotate the motor when the drive has been shut off. • Wait for at least the time specified on the warning label after opening the load switch on the output side before inspecting the drive or performing any maintenance. • Do not open and close the load switch while the motor is running, as this can damage the drive. • If the motor is coasting, make sure the power to the drive is turned on and the drive output has completely stopped before closing the load switch. |
Source page
Page 79
4.1 Section Safety
| WA RNING |
|---|
| Sudden Movement Hazard Ensure all personnel are clear of the motor and elevator before Auto-Tuning. The motor or equipment may suddenly rotate during the Auto-Tuning process, which may result in serious personal injury or death. The drive is capable of running the motor at high speed. Verify the maximum drive output frequency before starting the drive. Failure to comply may cause injury or death due to inadvertent high speed operation. Verify drive parameter b1-03 Stopping Method is set to 0:Ramp to Stop before starting the drive. Failure to comply may cause the elevator to free-fall when the Up/Down command is removed. System may start unexpectedly upon application of power when the Auto-Reset function is enabled resulting in death or serious injury. Use care when enabling Auto-Reset as this function may cause unintended start of the elevator. Ensure holding brake circuits are properly configured, load equipment may fall or drop during power loss or drive fault, which could result in death or serious injury. • Provide a separate holding brake if necessary. • Always construct the external sequence to confirm that the holding brake is activated in the event of an emergency, a power failure, or an abnormality in the drive. • If using the drive with an elevator, provide safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator from dropping. Install additional emergency circuits separately from drive emergency stop circuits. Failure to comply may result in personal injury. Remove the Up/Down Command before resetting alarms and faults. Failure to comply can result in death or serious injury. The drive and motor may start unexpectedly during Auto-Tuning, which could result in death or serious injury. • Remove main power from the drive before servicing the drive or motor. • Do not touch the motor during Auto-Tuning. • Ensure the area surrounding the drive motor and load are clear before proceeding with Auto-Tuning. System may start unexpectedly, resulting in death or serious injury. Before starting or applying power to the drive, clear all personnel from the drive, motor and machine area and check sequence and safety circuitry. Secure covers, couplings, shaft keys and machine loads. Electrical Shock Hazard Do not operate equipment with covers removed. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. The diagrams in this section may include drives without covers or safety shields to illustrate details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual. Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. |
| CAUTION |
|---|
| Burn Hazard Do not touch a hot drive heatsink. Failure to comply could result in minor or moderate injury. Shut off the power to the drive when replacing the cooling fan. To prevent burns, wait at least 15 minutes and make sure heatsink has cooled down. |
Source page
Page 80
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 80 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.1 Section Safety
NOTICE Equipment Hazard
Only perform Rotational Auto-Tuning with the motor disconnected from the load (ropes removed from traction sheave). Failure to comply will cause the drive will be unable to automatically set motor parameters correctly. This will result in erroneous operation. Do not check or test control circuit signals while the drive is running. Improper use of test equipment could result in damage to the drive circuitry by short circuit.
Do not use the Rescue Operation feature for extended periods. Failure to comply may result in drive heat sink overtemperature alarms (oH). Set parameter E1-01 to match the input voltage of the drive. The drive input voltage (not motor voltage) must be set in E1-01 for the protective features to function properly. Failure to set the correct drive input voltage may result in improper drive operation.
Use the drives Torque Detection function to notify the PLC of potential overcurrent or overload situations at the load prior to a drive overload fault. Failure to comply may cause the drive to fault leaving the motor coasting, potentially damaging equipment. Correctly set parameter o2-04 when replacing the control terminal board. Failure to comply may result in drive damage due to lack of protective functions and poor drive performance.
80 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| NOTICE |
|---|
| Equipment Hazard Only perform Rotational Auto-Tuning with the motor disconnected from the load (ropes removed from traction sheave). Failure to comply will cause the drive will be unable to automatically set motor parameters correctly. This will result in erroneous operation. Do not check or test control circuit signals while the drive is running. Improper use of test equipment could result in damage to the drive circuitry by short circuit. Do not use the Rescue Operation feature for extended periods. Failure to comply may result in drive heat sink overtemperature alarms (oH). Set parameter E1-01 to match the input voltage of the drive. The drive input voltage (not motor voltage) must be set in E1-01 for the protective features to function properly. Failure to set the correct drive input voltage may result in improper drive operation. Use the drives Torque Detection function to notify the PLC of potential overcurrent or overload situations at the load prior to a drive overload fault. Failure to comply may cause the drive to fault leaving the motor coasting, potentially damaging equipment. Correctly set parameter o2-04 when replacing the control terminal board. Failure to comply may result in drive damage due to lack of protective functions and poor drive performance. |
Source page
Page 81
4.2 Using the Digital Operator
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 81 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 81 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 4.2 Using the Digital Operator Use the digital operator to enter Run and Stop commands, edit parameters, and display data including fault and alarm information. Keys and Displays Figure4.1 DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALM 12 1 11 F1 F2 YEG 2 ESC R LO E 9 3 8 RESET ENTER 10 RUN STOP 4 5 6 7 Figure 4.1 Keys and Displays on the Digital Operator No. Display Name Function F1 1 Function Key The functions assigned to F1 and F2 vary depending on the currently displayed menu. The name of each (F1, F2) function appears in the lower half of the display window. F2 • Returns to the previous display. 2 ESC ESC Key • Moves the cursor one space to the left. • Pressing and holding this button will return to the Speed Reference display. • Moves the cursor to the right. 3 RESET RESET Key • Resets the drive to clear a fault situation. Starts the drive in the LOCAL mode. The Run LED 4 RUN RUN Key • • i f s la o s n h , e s w d h u e r n i n th g e d d e r c i e v l e e r i a s t i o o p n e r t a o t i s n to g p t h o e r m wh o e to n r . the speed reference is 0. • flashes quickly, the drive is disabled by a DI, the drive was stopped using an emergency stop DI, or an Up/ Down command was active during power up. 5 Up Arrow Key Scrolls up to display the next item, select parameter numbers, and increment setting values. 6 Down Arrow Key Scrolls down to display the previous item, select parameter numbers, and decrements setting values. 7 STOP STOP Key<1> Stops drive operation. • Enters parameter values and settings. 8 ENTER Key ENTER • Selects a menu item to move between displays. 4 Switches drive control between the operator (LOCAL) and the control circuit terminals (REMOTE) for the 9 LO LO/RE Selection Key<2> Run command and speed reference. The LED is on when the drive is in the LOCAL mode (operation from RE keypad). 10 RUN Light Lit while the drive is operating the motor. Refer to page 84 for details. RUN 11 LO LO/RE Light Lit while the operator is selected to run the drive (LOCAL mode). Refer to page 84 for details. RE 12 ALM LED Light Refer to ALARM (ALM) LED Displays on page83. <1> The STOP key has highest priority. Pressing the STOP key will always cause the drive to stop the motor, even if an Up/Down command is active at any external Up/Down command source. To disable the STOP key priority, set parameter o2-02 to 0. <2> The LO/RE key can only switch between LOCAL and REMOTE when the drive is stopped. By default settings the LO/RE key function is disabled. To allow using the LO/RE key for switching between LOCAL and REMOTE, set parameter o2-01 to 1.
| DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALM F1 F2 ESC R LO E RESET ENTER RUN STOP | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| RUN | STOP |
| No. | Display | Name | Function |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | F1 F2 | Function Key (F1, F2) | The functions assigned to F1 and F2 vary depending on the currently displayed menu. The name of each function appears in the lower half of the display window. |
| 2 | ESC | ESC Key | • Returns to the previous display. • Moves the cursor one space to the left. • Pressing and holding this button will return to the Speed Reference display. |
| 3 | RESET | RESET Key | • Moves the cursor to the right. • Resets the drive to clear a fault situation. |
| 4 | RUN | RUN Key | Starts the drive in the LOCAL mode. The Run LED • is on, when the drive is operating the motor. • flashes during deceleration to stop or when the speed reference is 0. • flashes quickly, the drive is disabled by a DI, the drive was stopped using an emergency stop DI, or an Up/ Down command was active during power up. |
| 5 | Up Arrow Key | Scrolls up to display the next item, select parameter numbers, and increment setting values. | |
| 6 | Down Arrow Key | Scrolls down to display the previous item, select parameter numbers, and decrements setting values. | |
| 7 | STOP | STOP Key<1> | Stops drive operation. |
| 8 | ENTER | ENTER Key | • Enters parameter values and settings. • Selects a menu item to move between displays. |
| 9 | LO RE | LO/RE Selection Key<2> | Switches drive control between the operator (LOCAL) and the control circuit terminals (REMOTE) for the Run command and speed reference. The LED is on when the drive is in the LOCAL mode (operation from keypad). |
| 10 | RUN | RUN Light | Lit while the drive is operating the motor. Refer to page 84 for details. |
| 11 | LO RE | LO/RE Light | Lit while the operator is selected to run the drive (LOCAL mode). Refer to page 84 for details. |
| 12 | ALM LED Light | Refer to ALARM (ALM) LED Displays on page83. |
Source page
Page 82
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 82 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.2 Using the Digital Operator
LCD Display
Figure4.2 1 2 3
- MODE - DRV Rdy YEG Speed Ref (OPR) 4 5 U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF 6 FWD FWD/REV
9 8 7 Figure 4.2 LCD Display Table 4.1 Display and Contents
No. Name Display Content MODE Displayed when in Mode Selection. MONITR Displayed when in Monitor Mode. VERIFY Indicates the Verify Menu. 1 Operation Mode Menus PRMSET Displayed when in Parameter Setting Mode. A.TUNE Displayed during Auto-Tuning. SETUP Displayed when in Setup Mode. DRV Displayed when in Drive Mode. 2 Mode Display Area PRG Displayed when in Programming Mode. 3 Ready Rdy Indicates the drive is ready to run. 4 Data Display - Displays specific data and operation data. OPR Displayed when the speed reference source is assigned to the LCD Operator. Speed Reference Source 5 Assignment<1> COM Displayed when the speed reference source is assigned to MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication. OP Displayed when the speed reference is assigned to an option card. RSEQ Displayed when the Up/Down command is supplied from a remote source. 6 LO/RE LSEQ Displayed when the Up/Down command is supplied from the operator keypad. Display<2> RREF Displayed when the speed reference is supplied from a remote source. LREF Displayed when the speed reference is supplied from the operator keypad. HELP Pressing F1 displays the Help menu. Function Key 1 ← Pressing F1 scrolls the cursor to the left. 7 (F1) HOME Pressing F1 returns to the top menu (Speed Reference). ESC Pressing F1 returns to the previous display. FWD During Up command 8 FWD/REV REV During Down command FWD/REV Pressing F2 switches between Up and Down when the Up/Down command is set from the digital operator. Function Key 2 DATA Pressing F2 scrolls to the next display. 9 (F2) → Pressing F2 scrolls the cursor to the right. RESET Pressing F2 resets the existing drive fault or error. <1> Displayed when in Drive Mode. <2> Displayed when in Drive Mode and Monitor Mode.
82 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWD FWD/REV | - MODE - | Column | DRV | Column | Column | Rdy | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Speed Ref | (OPR) |
| No. | Name | Display | Content |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | Operation Mode Menus | MODE | Displayed when in Mode Selection. |
| MONITR | Displayed when in Monitor Mode. | ||
| VERIFY | Indicates the Verify Menu. | ||
| PRMSET | Displayed when in Parameter Setting Mode. | ||
| A.TUNE | Displayed during Auto-Tuning. | ||
| SETUP | Displayed when in Setup Mode. | ||
| 2 | Mode Display Area | DRV | Displayed when in Drive Mode. |
| PRG | Displayed when in Programming Mode. | ||
| 3 | Ready | Rdy | Indicates the drive is ready to run. |
| 4 | Data Display | - | Displays specific data and operation data. |
| 5 | Speed Reference Source Assignment<1> | OPR | Displayed when the speed reference source is assigned to the LCD Operator. |
| COM | Displayed when the speed reference source is assigned to MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication. | ||
| OP | Displayed when the speed reference is assigned to an option card. | ||
| 6 | LO/RE Display<2> | RSEQ | Displayed when the Up/Down command is supplied from a remote source. |
| LSEQ | Displayed when the Up/Down command is supplied from the operator keypad. | ||
| RREF | Displayed when the speed reference is supplied from a remote source. | ||
| LREF | Displayed when the speed reference is supplied from the operator keypad. | ||
| 7 | Function Key 1 (F1) | HELP | Pressing F1 displays the Help menu. |
| ← | Pressing F1 scrolls the cursor to the left. | ||
| HOME | Pressing F1 returns to the top menu (Speed Reference). | ||
| ESC | Pressing F1 returns to the previous display. | ||
| 8 | FWD/REV | FWD | During Up command |
| REV | During Down command | ||
| 9 | Function Key 2 (F2) | FWD/REV | Pressing F2 switches between Up and Down when the Up/Down command is set from the digital operator. |
| DATA | Pressing F2 scrolls to the next display. | ||
| → | Pressing F2 scrolls the cursor to the right. | ||
| RESET | Pressing F2 resets the existing drive fault or error. |
Source page
Page 83
4.2 Using the Digital Operator
| Power-off Checks | Description |
|---|---|
| Power supply voltage | Ensure the power supply voltage is correct on the supply side of the disconnect, before applying power to the drive. 200 V class: 3-phase 200 to 240 Vac 50/60 Hz 400 V class: 3-phase 380 to 480 Vac 50/60 Hz |
| Properly wire the power supply input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3). Check for correct wiring, terminals are tightened, and there are no loose wire strands. | |
| Check for proper grounding of drive and motor. | |
| Drive output terminals and motor ter- minals | Properly wire drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 with motor terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. Check for correct wiring, terminals are tightened, and there are no loose wire strands. |
| Control circuit terminals | Check control circuit terminal connections. Check that control circuit terminals are correctly wired, terminals are tightened, and there are no loose wire strands. |
| Drive control terminal status | Open all control circuits to the drive I/O terminal block. |
| No. | Name | Column | Column | Column | Description |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Normal Operation | DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALM - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) YEG U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | The data display area in the upper half of the display, displays the speed reference. DRV is displayed. | |||
| DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALM - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | |||||
| Fault | Ex | YEG le) | Data displayed varies by the type of fault. Refer to Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions on page267 for more information and possible solutions. ALM LED is lit and DRV displayed. | ||
| DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALM | ALM | ||||
| - MODE - DRV EF3 | |||||
| Ext Fault S3 FWDRESET | |||||
| ternal fault (examp | |||||
| LED Dis |
| State | Content | Column | Display | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Illuminated | When the drive detects an alarm or error. | ||||
| Flashing | • When an alarm occurs. • When oPE is detected. • When a fault or error occurs during Auto-Tuning. | ||||
| Off | Normal operation (no fault or alarm). |
Source page
Page 84
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 84 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.2 Using the Digital Operator
LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications
Table 4.3 LO/RE LED and RUN LED Indications LED Lit Flashing Flashing Quickly<1> Off When source of the Up/Down com- Up/Down command to be given from a device mand is assigned to the digital oper- - - ator (LOCAL). other than the digital operator (REMOTE). • While the drive is set for LOCAL, an Up/Down command was entered to the input terminals after which the drive was then switched to REMOTE. • An Up/Down command was entered via the input terminals while not in • During deceleration to stop. During run • When an Up/Down command is input the Drive Mode. During stop • During deceleration when an and speed reference is 0%. Emergency Stop command was entered. • The drive output is shut off by the Safe Disable function. • While the drive was running in the REMOTE mode, the STOP key was pushed. Examples <1> Refer to Figure 4.3 for the difference between “flashing” and “flashing quickly”. Figure4.3 1 s ON ON Flashing common_TM only Flashing ON ON ON ON quickly Figure 4.3 RUN LED Status and Meaning Figure4.4 Drive output speed during stop RUN STOP RUN STOP Up/Down Speed setting 0% 10% common_TM only RUN LED OFF ON OFF OFF Flashing Figure 4.4 RUN LED and Drive Operation
84 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| LED | Lit | Flashing | Flashing Quickly<1> | Off |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| When source of the Up/Down com- mand is assigned to the digital oper- ator (LOCAL). | - | - | Up/Down command to be given from a device other than the digital operator (REMOTE). | |
| During run | • During deceleration to stop. • When an Up/Down command is input and speed reference is 0%. | • While the drive is set for LOCAL, an Up/Down command was entered to the input terminals after which the drive was then switched to REMOTE. • An Up/Down command was entered via the input terminals while not in the Drive Mode. • During deceleration when an Emergency Stop command was entered. • The drive output is shut off by the Safe Disable function. • While the drive was running in the REMOTE mode, the STOP key was pushed. | During stop | |
| Examples |
| Column | Column | Column | Column | RUN | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| STOP | |||||
| OFF | ON | OFF | OFF |
Source page
Page 85
4.2 Using the Digital Operator
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 85 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & Menu Structure for Digital Operator Figure4.5 - MODE - DRV Rdy -MONITR- DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) Speed Ref 1 U1-01= 0.00% U1-01= 000.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ (cid:14804)0.00(cid:14890)50.00(cid:14805) U1-03= 0.00A LREF ← (cid:780)0 F . W 00 D %(cid:781) → <3> - MODE - DRV Rdy -MONITR- DRV Rdy -MONITR- DRV Rdy Monitor Menu Monitor Speed Reference U1-01= 0.00% U1 -01= 0.00% U1- 01 = 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF U1-03= 0.00A LREF U1-03= 0.00A LREF - MODE - PRG -MONITR- DRV Rdy -MONITR- DRV Rdy Modified Consts U2 -0 F 1= au l o t C Trace U1- 0 O 2 u t = p u 0 t . S 00 p % eed X P M ar o a d m ifi e e t d ers U U 2 2 - - 0 0 2 3 = = o 0 P .0 r 0Hz R LR SE E Q F U U 1 1 - - 0 0 3 4 = = 0 0 .00A R LR SE E Q F HELP FWD DATA <4> - MODE - PRG Quick Setting Initial Display <5> L1000A HELP FWD DATA XXXV(cid:14)X.X/X.XkW L1000A XX.XX/XX.XXA YASKAWA <XXX> <6> - MODE - PRG Programming HELP FWD DATA - MODE - PRG Rdy Auto-Tuning AUTO HELP FWD DATA Figure 4.5 Digital Operator Menu and Screen Structure <1> Pressing will start the motor. <2> Drive cannot operate the motor. <3> Flashing characters are shown as . <4> An "X" character is used as a placeholder for illustration purposes in this manual. The LCD Operator will display the actual setting values. 4 <5> The Speed Reference appears after the initial display which shows the product name. <6> The information that appears on the display will vary depending on the drive. edoM evirD edoM gnimmargorP >1< >2< SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 85 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 FWDFWD/REV FWDFWD/REV FWDFWD/REV FWDFWD/REV FWDFWD/REV FWDFWD/REV YEG RUN 0
| - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|
| U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | RSEQ |
| -MONITR- DRVRdy Speed Ref 1 |
|---|
| U1-01= 000.00% (cid:14804)0.00(cid:14890)50.00(cid:14805) (cid:780)0.00%(cid:781) FWD |
| -MONITR- DRVRdy Monitor U1 -01= 0.00% | Column |
|---|---|
| U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | RSEQ |
| U2-02= oPr RSEQ U2-03= 0.00Hz LREF FWDFWD/REV | RSEQ |
|---|---|
| LREF |
| RSEQ |
|---|
| LREF |
| - MODE - PRG Quick Setting HELP FWD DATA | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| - MODE - PRG Programming HELP FWD DATA |
Source page
Page 86
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 86 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.3 The Drive and Programming Modes
4.3 The Drive and Programming Modes
The drive has a Drive Mode to operate the motor and a Programming Mode to edit parameter settings. Drive Mode: In Drive Mode the user can operate the motor and observe U Monitor parameters. Parameter settings cannot be edited or changed when in Drive Mode.
Programming Mode: In Programming Mode the user can edit and verify parameter settings and perform Auto-Tuning. The drive will not accept an Up/down command when the digital operator is in the Programming Mode unless parameter b1-08 is set to 1 to allow an Up/down command. Note: 1. If b1-08 is set to 0, the drive will only accept an Up/Down command in Drive Mode. After editing parameters, the user must exit the Programming Mode and enter Drive Mode before operating the motor. 2. Set b1-08 to 1 to allow the drive to run the motor while in Programming Mode.
Navigating the Drive and Programming Modes
The drive is set to operate in Drive Mode when it is first powered up. Switch between display screens by using the and keys.
Mode Contents Operator Display Description - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) This display screen allows the user to monitor and change the speed reference while the drive is running. Refer to Power Up Speed Reference U1-01= 0.00% YEG The Drive and Programming Modes on page86. (default) U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ Note: The user can select the data displayed when the drive is first powered up with parameter o1-02. U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWD FWD/REV
- MODE - DRV Rdy Drive Mode Monitor Menu U1-01= 0.00% YEG Lists the monitor parameters (U- parameters) available in the drive. Monitor Display U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ Press the Enter Key and then use the Up, Down, ESC, and Reset keys to navigate through the drive monitors. U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV - MODE - PRG Modified Consts Verify Menu Modified YEG Lists all parameters that have been edited or changed from default settings. Refer to Verifying Parameter X Parameters Changes: Verify Menu on page89. HELP FWD DATA
- MODE - PRG Prog M ra o m de ming Setup Group Quick Setting YEG A pa s g e e le 9 c 0 t . list of parameters necessary to get the drive operating quickly. Refer to Using the Setup Group on
HELP FWD DATA
- MODE - PRG Programming Parameter Setting Mode Allows the user to access and edit all parameter settings. Refer to Parameter Table on page354. YEG HELP FWD DATA - MODE - PRG Auto-Tuning Auto-Tuning Mode Motor parameters are calculated and set automatically. Refer to Auto-Tuning on page99. Programming AUTO YEG Mode HELP FWD DATA
86 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Mode | Contents | Operator Display | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| Power Up | Speed Reference (default) | - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% YEG U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | This display screen allows the user to monitor and change the speed reference while the drive is running. Refer to The Drive and Programming Modes on page86. Note: The user can select the data displayed when the drive is first powered up with parameter o1-02. |
| Drive Mode | |||
| Monitor Display | - MODE - DRV Rdy Monitor Menu U1-01= 0.00% YEG U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | Lists the monitor parameters (U- parameters) available in the drive. Press the Enter Key and then use the Up, Down, ESC, and Reset keys to navigate through the drive monitors. | |
| Programming Mode | |||
| Verify Menu | - MODE - PRG Modified Consts Modified YEG X Parameters HELP FWD DATA | Lists all parameters that have been edited or changed from default settings. Refer to Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu on page89. | |
| Setup Group | - MODE - PRG Quick Setting YEG HELP FWD DATA | A select list of parameters necessary to get the drive operating quickly. Refer to Using the Setup Group on page90. | |
| Parameter Setting Mode | - MODE - PRG Programming YEG HELP FWD DATA | Allows the user to access and edit all parameter settings. Refer to Parameter Table on page354. | |
| Programming Mode | Auto-Tuning Mode | - MODE - PRG Auto-Tuning AUTO YEG HELP FWD DATA | Motor parameters are calculated and set automatically. Refer to Auto-Tuning on page99. |
| - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% YEG | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|
| U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | RSEQ | |
| LREF | ||
| FWD/REV |
| - MODE - DRV Rdy Monitor Menu U1-01= 0.00% YEG | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|
| U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | RSEQ | |
| LREF | ||
| FWD/REV |
Source page
Page 87
4.3 The Drive and Programming Modes
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 87 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 87 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Mode Contents Operator Display Description - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% YEG Drive Mode Speed Reference Returns to the speed reference display screen. U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWD FWD/REV Drive Mode Details The following actions are possible in the Drive Mode: • Run and stop the drive • Monitor the operation status of the drive (speed reference, output speed, output current, output voltage, etc.) • View information on an alarm • View a history of alarms that have occurred Figure 4.6 illustrates how to change the speed reference from 0.00% to 10.00% while in the Drive Mode. This example assumes the reference source is assigned to the digital operator (b1-02 = 0) and d1-01 is set to 0 or 3. Figure4.6 Speed reference display at power up F1 F2 - M S O p D ee E d - Re D f R (O V PR R ) dy -M S O p N d I T R R e - f 1( D d R 1- V 01 R ) dy left right U1-01= 0.00% U1-01= 000.00% U U 1 1 - - 0 0 2 3 F = = W 0 0 D . . 0 0 0 0 F % A WD R L /R R S E E EQ V F (cid:14804) ← 0. (cid:780) 00 0 F (cid:14890) . W 0 1 0 D 0 % 0 (cid:781) .00 → (cid:14805) refe P r r e e n s c s e u c n h ti a l t n h g e e f s r e to q u 0 e 1 n 0 c .0 y 0% YEG -MONITR- DRVRdy -MONITR- DRVRdy - MODE - DRV Rdy Spd Ref 1(d1-01) Spd Ref 1(d1-01) Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 010.00% U1-01= 010.00% ESC U1-01= 10.00% (cid:14804)0.00(cid:14890)100.00(cid:14805) Entry Accepted (cid:14804)0.00(cid:14890)100.00%(cid:14805) U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ ← (cid:780)0 F . W 00 D %(cid:781)→ ←(cid:780)0 F . W 00 D %(cid:781)→ U1-03= F W 0. D 00 F A WD L / R R E E F V Figure 4.6 Setting the Speed Reference while in the Drive Mode Note: The drive will not accept a change to the speed reference until the ENTER key is pressed after the speed reference is entered. This feature prevents accidental setting of the speed reference. To have the drive accept changes to the speed reference as soon as changes are made without requiring the ENTER key, set o2-05 to 1. Programming Mode Details The following actions are possible in the Programming Mode: • Parameter Setting Mode: Access and edit all parameter settings. • Verify Menu: Check a list of parameters that have been changed from their original default values. • Setup Group: Access a list of commonly used parameters to simplify setup (refer to Simplified Setup Using the Setup Group on page 90). • Auto-Tuning Mode: Automatically calculate and set motor parameters to optimize drive performance. 4
| Mode | Contents | Operator Display | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| Drive Mode | Speed Reference | - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% YEG U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | Returns to the speed reference display screen. |
| - MODE - DRVRdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|
| U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | RSEQ LREF | |
| FWD/REV |
| -MONITR- DRVRdy Spd Ref 1(d1-01) U1-01= 000.00% | Column |
|---|---|
| (cid:14804)0.00(cid:14890)100.00(cid:14805) ←(cid:780)0 . 00 %(cid:781)→ F W D | |
| ← | → |
| -MONITR- DRVRdy Spd Ref 1(d1-01) | Column |
|---|---|
| U1-01= 010.00% (cid:14804)0.00(cid:14890)100.00(cid:14805) ←(cid:780)0 . 00 %(cid:781)→ F W D | |
| ← | → |
| -MONITR- DRVRdy Spd Ref 1(d1-01) | Column |
|---|---|
| U1-01= 010.00% (cid:14804)0.00(cid:14890)100.00%(cid:14805) ←(cid:780)0 . 00 %(cid:781)→ F W D | |
| ← | → |
| MODE - DRVRdy Speed Ref (OPR) 1-01= 10.00% | Column |
|---|---|
| 1-02= 0.00% RSEQ 1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | |
| FWD/REV |
Source page
Page 88
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 88 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.3 The Drive and Programming Modes
Changing Parameter Settings or Values
This example explains changing C1-02 (Deceleration Ramp 1) from 1.50 seconds (default) to 2.50 seconds.
Step Display/Result - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) 1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears. U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWD FWD/REV - MODE - PRG Programming 2. Press or until the Parameter Setting Mode screen appears. HELP FWD DATA -PRMSET- PRG Initialization 3. A1-00=(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)0 Press to enter the parameter menu tree. Select Language ← FWD → -PRMSET- PRG Basic Setup 4. C1-01 = 1.50 sec Press or to select the C parameter group. Accel Ramp 1 ← FWD → -PRMSET- PRG -PRMSET- PRG Accel/Decel Accel Ramp 1 5. C1-01= 1.50 sec C1-01= 1.50 sec Press two times. Accel Ramp 1 (0 “ . 1 0 . ~ 5 6 0 0 s 0 e . c 0 ” 0) ← FWD → ← FWD → -PRMSET- PRG Decel Ramp 1 6. C1-02= 1.50 sec Press or to select the parameter C1-02. (0.0~600.00) “1.50 sec” (cid:966) FWD (cid:968) -PRMSET- PRG Decel Ramp 1 7. C1-02= 001.50 sec Press to view the current setting value (1.50 s). The left most digit flashes. (0.0~600.00) “1.50 sec” ← FWD → -PRMSET- PRG Decel Ramp 1 8. Press F1 , F2 or until the desired number is selected. “1” flashes. C1 ( - 0 0 . 2 0 = ~ 0 6 0 0 1 0 . . 5 0 0 0 ) sec left right “1.50 sec” ← FWD → -PRMSET- PRG Decel Ramp 1 9. Press and enter 002.50. C1 ( - 0 0 . 2 0 = ~ 0 6 0 0 2 0 . . 5 0 0 0 ) sec “1.50 sec” ← FWD → 10. Press to confirm the change. Entry Accepted -PRMSET- PRG Decel Ramp 1 11. The display automatically returns to the screen shown in Step4. C1-02= 2.50 sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50 sec” (cid:966) FWD (cid:968) - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% 12. Press as many times as necessary to return to the initial display. U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWD FWD/REV 88 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Step | Column | Column | Display/Result |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears. | - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | |
| 2. | Press or until the Parameter Setting Mode screen appears. | - MODE - PRG Programming HELP FWD DATA | |
| 3. | Press to enter the parameter menu tree. | -PRMSET- PRG Initialization A1-00=(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)0 Select Language ← FWD → | |
| 4. | Press or to select the C parameter group. | -PRMSET- PRG Basic Setup C1-01 = 1.50 sec Accel Ramp 1 ← FWD → | |
| 5. | Press two times. | -PRMSET- PRG -PRMSET- PRG Accel/Decel Accel Ramp 1 C1-01= 1.50 sec C1-01= 1.50 sec (0.0~600.00) Accel Ramp 1 “1.50 sec” ← FWD → ← FWD → | |
| 6. | Press or to select the parameter C1-02. | -PRMSET- PRG Decel Ramp 1 C1-02= 1.50 sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50 sec” (cid:966) FWD (cid:968) | |
| 7. | Press to view the current setting value (1.50 s). The left most digit flashes. | -PRMSET- PRG Decel Ramp 1 C1-02= 001.50 sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50 sec” ← FWD → | |
| 8. | Press F1 , F2 or until the desired number is selected. “1” flashes. left right | -PRMSET- PRG Decel Ramp 1 C1-02=001.50 sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50 sec” ← FWD → | |
| 9. | Press and enter 002.50. | -PRMSET- PRG Decel Ramp 1 C1-02=002.50 sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50 sec” ← FWD → | |
| 10. | Press to confirm the change. | Entry Accepted | |
| 11. | The display automatically returns to the screen shown in Step4. | -PRMSET- PRG Decel Ramp 1 C1-02= 2.50 sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50 sec” (cid:966) FWD (cid:968) | |
| 12. | Press as many times as necessary to return to the initial display. | - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV |
| - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|
| U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | RSEQ | |
| LREF | ||
| FWD/REV |
| -PRMSET- PRG Initialization | Column |
|---|---|
| A1-00=(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)0 Select Language ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Basic Setup | Column |
|---|---|
| C1-01 = 1.50 sec Accel Ramp 1 ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Accel/Decel | Column |
|---|---|
| C1-01= 1.50 sec Accel Ramp 1 ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Accel Ramp 1 | Column |
|---|---|
| C1-01= 1.50 sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50 sec” ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Decel Ramp 1 | Column |
|---|---|
| C1-02= 1.50 sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50 sec” (cid:966) FWD (cid:968) | |
| (cid:966) | (cid:968) |
| -PRMSET- PRG Decel Ramp 1 | Column |
|---|---|
| C1-02= 001.50 sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50 sec” ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Decel Ramp 1 | Column |
|---|---|
| C1-02=001.50 sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50 sec” ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Decel Ramp 1 | Column |
|---|---|
| C1-02=002.50 sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50 sec” ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Decel Ramp 1 | Column |
|---|---|
| C1-02= 2.50 sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50 sec” (cid:966) FWD (cid:968) | |
| (cid:966) | (cid:968) |
| - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|
| U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | RSEQ LREF | |
| FWD/REV |
Source page
Page 89
4.3 The Drive and Programming Modes
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 89 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 89 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu The Verify Menu lists edited parameters from the Programming Mode or as a result of Auto-Tuning. The Verify Menu helps determine which settings have been changed, and is particularly useful when replacing a drive. If no settings have been changed, the Verify Menu will read “None”. The Verify Menu also allows users to quickly access and re-edit any parameter settings that have been changed. Note: The Verify Menu will not display parameters from the A1 group (except for A1-02, Control Method Selection) even if those parameters have been changed from their default settings. The following example is a continuation of the steps above. Here, parameter C1-02 is accessed using the Verify Menu, and is changed again from 1.50 s to 2.50 s. The steps below are an example of how to check the list of edited parameters: Step Display/Result - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) 1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears. U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWD FWD/REV - MODE - PRG Modified Consts 2. Press or until the display shows the top of the Verify Menu. Modified X Parameters HELP FWD DATA - VERIFY - PRG Rdy Press to enter the list of parameters that have been edited from their original default settings. Decel Ramp 1 3. C1-02 = 2.50sec (0.0~600.00) If parameters other than C1-02 have been changed, use or to scroll until C1-02 appears. “1.50sec” Home FWD DATA - VERIFY - PRG Rdy Decel Ramp 1 4. Press to access the setting value. Left digit flashes. C1-01=002.50sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50sec” Home FWD DATA 4
| Step | Column | Column | Display/Result |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears. | - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | |
| 2. | Press or until the display shows the top of the Verify Menu. | - MODE - PRG Modified Consts Modified X Parameters HELP FWD DATA | |
| 3. | Press to enter the list of parameters that have been edited from their original default settings. If parameters other than C1-02 have been changed, use or to scroll until C1-02 appears. | - VERIFY -PRGRdy Decel Ramp 1 C1-02 = 2.50sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50sec” Home FWD DATA | |
| 4. | Press to access the setting value. Left digit flashes. | - VERIFY -PRGRdy Decel Ramp 1 C1-01=002.50sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50sec” Home FWD DATA |
| - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|
| U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | RSEQ | |
| LREF | ||
| FWD/REV |
| - VERIFY -PRGRdy Decel Ramp 1 | Column |
|---|---|
| C1-02 = 2.50sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50sec” Home FWD DATA | |
| Home | DATA |
| - VERIFY -PRGRdy Decel Ramp 1 | Column |
|---|---|
| C1-01=002.50sec (0.0~600.00) “1.50sec” Home FWD DATA | |
| Home | DATA |
Source page
Page 90
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 90 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.3 The Drive and Programming Modes
Simplified Setup Using the Setup Group
In the Setup Group, the drive lists the basic parameters needed to set up the drive for an elevator application. This group expedites the startup process for an elevator application by showing only the most important parameters for the application. Using the Setup Group
Figure 4.7 illustrates how to enter and how to change parameters in the Setup Group.
The first display shown when entering the Setup Group is the Control Method menu. Skipping this display will keep the current Setup Group parameter selection. The default setting for the Setup Group is a group of parameters most commonly use in control methods. In this example, the Setup Group is accessed to change b1-01 from 0 to 1. This changes the source of the speed reference from the digital operator to the control circuit terminals.
- MODE - DRV Rdy - MODE - PRG U1 S -0 p 1 e = e d 0 R .0 e 0 f % (OPR) Quick Setting U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ YEG U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV HELP FWD DATA Speed reference appears when powered up <1> - SE C T o U n P tr o - l M P e R t G hod Rdy A1-02= 2 ∗2∗ Open Loop Vector Home FWD DATA - SETUP - PRG Rdy Speed Ref Sel b1-01= 0 ∗0∗ Operator - SETUP - PRG Rdy ← F “ W 1” D → Speed Ref Sel Control Circuit b1-01= O p 0 e r ∗ a 0 t ∗ or Ter < m 2 i > nal Home FWD DATA - SETUP - PRG Rdy Speed Ref Sel Entry Accepted b1-01 A = n a 0 lo g ∗ 0 In ∗ put ← F “ W 1” D → - U S p E /D T n U P C o - m P m R a G nd R S d e y l Ope < r 2 a > tor b1-02= 1 ∗1∗ Digital Inputs Home FWD DATA - SETUP - PRG Rdy StallP Accel Sel L3-01= 1 ∗1∗ General Purpose Home FWD DATA <1> Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the Setup Group. Press the ENTER key to view or change parameter settings. <2> To return to the previous menu without saving changes, press the ESC key. Figure 4.7 Setup Group Example
90 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| - MODE - DRVRdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% |
|---|
| RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV |
| - SETUP - PRGRdy Control Method A1-02= 2 ∗2∗ Open Loop Vector Home FWD DATA |
|---|
| Home |
| - SETUP - PRGRdy Speed Ref Sel b1-01= 0 ∗0∗ |
|---|
| Operator ← F “ W 1” D → |
| - SETUP - PRGRdy Speed Ref Sel b1-01= 0 ∗0∗ |
|---|
| Analog Input “1” FWD |
| - SETUP - PRGRdy Up/Dn Command Sel b1-02= 1 ∗1∗ Digital Inputs Home FWD DATA |
|---|
| Home |
| - SETUP - PRGRdy StallP Accel Sel L3-01= 1 ∗1∗ General Purpose Home FWD DATA |
|---|
| Home |
Source page
Page 91
4.3 The Drive and Programming Modes
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 91 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 91 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Setup Group Parameters Table 4.4 lists parameters available by default in the Setup Group. If a parameter that needs to be edited is not displayed in the Setup Group, access the parameter through the Programming Mode. Table 4.4 Setup Group Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Name A1-02 Control Method Selection E1-01 Input Voltage Setting b1-01 Speed Reference Selection E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency C1-01 Acceleration Ramp 1 E1-05 Maximum Voltage C1-02 Deceleration Ramp 1 E1-06 Base Frequency d1-01 Speed Reference 1 E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency d1-02 Speed Reference 2 E1-13 Base Voltage d1-03 Speed Reference 3 E2-01 Motor Rated Current d1-04 Speed Reference 4 E2-11 Motor Rated Output d1-26 Leveling Speed L1-01 Motor Overload Protection Selection Note: Parameter availability depends on the control mode set in A1-02; some parameters listed above may not be accessible in all control modes. Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE LOCAL mode is when the drive is set to accept the Up/Down command from the digital operator keypad. REMOTE mode is when the drive is set to accept the Up/Down command from an external device (via the input terminals or serial communications, etc.). Switch the operation between LOCAL and REMOTE using the LO/RE key on the digital operator or via a digital input. This key is disabled with default settings, but can be enabled by setting parameter o2-01 to 1. Note: 1. After selecting LOCAL, the LO/RE light will remain lit. 2. The drive will not allow the user to switch between LOCAL and REMOTE during run. Using the LO/RE Key on the Digital Operator Step Display/Result - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref(A1/A2) 1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears. U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ YEG U1-03= 0.00A RREF FWD FWD/REV DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALM UUU - 11 1 MS -- -00 O 0p 23 1 De == =eE d 00 F 0 - .. R 00W .000 e0 D D %A f% R(OV LL P RS RR EE )d QF y 2. Press . The LO/RE light will light up. The drive is now in LOCAL. YEG ES F C 1 F2 RLOE RESET ENTER To set the drive for REMOTE operation, press again. RUN STOP 4
| Parameter | Name |
|---|---|
| A1-02 | Control Method Selection |
| b1-01 | Speed Reference Selection |
| C1-01 | Acceleration Ramp 1 |
| C1-02 | Deceleration Ramp 1 |
| d1-01 | Speed Reference 1 |
| d1-02 | Speed Reference 2 |
| d1-03 | Speed Reference 3 |
| d1-04 | Speed Reference 4 |
| d1-26 | Leveling Speed |
| Parameter | Name |
|---|---|
| E1-01 | Input Voltage Setting |
| E1-04 | Maximum Output Frequency |
| E1-05 | Maximum Voltage |
| E1-06 | Base Frequency |
| E1-09 | Minimum Output Frequency |
| E1-13 | Base Voltage |
| E2-01 | Motor Rated Current |
| E2-11 | Motor Rated Output |
| L1-01 | Motor Overload Protection Selection |
| Step | Column | Column | Display/Result |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears. | - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref(A1/A2) U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ YEG U1-03= 0.00A RREF FWDFWD/REV | |
| 2. | Press . The LO/RE light will light up. The drive is now in LOCAL. To set the drive for REMOTE operation, press again. | DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALM U - 1 MS- O 0p1 De=eE d 0 - R.0e0 Df% R(OVPRR)dy UU11--0023== 00F ..00W 00D %ALLRSEEQF YEG F1 F2 ESC RLOE RESET ENTER RUN STOP |
| DE - DRV Rdy eed Ref(A1/A2) 1= 0.00% | Column |
|---|---|
| 2= 0.00% 3= 0.00A FWDF | RSEQ RREF |
| WD/REV |
| IGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 |
|---|
| U - 1 MS- O 0p1 De=eE d 0 - R.0e0 Df% R(OVPRR)dy UU11--0023== 00F ..00W 00D %ALLRSEEQF F1 F2 |
Source page
Page 92
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 92 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.4 Start-Up Flowcharts
4.4 Start-Up Flowcharts
This section covers basic setup for the drive, including Auto-Tuning procedures and corresponding flowcharts. Follow the flowchart that matches the motor used in your application. Refer to Types of Auto-Tuning on page 99 for details on the types of Auto-Tuning.
Flowchart Purpose Page A Installation, wiring, and basic steps required to setup the motor and elevator for operation 93 B Auto-Tuning for induction motors 96 C Auto-Tuning for PM motors 97 D Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning 98
92 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Flowchart | Purpose | Page |
|---|---|---|
| A | Installation, wiring, and basic steps required to setup the motor and elevator for operation | 93 |
| B | Auto-Tuning for induction motors | 96 |
| C | Auto-Tuning for PM motors | 97 |
| D | Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning | 98 |
Source page
Page 93
4.4 Start-Up Flowcharts
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 93 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 93 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Flowchart A: Installation, Wiring, Basic Setup for Motor and Elevator The flowchart below covers the basic procedure required to install the drive, motor, and elevator. Figure4.7 START Install the drive as explained in Mechanical Installation on page37. Wire the drive as explained in Main Circuit Wiring on page60. Check the PG encoder power supply selection. (Closed Loop Vector Control only -CLV) Apply main power to the drive. Adhere to safety messages concerning application of power. Check the motor rotation direction. Select the control mode in parameter A1-02. Set up the PG encoder feedback in F1-(cid:3)(cid:3) parameters when using a Closed Loop Vector Control and check the PG encoder rotation direction. Set the Unit Length in parameter o1-12. Set up o1-20 to o1-22 and then select the display units for speed, acceleration and deceleration ramp and jerk settings in o1-03. Perform Auto-Tuning for motor parameters and the PG encoder offset. For control modes below, refer to Flowchart B: Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors on page96. • V/f Control • Open Loop Vector Control • Closed Loop Vector Control For Closed Loop Vector for PM, refer to Flowchart C: Auto-Tuning for PM Motors on page97. Digital operator (b1-01 = 0) Determine the (Speed selection by digital inputs) source of the speed reference. Set the Speed Reference Selection mode parameter d1-18. Analog Input Assign functions to the analog/digital I/O terminals using parameters H1-(cid:2)(cid:2), H2-(cid:2)(cid:2), H3-(cid:2)(cid:2), and H4-(cid:2)(cid:2). Assign functions to the digital I/O terminals using parameters H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) and H2-(cid:2)(cid:2). Set up: Set up: • Acceleration/deceleration ramp (C1-(cid:2)(cid:2)) • Preset speed references (d1-(cid:2)(cid:2)) • Jerk settings (C2-(cid:2)(cid:2)) • Acceleration/deceleration ramp (C1-(cid:2)(cid:2)) • Jerk settings (C2-(cid:2)(cid:2)) 4 Set up the Inspection Operation sequence. Perform a test run. Fine-tuning • Adjust settings for the brake sequence (S1-(cid:2)(cid:2)) . • Adjust speed control loop (C5-(cid:2)(cid:2)) etc. FINISH Figure 4.8 Installation, Wiring, Basic Setup for Motor and Elevator Note: Set parameter H5-11 to 1 when setting parameters using MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
Source page
Page 94
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 94 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.4 Start-Up Flowcharts
Power On
Take the following precautions before applying main power to the drive:
Select one of the four motor control modes after applying power to the drive. Note that Closed Loop Vector modes require PG encoder feedback cards. The table below indicates possible control modes depending on the motor type and shows the required encoder feedback card.
Machine Type Control Mode A1-02 setting Encoder Option Card V/f Control 0 No card required Induction motor without encoder Open Loop Vector Control 2 No card required Induction motor with incremental encoder Closed Loop Vector Control 3 PG-B3 / PG-X3 Permanent magnet motor with EnDat 2.1/01, EnDat 2.2/01, or Closed Loop Vector Control for PM motors 7 PG-F3 EnDat 2.2/22 encoder Permanent magnet motor with ERN1387 or ERN487 encoder Closed Loop Vector Control for PM motors 7 PG-E3 Yaskawa IPM motor with incremental encoder Closed Loop Vector Control for PM motors 7 PG-X3 Motor Rotation Direction Setup Check the direction of motor rotation to verify the Up command causes the elevator to move in the upward direction. Perform the following checks to confirm proper motor and load direction: • The drive outputs motor voltage in U/T1-V/T2-W/T3 phase sequence when an Up command is issued. Check the motor rotation with this phase sequence (for most motors clockwise is seen from the shaft side). • If the motor drives the elevator in the up direction with a U/T1-V/T2-W/T3 sequence, make sure parameter b1-14 is set to 0. • If the motor drives the elevator in the down direction with a U/T1-V/T2-W/T3 sequence, make sure parameter b1-14 is set to 1. Motor direction may also be changed by reversing two motor leads connected to U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 on the drive terminal block.
94 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Machine Type | Control Mode | A1-02 setting | Encoder Option Card |
|---|---|---|---|
| Induction motor without encoder | V/f Control | 0 | No card required |
| Open Loop Vector Control | 2 | No card required | |
| Induction motor with incremental encoder | Closed Loop Vector Control | 3 | PG-B3 / PG-X3 |
| Permanent magnet motor with EnDat 2.1/01, EnDat 2.2/01, or EnDat 2.2/22 encoder | Closed Loop Vector Control for PM motors | 7 | PG-F3 |
| Permanent magnet motor with ERN1387 or ERN487 encoder | Closed Loop Vector Control for PM motors | 7 | PG-E3 |
| Yaskawa IPM motor with incremental encoder | Closed Loop Vector Control for PM motors | 7 | PG-X3 |
Source page
Page 95
4.4 Start-Up Flowcharts
| o1-03 Setting | Display Unit | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| Speed Setting/Monitors (d1-, U1-02, U1-02,...) | Accel/Decel Ramp (C1-) | Jerk Settings (C2-) | |
| 0 | 0.01 Hz | 0.01 s Set as the time in required to accelerate from zero to the rated speed, and to decelerate from rated speed to zero. | 0.01 s Set as the time used to change the accel/decel ramp from zero to the accel/decel ramp setting of C1- and vice versa. |
| 1 (default) | 0.01% | ||
| 2 | 1 rpm | ||
| 3 | User defined | ||
| 4 | 0.01 m/s | ||
| 5 | 0.01 m/s | 0.01 m/s2 (Set as accel/decel ramp) | 0.01 m/s3 (set as jerk value) |
| 6 | 0.1 ft/min | 0.01 ft/s2 (Set as accel/decel ramp) | 0.01 ft/s3 (set as jerk value) |
Source page
Page 96
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 96 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.4 Start-Up Flowcharts
Flowchart B: Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors
The flowchart below covers Auto-Tuning for induction motors operating with V/f Control, Open Loop Vector Control, or Closed Loop Vector Control.
START YEG
Set terminals H1 and H2 if the Safe Disable function is used. Set the Baseblock input (H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 8/9) if used.
A1-02 N = o 2 or 3 (Ropes Y r e e s moved) Is the Control Mode Can the motor V/f Control ? rotate freely? Yes A1-02 = 0 No Select Stationary Auto-Tuning Select Stationary Select Rotational for Terminal Resistance only, Auto-Tuning 1 or 2 Auto-Tuning T1-01 = 2. T1-01 = 1 or 4. T1-01 = 0.
Refer to Enter the data in to T1-(cid:3)(cid:3) parameters as indicated on the Enter the data in to T1-(cid:3)(cid:3) parameters as Auto-Tuning Fault Detection display. indicated on the display. on page 287. Press the Up key until “Tuning Ready” is displayed. <1> Press the Up key until “Tuning Ready” is Remove the source of Fault/Alarm displayed. <1> and repeat Auto Tuning. Release the Brake. Close the motor contactor.
Press the Run key on the digital operator and wait until Auto-Tuning is finished.
Tuning No Successful? (Alarm or Fault code displayed(cid:12) Yes (“Entry Accepted” displayed) <2> Apply the brake if it was released during Auto-tuning. Open the motor contactor. Open terminals H1-HC and H2-HC if used during the normal sequence. Open the Baseblock input (H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 8/9) if used. FINISH <1> If an LED operator is used, the display shows “ ”. <2> If an LED operator is used, the display shows “ ”. Figure 4.9 Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors
96 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 97
4.4 Start-Up Flowcharts
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 97 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 97 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Flowchart C: Auto-Tuning for PM Motors The flowchart below covers Auto-Tuning for permanent magnetic (PM) motors operating with Closed Loop Vector Control for PM motors. START YEG Set terminals H1-HC and H2-HC if Safe Disable function is used. Set the Baseblock input (H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 8/9) if used. No Is the motor data sheet available? Yes Select Motor Data Input Select Stationary Auto-Tuning Refer to T2-01 = 0. T2-01 = 1. Auto-Tuning Fault Detection Enter the data in to T2-(cid:3)(cid:3) parameters as Enter the data in to T2-(cid:3)(cid:3) parameters as on page 287. indicated on the display. indicated on the display. Remove the Fault/Alarm source and Press the Up key until “Tuning Ready” is Press the Up key until “Tuning Ready” is repeat Auto Tuning. displayed. <1> displayed. <1> Close the motor contactor. Press the Run key on the digital operator and wait until Auto-Tuning is finished. No (Alarm or Fault code Tuning displayed(cid:12) Successful? Yes (“Entry Accepted” displayed(cid:12) <2> Continue with encoder offset tuning. Refer to Flowchart D: PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning on page98. Can the motor No rotate freely? Yes(Ropes removed) 4 ・ Select Rotational Back EMF Constant Auto-Tuning T2-01=11. ・ Press the Up key. Press the Run key on the digital operator and wait until Auto-Tuning is finished. Open the motor contactor. Open terminals H1-HC and H2-HC if used during the normal sequence. Open the Baseblock input (H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 8/9) if used. FINISH <1> If an LED operator is used, the display shows “ ”. <2> If an LED operator is used, the display shows “ ”. Figure 4.10 Auto-Tuning for PM Motors
Source page
Page 98
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 98 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.4 Start-Up Flowcharts
Flowchart D: PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning
The flowchart below covers Rotational and Stationary Auto-Tuning procedures used to automatically set up the PG encoder offset. PG encoder Offset Tuning should be performed when the PG encoder offset (T2-17) is unknown, when a PG encoder offset value has been set but problems with the speed feedback occur, or when the PG encoder is replaced.
START
Set the motor and PG encoder data manually or perform motor data Auto-tuning. No Has all motor and PG encoder data been YEG set correctly? Yes Set terminals H1-HC and H2-HC if Safe Disable function is used. Set the Baseblock input (H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 8/9) if used. Close the motor contactor(s). Select Initial Magnet Pole Search Parameter Auto-Tuning T2-01 = 3. Press the Up key until “Tuning Ready” is displayed. <1> Press the Run key on the digital operator and wait until Auto-Tuning is finished. Absolute PG encoder necessary for driving the motor. No - “Er-22” <2> Change the PG option card and Tuning Rotational PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning necessary use an absolute PG Encoder Successful? (EnDat, ...). Yes (Stationary PG Encoder Offset Absolute PG No Auto-Tuning possible) encoder used? (PG-X3, Incremental Yes PG encoder used) (EnDat, ...) Uncouple motor and the mechanical system of the elevator (remove ropes). Select Stationary Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning Select Rotational PG Encoder Offset T2-01 = 4. Auto-Tuning T2-01 = 10. Press the Up key until “Tuning Ready” is displayed. <1> Press the Up key until “Tuning Ready” is displayed. <1> Press the Run key on the digital operator and wait until Auto-Tuning is finished. Release the brake. Refer to Tuning No Auto-Tuning Fault Detection Successful? on page287. Press the Run key on the digital operator Remove the Fault/Alarm source and wait until Auto-Tuning is finished. and repeat Auto Tuning. Yes Apply the brake. No Refer to Tuning Auto-Tuning Fault Detection Successful? on page287. Remove the Fault/Alarm source Yes and repeat Auto Tuning. Open the motor contactor. Open the Baseblock input (H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 8/9) if used. Open terminals H1-HC and H2-HC if used during the normal sequence. Recouple the motor (ropes) to the load if decoupled for tuning. FINISH <1> If an LED operator is used, the display shows “ ”. <2> If an LED operator is used, the display shows “ ”. Figure 4.11 PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning 98 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 99
4.5 Auto-Tuning
| Type | Setting | Requirements and Benefits | Control Mode (A1-02) | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| V/f (0) | OLV (2) | CLV (3) | |||
| Rotational Auto-Tuning | T1-01 = 0 | • Rotational Auto-Tuning gives the most accurate results, and is recommended if possible. • Motor must run freely or with light load (<30%), i.e. ropes have to be removed. | No | Yes | Yes |
| Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 | T1-01 = 1 | • A motor test report listing motor data is not available. • Automatically calculates motor parameters needed for vector control. • Use if ropes cannot be removed. Note that the accuracy is less then with Rotational Auto-Tuning. | No | Yes | Yes |
| Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance | T1-01 = 2 | • Used for V/f Control or in vector control modes when the drive was previously set up properly and now the motor cable has changed. • Used in V/f control if drive and motor capacities differ. • Should not be used for any vector control modes unless the motor cable has changed. | Yes | Yes | Yes |
| Stationary Auto-Tuning 2 | T1-01 = 4 | • A motor test report is available. Once the no-load current and the rated slip have been entered, the drive calculates and sets all other motor-related parameters. • Use if ropes cannot be removed and if slip and no-load current data are available. | No | Yes | Yes |
| Input Value | Input Parameter | Unit | Tuning Type (T1-01) | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0 Standard | 1 Stationary 1 | 2 Line-to-Line Resistance | 4 Stationary 2 | |||
| Control Mode | A1-02 | - | 2, 3 | 2, 3 | 0, 1, 2, 3 | 2, 3 |
| Motor Rated Power | T1-02 | kW | YES | YES | YES | YES |
| Motor Rated Voltage | T1-03 | Vac | YES | YES | N/A | YES |
| Motor Rated Current | T1-04 | A | YES | YES | YES | YES |
| Motor Rated Frequency | T1-05 | Hz | YES | YES | N/A | YES |
| Number of Motor Poles | T1-06 | - | YES | YES | N/A | YES |
| Motor Rated Speed | T1-07 | r/min | YES | YES | N/A | YES |
| PG Number of Pulses per Revolution | T1-08 | - | YES<1> | YES<1> | N/A | YES<1> |
| Motor No-load Current | T1-09 | A | N/A | YES | N/A | YES |
| Motor Rated Slip | T1-10 | Hz | N/A | N/A | N/A | YES |
Source page
Page 100
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 100 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.5 Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning for Permanent Magnet Motors Automatically sets the V/f pattern and motor parameters E1-, E5-, and some F1- parameters for speed feedback detection.
Table 4.7 Types of Auto-Tuning for Permanent Magnet Motors Type Setting Requirements and Benefits • Use if a motor test report is available. Motor Data Input T2-01 = 0 • Input motor data from the motor test report. Convert data into the correct unit before inputting data if necessary. • Motor does not rotate during Auto-Tuning. • Use if a motor test report is not available. Stationary Auto-Tuning T2-01 = 1 • Input motor data from the motor name plate. Make sure to convert data into the correct units. The drive automatically calculates the motor data. Stationary Stator Resistance • Tunes stator resistance only. Auto-Tuning T2-01 = 2 • Should be performed if the motor cabling has changed. • Use if a motor test is not available. Rotational Back EMF Constant • Tunes the Motor Induction Voltage only. Auto-Tuning T2-01 = 11 • Should be performed after Motor data are set and the encoder offset is adjusted. • The motor must be uncoupled from the mechanical system (remove ropes). Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder T2-01 = 12 Perform this Auto-Tuning to obtain accurate position data from the motor rotor for driving a PM motor. Characteristics<1> <1> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics requires a PG-E3 option with software version 1102 or later. To identify the PG-E3 software version, refer to the PG-E3 labeling on the option, in the field designated “C/N” (S + four digit number). Table 4.8 lists the data that must be entered for Auto-Tuning. Make sure the data is available before starting Auto-Tuning. The information needed is usually listed on the motor nameplate or in the motor test report provided by the motor manufacturer. Also refer to Flowchart C: Auto-Tuning for PM Motors on page 97 for details on the tuning mode selection and the tuning process. Table 4.8 Auto-Tuning Input Data Tuning Type (T2-01) Input Value Pa I r n a p m u e t ter Unit P S a M e ra t o t m 0 i t n o e g r t s er Stati 1 onary R S e t S a s t i t i s a o 2 t t n a o n a r r c y e M A P u a a S t g r I o a n e n - m a i e T 3 t r i u t e a c P n t l h e o i n r l s e g A S u E t t O a n o t c f - i f T 4 o o s u n d e n a e t i r r n y g A R u E o t O n o ta c f - 1 f T t o 0 s i u o d e n n e t i a r n l g B C a o c n k 1 s 1 E ta M n F t C T E h u P n A i a n s G c r u 1 i t a n o i - 2 t c E c o g d s t 3 - e e o r r f - Control Mode A1-02 - 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Motor Rated Power T2-04 kW Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Motor Rated Voltage T2-05 V Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Motor Rated Current T2-06 A Yes Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Number of Motor Poles T2-08 N/A Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Motor Rated Speed T2-09 r/min Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Stator 1 Phase Resistance T2-10 Ω Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A d-Axis Inductance T2-11 mH Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A q-Axis Inductance T2-12 mH Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Induced Voltage Constant Unit T2-13 N/A Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Selection Voltage Constant T2-14 <2> Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A PG Number of Pulses per T2-16 N/A Yes Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Revolution Z Pulse Offset T2-17 deg (mech.) Yes N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Speed Reference for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder T2-18 r/min N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Yes Characteristics<1> Rotation Direction for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder T2-19 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Yes Characteristics<1> <1> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. <2> Depends on T2-13 setting.
100 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Type | Setting | Requirements and Benefits |
|---|---|---|
| Motor Data Input | T2-01 = 0 | • Use if a motor test report is available. • Input motor data from the motor test report. Convert data into the correct unit before inputting data if necessary. • Motor does not rotate during Auto-Tuning. |
| Stationary Auto-Tuning | T2-01 = 1 | • Use if a motor test report is not available. • Input motor data from the motor name plate. Make sure to convert data into the correct units. The drive automatically calculates the motor data. |
| Stationary Stator Resistance Auto-Tuning | T2-01 = 2 | • Tunes stator resistance only. • Should be performed if the motor cabling has changed. |
| Rotational Back EMF Constant Auto-Tuning | T2-01 = 11 | • Use if a motor test is not available. • Tunes the Motor Induction Voltage only. • Should be performed after Motor data are set and the encoder offset is adjusted. • The motor must be uncoupled from the mechanical system (remove ropes). |
| Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristics<1> | T2-01 = 12 | Perform this Auto-Tuning to obtain accurate position data from the motor rotor for driving a PM motor. |
| Input Value | Input Parameter | Unit | Tuning Type (T2-01) | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0 Motor Parameter Settings | 1 Stationary | 2 Stationary Stator Resistance | 3 Initial Magnet Pole Search Parameters Auto-Tuning | 4 Encoder Offset Stationary Auto-Tuning | 10 Encoder Offset Rotational Auto-Tuning | 11 Back EMF Constant | 12 Auto- Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Character- istics | |||
| Control Mode | A1-02 | - | 7 | 7 | 7 | 7 | 7 | 7 | 7 | 7 |
| Motor Rated Power | T2-04 | kW | Yes | Yes | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
| Motor Rated Voltage | T2-05 | V | Yes | Yes | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
| Motor Rated Current | T2-06 | A | Yes | Yes | Yes | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
| Number of Motor Poles | T2-08 | N/A | Yes | Yes | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
| Motor Rated Speed | T2-09 | r/min | Yes | Yes | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
| Stator 1 Phase Resistance | T2-10 | Ω | Yes | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
| d-Axis Inductance | T2-11 | mH | Yes | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
| q-Axis Inductance | T2-12 | mH | Yes | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
| Induced Voltage Constant Unit Selection | T2-13 | N/A | Yes | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
| Voltage Constant | T2-14 | <2> | Yes | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
| PG Number of Pulses per Revolution | T2-16 | N/A | Yes | Yes | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
| Z Pulse Offset | T2-17 | deg (mech.) | Yes | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
| Speed Reference for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristics<1> | T2-18 | r/min | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | Yes |
| Rotation Direction for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristics<1> | T2-19 | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | Yes |
Source page
Page 101
4.5 Auto-Tuning
| Type | Setting | Requirements and Benefits |
|---|---|---|
| Initial Magnet Pole Search Parameters Auto-Tuning | T2-01 = 3 | • Should be performed after motor Auto-Tuning in order to determine the PG encoder tuning method. • Attempts to detect the motor rotor position, determines whether PG encoder offset can be tuned using Stationary Encoder Offset Tuning and sets parameters needed for Initial Magnet Pole Search (n8-36, n8-37). • When using the Rescue Operation mode, perform this tuning to let the drive automatically set the parameters needed for Initial Magnet Pole Search with power supply from a battery or UPS (n8-81, n8-82). • Must be performed when using an incremental PG encoder. Important: If this tuning fails when using a PG-X3 card with an incremental PG encoder the motor cannot be driven using an incre- mental PG encoder. Change the PG encoder to an absolute PG encoder. |
| Stationary PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning | T2-01 = 4 | • Tunes the PG encoder offset without rotating the motor. • If the PG encoder offset cannot be tuned properly by this method, try Rotating PG Encoder Offset Tuning. |
| Rotational PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning | T2-01 = 10 | • Tunes the PG encoder offset while rotating the motor. • Motor and mechanical system must be uncoupled (ropes must be removed from traction sheave). |
Source page
Page 102
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 102 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.5 Auto-Tuning
102 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Motor Type | Auto-Tuning Type | Digital Input | Digital Output |
|---|---|---|---|
| IM Motor | Rotational Auto-Tuning | Digital input functions are disabled. | Functions the same as during normal operation |
| Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 | Digital input functions are disabled. | Maintains the status at the start of Auto-Tuning | |
| Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance | Digital input functions are disabled. | Maintains the status at the start of Auto-Tuning | |
| Stationary Auto-Tuning 2 | Digital input functions are disabled. | Maintains the status at the start of Auto-Tuning | |
| PM Motor | Motor Data Input | Digital input functions are disabled. | Digital output functions are disabled. |
| Stationary Auto-Tuning | Digital input functions are disabled. | Maintains the status at the start of Auto-Tuning | |
| Stationary Stator Resistance Auto-Tuning | Digital input functions are disabled. | Maintains the status at the start of Auto-Tuning | |
| Initial Magnet Pole Search Parameters Auto-Tuning | Digital input functions are disabled. | Maintains the status at the start of Auto-Tuning | |
| Stationary PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning | Digital input functions are disabled. | Maintains the status at the start of Auto-Tuning | |
| Rotational PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning | Digital input functions are disabled. | Maintains the status at the start of Auto-Tuning | |
| Rotational Back EMF Constant Auto-Tuning | Digital input functions are disabled. | Functions the same as during normal operation | |
| Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristics | Digital input functions are disabled. | Maintains the status at the start of Auto-Tuning |
| DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALM | Column |
|---|---|
| R-E VA T .DT uDUR nRVe NV E PF Or - oUTc D e R e V din R g dy X.XX Hz/ X.XXA (cid:30)(cid:30)(cid:30)(cid:30)(cid:30)(cid:30)(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:32)(cid:32)(cid:32)(cid:32)(cid:32)(cid:32) FWD |
| DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALM - MODE - DRV Er-03 STOP key FWDRESET uto-Tuning Abort rted Display | DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 | ALM |
|---|---|---|
| - MODE - DRV Er-03 STOP key FWDRESET |
Source page
Page 103
4.5 Auto-Tuning
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 103 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 103 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Auto-Tuning Operation Example The following example demonstrates Rotational Auto-Tuning when using OLV (A1-02 = 2). Selecting the Type of Auto-Tuning Step Display/Result - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) 1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears. U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWD FWD/REV - MODE - PRG Auto-Tuning 2. Press or until the Auto-Tuning display appears. AUTO HELP FWD DATA - A.TUNE - PRG Tuning Mode 3. Press to begin setting parameters. T1- S 0 t 1 a = n d a 0 r d ∗ 0 T ∗ uning ESC FWD DATA - A.TUNE - PRG Tuning Mode 4. Press to select the value for T1-01. T1 S -0 ta 1 n = d a 0 r d ∗ T 0 u ∗ ning “0” FWD 5. Save the setting by pressing . Entry Accepted - A.TUNE - PRG Tuning Mode 6. The display automatically returns to the display shown in Step 3. T1-01= 0 ∗0∗ Standard Tuning ESC FWD DATA Enter Data from the Motor Nameplate After selecting the type of Auto-Tuning, enter the data required from the motor nameplate. Note: These instructions continue from Step 6 in “Selecting the Type of Auto-Tuning”. Step Display/Result - A.TUNE - PRG Mtr Rated Power 1. Press to access the motor output power parameter T1-02. T1- ( 0 0 2 .0 = 0 3 ~ . 6 7 5 0 0 k . W 00) “3.70kW” ESC FWD DATA 4 - A.TUNE - PRG Mtr Rated Power 2. Press to view the default setting. T1- ( 0 0 2 .0 = 0 0 ~ 0 6 3 5 . 0 7 . 0 0 k 0 W ) “3.70kW” FWD - A.TUNE - PRG Mtr Rated Power 3. Press F1 , F2 , , and to enter the motor power nameplate data in kW. T1-02= 004.00kW left right (0.0 “3 0 . ~ 7 0 6 k 5 W 0. ” 00) FWD 4. Press to save the setting. Entry Accepted - A.TUNE - PRG Mtr Rated Power 5. The display automatically returns to the display in Step 1. T1-02= 4.00kW (0.00 ~ 650.00) “3.70kW” ESC FWD DATA
| Step | Column | Column | Display/Result |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears. | - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | |
| 2. | Press or until the Auto-Tuning display appears. | - MODE - PRG Auto-Tuning AUTO HELP FWD DATA | |
| 3. | Press to begin setting parameters. | - A.TUNE -PRG Tuning Mode T1-01= 0 ∗0∗ Standard Tuning ESC FWD DATA | |
| 4. | Press to select the value for T1-01. | - A.TUNE -PRG Tuning Mode T1-01= 0 ∗0∗ Standard Tuning “0” FWD | |
| 5. | Save the setting by pressing . | Entry Accepted | |
| 6. | The display automatically returns to the display shown in Step 3. | - A.TUNE -PRG Tuning Mode T1-01= 0 ∗0∗ Standard Tuning ESC FWD DATA |
| - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|
| U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | RSEQ | |
| LREF | ||
| FWD/REV |
| - A.TUNE -PRG Tuning Mode | Column |
|---|---|
| T1-01= 0 ∗0∗ Standard Tuning ESC FWD DATA | |
| ESC | DATA |
| - A.TUNE -PRG Tuning Mode |
|---|
| T1-01= 0 ∗0∗ Standard Tuning “0” FWD |
| - A.TUNE -PRG Tuning Mode | Column |
|---|---|
| T1-01= 0 ∗0∗ Standard Tuning ESC FWD DATA | |
| ESC | DATA |
| Step | Column | Column | Display/Result |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | Press to access the motor output power parameter T1-02. | - A.TUNE -PRG Mtr Rated Power T1-02= 3.70kW (0.00 ~ 650.00) “3.70kW” ESC FWD DATA | |
| 2. | Press to view the default setting. | - A.TUNE -PRG Mtr Rated Power T1-02= 003.70kW (0.00 ~ 650.00) “3.70kW” FWD | |
| 3. | Press F1 , F2 , , and to enter the motor power nameplate data in kW. left right | - A.TUNE -PRG Mtr Rated Power T1-02= 004.00kW (0.00 ~ 650.00) “3.70kW” FWD | |
| 4. | Press to save the setting. | Entry Accepted | |
| 5. | The display automatically returns to the display in Step 1. | - A.TUNE -PRG Mtr Rated Power T1-02= 4.00kW (0.00 ~ 650.00) “3.70kW” ESC FWD DATA |
| - A.TUNE -PRG Mtr Rated Power | Column |
|---|---|
| T1-02= 3.70kW (0.00 ~ 650.00) “3.70kW” ESC FWD DATA | |
| ESC | DATA |
| - A.TUNE -PRG Mtr Rated Power |
|---|
| T1-02= 003.70kW (0.00 ~ 650.00) “3.70kW” FWD |
| - A.TUNE -PRG Mtr Rated Power |
|---|
| T1-02= 004.00kW (0.00 ~ 650.00) “3.70kW” FWD |
| - A.TUNE -PRG Mtr Rated Power | Column |
|---|---|
| T1-02= 4.00kW (0.00 ~ 650.00) “3.70kW” ESC FWD DATA | |
| ESC | DATA |
Source page
Page 104
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 104 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.5 Auto-Tuning
104 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Step | Column | Column | Display/Result |
|---|---|---|---|
| 6. | Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to set the following parameters: • T1-03, Motor Rated Voltage • T1-04, Motor Rated Current • T1-05, Motor Base Frequency • T1-06, Number of Motor Poles • T1-07, Motor Base Speed | - A.TUNE -PRG Mtr Rated Power T1-02= 4.00kW (0.00 ~ 650.00) “3.70kW” ESC FWD DATA - A.TUNE -PRG Rated Speed T1-07= 1450RPM (0 ~ 24000) “1450RPM” ESC FWD DATA |
| - A.TUNE -PRG Mtr Rated Power | Column |
|---|---|
| T1-02= 4.00kW (0.00 ~ 650.00) “3.70kW” ESC FWD DATA | |
| ESC | DATA |
| - A.TUNE -PRG Rated Speed | Column |
|---|---|
| T1-07= 1450RPM (0 ~ 24000) “1450RPM” ESC FWD DATA | |
| ESC | DATA |
| Step | Column | Column | Display/Result |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | After entering the data listed on the motor nameplate, press to confirm. | - A.TUNE -DRV Auto-Tuning 0.00 Hz/ 0.00A Tuning Ready ? Press RUN key ESC FWD | |
| 2. | Press to activate Auto-Tuning. The drive begins by injecting current into the motor for about 1 min, and then starts to rotate the motor. | - A.TUNE -DRV Rdy Tune Proceeding X.XX Hz/ X.XXA (cid:30)(cid:30)(cid:30)(cid:30)(cid:30)(cid:30)(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:32)(cid:32)(cid:32)(cid:32)(cid:32)(cid:32) FWD | |
| 3. | Auto-Tuning finishes in approximately one to two minutes. | - MODE - DRV End Tune Successful FWDRESET |
| - A.TUNE -DRV Auto-Tuning | Column |
|---|---|
| 0.00 Hz/ 0.00A Tuning Ready ? Press RUN key ESC FWD | |
| ESC |
Source page
Page 105
4.5 Auto-Tuning
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 105 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 105 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Parameter Settings during Induction Motor Auto-Tuning: T1 The T1- parameters are used to set the Auto-Tuning input data for induction motor tuning. Note: For motors operating in the field weakening range, first perform the Auto-Tuning with the base data. After Auto-Tuning is complete, change E1-04, Maximum Output Frequency, to the desired value. T1-01: Auto-Tuning Mode Selection Sets the type of Auto-Tuning to be used. Refer to Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors on page 99 for details on the different types of Auto-Tuning. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default 2 (V/f) 2 (V/f) T1-01 Auto-Tuning Mode Selection 0 to 2, 4 (OLV, CLV) 1 (OLV, CLV) Setting 0: Rotational Auto-Tuning Setting 1: Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 Setting 2: Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance Setting 4: Stationary Auto-Tuning 2 T1-02: Motor Rated Power Sets the motor rated power according to the motor nameplate value. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T1-02 Motor Rated Power 0.00 to 650.00 kW Determined by o2-04 T1-03: Motor Rated Voltage Sets the motor rated voltage according to the motor nameplate value. Enter the motor voltage at base speed here if the motor is operating above base speed. Enter the voltage needed to operate the motor under no-load conditions at rated speed to T1-03 for better control precision around rated speed when using a vector control mode. The no-load voltage can usually be found in the motor test report available from the manufacturer. If the motor test report is not available, enter approximately 90% of the rated voltage printed on the motor nameplate. This may increase the output current and reduce the overload margin. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T1-03 Motor Rated Voltage 0.0 to 255.5 V<1> 200.0 V<1> <1> Values shown are specific to 200 V class drives. Double value for 400 V class drives. T1-04: Motor Rated Current Sets the motor rated current according to the motor nameplate value. Set the motor rated current between 50% and 100% of the drive rated current for optimal performance in OLV or CLV. Enter the current at the motor base speed. 4 No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T1-04 Motor Rated Current 10 to 200% of drive rated current Depending on o2-04 T1-05: Motor Base Frequency Sets the motor rated frequency according to the motor nameplate value. If a motor with an extended speed range is used or if the motor is used in the field weakening area, enter the maximum frequency to E1-04 (E3-04 for motor 2) after Auto-Tuning is complete. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T1-05 Motor Base Frequency 0.0 to 200.0 Hz 50.0 Hz
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T1-01 | Auto-Tuning Mode Selection | 2 (V/f) 0 to 2, 4 (OLV, CLV) | 2 (V/f) 1 (OLV, CLV) |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T1-02 | Motor Rated Power | 0.00 to 650.00 kW | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T1-03 | Motor Rated Voltage | 0.0 to 255.5 V<1> | 200.0 V<1> |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T1-04 | Motor Rated Current | 10 to 200% of drive rated current | Depending on o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T1-05 | Motor Base Frequency | 0.0 to 200.0 Hz | 50.0 Hz |
Source page
Page 106
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 106 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.5 Auto-Tuning
T1-06: Number of Motor Poles
Sets the number of motor poles according to the motor nameplate value.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T1-06 Number of Motor Poles 2 to 48 4 T1-07: Motor Base Speed
Sets the motor rated speed according to the motor nameplate value. If a motor with an extended speed range is used or if the motor is used in the field weakening area, enter the speed at base frequency to T1-07.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T1-07 Motor Base Speed 0 to 24000 r/min 1450 r/min T1-08: PG Number of Pulses Per Revolution
Sets the number of pulses from the PG encoder. Set the actual number of pulses for one full motor rotation.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T1-08 PG Number of Pulses Per Revolution 0 to 60000 ppr 1024 ppr Note: T1-08 will only be displayed in CLV.
T1-09: Motor No-Load Current Sets the no-load current for the motor. The default setting displayed is no-load current automatically calculated from the output power set in T1-02 and the motor rated current set to T1-04. Enter the data listed on the motor test report. Leave this data at the default setting if the motor test report is not available.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T1-09<1> Motor No-Load Current (M 0 a t x o : [ 0 T t 1 o - 0 2 4 9 ] 9 A 9.9) - <1> The value will have two decimal places (0.01 A) in the drive models 20008 to 20033 and 40005 to 40018 (refer to Table A.1 and Table A.2), and one decimal place (0.1 A) in the drive models 20047 to 20415 and 40024 to 40216. T1-10: Motor Rated Slip Sets the rated slip for the motor. The default setting displayed is the motor rated slip for a Yaskawa motor calculated from the output power set in T1-02. Enter the data listed on the motor test report. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T1-10 Motor Rated Slip 0.00 to 20.00 Hz - 106 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T1-06 | Number of Motor Poles | 2 to 48 | 4 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T1-07 | Motor Base Speed | 0 to 24000 r/min | 1450 r/min |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T1-08 | PG Number of Pulses Per Revolution | 0 to 60000 ppr | 1024 ppr |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T1-09<1> | Motor No-Load Current | 0 to [T1-04] A (Max: 0 to 2999.9) | - |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T1-10 | Motor Rated Slip | 0.00 to 20.00 Hz | - |
Source page
Page 107
4.5 Auto-Tuning
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 107 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 107 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Parameter Settings during PM Motor Auto-Tuning: T2 The T2- parameters are used to set the Auto-Tuning input data for PM motor tuning. T2-01: PM Auto-Tuning Mode Selection Selects the type of Auto-Tuning to be performed. Refer to Auto-Tuning for Permanent Magnet Motors on page 100 for details on different types of Auto-Tuning. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T2-01 PM Auto-Tuning Mode Selection 0 to 4, 10 to 12<1> 0 <1> Setting 12 is available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics requires a PG-E3 option with software version 1102 or later. To identify the PG-E3 software version, refer to the PG-E3 labeling on the option, in the field designated “C/N” (S + four digit number). Setting 0: Motor Data Input Setting 1: PM Stationary Auto-Tuning Setting 2: PM Stationary Stator Resistance Auto-Tuning Setting 3: Initial Magnet Pole Search Parameters Auto-Tuning Setting 4: Stationary PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning Setting 10: Rotational PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning Setting 11: Rotational Back EMF Constant Auto-Tuning Setting 12: Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristics T2-04: PM Motor Rated Power Specifies the PM motor rated power in kilowatts. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T2-04 PM Motor Rated Power 0.00 to 650.00 kW Depending on o2-04 T2-05: PM Motor Rated Voltage Sets the PM motor rated voltage. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T2-05 PM Motor Rated Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V<1> 200.0 V<1> <1> Values shown are specific to 200 V class drives. Double value for 400 V class drives. T2-06: PM Motor Rated Current Enter the PM motor rated current in amps. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default 10% to 200% of the drive rated T2-06 PM Motor Rated Current current Depending on o2-04 4 T2-08: Number of PM Motor Poles Enter the number of motor poles. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T2-08 Number of PM Motor Poles 2 to 120<1> 6 <1> When PG-E3 option connected: Max setting = 48 T2-09: PM Motor Base Speed Enter the motor rated speed in r/min. Note: T2-09 will be displayed when in CLV/PM. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T2-09 PM Motor Base Speed 0 to 24000 r/min 150 r/min
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T2-01 | PM Auto-Tuning Mode Selection | 0 to 4, 10 to 12<1> | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T2-04 | PM Motor Rated Power | 0.00 to 650.00 kW | Depending on o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T2-05 | PM Motor Rated Voltage | 0.0 to 255.0 V<1> | 200.0 V<1> |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T2-06 | PM Motor Rated Current | 10% to 200% of the drive rated current | Depending on o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T2-08 | Number of PM Motor Poles | 2 to 120<1> | 6 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T2-09 | PM Motor Base Speed | 0 to 24000 r/min | 150 r/min |
Source page
Page 108
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 108 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.5 Auto-Tuning
T2-10: PM Motor Stator Resistance Enter the motor stator resistance per motor phase.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T2-10 PM Motor Stator Resistance 0.000 to 65.000 Ω - T2-11: PM Motor d-Axis Inductance Enter the d axis inductance per motor phase.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T2-11 PM Motor d-Axis Inductance 0.00 to 600.00 mH - T2-12: PM Motor q-Axis Inductance Enter the q axis inductance per motor phase.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T2-12 PM Motor q-Axis Inductance 0.00 to 600.00 mH - T2-13: Induced Voltage Constant Unit Selection Selects the units used for setting the induced voltage coefficient.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T2-13 Induced Voltage Constant Unit Selection 0, 1 1 Setting 0: mV/min-1 Setting 1: mVs/rad Note: If T2-13 is set to 0, then the drive will use E5-24 (Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2), and will automatically set E5-09 (Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1) to 0.0. If T2-13 is set to 1, then the drive will use E5-09 and will automatically set E5-24 to 0.0. T2-14: PM Motor Induced Voltage Constant
Enter the motor induced voltage constant.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T2-14 PM Motor Induced Voltage Constant 0.0 to 2000.0 Depending on T2-02 T2-16: PG Number of Pulses Per Revolution for PM Motor Tuning
Enter the number of pulses from the PG encoder per motor rotation.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T2-16 Encoder Resolution (Pulses Per Revolution) 1 to 15000 ppr 1024 ppr T2-17: PG Encoder Z-pulse Offset
Sets the offset between the rotor magnet axis and the PG encoder zero position. If the PG encoder offset value is unknown or if the PG encoder is replaced, perform PG Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T2-17 PG Encoder Z-pulse Offset -180.0 to 180.0 deg 0.0 deg T2-18: Speed Reference for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristics Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later.
Sets the speed reference for execution of Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics (T2-01 = 12).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T2-18 Speed Reference for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristics 1 to 30 r/min 10 r/min
108 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T2-10 | PM Motor Stator Resistance | 0.000 to 65.000 Ω | - |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T2-11 | PM Motor d-Axis Inductance | 0.00 to 600.00 mH | - |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T2-12 | PM Motor q-Axis Inductance | 0.00 to 600.00 mH | - |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T2-13 | Induced Voltage Constant Unit Selection | 0, 1 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T2-14 | PM Motor Induced Voltage Constant | 0.0 to 2000.0 | Depending on T2-02 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T2-16 | Encoder Resolution (Pulses Per Revolution) | 1 to 15000 ppr | 1024 ppr |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T2-17 | PG Encoder Z-pulse Offset | -180.0 to 180.0 deg | 0.0 deg |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T2-18 | Speed Reference for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristics | 1 to 30 r/min | 10 r/min |
Source page
Page 109
4.5 Auto-Tuning
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 109 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 109 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 T2-19: Rotation Direction for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristics Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. Sets the direction of motor rotation for execution of Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics (T2-01 = 12). No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default T2-19 Rotation Direction for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristic 0, 1 0 Setting 0: Forward (Up) Setting 1: Reverse (Down) 4
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| T2-19 | Rotation Direction for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristic | 0, 1 | 0 |
Source page
Page 110
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 110 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
Up and Down Commands and Speed Reference Selection
b1-01 Reference source Speed reference input 0 (default) Digital operator keypad Set the speed references in the d1- parameters and use digital inputs to switch between different reference values. 1 Analog input<1> Apply the speed reference signal to terminal A1 or A2. 2 Serial Communication<2> Serial Communications using the RS422/485 port 3 Option Board<2> Communications option card <1> If source of the speed reference is assigned to the control terminals (b1-01 = 1), then d1-18 will automatically be set to 0 (so that the drive uses multi-speed references d1-01 to d1-08). <2> If the speed reference selection in d1-18 is set so that either the high speed reference has priority (d1-18 = 1), or so that the leveling speed has priority (d1-18 = 2), then the drive will look to the multi-function input terminals for the speed reference. Up/Down Command Source Selection The input source for the Up and Down command can be selected using parameter b1-02.
b1-02 Up/Down source Up/Down command input 0 Operator keypad RUN and STOP keys on the operator Terminal S1: Run in the Up direction 1 (default) Digital inputs Terminal S2: Run in the Down direction 2 Serial Communication Serial Communications using the RS422/485 port 3 Option Board Communications option card Travel Start and Stop Travel Start To start the elevator in the up or down direction, the following conditions must be fulfilled: • A speed reference greater than zero must be provided. • The Safe Disable signals at terminals H1 and H2 must both be closed (drive output enabled). • If a multi-function digital input is programmed for Baseblock (H1- = 8 or 9), this input must be set so the drive is not in a baseblock condition. • An Up or Down Signal must be set at the source specified in b1-02. • If a multifunction input is programmed for output contactor feedback (H1- = 56), then the output contactor must be closed.
110 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| b1-01 | Reference source | Speed reference input |
|---|---|---|
| 0 (default) | Digital operator keypad | Set the speed references in the d1- parameters and use digital inputs to switch between different reference values. |
| 1 | Analog input<1> | Apply the speed reference signal to terminal A1 or A2. |
| 2 | Serial Communication<2> | Serial Communications using the RS422/485 port |
| 3 | Option Board<2> | Communications option card |
| b1-02 | Up/Down source | Up/Down command input |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Operator keypad | RUN and STOP keys on the operator |
| 1 (default) | Digital inputs | Terminal S1: Run in the Up direction Terminal S2: Run in the Down direction |
| 2 | Serial Communication | Serial Communications using the RS422/485 port |
| 3 | Option Board | Communications option card |
Source page
Page 111
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 111 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 111 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Travel Stop The drive stops under the following conditions: • The Up or Down command is removed. • d1-18 is set to 1 or 2 and the Up/Down or Leveling Speed signal (H1- = 53) is removed. • d1-18 is set to 3 and all speed inputs are removed. • A fault occurs. The stopping method depends on the specific fault that occurred, in combination with certain parameter settings. • The Safe Disable inputs are opened or a Base Block signal is input. In this case, the brake is applied immediately and the drive output shuts off. Speed Selection Using Digital Inputs (b1-01 = 0) Set parameter b1-01 = 0 to enable the speed selection using the drive digital inputs. Use parameter d1-18 to determine different travel speeds selected by the digital inputs. NOTICE: Always turn off the RUN command before changing the setting of parameters d1-18 (Speed Reference Selection Mode), b1-01 (Speed Reference Selection), or H1- (Multi-Function Digital Inputs). If the RUN command is on when changing any of these settings, the motor may unexpectedly start running, and could result in injury. d1-18 Speed Selection 0 (default) Multi-speed inputs 1, Speed references are set in d1-01 to d1-08 1 Separate speed inputs, Speed references are set in d1-19 to d1-24 and d1-26, Higher speed has priority 2 Separate speed inputs, Speed references are set in d1-19 to d1-24 and d1-26, Leveling speed has priority 3 Multi speed inputs 2, Speed references are set in d1-02 to d1-08, Stop if no speed selection input is enabled Multi-Speed Inputs 1, 2 (d1-18 = 0 or 3) Speed Selection When d1-18 = 0 or 3, multi-function digital inputs are preset as shown below. Terminal Parameter Number Set Value Details S5 H1-05 3 Multi-Speed Reference 1 S6 H1-06 4 Multi-Speed Reference 2 S7 H1-07 5 Multi-Speed Reference 3 Different speed reference settings can be selected by combining the three digital inputs as shown in the table below. Note: Parameters d1-19 through d1-26 are displayed only if d1-18 is set to 1 or 2. Digital Inputs Selected Speed M Re u f l e ti r - e S n p c e e e d 1 R M e u f l e ti r - e S n p c e e e d 2 M Re u f l e ti r - e S n p c e e e d 3 d1-18 = 0 d1-18 = 3 0 0 0 Speed reference 1 (d1-01) Stop 1 0 0 Speed reference 2 (d1-02 or terminal A1, A2 input value if H3-02 or H3-10 is set to 2) 0 1 0 Speed reference 3 (d1-03 or terminal A1, A2 input value if H3-02 or H3-10 is set to 3) 4 1 1 0 Speed reference 4 (d1-04) 0 0 1 Speed reference 5 (d1-05) 1 0 1 Speed reference 6 (d1-06) 0 1 1 Speed reference 7 (d1-07) 1 1 1 Speed reference 8 (d1-08) 0 = Off, 1 = On Setting d1-18 = 0 Up to eight speed references can be set using parameters d1-01 to d1-08. The drive starts with an Up or Down command, and stops when the Up or Down command is removed. When d1-18 = 0, parameters d1-19 through d1-23 will not be displayed. Setting d1-18 = 3 Allows seven speed references to be set using parameters d1-02 to d1-08. The drive starts with an Up or Down command, and stops either when all three input terminals that set the speed reference are released, or when the Up/Down command is released. When d1-18 = 0, parameters d1-19 through d1-23 will not be displayed.
| d1-18 | Speed Selection |
|---|---|
| 0 (default) | Multi-speed inputs 1, Speed references are set in d1-01 to d1-08 |
| 1 | Separate speed inputs, Speed references are set in d1-19 to d1-24 and d1-26, Higher speed has priority |
| 2 | Separate speed inputs, Speed references are set in d1-19 to d1-24 and d1-26, Leveling speed has priority |
| 3 | Multi speed inputs 2, Speed references are set in d1-02 to d1-08, Stop if no speed selection input is enabled |
| Terminal | Parameter Number | Set Value | Details |
|---|---|---|---|
| S5 | H1-05 | 3 | Multi-Speed Reference 1 |
| S6 | H1-06 | 4 | Multi-Speed Reference 2 |
| S7 | H1-07 | 5 | Multi-Speed Reference 3 |
| Digital Inputs | Column | Column | Selected Speed | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Multi-Speed Reference 1 | Multi-Speed Reference 2 | Multi-Speed Reference 3 | d1-18 = 0 | d1-18 = 3 |
| 0 | 0 | 0 | Speed reference 1 (d1-01) | Stop |
| 1 | 0 | 0 | Speed reference 2 (d1-02 or terminal A1, A2 input value if H3-02 or H3-10 is set to 2) | |
| 0 | 1 | 0 | Speed reference 3 (d1-03 or terminal A1, A2 input value if H3-02 or H3-10 is set to 3) | |
| 1 | 1 | 0 | Speed reference 4 (d1-04) | |
| 0 | 0 | 1 | Speed reference 5 (d1-05) | |
| 1 | 0 | 1 | Speed reference 6 (d1-06) | |
| 0 | 1 | 1 | Speed reference 7 (d1-07) | |
| 1 | 1 | 1 | Speed reference 8 (d1-08) |
Source page
Page 112
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 112 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
Separate Speed Inputs (d1-18 = 1 or 2) Six different speed settings (defined in the parameters d1-19 to d1-24 and d1-26) can be set and selected using four digital inputs.
Speed Selection When d1-18 = 1 or 2, multi-function digital inputs are preset as shown below.
Terminal Parameter Number Set Value Details S3 H1-03 50 Nominal speed (d1-19) S5 H1-05 51 Intermediate speed S6 H1-06 53 Leveling speed (d1-26) Different speed settings can be selected depending on the assignment of the speed selection digital inputs (H1-) as shown in the table below. Note: Parameters d1-19 through d1-26 are displayed only if d1-18 is set to 1 or 2.
Leveling and Nominal Speed assigned Leveling speed not assigned Nominal Speed not assigned Selected Speed (H1- = 50 and H1- = 53) (H1- ≠ 53) (H1- ≠ 50) 50 51 52 53 50 51 52 51 52 53 Nominal Speed (d1-19) 1 0 0 A 1 0 0 0 0 0 Intermediate Speed 1 (d1-20) 0 1 0 A 0 1 0 1 0 0 Intermediate Speed 2 (d1-21) 1 1 1 A 1 1 1 N/A N/A N/A Intermediate Speed 3 (d1-22) 0 1 1 A 0 1 1 1 1 0 Releveling Speed (d1-23) 0 0 1 A 0 0 1 0 1 0 Leveling Speed (d1-26) 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 B B B Zero Speed 0 0 0 0 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0 = Off, 1 = On, A = 0 when d1-18 = 2 and no influence when d1-18 = 1, B = no influence, N/A = Not available Higher Speed has Priority and the Leveling Speed Input is Assigned (d1-18 = 1 and H1- = 53) (Default) The higher speed has priority over the leveling speed. The leveling signal is disregarded as long as any other speed selection input is active. The drive decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-26) when the selected speed reference signal is removed.
DC Injection/ DC Injection/ Position lock Position lock Speed Safe disable (terminals H1/H2 on) and Baseblock off (H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 8/9) Up/Down Command Leveling speed Selected speed (other than leveling) Input is set No effect Higher Speed Priority is Selected and the Leveling Speed Input is Not Assigned (d1-18 = 1 and H1- ≠ 53) The drive decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-26) when the selected speed reference signal is removed. If no speed reference is selected at start, the drive will trigger an “FrL” fault. Set parameter S6-15 to 0 to disable Speed Reference Missing (FrL) detection. With this setting the drive starts using leveling speed if no other speed reference is selected. DC Injection/ DC Injection/ Position lock Position lock Speed Safe disable (terminals H1/H2 on) and Baseblock off (H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 8/9) Up/Down Command Selected speed (other than leveling) Input is set
112 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Terminal | Parameter Number | Set Value | Details |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3 | H1-03 | 50 | Nominal speed (d1-19) |
| S5 | H1-05 | 51 | Intermediate speed |
| S6 | H1-06 | 53 | Leveling speed (d1-26) |
| Selected Speed | Leveling and Nominal Speed assigned (H1- = 50 and H1- = 53) | Column | Column | Column | Leveling speed not assigned (H1- ≠ 53) | Column | Column | Nominal Speed not assigned (H1- ≠ 50) | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 50 | 51 | 52 | 53 | 50 | 51 | 52 | 51 | 52 | 53 | |
| Nominal Speed (d1-19) | 1 | 0 | 0 | A | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| Intermediate Speed 1 (d1-20) | 0 | 1 | 0 | A | 0 | 1 | 0 | 1 | 0 | 0 |
| Intermediate Speed 2 (d1-21) | 1 | 1 | 1 | A | 1 | 1 | 1 | N/A | N/A | N/A |
| Intermediate Speed 3 (d1-22) | 0 | 1 | 1 | A | 0 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 0 |
| Releveling Speed (d1-23) | 0 | 0 | 1 | A | 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 | 1 | 0 |
| Leveling Speed (d1-26) | 0 | 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 | 0 | 0 | B | B | B |
| Zero Speed | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
Source page
Page 113
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 113 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 113 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Leveling Speed has Priority and the Leveling Speed Input is Assigned (d1-18 = 2, H1- = 53) The leveling signal has priority over other speed references. The drive decelerates to the leveling speed (d1-26) when the leveling speed selection input is activated. The drive stops when either the leveling input or the Up/Down command is released. DC Injection/ DC Injection/ Position lock Position lock Speed Safe disable (terminals H1/H2 on) and Baseblock off (H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 8/9) Up/Down Command Leveling speed Leveling speed has priority Selected speed (other than leveling) Input is set No effect Leveling Speed Priority is Selected and the Nominal Speed Input is Not Assigned (d1-18 = 2, H1- ≠ 50) The drive runs at nominal speed (d1-19) when no speed selection input is set. When the leveling speed signal is set, the drive decelerates to the leveling speed. The leveling speed signal has priority over all other speed signals. NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. This function may not work properly if a broken wire connection to the drive I/O causes improper elevator speed selection. Properly tighten wire connections at the drive terminals before enabling this function. DC Injection/ DC Injection/ position lock position lock Speed Safe disable (terminals H1/H2 on) and Baseblock off (H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 8/9) Up/Down Command Leveling speed Input is set Multi-Function Terminal Setup Multi-Function Digital Input (Terminals S3 to S8) The H1 parameters assign functions to digital input terminals S3 to S8 digital input terminal functions, refer to H1-03 to H1-08: Functions for Terminals S3 to S8 on page 191. Multi-Function Digital Outputs The H2 parameters assign functions to digital output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P1-C1, and P2-PC digital input terminal functions, refer to H2-01 to H2-05: Terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P1-C1, and P2-C2 Function Selection on page 195. Multi-Function Analog Inputs The H3 parameters assign functions to analog input terminals A1 and A2 analog input functions, refer to Multi-Function 4 Analog Input Terminal Settings on page 206. Multi-Function Analog Outputs The H4 parameters assign functions to analog output terminals FM and AM. Select the function for these terminals by entering the last three digits of the desired U monitor. For a list of analog output functions, refer to U: Monitors on page 387.
Source page
Page 114
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 114 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
Accel/Decel Ramp and Jerk Settings
Acceleration and deceleration ramps are set using the C1- parameters. Use the C2- parameters to adjust the jerk at the start of acceleration or deceleration. Figure 4.13 explains how accel/decel ride and jerk settings can be used to adjust the ride profile.
Figure4.9 C2-03 (Jerk at C2-02 Decel Start) (Jerk at Accel End) C2-04 (Jerk at C2-01 C1-01 Decel End) C2-05 (Jerk Below Leveling Speed) (Jerk at (Accel Ramp 1) Accel Start) d1-26 (Leveling Speed) C1-02 (Decel Ramp 1) Figure 4.13 Accel/Decel Ramp and the Jerk Function Units used to set the acceleration and deceleration ramp as well as the Jerk function change with the setting of parameter o1-03. Refer to Digital Operator Display Unit Selection on page 95 for details. Elevator Emergency Stop Start condition for Elevator Emergency Coast to Stop An emergency coast to stop is performed when the Up or Down command is cleared and all of the following conditions are met. • Parameter b1-03 (Stopping Method Selection) is set to 4. • Parameter d1-18 (Speed Reference Selection Mode) is set to 0 or 3. • Parameter b1-01 (Speed Reference Selection) is set to 1. • The Up/Down command is cleared and U1-05 (Speed Feedback) is equal to or greater than S1-26 (Emergency Stop Start Level). Elevator Emergency Stop Timing Chart
A timing chart for Elevator Emergency Coast to Stop and normal Ramp to Stop appears in Figure 4.14 and Figure 4.15. Figure4.10 Selected Speed S1-11 (Output Contactor Open DC Injection Braking/ S1-26 Delay Time) Position Lock at Start Emergency Stop Speed Start Level Coast to Stop Up/Down Command Safe disable (terminals H1/H2 on) or Baseblock off (H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 8/9) H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 51 (Output Cont. Contr.) H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 50 (Brake Control) Enabled Figure 4.14 With Up/Down command cleared and U1-05 ≥ S1-26
114 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 115
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 115 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 115 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Figure4.11 Selected Speed S1-05 (DC Injection/Position S1-11 Lock Time at stop) (Output Contactor Open DC Injection Braking/ S1-26 DC Injection/ Delay Time) Position Lock at Start Emergency Stop Position Lock at Stop Speed Start Level S1-07 (Brake Close Up/Down Command Delay Time) Safe disable (terminals H1/H2 on) or Baseblock off (H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 8/9) H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 51 (Output Cont. Contr.) H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 50 (Brake Control) Enabled Figure 4.15 With Up/Down command cleared and U1-05 < S1-26 Inspection Operation Start Condition in Inspection Operation NOTICE: Always turn off the RUN command before changing the setting of parameters d1-18 (Speed Reference Selection Mode), b1-01 (Speed Reference Selection), or H1- (Multi-Function Digital Inputs). If the RUN command is on when changing any of these settings, the motor may unexpectedly start running, and could result in injury. Inspection operation is performed when an Up or Down signal is input while one of the following conditions is true: • Parameter d1-18 is set to 0 or 3 and the selected speed is higher than d1-28 but lower than d1-29. • Parameter d1-18 is set to 1 or 2 and a digital input programmed for Inspection Operation Speed (H1- = 54) is enabled. Inspection Operation uses the same acceleration characteristics and brake sequence at start as normal operation. The carrier frequency is set to 2 kHz during Inspection Operation, but can be changed using parameter C6-21. Stop Condition in Inspection Operation To stop the drive during Inspection Operation, either remove the Up or Down command or reset the input terminal for Inspection Operation. A deceleration ramp can be set for Inspection Operation using parameter C1-15. • If C1-15 = 0.00, the drive immediately applies the brake, shuts off the drive output, and opens the motor contactor, i.e., the multi-function output terminals set for “Brake Control” (H2- = 50) and “Output Contactor Control” (H2- = 51) are cleared. • If C1-15 > 0.00, the drive decelerates to stop at the rate set to C1-15, then applies the brake, shuts the output off, and opens the motor contactor. 4 Inspection Operation Timing Chart A timing chart for Inspection Operation appears in Figure 4.16. Inspection Operation without Decel Ramp (C1-15 = 0) Inspection Operation with Decel Ramp (C1-15 > 0) Inspection Operation Inspection Operation Speed Speed DC Injection Braking/ DC Injection Braking/ Position Lock at start Position Lock at start C1-15 Speed Speed Safe disable (terminals H1/H2 on) Safe disable (terminals H1/H2 on) and Baseblock off (H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 8/9) and Baseblock off (H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 8/9) H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 54 (Inspection Operation) H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 54 (Inspection Operation) <1> <1> Up/Down command Up/Down command H2-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 51 (Output Cont. Contr.) H2-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 51 (Output Cont. Contr.) H2-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 50 (Brake Control) H2-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 50 (Brake Control) Enabled <1> The drive stops if either the Up/Down command or Inspection Operation signals are removed. Figure 4.16 Inspection Operation Sequence
Source page
Page 116
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
Brake Sequence
To configure the brake sequence operation without torque compensation, do not set any analog input terminals for “Torque compensation” (H3- = 14).
Figure4.12
Figure 4.17 Brake Sequence without Torque Compensation at Start Figure 4.17 is divided into time zones. Table 4.11 explains the sequence in each time zone. Table 4.11 Time Zones for Brake Sequence without Torque Compensation at Start
Time Zone Description Up or Down command is issued. Safe Disable terminals H1-HC and H2-HC must be set and Baseblock must be disabled (digital inputs set to H1- = 8/9). Speed reference must be selected by multi-function input terminals. t1 Output contactor control signal is set (H2- = 51) by the drive. Drive waits for the “Motor Contactor Feedback” signal (H1- = 56) to be issued. If the motor contactor feedback is not received within t1, or if the feedback signal is on before the contactor control command has been issued, an SE1 fault is triggered. If the motor contactor feedback signal is not used, then the drive waits for the operation start delay time set in S1-10 to pass, then proceeds to the next step. After the delay time set in S1-10 has passed, the drive outputs current to the motor. t2 DC Injection Braking or Position Lock begins. After the brake release delay time set in S1-06 has passed, the drive sets the “Brake Control” output (H2- = 50) in order to release the brake. DC Injection Braking or Position Lock will continue until: t3 the time S1-04 has elapsed, or the time S1-06 has elapsed if S1-06 > S1-04 (this setting should be avoided since the motor could be driven against the applied brake). t4 The drive accelerates up to the selected speed. The speed is kept constant until the leveling speed is selected. t5 Leveling speed is selected. The drive decelerates to the leveling speed and maintains that speed until the Up or Down command is removed. t6 The Up or Down signal is cleared. The drive decelerates to zero speed. The motor speed reaches the zero speed level (S1-01). t7 DC Injection Braking or Position Lock is then executed for the time set in S1-05. After the delay time to close the brake set in S1-07 has passed, the drive clears the “Brake Control” output (H2- = 50). The brake applies. t8 The drive continues DC Injection or Position Lock until the time S1-05 has passed. When S1-05 has passed the drive output is shut off. t9 A Th ft e er S th a e f e d e D la i y sa f b o l r e t h I e n p m u a t g s n c et a i n c c b o e n t c a l c e t a o r r e s d e t a i n n d S 1 B -1 a 1 s e h b a l s o p c a k s s c e a d n , t b he e d e r n iv a e b l r e es d e . ts the output terminal set for “Output Contactor Control” (H2- = 51).
116 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 116 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 S1-04 S1-05 S1-10 (DC Injection/ Selected Speed (DC Injection (Up/Down Command PositionLock Braking/Position Delay Time) Time at Start) d1-26 Lock Time at stop) S (O 1 u -1 tp 1 ut Contactor DC Injection Braking/ (Leveling Speed) DC Injection/ Open Delay Time) Position Lock at Start Position Lock at Stop Speed S1-06 S1-07 (Brake (Brake Release Close Delay Time) Delay Up/Down Command Time) Safe disable (terminals H1/H2 on) and Baseblock off (H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 8/9) Output Contactor Control (H2-(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)= 51) (cid:2)Motor Contactor Response (H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 56) Brake Control (H2-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 50) t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8 t9 Enabled
| Time Zone | Description |
|---|---|
| t1 | Up or Down command is issued. |
| Safe Disable terminals H1-HC and H2-HC must be set and Baseblock must be disabled (digital inputs set to H1- = 8/9). | |
| Speed reference must be selected by multi-function input terminals. | |
| Output contactor control signal is set (H2- = 51) by the drive. | |
| Drive waits for the “Motor Contactor Feedback” signal (H1- = 56) to be issued. If the motor contactor feedback is not received within t1, or if the feedback signal is on before the contactor control command has been issued, an SE1 fault is triggered. If the motor contactor feedback signal is not used, then the drive waits for the operation start delay time set in S1-10 to pass, then proceeds to the next step. | |
| t2 | After the delay time set in S1-10 has passed, the drive outputs current to the motor. DC Injection Braking or Position Lock begins. |
| After the brake release delay time set in S1-06 has passed, the drive sets the “Brake Control” output (H2- = 50) in order to release the brake. | |
| t3 | DC Injection Braking or Position Lock will continue until: the time S1-04 has elapsed, or the time S1-06 has elapsed if S1-06 > S1-04 (this setting should be avoided since the motor could be driven against the applied brake). |
| t4 | The drive accelerates up to the selected speed. The speed is kept constant until the leveling speed is selected. |
| t5 | Leveling speed is selected. The drive decelerates to the leveling speed and maintains that speed until the Up or Down command is removed. |
| t6 | The Up or Down signal is cleared. The drive decelerates to zero speed. |
| t7 | The motor speed reaches the zero speed level (S1-01). DC Injection Braking or Position Lock is then executed for the time set in S1-05. |
| After the delay time to close the brake set in S1-07 has passed, the drive clears the “Brake Control” output (H2- = 50). The brake applies. | |
| t8 | The drive continues DC Injection or Position Lock until the time S1-05 has passed. When S1-05 has passed the drive output is shut off. |
| t9 | After the delay for the magnetic contactor set in S1-11 has passed, the drive resets the output terminal set for “Output Contactor Control” (H2- = 51). The Safe Disable Inputs can be cleared and Baseblock can be enabled. |
Source page
Page 117
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 117 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & Brake Sequence Using Torque Compensation If a load measuring device is installed in the elevator, an analog input can be used to input a torque compensation value to the drive. This function requires one of the closed loop control modes (CLV or CLV/PM). To use torque compensation, one of the analog input terminals must be configured to provide the torque compensation signal (H3- = 14). Figure 4.18 is a timing chart for a brake sequence using torque compensation. Figure4.13 S3-14 (Torque Compensation Diminish Speed) Figure 4.18 Brake Sequence Using Torque Compensation at Start Figure 4.18 is divided into time zones. Table 4.12 explains the sequence in each time zone. Table 4.12 Time Zones for Brake Sequence Using Torque Compensation at Start Time Zone Description Up or Down command is issued. Safe Disable terminals H1-HC and H2-HC must be set and Baseblock must be disabled (digital inputs set to H1- = 8/9). Speed reference must be selected by multi-function input terminals. Output contactor control signal is set (H2- = 51) by the drive. t1 Drive waits for the “Motor Contactor Feedback” signal (H1- = 56) to be issued. If the motor contactor feedback is not received within t1, or if the feedback signal is on before the contactor control command has been issued, an SE1 fault is triggered. If the motor contactor feedback signal is not used, then the drive waits for the operation start delay time set in S1-10 to pass, then proceeds to the next step. The drive reads the torque value from the analog input (load cell). After the delay time set in S1-10 has passed, the drive outputs current to the motor. Position Lock begins. The torque value from the analog input is latched and internal torque compensation value is increased from zero to the latched value using the t2 time constant set in S3-10. After the internal torque compensation level reaches the latched value, the drive sets the “Brake Control” output (H2- = 50) in order to release the brake. 4 t3 The brake is released and the drive executes Position Lock until the time set in S1-04 has passed. The drive accelerates up to the selected speed. t4 After the torque compensation diminish speed level (S3-14) is reached during acceleration, the internal torque compensation value is reduced in accordance with the time constant set in S3-10. t5 Leveling speed is selected. The drive decelerates to the leveling speed and maintains that speed until the Up or Down command is removed. t6 The Up or Down signal is cleared. The drive decelerates to zero speed. The motor speed reaches the zero speed level (S1-01). t7 DC Injection Braking or Position Lock is then executed for the time set in S1-05. After the delay time to close the brake set in S1-07 has passed, the drive clears the “Brake Control” output (H2- = 50). The brake applies. t8 The drive continues DC Injection or Position Lock until the time S1-05 has passed. When S1-05 has passed the drive output is shut off. After the delay for the magnetic contactor set in S1-11 has passed, the drive resets the output terminal set for “Output Contactor Control” t9 (H2- = 51). The Safe Disable Inputs can be cleared and Baseblock can be enabled. SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 117 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 S1-10 S1-04 Selected Speed S1-05 (Up/Down Command (DC Injection/ (DC Injection Delay Time) P T o im si e ti o a n t S L t o a c r k t) d1-26 Positio B n r L a o k c in k g a / t stop) S1-11 (Leveling Speed) (Output Contactor Position Lock Position Lock Open Delay Time) Speed 300%Torque Torque Compensation ( S B 1 ra -0 ke 7 Fades Out with S3-15 Close Latch value from analog input at S3-14. Delay Time) Torque Compensation at Start S3-10 (Starting Torque Compensation Increase Time) Up/Down Command Safe disable (terminals H1/H2 on) and Baseblock off (H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 8/9) Output Contactor Control (H2-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 51) (cid:2)Motor Contactor Response (H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 56) Brake Control (H2-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 50) t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6 t7 t8 t9 Enabled
| Time Zone | Description |
|---|---|
| t1 | Up or Down command is issued. |
| Safe Disable terminals H1-HC and H2-HC must be set and Baseblock must be disabled (digital inputs set to H1- = 8/9). | |
| Speed reference must be selected by multi-function input terminals. | |
| Output contactor control signal is set (H2- = 51) by the drive. | |
| Drive waits for the “Motor Contactor Feedback” signal (H1- = 56) to be issued. If the motor contactor feedback is not received within t1, or if the feedback signal is on before the contactor control command has been issued, an SE1 fault is triggered. If the motor contactor feedback signal is not used, then the drive waits for the operation start delay time set in S1-10 to pass, then proceeds to the next step. | |
| The drive reads the torque value from the analog input (load cell). | |
| t2 | After the delay time set in S1-10 has passed, the drive outputs current to the motor. Position Lock begins. |
| The torque value from the analog input is latched and internal torque compensation value is increased from zero to the latched value using the time constant set in S3-10. | |
| After the internal torque compensation level reaches the latched value, the drive sets the “Brake Control” output (H2- = 50) in order to release the brake. | |
| t3 | The brake is released and the drive executes Position Lock until the time set in S1-04 has passed. |
| t4 | The drive accelerates up to the selected speed. After the torque compensation diminish speed level (S3-14) is reached during acceleration, the internal torque compensation value is reduced in accordance with the time constant set in S3-10. |
| t5 | Leveling speed is selected. The drive decelerates to the leveling speed and maintains that speed until the Up or Down command is removed. |
| t6 | The Up or Down signal is cleared. The drive decelerates to zero speed. |
| t7 | The motor speed reaches the zero speed level (S1-01). DC Injection Braking or Position Lock is then executed for the time set in S1-05. |
| After the delay time to close the brake set in S1-07 has passed, the drive clears the “Brake Control” output (H2- = 50). The brake applies. | |
| t8 | The drive continues DC Injection or Position Lock until the time S1-05 has passed. When S1-05 has passed the drive output is shut off. |
| t9 | After the delay for the magnetic contactor set in S1-11 has passed, the drive resets the output terminal set for “Output Contactor Control” (H2- = 51). The Safe Disable Inputs can be cleared and Baseblock can be enabled. |
Source page
Page 118
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 118 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
Adjusting the Torque Compensation at Start
Note: 1. This torque compensation requires a closed loop control mode (CLV, CLV/PM). 2. The torque compensation value is limited to 120%. Set an analog input terminal for torque compensation (H3- = 14) and proceed with the steps below. Procedure for Load Condition 1 (S3-27, S3-29)
1. Make sure the drive is wired properly. For instructions, refer to Standard Connection Diagram on page 50. 2. Set the speed reference to 0%. 3. Apply no weight to the elevator car. 4. Note the value of the analog input monitor for the load signal input is connected to (U1-13 for terminal A1, U1-14 for terminal A2). 5. Provide an elevator Up or Down command, using Inspection Operation or normal operation mode. The car should be held in place when the brake releases. 6. Note the drives internal torque reference monitor U1-09. 7. Stop the drive. 8. Set the value noted in step 4 to parameter S3-29. Set the value noted in step 6 to parameter S3-27. Procedure for Load Condition 2 (S3-28, S3-30) 1. Set the speed reference to 0%. 2. Apply load to the car has much as possible (at least 50% of the maximum weight). 3. Note the value of the analog input monitor for the load signal input connected to (U1-13 for terminal A1, U1-14 for terminal A2). 4. Provide an elevator Up or Down command, using Inspection Operation or normal operation mode. The car should be held in place when the brake releases. 5. Note the drives internal torque reference monitor U1-09. 6. Stop the drive. 7. Set the value noted in step 3 to parameter S3-30. Set the value noted in step 5 to parameter S3-28. Figure 4.19 shows the Torque Compensation at Start settings with parameters S3-27 to S3-30. The solid line in Figure 4.19 indicates the torque compensation at start when the elevator moves up or down. Figure4.14 Torque Compensation Value
S3-28 During Load Condition 2 (Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 2) S3-29 (Analog Input from Load Sensor with Load Condition 1) 0 S3-30 Analog Input Voltage (V) S3-27 ( fr A o n m a l L o o g a in d p S u e t nsor (Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 2) with Load Condition 1) During Load Condition 1 Figure 4.19 Torque Compensation at start for the Elevator in Up and Down Direction Note: PRG: 7015 or earlier will apply a limit at 0 V torque compensation input value. PRG: 7016 or later have no torque compensation limit when adding negative voltage to analog input voltage (see Figure 4.19). 118 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Column | S3-29 (Analog Input from Load Sensor with Load Condition 1) |
|---|---|
| 0 Value |
Source page
Page 119
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 119 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 119 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 After setting load conditions 1 and 2, perform a trial run. If required, parameter S3-12 can be set up to add a bias to the load sensor input when riding in a Down direction (default: 0.0%, same torque compensation characteristics in up and down direction). Figure 4.20 illustrates the effect of torque compensation on the settings of S3-12 and S3-27 through S3-30. Figure4.15 S3-28 During Load Condition 2 (Torque Compensation Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 2) at Start for the Elevator in the Down Direction Torque Compensation at Start for the Elevator S3-29 in the Up Direction (Analog Input from Load Sensor S3-12 (Starting Torque with Load Compensation Bias during Lowering) Condition 1) 0 S3-30 (Analog input Analog Input Voltage (V) from Load Sensor with Load Condition 2) S3-27 (Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 1) During Load Condition 1 Figure 4.20 Torque Compensation at start for the Elevator in Up and Down Direction 4
Source page
Page 120
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 120 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
Adjustments for Elevator Ride Comfort
This section explains the adjustment of drive settings used to eliminate problems with hunting, vibration, and rollback. Perform the steps presented in this section after the Basic Application Setup procedure is complete. Also refer to Riding Comfort Related Problems on page 147 for further descriptions on how to resolve riding comfort problems.
Speed Loop Adjustments (CLV and CLV/PM)
The speed control loop uses four different gain and integral time settings that can be adjusted using C5- parameters. The settings are switched over when the motor speed reaches the level set in parameter C5-07. • Proportional gain and integral time C5-03/04 are used at start when the speed is lower than the setting of C5-07. • Proportional gain and integral time C5-01/02 are used at speeds above the setting of C5-07. • Proportional gain and integral time C5-13/14 are used at stop when leveling speed is selected as speed reference and the speed is lower than the setting of C5-07. • Proportional gain and integral time C5-19/20 are used During Position Lock at start in CLV/PM. Increase the gain and shorten the integral time to increase speed control responsiveness in each of the sections. Reduce the gain and increase the integral time if vibration or oscillation occurs.
Inertia Compensation (CLV and CLV/PM)
Inertia compensation can be used to eliminate motor speed overshoot at the end of acceleration or undershoot at the end of deceleration caused by the system inertia. Adjust the function following the steps below. 1. Properly adjust the speed control loop parameters (C5-). 2. Set parameter n5-01 to 1 to enable inertia compensation. 3. Calculate and set n5-02 and n5-03 as follows:
π n Motor Acceleration Time n5-02 n5-02 = J Mot 30 T r r _ _ M M o o t t • • J n M r_ o M t o - t M - R o a to te r d in m er o t t i o a r i n sp k e g e m d 2 in min-1 • Tr_Mot - Rated motor torque in Nm
Inertia Com n5 p - e 0 n 3 sation Gain ΣJ = J TS i2 + Σm 3 π 0 n r v _ r M _ o E t lev 2 • • • v i J T r - _ S E G - le e v T a r - r a R r c a t a t i t i o e o n d ( s n e h L l e e o a v ad v a / e t n o M i r n o s e t) p rt e i e a d i n in k m gm /s 2 n5-03 = ΣJ / J • Σm - Mass of all moved parts (car, counterweight, ropes, load<1>) in kg Mot <1> Insert 0 kg for the load to calculate the lowest setting, insert the elevator rated load to calculate the maximum setting for n5-03. Use the lower setting for initial trials. 4. Change the setting of n5-03 within the limits calculated in step 3 until the desired performance is achieved. If possible, trace the output speed after soft starter (U1-16) and the motor speed (U1-05) values. Increase n5-03 if the motor speed does not follow the speed after soft start. Decrease n5-03 if the motor overshoots the designated speed at the end of acceleration or undershoots the speed at the end of deceleration. Adjusting Position Lock at Start (CLV/PM) Set the S3- and C5- parameters as described below in order to reduce rollback effects at start.
• With the elevator car unloaded, adjust the speed loop gain (C5-19) and integral time for Position Lock (C5-20). Increase the gain and reduce the integral time in order to reduce the rollback of the car. Set parameters C5-19 and C5-20 in the opposite way if vibration occurs. • Adjust the Position Lock at start gain 2 (S3-02). Increase S3-02 if rollback occurs, decrease S3-02 it if vibration occurs. • If the elevator is balanced and oscillation at start occurs, attempt gradually increasing the setting in S3-40 in increments of one pulse.
120 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Motor Acceleration Time n5-02 | π n n5-02= J r_Mot Mot 30 T r_Mot | • J - Motor inertia in kgm2 Mot • n - Rated motor speed in min-1 r_Mot • T - Rated motor torque in Nm r_Mot • J - Traction sheave inertia in kgm2 TS • i - Gear ratio (n /n ) Load Mot • v - Rated elevator speed in m/s r_Elev • Σm - Mass of all moved parts (car, counterweight, ropes, load<1>) in kg |
|---|---|---|
| Inertia Compensation Gain n5-03 | ΣJ= J i2 + Σm 30 v r_Elev 2 TS π n r_Mot n5-03= ΣJ / J Mot |
Source page
Page 121
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 121 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 121 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Rescue Operation In the event of a power outage, Rescue Operation allows the elevator to travel to the nearest floor by switching to a backup battery or UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply) for power. An input terminal set for Rescue Operation (H1- = 55) can be used to initiate Rescue Operation. During Rescue Operation, the drive uses the speed reference set in S4-15 to travel to the nearest floor. NOTICE: Equipment Hazard. Do not use the Rescue Operation feature for extended periods. Failure to comply may result in drive heat sink overtemperature alarms (oH). NOTICE: When changing parameters while the drive is supplied from the rescue operation power supply, wait at least 5 s after entering parameters before switching off the power supply. Instantly switching off the power can cause parameter settings corruption that can only be resolved by initializing the drive. This may cause erroneous drive performance. NOTICE: Always turn off the RUN command before changing the setting of parameters d1-18 (Speed Reference Selection Mode), b1-01 (Speed Reference Selection), or H1- (Multi-Function Digital Inputs). If the RUN command is on when changing any of these settings, the motor may unexpectedly start running, and could result in injury. Drive Power Supply for Rescue Operation There are various methods of supplying power to the drive for rescue operation. Independent of the chosen method, the voltage in the DC bus of the drive and the voltage supplied to the drive control circuit must meet the specifications provided in Table 4.13. The DC bus voltage can either be supplied by a battery connected to the DC bus terminals of the drive or by a UPS connected to drive terminals L1 and L2. The control circuit voltage can be supplied directly from the drives DC bus (no external wiring required), from an external battery (connection to CN19), or by using an optional 24 Vdc control power backup unit. When using a single-phase AC power supply for rescue operation such as a single-phase UPS, the ripple in the DC bus voltage will be higher than with a three-phase or battery supply. Make sure that the DC bus voltage never falls below the minimum value listed in Table 4.13. When using a PM motor with an incremental PG encoder and a PG-X3 option card, always perform Initial Magnet Pole Search Parameters Auto-Tuning (T2-01 = 3) with the normal power supply connected. The tuning function will prepare the drive for Rescue Operation by automatically setting certain parameters. If the tuning ends with an “End8” to “End10” fault, then rescue operation will require a battery or UPS that supplies the drive DC bus with at least 280 Vdc for 200 V class drives and 560 Vdc for 400 V class drives. Alternatively utilize to an absolute PG encoder and a PG-E3 or PG-F3 option card. If the DC bus voltage is low, the overload protection level (oL2 fault detection level) will be reduced due to the low speed run and the drive overload (oL2) will be triggered. If oL2 is detected, select the battery or UPS so that the output speed is equal to or greater than 6 Hz. The upper speed limit during rescue operation can be monitored by U4-40. Table 4.13 Power Supply Ratings for Rescue Operation Motor Type Speed Feedback DC Bus Voltage Control Circuit Voltage 4 Induction Motor Without PG Encoder or Incremental PG 200 V class drives: 48 to 340 Vdc Encoder with PG-B3 or PG-X3 option card 400 V class drives: 48 to 680 Vdc Incremental PG Encoder with PG-X3 option card 200 V class drives: 280 to 340 Vdc When supplied from a battery or the drive DC bus: “End8” to “End10” error occurs during Initial 400 V class drives: 560 to 680 Vdc 200 V class drives: 250 to 340 Vdc Magnet Pole Search Auto-Tuning. 400 V class drives: 280 to 680 V (recommended: 500 to 680 Vdc) Permanent Magnet Motor I c n a c rd remental PG Encoder with PG-X3 option 200 V class drives: 72 to 340 Vdc When supplied via a 24 Vdc control power backup unit: No error occurs during Initial Magnet Pole 400 V class drives: 144 to 680 Vdc 200 V and 400 V class drives: 24 Vdc Search Auto-Tuning. Absolute PG Encoder with PG-F3 or PG-E3 200 V class drives: 48 to 340 Vdc option card 400 V class drives: 48 to 680 Vdc
| Motor Type | Speed Feedback | DC Bus Voltage | Control Circuit Voltage |
|---|---|---|---|
| Induction Motor | Without PG Encoder or Incremental PG Encoder with PG-B3 or PG-X3 option card | 200 V class drives: 48 to 340 Vdc 400 V class drives: 48 to 680 Vdc | When supplied from a battery or the drive DC bus: 200 V class drives: 250 to 340 Vdc 400 V class drives: 280 to 680 V (recommended: 500 to 680 Vdc) When supplied via a 24 Vdc control power backup unit: 200 V and 400 V class drives: 24 Vdc |
| Permanent Magnet Motor | Incremental PG Encoder with PG-X3 option card “End8” to “End10” error occurs during Initial Magnet Pole Search Auto-Tuning. | 200 V class drives: 280 to 340 Vdc 400 V class drives: 560 to 680 Vdc | |
| Incremental PG Encoder with PG-X3 option card No error occurs during Initial Magnet Pole Search Auto-Tuning. | 200 V class drives: 72 to 340 Vdc 400 V class drives: 144 to 680 Vdc | ||
| Absolute PG Encoder with PG-F3 or PG-E3 option card | 200 V class drives: 48 to 340 Vdc 400 V class drives: 48 to 680 Vdc |
Source page
Page 122
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 122 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
Parameter Setup
Adjust drive parameters as described below when using Rescue Operation. • Select the type of Rescue Operation power supply for the drives main circuit in parameter S4-06. • When using a UPS, set the UPS power value to parameter S4-07. Use parameter S4-08 to decide if the Rescue Operation speed shall be limited automatically depending on the UPS power. • If deterioration of the battery or UPS shall be detected, also set up parameters S4-12 and S4-13. Measure the DC bus voltage during operation using the rescue power supply and set the measured value to parameter S4-12. Set the deterioration detection level to parameter S4-13. • Set parameters S4-01 to S4-04 if light load direction search shall be automatically performed when Rescue Operation is started.
Wiring Examples Switching the main power supply to a battery or UPS requires magnetic contactors that must be controlled by an external controller. Wiring methods and the sequence used for the magnetic contactors depend on the application. This instruction manual describes the following configurations:
• A single-phase, 230 V UPS is used as backup power supply for a 200 V or 400 V class drive. • Two separate batteries for the main power and control power supplies. Main power battery voltage is below 250 Vdc for 200 V class drives or 500 Vdc for 400 V class drives. • Two separate batteries. One is used for the main power supply, a second battery supplies the controller via an optional 24 V Backup Power Supply Unit. • A single battery with minimum 250 Vdc for 200 V class drives or 500 Vdc for 400 V class drives is used for the main and control power supply. Select the configuration that matches your application. Follow the corresponding instructions for wiring and drive settings. For configurations not covered in the list above, contact your Yaskawa representative or our sales office directly for consultation.
122 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 123
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 123 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 123 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Using a Single-Phase, 230 Vac UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply) Follow the instructions when using a single-phase 230 V UPS for Rescue Operation. A 230 V UPS can be used for both 200 V and 400 V class drives. Wiring Refer to Figure 4.21 for a wiring diagram. Figure4.16 Elevator s c y o s n t t e ro m l Magnetic L1000A Contactor A B2 N UPS sine wave 230 Vac single-phase +1 +2 U/T1 R/L1 L1 V/T2 S/L2 L2 W/T3 T/L3 L3 Magnetic - Contactor B CN19 Power supply C c o ir n c t u r i o t l 1 4 H1-(cid:1594)(cid:1594) = 55 S3 to S8 (Rescue Operation) SC Magnetic Contactor Sequence Magnetic Contactor B Magnetic Contactor A H1-(cid:1594)(cid:1594) = 55 (Rescue Operation) Figure 4.21 Using a Single-Phase 230 V UPS Operation Sequence Starting Rescue Operation 1. Open contactor B. 2. Set the input terminal programmed for Rescue Operation (H1- = 55). 3. Close contactor A. 4. Set the Up/Down command. Ending Rescue Operation 4 1. After the car has stopped open contactor A. 2. Clear the input terminal set for Rescue Operation (H1- = 55). 3. Close contactor B to return to operation with normal power supply. Application Precautions The drive may fault on a control power supply fault (Uv2) if the UPS can’t provide enough voltage, or if the Light Load Direction Search is not set properly. If this problem occurs, take the following corrective actions: Corrective Action: • Use a separate battery for the controller power supply. • Use a battery with a voltage higher than 250 Vdc for 200 V class drives or 500 Vdc for 400 V class drives and connect it to the control power supply input (CN19). Alternatively use a 24 Vdc battery and an optional 24 V Backup Power Supply Unit. • Enable Light Load Direction Search (S4-01 = 1).
| R/L1 | Column |
|---|---|
| S/L2 | |
| T/L3 |
Source page
Page 124
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 124 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
Using Separate Batteries for DC Bus and Control Power Supply, DC Bus Battery under 250 Vdc (500 Vdc)
Follow these instructions when using separate batteries for Rescue Operation with the battery for the DC bus having a lower voltage than 250 Vdc for 200 V class drives and 500 Vdc for 400 V class drives. Follow the wiring diagram shown in Figure 4.22 to Figure 4.24. When connecting the battery for the control power supply to the L1000A, use the 1.1 m cable packaged with the product. The connector cover must first be removed in order to access connection port CN19 for the battery. Refer to Connecting the Drive and Battery on page 131 for details.
Wiring for CIMR-L20008 to 20180 and 40005 to 40112 Figure4.17 YEG L1000A B2 B1 Magnetic Contactor A +1 +2 U/T1 DC bus power supply Battery for DC bus L1 R/L1 V/T2 ( 4 4 8 8 t t o o 2 5 5 0 0 0 V V d d c c) L2 S/L2 W/T3 T/L3 L3 Magnetic Contactor B - Magnetic Contactor C CN19 Power supply C c o ir n c t u ro it l Battery for 1 control circuit 250 to 340 Vdc (500 to 680 Vdc) 4 H1-(cid:1594)(cid:1594) = 55 S3 to S8 (Rescue Operation) SC Magnetic Contactor Sequence Magnetic Contactor B 5 s 0.5 s Magnetic Contactor A Magnetic Contactor C H1-(cid:1594)(cid:1594) = 55 (Rescue Operation) Figure 4.22 Wiring Two Batteries for DC Bus and Control Power Supply (DC Bus Battery is less than 250 Vdc) Operation Sequence Starting Rescue Operation 1. Open contactor B and wait at least 5 seconds. 2. Set the input terminal programmed for Rescue Operation (H1- = 55). 3. Close contactors A and C. 4. Set the Up/Down command. Ending Rescue Operation 1. After the car has stopped, open contactors A and C. 2. Clear the input terminal set for Rescue Operation (H1- = 55). 3. Wait at least 0.5 s and then close contactor B to return to operation with normal power supply.
124 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| S/L2 | Column |
|---|---|
| T/L3 |
Source page
Page 125
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 125 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 125 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Wiring for CIMR-L20215 to 20415 and 40150 to 40216 • Voltage Lower Than 48 to 190 Vdc for 200 V Class Drives, 96 to 380 Vdc for 400 V Class Drives Figure4.18 Inrush current suppression circuit <1> Inrush current suppression resistor L1000A (A) +3 (D) +1 DC bus Relay Current Battery for DC bus power supply (B) sensor 4 (4 8 8 t o to 1 3 9 8 0 0 V V d d c c) L L 1 2 R S/ / L L 2 1 + U V/ / T T 2 1 L3 T/L3 W/T3 - Power YEG s b u o p a p r l d y C b o o n a tr r o d l OPE Battery for control circuit (C) CN19 250 to 340 Vdc (500 to 680 Vdc) H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 55 S3 to S12 (Rescue Operation) SC Magnetic Contactor Sequence After the DC bus voltage falls lower than the battery voltage 0.5 s Magnetic Contactor B Magnetic Contactor A Magnetic Contactor C Magnetic Contactor D H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 55 (Rescue Operation) After the DC bus voltage is charged to the battery voltage Figure 4.23 Voltage Lower Than 48 to 190 Vdc for 200 V Class Drives, 96 to 380 Vdc for 400 V Class Drives <1> Install the inrush current suppression circuit outside the drive if the DC bus battery voltage is lower than 190 Vdc for 200 V class drives and 380 Vdc for 400 V class drives. Failure to comply will cause the soft-charge bypass relay to remain open and result in damage to the drive. Refer to the following table to install the inrush current suppression circuit for battery. 4 Table 4.14 Installation of the Inrush Current Suppression Circuit for Battery Voltage D C ri I v M e R M -L o del Resistor Relay 20215 1.0 Ω, 80 W 20283 1.0 Ω, 80 W 200 V 20346 1.0 Ω, 80 W 20415 1.0 Ω, 80 W <1> 40150 1.0 Ω, 120 W 400 V 40180 1.0 Ω, 220 W 40216 1.0 Ω, 220 W <1> Select the appropriate relay referring to the following calculation even if the battery voltage or main power current is applied. Motor rated power (kW) × Operation frequency when running battery (Hz) × 2 × 1000 Load current of battery (A) = YEG Battery voltage (Vdc) × 0.6 (Motor efficiency) × Motor rated frequency (Hz)
| Inrush current suppression resistor |
|---|
| (D) |
| Voltage | Drive Model CIMR-L | Resistor | Relay |
|---|---|---|---|
| 200 V | 20215 | 1.0 Ω, 80 W | <1> |
| 20283 | 1.0 Ω, 80 W | ||
| 20346 | 1.0 Ω, 80 W | ||
| 20415 | 1.0 Ω, 80 W | ||
| 400 V | 40150 | 1.0 Ω, 120 W | |
| 40180 | 1.0 Ω, 220 W | ||
| 40216 | 1.0 Ω, 220 W |
Source page
Page 126
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 126 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
• Voltage Lower Than 190 to 340 Vdc for 200 V Class Drives, 380 to 680 Vdc for 400 V Class Drives Figure4.19 L1000A +3 (A) +1 DC bus Relay Current DC bus power supply power supply (B) sensor ( 1 3 9 8 0 0 t t o o 3 6 4 8 0 0 V V d d c c) L L 1 2 R S/ / L L 2 1 + U V/ / T T 2 1 L3 T/L3 W/T3 - YEG Power supply board Control OPE board Battery for control circuit (C) CN19 250 to 340 Vdc (500 to 680 Vdc) H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 55 S3 to S12 (Rescue Operation) SC Magnetic Contactor Sequence After the DC bus voltage falls lower Magnetic Contactor B than the battery voltage 0.5 s Magnetic Contactor A
Magnetic Contactor C
H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 55 (Rescue Operation) Figure 4.24 Voltage Lower Than 190 to 340 Vdc for 200 V Class Drives, 380 to 680 Vdc for 400 V Class Drives
126 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 127
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 127 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 127 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Using a Battery for the DC Bus and 24 V Power Supply Unit Option for the Control Circuit Follow the instructions when using a 24 V Power Supply Unit option for the control circuit and a battery for the main circuit. The main circuit battery voltage must be higher than 48 Vdc for 200 V and 400 V class drives. Yaskawa offers a 24 V Power Supply Option for the control circuit that is useful in applications unable to connect to a backup battery greater than 250 V. Wiring instructions can be found in Figure 4.25 to Figure 4.27. For a more detailed explanation of the 24 V Power Supply Option, refer to the manual provided with the option. Wiring for CIMR-L20008 to 20180 and 40005 to 40112 Figure4.20 L1000A YEG B2 B1 Magnetic Contactor A +1 DC bus power supply +2 U/T1 R/L1 L1 V/T2 Battery for DC bus S/L2 48 to 340 Vdc L2 W/T3 (48 to 680 Vdc) L3 T/L3 Magnetic Contactor B - Magnetic Contactor C Power supply Control CN19 circuit Battery for 24 V 1 control circuit Power 24 Vdc S U up n p it ly 4 H1-(cid:1594)(cid:1594) = 55 S3 to S8 (Rescue Operation) SC Magnetic Contactor Sequence Magnetic Contactor B 5 s 0.5 s Magnetic Contactor A Magnetic Contactor C H1-(cid:1594)(cid:1594) = 55 (Rescue Operation) Figure 4.25 Using a Battery for the DC Bus and 24 V Power Supply Unit Option for the Control Circuit Operation Sequence Starting Rescued Operation 1. Open contactor B and wait at least 5 seconds. 2. Set the input terminal programmed for Rescue Operation (H1- = 55). 3. Close contactors A and C. 4. Set the Up/Down command. 4 Ending Rescue Operation 1. After the car has stopped, open contactors A and C. 2. Clear the input terminal set for Rescue Operation (H1- = 55). 3. Wait at least 0.5 s and then close contactor B to return to operation with normal power supply.
| R/L1 S/L2 | Column |
|---|---|
| T/L3 |
| 24 V | Column |
|---|---|
| Power Supply Unit |
Source page
Page 128
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 128 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
Wiring for CIMR-L20215 to 20415 and 40150 to 40216 • Voltage Lower Than 48 to 190 Vdc for 200 V Class Drives, 96 to 380 Vdc for 400 V Class Drives Figure4.21 Inrush current suppression circuit <1> Inrush current suppression resistor L1000A (A) +3 (D) +1 DC bus Relay Current Battery for DC bus power supply (B) sensor 4 (4 8 8 t o to 1 3 9 8 0 0 V V d d c c) L L 1 2 R S/ / L L 2 1 + U V/ / T T 2 1 L3 T/L3 W/T3 - Power YEG Magnetic Contactor C CN19 s b u o p a p r l d y C b o o n a tr r o d l OPE Battery for 24 V control circuit Power 24 Vdc Supply Unit H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 55 S3 to S12 (Rescue Operation) SC Magnetic Contactor Sequence After the DC bus voltage falls lower than the battery voltage 0.5 s Magnetic Contactor B
Magnetic Contactor A Magnetic Contactor C
Magnetic Contactor D H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 55 (Rescue Operation) After the DC bus voltage is charged to the battery voltage
Figure 4.26 Using a Battery for the DC Bus and 24 V Power Supply Unit Option for the Control Circuit (CIMR-L20215 to 20415 and 40150 to 40216)
<1> Install the inrush current suppression circuit outside the drive if the DC bus battery voltage is lower than 190 Vdc for 200 V class drives and 380 Vdc for 400 V class drives. Failure to comply will cause the soft-charge bypass relay to remain open and result in damage to the drive. Refer to Table 4.14 for the installation of the inrush current suppression circuit for battery.
128 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Inrush current suppression resistor |
|---|
| (D) |
| 24 V | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| Power Supply Unit |
Source page
Page 129
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 129 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 129 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 • Voltage Lower Than 190 to 250 Vdc for 200 V Class Drives, 380 to 500 Vdc for 400 V Class Drives Figure4.22 L1000A +3 (A) +1 DC bus Relay Current DC bus power supply power supply (B) sensor ( 1 3 9 8 0 0 t t o o 2 5 5 0 0 0 V V d d c c) L L 1 2 R S/ / L L 2 1 + U V/ / T T 2 1 L3 T/L3 W/T3 - YEG Power supply Magnetic Contactor C CN19 board C b o o n a tr r o d l OPE Battery for 24 V control circuit Power 24 Vdc Supply Unit H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 55 S3 to S12 (Rescue Operation) SC Magnetic Contactor Sequence After the DC bus voltage falls lower Magnetic Contactor B than the battery voltage 0.5 s Magnetic Contactor A Magnetic Contactor C H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 55 (Rescue Operation) Figure 4.27 Voltage Lower Than 190 to 250 Vdc for 200 V Class Drives, 380 to 500 Vdc for 400 V Class Drives 4
| 24 V | Column |
|---|---|
| Power Supply Unit |
Source page
Page 130
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 130 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
Using a Single Battery with Minimum 250 Vdc (500 Vdc)
Follow the instructions when using one battery to supply both, main circuit and controller. The battery voltage must be at least 250 Vdc for 200 V class drives or 500 Vdc for 400 V class drives. Wiring Following the wiring diagram show in Figure 4.28.
Figure4.23 YEG L1000A B2 B1 Magnetic Contactor A
DC bus power supply U/T1 Battery for DC bus L1 R/L1 V/T2 2 (5 5 0 0 0 t o to 3 6 4 8 0 0 V V d d c c) L2 S/L2 W/T3 L3 T/L3 Magnetic Contactor B - Power supply Control CN19 circuit 1 4 H1-(cid:1594)(cid:1594) = 55 S3 to S8 (Rescue Operation) SC
Magnetic Contactor Sequence Magnetic Contactor B
Magnetic Contactor A H1-(cid:1594)(cid:1594) = 55 (Rescue Operation) Figure 4.28 Using a Backup Battery With Minimum 250 Vdc (500 Vdc) Operation Sequence Starting Rescue Operation
1. Open contactor B. 2. Set the input terminal programmed for Rescue Operation (H1- = 55). 3. Close contactor A. 4. Set the Up/Down command. Ending Rescue Operation 1. After the car has stopped, open contactor A. 2. Clear the input terminal set for Rescue Operation (H1- = 55). 3. Close contactor B to return to operation with normal power supply.
130 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Column | R/L1 S/L2 | Column |
|---|---|---|
| T/L3 |
Source page
Page 131
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
Source page
Page 132
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 132 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
3. Use a pair of diagonal cutters to cut an opening in the connector cover that allows the cable to pass through. The cable should pass through the connector cover with the cover fastened to the drive. Figure4.26 Cut an opening to allow the battery cable to pass through.
Figure 4.31 Reattaching the Connector Cover (1) 4. Slide the connector cover back into place as shown in Figure 4.32.
NOTICE: Make sure the cable does not get pinched between the drive and the connector cover, as this could damage the cable. Figure4.27
Figure 4.32 Reattaching the Connector Cover (2) Figure4.28
Connect to battery.
Figure 4.33 Drive and Battery Connection Complete
132 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 133
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 133 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 133 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Models CIMR-L20085 to 20415, CIMR-L40045 to 40216 1. Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screw holding the CN19 connector cover in place. Figure4.29 Screw Connector cover Phillips screwdriver Figure 4.34 Removing the CN19 Connector Cover 2. Slide the CN19 connector cover from the drive as shown in Figure 4.35. Figure4.30 Figure 4.35 Sliding the CN19 Connector Cover 3. Insert a straight-edge screwdriver into the opening as shown in Figure 4.36, then remove the CN19 connector cover by sliding it as shown in Figure 4.36. Figure4.31 4 Figure 4.36 Removing the CN19 Connector Cover
Source page
Page 134
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 134 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
4. Connect the cable to the CN19 connector port on the drive. Note: The connector port location and angle vary by drive model.
NOTICE: Be sure that the connector fastens at the correct angle to the CN19 connector port. The incorrect angle could damage the battery, cable, or connector. Figure4.32
Port CN19
Battery cable
Figure 4.37 Connecting the Cable 5. The cable should pass through the connector cover with the cover fastened to the drive. Figure4.33
Figure 4.38 Reattaching the CN19 Connector Cover 6. Slide the CN19 connector cover back into place as shown in Figure 4.39.
NOTICE: Make sure the cable does not get pinched between the drive and the CN19 connector cover, as this could damage the cable.
Figure4.34 Downward Leftward
Figure 4.39 Sliding the CN19 Connector Cover into Place
134 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 135
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 135 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 135 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 7. Use a Phillips screwdriver to fasten the screw that holds the CN19 connector cover in place. NOTICE: Use the screw provided to fasten the connector cover into place. Using a different screw may damage the internal drive components. Figure4.35 Figure 4.40 Reattaching the CN19 Connector Cover Figure4.36 Connect to battery Figure 4.41 Drive and Battery CN19 Connection Complete 4
Source page
Page 136
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 136 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
Rescue Operation Torque Limit
The Torque Limit During Rescue Operation is set in parameter S4-05. After Rescue Operation is complete, the drive utilizes to the torque limits set in the L7 parameters. Light Load Direction Search Function
Light Load Direction Search can be used to automatically perform Rescue Operation in the direction with the lower load. It can help to minimize the amount of power required by the backup power supply required for Rescue Operation. Light Load Direction Search can be set so that it is automatically performed when Rescue Operation is started. To enable Light Load Direction Search set parameter S4-01 = 1. When Light Load Direction Search is enabled the drive first runs in the up and then in the down direction, each for the time set to S4-03. It then compares the load condition of both operations and travels to the next floor using the lighter load condition direction. The speed reference used for Light Load Direction Search can be set in parameter S4-04.
• When the lightest load direction is up, the drive stops after Light Load Direction Search and then accelerates upwards to the Rescue Operation speed set in parameter S4-15. The output terminals set for “Light Load Direction” (H2- = 54) and “Light Load Direction detection status” (H2- = 55) will close. Figure4.37 H1-(cid:1594)(cid:1594) = 55 Off (open) On (closed) (Rescue Operation) Up/Down command Off (open) On (closed)
Speed agree torque calculations
Up command (internal) Up Up
Down command (internal) Down Elevator moves in the direction of the light load H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 55 Off (open) On (closed) (cid:14804)Light Load Direction Search status(cid:14805) H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 54 Off (open) On (closed) (cid:14804)Light load direction(cid:14805) Figure 4.42 Light Load Direction Detection (Up) • When the lightest direction is down, then after Light Load Direction Detection is finished the drive immediately accelerates to the Rescue Operation speed set in S4-15 without stopping. An output terminal set for “Light load direction” (H2- = 54) will stay open, and an output terminal set for “Light Load Direction detection status” (H2- = 55) will close. Figure4.38 H1-(cid:1594)(cid:1594) = 55 Off (open) On (closed) (Rescue Operation) Up/Down command Off (open) On (closed) Speed agree torque calculations
Up command (internal) Up
Down command (internal) Down Elevator moves in the direction of the light load H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 55 Off (open) On (closed) (cid:14804)Light Load Direction Search status(cid:14805) H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 54 Off (open) (cid:14804)Light load direction(cid:14805) Figure 4.43 Light Load Direction Detection (Down)
136 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 137
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 137 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 137 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Brake Response Monitor When complying with EN81-20/50:2020, lifts must be equipped with a system independent of the drive control to prevent unintended car movement (UCM) away from the stop with open doors. This protection device needs to have the following three functions: • Recognition • Stopping • Braking By duplicating the brake of drive motors for lifts, the brake acts as the “braking function” of the UCM-device. In this case, the status of the brake function must be monitored. With a brake response monitor (BRM) function, the motor brake and the drive can act as parts of the UCM protective device. Brake Response Monitor (BRM) Function The BRM function is used for the following. • Monitoring the brake status with an Up or Down command • Monitoring the correct switching of the brake within a defined time • Halting the operation sequence if a failure is detected when monitoring. This function is available for drives with software versions PRG: 7207 or later. Enabling and Disabling the BRM Function The BRM function is disabled at the default setting. Take the following steps to enable the BRM function. 1. Set S6-07 to 1, enabling the BRM function. Refer to S: Elevator Parameters on page 241 for more settings. 2. Set the same function to two multi-function digital input terminals (H1-). Functions are set for either “Brake feedback 1” (79H) or “Brake feedback 2”(5BH). (e.g.: H1-07 = 79H and H1-08 = 79H) Set “Brake feedback 1” or “Brake feedback 2” to the multi-function digital input terminals to match the motor brake signals. H1- = 79H: Brake Feedback 1 (N.O.) H1- = 5BH: Brake Feedback 2 (N.C.) Note: Using any of the following settings for the multi-function digital input terminals triggers an oPE03 fault if the Brake Response Monitor function is enabled (S6-07 = 1). If “Brake feedback 1” (79H) or “Brake feedback 2” (5BH) are not set to any multi-function digital input terminals. If “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H) is set to only one multi-function digital input terminal. If “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) is set to only one multi-function digital input terminal. If “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H) and “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) are each set to two multi-function digital input terminals. If “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H) or “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) is set to three or more multi-function digital input terminals. 4
Source page
Page 138
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 138 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
Wiring
The figure below shows a wiring example when complying with EN81-20/50:2020. Install two brakes to motors.
The following connection diagram illustrates the state in which two brakes of motors have two Normally Open (N.O.) switches and “Brake feedback 1” (79H) is set to two multi-function digital input terminals (H1-07, H1-08). In the figure below, the brakes have two Normally Open (N.O.) switches, but Normally Closed (N.C.) operation is also possible. Set functions to two multi-function digital input terminals to match the motor brake signals. When the motor brakes close, the terminals close as well. This causes “Brake feedback 1” that is set to the multi-function digital input terminals used to monitor the brake function (e.g., S7 and S8) to change its signal and unlock the drive, which allows the operation sequence to start.
Figure4.39 UU DC (o p re ti a o c n t ) or XX The (o rm pt a io l n re ) lay Jumper B (o r p a t k io in n g ) resistor 2MCCB sr t1 11 (cid:6)(cid:6)2 Main C (cid:6)(cid:6) ir 1 cuit − B1 B2 U/T1 T p 2 o h 0 w r 0 e e e t r o - p s u h 2 p a 4 p s 0 e ly V E R S LCB (MCCB) MC Fuse E Fi M lte C r R S/ / L L 2 1 Drive V W / / T T 2 3 50/60 Hz T T/L3 Ground Connected Connected Connected Connected Control Circuit to S7 to SN W V U to S8 to SN terminal terminal terminal terminal Up command / Stop S1 Option card connectors Down command / Stop S2 CN5-C B M ra o k to e r 1 Motor B M ra o k to e r 2 CN5-B Nominal Speed S3 CN5-A Inspection Operation S4 Terminal board jumper and switch Intermediate Speed S5 Off On D Te IP rm S . w R it e c s h . S O 2 n/Off Leveling Speed S6 Jumper S3 H1, H2 B H r 1 a - k 0 e 7 F = e 7 e 9 d H back 1 S7 Sink/Source Sel. Brake Feedback 1 H1-08 = 79H S8 MA Fault Relay Output M M C B S B u ra p k p e ly M1 SN Brake Control M2 S s (d e in e le k fa c / u t i S o lt: n o S u w r in c ir k e e ) m ju o m d p e e r S S C P Output Control Contactor M M 3 4 Connected Connected to motor to motor +24 V M5 brake 1 brake 2 E(G) Drive Ready M6 Shield ground terminal P1 P C 2 1 During Frequency Output D 5 2 i t t g o o i t 4 5 a 8 0 l o V m u d t A p c ut C2 Through Mode (default setting) shielded line twisted-pair shielded line control circuit terminal main circuit terminal Figure 4.44 Connection Diagram when using BRM function (example: Model CIMR-L20033) 138 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Column | S2 |
|---|---|
| S3 | |
| S4 S5 | |
| S6 | |
| S7 S8 | |
| SN SC | |
| SC | |
| SP |
| Column | Column | Column | C1 |
|---|---|---|---|
| P2 C2 |
Source page
Page 139
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 139 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 139 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 SE4 Fault Detection/Fault Reset for the BRM Function Fault Detection Note: If “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) is set to the multi-function digital input terminal, an SE4 fault will be triggered by “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH), not “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). • If the following status conditions occur during the time set to S6-05 (Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time) when the drive starts or while stopped, an SE4 is triggered, and the drive will be unable to perform the operation sequence. • The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: one multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and one of two multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). • The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: one multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and both two multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). • If the following status conditions continue after the time set to S6-06 (Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time During Run) elapses during run, an SE4 is triggered, and the drive will be unable to perform the operation sequence. • The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: one multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and one of two multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). • The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: one multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and both two multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). Fault Reset The SE4 fault can only be reset by executing the fault reset (S6-08 = 1) when the BRM function is enabled (S6-07 = 1). The SE4 fault cannot be reset by: • Pressing the RESET key on the digital operator, or by closing the multi-function digital input terminal set to “Fault reset” (H1- = 14H) • Power cycling the drive • Using the Automatic Fault Reset (L5-) NOTICE: If the SE4 fault is triggered with the BRM function enabled (S6-07 = 1), then make sure that motor brake and brake feedback signal are operating normally before attempting to reset the SE4 fault. Brake Response Monitor Operation Normal Operation At start (when the Run command is enabled), the brake release command is activated (brake open) after the time set to S1-06 (Brake Release Delay Time) passes. If the brake release command is activated, the drive monitors the switching status to make sure that both the multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” of motor brake 1 and “Brake feedback 1” of motor brake 2 are operating normally (brake open) within the time set to S6-05 (Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time). Note: When the two multi-function digital input terminals are set to 79H, both the input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” of motor 4 brake 1 and “Brake feedback 1” of motor brake 2 are open within the time set to S6-05. When the two multi-function digital input terminals are set to 5BH, both the terminals are closed within the time set to S6-05. At stop (when the Run command is active), the brake release command is not activated (brake closed) after the time set to S1-07 (Brake Close Delay Time) has passed. If the brake release command is not activated, the drive monitors the switching status to make sure that both the multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” of motor brake 1 and “Brake feedback 1” of motor brake 2 are operating normally (brake closed) within the time set to S6-05.
Source page
Page 140
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 140 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
Figure4.40 S1-10 S1-11 (Run Com mand Delay Time) (Output Contactor Open Delay Time) S1-04 Selected Speed S1-05 (DC Injection/Position (DC Injection/Position Lock Time at Start) Lock Time at Stop) d1-26 (Leveling Speed) Speed Position Look Position Look at Start at Start S1-06 S1-07 (Brake Release (Brake Close Delay Time) Delay Time) Up/Down Command Nominal Speed Leveling Speed Brake Control H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 50H Brake Feedback 1 of Motor Brake 1 H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 79H Brake Feedback 1 of Motor Brake 2 H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 79H Motor Brake 1 Motor Brake 2 S6-05 S6-05 Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time Enabled Figure 4.45 Normal Operation with Multi-Function Digital Inputs set to 79H (N.O.) Figure4.41 S1-10 S1-11 (Run Com mand Delay Time) (Output Contactor Open Delay Time) S1-04 Selected Speed S1-05 (DC Injection/Position (DC Injection/Position Lock Time at Start) Lock Time at Stop) d1-26 (Leveling Speed) Speed Position Look Position Look at Start at Start S1-06 S1-07 (Brake Release (Brake Close Delay Time) Delay Time) Up/Down Command Nominal Speed Leveling Speed Brake Control H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 50H Brake Feedback 1 of Motor Brake 1 H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 5BH Brake Feedback 1 of Motor Brake 2 H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 5BH Motor Brake 1 Motor Brake 2 S6-05 S6-05 Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time Enabled Figure 4.46 Normal Operation with Multi-Function Digital Inputs set to 5BH (N.C.)
140 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Column | S1-04 (DC Injection/Position Lock Time at Start) | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | S1-05 (DC Injection/Position Lock Time at Stop) | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| S1-06 (Brake Release Delay Time) | S1-07 (Brake Close Delay Time) |
| Column | S1-04 (DC Injection/Position Lock Time at Start) | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | S1-05 (DC Injection/Positio Lock Time at Stop) | Column | Column | n | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| S1-06 (Brake Release Delay Time) | S1-07 (Brake Close Delay Time) |
Source page
Page 141
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 141 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 141 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Fault Operation during Start or Stop Note: If “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) is set to the multi-function digital input terminal, an SE4 fault will be triggered by “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH), not “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). If the following status conditions occur during the time set to S6-05 (Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time) when the drive starts or while stopped, an SE4 is triggered, and the drive will be unable to perform the operation sequence. • The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: one multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and one of two multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). • The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: one multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and both two multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). Figure4.42 (Output Contactor Open Delay Time) S1-10 (Run Command Delay Time) S1-11 S1-04 S1-05 (DC Injection/Position (DC Injection/ Lock Time at Start) Position Lock Time at Stop) d1-26 (Leveling Speed) Speed Position Look at Start S1-06 S1-07 (Brake Release (Brake Close Delay Time) Delay Time) Up/Down Command Nominal Speed Leveling Speed Brake Control H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 50H Brake Feedback 1 of Motor Brake 1 H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 79H Brake Feedback 1 of Motor Brake 2 H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 79H Motor Brake 1 Motor Brake 2 Brake Response Error (SE4) S6-05 T 1 r to e ” h le S o e a f 6 t s t e - h 0 e r e m 5 t h m i a n e n a o d b l t o r s c a r e a k b t u e r t s a o w e k “ d e i B th S r 2 i a n E d k 4 t e i h d f e f a n e u t o e im l t d t . b e a s c e k t T 1 r to e ” h le S o e a f 6 t s t e - h 0 e r e m 5 t h m i a n e n a o d b l t o r s c a r e a k b t u e r t s a o w e k “ d e i B th S r 2 i a n E d k 4 t e i h d f e f a n e u t o e im l t d t . b e a s c e k t S6-05 (Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time) (Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time) Enabled Figure 4.47 Fault Operation during Start (Left) and Fault Operation during Stop (Right) 4
| Column | S1-04 (DC Injection/Position Lock Time at Start) | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | S1-05 (DC Injection/ Position Lock Time at Stop) | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| S1-06 (Brake Release Delay Time) | S1-07 (Brake Close Delay Time) |
Source page
Page 142
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 142 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
Fault Operation during Run Note: If “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) is set to the multi-function digital input terminal, an SE4 fault will be triggered by “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH), not “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). If the following status conditions continue during run, the drive measures how much time has elapsed. If the conditions continue after the time set to S6-06 (Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time During Run) elapses, an SE4 is triggered, and the drive will be unable to perform the operation sequence.
• The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: one multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and one of two multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). • The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: one multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and both two multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). Figure4.43 S1-10 (Run Command Delay Time)
Speed S1-04 Selected Speed (DC Injection/Position Lock Time at Start)
Position Look at Start S1-06 (Brake Release Delay Time) Up/Down Command
Nominal Speed Leveling Speed Brake Control H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 50H Brake Feedback 1 of Motor Brake 1 H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 79H Brake Feedback 1 of Motor Brake 2 H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 79H Motor Brake 1 Motor Brake 2 Brake Response Error (SE4) S6-05 (Brake D R e e t s e p c o ti n o s n e T E im rr e o ) r (SE4) T o bu f h t t e h t h e te e m r m t o im i t n o e a r l s b s e r e a t t k t o t e o S 1 “B 6 h - r 0 a a 6 s k e c h l a f o e s s e e n d d o b t a t h p c e a k s b 1 s r ” e a d ke , , so no SE4 fault is detected. S6-06 (Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time During Run) Enabled Figure 4.48 Momentary Power Loss of Brake Feedback 1 Input during Run
142 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Column | S1-04 (DC Injection/Position Lock Time at Start) | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| S1-06 (Brake Release Delay Time) |
Source page
Page 143
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 143 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 143 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Figure4.44 S1-10 (Run Command Delay Time) S1-04 Selected Speed (DC Injection/Position Lock Time at Start) Speed Position Look at Start S1-06 (Brake Release Delay Time) Up/Down Command Nominal Speed Leveling Speed Brake Control H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 50H Brake Feedback 1 of Motor Brake 1 H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 79H Brake Feedback 1 of Motor Brake 2 H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 79H Motor Brake 1 Motor Brake 2 Brake Response Error (SE4) The terminal set to “Brake feedback 1” (Brake Response Er S ro 6 r - 0 (S 5 E4) Detection Time) o a w f n h t d i h c e t h h m e tr i o t g im t g o e e r r b e s r d e a t k t h t e o e 2 S S 6 h E - a 0 4 s 6 f c a h l u o a l s t s . e p d a t s h s e e b d r , a ke, S6-06 (Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time During Run) Enabled Figure 4.49 Fault Operation during Run Brake Response Monitor Function Test NOTICE: The following test needs to be conducted before using the BRM function. Function Test NPN Logic Follow the steps below to perform the NPN logic function test. 1. Open the multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” of the motor brake 1. (e.g. the signals set to the S7 input terminals). 2. Execute the operation sequence. During start, an SE4 fault is triggered and the drive stops. The drive stops operation. The drive prevents the operation sequence from being executed because the SE4 fault is triggered even after a power cycle. 3. Close the multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” of the motor brake 1. 4. Execute the operation sequence. 4 The drive stops operation. The drive prevents the operation sequence from being executed because the SE4 fault is triggered even after a power cycle. 5. Reset the SE4 fault by setting S6-08 (Brake Response Error (SE4) Fault Reset Selection) to 1. 6. Execute the operation sequence. The drive operates normally. Repeat this NPN logic function test with “Brake feedback 1” of the motor brake 2, such as the signals set to the S8 input terminals.
| Column | S1-04 (DC Injection/Position Lock Time at Start) | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| S1-06 (Brake Release Delay Time) |
Source page
Page 144
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 144 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.6 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications
Function Test PNP Logic
Follow the steps below to perform the PNP logic function test. 1. Close the multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake feedback 1” of motor brake 1, and connect the 24 V power supply. 2. Execute the operation sequence. During start, an SE4 fault is triggered and the drive stops. The drive stops operation. The drive prevents the operation sequence from being executed because the SE4 fault is triggered even after a power cycle. 3. Open the multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake feedback 1” of motor brake 1, turn off the 24 V power supply, and connect the signal line. 4. Execute the operation sequence. The drive stops operation. The drive prevents the operation sequence from being executed because the SE4 fault is triggered even after a power cycle. 5. Reset the SE4 fault by setting S6-08 (Brake Response Error (SE4) Fault Reset Selection) to 1. 6. Execute the operation sequence. The drive operates normally. Repeat this PNP logic function test with “Brake feedback 1” of the motor brake 2, such as the signals set to the S8 input terminals. How to Check the Motor Brake and the Brake Feedback
Check the following. • Check that the motor brake is operating correctly. • Check that the motor brake terminal status is normal. • Check that motor brake 1 and motor brake 2 are correctly connected. • Check that the multi-function digital input terminals are opening and closing normally. (Use monitor parameter U1-10 to check.)
144 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 145
4.7 Setup Troubleshooting and Possible Solutions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 145 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 145 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 4.7 Setup Troubleshooting and Possible Solutions This section describes troubleshooting problems that do not trip an alarm or fault. Symptom Page Cannot Change Parameter Settings 145 Motor Does Not Rotate Properly after Pressing RUN Button or after Entering Exter- Motor Does Not Rotate 145 nal Up/Down Command Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Up/Down Command 146 Motor Gets Too Hot 146 Drive Does Not Allow Selection of Rotational Auto-Tuning 146 Encoder Offset (E5-11) Set During Auto-Tuning (Rotational or Stationary) Consistently Differs by 30 Degrees or More 146 Noise From Drive or Output Lines When the Drive is Powered On 146 Residual Current Device (RCD, RCM) 147 The Safety Controller Does Not Recognize Safe Disable Monitor Output Signals (Terminals DM+ and DM-) 147 Riding comfort related problems 147 Cannot Change Parameter Settings Cause Possible Solutions The drive is running the motor (i.e., the Up/Down command is • Stop the drive and switch over to the Programming Mode. present). • Most parameters cannot be edited during run. The Access Level is set to restrict access to parameter settings. • Set the Access Level to allow parameters to be edited (A1-01 = 2). • Verify the digital operator mode, Drive or Programming mode? The operator is not in the Parameter Setup Mode. • Switch to the Programming Mode. Refer to The Drive and Programming Modes on page86. • If the password entered to A1-04 does not match the password saved to A1-05, then drive settings cannot be changed. • Reset the password. If the password is unknown: The wrong password was entered. • Scroll to A1-04. Press STOP and press at the same time. Parameter A1-05 will appear. • Set a new password to parameter A1-05. • Check the drive main input voltage by looking at the DC bus voltage (U1-07). Undervoltage was detected. • Check all main circuit wiring. Motor Does Not Rotate Properly after Pressing RUN Button or after Entering External Up/Down Command Motor Does Not Rotate Cause Possible Solutions • Check if the DRV on the digital operator is displayed. The drive is not in the Drive Mode. • Enter the Drive Mode. Refer to The Drive and Programming Modes on page86. Stop the drive and check if the correct frequency reference source is selected. If the digital operator is the source, the LO/RE button LED must be on. If the source is REMOTE, it must be off. Take the following steps to solve the problem: The button is enabled (o2-01=1) and was pushed. • Push the button. • o2-01 is set to 0 by default, i.e. the LO/RE button is disabled. • When Auto-Tuning completes, the drive is switched back to the Programming Mode. The Up/Down command will Auto-Tuning has just completed. not be accepted unless the drive is in the Drive Mode. 4 • Use the digital operator to enter the Drive Mode. Refer to The Drive and Programming Modes on page86. An Emergency Stop was executed and is not reset. Reset the Emergency Stop command. Check parameter b1-02 (Up/Down Command Selection). Set b1-02 so that it corresponds with the correct Up/Down command source. Settings are incorrect for the source that provides the Up/Down 0: Digital operator command. 1: Control circuit terminal (default setting) 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications 3: Option card • Check the wiring for the control terminal. There is faulty wiring in the control circuit terminals. • Correct wiring mistakes. • Check the input terminal status monitor (U1-10). Check parameter b1-01 (Speed Reference Selection). Set b1-01 to the correct source of the speed reference. 0: Digital operator The speed reference source setting is incorrect. 1: Control circuit terminal (default setting) 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications 3: Option card The settings for the analog speed reference are incorrect. Check the settings (signal level, function, bias, gain) for the analog input that supplies the speed reference. Selection for the sink/source mode and the internal/external power Check the position of the jumper and setting for S3. Refer to Control I/O Configuration on page73. supply is incorrect.
| Symptom | Column | Page |
|---|---|---|
| Cannot Change Parameter Settings | 145 | |
| Motor Does Not Rotate Properly after Pressing RUN Button or after Entering Exter- nal Up/Down Command | Motor Does Not Rotate | 145 |
| Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Up/Down Command | 146 | |
| Motor Gets Too Hot | 146 | |
| Drive Does Not Allow Selection of Rotational Auto-Tuning | 146 | |
| Encoder Offset (E5-11) Set During Auto-Tuning (Rotational or Stationary) Consistently Differs by 30 Degrees or More | 146 | |
| Noise From Drive or Output Lines When the Drive is Powered On | 146 | |
| Residual Current Device (RCD, RCM) | 147 | |
| The Safety Controller Does Not Recognize Safe Disable Monitor Output Signals (Terminals DM+ and DM-) | 147 | |
| Riding comfort related problems | 147 |
| Cause | Possible Solutions |
|---|---|
| The drive is running the motor (i.e., the Up/Down command is present). | • Stop the drive and switch over to the Programming Mode. • Most parameters cannot be edited during run. |
| The Access Level is set to restrict access to parameter settings. | • Set the Access Level to allow parameters to be edited (A1-01 = 2). |
| The operator is not in the Parameter Setup Mode. | • Verify the digital operator mode, Drive or Programming mode? • Switch to the Programming Mode. Refer to The Drive and Programming Modes on page86. |
| The wrong password was entered. | • If the password entered to A1-04 does not match the password saved to A1-05, then drive settings cannot be changed. • Reset the password. If the password is unknown: • Scroll to A1-04. Press STOP and press at the same time. Parameter A1-05 will appear. • Set a new password to parameter A1-05. |
| Undervoltage was detected. | • Check the drive main input voltage by looking at the DC bus voltage (U1-07). • Check all main circuit wiring. |
| Cause | Possible Solutions |
|---|---|
| The drive is not in the Drive Mode. | • Check if the DRV on the digital operator is displayed. • Enter the Drive Mode. Refer to The Drive and Programming Modes on page86. |
| The button is enabled (o2-01=1) and was pushed. | Stop the drive and check if the correct frequency reference source is selected. If the digital operator is the source, the LO/RE button LED must be on. If the source is REMOTE, it must be off. Take the following steps to solve the problem: • Push the button. • o2-01 is set to 0 by default, i.e. the LO/RE button is disabled. |
| Auto-Tuning has just completed. | • When Auto-Tuning completes, the drive is switched back to the Programming Mode. The Up/Down command will not be accepted unless the drive is in the Drive Mode. • Use the digital operator to enter the Drive Mode. Refer to The Drive and Programming Modes on page86. |
| An Emergency Stop was executed and is not reset. | Reset the Emergency Stop command. |
| Settings are incorrect for the source that provides the Up/Down command. | Check parameter b1-02 (Up/Down Command Selection). Set b1-02 so that it corresponds with the correct Up/Down command source. 0: Digital operator 1: Control circuit terminal (default setting) 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications 3: Option card |
| There is faulty wiring in the control circuit terminals. | • Check the wiring for the control terminal. • Correct wiring mistakes. • Check the input terminal status monitor (U1-10). |
| The speed reference source setting is incorrect. | Check parameter b1-01 (Speed Reference Selection). Set b1-01 to the correct source of the speed reference. 0: Digital operator 1: Control circuit terminal (default setting) 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications 3: Option card |
| The settings for the analog speed reference are incorrect. | Check the settings (signal level, function, bias, gain) for the analog input that supplies the speed reference. |
| Selection for the sink/source mode and the internal/external power supply is incorrect. | Check the position of the jumper and setting for S3. Refer to Control I/O Configuration on page73. |
Source page
Page 146
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 146 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.7 Setup Troubleshooting and Possible Solutions
Cause Possible Solutions • Check the speed reference monitor (U1-01). • Increase the speed reference above the minimum output speed (E1-09). Speed reference is too low. • Make sure speed references are set properly and the speed selection works properly. If using an analog signal make sure the input signal is present at the time the Up/Down command is issued. The brake does not release or motor contactor is not closed. Check the brake and motor contactor sequence. The STOP button is enabled (o2-02 = 1) and was pressed • When the STOP button is pressed, the drive will decelerate to stop. • Switch off the Up/Down command and then re-enter a new Up/Down command. when the drive was started from a REMOTE source. • o2-02 is set to 0 by default, i.e. the Stop button is disabled. Motor Rotates in the Opposite Direction from the Up/Down Command Cause Possible Solutions Check the motor wiring. Perform the steps described in Motor Rotation Direction Setup on page94 and PG Encoder Phase wiring between the drive and motor is incorrect. Setup on page95. Drive control circuit terminals for the Up and Down commands are • Check the control circuit wiring. switched. • Correct any fault wiring. Motor is Too Hot
Cause Possible Solutions If the load is too heavy for the motor, the motor will overheat as it exceeds its rated torque value for an extended period of time. Keep in mind that the motor also has a short-term overload rating in addition to the possible solutions provided below: The load is too heavy. • Reduce the load. • Lower the acceleration and deceleration ramps. (Increase the acceleration time and deceleration time.) • Check the values set for the motor protection (L1-01, L1-02) as well as the motor rated current (E2-01). • Increase motor capacity. • Check the ambient temperature. The air around the motor is too hot. • Cool the area until it is within the specified temperature range. • Perform Auto-Tuning. The drive is operating in a vector control mode but Auto-Tuning • Calculate the motor value and reset the motor parameters. Refer to E2: Motor Parameters on page177. has not yet been performed. • Change the motor control method to V/f Control (A1-02 = 0). When the motor cable is long, high voltage surges occur between the motor coils and drive switching. Normally, surges can reach up to three times the drive input power supply voltage (600 V for 200 V class, and 1200 V for 400 V class). Insufficient voltage insulation between motor phases. • Use a motor with a voltage tolerance higher than the max voltage surge. • Use a motor designed to work specifically with a drive when using a 400 V class unit. • Install an AC reactor on the output side of the drive. Make sure the output reactor can handle frequencies in the range of the drive carrier frequency. The motor fan has stopped or is clogged. Check the motor fan. Drive Does Not Allow Selection the Desired Auto-Tuning Mode Cause Possible Solutions The desired Auto-Tuning mode is not available for the selected • Check if the desired tuning mode is available for the selected control mode. Refer to Auto-Tuning on page99. control mode. • Change the motor control method by setting A1-02. Encoder Offset (E5-11) Set During Auto-Tuning (Rotational or Stationary) Consistently Differs by 30 Degrees or More Cause Possible Solutions PG-E3 option detected excess position error with the ERN1387 encoder. Perform Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics (T2-01 = 12). Electrical Noise From Drive or Output Lines When the Drive is Operating Cause Possible Solutions • Lower the carrier frequency (C6-03). • Install a noise filter on the input side of drive input power. Refer to Input-Side Noise Filter on page339. • Install a noise filter on the output side of the drive. Refer to Output-Side Noise Filter on page340. PWM switching in the drive generates excessive noise. • Place the wiring inside a metal conduit to shield it from switching noise. • Ground the drive and motor properly. • Separate the main circuit wiring and the control lines. • Make sure wires and the motor have been properly grounded.
146 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Cause | Possible Solutions |
|---|---|
| Speed reference is too low. | • Check the speed reference monitor (U1-01). • Increase the speed reference above the minimum output speed (E1-09). • Make sure speed references are set properly and the speed selection works properly. If using an analog signal make sure the input signal is present at the time the Up/Down command is issued. |
| The brake does not release or motor contactor is not closed. | Check the brake and motor contactor sequence. |
| The STOP button is enabled (o2-02 = 1) and was pressed when the drive was started from a REMOTE source. | • When the STOP button is pressed, the drive will decelerate to stop. • Switch off the Up/Down command and then re-enter a new Up/Down command. • o2-02 is set to 0 by default, i.e. the Stop button is disabled. |
| Cause | Possible Solutions |
|---|---|
| Phase wiring between the drive and motor is incorrect. | Check the motor wiring. Perform the steps described in Motor Rotation Direction Setup on page94 and PG Encoder Setup on page95. |
| Drive control circuit terminals for the Up and Down commands are switched. | • Check the control circuit wiring. • Correct any fault wiring. |
| Cause | Possible Solutions |
|---|---|
| The load is too heavy. | If the load is too heavy for the motor, the motor will overheat as it exceeds its rated torque value for an extended period of time. Keep in mind that the motor also has a short-term overload rating in addition to the possible solutions provided below: • Reduce the load. • Lower the acceleration and deceleration ramps. (Increase the acceleration time and deceleration time.) • Check the values set for the motor protection (L1-01, L1-02) as well as the motor rated current (E2-01). • Increase motor capacity. |
| The air around the motor is too hot. | • Check the ambient temperature. • Cool the area until it is within the specified temperature range. |
| The drive is operating in a vector control mode but Auto-Tuning has not yet been performed. | • Perform Auto-Tuning. • Calculate the motor value and reset the motor parameters. Refer to E2: Motor Parameters on page177. • Change the motor control method to V/f Control (A1-02 = 0). |
| Insufficient voltage insulation between motor phases. | When the motor cable is long, high voltage surges occur between the motor coils and drive switching. Normally, surges can reach up to three times the drive input power supply voltage (600 V for 200 V class, and 1200 V for 400 V class). • Use a motor with a voltage tolerance higher than the max voltage surge. • Use a motor designed to work specifically with a drive when using a 400 V class unit. • Install an AC reactor on the output side of the drive. Make sure the output reactor can handle frequencies in the range of the drive carrier frequency. |
| The motor fan has stopped or is clogged. | Check the motor fan. |
| Cause | Possible Solutions |
|---|---|
| The desired Auto-Tuning mode is not available for the selected control mode. | • Check if the desired tuning mode is available for the selected control mode. Refer to Auto-Tuning on page99. • Change the motor control method by setting A1-02. |
| Cause | Possible Solutions |
|---|---|
| PG-E3 option detected excess position error with the ERN1387 encoder. | Perform Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics (T2-01 = 12). |
| Cause | Possible Solutions |
|---|---|
| PWM switching in the drive generates excessive noise. | • Lower the carrier frequency (C6-03). • Install a noise filter on the input side of drive input power. Refer to Input-Side Noise Filter on page339. • Install a noise filter on the output side of the drive. Refer to Output-Side Noise Filter on page340. • Place the wiring inside a metal conduit to shield it from switching noise. • Ground the drive and motor properly. • Separate the main circuit wiring and the control lines. • Make sure wires and the motor have been properly grounded. |
Source page
Page 147
4.7 Setup Troubleshooting and Possible Solutions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 147 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 147 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 A Residual Current Device (RCD, RCM) Trips during Run Cause Possible Solutions • Decrease the RCD/RCM sensitivity or use one with a higher threshold. • Lower the carrier frequency (C6-03). Excessive leakage current trips RCD/RCM. • Reduce the length of the cable used between the drive and the motor. • Install a noise filter or reactor on the output side of the drive. The Safety Controller Does Not Recognize Safe Disable Monitor Output Signals (Terminals DM+ and DM-) Cause Possible Solutions • Check the wiring and logic for the Safe Disable monitor output terminal. There is faulty wiring in the Safe Disable monitor output terminals. • Correct wiring mistakes. Riding Comfort Related Problems The following table describes the most common problems related to ride comfort and proposes countermeasures to those problems. Before taking any action, make sure the startup procedures have been performed as previously described. Problem Control Mode and Possible Cause Corrective Action • Increase the DC Injection Braking Current at Start using parameter S1-02. • Increase the Minimum Output Frequency Voltage (E1-10) and Medium Insufficient torque when the brake is released. Output Frequency Voltage (E1-08) V/f pattern voltages. Make sure, that the V/f and OLV starting and leveling current does not rise too high. Set the time for DC Injection Braking at Start (S1-04) as short as possible, and DC Injection and brake timing is not optimized. make sure that brake releases completely before the motor starts to turn. OLV The slip or torque compensation function acts too slowly. • Decrease the Torque Compensation Time (C4-02). • Decrease the Slip Compensation Time (C3-02). The speed control is not responding fast enough when the Adjust the speed control loop parameters used During Position Lock. Increase Rollback at start brake is released. C5-19 and reduce C5-20. • Adjust the speed control loop parameters used During Position Lock. CLV Increase C5-19 and reduce C5-20. CLV/PM The Position Lock control loop does not respond fast enough. • Increase the Position Lock Gain at Start 1 in S3-01 gradually. If vibration occurs reduce it. • Increase the Position Lock Gain at Start 2 in S3-02 gradually until rollback disappears. Motor torque is not fully established when the brake is Lengthen the Brake Release Delay Time (S1-06) and the time for DC released. Injection Braking / Position Lock at Start (S1-04). All Make sure that the contactors are closed before the Up/Down command is Motor contactor closes too late. issued. Motor starts turning when the brake is not completely released Increase the DC Injection Braking Time at Start using parameter S1-04. or runs against the brake. Shock at start All Acceleration rate is changing too quickly. Decrease the Jerk at Start. Decrease C2-01 if set in m/s2, increase C2-01 if set in s. Rollback occurs during brake release. Refer to “Rollback at start”. Brake is applied too early, causing the motor to run against the Increase the Delay Time to Close the Brake (S1-07). If necessary, also All brake. increase the DC Injection Braking Time at Stop S1-05. Motor contactor is released before the brake is fully applied. Check the motor contactor sequence. Shock at stop • Make sure the speed control loop parameters for position lock are adjusted CLV Rollback occurs before the brake applies at stop. properly (C5-13 and C5-14). 4 CLV/PM • Increase the Position Lock Gain at Stop S3-03 gradually until no rollback occurs. If vibration occurs reduce the gain S3-03. • Increase the Torque Compensation Delay Time (C4-02). OLV Too fast torque or slip compensation. • Increase the Slip Compensation Delay Time (C3-02). • Adjust the Speed Control Loop Gain C5-01 and Integral Time C5-02. Speed control loop setting is too soft or too hard. • Adjust Inertia Compensation parameters (n5-) if speed control loop settings cannot solve the problem. Jerk occurs due to overshoot CLV • For induction motors readjust the motor data (E2-), especially the slip when the motor reaches top CLV/PM Incorrect motor data. (E2-02) and no-load current values (E2-03), or perform Auto-Tuning again. speed. • For PM motors readjust the motor data in E5- or perform Auto-Tuning. If the Inertia Compensation Function is used (n5-01=1) make sure the values Inertia compensation function is not set up correctly. in n5-02 and n5-03 are correct. All The acceleration rate changes too quickly when reaching the Decrease the Jerk at the End of Acceleration. Decrease C2-02 if set in m/s2, selected speed. increase C2-02 if set in s.
| Cause | Possible Solutions |
|---|---|
| Excessive leakage current trips RCD/RCM. | • Decrease the RCD/RCM sensitivity or use one with a higher threshold. • Lower the carrier frequency (C6-03). • Reduce the length of the cable used between the drive and the motor. • Install a noise filter or reactor on the output side of the drive. |
| Cause | Possible Solutions |
|---|---|
| There is faulty wiring in the Safe Disable monitor output terminals. | • Check the wiring and logic for the Safe Disable monitor output terminal. • Correct wiring mistakes. |
| Problem | Control Mode and Possible Cause | Column | Corrective Action |
|---|---|---|---|
| Rollback at start | V/f and OLV | Insufficient torque when the brake is released. | • Increase the DC Injection Braking Current at Start using parameter S1-02. • Increase the Minimum Output Frequency Voltage (E1-10) and Medium Output Frequency Voltage (E1-08) V/f pattern voltages. Make sure, that the starting and leveling current does not rise too high. |
| DC Injection and brake timing is not optimized. | Set the time for DC Injection Braking at Start (S1-04) as short as possible, and make sure that brake releases completely before the motor starts to turn. | ||
| OLV | The slip or torque compensation function acts too slowly. | • Decrease the Torque Compensation Time (C4-02). • Decrease the Slip Compensation Time (C3-02). | |
| CLV CLV/PM | The speed control is not responding fast enough when the brake is released. | Adjust the speed control loop parameters used During Position Lock. Increase C5-19 and reduce C5-20. | |
| The Position Lock control loop does not respond fast enough. | • Adjust the speed control loop parameters used During Position Lock. Increase C5-19 and reduce C5-20. • Increase the Position Lock Gain at Start 1 in S3-01 gradually. If vibration occurs reduce it. • Increase the Position Lock Gain at Start 2 in S3-02 gradually until rollback disappears. | ||
| All | Motor torque is not fully established when the brake is released. | Lengthen the Brake Release Delay Time (S1-06) and the time for DC Injection Braking / Position Lock at Start (S1-04). | |
| Motor contactor closes too late. | Make sure that the contactors are closed before the Up/Down command is issued. | ||
| Shock at start | All | Motor starts turning when the brake is not completely released or runs against the brake. | Increase the DC Injection Braking Time at Start using parameter S1-04. |
| Acceleration rate is changing too quickly. | Decrease the Jerk at Start. Decrease C2-01 if set in m/s2, increase C2-01 if set in s. | ||
| Rollback occurs during brake release. | Refer to “Rollback at start”. | ||
| Shock at stop | All | Brake is applied too early, causing the motor to run against the brake. | Increase the Delay Time to Close the Brake (S1-07). If necessary, also increase the DC Injection Braking Time at Stop S1-05. |
| Motor contactor is released before the brake is fully applied. | Check the motor contactor sequence. | ||
| CLV CLV/PM | Rollback occurs before the brake applies at stop. | • Make sure the speed control loop parameters for position lock are adjusted properly (C5-13 and C5-14). • Increase the Position Lock Gain at Stop S3-03 gradually until no rollback occurs. If vibration occurs reduce the gain S3-03. | |
| Jerk occurs due to overshoot when the motor reaches top speed. | OLV | Too fast torque or slip compensation. | • Increase the Torque Compensation Delay Time (C4-02). • Increase the Slip Compensation Delay Time (C3-02). |
| CLV CLV/PM | Speed control loop setting is too soft or too hard. | • Adjust the Speed Control Loop Gain C5-01 and Integral Time C5-02. • Adjust Inertia Compensation parameters (n5-) if speed control loop settings cannot solve the problem. | |
| Incorrect motor data. | • For induction motors readjust the motor data (E2-), especially the slip (E2-02) and no-load current values (E2-03), or perform Auto-Tuning again. • For PM motors readjust the motor data in E5- or perform Auto-Tuning. | ||
| Inertia compensation function is not set up correctly. | If the Inertia Compensation Function is used (n5-01=1) make sure the values in n5-02 and n5-03 are correct. | ||
| All | The acceleration rate changes too quickly when reaching the selected speed. | Decrease the Jerk at the End of Acceleration. Decrease C2-02 if set in m/s2, increase C2-02 if set in s. |
Source page
Page 148
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 148 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.7 Setup Troubleshooting and Possible Solutions
Problem Control Mode and Possible Cause Corrective Action Increase the Minimum and Middle Voltage Levels for the V/f pattern voltage V/f and OLV Not enough torque at low speed. (E1-10 and E1-08 respectively). Make sure that the Starting and Leveling Current does not rise too high. OLV and Motor data incorrect. Adjust the motor data (E2-), especially the motor slip (E2-02) and CLV Too much slip compensation. no-load current values (E2-03), or perform Auto-Tuning. Motor stops shortly (under- Increase the Speed Control Gain and reduce the Speed Control Integral Time s s h p o ee o d t) i w s r h e e a n c h th e e d . leveling CLV Speed control loop responds too slow. u ti s n e g d o f f o C r L 5- o 0 w 5 S an p d e e w d h a e t t S he to r p a . t T h h ir e d p s a e r t a o m f e s t p e e rs e d to l o b o e p c s h e a t n ti g n e g d s d is e p u e s n e d d. o R n e t f h e e r t s o e t- CLV/PM Speed Loop Adjustments (CLV and CLV/PM) on page120. The inertia compensation function is not set up correctly. If the Inertia Compensation Function is used (n5-01 = 1) make sure the values in n5-02 and n5-03 are correct. All The deceleration rate changes too quickly when reaching Decrease the Jerk at the End of Deceleration. Decrease C2-04 if set in m/s2, leveling speed. increase C2-04 if set in s. Motor speed overshoot at acceleration end and under- Use the Inertia Compensation Function. Set n5-01 to 1 and then adjust param- shoot when reaching leveling CLV Inertia is high. eters n5-02 and n5-03 as described in Inertia Compensation (CLV and CLV/ speed occurs. Problem can- CLV/PM not be resolved by adjusting PM) on page120. the speed loop. OLV Torque compensation responds too quickly. Increase the Torque Compensation Delay Time (C4-02). Motor or machine vibrates at high speed or top speed. CLV Speed control loop adjusted too hard. Decrease C5-01, then increase C5-02. CLV/PM V/f Output voltage is too high. Reduce the V/f Pattern settings (E1-08, E1-10). Torque compensation is responding too quickly. Increase the Torque Compensation Delay Time (C4-02). OLV Output voltage is too high. Reduce the V/f Pattern settings (E1-08, E1-10). OLV Check the Motor Slip value in parameter E2-02. Increase or decrease it in Motor or machine vibrates in CLV The value for the motor slip is set incorrectly. steps of 0.2 Hz. the low or medium speed range. • Decrease C5-01 and then increase C5-02 if the problem occurs at speed higher than C5-07. CLV • Decrease C5-03 and then increase C5-04 if the problem occurs at speed Speed control loop adjusted with too much gain. CLV/PM lower than C5-07. • Decrease C5-13 and then increase C5-14 if the problem occurs at speed lower than C5-07 but only during deceleration. • If vibration occurs at During Position Lock at start, first decrease S3-02. If The Position Lock control loop does not respond fast enough. decreasing S3-02 does not resolve the problem, decrease S3-01. Motor or machine vibrates in CLV • Decrease S3-03 if vibration occurs During Position Lock at stop. During Position Lock. CLV/PM The speed control is not responding quickly enough when the Decrease C5-19 and then increase C5-20. brake is released. CLV Encoder vibrates. Check the encoder mounting and the alignment of encoder and motor shaft. Vibrations with the fre- CLV/PM quency equal to the motor Mechanical problems. Check bearings and gearbox. speed occur. All Rotational parts (motor armature, handwheel, brake disk/ Properly balance rotating parts. drum) are not properly balanced. Oscillations when using an • Check the analog signal line connection. Use shielded twisted pair cables. analog speed reference. All The analog reference value is not stable or the signal is noisy. • Apply a filter to the analog input signal by setting parameter H3-13. Top speed is different in Slip Compensation during Regenerative operation is switched motoring and regenerative OLV Make sure C3-04 is set properly and set parameter C3-05 to 0. mode. off. Speed reference and motor Check the gain and bias settings for the analog input that is used to set the speed do not match when The drives analog input is not set according to the signal level using an analog reference All of the controller speed reference output signal. speed reference. Check parameters H3-03 and H3-04 for input A1, check parameters H3-11 and H3-12 for input A2. signal. • Check if the acceleration rate set is not too high (acceleration time is too short). All The load is too high. • Make sure the drive rated current is enough to fulfill the application requirements. Acceleration is longer than • Make sure the load is not seized, car guide lubrication is ok, etc. set to C1- parameters. V/f and OLV The load is too high and the current/torque exceeds the stall Check if the Stall Prevention Level at Acceleration in L3-03 is not set too prevention level. small. OLV, CLV The load is too high and the torque exceeds the drives torque Check it the Torque Limit parameters L7- are not set too low. CLV/PM limits. Make sure the drive rated current is enough to fulfill the application require- All The load is too high. ments. Motor speed does not match The load is too high and the current/torque exceeds the stall the speed reference at con- V/f prevention level. Check if the Stall Prevention Level During Run in L3-06 is not set too low. stant speed. OLV, CLV The load is too high and the torque exceeds the torque limits. Check it the Torque Limit parameters L7- are not set too low. CLV/PM High frequency acoustic Increase the Carrier Frequency in parameter C6-03. If the carrier frequency is All The carrier frequency is too low. noise from the motor. set higher than the default setting, a current derating must be considered. 148 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Problem | Control Mode and Possible Cause | Column | Corrective Action |
|---|---|---|---|
| Motor stops shortly (under- shoot) when the leveling speed is reached. | V/f and OLV | Not enough torque at low speed. | Increase the Minimum and Middle Voltage Levels for the V/f pattern voltage (E1-10 and E1-08 respectively). Make sure that the Starting and Leveling Current does not rise too high. |
| OLV and CLV | Motor data incorrect. | Adjust the motor data (E2-), especially the motor slip (E2-02) and no-load current values (E2-03), or perform Auto-Tuning. | |
| Too much slip compensation. | |||
| CLV CLV/PM | Speed control loop responds too slow. | Increase the Speed Control Gain and reduce the Speed Control Integral Time used for Low Speed at Stop. The parameters to be changed depend on the set- ting of C5-05 and whether a third set of speed loop settings is used. Refer to Speed Loop Adjustments (CLV and CLV/PM) on page120. | |
| The inertia compensation function is not set up correctly. | If the Inertia Compensation Function is used (n5-01 = 1) make sure the values in n5-02 and n5-03 are correct. | ||
| All | The deceleration rate changes too quickly when reaching leveling speed. | Decrease the Jerk at the End of Deceleration. Decrease C2-04 if set in m/s2, increase C2-04 if set in s. | |
| Motor speed overshoot at acceleration end and under- shoot when reaching leveling speed occurs. Problem can- not be resolved by adjusting the speed loop. | CLV CLV/PM | Inertia is high. | Use the Inertia Compensation Function. Set n5-01 to 1 and then adjust param- eters n5-02 and n5-03 as described in Inertia Compensation (CLV and CLV/ PM) on page120. |
| Motor or machine vibrates at high speed or top speed. | OLV | Torque compensation responds too quickly. | Increase the Torque Compensation Delay Time (C4-02). |
| CLV CLV/PM | Speed control loop adjusted too hard. | Decrease C5-01, then increase C5-02. | |
| Motor or machine vibrates in the low or medium speed range. | V/f | Output voltage is too high. | Reduce the V/f Pattern settings (E1-08, E1-10). |
| OLV | Torque compensation is responding too quickly. | Increase the Torque Compensation Delay Time (C4-02). | |
| Output voltage is too high. | Reduce the V/f Pattern settings (E1-08, E1-10). | ||
| OLV CLV | The value for the motor slip is set incorrectly. | Check the Motor Slip value in parameter E2-02. Increase or decrease it in steps of 0.2 Hz. | |
| CLV CLV/PM | Speed control loop adjusted with too much gain. | • Decrease C5-01 and then increase C5-02 if the problem occurs at speed higher than C5-07. • Decrease C5-03 and then increase C5-04 if the problem occurs at speed lower than C5-07. • Decrease C5-13 and then increase C5-14 if the problem occurs at speed lower than C5-07 but only during deceleration. | |
| Motor or machine vibrates in During Position Lock. | CLV CLV/PM | The Position Lock control loop does not respond fast enough. | • If vibration occurs at During Position Lock at start, first decrease S3-02. If decreasing S3-02 does not resolve the problem, decrease S3-01. • Decrease S3-03 if vibration occurs During Position Lock at stop. |
| The speed control is not responding quickly enough when the brake is released. | Decrease C5-19 and then increase C5-20. | ||
| Vibrations with the fre- quency equal to the motor speed occur. | CLV CLV/PM | Encoder vibrates. | Check the encoder mounting and the alignment of encoder and motor shaft. |
| All | Mechanical problems. | Check bearings and gearbox. | |
| Rotational parts (motor armature, handwheel, brake disk/ drum) are not properly balanced. | Properly balance rotating parts. | ||
| Oscillations when using an analog speed reference. | All | The analog reference value is not stable or the signal is noisy. | • Check the analog signal line connection. Use shielded twisted pair cables. • Apply a filter to the analog input signal by setting parameter H3-13. |
| Top speed is different in motoring and regenerative mode. | OLV | Slip Compensation during Regenerative operation is switched off. | Make sure C3-04 is set properly and set parameter C3-05 to 0. |
| Speed reference and motor speed do not match when using an analog reference signal. | All | The drives analog input is not set according to the signal level of the controller speed reference output signal. | Check the gain and bias settings for the analog input that is used to set the speed reference. Check parameters H3-03 and H3-04 for input A1, check parameters H3-11 and H3-12 for input A2. |
| Acceleration is longer than set to C1- parameters. | All | The load is too high. | • Check if the acceleration rate set is not too high (acceleration time is too short). • Make sure the drive rated current is enough to fulfill the application requirements. • Make sure the load is not seized, car guide lubrication is ok, etc. |
| V/f and OLV | The load is too high and the current/torque exceeds the stall prevention level. | Check if the Stall Prevention Level at Acceleration in L3-03 is not set too small. | |
| OLV, CLV CLV/PM | The load is too high and the torque exceeds the drives torque limits. | Check it the Torque Limit parameters L7- are not set too low. | |
| Motor speed does not match the speed reference at con- stant speed. | All | The load is too high. | Make sure the drive rated current is enough to fulfill the application require- ments. |
| V/f | The load is too high and the current/torque exceeds the stall prevention level. | Check if the Stall Prevention Level During Run in L3-06 is not set too low. | |
| OLV, CLV CLV/PM | The load is too high and the torque exceeds the torque limits. | Check it the Torque Limit parameters L7- are not set too low. | |
| High frequency acoustic noise from the motor. | All | The carrier frequency is too low. | Increase the Carrier Frequency in parameter C6-03. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the default setting, a current derating must be considered. |
Source page
Page 149
4.8 Verifying Parameter Settings and Backing Up Changes
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 149 gnimmargorP pU-tratS noitarepO & SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 149 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 4.8 Verifying Parameter Settings and Backing Up Changes Use the Verify Menu to check all changes to parameter settings as a result of Auto-Tuning. Refer to Verifying Parameter Changes: Verify Menu on page 89. Save the verified parameter settings. Change the access level or set a password to the drive to prevent accidental modification of parameter settings. Backing Up Parameter Values: o2-03 Setting o2-03 to 1 saves all parameter settings before resetting o2-03 to 0. The drive can now recall all the saved parameters by performing a User Initialization (A1-03 = 1110). No. Parameter Name Description Setting Range Default Setting Lets the user create a set of default settings for a User Initialization. 0: Saved/Not Set User Parameter o2-03 Default Value 1: Set Defaults - Saves current parameter settings as the default values for a User Initialization. 0 to 2 0 2: Clear All - Clears the currently saved user settings. After saving the user parameter set value, the items of 1110 (User Initialization) are displayed in A1-03 (User Parameter Default Value). Selects a method to initialize the parameters. 0: No Initialize A1-03 Initialize Parameters 1110: User Initialization (The user must first program and store desired settings using parameter o2-03) 0 to 2220, 5550 0 2220: 2-Wire Initialization (parameter initialized prior to shipment) 5550: oPE4 Fault reset Parameter Access Level: A1-01 Setting the Access Level for “Operation only” (A1-01 = 0) allows the user to access parameters A1- and U- only. Other parameters are not displayed. Setting the Access Level for “User Parameters” (A1-01 = 1) allows the user to access only the parameters that have been previously saved as User Parameters. This is helpful when displaying only the relevant parameters for a specific application. No. Pa N ra a m m e e ter Description S R e a t n ti g n e g Default Selects which parameters are accessible via the digital operator. 0: Operation only. A1-01, A1-04, and A1-06 can be set and monitored, and U- parameters can also be viewed. Access Level A1-01 Selection 1: User Parameters. Only recently changed parameters from application parameters A2-01 to A2-16 and A2-17 to A2-32 0 to 2 2 can be set and monitored. 2: Advanced Access Level. All parameters can be set and monitored. Parameters selected by the user are saved as User Parameters, including recently viewed parameters and parameters specifically selected for quick access. A2-01 User Parameters If parameter A2-33 is set to 1, recently viewed parameters will be listed between A2-17 and A2-32. Parameters A2-01 A1-00 to to - A2-32 1 to 32 t I h f r A o 2 u - g 3 h 3 A is 2 - s 1 e 6 t t m o u 0 s , t r e b c e e m nt a ly n u v a i l e l w y e s d el p ec a t r e a d m b e y te t r h s e w u i s ll e r n . ot be saved to the group of User Parameters. A2- parameters S6-16 are now available for manual programming. User Parameter 0: Parameters A2-01 through A2-32 are reserved for the user to create a list of User Parameters. 1: Save history of recently viewed parameters. Recently edited parameters will be saved to A2-17 through A2-32 for A2-33 Automatic Selec- quick access. The most recently changed parameter is saved to A2-17. The second most recently changed parameter is 0, 1 1 tion saved to A2-18. 4 Password Settings: A1-04, A1-05 The user can set a password in parameter A1-05 to restrict access to the drive. The password must be entered to A1-04 to unlock parameter access (i.e., parameter setting A1-04 must match the value programmed into A1-05). The following parameters cannot be viewed or edited until the value entered to A1-04 correctly matches the value set to A1-05: A1-01, A1-02, A1-03 and A2-01 through A2-32. Note: Parameter A1-05 is hidden from view. To display A1-05, access parameter A1-04 and press and simultaneously.
| No. | Parameter Name | Description | Setting Range | Default Setting |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| o2-03 | User Parameter Default Value | Lets the user create a set of default settings for a User Initialization. 0: Saved/Not Set 1: Set Defaults - Saves current parameter settings as the default values for a User Initialization. 2: Clear All - Clears the currently saved user settings. After saving the user parameter set value, the items of 1110 (User Initialization) are displayed in A1-03 (User Parameter Default Value). | 0 to 2 | 0 |
| A1-03 | Initialize Parameters | Selects a method to initialize the parameters. 0: No Initialize 1110: User Initialization (The user must first program and store desired settings using parameter o2-03) 2220: 2-Wire Initialization (parameter initialized prior to shipment) 5550: oPE4 Fault reset | 0 to 2220, 5550 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Description | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| A1-01 | Access Level Selection | Selects which parameters are accessible via the digital operator. 0: Operation only. A1-01, A1-04, and A1-06 can be set and monitored, and U- parameters can also be viewed. 1: User Parameters. Only recently changed parameters from application parameters A2-01 to A2-16 and A2-17 to A2-32 can be set and monitored. 2: Advanced Access Level. All parameters can be set and monitored. | 0 to 2 | 2 |
| A2-01 to A2-32 | User Parameters 1 to 32 | Parameters selected by the user are saved as User Parameters, including recently viewed parameters and parameters specifically selected for quick access. If parameter A2-33 is set to 1, recently viewed parameters will be listed between A2-17 and A2-32. Parameters A2-01 through A2-16 must be manually selected by the user. If A2-33 is set to 0, recently viewed parameters will not be saved to the group of User Parameters. A2- parameters are now available for manual programming. | A1-00 to S6-16 | - |
| A2-33 | User Parameter Automatic Selec- tion | 0: Parameters A2-01 through A2-32 are reserved for the user to create a list of User Parameters. 1: Save history of recently viewed parameters. Recently edited parameters will be saved to A2-17 through A2-32 for quick access. The most recently changed parameter is saved to A2-17. The second most recently changed parameter is saved to A2-18. | 0, 1 | 1 |
Source page
Page 150
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 150 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
4.8 Verifying Parameter Settings and Backing Up Changes
Copy Function
Parameter settings can be copied to another drive to simplify parameter restoration or multiple drive setup. The drive supports the following copy options: • LCD Operator (standard in all models) The LCD operator used to operate the drive supports copying, importing, and verifying parameter settings. Refer to o3: Copy Function on page 238 for details. • USB Copy Unit and CopyUnitManager
The Copy Unit is an external option connected to the drive to copy parameter settings from one drive and save those settings to another drive. Refer to the manual supplied with the USB Copy Unit for instructions. CopyUnitManager is a PC software tool that allows the user to transfer parameter settings between the Copy Unit and a PC. This tool is especially useful when managing parameters for various drives or applications. Refer to the manual supplied with CopyUnitManager for instructions. • DriveWizard Plus DriveWizard is a PC software tool for parameter management, monitoring, and diagnosis. DriveWizard can load, store, and copy drive parameter settings. For details, refer to Help in the DriveWizard software. Note: To obtain the driver and software of USB Copy Unit, Copy Unit Manager and DriveWizardPlus, access these sites: China: http://www.yaskawa.com cn Europe: http://www.yaskawa.eu.com Japan: http://www.e-mechatronics.com U.S.A.: http://www.yaskawa.com Other areas: contact a Yaskawa representative.
150 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 151
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 151 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Parameter Details
5.1 A: INITIALIZATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 5.2 B: APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
5.3 C: TUNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 5.4 D: REFERENCE SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 5.5 E: MOTOR PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 5.6 F: OPTION SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 5.7 H: TERMINAL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 5.8 L: PROTECTION FUNCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 5.9 N: SPECIAL ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 5.10 O: OPERATOR RELATED SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 5.11 S: ELEVATOR PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 5.12 U: MONITOR PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 151
Source page
Page 152
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 152 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.1 A: Initialization
5.1 A: Initialization
The initialization group contains parameters associated with initial setup of the drive. Parameters involving the display language, access levels, initialization, and password are located in this group.
A1: Initialization
A1-00: Language Selection
Selects the display language for the digital operator. Note: This parameter is not reset when the drive is initialized using parameter A1-03.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default A1-00 Language Selection 0 to 12<1><2> 0 <1> Language selection settings 8 to 12 can be selected from an LCD operator with version (REV) F or later. The version number of the LCD operator’s PRG software is shown on the back of the digital operator. <2> Language selection settings 8 to 12 are available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. Setting 0: English Setting 1: Japanese Setting 2: German Setting 3: French Setting 4: Italian Setting 5: Spanish Setting 6: Portuguese Setting 7: Chinese Setting 8: Czech Setting 9: Russian Setting 10: Turkish Setting 11: Polish Setting 12: Greek
A1-01: Access Level Selection Allows or restricts access to drive parameters.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default A1-01 Access Level Selection 0 to 2 2 Setting 0: Operation only Access is restricted to parameters A1-01, A1-04, and all U monitor parameters.
Setting 1: User Parameters Access to only a specific list of parameters set to A2-01 through A2-32. These User Parameters can be accessed using the Setup Mode of the digital operator. Setting 2: Advanced Access Level (A) and Setup Access Level (S)
All parameters can be viewed and edited. Notes on Parameter Access • If the drive parameters are password protected by A1-04 and A1-05, parameters A1-00 through A1-03, A1-06, and all A2 parameters cannot be modified. • If parameters are changed via serial communication, it will not be possible to edit or change parameter settings with the digital operator until an Enter command is issued to the drive from the serial communication.
152 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| A1-00 | Language Selection | 0 to 12<1><2> | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| A1-01 | Access Level Selection | 0 to 2 | 2 |
Source page
Page 153
5.1 A: Initialization
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 153 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 153 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 A1-02: Control Method Selection Selects the Control Method (also referred to as the control mode) that the drive uses to operate the motor. Parameter A1-02 determines the control mode for motor 1 when the drive is set up to run two motors. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default A1-02 Control Method Selection 0, 2, 3, 7 0 Note: This parameter is not reset when the drive is initialized using parameter A1-03. Setting 0: V/f Control for Induction Motors Use this mode for simple speed control and for multiple motor applications with low demands to dynamic response or speed accuracy. This control mode is also used when the motor parameters are unknown and Auto-Tuning cannot be performed. The speed control range is 1:40. Setting 2: Open Loop Vector Control Use this mode for general, variable-speed applications with a speed control range of 1:200 that require precise speed control, quick torque response, and high torque at low speed without using a speed feedback signal from the motor. Setting 3: Closed Loop Vector Control Use this mode for general, variable-speed applications that require precise speed control down to zero speed, quick torque response or precise torque control, and a speed feedback signal from the motor. The speed control range is up to 1:1500. Setting 7: Closed Loop Vector Control for PM Motors Use this mode for high-precision control of a PM motor in constant torque or variable torque applications. The speed control range reaches 1:1500. A speed feedback signal is required. A1-03: Initialize Parameters Resets parameters back to the original default values. After initialization, the setting for A1-03 automatically returns to 0. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default A1-03 Initialize Parameters 0, 1110, 2220, 5550 0 Setting 0: No initialization Setting 1110: User Initialize Drive parameters are reset to values selected by the user as User Settings. User Settings are stored when parameter o2-03 is set to “1: Set defaults”. Note: User Initialization resets all parameters to a user-defined set of default values previously saved to the drive. Set parameter o2-03 to 2 to clear the user-defined default values. Setting 2220: 2-Wire Initialization Resets all parameters back to their original default settings with digital inputs S1 and S2 configured as Forward run and Reverse run, respectively. Setting 5550: oPE04 Reset 5 An oPE04 error appears on the digital operator when a terminal block with settings saved to its built-in memory is installed in a drive that has edited parameters. Set A1-02 to 5550 to use the parameter settings saved to the terminal block memory. Notes on Parameter Initialization The parameters shown in Table 5.1 will not be reset when the drive is initialized by setting A1-03 = 2220 or 3330. Although the control mode in A1-02 is not reset when A1-03 is set to 2220 or 3330, it may change when an application preset is selected. Table 5.1 Parameters not Changed by Drive Initialization No. Parameter Name A1-00 Language Selection A1-02 Control Method Selection E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection E5-02 Motor Rated Capacity (for PM)
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| A1-02 | Control Method Selection | 0, 2, 3, 7 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| A1-03 | Initialize Parameters | 0, 1110, 2220, 5550 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name |
|---|---|
| A1-00 | Language Selection |
| A1-02 | Control Method Selection |
| E1-03 | V/f Pattern Selection |
| E5-02 | Motor Rated Capacity (for PM) |
Source page
Page 154
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 154 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.1 A: Initialization
No. Parameter Name E5-03 Motor Rated Current (for PM) E5-04 Motor Poles (for PM) E5-05 Motor Stator Resistance (for PM) E5-06 Motor d-Axis Inductance (for PM) E5-07 Motor q-Axis Inductance (for PM) E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 (for PM) E5-24 Motor lnduction Voltage Constant 2 F6- Communications Parameter (initialized when F6-08 = 1) L8-35 Installation Selection o2-04 Drive Model Selection A1-04, A1-05: Password and Password Setting Parameter A1-04 enters the password when the drive is locked; parameter A1-05 is a hidden parameter that sets the password.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default A1-04 Password 0000 to 9999 0000 A1-05 Password Setting How to use the Password The user can set a password in parameter A1-05 to restrict access to the drive. The password must be entered to A1-04 to unlock parameter access (i.e., parameter setting A1-04 must match the value programmed into A1-05). The following parameters cannot be viewed or edited until the value entered to A1-04 correctly matches the value set to A1-05: A1-01, A1-02, A1-03, and A2-01 through A2-32. The instructions below demonstrate how to set password “1234”. An explanation follows on how to enter that password to unlock the parameters. Table 5.2 Setting the Password for Parameter Lock Step Display/Result
- MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) 1. Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears. U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWD FWD/REV - MODE - PRG Programming 2. Press or until the Parameter Setting Mode screen appears. HELP FWD DATA -PRMSET- PRG Initialization 3. Press to enter the parameter menu tree. A1 S -0 e 0 le = c (cid:2) t (cid:2) (cid:2) L 0 a nguage ← FWD → -PRMSET- PRG Select Language 4. Select the flashing digits by pressing F1 , F2 or . A1-00=(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)0 ∗0∗ left right English ← FWD → -PRMSET- PRG Enter Password 5. Select A1-04 by pressing . A1- 04 ( = 0~ 9 9 9 9 0 ) “0” ← FWD → -PRMSET- PRG Select Password Press while holding down at the same time. A1-05 will appear. A1- 05 = 04 6. (0~9999) Note: Because A1-05 is hidden, it will not be displayed by simply pressing . ← F “ W 0” D → “05” flashes -PRMSET- PRG Select Password 7. Press . A1- 05 ( = 0~ 0 9 0 9 0 9 0 9) “0” ← FWD → 154 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name |
|---|---|
| E5-03 | Motor Rated Current (for PM) |
| E5-04 | Motor Poles (for PM) |
| E5-05 | Motor Stator Resistance (for PM) |
| E5-06 | Motor d-Axis Inductance (for PM) |
| E5-07 | Motor q-Axis Inductance (for PM) |
| E5-09 | Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 (for PM) |
| E5-24 | Motor lnduction Voltage Constant 2 |
| F6- | Communications Parameter (initialized when F6-08 = 1) |
| L8-35 | Installation Selection |
| o2-04 | Drive Model Selection |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| A1-04 | Password | 0000 to 9999 | 0000 |
| A1-05 | Password Setting |
| Step | Column | Column | Display/Result |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | Turn on the power to the drive. The initial display appears. | - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | |
| 2. | Press or until the Parameter Setting Mode screen appears. | - MODE - PRG Programming HELP FWD DATA | |
| 3. | Press to enter the parameter menu tree. | -PRMSET- PRG Initialization A1-00=(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)0 Select Language ← FWD → | |
| 4. | Select the flashing digits by pressing F1 , F2 or . left right | -PRMSET- PRG Select Language A1-00=(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)0 ∗0∗ English ← FWD → | |
| 5. | Select A1-04 by pressing . | -PRMSET- PRG Enter Password A1- 04 = 0 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → | |
| 6. | Press while holding down at the same time. A1-05 will appear. Note: Because A1-05 is hidden, it will not be displayed by simply pressing . | -PRMSET- PRG Select Password A1- 05 = 04 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → “05” flashes | |
| 7. | Press . | -PRMSET- PRG Select Password A1- 05 = 0000 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → |
| - MODE - DRV Rdy | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|
| Speed Ref (OPR) | ||
| U1-01= 0.00% | ||
| U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | RSEQ | |
| LREF | ||
| FWD/REV |
| - MODE - PRG |
|---|
| Programming |
| HELP FWD DATA |
| -PRMSET- PRG Initialization | Column |
|---|---|
| A1-00=(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)0 Select Language ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Select Language A1-00=(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)0 ∗0∗ | Column |
|---|---|
| English ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Enter Password | Column |
|---|---|
| A1- 04 = 0 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Select Password | Column |
|---|---|
| A1- 05 = 04 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Select Password | Column |
|---|---|
| A1- 05 = 0000 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
Source page
Page 155
5.1 A: Initialization
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 155 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 155 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Step Display/Result -PRMSET- PRG Select Password 8. Use F1 , F2 , , and to enter the password. A1-05= 1234 left right (0~ “ 9 0 9 ” 99) ← FWD → 9. Press to save what was entered. Entry Accepted -PRMSET- PRG Select Password 10. The display automatically returns to the display shown in step 5. A1- 05 = 1234 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → Table 5.3 Check to see if A1-02 is locked (continuing from step 10 above) Step Display/Result -PRMSET- PRG Control Method 1. Press to display A1-02. A1 O -0 p 2 e = n L 2 o o ∗ p 2 ∗ Vector ← FWD → “02” flashes 2. Press to make sure that the setting values cannot be selected. - - - MODE - PRG Programming 3. Press to return to the first display. HELP FWD DATA Table 5.4 Enter the Password to Unlock Parameters (continuing from step 3 above) Step Display/Result -PRMSET- PRG Initialization 1. Press to enter the parameter setup display. A1 S -0 e 0 le = c (cid:2) t (cid:2) (cid:2) L 0 a nguage ← FWD → -PRMSET- PRG Select Language 2. Press F1 , F2 or to select the flashing digits as shown. A1-00=(cid:2) E (cid:2) n (cid:2) g 0 l i s ∗ h 0∗ left right ← FWD → “00” flashes -PRMSET- PRG Enter Password 3. A1- 04 = 0 Press to scroll to A1-04 and . (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → -PRMSET- PRG Enter Password 5 4. Enter the password “1234”. A1- 04 = 1234 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → 5. Press to save the new password. Entry Accepted -PRMSET- PRG Enter Password 6. Drive returns to the parameter display. A1- 04 = 0 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD →
| Step | Column | Column | Display/Result |
|---|---|---|---|
| 8. | Use F1 , F2 , , and to enter the password. left right | -PRMSET- PRG Select Password A1-05= 1234 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → | |
| 9. | Press to save what was entered. | Entry Accepted | |
| 10. | The display automatically returns to the display shown in step 5. | -PRMSET- PRG Select Password A1- 05 = 1234 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Select Password | Column |
|---|---|
| A1-05= 1234 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Select Password | Column |
|---|---|
| A1- 05 = 1234 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| Step | Column | Column | Display/Result |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | Press to display A1-02. | -PRMSET- PRG Control Method A1-02= 2 ∗2∗ Open Loop Vector ← FWD → “02” flashes | |
| 2. | Press to make sure that the setting values cannot be selected. | - | - |
| 3. | Press to return to the first display. | - MODE - PRG Programming HELP FWD DATA |
| -PRMSET- PRG Control Method | Column |
|---|---|
| A1-02= 2 ∗2∗ Open Loop Vector ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| - MODE - PRG |
|---|
| Programming |
| HELP FWD DATA |
| Step | Column | Column | Display/Result |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | Press to enter the parameter setup display. | -PRMSET- PRG Initialization A1-00=(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)0 Select Language ← FWD → | |
| 2. | Press F1 , F2 or to select the flashing digits as shown. left right | -PRMSET- PRG Select Language A1-00=(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)0 ∗0∗ English ← FWD → “00” flashes | |
| 3. | Press to scroll to A1-04 and . | -PRMSET- PRG Enter Password A1- 04 = 0 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → | |
| 4. | Enter the password “1234”. | -PRMSET- PRG Enter Password A1- 04 = 1234 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → | |
| 5. | Press to save the new password. | Entry Accepted | |
| 6. | Drive returns to the parameter display. | -PRMSET- PRG Enter Password A1- 04 = 0 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Initialization | Column |
|---|---|
| A1-00=(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)0 Select Language ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Select Language | Column |
|---|---|
| A1-00=(cid:2)(cid:2)(cid:2)0 ∗0∗ English ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Enter Password | Column |
|---|---|
| A1- 04 = 0 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Enter Password | Column |
|---|---|
| A1- 04 = 1234 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Enter Password |
|---|
| A1- 04 = 0 (0~9999) “0” ← FWD → |
Source page
Page 156
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 156 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.1 A: Initialization
Step Display/Result -PRMSET- PRG Control Method 7. Press and scroll to A1-02. A1 O -0 p 2 e = n L 2 o o ∗ p 2 ∗ Vector ← FWD →
-PRMSET- PRG Control Method 8. Press to display the value set to A1-02. If the first “2” blinks, parameter settings are unlocked. A1 O -0 p 2 e = n L 2 o o ∗ p 2 ∗ Vector ← FWD → -PRMSET- PRG Control Method 9. Use or to change the value if desired (though changing the control mode at this point is not typically done). A1-02 V = /F 0 C o ∗2 n ∗ trol “2” ← FWD → V/f 10. Press to save the setting, or press to return to the previous display without saving changes. Entry Accepted -PRMSET- PRG Control Method 11. The display automatically returns to the parameter display. A1-02= 0 ∗0∗ V/F Control ← FWD → Note: Parameter settings can be edited after entering the correct password. Performing a 2-wire initialization resets the password to “0000”. Reenter the password to parameter A1-05 after drive initialization. A2: User Parameters
A2-01 to A2-32: User Parameters 1 to 32 The user can select up to 32 parameters and assign them to parameters A2-01 through A2-32 to provide quicker access by eliminating the need to scroll through multiple menus. The User Parameter list can also save the most recently edited parameters.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default A2-01 to A2-32 User Parameters 1 to 32 A1-00 to S6-16 Determined by A1-02 Saving User Parameters To save specific parameters to A2-01 through A2-32, set parameter A1-01 to 2 to allow access to all parameters, then enter the parameter number to one of the A2- parameters to assign it to the list of User Parameters. Finally, set A1-01 to 1 to restrict access so users can only set and refer to the parameters saved as User Parameters.
A2-33: User Parameter Automatic Selection Determines whether recently edited parameters are saved to the second half of the User Parameters (A2-17 to A2-32) for quicker access.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default A2-33 User Parameter Automatic Selection 0 or 1 1 Setting 0: Do not save list of recently viewed parameters. Set A2-33 to 0 to manually select the parameters listed in the User Parameter group. Setting 1: Save history of recently viewed parameters.
Set A2-33 to 1 to automatically save recently edited parameters to A2-17 through A2-32. A total of 16 parameters are saved with the most recently edited parameter set to A2-17, the second most recently to A2-18, and so on. Access the User Parameters using the Setup Mode of the digital operator.
156 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Step | Column | Column | Display/Result |
|---|---|---|---|
| 7. | Press and scroll to A1-02. | -PRMSET- PRG Control Method A1-02= 2 ∗2∗ Open Loop Vector ← FWD → | |
| 8. | Press to display the value set to A1-02. If the first “2” blinks, parameter settings are unlocked. | -PRMSET- PRG Control Method A1-02= 2 ∗2∗ Open Loop Vector ← FWD → | |
| 9. | Use or to change the value if desired (though changing the control mode at this point is not typically done). | -PRMSET- PRG Control Method A1-02= 0 ∗2∗ V/F Control “2” ← FWD → V/f | |
| 10. | Press to save the setting, or press to return to the previous display without saving changes. | Entry Accepted | |
| 11. | The display automatically returns to the parameter display. | -PRMSET- PRG Control Method A1-02= 0 ∗0∗ V/F Control ← FWD → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Control Method | Column |
|---|---|
| A1-02= 2 ∗2∗ Open Loop Vector ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Control Method | Column |
|---|---|
| A1-02= 2 ∗2∗ Open Loop Vector ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Control Method | Column |
|---|---|
| A1-02= 0 ∗2∗ V/F Control “2” ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| -PRMSET- PRG Control Method | Column |
|---|---|
| A1-02= 0 ∗0∗ V/F Control ← FWD → | |
| ← | → |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| A2-01 to A2-32 | User Parameters 1 to 32 | A1-00 to S6-16 | Determined by A1-02 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| A2-33 | User Parameter Automatic Selection | 0 or 1 | 1 |
Source page
Page 157
5.2 b: Application
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 157 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 157 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 5.2 b: Application b1: Operation Mode Selection b1-01: Speed Reference Selection Selects the frequency reference source for the REMOTE mode. NOTICE: Always turn off the RUN command before changing the setting of parameters d1-18 (Speed Reference Selection Mode), b1-01 (Speed Reference Selection), or H1- (Multi-Function Digital Inputs). If the RUN command is on when changing any of these settings, the motor may unexpectedly start running, and could result in injury. Note: 1. If an Up/Down command is input to the drive but the speed reference entered is 0 or below the minimum frequency, the RUN indicator LED on the digital operator will light. 2. Press the LO/RE key to set the drive to LOCAL and use the digital operator keypad to enter the speed reference. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default b1-01 Speed Reference Selection 0 to 3 0 Setting 0: Operator keypad When b1-01 = 0, the user can enter the speed reference in the following ways: • Switch between the speed references set to the d1- parameters according to the speed reference priority (d1-18) and multi-function digital input terminal settings. For more detailed instructions, refer to d1: Speed Reference on page 173. • Enter the speed reference directly using the digital operator keypad. Instructions on changing speed reference settings can be found in The Drive and Programming Modes on page 86. Setting 1: Terminals (analog input terminals) If source of the speed reference is assigned to the control terminals (b1-01 = 1), then d1-18 will automatically be set to 0 so the drive uses multi-speed references d1-01 to d1-08. With this setting, the analog input terminal can be used to set the speed reference. The drive will look to analog input terminals A1 or A2 for the speed reference (provided parameter H3-02 or H3-10 must be set to “0”, assigning terminal A1 or A2 respectively to the speed reference). Parameter d1-18 is to be set to 0. Refer to d1: Speed Reference on page 173 for more detailed. Terminals A1 and A2 can accept a voltage signal to supply the speed reference to the drive. Table 5.5 shows the parameter settings and voltage levels required for each terminal. Table 5.5 Analog Input Settings for Speed Reference Using Voltage Signals Parameter Settings Terminal Signal Level Notes Signal Level Selection Function Selection Gain Bias 0 to 10 Vdc H3-01 = 0 H3-02 = 0 A1 H3-03 H3-04 - -10 to +10 Vdc H3-01 = 1 (speed reference bias) 0 to 10 Vdc H3-09 = 0 H3-10 = 0 A2 -10 to +10 Vdc H3-09 = 1 (speed reference bias) H3-11 H3-12 - Setting 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications When b1-01 = 2, the speed reference is given to the drive using MEMOBUS/Modbus register 0002H. Setting the speed 5 reference from MEMOBUS/Modbus requires setting parameter d1-18 to 0. Note: Be sure to program the digital inputs for speed selection and set parameter b1-02 to 0 when switching the preset speeds set in the d1- parameters via MEMOBUS/Modbus. Select the desired speed by switching these digital inputs using the MEMOBUS/ Modbus operation command (0001H). Setting 3: Option card When b1-01 = 3, the drive looks to an option card for the speed reference. Setting the speed reference from a communication option card requires parameter d1-18 to be set to 0. Note: 1. Be sure to program the digital inputs for speed selection and set parameter b1-01 to 0 when switching the preset speeds set in the d1- parameters via a communication option card. Select the desired speed by switching these digital inputs using the drive operation command (refer to the option card manual for details). 2. If the speed reference source is set for Option PCB (b1-01 = 3), but an option board is not installed, an oPE05 Operator Programming Error will be displayed on the digital operator and the drive will not run.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| b1-01 | Speed Reference Selection | 0 to 3 | 0 |
| Terminal | Signal Level | Parameter Settings | Column | Column | Column | Notes |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Signal Level Selection | Function Selection | Gain | Bias | |||
| A1 | 0 to 10 Vdc | H3-01 = 0 | H3-02 = 0 (speed reference bias) | H3-03 | H3-04 | - |
| -10 to +10 Vdc | H3-01 = 1 | |||||
| A2 | 0 to 10 Vdc | H3-09 = 0 | H3-10 = 0 (speed reference bias) | H3-11 | H3-12 | - |
| -10 to +10 Vdc | H3-09 = 1 |
Source page
Page 158
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 158 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.2 b: Application
b1-02: Up/Down Command Selection
Determines he Up/Down command source in the REMOTE mode. Wire the motor so the elevator goes up when an Up command is issued.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default b1-02 Up/Down Command Selection 0 to 3 1 Setting 0: Operator Allows the user to enter Up/Down commands from the digital operator. Use this setting when performing a test run only.
Setting 1: Control Circuit Terminal Up/Down commands are issued from the control circuit terminals. This is the standard setting used in most elevator applications.
Setting 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications This setting requires entering the Up/Down commands via serial communications by connecting the RS-485/422 serial communication cable to control terminals R+, R-, S+, and S- on the removable terminal block. Refer to MEMOBUS/ Modbus Configuration on page 400 for instructions. Setting 3: Option Card
This setting requires entering the Up/Down commands via the communication option card by plugging a communication option card into the CN5-A port on the control board. Refer to the option card manual for instructions on integrating the drive into the communication system. Note: If b1-02 is set to 3, but an option card is not installed in CN5-A, an oPE05 operator programming error will be displayed on the digital operator and the drive will not run. b1-03: Stopping Method Selection
Selects how the drive stops the motor when the Up/Down command is removed or when a Stop command is entered.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default b1-03 Stopping Method Selection 0, 1, 4<1> 0
<1> Setting 4 is available in the control mode CLV or CLV/PM for drives with software versions PRG: 7017 or later. The setting is 0 or 1 for software version PRG: 7016. Setting 0: Ramp to stop Ramps the motor to stop at the deceleration ramp set in C1-02. The actual time required for deceleration may vary by load conditions (mechanical loss, inertia).
Setting 1: Coast to stop The drive will shut off output to the motor and allow it to coast freely to stop when the Up/Down command is removed. Setting 4: Elevator Emergency Stop
After the Up/Down command is cleared and when the value of U1-05 (Speed Feedback) is equal to or greater than the value of S1-26 (Emergency Stop Start Level), the drive coasts to a stop. After the Up/Down command is cleared and when the value of U1-05 (Speed Feedback) is lower than the value of S1-26 (Emergency Stop Start Level), the drive ramps to a stop. b1-06: Digital Input Reading
Defines how the digital inputs are read.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default b1-06 Digital Input Reading 0 or 1 1 Setting 0: Read once The state of a digital input is read once. If the state has changed, the input command is immediately processed. With this setting the drive responds more quickly to digital inputs, but a noisy signal could cause erroneous operation.
158 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| b1-02 | Up/Down Command Selection | 0 to 3 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| b1-03 | Stopping Method Selection | 0, 1, 4<1> | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| b1-06 | Digital Input Reading | 0 or 1 | 1 |
Source page
Page 159
5.2 b: Application
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 159 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 159 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Setting 1: Read twice The state of a digital input is read twice. The input command is processed only if the state does not change during the double reading. This reading process is slower than the “Read once” process, but it is more resistant to noisy signals. b1-08: Up/Down Command Selection while in Programming Mode As a safety precaution, the drive will not normally respond to an Up/Down command input when the digital operator is being used to adjust parameters in the Programming Mode (Verify Menu, Setup Mode, Parameter Settings Mode, and Auto-Tuning Mode). If required by the application, set b1-08 to allow the drive to run while in the Programming Mode. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default b1-08 Up/Down command Selection while in Programming Mode 0 to 2 1 Setting 0: Disabled An Up/Down command is not accepted while the digital operator is in the Programming Mode. Setting 1: Enabled An Up/Down command is accepted in any digital operator mode. Setting 2: Prohibit programming during run It is not possible to enter the Programming Mode as long as the drive output is active. The Programming Mode cannot be displayed during Run. b1-14: Phase Order Selection Sets the phase order for drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3. Switching motor phases will reverse the direction of the motor. Use this parameter to switch the direction of the Up and Down commands. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default b1-14 Phase Order Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: Standard phase order (U-V-W) Setting 1: Switched phase order (U-W-V) Note: 1. If using a closed loop control mode such as CLV (A1-02 = 3) or CLV/PM (A1-02 = 7) and parameter b1-14 is changed, be sure to also change the direction of the motor encoder (F1-05) to match the direction of the Up and Down commands. 2. If CLV/PM is used, also perform encoder offset Auto-Tuning. b2: Magnetic Flux Compensation b2-08: Magnetic Flux Compensation Value Sets the magnetic flux compensation at start as a percentage of the no-load current value (E2-03). This function allows for the development of more flux to facilitate starting machines that require high starting torque or motors with a large rotor time constant. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default b2-08 Magnetic Flux Compensation Value 0 to 1000% 0% When an Up/Down command is issued, the DC current level injected into the motor changes linearly from the level set to 5 b2-08 to the level set to E2-03 within the time set to b2-03. Figure5.1 Output Speed common_TMonly b2-08 E2-03 Magnetizing Current Reference S1-04 Time Figure 5.1 Magnetic Flux Compensation
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| b1-08 | Up/Down command Selection while in Programming Mode | 0 to 2 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| b1-14 | Phase Order Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| b2-08 | Magnetic Flux Compensation Value | 0 to 1000% | 0% |
Source page
Page 160
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 160 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.2 b: Application
The level of the DC current injected to the motor is limited to 80% of the drive rated current or to the motor rated current, whichever value is smaller.
Note: 1. If b2-08 is set below 100%, it can take a relatively long time for flux to develop. 2. If b2-08 is set to 0%, the DC current level will be the DC Injection current set to S1-02. 3. As DC Injection can generate a fair amount of noise, b2-08 may need to be adjusted to keep noise levels acceptable. b4: Delay Timers
The timer function is independent of drive operation and can delay the switching of a digital output triggered by a digital input signal and help eliminate chattering switch noise from sensors. An on-delay and off-delay can be set separately.
To enable the timer function, set a multi-function input to Timer input (H1- = 18) and set a multi-function output to Timer output (H2- = 12). Only one timer can be used. b4-01, b4-02: Timer Function On-Delay, Off-Delay Time
b4-01 sets the on-delay time for switching the timer output. b4-02 sets the off-delay time for switching the timer output.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default b4-01 Timer Function On-Delay Time 0.0 to 3000.0 s 0.0 s b4-02 Timer Function Off-Delay Time 0.0 to 3000.0 s 0.0 s Timer Function Operation
The timer function switches on when the timer function input closes for longer than the value set to b4-01. The timer function switches off when the timer function input is open for longer than the value set to b4-02. Figure 5.2 illustrates the timer function operation: Figure5.2 Multi-function Contact On (Closed) Input: Timer Function ON ON Off (Open) Multi-function Contact Output: Timer Function ON ON On (Closed)common_TMonly Off (Open) b4-01 b4-02 b4-01 b4-02 Figure 5.2 Timer Operation b6: Dwell Function The Dwell function temporarily holds the frequency reference at a predefined value for a set time then continues accelerating or decelerating.
Figure 5.3 shows how the Dwell function works. Note: Set the stopping method to "Ramp to Stop" (b1-03 = 0) to use the Dwell function. Figure5.3 OFF ON OFF Up/Down Command common_TMonly
b6-01 b6-03 Output Speed b6-02 b6-04 Figure 5.3 Dwell Function at Start and Stop b6-01, b6-02: Dwell Speed, Dwell Time at Start
Parameter b6-01 determines the speed that is held or the time set in b6-02 during acceleration.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default b6-01 Dwell Speed at Start 0.0 to 100.0%<1> 0.0% b6-02 Dwell Time at Start 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.0 s <1> A setting of 100% is equal to the maximum speed.
160 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| b4-01 | Timer Function On-Delay Time | 0.0 to 3000.0 s | 0.0 s |
| b4-02 | Timer Function Off-Delay Time | 0.0 to 3000.0 s | 0.0 s |
| ON | Column | Column | ON | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| ON | ON | |||||
| ON | ON |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| b6-01 | Dwell Speed at Start | 0.0 to 100.0%<1> | 0.0% |
| b6-02 | Dwell Time at Start | 0.0 to 10.0 s | 0.0 s |
Source page
Page 161
5.2 b: Application
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 161 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 161 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 b6-03, b6-04: Dwell Speed, Dwell Time at Stop Parameter b6-03 determines the speed that is held for the time set in b6-04 during deceleration. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default b6-03 Dwell Speed at Stop 0.0 to 100.0%<1> 0.0% b6-04 Dwell Time at Stop 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.0 s <1> A setting of 100% is equal to the maximum speed. b7: Droop Control (CLV/PM) Droop control automatically balances the load level between two motors driving the same load. The drive in which Droop control is activated shifts the load from one motor to another by automatically reducing the speed when the torque reference rises, and automatically increasing the speed when the torque reference falls. Note: Disable Inertia Compensation (n5-01 = 0) whenever using Droop control. b7-01: Droop Control Gain Sets the amount of speed reduction when the torque reference is 100%. The gain is set as a percentage of the maximum output speed. A setting of 0.0% disables the Droop control function. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default b7-01 Droop Control Gain 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0% Figure5.4 Speed Speed reference Droop control gain b7-01 common_TMonly Torque 0 100% Figure 5.4 Droop Control Gain b7-02: Droop Control Delay Time Adjusts the responsiveness of Droop control. Reduce the setting if the reaction time is too long, and increase it if hunting occurs. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default b7-02 Droop Control Delay Time 0.03 to 2.00 s 0.05 s b8: Energy Saving The Energy Saving function can significantly increase the efficiency of an IPM motor. Note: The Energy Saving function should be used only with a Yaskawa IPM motor. 5 b8-01: Energy Saving Control Selection Enables or disables the Energy Saving function. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default b8-01 Energy Saving Control Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| b6-03 | Dwell Speed at Stop | 0.0 to 100.0%<1> | 0.0% |
| b6-04 | Dwell Time at Stop | 0.0 to 10.0 s | 0.0 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| b7-01 | Droop Control Gain | 0.0 to 100.0% | 0.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| b7-02 | Droop Control Delay Time | 0.03 to 2.00 s | 0.05 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| b8-01 | Energy Saving Control Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
Source page
Page 162
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 162 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.2 b: Application
b8-16: Energy Saving Control Constant (Ki)
Enter the Energy Saving value (Ki) as specified on the motor nameplate (for IPM motors only).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default b8-16 Energy Saving Control Constant (Ki) 0.00 to 2.00 0.10 b8-17: Energy Saving Control Constant (Kt)
Enter the Energy Saving value (Kt) as specified on the motor nameplate (for IPM motors only).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default b8-17 Energy Saving Control Constant (Kt) 0.00 to 2.00 1.00
162 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| b8-16 | Energy Saving Control Constant (Ki) | 0.00 to 2.00 | 0.10 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| b8-17 | Energy Saving Control Constant (Kt) | 0.00 to 2.00 | 1.00 |
Source page
Page 163
5.3 C: Tuning
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 163 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 163 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 5.3 C: Tuning C parameters set the characteristics for acceleration, deceleration, and Jerk. Other parameters in the C group cover settings for slip compensation, torque compensation, and carrier frequency. C1: Acceleration and Deceleration Ramps C1-01 to C1-08: Accel, Decel Ramps 1 to 4 Four different sets of acceleration and deceleration times can be set in the drive by digital inputs, motor selection, or switched automatically. Acceleration ramp parameters always set the ramp or time to accelerate from 0 to the maximum speed. Deceleration ramp parameters always set the ramp or time to decelerate from the maximum speed to 0. C1-01 and C1-02 are the default active accel/decel settings. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C1-01 Acceleration Ramp 1 C1-02 Deceleration Ramp 1 C1-03 Acceleration Ramp 2 C1-04 Deceleration Ramp 2 0.00 to 600.00 s<1> 1.50 s<1> C1-05 Acceleration Ramp 3(Motor 2 Accel Time 1) C1-06 Deceleration Ramp 3(Motor 2 Decel Time 1) C1-07 Acceleration Ramp 4(Motor 2 Accel Time 2) C1-08 Deceleration Ramp 4(Motor 2 Decel Time 2) <1> The setting range and default value depend on the display units set in parameter o1-03. If o1-03 is set between 0 and 4, the time required to go from 0% speed to 100% maximum speed is expressed in seconds. If o1-03 is set to 5 or 6, then setting units will appear in m/s2 or ft/s2. If the drive is in V/f control mode the accel/decel ramps can be set in seconds only. Switching Acceleration Ramps by Digital Input Accel/decel ramps 1 are active by default if no input is set. The accel/decel ramps 2, 3, and 4 can be activated by digital inputs (H1- = 7 and 1A) as explained in Table 5.6. Table 5.6 Accel/Decel Ramp Selection by Digital Input Accel/Decel Ramp Sel. 1 Accel/Decel Ramp Sel. 2 Active Ramps H1- = 7 H1- = 1A Acceleration Deceleration 0 0 C1-01 C1-02 1 0 C1-03 C1-04 0 1 C1-05 C1-06 1 1 C1-07 C1-08 Figure 5.5 shows an operation example for changing accel/decel ramps. The example below requires that the stopping method be set for “Ramp to stop” (b1-03 = 0). Figure5.5 O sp u e tp e u d t A (C c 1 c - e 0 l 1 R ) amp 1 D (C ec 1 e -0 l 2 R ) a A ( m C c 1 p c - e 0 1 l 3 R ) amp 2 D (C e 1 c - e 0 l 4 R ) D a e m ce p l 2 R A ( a C m c 1 c p - e 0 l 1 5 R ) amp 3 D (C e 1 c - e 0 A l 6 R c ) c a ( e C m l 1 p R - 0 a 3 7 m ) p 4 D (C e 1 c - e 0 l 8 R ) a D (C m e 1 p c - e 0 4 l 2 R ) amp 1 (C1-02) common_TMonly 5 Time Up/Down ON OFF ON ON OFF ON command ON OFF ON Accel/Decel Ramp Selection 1 (Terminals S3 to S8, H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = “7”) ON Accel/Decel Ramp Selection 2 (Terminals S3 to S8, H1-(cid:3)(cid:3) = “1A”) Figure 5.5 Timing Diagram of Accel/Decel Ramp Change
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C1-01 | Acceleration Ramp 1 | 0.00 to 600.00 s<1> | 1.50 s<1> |
| C1-02 | Deceleration Ramp 1 | ||
| C1-03 | Acceleration Ramp 2 | ||
| C1-04 | Deceleration Ramp 2 | ||
| C1-05 | Acceleration Ramp 3(Motor 2 Accel Time 1) | ||
| C1-06 | Deceleration Ramp 3(Motor 2 Decel Time 1) | ||
| C1-07 | Acceleration Ramp 4(Motor 2 Accel Time 2) | ||
| C1-08 | Deceleration Ramp 4(Motor 2 Decel Time 2) |
| Accel/Decel Ramp Sel. 1 H1- = 7 | Accel/Decel Ramp Sel. 2 H1- = 1A | Active Ramps | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| Acceleration | Deceleration | ||
| 0 | 0 | C1-01 | C1-02 |
| 1 | 0 | C1-03 | C1-04 |
| 0 | 1 | C1-05 | C1-06 |
| 1 | 1 | C1-07 | C1-08 |
| Column | OFF | Column | Column | Column | Column | OFF | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| ON | ON | ON | ON | |||||
| OFF | ||||||||
| ON | ON | |||||||
| ON |
Source page
Page 164
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 164 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.3 C: Tuning
Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Times by Motor Selection
When switching between motor 1 and 2 using a digital input (H1- = 16), parameters C1-01 to C1-04 become accel/ decel times 1 and 2 for motor 1, while C1-05 to C1-08 become accel/decel times 1 and 2 for motor 2. Accel/decel times 1 and 2 can be switched for each motor using a digital inputs set to H1- = 7 like shown in Table 5.7. Note: 1. The motor 2 selection function cannot be used when PM motor is used. 2. The digital input setting “Accel/Decel time 2 selection” (H1- = 1A) cannot be used together with motor 1/2 switching. Trying to do so triggers an oPE03 error, indicating a contradictory multifunction input settings. 3. The acceleration rate switch is disabled if the S3-21 “Dwell 2 End Speed” is set to any other value other than 0. Table 5.7 Motor Switching and Accel/Decel Time Combinations Motor 1 Selected (Terminal set to H1- = 16 OFF) Motor 2 Selected (Terminal set to H1- = 16 ON) Accel/Decel Time 1 (H1- = 7) Accel Decel Accel Decel Open C1-01 C1-02 C1-05 C1-06 Closed C1-03 C1-04 C1-07 C1-08 Switching Accel/Decel Ramps by a Speed Level The drive can switch between different acceleration and deceleration ramps automatically. The drive will switch from accel/decel ramp 4 in C1-07 and C1-08 to the default accel/decel ramp in C1-01 and C1-02 when the output speed exceeds the speed level set in parameter C1-11. When it falls below this level, the accel/decel ramps are switched back. Figure 5.6 shows an operation example. Note: 1. Acceleration and deceleration ramps selected by digital inputs have priority over the automatic switching by the speed level set to C1-11. For example, if accel/decel ramp 2 is selected, the drive will use this time only and not switch from accel/decel ramp 4 to the selected one. 2. The acceleration rate switch is disabled if the S3-21 (Dwell 2 End Speed) is set to any other value other than 0. Figure5.6 Output Speed common_TMonly C1-11 Accel/Decel Switching Speed C1-07 C1-01 C1-02 C1-08 setting setting setting setting When the output speed ≥ C1-11, drive uses Accel/Decel Ramp 1 (C1-01, -02) When the output speed < C1-11, drive uses Accel/Decel Ramp 2 (C1-07, -08) Figure 5.6 Accel/Decel Switching Speed C1-11: Accel/Decel Switching Speed Sets the speed at which the drive switches between accel/decel ramp settings. Refer to Switching Accel/Decel Ramps by a Speed Level on page 164. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C1-11 Accel/Decel Switching Speed 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0% Note: Setting C1-11 to 0.0% disables this function. C1-09: Emergency Stop Ramp
Sets a special deceleration used when a select group of faults occur or when closing a digital input configured as H1- = 15 (N.O. input) or 17 (N.C. input). A momentary closure of the digital input will trigger the Emergency Stop operation; it does not have to be closed continuously. The drive cannot be restarted after initiating an Emergency Stop operation until after completing deceleration, clearing the Emergency Stop input, and cycling the Up/Down command. An Emergency Stop can be selected as the action the drive should take when certain faults occur, such as L8-03 (Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C1-09 Emergency Stop Ramp 0.0 to 600.0 s <1> 1.50 s<1> <1> The setting range and default value depend on the display units set in parameter o1-03. If o1-03 is set between 0 and 4, the time required to go from 0% speed to 100% maximum speed is expressed in seconds. If o1-03 is set to 5 or 6, then setting units will appear in m/s2 or ft/s2. If the drive is in V/f control mode, the Emergency stop ramp can be set in seconds only. NOTICE: Rapid deceleration can trigger an overvoltage fault. The drive output shuts off when faulted and the motor coasts. Set an appropriate Emergency Stop time to C1-09 to avoid this uncontrolled motor state and to ensure that the motor stops quickly and safely.
164 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Accel/Decel Time 1 (H1- = 7) | Motor 1 Selected (Terminal set to H1- = 16 OFF) | Column | Motor 2 Selected (Terminal set to H1- = 16 ON) | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Accel | Decel | Accel | Decel | |
| Open | C1-01 | C1-02 | C1-05 | C1-06 |
| Closed | C1-03 | C1-04 | C1-07 | C1-08 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C1-11 | Accel/Decel Switching Speed | 0.0 to 100.0% | 0.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C1-09 | Emergency Stop Ramp | 0.0 to 600.0 s <1> | 1.50 s<1> |
Source page
Page 165
5.3 C: Tuning
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 165 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 165 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 C1-10: Accel/Decel Setting Resolution Determines the units for the acceleration and deceleration ramps set to C1-01 through C1-09 using parameter C1-10. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C1-10 Accel/Decel Setting Resolution 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: Two decimal places Setting 1: One decimal place C1-12/C1-13: Motor 2 Acceleration Time/Motor 2 Deceleration Time Sets the accel/decel time when motor 2 has been selected using one of the multi-function input terminals (H1-=16). No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C1-12 Motor 2 Acceleration Time 0.00 to 600.00 s 1.00 s C1-13 Motor 2 Deceleration Time 0.00 to 600.00 s 1.00 s C1-15: Inspection Deceleration Ramp Sets the deceleration ramp during Inspection Run. Refer to Inspection Operation on page 115 for details. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C1-15 Inspection Deceleration Ramp 0.00 to 2.00 s<1> 0.00 s<1> <1> The setting range and default value depend on the display units set in parameter o1-03. If o1-03 is set between 0 and 4, the time required to go from 0% speed to 100% maximum speed is expressed in seconds. If o1-03 is set to 5 or 6, then setting units will appear in m/s2 or ft/s2. If the drive is in V/f control mode, the inspection deceleration ramp can be set in seconds only. C2: Jerk Settings Jerk settings set the transition between acceleration rates. Adjust them to smooth out jerks or shocks that occur when the speed is changed. C2-01 to C2-05: Jerk Settings C2-01 through C2-05 set separate jerks for each section of the acceleration or deceleration. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C2-01 Jerk at Accel Start C2-02 Jerk at Accel End C2-03 Jerk at Decel Start 0.00 to 10.00 s<1> 0.50 s<1> C2-04 Jerk at Decel End C2-05 Jerk below Leveling Speed <1> The setting range and default value depend on the display units set in parameter o1-03. If o1-03 is set between 0 and 4, the time required to go from 0% speed to 100% maximum speed is expressed in seconds. If o1-03 is set to 5 or 6, then setting units will appear in m/s2 or ft/s2. Figure5.7 Up/Down command ON OFF Output speed 5 C2-03 C2-02 common_TMonly C2-04 C2-05 C2-01 Time Figure 5.7 Jerk Settings When o1-03 is set to between 0 and 4, the jerk settings are expressed in seconds. Then the actual accel/decel time including jerk settings can be calculated as follows: Actual accel ramp = accel ramp setting + (C2-01 + C2-02) / 2 Actual decel ramp = decel ramp setting + (C2-03 + C2-04) / 2
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C1-10 | Accel/Decel Setting Resolution | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C1-12 | Motor 2 Acceleration Time | 0.00 to 600.00 s | 1.00 s |
| C1-13 | Motor 2 Deceleration Time | 0.00 to 600.00 s | 1.00 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C1-15 | Inspection Deceleration Ramp | 0.00 to 2.00 s<1> | 0.00 s<1> |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C2-01 | Jerk at Accel Start | 0.00 to 10.00 s<1> | 0.50 s<1> |
| C2-02 | Jerk at Accel End | ||
| C2-03 | Jerk at Decel Start | ||
| C2-04 | Jerk at Decel End | ||
| C2-05 | Jerk below Leveling Speed |
Source page
Page 166
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 166 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.3 C: Tuning
C3: Slip Compensation
The Slip Compensation function improves the speed accuracy of an induction motor. By adjusting the output speed in accordance with the motor load, it compensates the slip and makes the motor speed equal to the speed reference. Note: Perform Auto-Tuning and make sure that the motor rated current (E2-01), the motor rated slip (E2-02), and the no-load current (E2-03) have all been set properly before making any adjustments to slip compensation parameters.
C3-01: Slip Compensation Gain Sets the gain for the motor slip compensation function. Although this parameter rarely needs to be changed, adjustments may be necessary under the following circumstances:
• Increase the setting if the motor at constant speed is slower than the speed reference. • Decrease the setting if the motor at constant speed is faster than the speed reference.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C3-01 Slip Compensation Gain 0.0 to 2.5 1.0 C3-02: Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Adjusts the filter on the output side of the slip compensation function. Although this parameter rarely needs to be changed, adjustment may help in the following situations:
• Decrease the setting when the slip compensation response is too slow. • Increase this setting when speed is unstable. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C3-02 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time 0 to 10000 ms 2000 ms C3-03: Slip Compensation Limit
Sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function as a percentage of the motor rated slip (E2-02).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C3-03 Slip Compensation Limit 0 to 250% 200% The slip compensation limit is constant throughout the constant torque range (speed reference ≤ E1-06). In the constant power range (speed reference ≥ E1-06), it is increased based on C3-03 and the output speed as shown in Figure 5.8. Figure5.8 E1-04 E1-06 ×C3-03 C3-03 common_TMonly
Output speed E1-06 E1-04 Base Maximum Frequency Frequency Figure 5.8 Slip Compensation Limit C3-04: Slip Compensation Selection during Regeneration Enables or disables slip compensation during regenerative operation.
This function does not operate when the output frequency is too low, regardless of whether it has been enabled. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C3-04 Slip Compensation Selection during Regeneration 0 to 2 0
Setting 0: Disabled Slip compensation is not provided. The actual motor speed might be higher than the speed reference. Setting 1: Enabled (6 Hz and above) Slip compensation is enabled during regenerative operation. It will not be active at output frequencies below 6 Hz.
166 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C3-01 | Slip Compensation Gain | 0.0 to 2.5 | 1.0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C3-02 | Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time | 0 to 10000 ms | 2000 ms |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C3-03 | Slip Compensation Limit | 0 to 250% | 200% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C3-04 | Slip Compensation Selection during Regeneration | 0 to 2 | 0 |
Source page
Page 167
5.3 C: Tuning
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 167 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 167 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Setting 2: Enabled (compensation provided wherever possible) Slip compensation is enabled during regenerative operation and at frequencies as low as 2 Hz. The drive uses the motor rated slip set to E2-02 to automatically calculate the frequency range where compensation will be disabled. C3-05: Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection Determines if the motor flux reference is automatically reduced when output voltage reaches the saturation range. If the input power supply voltage is low or the motor has a high voltage rating, this function improves the speed precision when moving heavy loads at high speeds. When selecting the drive, remember that the reduction in flux causes a slightly higher current at high speed when this function is enabled. Note: Available control modes for parameter C3-05 vary by drive model: Models CIMR-L20008 to 20415, 40005 to 40216: Available when A1-02 = 2, 3 No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C3-05 Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection 0 or 1 Determined by A1-02 Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled C3-21: Motor 2 Slip Compensation Gain Used to improve speed accuracy for motor 2. Functions in the same way that C3-01 functions for motor 1. Adjust this parameter only after the motor rated current (E4-01), motor rated slip (E4-02), and the motor no-load current (E4-03) have all been set. Refer to C3-01: Slip Compensation Gain on page 166 for details on adjusting this parameter. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C3-21 Motor 2 Slip Compensation Gain 0.0 to 2.5 Determined by E3-01 Note: Default setting is 0.0 in V/f Control (A1-02 = 0). Default setting is 1.0 in Open Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2) and Closed Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 3). In Closed Loop Vector Control, slip compensation gain acts as an adaptable gain. C3-22: Motor 2 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Functions for motor 2 in the same way that C3-02 functions for motor 1. Refer to C3-02: Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time on page 166 for instructions on how to adjust this parameter. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C3-22 Motor 2 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time 0 to 10000 ms Determined by A1-02 Note: The default for V/f Control (A1-02 = 0) is 2000 ms. The default for Open Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 2) is 200 ms. C3-23: Motor 2 Slip Compensation Limit Sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function as a percentage of the motor rated slip (E4-02). No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default 5 C3-23 Motor 2 Slip Compensation Limit 0 to 250% 200% The slip compensation limit is constant throughout the constant torque range (frequency reference ≤ E3-06). In the constant power range (frequency reference ≥ E3-06), it is increased based on C3-23 and the output frequency as shown in the following diagram. Figure5.9 E3-04 E3-06 ×C3-23 common_TMonly C3-23 Output Frequency E3-06 E3-04 Base Maximum Frequency Frequency Figure 5.9 Slip Compensation Limit
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C3-05 | Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection | 0 or 1 | Determined by A1-02 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C3-21 | Motor 2 Slip Compensation Gain | 0.0 to 2.5 | Determined by E3-01 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C3-22 | Motor 2 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time | 0 to 10000 ms | Determined by A1-02 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C3-23 | Motor 2 Slip Compensation Limit | 0 to 250% | 200% |
Source page
Page 168
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 168 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.3 C: Tuning
C4: Torque Compensation
The torque compensation function compensates for insufficient torque production at start-up or when a load is applied.
Note: Set the motor parameters and V/f pattern properly before setting torque compensation parameters. C4-01: Torque Compensation Gain
Sets the gain for the torque compensation function.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C4-01 Torque Compensation Gain 0.00 to 2.50 1.00 Torque Compensation in V/f The drive calculates the motor primary voltage loss using the output current and the line to line resistance (E2-05) and then adjusts the output voltage to compensate insufficient torque at start or when load is applied. The effects of this voltage compensation can be increased or decreased using parameter C4-01.
Torque Compensation in OLV The drive controls the motor excitation current (d-Axis current) and torque producing current (q-Axis current) separately. Torque compensation affects the torque producing current only. C4-01 works as a factor of the torque reference value that builds the torque producing current reference. Adjustment
Although this parameter rarely needs to be changed, it may be necessary to adjust the torque compensation gain in small steps of 0.05 in the following situations: • Increase this setting when using a long motor cable. • Decrease this setting when motor oscillation occurs.
Adjust C4-01 so that the output current does not exceed the drive rated current. Note: Refrain from adjusting torque compensation in Open Loop Vector Control, as it can have a negative effect on torque accuracy. C4-02: Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time
Sets the delay time used for applying torque compensation.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C4-02 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time 0 to 60000 ms Determined by A1-02 Adjustment
Although C4-02 rarely needs to be changed, adjustments may be necessary in the following situations: • Increase this setting if the motor vibrates. • Decrease this setting if the motor responds too slowly to changes in the load.
C4-03: Torque Compensation at Forward Start Sets the amount of torque at start in the forward direction to improve motor performance during start with a heavy load. Compensation is applied using the time constant set in parameter C4-05. Enable this function when the load pulls the motor in reverse when starting with a Forward Up/Down command. Setting of 0.0% disables this feature.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C4-03 Torque Compensation at Forward Start 0.0 to 200.0% 0.0% C4-04: Torque Compensation at Reverse Start Sets the amount of torque reference at start in the reverse direction to improve motor performance during start with heavy load. Compensation is applied using the time constant set in parameter C4-05. Enable this function if the load pulls the motor in the forward direction when starting with a Reverse Up/Down command. Setting 0.0% disables this feature.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C4-04 Torque Compensation at Reverse Start -200.0 to 0.0% 0.0%
168 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C4-01 | Torque Compensation Gain | 0.00 to 2.50 | 1.00 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C4-02 | Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time | 0 to 60000 ms | Determined by A1-02 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C4-03 | Torque Compensation at Forward Start | 0.0 to 200.0% | 0.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C4-04 | Torque Compensation at Reverse Start | -200.0 to 0.0% | 0.0% |
Source page
Page 169
5.3 C: Tuning
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 169 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 169 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 C4-05: Torque Compensation Time Constant Sets the time constant for applying the torque compensation at start that is set to C4-03 and C4-04. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C4-05 Torque Compensation Time Constant 0 to 200 ms 10 ms C4-07: Motor 2 Torque Compensation Gain Functions for motor 2 in the same way that C4-01 functions for motor 1. Refer to C3-01: Slip Compensation Gain on page 166 for details on adjusting this parameter. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C4-07 Motor 2 Torque Compensation Gain 0.00 to 2.50 1.00 C5: Speed Control Loop The Speed Control Loop controls the motor speed in CLV and CLV/PM control modes. It adjusts torque reference in order to minimize the difference between speed reference and actual motor speed. Figure5.10 Torque limits C5-01, C5-03, C5-13, C5-19 Speed reference + P + P fil r t i e m r ary Torque reference common_TMonly - I I + C5-06 limit L7-01 to L7-04 Detected speed C5-02, C5-04, C5-08 C5-14, C5-20 Figure 5.10 Speed Control Block Diagram Adjusting the Speed Control Loop Parameters Perform Auto-Tuning and set up all motor data correctly prior to adjusting Speed Control Loop parameters. Analog output signals should be used to monitor the speed reference after softstarter (U1-16) and the motor speed (U1-05) when adjusting the Speed Control Loop. Refer to H4: Multi-Function Analog Outputs on page 207 for details on setting up analog output functions. Generally when tuning the Speed Control Loop, first optimize the Speed Control Loop gain, then adjust the integral time settings. Always make adjustments with the load connected to the motor. The drive provides three different gain and integral time settings for the speed loop. They are automatically switched over if the switching speed in parameter C5-07 is set larger than 0% (default: 0% for CLV, 2% for CLV/PM). If no switching speed is defined (C5-07 = 0) the drive will use one set of speed loop parameters only (C5-01/02). However, in order to achieve adequate performance in all sections of a trip, for the most installations it will be necessary to use two or all three sets of speed loop settings. Additional Speed loop settings are provided for Position Lock. Those can be used to prevent rollback especially in gearless applications. 5 Also refer to C5-01, C5-03, C5-13 / C5-02, C5-04, C5-14: Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 1, 2, 3 / Speed Control Loop Integral Time 1, 2, 3 on page 170. Perform the following steps for adjusting Speed Control Loop parameters: 1. Check parameter C5-07 and set a speed loop setting switching point. For CLV/PM the drive is preset to 2%. For CLV set C5-07 between 8 to 10%. 2. Start a trip and check for any problems like rollback, vibration, overshoot, etc. 3. Adjust C5-19/20 in order to solve rollback problems During Position Lock right before the motor starts accelerating. Increase C5-19, then shorten C5-20 if the motor rolls back right after the brake releases. Set them in the opposite way if vibration occurs. If the rollback cannot be eliminated by setting C5-19/10, refer to parameters S3-01/02 (Position Lock Gains at Start). 4. Adjust C5-03/04 in order to improve the performance at start after Position Lock has been finished. Increase C5-03, then shorten C5-04 if the speed response is slow. Set them in the opposite way if vibration occurs.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C4-05 | Torque Compensation Time Constant | 0 to 200 ms | 10 ms |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C4-07 | Motor 2 Torque Compensation Gain | 0.00 to 2.50 | 1.00 |
Source page
Page 170
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 170 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.3 C: Tuning
5. Adjust C5-01/02 in order to solve problems that occur at speeds higher than C5-07. Increase C5-01, then shorten C5-02 if overshoot when reaching the top speed occurs. Set them in the opposite way if vibration occurs. 6. Adjust C5-13/14 in order to improve the stopping behavior. Increase C5-13, then shorten C5-14 if the landing accuracy is poor. Adjust them in the opposite way if vibrations occur. If problems cannot be resolved by setting C5-13/14, refer to parameter S3-03 Position Lock Gain at Stop). Note that C5-13/14 settings will not be effective if the speed reference is set from an analog input. 7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 until the desired riding comfort has been reached. Also refer to Riding Comfort Related Problems on page 147. C5-01, C5-03, C5-13 / C5-02, C5-04, C5-14: Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 1, 2, 3 / Speed Control Loop Integral Time 1, 2, 3 These parameters adjust the responsiveness of the Speed Control Loop.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C5-01 Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 1 0.00 to 300.00 Determined by A1-02 C5-02 Speed Control Loop Integral Time 1 0.000 to 10.000 s Determined by A1-02 C5-03 Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 2 0.00 to 300.00 Determined by A1-02 C5-04 Speed Control Loop Integral Time 2 0.000 to 10.000 s 0.500 s C5-13 Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 3 0.00 to 300.00 Determined by A1-02 C5-14 Speed Control Loop Integral Time 3 0.000 to 10.000 s Determined by A1-02 Speed Control Loop Gain Tuning (C5-01, C5-03, C5-13) The higher this setting, the faster the speed response, although a setting that is too high can lead to oscillation. Speed Control Loop Integral Time Tuning (C5-02, C5-04, C5-14) Determines how fast a continuous speed deviation problem is eliminated. A setting that is too long reduces the responsiveness of the speed control. A setting that is too short can cause oscillation.
C5-06: Speed Control Loop Primary Delay Time Constant Sets the filter time constant for the time from the speed loop to the torque command output. Increase this setting gradually in increments of 0.01 for loads with low rigidity or when oscillation is a problem. This parameter rarely needs to be changed.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C5-06 Speed Control Loop Primary Delay Time Constant 0.000 to 0.500 s 0.004 s C5-07: Speed Control Settings Switching Speed Sets the speed where the drive should switch between Speed Control Loop proportional gain 1, 2, and 3 (C5-01, C5-03, and C5-13) as well as between integral time 1, 2, and 3 (C5-02, C5-04, and C5-14).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C5-07 Speed Control Settings Switching Speed 0.0 to 100.0% Determined by A1-02 Switching Between Speed Loop Settings Accel/Decel Switching between speed loop settings helps to achieve optimal performance and riding comfort in all sections of a trip. If C5-07 is set higher than 0% then the speed loop settings automatically change with the output speed as shown in Figure 5.11 and Figure 5.12. Figure5.11 common_ P, I P = C5-01 TMonly I = C5-02
P = C5-03 I = C5-04
Speed 0 C5-07 Figure 5.11 Settings at Low and High Speed during Acceleration
170 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C5-01 | Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 1 | 0.00 to 300.00 | Determined by A1-02 |
| C5-02 | Speed Control Loop Integral Time 1 | 0.000 to 10.000 s | Determined by A1-02 |
| C5-03 | Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 2 | 0.00 to 300.00 | Determined by A1-02 |
| C5-04 | Speed Control Loop Integral Time 2 | 0.000 to 10.000 s | 0.500 s |
| C5-13 | Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 3 | 0.00 to 300.00 | Determined by A1-02 |
| C5-14 | Speed Control Loop Integral Time 3 | 0.000 to 10.000 s | Determined by A1-02 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C5-06 | Speed Control Loop Primary Delay Time Constant | 0.000 to 0.500 s | 0.004 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C5-07 | Speed Control Settings Switching Speed | 0.0 to 100.0% | Determined by A1-02 |
Source page
Page 171
5.3 C: Tuning
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 171 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 171 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Figure5.12 common_ P = C5-01 TMonly P, I I = C5-02 P = C5-13 I = C5-14 Speed 0 C5-07 Figure 5.12 Settings at Low and High Speed during Deceleration (Leveling Speed is Selected) C5-08: Speed Control Loop Integral Limit Sets the upper limit for Speed Control Loop output as a percentage of the rated torque. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C5-08 Speed Control Loop Integral Limit 0 to 400% 400% C5-16: Speed Control Loop Delay Time during Position Lock Adjusts the delay applied to the torque reference output from Speed Control Loop during Position Lock. Increase this setting gradually in increments of 0.01 when vibration is a problem. This parameter rarely needs to be changed. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C5-16 Speed Control Loop Delay Time during Position Lock 0.000 to 0.500 s 0.000 s C5-17, C5-18: Motor Inertia, Load Inertia Ratio C5-17 and C5-18 determine the ratio of the machine inertia and the inertia of the motor being used. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C5-17 Motor Inertia 0.0001 to 600.00 kgm2 Determined by o2-04 C5-18 Load Inertia Ratio 0.0 to 6000.0 1.0 C5-19, C5-20: Speed Control Loop P Gain Time, I Time during Position Lock These parameters adjust the responsiveness of Speed Control Loop during Position Lock. Increase C5-19 and shorten C5-20 if the motor rolls back immediately after the brake releases. Decrease C5-19 and lengthen C5-20 if vibrations occur. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C5-19 Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain Time during Position Lock 0.00 to 300.00 Determined by A1-02 C5-20 Speed Control Loop Integral Time during Position Lock 0.000 to 10.000 s 0.100 s C5-50: Set Vibrational Frequency Filter Mechanical resonance may cause a humming sound or vibration while the motor is running. A vibrational frequency filter can be used to suppress certain audible noise or vibration due to mechanical resonance. 5 Sets the mechanical vibration filter frequency in units of 1 Hz. Set C5-50 to 0 (Hz) to disable the filter. A setting of 0 will disable this parameter. Note: Test equipment may be required to determine the mechanical resonance frequency. Setting C5-50 to an improper frequency will result in ineffective filtering of the effects of mechanical resonance. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C5-50<1> Set Vibrational Frequency Filter 0 Hz, 20 to 1000 Hz<2> 0 Hz <1> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7200 or later. <2> The frequencies from 1 to 19 Hz cannot be set.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C5-08 | Speed Control Loop Integral Limit | 0 to 400% | 400% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C5-16 | Speed Control Loop Delay Time during Position Lock | 0.000 to 0.500 s | 0.000 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C5-17 | Motor Inertia | 0.0001 to 600.00 kgm2 | Determined by o2-04 |
| C5-18 | Load Inertia Ratio | 0.0 to 6000.0 | 1.0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C5-19 | Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain Time during Position Lock | 0.00 to 300.00 | Determined by A1-02 |
| C5-20 | Speed Control Loop Integral Time during Position Lock | 0.000 to 10.000 s | 0.100 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C5-50<1> | Set Vibrational Frequency Filter | 0 Hz, 20 to 1000 Hz<2> | 0 Hz |
Source page
Page 172
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 172 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.3 C: Tuning
C6: Carrier Frequency
C6-03: Carrier Frequency
Sets the carrier frequency.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C6-03 Carrier Frequency 1.0 to 15.0 kHz Determined by o2-04 C6-06: PWM Method
Determines how the drive should perform pulse width modulation.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C6-06 PWM Method 0 to 2 0 Setting 0: 2-phase/3-phase conversion Setting 1: 2-phase modulation Setting 2: 3-phase modulation Note: The drive rated output current is reduced with setting 2. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for details.
C6-09: Carrier Frequency during Rotational Auto-Tuning Determines the carrier frequency while performing Rotational Auto-Tuning. Although this parameter rarely needs to be changed, when overcurrent problems occur when Auto-Tuning a low impedance motor, it may be helpful to set C6-03 to a high value before setting C6-09 to 1.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C6-09 Carrier Frequency during Rotational Auto-Tuning 0 or 1 0
Setting 0: 5 kHz Setting 1: Same value set to C6-03 C6-21: Inspection Operation Carrier Frequency Sets the carrier frequency during Inspection Run.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C6-21 Inspection Operation Carrier Frequency 0 or 1 1 Setting 0: Use the value set to C6-03 Setting 1: 2 kHz C6-23: Carrier Frequency during Initial Motor Pole Search
Sets the carrier frequency when estimating the initial polarity.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C6-23 Carrier Frequency during Initial Motor Pole Search 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: 2 kHz Setting 1: Use the value set to C6-03
C6-31: Carrier Frequency during Rescue Operation Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7016 or later. Sets the carrier frequency during Rescue Operation.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default C6-31 Carrier Frequency during Rescue Operation 0, 1 0 Setting 0: Use the value set to C6-03 Setting 1: 2 kHz
172 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C6-03 | Carrier Frequency | 1.0 to 15.0 kHz | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C6-06 | PWM Method | 0 to 2 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C6-09 | Carrier Frequency during Rotational Auto-Tuning | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C6-21 | Inspection Operation Carrier Frequency | 0 or 1 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C6-23 | Carrier Frequency during Initial Motor Pole Search | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| C6-31 | Carrier Frequency during Rescue Operation | 0, 1 | 0 |
Source page
Page 173
5.4 d: Reference Settings
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 173 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 173 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 5.4 d: Reference Settings The d parameters determine the speed of the elevator including the speed reference and Field Forcing settings for motor response. d1: Speed Reference The d1 parameter group is used to set the speed reference. Switch the multi-function input contact terminals to create a multi-step speed sequence using the various references set to the d1 parameters. d1-01 to d1-08: Speed References 1 to 8 These parameters set speed references 1 through 8. Each of these speed reference values can be selected using digital inputs programmed for multi-speed selection (H1- = 3, 4, 5). No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default d1-01 to d1-08 Speed Reference 1 to 8 0.00 to 100.00%<1> 0.00%<1> <1> Setting units and the default setting are determined by parameter o1-03. Refer to Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03) on page 397 for details. Refer to Multi-Speed Inputs 1, 2 (d1-18 = 0 or 3) on page 111 for details. d1-18: Speed Reference Selection Mode Sets the priority of the speed reference inputs. NOTICE: Always turn off the RUN command before changing the setting of parameters d1-18 (Speed Reference Selection Mode), b1-01 (Speed Reference Selection), or H1- (Multi-Function Digital Inputs). If the RUN command is on when changing any of these settings, the motor may unexpectedly start running, and could result in injury. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default d1-18 Speed Reference Selection Mode 0 to 3 1 Setting 0: Use multi-speed references d1-01 to d1-08 Up to eight separate preset speed references can be programmed to the drive using parameters d1-01 through d1-08 and can be selected using binary coded digital inputs. When d1-18 is set to “0”, parameters d1-19 through d1-23 are not displayed. Refer to Multi-Speed Inputs 1, 2 (d1-18 = 0 or 3) on page 111 for details. Setting 1: High speed reference has priority Six different speeds (d1-19 to d1-23, d1-26) can be programmed to the drive and can be selected using dedicated digital inputs. Each of the speed references set to d1-19 through d1-23 takes priority over the leveling speed set to d1-26. When d1-18 is set to “1”, parameter d1-01 to d1-08 are not displayed. Refer to Separate Speed Inputs (d1-18 = 1 or 2) on page 112 for details. Setting 2: Leveling speed reference has priority Six different speeds (d1-19 to d1-23, d1-26) can be programmed to the drive and can be selected using dedicated digital inputs. The leveling speed reference in d1-26, however, takes priority over all other speed references when enabled via 5 one of the multi-function input terminals (H1- = 53). When d1-18 is set to “2”, parameters d1-01 to d1-08 are not displayed. Refer to Separate Speed Inputs (d1-18 = 1 or 2) on page 112 for details. Setting 3: Use multi-speed references d1-02 to d1-08, no speed selection stops the drive Up to seven separate preset speed references can be programmed to the drive using parameters d1-02 through d1-08 can be selected using binary coded digital inputs. When d1-18 is set to “3”, parameters d1-19 through d1-23 are not displayed. Refer to Multi-Speed Inputs 1, 2 (d1-18 = 0 or 3) on page 111 for details.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| d1-01 to d1-08 | Speed Reference 1 to 8 | 0.00 to 100.00%<1> | 0.00%<1> |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| d1-18 | Speed Reference Selection Mode | 0 to 3 | 1 |
Source page
Page 174
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 174 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.4 d: Reference Settings
d1-19: Nominal Speed
Sets the nominal speed when a multi-function input terminal is programmed for “Nominal speed” (H1- = 50).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default d1-19 Nominal Speed 0.00 to 100.00%<1> 100.00%<1> <1> Setting ranges and defaults vary by the setting units determined by parameter o1-03. Refer to Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03) on page 397 for details. d1-20, d1-21, d1-22: Intermediate Speeds 1 to 3
Sets intermediate speeds 1 through 3.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default d1-20 Intermediate Speed 1 0.00 to 100.00%<1> 0.00%<1> d1-21 Intermediate Speed 2 0.00 to 100.00%<1> 0.00%<1> d1-22 Intermediate Speed 3 0.00 to 100.00%<1> 0.00%<1> <1> Setting ranges and defaults vary by the setting units determined by parameter o1-03. Refer to Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03) on page 397 for details. d1-23: Releveling Speed
Sets the releveling speed when a multi-function input terminal is programmed for “Releveling speed” (H1- = 52).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default d1-23 Releveling Speed 0.00 to 100.00%<1> 0.00%<1> <1> Setting ranges and defaults vary by the setting units determined by parameter o1-03. Refer to Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03) on page 397 for details. d1-24: Inspection Operation Speed
Sets the inspection speed when a multi-function input terminal is programmed for “Inspection speed” (H1- = 54). A description of the inspection speed can be found in Inspection Operation on page 115.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default d1-24 Inspection Operation Speed 0.00 to 100.00%<1> 50.00%<1> <1> Setting ranges and defaults vary by the setting units determined by parameter o1-03. Refer to Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03) on page 397 for details. d1-25: Rescue Operation Speed
Determines the speed during Rescue Operation. Refer to Rescue Operation on page 121 for details.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default d1-25 Rescue Operation Speed 0.00 to 100.00%<1> 10.00%<1> <1> Setting ranges and defaults vary by the setting units determined by parameter o1-03. Refer to Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03) on page 397 for details. d1-26: Leveling Speed
Sets the inspection speed when a multi-function input terminal is programmed for “Leveling speed” (H1- = 53).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default d1-26 Leveling Speed 0.00 to 100.00%<1> 8.00%<1> <1> Setting ranges and defaults vary by the setting units determined by parameter o1-03. Refer to Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03) on page 397 for details.
174 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| d1-19 | Nominal Speed | 0.00 to 100.00%<1> | 100.00%<1> |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| d1-20 | Intermediate Speed 1 | 0.00 to 100.00%<1> | 0.00%<1> |
| d1-21 | Intermediate Speed 2 | 0.00 to 100.00%<1> | 0.00%<1> |
| d1-22 | Intermediate Speed 3 | 0.00 to 100.00%<1> | 0.00%<1> |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| d1-23 | Releveling Speed | 0.00 to 100.00%<1> | 0.00%<1> |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| d1-24 | Inspection Operation Speed | 0.00 to 100.00%<1> | 50.00%<1> |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| d1-25 | Rescue Operation Speed | 0.00 to 100.00%<1> | 10.00%<1> |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| d1-26 | Leveling Speed | 0.00 to 100.00%<1> | 8.00%<1> |
Source page
Page 175
5.4 d: Reference Settings
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 175 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 175 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Motor Switch Selection When an input terminal selects motor 2 (H1- = 16), the drive will operate a second motor using V/f Control. The drive cannot control motor 2 with OLV, CLV or CLV/PM. The motor 2 speed reference in d1-27 can also be used to operate motor 1 using V/f Control. Refer to Table 5.8 for combinations of selecting the speed reference for motor 2 and the motor 1/2 selection switch. (H1- = 53). Table 5.8 Speed Reference for Motor 2, Controlling Motor 1 and 2 The value set to d1-27 Speed reference Control mode Accel/Decel ramp S-character/ Jerk Bra C k o e n s t e ac q t u o e r n / ce Purpose speed reference set to 0.00 Motor 1 V/f with motor 1<1> C1-01 to C1-08 C2-01 to C2-05 Available Hoist not 0.00 d1-27 V/f with motor 2 C1-12/C1-13 N.A. N.A. Not for hoist <1> Enter the same values to the E3 and E4 parameters that are set for the E1 and E2 parameters. d1-27: Motor 2 Speed Reference Sets the speed reference for motor 2. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default d1-27 Motor 2 Speed Reference 0.00 to 200.00 Hz 0.00 Hz Note: 1. The drive will control motor 1 when this parameter is set to 0.00. 2. Set the accel/decel times in parameters C1-12 and C1-13 when using motor 2. 3. When motor 2 is selected, the following monitors will display values in Hz: U1-01, U1-02, U1-05, U4-19, U4-20. d1-28: Leveling Speed Detection Level When the speed priority selection in d1-18 is set to “0” or “3” and the speed reference value falls below the level set in d1-28, the drive interprets the selected speed as leveling speed. This parameter must be set to use the Speed Control Loop setting 3 when d1-18 = 0/3. Refer to C5: Speed Control Loop on page 169 for details. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default d1-28 Leveling Speed Detection Level 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0% d1-29: Inspection Speed Detection Level When the speed priority selection in d1-18 is set to “0” or “3” and the speed reference value is below the level set in d1-29 but higher than the level set in d1-28, the drive interprets the selected speed as inspection speed. This parameter must be set to use the Inspection Operation function when d1-18 = 0/3. Refer to Inspection Operation on page 115 for details. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default d1-29 Inspection Speed Detection Level 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0% d6: Field Forcing Field Forcing The Field Forcing function compensates the delaying influence of the motor time constant when changing the excitation current reference. Field Forcing can improve the motor responsiveness. It is ineffective during DC Injection Braking. 5 d6-03: Field Forcing Selection Enables or disables the Field Forcing function. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default d6-03 Field Forcing Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled d6-06: Field Forcing Limit Sets the maximum level at which the Field Forcing function can boost the excitation current reference. The value is set as a percentage of the motor no load current. This parameter does not normally need to be changed. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default d6-06 Field Forcing Limit 100 to 400% 400%
| The value set to d1-27 | Speed reference | Control mode | Accel/Decel ramp | S-character/ Jerk | Contactor/ Brake sequence | Purpose |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0.00 | speed reference set to Motor 1 | V/f with motor 1<1> | C1-01 to C1-08 | C2-01 to C2-05 | Available | Hoist |
| not 0.00 | d1-27 | V/f with motor 2 | C1-12/C1-13 | N.A. | N.A. | Not for hoist |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| d1-27 | Motor 2 Speed Reference | 0.00 to 200.00 Hz | 0.00 Hz |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| d1-28 | Leveling Speed Detection Level | 0.0 to 100.0% | 0.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| d1-29 | Inspection Speed Detection Level | 0.0 to 100.0% | 0.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| d6-03 | Field Forcing Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| d6-06 | Field Forcing Limit | 100 to 400% | 400% |
Source page
Page 176
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 176 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.5 E: Motor Parameters
5.5 E: Motor Parameters
E parameters cover V/f pattern and motor data settings.
E1: V/f Pattern
E1-01: Input Voltage Setting Adjusts the levels of some protective features of the drive (overvoltage, Stall Prevention, etc.). Set this parameter to the nominal voltage of the AC power supply.
NOTICE: Set parameter E1-01 to match the input voltage of the drive. The drive input voltage (not motor voltage) must be set in E1-01 for the protective features to function properly. Failure to set the correct drive input voltage will result in improper drive operation.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E1-01<1> Input Voltage Setting 155 to 255 V 200 V <1> Values shown here are specific to 200 V class drives; double the values for 400 V class drives. E1-01 Related Values
For 400 V class drives, the input voltage setting determines the undervoltage detection levels.
(Approximate Values) Voltage Settin E g 1 - V 0 a 1 lue of ov Detection Level O B p ra e k ra in ti g o n T r L a e n v s e is l t < o 1 r > Uv De ( t L ec 2 t - i 0 o 5 n ) Level 200 V Class All settings 410 V 394 V 190 V setting ≥ 400 V 820 V 788 V 380 V 400 V Class setting < 400 V 820 V 788 V 350 V <1> The braking transistor operation levels are valid for the internal braking transistor of the drive. When using an external CDBR braking chopper, refer to the instruction manual of that unit. E1-03: V/f Pattern Selection No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection F F Note: Parameter is not reset to the default value when the drive is initialized using A1-03. V/f Pattern Settings E1-04 to E1-13
Figure 5.13 illustrates the V/f pattern setting.
NOTICE: The motor may require more acceleration torque with drive operation than with a commercial power supply. Set a proper V/f pattern by checking the load torque characteristics of the elevator to be used with the motor. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency 10.0 to 200.0 Hz<1> <2> E1-05 Maximum Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V<3> 190.0 V<3> E1-06 Base Frequency 0.0 to 200.0 Hz <2> E1-07 Middle Output Frequency 0.0 to 200.0 Hz 3.0 Hz E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V<3> <2><3><4> E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency 0.0 to 200.0 Hz <2> E1-10 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V<3> <2><3><4> E1-11<5> Middle Output Frequency 2 0.0 to 120.0 Hz 0.0 Hz E1-12<5> Middle Output Frequency Voltage 2 0.0 to 255.0 V<3> 0.0 V<3> E1-13 Base Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 V<3> 0.0 V<3><6> <1> Setting range depends on the control mode being used. CLV allows a setting range of 10.0 to 120.0 Hz, while CLV/PM allows a setting range of 4.0 to 120.0 Hz. <2> Default setting is determined by the control mode (A1-02). <3> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double values when using a 400 V class unit. <4> Default setting is determined by the drive model (o2-04). <5> Parameter ignored when E1-11 and E1-12 are set to 0.0. <6> Auto-Tuning will set E1-13 to the same value as E1-05.
176 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E1-01<1> | Input Voltage Setting | 155 to 255 V | 200 V |
| Voltage | Setting Value of E1-01 | (Approximate Values) | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| ov Detection Level | Braking Transistor Operation Level<1> | Uv Detection Level (L2-05) | ||
| 200 V Class | All settings | 410 V | 394 V | 190 V |
| 400 V Class | setting ≥ 400 V | 820 V | 788 V | 380 V |
| setting < 400 V | 820 V | 788 V | 350 V |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E1-03 | V/f Pattern Selection | F | F |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E1-04 | Maximum Output Frequency | 10.0 to 200.0 Hz<1> | <2> |
| E1-05 | Maximum Voltage | 0.0 to 255.0 V<3> | 190.0 V<3> |
| E1-06 | Base Frequency | 0.0 to 200.0 Hz | <2> |
| E1-07 | Middle Output Frequency | 0.0 to 200.0 Hz | 3.0 Hz |
| E1-08 | Middle Output Frequency Voltage | 0.0 to 255.0 V<3> | <2><3><4> |
| E1-09 | Minimum Output Frequency | 0.0 to 200.0 Hz | <2> |
| E1-10 | Minimum Output Frequency Voltage | 0.0 to 255.0 V<3> | <2><3><4> |
| E1-11<5> | Middle Output Frequency 2 | 0.0 to 120.0 Hz | 0.0 Hz |
| E1-12<5> | Middle Output Frequency Voltage 2 | 0.0 to 255.0 V<3> | 0.0 V<3> |
| E1-13 | Base Voltage | 0.0 to 255.0 V<3> | 0.0 V<3><6> |
Source page
Page 177
5.5 E: Motor Parameters
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 177 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 177 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 The availability of the following parameters depends on the control mode. No. V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM E1-07 Yes Yes N/A N/A E1-08 Yes Yes N/A N/A E1-10 Yes Yes N/A N/A E1-11 Yes Yes Yes N/A E1-12 Yes Yes Yes N/A E1-13 Yes Yes Yes N/A Figure5.13 Output Voltage (V) common_TMonly Frequency (Hz) Figure 5.13 V/f Pattern Note: 1. The following condition must be true when setting up the V/f pattern: E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ E1-11 ≤ E1-04 2. To make the V/f pattern a straight line below E1-06, set E1-09 = E1-07. In this case the E1-08 setting is disregarded. 3. E1-03 is unaffected when the parameters are initialized using parameter A1-03, but the settings for E1-04 through E1-13 are returned to their default values. 4. Parameters E1-11, E1-12, and E1-13 should only be used to fine-tune the V/f pattern in the constant output range. These parameters rarely need to be changed. E2: Motor Parameters These parameters contain the motor data for induction motors. They are set automatically when Auto-Tuning is performed (this includes Rotational Auto-Tuning, Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 and 2). If Auto-Tuning cannot be performed, refer to Auto-Tuning Fault Detection on page 287. Note: As the motor parameters for a PM motor are set up in the E5- parameters, parameters for induction motors (E2-) are hidden when a PM motor control mode is selected (i.e., parameter A1-02 is set to 7). E2-01: Motor Rated Current Used to protect the motor and calculate torque limits. Set E2-01 to the full load amps (FLA) stamped on the motor nameplate. If Auto-Tuning completes successfully, the value entered to T1-04 will automatically be saved to E2-01. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E2-01 Motor Rated Current 10% to 200% of the drive rated current. Determined by o2-04 Note: 1. The display resolution depends on the rated output power of the drive. Models CIMR-L20008 to 20033 and 40005 to 40018 display values in 0.01 A units, while models CIMR-L20047 to 20415 and 40024 to 40216 display values in 0.1 A units. 2. Setting the motor rated current in E2-01 lower than the motor no-load current in E2-03 will trigger an oPE02 error. Set E2-03 correctly to prevent this error. 5 E2-02: Motor Rated Slip Sets the motor rated slip in Hz to protect the motor and calculate torque limits. This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning (Rotational Auto-Tuning, Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 and 2). No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E2-02 Motor Rated Slip 0.00 to 20.00 Hz Determined by o2-04
| No. | V/f | OLV | CLV | CLV/PM |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| E1-07 | Yes | Yes | N/A | N/A |
| E1-08 | Yes | Yes | N/A | N/A |
| E1-10 | Yes | Yes | N/A | N/A |
| E1-11 | Yes | Yes | Yes | N/A |
| E1-12 | Yes | Yes | Yes | N/A |
| E1-13 | Yes | Yes | Yes | N/A |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E2-01 | Motor Rated Current | 10% to 200% of the drive rated current. | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E2-02 | Motor Rated Slip | 0.00 to 20.00 Hz | Determined by o2-04 |
Source page
Page 178
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 178 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.5 E: Motor Parameters
E2-03: Motor No-Load Current
Set the no-load current for the motor in amperes when operating at the rated frequency and the no-load voltage. The drive sets E2-03 during the Auto-Tuning process (Rotational Auto-Tuning and Stationary Auto-Tuning 1, 2). The motor no-load current listed in the motor test report can also be entered to E2-03 manually. Contact the motor manufacturer to receive a copy of the motor test report.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E2-03 Motor No-Load Current 0 to [E2-01] Determined by o2-04 Note: The display resolution depends on the rated output power of the drive. Models CIMR-L20008 to 20033 and 40005 to 40018 display values in 0.01 A units, while models CIMR-L20047 to 20415 and 40024 to 40216 display values in 0.1 A units. E2-04: Number of Motor Poles
Set the number of motor poles to E2-04. If Auto-Tuning completes successfully, the value entered to T1-06 will automatically be saved to E2-04.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E2-04 Number of Motor Poles 2 to 48 4 E2-05: Motor Line-to-Line Resistance
Sets the line-to-line resistance of the motor stator winding. If Auto-Tuning completes successfully, this value is automatically calculated. Enter this value as line-to-line and not for each motor phase. If Auto-Tuning is not possible, contact the motor manufacturer to find out the line-to-line resistance or measure it manually. When using the manufacturer motor test report, calculate E2-05 by one of the formulas below:
• E-type insulation: Multiply 0.92 times the resistance value (Ω) listed on the test report at 75°C. • B-type insulation: Multiply 0.92 times the resistance value (Ω) listed on the test report at 75°C. • F-type insulation: Multiply 0.87 times the resistance value (Ω) listed on the test report at 115°C.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E2-05 Motor Line-to-Line Resistance 0.000 to 65.000 Ω Determined by o2-04 E2-06: Motor Leakage Inductance Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of motor rated voltage. This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning (Rotational Auto-Tuning, Stationary Auto-Tuning 1, 2).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance 0.0 to 40.0% Determined by o2-04 E2-07: Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 1 Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of the magnetic flux. If Rotational Auto-Tuning completes successfully, then this value is automatically calculated and set to E2-07. This coefficient is used when operating with constant output.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E2-07 Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 1 0.00 to 0.50 0.50 E2-08: Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 2 Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of the magnetic flux. If Rotational Auto-Tuning completes successfully, then this value is automatically and set to E2-08. This coefficient is used when operating with constant output.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E2-08 Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 2 E2-07 to 0.75 0.75
178 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E2-03 | Motor No-Load Current | 0 to [E2-01] | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E2-04 | Number of Motor Poles | 2 to 48 | 4 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E2-05 | Motor Line-to-Line Resistance | 0.000 to 65.000 Ω | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E2-06 | Motor Leakage Inductance | 0.0 to 40.0% | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E2-07 | Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 1 | 0.00 to 0.50 | 0.50 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E2-08 | Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 2 | E2-07 to 0.75 | 0.75 |
Source page
Page 179
5.5 E: Motor Parameters
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 179 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 179 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 E2-09: Motor Mechanical Loss There is normally no need to change this parameter from the default value. This parameter sets to the motor mechanical loss as a percentage of motor rated power (kW) capacity. Adjust this setting when there is a large amount of torque loss due to motor bearing friction. The setting for the mechanical loss is added to the torque. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E2-09 Motor Mechanical Loss 0.0 to 10.0% 0.0% E2-10: Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Sets the motor iron loss in watts. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E2-10 Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation 0 to 65535 W Determined by o2-04 E2-11: Motor Rated Power Sets the motor rated power in kW. If Auto-Tuning completes successfully, the value entered to T1-02 will automatically be saved to E2-11. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E2-11 Motor Rated Power 0.00 to 650.00 kW Determined by o2-04 Setting Motor Parameters Manually Follow the instructions below when setting motor-related parameters manually instead of Auto-Tuning. Refer to the motor test report included with the motor to ensure the correct data is entered into the drive. Setting the Motor Rated Current Enter the motor rated current listed on the nameplate of the motor to E2-01. Setting the Motor Rated Slip Calculate the motor rated slip using the base speed listed on the motor nameplate. Refer to the formula below, then enter that value to E2-02. Motor rated slip = rated frequency [Hz] -base speed [r/min] × (no. of motor poles) / 120 Setting the No-Load Current Enter the no-load current at rated frequency and rated voltage to E2-03. The no-load current is not usually listed on the nameplate. Contact the motor manufacturer if the data cannot be found. The default setting of the no-load current is for performance with a 4-pole Yaskawa motor. Setting the Number of Motor Poles Only required in V/f Control with PG and Closed Loop Vector Control. Enter the number of motor poles as indicated on motor nameplate. Setting the Line-to-Line Resistance 5 E2-05 is normally set during Auto-Tuning. If Auto-Tuning cannot be performed, contact the motor manufacturer to determine the correct resistance between motor lines. The motor test report can also be used to calculate this value using the formulas below: • E-type insulation: Multiply 0.92 times the resistance value (Ω) listed on the test report at 75°C. • B-type insulation: Multiply 0.92 times the resistance value (Ω) listed on the test report at 75°C. • F-type insulation: Multiply 0.87 times the resistance value (Ω) listed on the test report at 115°C. Setting the Motor Leakage Inductance The motor leakage inductance set to E2-06 determines the amount of voltage drop relative to the motor rated voltage. Enter this value for motors with a low degree of inductance, such as high-speed motors. This information is usually not listed on the motor nameplate. Contact the motor manufacturer if the data cannot be found. Setting the Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 1, 2 E2-07 and E2-08 are set when Auto-Tuning is performed.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E2-09 | Motor Mechanical Loss | 0.0 to 10.0% | 0.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E2-10 | Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation | 0 to 65535 W | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E2-11 | Motor Rated Power | 0.00 to 650.00 kW | Determined by o2-04 |
Source page
Page 180
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 180 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.5 E: Motor Parameters
Setting the Motor Mechanical Loss Only required in Closed Loop Vector Control. The drive compensates for the degree of mechanical loss with torque compensation. Although E2-09 rarely needs to be changed, adjustment may benefit when there is a large amount of torque loss due to motor bearing friction.
Setting the Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Only required when using V/f Control. Enter this value in watts to E2-10. The drive uses this setting to improve the precision of torque compensation.
E3: V/f Pattern for Motor 2
These parameters set the V/f pattern used for motor 2. Refer to Setting 16: Motor 2 selection on page 193 for details on switching motors. Note: The function for switching between two motors cannot be used with a PM motor. E3- parameters are hidden when a PM motor control mode is selected (A1-02 = 7). E3-04 to E3-10
Parameters E3-04 through E3-10 set up the V/f pattern used for motor 2 as shown in Figure 5.14. Note: Certain E3- parameters might not be visible depending on the control mode. Refer to Parameter Table on page 354 for details.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E3-04<1> Motor 2 Max Output Frequency 10.0 to 200.0 Hz 50.0 Hz E3-05<1> Motor 2 Max Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 <2> 190.0 V<2> E3-06<1> Motor 2 Base Frequency 0.0 to 200.0 Hz 50.0 Hz E3-07<1> Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency 0.0 to 200.0 Hz 3.0 Hz E3-08<1> Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 <2> <2><3> E3-09<1> Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency 0.0 to 200.0 Hz 0.5 Hz E3-10<1> Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage 0.0 to 255.0 <2> <2><3> <1> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7012 or later. <2> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double the value when using a 400 V class drive. <3> Default setting value is dependent on the drive model (o2-04). Figure5.14 Output (V) E3-05
E3-08 common_TMonly E3-10 E3-09 E3-07 E3-04 Frequency (Hz) Figure 5.14 V/f Pattern for Motor 2 Note: 1. The following conditions must be true when setting up the V/f pattern: E3-09 ≤ E3-07 < E3-06 ≤ E3-04 2. To make the V/f pattern a straight line at a frequency lower than E3-07, set E3-09 equal to E3-07. In this case the E3-08 setting is disregarded. 3. Parameters E3-04 through E3-10 are reset to their default values when the drive is initialized.
180 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E3-04<1> | Motor 2 Max Output Frequency | 10.0 to 200.0 Hz | 50.0 Hz |
| E3-05<1> | Motor 2 Max Voltage | 0.0 to 255.0 <2> | 190.0 V<2> |
| E3-06<1> | Motor 2 Base Frequency | 0.0 to 200.0 Hz | 50.0 Hz |
| E3-07<1> | Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency | 0.0 to 200.0 Hz | 3.0 Hz |
| E3-08<1> | Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage | 0.0 to 255.0 <2> | <2><3> |
| E3-09<1> | Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency | 0.0 to 200.0 Hz | 0.5 Hz |
| E3-10<1> | Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage | 0.0 to 255.0 <2> | <2><3> |
Source page
Page 181
5.5 E: Motor Parameters
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 181 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 181 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 E4: Motor 2 Parameters E4 parameters contain the motor data for motor 2. These parameters are usually set automatically during the Auto-Tuning process for vector control modes (Rotational Auto-Tuning, Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 and 2). If Auto-Tuning cannot be performed, refer to Auto-Tuning Fault Detection on page 287 for additional details. Note: The function for switching between two motors cannot be used with a PM motor. E4- parameters are hidden when a PM motor control mode is selected (A1-02 = 7). E4-01: Motor 2 Rated Current Protects the motor and calculates torque limits. Set E4-01 to the full load amps (FLA) stamped on the nameplate of motor 2. If Auto-Tuning completes successfully, the value entered to T1-04 will automatically be saved to E4-01. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E4-01 Motor 2 Rated Current 10 to 200% of the drive rated current. Determined by o2-04 Note: 1. The display resolution depends on the rated output power of the drive. Models CIMR-L20008 to 20033 and 40005 to 40018 display values in 0.01 A units, while models CIMR-L20047 to 20415 and 40024 to 40216 display values in 0.1 A units. 2. An oPE02 error will occur if the motor rated current in E4-01 is set lower than the motor no-load current in E4-03. Set E4-03 correctly to prevent this error. E4-02: Motor 2 Rated Slip Sets the motor 2 rated slip frequency and is the basis for slip compensation value. The drive calculates this value automatically during Auto-Tuning (Rotational Auto-Tuning and Stationary Auto-Tuning 1, 2). Refer to E2-02: Motor Rated Slip on page 177 for information on calculating the motor rated slip. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E4-02 Motor 2 Rated Slip 0.00 to 20.00 Hz Determined by o2-04 E4-03: Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current Sets the no-load current for motor 2 in amperes when operating at the rated frequency and the no-load voltage. The drive sets E2-03 during the Auto-Tuning process (Rotational Auto-Tuning and Stationary Auto-Tuning 1, 2). The motor no-load current listed in the motor test report can also be entered to E2-03 manually. Contact the motor manufacturer for a copy of the motor test report. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E4-03 Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current 0 to [E4-01] Determined by o2-04 Note: The display resolution depends on the rated output power of the drive. Models CIMR-L20008 to 20033 and 40005 to 40018 display values in 0.01 A units, while models CIMR-L20047 to 20415 and 40024 to 40216 display values in 0.1 A units. E4-04: Motor 2 Motor Poles Sets the number of poles for motor 2. If Auto-Tuning completes successfully, the value entered to T1-06 will be 5 automatically saved to E4-04. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E4-04 Motor 2 Motor Poles 2 to 48 4 E4-05: Motor 2 Line-to-Line Resistance Sets the line-to-line resistance for the motor 2 stator winding. If Auto-Tuning completes successfully, this value is automatically calculated. Enter this value as line-to-line and not for each motor phase. Refer to E2-05: Motor Line-to-Line Resistance on page 178 to manually enter this parameter setting. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E4-05 Motor 2 Line-to-Line Resistance 0.000 to 65.000 Ω Determined by o2-04
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E4-01 | Motor 2 Rated Current | 10 to 200% of the drive rated current. | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E4-02 | Motor 2 Rated Slip | 0.00 to 20.00 Hz | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E4-03 | Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current | 0 to [E4-01] | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E4-04 | Motor 2 Motor Poles | 2 to 48 | 4 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E4-05 | Motor 2 Line-to-Line Resistance | 0.000 to 65.000 Ω | Determined by o2-04 |
Source page
Page 182
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 182 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.5 E: Motor Parameters
E4-06: Motor 2 Leakage Inductance Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of rated voltage of motor 2. This value is automatically set during Auto-Tuning (Rotational Auto-Tuning and Stationary Auto-Tuning 1, 2).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E4-06 Motor 2 Leakage Inductance 0.0 to 40.0% Determined by o2-04 E5: PM Motor Settings
These parameters set the motor data of a PM motor.
For PM motors, Auto-Tuning can be performed. If motor data is known, it can also be entered manually. Note: 1. E5- parameters are visible only when a PM motor control mode is selected (A1-02 = 7). 2. E5- parameters are not reset when the drive is initialized using parameter A1-03. E5-02: Motor Rated Power
Sets the rated power of the motor. Determined by the value set to T2-04 during the Auto-Tuning process.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E5-02 Motor Rated Power 0.10 to 650.00 kW Determined by o2-04 E5-03: Motor Rated Current
Sets the motor rated current in amps. Automatically set when the value is entered to T2-06 during Auto-Tuning.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E5-03 Motor Rated Current 10 to 200% of drive rated current Determined by o2-04 Note: The display resolution depends on the rated output power of the drive. Models CIMR-L20008 to 20033 and 40005 to 40018 display values in 0.01 A units, while models CIMR-L20047 to 20415 and 40024 to 40216 display values in 0.1 A units.
E5-04: Number of Motor Poles Sets the number of motor poles. This value is set automatically during Auto-Tuning when the setting of T2-08 is entered.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E5-04 Number of Motor Poles 2 to 120<1> 12 <1> When PG-E3 option connected: Max setting = 48
E5-05: Motor Stator Resistance (Single Phase) Sets the resistance for one motor phase. Do not enter the line-to-line resistance into E5-05 when measuring the resistance manually.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E5-05 Motor Stator Resistance (Single Phase) 0.000 to 65.000 Ω Determined by o2-04
E5-06: Motor d-Axis Inductance Sets the d-Axis inductance in 0.01 mH units. This parameter is set during the Auto-Tuning process.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E5-06 Motor d-Axis Inductance 0.00 to 600.00 mH Determined by o2-04
E5-07: Motor q-Axis Inductance Sets the q-Axis inductance in 0.01 mH units. This parameter is set during the Auto-Tuning process.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E5-07 Motor q-Axis Inductance 0.00 to 600.00 mH Determined by o2-04
182 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E4-06 | Motor 2 Leakage Inductance | 0.0 to 40.0% | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E5-02 | Motor Rated Power | 0.10 to 650.00 kW | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E5-03 | Motor Rated Current | 10 to 200% of drive rated current | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E5-04 | Number of Motor Poles | 2 to 120<1> | 12 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E5-05 | Motor Stator Resistance (Single Phase) | 0.000 to 65.000 Ω | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E5-06 | Motor d-Axis Inductance | 0.00 to 600.00 mH | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E5-07 | Motor q-Axis Inductance | 0.00 to 600.00 mH | Determined by o2-04 |
Source page
Page 183
5.5 E: Motor Parameters
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 183 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 183 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 E5-09: Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 Sets the induced peak voltage per phase in units of 0.1 mV/(rad/s) [electrical angle]. This data can be obtained from either the motor nameplate or from the motor test report issued by the manufacturer of the motor. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 0.0 to 6500.0 mV/(rad/s) Determined by o2-04 Note: 1. Set E5-24 to 0 when setting E5-09. However, setting both E5-09 and E5-24 to 0.0 will trigger oPE08. oPE08 will also be triggered if neither E5-09 nor E5-24 are set to 0.0. 2. This parameter is not reset when the drive is initialized using parameter A1-03. E5-11: Encoder Offset Sets the offset between the rotor magnetic axis and the Z-pulse of the encoder connected. This parameter is set during Auto-Tuning for PM motors and during Encoder Offset Tuning. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E5-11 Encoder Offset -180.0 to 180.0 deg 0.0 deg E5-24: Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2 Sets the induced phase-to-phase rms voltage in units of 0.1 mV/(r/min) [mechanical angle]. This data can be obtained from either the motor nameplate or from the motor test report issued by the manufacturer of the motor. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default E5-24 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2 0.0 to 6500.0 mV/(r/min) 0.0 mV/(r/min) Note: 1. Set E5-09 to 0.0 when setting E5-24. However, setting both E5-09 and E5-24 to 0.0 will trigger oPE08. oPE08 will also be triggered if neither E5-09 nor E5-24 are set to 0.0. 2. This parameter is not reset when the drive is initialized using parameter A1-03. 5
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E5-09 | Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 | 0.0 to 6500.0 mV/(rad/s) | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E5-11 | Encoder Offset | -180.0 to 180.0 deg | 0.0 deg |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| E5-24 | Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2 | 0.0 to 6500.0 mV/(r/min) | 0.0 mV/(r/min) |
Source page
Page 184
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 184 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.6 F: Option Settings
5.6 F: Option Settings
F1: Encoder/PG Feedback Settings The F1 parameters are used to set the drive up for operation using a motor encoder option card. Note that all speed feedback option cards must be connected to the CN5-C port.
F1-01: Encoder 1 Resolution
Sets the encoder resolution.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1-01 Encoder 1 Resolution 1 to 60000 ppr<1> Determined by A1-02 <1> In CLV/PM mode, the maximum setting is 15000 ppr. F1-02, F1-14: PG Open (PGo) Circuit Operation Selection, Detection Time
A PGo fault is triggered if the drive receives no pulse signal for longer than the time set in F1-14. Set the stopping method for a PGo fault in parameter F1-02.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1-02 Operation Selection at PG Open Circuit (PGo) 0 to 3 1 F1-14 PG Open-Circuit Detection Time 0.0 to 10.0 s 2.0 s Parameter F1-02 Settings: Setting 0: Ramp to stop (uses the deceleration ramp set to C1-02) Setting 1: Coast to stop Setting 2: Emergency Stop (uses the Emergency Stop ramp set to C1-09) Setting 3: Alarm only Note: Due to potential damage to motor and machinery, the “Alarm only” setting should be used only under special circumstances. F1-03, F1-08, F1-09: Overspeed (oS) Operation Selection, Detection Level, Delay Time
An oS fault is triggered when the speed feedback exceeds the value set in F1-08 for longer than the time set in F1-09. Set the stopping method for an oS fault in parameter F1-03.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1-03 Operation Selection at Overspeed (oS) 0 to 3 1 F1-08 Overspeed Detection Level 0 to 120% 115% F1-09 Overspeed Detection Delay Time 0.0 to 2.0 s 0.0 s Parameter F1-03 Settings: Setting 0: Ramp to stop (uses the deceleration ramp set to C1-02) Setting 1: Coast to stop Setting 2: Fast Stop (uses the Fast Stop ramp set to C1-09) Setting 3: Alarm only Note: Due to potential damage to motor and machinery, refrain from using the “Alarm only” setting except under special circumstances.
184 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F1-01 | Encoder 1 Resolution | 1 to 60000 ppr<1> | Determined by A1-02 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F1-02 | Operation Selection at PG Open Circuit (PGo) | 0 to 3 | 1 |
| F1-14 | PG Open-Circuit Detection Time | 0.0 to 10.0 s | 2.0 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F1-03 | Operation Selection at Overspeed (oS) | 0 to 3 | 1 |
| F1-08 | Overspeed Detection Level | 0 to 120% | 115% |
| F1-09 | Overspeed Detection Delay Time | 0.0 to 2.0 s | 0.0 s |
Source page
Page 185
5.6 F: Option Settings
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 185 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 185 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 F1-04, F1-10, F1-11: Operation at Speed Deviation (dEv), Detection Level, Delay Time A speed deviation error (dEv) is triggered when the difference between the speed reference and the speed feedback exceeds the value set in F1-10 for longer than the time set in F1-11. The stopping method when a speed deviation fault occurs can be selected in parameter F1-04. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1-04 Operation Selection at Deviation 0 to 3 3 F1-10 Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Level 0 to 50% 10% F1-11 Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Delay Time 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.5 s Settings for Parameter F1-04: Setting 0: Ramp to stop (uses the deceleration ramp set to C1-02) Setting 1: Coast to stop Setting 2: Emergency Stop (uses the Emergency Stop ramp set to C1-09) Setting 3: Alarm only (drive continues operating while “dEv” flashes on the screen) F1-05: Encoder 1 Rotation Direction Selection Determines the direction indicated by the motor encoder signal. Refer to PG Encoder Setup on page 95 for details on how to set the direction for the encoder and the motor. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default 0 F1-05 Encoder 1 Rotation Direction Selection 0 or 1 <1> <1> Determined by the control mode: 0 when A1-02 = 3, 1 when A1-02 = 7. Setting 0: Phase A leads phase B with an Up command. Setting 1: Phase B leads phase A with an Up command. F1-06: PG1 Pulse Monitor Output Division Ratio Sets the ratio between the pulse input and the pulse output of a speed feedback option card as a three digit number, where the first digit (n) sets the numerator and the second and third digit (m) set the denominator as shown below: (1 + n) f = f common_TMonly Pulse Input Pulse Output m Example: To have a ratio of 1/32 between the speed feedback option card pulse input and output, set F1-06 = 032. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1-06 PG1 Pulse Monitor Output Division Ratio 001 to 032, 102 to 132 (1 to 3 1 2 ) 1 F1-18: dv3 Detection Selection (CLV/PM) Sets the number of times the drive will detect a dv3 situation before triggering a dv3 fault. The drive detects a dv3 condition when the torque reference and speed reference are in opposite directions while the difference between the actual motor speed and the speed reference is greater than 30%. Setting F1-18 to 0 disables dv3 detection. 5 No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1-18 dv3 Detection Selection 0 to 10 10 Note: A common cause for a dv3 fault is the incorrect setting of E5-11. Make sure the correct encoder offset has been entered to E5-11. F1-19: dv4 Detection Selection (CLV/PM) Sets the number of pulses necessary to trigger a dv4 fault when there is a motor speed deviation opposite to the frequency reference. Setting F1-19 to 0 disables dv4 detection. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1-19 dv4 Detection Selection 0 to 5000 128 Note: A common cause for a dv4 fault is the incorrect setting of E5-11. Make sure the correct encoder offset is set to E5-11.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F1-04 | Operation Selection at Deviation | 0 to 3 | 3 |
| F1-10 | Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Level | 0 to 50% | 10% |
| F1-11 | Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Delay Time | 0.0 to 10.0 s | 0.5 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F1-05 | Encoder 1 Rotation Direction Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 <1> |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F1-06 | PG1 Pulse Monitor Output Division Ratio | 1 001 to 032, 102 to 132 (1 to ) 32 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F1-18 | dv3 Detection Selection | 0 to 10 | 10 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F1-19 | dv4 Detection Selection | 0 to 5000 | 128 |
Source page
Page 186
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 186 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.6 F: Option Settings
F1-20: PG Option Card Disconnect Detection 1 Sets whether the drive detects a fault when a speed feedback card is disconnected.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1-20 PG Option Card Disconnect Detect 1 0 or 1 1 Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled F1-29: dEv Detection Condition Selection
Selects when dEv error detection is active.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1-29 dEv Detection Condition Selection 0 to 2 2 Setting 0: After speed reference, SFS output and motor speed have matched once. Setting 1: After speed reference, SFS output have matched once.
Setting 2: Always during Run. Figure5.15 Speed common_ Soft Starter Output and Calculating the Speed Reference TMonly Speed reference B C Motor speed A : Setting 2 B : Setting 1 Time C : Setting 0 A Figure 5.15 Speed Deviation Detection Conditions Flowchart F1-50: Encoder Selection Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7016 or later. Sets up the type of encoder connected to a PG-F3 option card. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1-50 Encoder Selection 0 to 2 0 Setting 0: EnDat 2.1/01, 2.2/01 Serial Communications operation + Sin/Cos Setting 1: EnDat 2.2/22 Serial Communications operation Setting 2: HIPERFACE The use of EnDat2.2/22 encoders requires a PG-F3 option with software version 0102 or later. The use of HIPERFACE encoders requires a PG-F3 option with software version 0104 or later. To identify the PG-F3 software version refer to the PG-F3 labeling in the field designated “C/N” (S + four digit number).
F1-51: PGoH Detection Level Sets the level for detecting PG Hardware Fault (PGoH).
Usually the relation between the sin and cos track is sin2θ + cos2θ = 1. If the value of the square root falls below the level set in F1-51, a speed feedback hardware fault is detected. Available when F1-20 = 1.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1-51 PGoH Detection Level 1 to 100% 80%
186 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F1-20 | PG Option Card Disconnect Detect 1 | 0 or 1 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F1-29 | dEv Detection Condition Selection | 0 to 2 | 2 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F1-50 | Encoder Selection | 0 to 2 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F1-51 | PGoH Detection Level | 1 to 100% | 80% |
Source page
Page 187
5.6 F: Option Settings
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 187 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 187 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 F1-52: Communication Speed of Serial Encoder Selection Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7016 or later. Selects the speed for serial communication between a PG-F3 option card and serial encoder. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1-52 Communication Speed of Serial Encoder Selection 0 to 3 0 Setting 0: 1M bps / 9600 bps (EnDat 2.2/22 / HIPERFACE) Setting 1: 500k bps / 19200 bps (EnDat 2.2/22 / HIPERFACE) Setting 2: 1M bps / 38400 bps (EnDat 2.2/22 / HIPERFACE) Setting 3: 1M bps / 38400 bps (EnDat 2.2/22 / HIPERFACE) F1-63: PG-E3 R Track Selection Enables or disables the R phase when a PG-E3 option card is used. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1-63 PG-E3 R Track Selection 0, 1 0 Setting 0: Disabled The R track is not used. The rotor magnet position is calculated from the C and D track signal only. Setting 1: Enabled The R track signals are used to determine the rotor magnet position. F1-66 to F1-81: Encoder Adjust 1 to 16 Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. Sets encoder offsets 1 to 16 for the PG-E3 option card. These parameters are automatically set by the execution of Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F1-66 to F1-81 Encoder Adjust 1 to 16 0 to FF 0 F3: Digital Input Card Settings These parameters set up the drive for operation with the option card DI-A3. Refer to the instruction manual packaged with the option card for specific details on installation, wiring, input signal level selection, and parameter setup. F3-01: DI-A3 Option Card Input Selection Determines the type of input for digital option card DI-A3 when o1-03 is set to 0 or 1. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F3-01 DI-A3 Option Card Input Selection 0 to 7 0 Setting 0: BCD, 1% units 5 Setting 1: BCD, 0.1% units Setting 2: BCD, 0.01% units Setting 3: BCD, 1 Hz units Setting 4: BCD, 0.1 Hz units Setting 5: BCD, 0.01 Hz units Setting 6: BCD, special setting (5 digit input), 0.02 Hz units Setting 7: Binary The unit and the setting range are determined by F3-03. F3-03 = 0: 255/100% (-255 to +255) F3-03 = 1: 4095/100% (-4095 to +4095) F3-03 = 2: 30000/100% (-33000 to +33000) Note: BCD input when o1-03 = 2 or 3. Units are determined by o1-03.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F1-52 | Communication Speed of Serial Encoder Selection | 0 to 3 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F1-63 | PG-E3 R Track Selection | 0, 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F1-66 to F1-81 | Encoder Adjust 1 to 16 | 0 to FFFF | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F3-01 | DI-A3 Option Card Input Selection | 0 to 7 | 0 |
Source page
Page 188
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 188 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.6 F: Option Settings
F3-03: DI-A3 Option Card Data Length Selection
Determines the number of bits for the option card input that sets the speed reference.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F3-03 DI-A3 Option Card Data Length Selection 0 to 2 2 Setting 0: 8 bit Setting 1: 12 bit Setting 2: 16 bit
F4: Analog Monitor Card Settings
These parameters set up the drive for operation with the analog output option card AO-A3. Refer to the instruction manual packaged with the option card for specific details on installation, wiring, input signal level selection, and parameter setup.
F4-01, F4-03: Terminal V1, V2 Function Selection Selects the data to output from analog terminal V1. Enter the final three digits of U- to determine which monitor data is output from the option card. Some monitors are only available in certain control modes.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F4-01 Terminal V1 Function Selection 000 to 999 102 F4-03 Terminal V2 Function Selection 000 to 999 103 F4-02, F4-04, F4-05, F4-06: Terminal V1, V2 Gain and Bias Parameters F4-02 and F4-04 determine the gain, while parameters F4-05 and F4-06 set the bias. These parameters are set as a percentage of the output signal from V1 and V2 where 100% equals 10 V output. The terminal output voltage is limited to 10 V.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F4-02 Terminal V1 Gain -999.9 to 999.9% 100.0% F4-04 Terminal V2 Gain -999.9 to 999.9% 50.0% F4-05 Terminal V1 Bias -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0% F4-06 Terminal V2 Bias -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0% Using Gain and Bias to Adjust Output Signal Level The output signal is adjustable while the drive is stopped.
Terminal V1 1. View the value set to F4-02 (Terminal V1 Monitor Gain) on the digital operator. A voltage equal to 100% of the parameter being set in F4-01 is output at terminal V1. 2. Adjust F4-02 while viewing the monitor connected to the terminal V1. 3. View the value set to F4-05 on the digital operator. Terminal V1 outputs a voltage equal to 0% of the monitor selected by the setting value of F4-01. 4. Adjust F4-05 while viewing the output signal on the terminal V1. Terminal V2
1. View the value set to F4-02 (Terminal V2 Monitor Gain) on the digital operator. A voltage equal to 100% of the parameter being viewed in F4-03 is output at terminal V2. 2. Adjust F4-04 while viewing the monitor connected to the terminal V2. 3. View the value set to F4-06 on the digital operator. Terminal V2 will output a voltage equal to 0% of the monitor selected by the setting value of F4-03. 4. Adjust F4-06 while viewing the output signal on the terminal V2.
188 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F3-03 | DI-A3 Option Card Data Length Selection | 0 to 2 | 2 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F4-01 | Terminal V1 Function Selection | 000 to 999 | 102 |
| F4-03 | Terminal V2 Function Selection | 000 to 999 | 103 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F4-02 | Terminal V1 Gain | -999.9 to 999.9% | 100.0% |
| F4-04 | Terminal V2 Gain | -999.9 to 999.9% | 50.0% |
| F4-05 | Terminal V1 Bias | -999.9 to 999.9% | 0.0% |
| F4-06 | Terminal V2 Bias | -999.9 to 999.9% | 0.0% |
Source page
Page 189
5.6 F: Option Settings
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 189 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 189 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 F4-07, F4-08: Terminal V1, V2 Signal Level Selection Sets the output signal level for terminals V1 and V2. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F4-07 Terminal V1 Signal Level Selection 0, 1 1 F4-08 Terminal V2 Signal Level Selection 0, 1 1 Setting 0: 0 to 10 V Setting 1: -10 to 10 V F5: Digital Output Card Settings These parameters set up the drive for operation with the digital output option card DO-A3. Refer to the instruction manual packaged with the option card for specific details on installation, wiring, input signal level selection, and parameter setup. F5-01 through F5-08: Digital Output Option Card Terminal Function Selection When F5-09 = 2, the parameters listed in the table below are used to assign functions to the output terminals on the option card. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F5-01 Terminal P1-C1 Output Selection 0 to 161 0: During run F5-02 Terminal P2-C2 Output Selection 0 to 161 1: Zero speed F5-03 Terminal P3-C3 Output Selection 0 to 161 2: Speed agree 1 F5-04 Terminal P4-C4 Output Selection 0 to 161 4: Speed detection 1 F5-05 Terminal P5-C5 Output Selection 0 to 161 6: Drive ready (READY) F5-06 Terminal P6-C6 Output Selection 0 to 161 37: During frequency output F5-07 Terminal M1-M2 Output Selection 0 to 161 F: Not used F5-08 Terminal M3-M4 Output Selection 0 to 161 F: Not used F5-09: DO-A3 Output Mode Selection Determines how the DO-A3 option card works with the drive. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F5-09 DO-A3 Output Mode Selection 0 to 2 0 Setting 0: Separate output functions for each of 8 terminals Setting 1: Binary output Setting 2: Output functions assigned by F5-01 through F5-08 F6: Communication Option Card These parameters configure communication option cards and communication fault detection methods. F6-01: Operation Selection after Communications Error 5 Determines drive operation when a communication error occurs. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F6-01 Operation Selection after Communications Error 0 to 3 1 Setting 0: Ramp to stop (uses the deceleration ramp set to C1-02) Setting 1: Coast to stop Setting 2: Emergency Stop (uses the Emergency Stop ramp set to C1-09) Setting 3: Alarm only (continue operation)
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F4-07 | Terminal V1 Signal Level Selection | 0, 1 | 1 |
| F4-08 | Terminal V2 Signal Level Selection | 0, 1 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F5-01 | Terminal P1-C1 Output Selection | 0 to 161 | 0: During run |
| F5-02 | Terminal P2-C2 Output Selection | 0 to 161 | 1: Zero speed |
| F5-03 | Terminal P3-C3 Output Selection | 0 to 161 | 2: Speed agree 1 |
| F5-04 | Terminal P4-C4 Output Selection | 0 to 161 | 4: Speed detection 1 |
| F5-05 | Terminal P5-C5 Output Selection | 0 to 161 | 6: Drive ready (READY) |
| F5-06 | Terminal P6-C6 Output Selection | 0 to 161 | 37: During frequency output |
| F5-07 | Terminal M1-M2 Output Selection | 0 to 161 | F: Not used |
| F5-08 | Terminal M3-M4 Output Selection | 0 to 161 | F: Not used |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F5-09 | DO-A3 Output Mode Selection | 0 to 2 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F6-01 | Operation Selection after Communications Error | 0 to 3 | 1 |
Source page
Page 190
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 190 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.6 F: Option Settings
F6-02: External Fault from Communication Option Detection Selection
Determines the detection method of an external fault (EF0) initiated by a communication option card.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F6-02 External Fault from Communication Option Detection Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: Always detected Setting 1: Detection during run only
F6-03: External Fault from Communication Option Operation Selection Determines drive operation when an external fault is initiated by a communication option (EF0).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F6-03 External Fault from Communication Option Operation Selection 0 to 3 1 Setting 0: Ramp to stop (uses the deceleration ramp set to C1-02) Setting 1: Coast to stop Setting 2: Emergency Stop (uses the Emergency Stop ramp set to C1-09) Setting 3: Alarm only (continue operation) F6-04: bUS Error Detection Time
Sets the delay time for bUS error detection.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F6-04 bUS Error Detection Time 0.0 to 5.0 s 2.0 s
F6-06: Torque Limit Selection from Communications Option Selects whether torque limit values are assigned to the drive from the network.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F6-06 Torque Limit Selection from Communications Option 0, 1 0 Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled F6-08: Reset Communication Parameters
Determines whether F6- communication-related parameters are reset after initialization.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default F6-08 Reset Communication Parameters 0, 1 0 Setting 0: Do not reset parameters F6- when the drive is initialized with A1-03 Setting 1: Reset F6- when the drive is initialized with A1-03 Note: F6-08 is not reset when the drive is initialized.
CANopen Parameters
Parameters F6-35 and F6-36 set up the drive to operate on a CANopen network. Refer to the Yaskawa AC Drive Option CANopen Installation Manual and Technical Manual for details on parameter settings.
190 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F6-02 | External Fault from Communication Option Detection Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F6-03 | External Fault from Communication Option Operation Selection | 0 to 3 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F6-04 | bUS Error Detection Time | 0.0 to 5.0 s | 2.0 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F6-06 | Torque Limit Selection from Communications Option | 0, 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| F6-08 | Reset Communication Parameters | 0, 1 | 0 |
Source page
Page 191
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 191 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 191 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 5.7 H: Terminal Functions H parameters are used to assign functions to the external terminals. H1: Multi-Function Digital Inputs NOTICE: Always turn off the RUN command before changing the setting of parameters d1-18 (Speed Reference Selection Mode), b1-01 (Speed Reference Selection), or H1- (Multi-Function Digital Inputs). If the RUN command is on when changing any of these settings, the motor may unexpectedly start running, and could result in injury. H1-03 to H1-08: Functions for Terminals S3 to S8 These parameters assign functions to the multi-function digital inputs. The various functions and their settings are listed in Table 5.9. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H1-03 Terminal S3 Function Selection 3 to 79 H1-04 Terminal S4 Function Selection 3 to 79 H1-05 Terminal S5 Function Selection 3 to 79 Determined by d1-18<1> H1-06 Terminal S6 Function Selection 3 to 79 H1-07 Terminal S7 Function Selection 3 to 79 H1-08 Terminal S8 Function Selection 3 to 79 F: Through Mode <1> With the speed reference priority d1-18 is set to 0 or 3, the default settings for parameters H1-03 to H1-07 governing input terminals S3 to S7 are: 24, 14, 3, 4, and 5 respectively. When d1-18 is set to 1 or 2, the default settings for H1-03 to H1-07 become 50, 54, 51, 53, and F respectively. Table 5.9 Multi-Function Digital Input Terminal Settings Setting Function Page Setting Function Page 3 Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 50 Nominal Speed 194 4 Multi-Step Speed Reference 2 191 51 Intermediate Speed 194 5 Multi-Step Speed Reference 3 52 Releveling Speed 194 6 Jog reference selection 191 53 Leveling Speed 194 7 Accel/decel Ramp Selection 1 192 54 Inspection Operation 194 8 Baseblock Command (N.O.) 55 Rescue Operation 194 192 9 Baseblock Command (N.C.) 56 Motor Contactor Feedback 194 F Not used (Through Mode) 192 57 High Speed Limit Up 194 14 Fault Reset 192 58 High Speed Limit Down 195 15 Emergency Stop (N.O.) 192 5A<1> Motor Contactor Feedback 2 195 16 Motor 2 selection 193 5B<1> Brake Feedback 2 195 17 Emergency Stop (N.C.) 192 5C Stop Distance Correction 195 18 Timer Function Input 193 67 Communications Test Mode 195 1A Accel/decel Ramp Selection 2 193 79 Brake Feedback 195 20 to 2F External Fault 193 - - - <1> Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. Setting 3 to 5: Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 to 3 Switches multi-step speed frequency references d1-01 to d1-08 by digital inputs. Refer to Speed Selection Using Digital Inputs (b1-01 = 0) on page 111 for details. 5 Setting 6: Jog reference selection When the speed reference is not assigned to the input terminals (b1-01 ≠ 1), then the Jog frequency will be activated every time an input terminal set for the Jog frequency reference closes. Note that the speed reference priority selection in d1-18 may disable the Jog frequency. Table 5.10 Speed Reference Priority and Jog Frequency d1-1 S 8 e ( l S ec p t e i e o d n R M e o f d e e re ) nce Jog Frequency 0 Multi-speed references take priority, and the leveling speed in d1-26 is used for the Jog frequency. 1 Jog frequency cannot be used. 2 Jog frequency cannot be used. 3 Multi-speed references take priority, and the leveling speed in d1-26 is used for the Jog frequency.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H1-03 | Terminal S3 Function Selection | 3 to 79 | Determined by d1-18<1> |
| H1-04 | Terminal S4 Function Selection | 3 to 79 | |
| H1-05 | Terminal S5 Function Selection | 3 to 79 | |
| H1-06 | Terminal S6 Function Selection | 3 to 79 | |
| H1-07 | Terminal S7 Function Selection | 3 to 79 | |
| H1-08 | Terminal S8 Function Selection | 3 to 79 | F: Through Mode |
| Setting | Function | Page | Setting | Function | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 3 | Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 | 191 | 50 | Nominal Speed | 194 |
| 4 | Multi-Step Speed Reference 2 | 51 | Intermediate Speed | 194 | |
| 5 | Multi-Step Speed Reference 3 | 52 | Releveling Speed | 194 | |
| 6 | Jog reference selection | 191 | 53 | Leveling Speed | 194 |
| 7 | Accel/decel Ramp Selection 1 | 192 | 54 | Inspection Operation | 194 |
| 8 | Baseblock Command (N.O.) | 192 | 55 | Rescue Operation | 194 |
| 9 | Baseblock Command (N.C.) | 56 | Motor Contactor Feedback | 194 | |
| F | Not used (Through Mode) | 192 | 57 | High Speed Limit Up | 194 |
| 14 | Fault Reset | 192 | 58 | High Speed Limit Down | 195 |
| 15 | Emergency Stop (N.O.) | 192 | 5A<1> | Motor Contactor Feedback 2 | 195 |
| 16 | Motor 2 selection | 193 | 5B<1> | Brake Feedback 2 | 195 |
| 17 | Emergency Stop (N.C.) | 192 | 5C | Stop Distance Correction | 195 |
| 18 | Timer Function Input | 193 | 67 | Communications Test Mode | 195 |
| 1A | Accel/decel Ramp Selection 2 | 193 | 79 | Brake Feedback | 195 |
| 20 to 2F | External Fault | 193 | - | - | - |
| d1-18 (Speed Reference Selection Mode) | Jog Frequency |
|---|---|
| 0 | Multi-speed references take priority, and the leveling speed in d1-26 is used for the Jog frequency. |
| 1 | Jog frequency cannot be used. |
| 2 | Jog frequency cannot be used. |
| 3 | Multi-speed references take priority, and the leveling speed in d1-26 is used for the Jog frequency. |
Source page
Page 192
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 192 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
Setting 7: Accel/decel ramp selection 1 Switches between accel/decel times 1 (C1-01 and C1-02) and 2 (C1-03 and C1-04). Refer to C1-01 to C1-08: Accel, Decel Ramps 1 to 4 on page 163 for details.
Setting 8, 9: Baseblock command When the drive receives a baseblock command, the output transistors stop switching, the motor coasts to stop, and a bb alarm flashes on the digital operator to indicate baseblock.
Note: Remove the Up/Down command prior to resetting a fault. Fault Reset commands are ignored while the Up/Down command is present. Setting 15, 17: Emergency Stop (N.O., N.C.) The Emergency Stop function operates similar to an emergency stop input to the drive. If a Emergency Stop command is input while the drive is running, the drive decelerates to a stop in the deceleration time set to C1-09 (Refer to C1-09: Emergency Stop Ramp on page 164). The drive can only be restarted after bringing the drive to a complete stop, turning off the Emergency Stop input, and switching off the Up/Down command. • To trigger the Emergency Stop function with a N.O. switch, set H1- = 15. • To trigger the Emergency Stop function with a N.C. switch, set H1- = 17.
Figure 5.16 shows an operation example of Emergency Stop. Figure5.16 Up/Down/Stop ON ON
Emergency Stop H1- = 17 ON ON
Decelerates at C1-09 YEG Output Speed TIME Figure 5.16 Emergency Stop Sequence
NOTICE: Rapid deceleration can trigger an overvoltage fault. When faulted, the drive output shuts off, and the motor coasts. To avoid this uncontrolled motor state and to ensure that the motor stops quickly and safely, set an appropriate Emergency Stop time to C1-09.
192 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| DIgital Input Function | Drive Operation | Column |
|---|---|---|
| Input Open | Input Closed | |
| Setting 8 (N.O.) | Baseblock (Interrupt output) | Normal operation |
| Setting 9 (N.C.) | Normal operation | Baseblock (Interrupt output) |
Source page
Page 193
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 193 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 193 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Setting 16: Motor 2 selection The drive has the capability to control two induction motors independently. A second motor may be selected using a multi-function digital input as shown in Figure 5.17. Note: The motor 2 selection function cannot be used when PM motor is used. Figure5.17 Drive M Motor 1 Motor switch input common_ M Motor 2 TMonly Figure 5.17 Motor Selection When switching between motor 1 and motor 2, the parameters used to control those motors also change. Below, Table 5.11 lists the parameters that correspond to each motor. Table 5.11 Parameters for Switching Between Two Motors No. Setting 16 Open (Motor 1) Setting 16 Closed (Motor 2) C1-: Acceleration/Deceleration Time C1-01 to C1-04 C1-12 to C1-13 E E 1 2 - - , , E E 3 4 - - : : V M / o f t P o a r t P te a r r n a meters E1-, E3- E3-, E4- Note: 1. The drive can switch from motor 2 to operate motor 1 in V/f Control based on the speed reference set for motor 2. Refer to Motor Switch Selection on page 175 for details. 2. It is not possible to switch between motor 1 and motor 2 during run. Doing so will trigger the “rUn” alarm. 3. It is not possible to switch between motors when CLV/PM control mode is selected. 4. The motor 2 selection function is available only with OLV control mode (A1-02 = 0). 5. When switching from motor 1 to motor 2, check to make sure that motor 2 is operating. If a digital output is programmed for “Motor 2 selection” (H1-01, H1-02, or H1-03 = 1C), motor will be selected when the output is closed. Setting 18: Timer function input This setting configures a digital input terminal as the input for the timer function. Use this setting combination with the timer function output (H2- = 12). Refer to b4: Delay Timers on page 160 for details. Setting 1A: Accel/decel ramp selection 2 Used to select accel/decel ramps 1 to 4 in combination with the Accel/decel ramp selection 1 command. Refer to C1-01 to C1-08: Accel, Decel Ramps 1 to 4 on page 163 for details. Setting 20 to 2F: External fault The External fault command stops the drive when problems occur with external devices. To use the External fault command, set one of the multi-function digital inputs to any value between 20 to 2F. The digital operator will display EF where is the number of the terminal to which the external fault signal is assigned. For example, if an external fault signal is input to terminal “EF3” will be displayed., 5 Select the value to be set in H1- from a combination of any of the following three conditions: • Signal input level from peripheral devices (N.O., N.C.) • External fault detection method • Operation after external fault detection
| No. | Setting 16 Open (Motor 1) | | Setting 16 Closed (Motor 2) |
|---|---|---|---|
| C1-: Acceleration/Deceleration Time | C1-01 to C1-04 | | C1-12 to C1-13 |
| E1-, E3-: V/f Pattern E2-, E4-: Motor Parameters | E1-, E3- | | E3-, E4- |
Source page
Page 194
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 194 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
The following table shows the relationship between the conditions and the value set to H1-.
Terminal statuses, detection conditions, and stopping methods marked with an “ O ” are applicable to the corresponding settings.
Terminal Status<1> Detection Conditions<2> Stopping Method Setting N.O. N.C. Always Detected Dete R c u t n ed o d n u ly ring Ram ( p fa t u o lt S ) top Coa ( s fa t u to lt ) Stop Emerg (f e a n u c lt y ) Stop (con A ti l n ar u m e r O u n n l n y i ng) 20 O - O - O - - - 21 - O O - O - - - 22 O - - O O - - - 23 - O - O O - - - 24 O - O - - O - - 25 - O O - - O - - 26 O - - O - O - - 27 - O - O - O - - 28 O - O - - - O - 29 - O O - - - O - 2A O - - O - - O - 2B - O - O - - O - 2C O - O - - - - O 2D - O O - - - - O 2E O - - O - - - O 2F - O - O - - - O <1> Determines the terminal status for each fault, i.e., whether the terminal is normally open or normally closed. <2> Determines whether detection for each fault should be enabled only during run or always detected. Setting 50: Nominal speed Closing a terminal set for “Nominal speed” makes the drive run at the speed reference set to d1-19. Conditions change, however, according to the speed selection mode set in d1-18. Refer to Multi-Speed Inputs 1, 2 (d1-18 = 0 or 3) on page 111 for details. Setting 51: Intermediate speed Closing a terminal set for “Intermediate speed” makes the drive run at the speed reference set to d1-20. This setting can also be used in combination with other input terminals set for 50 (Nominal speed) and 52 (Releveling speed) to switch between the speed reference set in d1-21 and d1-22. Conditions change, however, according to the speed selection mode set in d1-18. Refer to Multi-Speed Inputs 1, 2 (d1-18 = 0 or 3) on page 111. for details Setting 52: Releveling speed Closing a terminal set for “Releveling speed” makes the drive run at the speed reference set to d1-23. Conditions change, however, according to the speed selection mode set in d1-18. Refer to Multi-Speed Inputs 1, 2 (d1-18 = 0 or 3) on page 111 for details. Setting 53: Leveling speed Closing a terminal set for “Leveling speed” makes the drive run at the speed reference set to d1-26. Conditions change, however, according to the speed selection mode set in d1-18. Refer to Multi-Speed Inputs 1, 2 (d1-18 = 0 or 3) on page 111 for details.
Setting 54: Inspection operation Causes the drive to operate at the speed reference set in d1-24. To use Inspection Run, this terminal must be close before the Up or Down command is entered. Refer to Inspection Operation on page 115 for details.
Setting 55: Rescue operation Initiates Rescue Operation when the terminal closes. Refer to Rescue Operation on page 121 for details. Setting 56: Motor contactor feedback
The drive monitors this input signal to detect malfunctions with the motor contactor. When the contactor is closed, the terminal is closed. When the contactor is open, the terminal is open. Setting 57: High speed limit up When this input is closed the speed in the up direction will be limited to the leveling speed. No speed limit is applied when the car is going down.
194 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Setting | Terminal Status<1> | Column | Detection Conditions<2> | Column | Stopping Method | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| N.O. | N.C. | Always Detected | Detected during Run only | Ramp to Stop (fault) | Coast to Stop (fault) | Emergency Stop (fault) | Alarm Only (continue running) | |
| 20 | O | - | O | - | O | - | - | - |
| 21 | - | O | O | - | O | - | - | - |
| 22 | O | - | - | O | O | - | - | - |
| 23 | - | O | - | O | O | - | - | - |
| 24 | O | - | O | - | - | O | - | - |
| 25 | - | O | O | - | - | O | - | - |
| 26 | O | - | - | O | - | O | - | - |
| 27 | - | O | - | O | - | O | - | - |
| 28 | O | - | O | - | - | - | O | - |
| 29 | - | O | O | - | - | - | O | - |
| 2A | O | - | - | O | - | - | O | - |
| 2B | - | O | - | O | - | - | O | - |
| 2C | O | - | O | - | - | - | - | O |
| 2D | - | O | O | - | - | - | - | O |
| 2E | O | - | - | O | - | - | - | O |
| 2F | - | O | - | O | - | - | - | O |
Source page
Page 195
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 195 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 195 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Setting 58: High speed limit down When this input is closed the speed in the down direction will be limited to the leveling speed. No speed limit is applied when the car is going up. Setting 5A: Motor Contactor Feedback 2 The drive monitors this input signal to detect malfunctions with the motor contactor. When the contactor is closed, the terminal is open. When the contactor is open, the terminal is closed. Note: Setting 5A is available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. Setting 5B: Brake Feedback 2 The drive confirms brake operation with this input signal when a digital output is enabled (H2- = 50). When the brake is activated, the terminal is closed. When the brake is not activated, the terminal is open. Note: Setting 5B is available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. Setting 5C: Stop Distance Correction When this terminal closes and a direct landing is selected for the stopping method (S5-10 = 1), the drive will stop at the designated floor with greater accuracy. Refer to Stop Distance on page 385 for details. Setting 67: Communication test mode The drive has a built-in function for self-diagnosing serial communications operation. The test involves wiring the send and receive terminals of the RS-485/422 port together. The drive transmits data and then confirms that the communications are received normally. Refer to Self-Diagnostics on page 425 for details on how to use this function. Setting 79: Brake feedback This input allows the drive to monitor the brake operation and issue a fault if the brake status does not match the brake command (digital output set to H2- = 50). H2: Multi-Function Digital Outputs H2-01 to H2-05: Terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P1-C1, and P2-C2 Function Selection The drive has five multi-function output terminals. Table 5.12 lists the functions available for these terminals using H2-01 through H2-05. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H2-01 Terminals M1-M2 Function Selection 0 to 161 50: Brake control H2-02 Terminals M3-M4 Function Selection 0 to 161 51: Output control contactor H2-03 Terminals M5-M6 Function Selection 0 to 161 6: Drive ready H2-04 Terminals P1-C1 Function Selection (photocoupler) 0 to 161 37: During frequency output H2-05 Terminals P2-C2 Function Selection (photocoupler) 0 to 161 F: Through Mode Table 5.12 Multi-Function Digital Output Terminal Settings Setting Function Page Setting Function Page 0 During Run 196 1B During Baseblock 2 (N.C.) 201 1 Zero Speed 196 1C Motor 2 Selection 202 2 Speed Agree 1 196 1D During Regeneration 202 5 3 User-set Speed Agree 1 197 1E Restart Enabled 202 4 Speed Detection 1 197 1F Motor Overload Alarm (oL1) 202 5 Speed Detection 2 197 20 Drive Overheat Pre-alarm (oH) 202 6 Drive Ready (READY) 198 2F Maintenance Period 202 7 DC Bus Undervoltage 198 30 During Torque Limit 202 8 During Baseblock (N.O.) 198 33 Within Position Lock Bandwidth 202 9 Speed Reference Source 198 37 During Frequency Output 202 A Up/Down Command Source 198 50 Brake Control 203 B Torque Detection 1 199 47 Input Phase Loss 203 E Fault 199 4E Braking Transistor Fault (rr) 203 F Not used (Through Mode) 199 51 Output Contactor Control 203 10 Minor Fault 199 52 Door Zone Reached 203 11 Fault Reset Command Active 199 53 Not Zero Speed 203 12 Timer Output 199 54 Light Load Direction 203 13 Speed Agree 2 199 55 Light Load Direction Detection Status 203 14 User-set Speed Agree 2 200 58 Safe Disable Status 203
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H2-01 | Terminals M1-M2 Function Selection | 0 to 161 | 50: Brake control |
| H2-02 | Terminals M3-M4 Function Selection | 0 to 161 | 51: Output control contactor |
| H2-03 | Terminals M5-M6 Function Selection | 0 to 161 | 6: Drive ready |
| H2-04 | Terminals P1-C1 Function Selection (photocoupler) | 0 to 161 | 37: During frequency output |
| H2-05 | Terminals P2-C2 Function Selection (photocoupler) | 0 to 161 | F: Through Mode |
| Setting | Function | Page | Setting | Function | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0 | During Run | 196 | 1B | During Baseblock 2 (N.C.) | 201 |
| 1 | Zero Speed | 196 | 1C | Motor 2 Selection | 202 |
| 2 | Speed Agree 1 | 196 | 1D | During Regeneration | 202 |
| 3 | User-set Speed Agree 1 | 197 | 1E | Restart Enabled | 202 |
| 4 | Speed Detection 1 | 197 | 1F | Motor Overload Alarm (oL1) | 202 |
| 5 | Speed Detection 2 | 197 | 20 | Drive Overheat Pre-alarm (oH) | 202 |
| 6 | Drive Ready (READY) | 198 | 2F | Maintenance Period | 202 |
| 7 | DC Bus Undervoltage | 198 | 30 | During Torque Limit | 202 |
| 8 | During Baseblock (N.O.) | 198 | 33 | Within Position Lock Bandwidth | 202 |
| 9 | Speed Reference Source | 198 | 37 | During Frequency Output | 202 |
| A | Up/Down Command Source | 198 | 50 | Brake Control | 203 |
| B | Torque Detection 1 | 199 | 47 | Input Phase Loss | 203 |
| E | Fault | 199 | 4E | Braking Transistor Fault (rr) | 203 |
| F | Not used (Through Mode) | 199 | 51 | Output Contactor Control | 203 |
| 10 | Minor Fault | 199 | 52 | Door Zone Reached | 203 |
| 11 | Fault Reset Command Active | 199 | 53 | Not Zero Speed | 203 |
| 12 | Timer Output | 199 | 54 | Light Load Direction | 203 |
| 13 | Speed Agree 2 | 199 | 55 | Light Load Direction Detection Status | 203 |
| 14 | User-set Speed Agree 2 | 200 | 58 | Safe Disable Status | 203 |
Source page
Page 196
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 196 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
Setting Function Page Setting Function Page 15 Speed Detection 3 200 5C<1> Motor Current Monitor 203 16 Speed Detection 4 201 60 Internal Cooling Fan Alarm 203 18 Torque Detection 2 199 61 Motor Pole Search Status 203 1A During Reverse 201 100 to 161 Functions 0 to 61 with Inverse Output 204 <1> Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. Setting 0: During Run Output closes when the drive is outputting a voltage.
Status Description Open Drive is stopped. Closed An Up/Down command is input or the drive is during deceleration or during DC injection. Setting 1: Zero Speed Terminal closes whenever the output speed or motor speed (CLV, CLV/PM) becomes less than the minimum output speed set to E1-09 or S1-01.
Status Description Open The operating speed is greater than the minimum output frequency (E1-09) or the zero speed level at stop (S1-01). Closed The operating speed is less than or equal to the minimum output frequency (E1-09) or the zero speed level at stop (S1-01). Note: When using CLV or CLV/PM control modes, the output terminal will close when the motor speed becomes less than or equal to the zero speed level set for S1-01. In all other control modes, the output terminal will close when the output frequency becomes less than or equal to the minimum output frequency set for E1-09. Figure5.18 Output speed or motor speed E1-09 (Max. Output Frequency) or S1-01 (Zero Speed Level) common_ OFF ON TMonly Zero Speed Figure 5.18 Zero-Speed Time Chart Setting 2: Speed agree 1 (f /f Agree 1) ref out Closes whenever the actual output speed (CLV, CLV/PM) is within the Speed Agree Width (L4-02) of the current speed reference regardless of the direction.
Status Description Open Output speed or motor speed does not match the speed reference while the drive is running. Closed Output speed or motor speed is within the range of speed reference ±L4-02. Note: Detection works in both directions, forward and reverse. Figure5.19 Speed reference L4-02 Output speed or motor speed
L4-02 Speed agree 1 OFF ON Figure 5.19 Speed Agree 1 Time Chart Refer to L4-01, L4-02: Speed Agreement Detection Level and Detection Width on page 215 for more details.
196 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Setting | Function | Page | Setting | Function | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 15 | Speed Detection 3 | 200 | 5C<1> | Motor Current Monitor | 203 |
| 16 | Speed Detection 4 | 201 | 60 | Internal Cooling Fan Alarm | 203 |
| 18 | Torque Detection 2 | 199 | 61 | Motor Pole Search Status | 203 |
| 1A | During Reverse | 201 | 100 to 161 | Functions 0 to 61 with Inverse Output | 204 |
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | Drive is stopped. |
| Closed | An Up/Down command is input or the drive is during deceleration or during DC injection. |
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | The operating speed is greater than the minimum output frequency (E1-09) or the zero speed level at stop (S1-01). |
| Closed | The operating speed is less than or equal to the minimum output frequency (E1-09) or the zero speed level at stop (S1-01). |
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | Output speed or motor speed does not match the speed reference while the drive is running. |
| Closed | Output speed or motor speed is within the range of speed reference ±L4-02. |
Source page
Page 197
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 197 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 197 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Setting 3: User-set speed agree 1 (f /f Agree 1) ref set Closes whenever the actual output speed or motor speed (CLV, CLV/PM) and the speed reference are within the speed agree width (L4-02) of the programmed speed agree level (L4-01). Status Description Open Output speed or motor speed and the speed reference are not both within the range of L4-01 ±L4-02. Closed Output speed or motor speed and the speed reference are both within the range of L4-01 ±L4-02. Note: Detection works in both forward and reverse. The value of L4-01 is used as the detection level for both directions. Figure5.20 common_TMonly Output speed or motor speed Speed L4-01 Output reference +/- L4-02 speed L4-01 Speed reference +/- L4-02 User Set Speed Agree 1 OFF ON OFF ON Figure 5.20 User Set Speed Agree 1 Time Chart Refer to L4-01, L4-02: Speed Agreement Detection Level and Detection Width on page 215 for more instructions. Setting 4: Speed Detection 1 Output opens when the output speed (CLV, CLV/PM) rises above the detection level set in L4-01 plus the detection width set in L4-02. The terminal remains open until the output speed falls below the level set in L4-01. Status Description Open Output speed or motor speed exceeded L4-01 + L4-02. Closed Output speed or motor speed is below L4-01 or has not exceeded L4-01 + L4-02. Note: Detection works in both forward and reverse. The value of L4-01 is used as the detection level for both directions. Figure5.21 Output speed or motor speed L4-02 L4-01 L4-01 L4-02 common_ S de p t e e e c d tion 1<1> ON OFF TMonly Figure 5.21 Speed Detection 1 Time Chart 5 <1> This is the time chart when L4-07 (Speed Agree Detection Selection) is set to 1 (detection always enabled). The default setting for L4-07 is 0 (no detection during baseblock). When L4-07 = 0, the terminal opens during baseblock. Refer to L4-01, L4-02: Speed Agreement Detection Level and Detection Width on page 215 for more details. Setting 5: Speed Detection 2 Output closes whenever the output speed or motor speed (CLV, CLV/PM) is above the detection level set in L4-01. The terminal remains closed until the output speed or motor speed falls below L4-01 minus the setting of L4-02. Status Description Open Output speed or motor speed is below L4-01 minus L4-02 or has not exceeded L4-01. Closed Output speed or motor speed exceeded L4-01. Note: Detection works in both forward and reverse. The value of L4-01 is used as the detection level for both directions.
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | Output speed or motor speed and the speed reference are not both within the range of L4-01 ±L4-02. |
| Closed | Output speed or motor speed and the speed reference are both within the range of L4-01 ±L4-02. |
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | Output speed or motor speed exceeded L4-01 + L4-02. |
| Closed | Output speed or motor speed is below L4-01 or has not exceeded L4-01 + L4-02. |
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | Output speed or motor speed is below L4-01 minus L4-02 or has not exceeded L4-01. |
| Closed | Output speed or motor speed exceeded L4-01. |
Source page
Page 198
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 198 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
Figure5.22 Output Speed L4-02 or motor speed L4-01
L4-01 L4-02 common_ S D p e e te e c d tion 2<1> OFF ON TMonly Figure 5.22 Speed Detection 2 Time Chart
<1> This is the timing chart when L4-07 (Speed Agree Detection Selection) is set to 1 (detection always enabled). The default setting for L4-07 is 0 (no detection during baseblock). When L4-07 = 0, the terminal opens during baseblock. Refer to L4-01, L4-02: Speed Agreement Detection Level and Detection Width on page 215 for more details. Setting 6: Drive ready (READY)
Output closes whenever the drive is ready to operate the motor. The terminal will not close under the conditions listed below, and any Up/Down commands will be disregarded. • When the power is shut off • During a fault • When the internal power supply of the drive has malfunctioned • When a parameter setting error makes it impossible to run • Although stopped, an overvoltage or undervoltage situation occurs • While editing a parameter in the Programming Mode (when b1-08 = 0) • When parameter L8-88 = 0 and at least one Safe Disable input is open Setting 7: DC bus undervoltage
Output closes whenever the DC bus voltage or control circuit power supply drops below the trip level set in L2-05. A fault in the DC bus circuit will also cause the terminal to set for “DC bus undervoltage” to close.
Status Description Open DC bus voltage is above the level set to L2-05. Closed DC bus voltage has fallen below the trip level set to L2-05. Setting 8: During baseblock (N.O.) Output closes to indicate that the drive is in a baseblock state. While in baseblock, output transistors do not switch and no main circuit voltage is output.
Status Description Open Drive is not in a baseblock state. Closed Baseblock is being executed. Setting 9: Speed reference source Displays the currently selected speed reference source.
Status Description Open Speed reference is provided from External reference 1 (b1-01). Closed Speed reference is being sourced from the digital operator. Setting A: Up/Down command source Displays the currently selected Up/Down command source.
Status Description Open Up/Down command is provided from External reference 1 (b1-02). Closed Up/Down command is being sourced from the digital operator.
198 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | DC bus voltage is above the level set to L2-05. |
| Closed | DC bus voltage has fallen below the trip level set to L2-05. |
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | Drive is not in a baseblock state. |
| Closed | Baseblock is being executed. |
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | Speed reference is provided from External reference 1 (b1-01). |
| Closed | Speed reference is being sourced from the digital operator. |
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | Up/Down command is provided from External reference 1 (b1-02). |
| Closed | Up/Down command is being sourced from the digital operator. |
Source page
Page 199
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 199 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 199 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Setting B, 18: Torque detection 1, Torque detection 2 These digital output functions to signal an overtorque or undertorque situation to an external device. Set up the torque detection levels and select the output function from the table below. Refer to L6: Torque Detection on page 217 for details. Setting Status Description Torque detection 1 : B Closed Output current/torque exceeds (overtorque detection) or is below (undertorque detection) the torque value set in parameter L6-02 for longer than the time specified in parameter L6-03. Torque detection 2 : 18 Closed Output current/torque exceeds (overtorque detection) or is below (undertorque detection) the torque value set in parameter L6-05 for longer than the time specified in parameter L6-06. Setting E: Fault The output closes when the drive faults (excluding CPF00 and CPF01 faults). Setting F: Not used (Through mode) Select this setting when using the terminal in a pass-through mode. When set to F, an output does not trigger any function in the drive. Setting F, however, still allows the output status to be read by a PLC via a communication option or MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. Setting 10: Minor fault Output closes when a minor fault condition is present. Setting 11: Fault reset command active Output closes whenever there is an attempt to reset a fault situation from the control circuit terminals, via serial communications, or using a communications option card. Setting 12: Timer output This setting configures a digital output terminal as output for the timer function. Refer to b4: Delay Timers on page 160 for details. Setting 13: Speed agree 2 (f /f agree 2) ref out Closes whenever the actual output speed or motor speed (CLV, CLV/PM) is within the speed agree width (L4-04) of the current speed reference, regardless of the direction. Status Description Open Output speed or motor speed does not match the speed reference while the drive is running. Closed Output speed or motor speed is within the range of speed reference ±L4-04. Note: Detection works in both forward and reverse. Figure5.23 Speed reference common_ L4-04 TMonly Output speed or motor speed 5 L4-04 OFF ON Speed Agree 2 Figure 5.23 Speed Agree 2 Time Chart Refer to L4-03, L4-04: Speed Agreement Detection Level and Detection Width (+/-) on page 215 for more details.
| Setting | Status | Description |
|---|---|---|
| B | Closed | Torque detection 1 : Output current/torque exceeds (overtorque detection) or is below (undertorque detection) the torque value set in parameter L6-02 for longer than the time specified in parameter L6-03. |
| 18 | Closed | Torque detection 2 : Output current/torque exceeds (overtorque detection) or is below (undertorque detection) the torque value set in parameter L6-05 for longer than the time specified in parameter L6-06. |
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | Output speed or motor speed does not match the speed reference while the drive is running. |
| Closed | Output speed or motor speed is within the range of speed reference ±L4-04. |
Source page
Page 200
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 200 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
Setting 14: User-set speed agree 2 (f /f agree 2) ref set Closes whenever the actual output speed or motor speed (CLV, CLV/PM) and the speed reference are within the speed agree width (L4-04) of the programmed speed agree level (L4-03). As the detection level L4-03 is a signed value, detection works in the specified direction only.
Status Description Open Output speed or motor speed and speed reference are both outside the range of L4-03 ±L4-04. Closed Output speed or motor speed and the speed reference are both with in the range of L4-03 ±L4-04. Figure5.24 Output speed or motor speed Speed L4-03 reference Output speed +/- L4-04
Speed reference common_ TMonly User Set OFF ON Speed Agree 2 Figure 5.24 User Set Speed Agree 2 Example with a Positive L3-04 Value Refer to L4-03, L4-04: Speed Agreement Detection Level and Detection Width (+/-) on page 215 for more details. Setting 15: Speed detection 3 Output opens when the output speed or motor speed (CLV, CLV/PM) rises above the detection level set in L4-03 plus the detection with set in L4-04. The terminal remains open until the output speed or motor speed falls below the level set in L4-03. As the detection level L4-03 is a signed value, the detection works in the specified direction only.
Status Description Open Output speed or motor speed exceeded L4-03 plus L4-04. Closed Output speed or motor speed is below L4-03 or has not exceeded L4-03 plus L4-04 yet. Figure5.25 Output speed common_ or motor speed L4-04 TMonly L4-03
Speed ON OFF detection 3<1> Figure 5.25 Speed Detection 3 Example with a Positive L3-04 Value <1> This is the timing chart when L4-07 (Speed Agree Detection Selection) is set to 1 (detection always enabled). The default setting for L4-07 is 0 (no detection during baseblock). When L4-07 = 0, the terminal opens during baseblock. Refer to L4-03, L4-04: Speed Agreement Detection Level and Detection Width (+/-) on page 215 for more details.
200 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | Output speed or motor speed and speed reference are both outside the range of L4-03 ±L4-04. |
| Closed | Output speed or motor speed and the speed reference are both with in the range of L4-03 ±L4-04. |
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | Output speed or motor speed exceeded L4-03 plus L4-04. |
| Closed | Output speed or motor speed is below L4-03 or has not exceeded L4-03 plus L4-04 yet. |
Source page
Page 201
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 201 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 201 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Setting 16: Speed detection 4 Output closes whenever the output speed or motor speed (CLV, CLV/PM) is above the detection level set in L4-03. The terminal remains closed until the output speed or motor speed falls below L4-03 minus the setting of L4-04. As the detection level L4-03 is a signed value, speed detection works in the specified direction only. Status Description Open Output speed or motor speed is below L4-03 minus L4-04 or has not exceeded L4-03 yet. Closed Output speed or motor speed exceeded L4-03. Figure5.26 common_ Output speed L4-04 or motor speed TMonly L4-03 Speed OFF ON detection 4<1> Figure 5.26 Speed Detection 4 Example with Positive L3-04 Value <1> This is the timing chart when L4-07 (Speed Agree Detection Selection) is set to 1 (detection always enabled). The default setting for L4-07 is 0 (no detection during baseblock). When L4-07 = 0, the terminal opens during baseblock. Refer to L4-03, L4-04: Speed Agreement Detection Level and Detection Width (+/-) on page 215 for more details. Setting 1A: During down direction A digital output set for “During down direction” will close whenever the drive is running the elevator in the down direction. Status Description Open Elevator is being driven in the up direction or stopped. Closed Elevator is being driven in the down direction. Figure5.27 Output Speed Up command Down command OFF ON common_ During Down Direction time TMonly 5 Figure 5.27 Down Direction Output Example Time Chart Setting 1B: During baseblock (N.C.) Output opens to indicate that the drive is in a baseblock state. While Baseblock is executed, output transistors do not switch and no main circuit voltage is output. Status Description Open Baseblock is being executed. Closed Drive is not in a baseblock state.
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | Output speed or motor speed is below L4-03 minus L4-04 or has not exceeded L4-03 yet. |
| Closed | Output speed or motor speed exceeded L4-03. |
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | Elevator is being driven in the up direction or stopped. |
| Closed | Elevator is being driven in the down direction. |
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | Baseblock is being executed. |
| Closed | Drive is not in a baseblock state. |
Source page
Page 202
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 202 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
Setting 1C: Motor 2 selection Indicates which motor is selected when another output terminal is set up to switch drive operation between two motors (H1- = 16). Refer to Setting 16: Motor 2 selection on page 193 for details on switching motors.
Status Description Open Motor 1 is selected. Closed Motor 2 is selected. Setting 1D: During regeneration
Terminal closes when the motor is driven in the regenerative mode. This function is only available in closed loop control modes. Setting 1E: Reset enabled An output set for “Reset enabled” closes when the drive attempts to reset after a fault has occurred. The fault reset function allows the drive to automatically clear a fault. The terminal set to 1E will close after the fault is cleared and the drive has attempted to reset. If the drive cannot successfully reset within the number of attempts permitted by L5-01, a fault will be triggered and the terminal set to 1E will open. Refer to L5: Automatic Fault Reset on page 216 for details on automatic reset.
Setting 1F: Motor overload alarm (oL1) The output closes when the motor overload level estimated by the oL1 fault detection exceeds 90% of the oL1 detection level. Setting 20: Drive overheat pre-alarm (oH)
Output closes whenever the drive heatsink temperature reaches the level specified by parameter L8-02. Refer to L8-02: Overheat Alarm Level on page 220 for details on drive overheat detection. Setting 2F: Maintenance period Output closes when the IGBTs, cooling fan, DC bus capacitors, or DC bus pre-charge relay may require maintenance as determined by the estimated performance life span of those components. Refer to Periodic Maintenance on page 301 for details.
Setting 30: During torque limit Output closes when the motor is operating at the torque limit specified by the L7- parameters or an analog input. This setting can only be used in OLV, CLV and CLV/PM control modes. Refer to L7-01 to L7-04: Torque Limits on page 220 for details. Setting 33: Within position lock bandwidth Output closes when the motor rotor position is within the position lock bandwidth (S3-04) during Position Lock at start or stop.
Setting 37: During frequency output Output closes when the drive is outputting a frequency.
Status Description Open No frequency output from drive when stopped with baseblock, stopped with DC injection braking during initial excitation, or stopped with short circuit braking. Closed Drive is outputting frequency. Figure5.28 Up/Down command OFF ON Baseblock OFF ON command
Output frequency
During run OFF ON common_ During frequency OFF ON Output TMonly Figure 5.28 During Frequency Output Time Chart
202 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | Motor 1 is selected. |
| Closed | Motor 2 is selected. |
| Status | Description |
|---|---|
| Open | No frequency output from drive when stopped with baseblock, stopped with DC injection braking during initial excitation, or stopped with short circuit braking. |
| Closed | Drive is outputting frequency. |
| ON | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| ON | ||||
| ON | ||||
| ON | ||||
| ON |
Source page
Page 203
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 203 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 203 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Setting 47: Input phase loss This terminal closes when input phase loss is detected. Setting 4E: Braking transistor fault (rr) Output closes when the built-in braking transistor in the drive overheats and the (rr) error is detected. Setting 50: Brake control This setting can be used in the brake sequence for the elevator application. Closing the output terminal should cause the brake to release, and opening the terminal should apply the brake. Refer to Brake Sequence on page 116 for details. Setting 51: Output contactor control Assigning this command to an output terminal can send a signal to the controller to close the output contactor. The output contactor should open when the terminal is released. Setting 52: Door zone reached Terminals closes to indicate that the door zone speed level (L4-13) has been reached, and that controller should open the car door. Setting 53: Not zero speed Output closes as long as the drive is not operating at the zero speed level. Terminal opens when zero speed is reached. Setting 54: Light load direction Indicates the light load direction detected during emergency operation with light load search. When the terminal is closed the light load direction is up, when it is open the light load direction is down. Refer to Light Load Direction Search Function on page 136 for details. Setting 55: Light load direction detection status This terminal is open during Light Load Direction Search. When the search function is complete, the terminal closes. Refer to Light Load Direction Search Function on page 136 for details. Setting 58: Safe disable status This terminal closes if either of the Safe Disable inputs H1-HC or H2-HC are opened and opens when both terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are closed. Setting 5C: Motor Current Monitor The digital output closes when motor current less than or equal to the value set in L8-99 and is detected while the drive is in baseblock. Note: Setting 5C is available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. Setting 60: Internal cooling fan alarm This terminal changes states when the internal cooling fan fault is detected. Setting 61: Motor pole search status This terminal changes states when the Initial Motor Pole Position Search is finished. Refer to Initial Rotor Pole Position Search Settings on page 230 for details on Motor Pole Position Search. Use this setting in applications where the motor speed feedback is supplied from a non-absolute encoder (e.g., incremental) and where the drive brake sequence is not utilized. 5 Design the external brake sequence to interlock the brake as long as the Motor Pole Position Search has not finished. In this case, the external brake sequence should be designed to interlock the brake during Motor Pole Position Search. Figure5.29 common_TMonly Up/Down command Motor pole search status Motor pole position search process <1> Brake interlock Brake can be released Figure 5.29 Motor Pole Search Status Time Chart <1> The search process takes 0.5 to 5.0 s depending on the Motor Pole Position Search method selected in n8-35 and whether Motor Pole Search Error detection is enabled in parameter n8-86.
Source page
Page 204
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 204 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
Setting 100 to 161: Functions 0 to 61 with Inverse Output These settings have the same function as settings 0 to 61 but with inverse output. Set as 1, where the “1” indicates inverse output and the last two digits specify the setting number of the function.
Examples: • For inverse output of “8: During baseblock”, set 108.
H3: Multi-Function Analog Inputs
The drive is equipped with two multi-function analog input terminals: A1 and A2. Refer to Table 5.13 for a listing of the functions that can be set to these terminals. H3-01: Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection
Selects the input signal level for analog input A1.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H3-01 Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: 0 to 10 Vdc The input level is 0 to 10 Vdc. The minimum input level is limited to 0%, so that a negative input signal due to gain and bias settings will be read as 0%.
Setting 1: -10 to 10 Vdc The input level is -10 to 10 Vdc. If the resulting voltage is negative after being adjusted by gain and bias settings, then the motor will rotate in reverse. H3-02: Terminal A1 Function Selection
Selects the input signal level for analog input A1. Refer to Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal Settings on page 206 for instructions on how to adjust the signal level.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H3-02 Terminal A1 Function Selection 0 to 1F 0 H3-03, H3-04: Terminal A1 Gain and Bias Settings Parameter H3-03 sets the level of the selected input value that is equal to 10 Vdc input at terminal A1 (gain).
Parameter H3-04 sets the level of the selected input value that is equal to 0 V input at terminal A1 (bias). Both can be used to adjust the characteristics of the analog input signal to terminal A1.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H3-03 Terminal A1 Gain Setting -999.9 to 999.9% 100.0% H3-04 Terminal A1 Bias Setting -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0% Setting Examples • Gain H3-03 = 200%, bias H3-04 = 0, terminal A1 as speed reference input (H3-02 = 0): A 10 Vdc input is equivalent to a 200% speed reference and 5 Vdc is equivalent to a 100% speed reference. Since the drive output is limited by the maximum frequency parameter (E1-04), the speed reference will be equal to E1-04 above 5 Vdc. Figure5.30 H3-01 = 0 H3-01 = 1 common_TMonly Gain = 200% Gain = 200% Speed 100% reference E1-04 -10 V -5 V 100% 0 V 5 V 10 V E1-04 -100% E1-04 Bias = 0% Gain = -200% 0 V 5 V 10 V Figure 5.30 Speed Reference Setting by Analog Input with Increased Gain 204 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H3-01 | Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H3-02 | Terminal A1 Function Selection | 0 to 1F | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H3-03 | Terminal A1 Gain Setting | -999.9 to 999.9% | 100.0% |
| H3-04 | Terminal A1 Bias Setting | -999.9 to 999.9% | 0.0% |
Source page
Page 205
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 205 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 205 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 • Gain H3-03 = 100%, bias H3-04 = -25%, terminal A1 as speed reference input: An input of 0 Vdc will be equivalent to a -25% speed reference. When parameter H3-01 = 0, the speed reference is 0% between 0 and 2 Vdc input. When parameter H3-01 = 1, the motor will rotate in reverse between -10 and 2 Vdc input. Figure5.31 H3-01 = 0 H3-01 = 1 common_TMonly 100% 100% Speed H3-01 = 0 reference -10 V -6.0 V 2.0 V 10 V -25% Analog Input Voltage 0 2.0 V 10 V Analog Input -100% -25% Voltage E1-04 H3-01 = 1 -150% Figure 5.31 Speed Reference Setting by Analog Input with Negative Bias H3-09: Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection Selects the input signal level for analog input A2. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H3-09 Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: 0 to 10 Vdc The input level is 0 to 10 Vdc. Refer to Setting 0: 0 to 10 Vdc on page 204 for details. Setting 1: -10 to 10 Vdc The input level is -10 to 10 Vdc. Refer to Setting 1: -10 to 10 Vdc on page 204 for details. H3-10: Terminal A2 Function Selection Determines the function assigned to analog input terminal A2. Refer to Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal Settings on page 206 for a list of functions and descriptions. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H3-10 Terminal A2 Function Selection 0 to 1F 1F H3-11, H3-12: Terminal A2 Gain and Bias Setting Parameter H3-11 sets the level of the input value selected that is equal to 10 Vdc input to terminal A2. Parameter H3-12 sets the level of the input value selected that is equal to 0 V at terminal A2. Both can be used to adjust the characteristics of the analog input signal to terminal A2. The settings work in the same way as parameters H3-03 and H3-04 for analog input A1. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default 5 H3-11 Terminal A2 Gain Setting -999.9 to 999.9% 100.0% H3-12 Terminal A2 Bias Setting -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0% H3-13: Analog Input Filter Time Constant Parameter H3-13 sets the time constant for a first order filter that will be applied to the analog inputs. An analog input filter prevents erratic drive control when using a “noisy” analog reference. Drive operation becomes more stable as the programmed time becomes longer, but it also becomes less responsive to rapidly changing analog signals. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H3-13 Analog Input Filter Time Constant 0.00 to 2.00 s 0.03 s
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H3-09 | Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H3-10 | Terminal A2 Function Selection | 0 to 1F | 1F |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H3-11 | Terminal A2 Gain Setting | -999.9 to 999.9% | 100.0% |
| H3-12 | Terminal A2 Bias Setting | -999.9 to 999.9% | 0.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H3-13 | Analog Input Filter Time Constant | 0.00 to 2.00 s | 0.03 s |
Source page
Page 206
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 206 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
H3-16/H3-17: Offset for Terminal A1/A2 Parameters H3-16 and H3-17 set the offset applied analog input values from terminals A1 and A2.
Although adjustment is rarely required, these parameters can be used for zero adjustment of the analog inputs.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H3-16 Offset for Terminal A1 -500 to 500 0 H3-17 Offset for Terminal A2 -500 to 500 0 Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal Settings
Refer to Table 5.13 for information on how H3-02 and H3-10 determine functions for terminals A1 and A2. Note: The scaling of all input functions depends on the gain and bias settings for the analog inputs. Set these to appropriate values when selecting and adjusting analog input functions. Table 5.13 Multi-Function Analog Input Terminal Settings
Setting Function Page Setting Function Page 0 Speed reference bias 206 14 Torque compensation (load cell input) 206 Auxiliary speed reference 1 2 206 1F Not used (through mode) 206 (used as a second speed reference) Auxiliary speed reference 2 3 (used as a third speed reference) 206 E<1> Motor Temperature (PTC thermistor input) 206 <1> Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. Setting 0: Speed reference bias The input value of an analog input set to this function will be added to the analog speed reference value. When the speed reference is supplied by a different source other than the analog inputs, this function will have no effect. Use this setting also when only one of the analog inputs is used to supply the speed reference. By default, analog inputs A1 and A2 are set for this function. Using A1 and A2 at the same time increases the speed reference by the total of all inputs. Example: If the analog speed reference from analog input terminal A1 is 50% and a bias of 20% is applied by analog input terminal A2, the resulting speed reference will be 70% of the maximum output speed. Setting 2: Auxiliary speed reference 1 (used as a second speed reference) Sets the auxiliary speed reference 1 when multi-step speed operation is selected. Refer to Speed Selection Using Digital Inputs (b1-01 = 0) on page 111 for details. Setting 3: Auxiliary speed reference 2 (used as a third speed reference) Sets the auxiliary speed reference 2 when multi-step speed operation is selected. Refer to Speed Selection Using Digital Inputs (b1-01 = 0) on page 111 for details.
Setting E: Motor Temperature (PTC thermistor input) In addition to motor overload fault detection oL1, it is possible to use a PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) thermistor for motor insulation protection. Refer to Motor Protection Using a Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC thermistor) on page 211 for details.
Note: Setting E is available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. Setting 14: Torque compensation (load cell input) This selection allows an analog signal to the input terminal adjust the amount of torque compensation to handle and unbalance at start when elevators sensors indicate that a large load has been added to the car. This helps to minimize shock and jerking at start. Setting 14 requires an analog signal from a load sensor. For more information on torque compensation, refer to Adjusting the Torque Compensation at Start on page 118.
Setting 1F: Not used (Through mode) When set to 1F, an input does not affect any drive function, but the input level can still be read out by a PLC via a communication option or MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
206 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H3-16 | Offset for Terminal A1 | -500 to 500 | 0 |
| H3-17 | Offset for Terminal A2 | -500 to 500 | 0 |
| Setting | Function | Page | Setting | Function | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0 | Speed reference bias | 206 | 14 | Torque compensation (load cell input) | 206 |
| 2 | Auxiliary speed reference 1 (used as a second speed reference) | 206 | 1F | Not used (through mode) | 206 |
| 3 | Auxiliary speed reference 2 (used as a third speed reference) | 206 | E<1> | Motor Temperature (PTC thermistor input) | 206 |
Source page
Page 207
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 207 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 207 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 H4: Multi-Function Analog Outputs These parameters assign functions to analog output terminals FM and AM for monitoring a specific aspect of drive performance. H4-01, H4-04: Terminal FM, AM Monitor Selection Sets the desired drive monitor parameter U- to output as an analog value via terminal FM and AM. Refer to U: Monitors on page 387 for a list of all monitors. The “Analog Output Level” column indicates if a monitor can be used for analog output. Example: Enter “103” for U1-03. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H4-01 Terminal FM Monitor Selection 000 to 999 102 H4-04 Terminal AM Monitor Selection 000 to 999 103 A setting of 031 or 000 applies no drive monitor to the analog output. With this setting, terminal functions as well as FM and AM output levels can be set by a PLC via a communication option or MEMOBUS/Modbus (through mode). H4-02, H4-03: Multi-Function Analog Output Terminal FM Gain and Bias H4-05, H4-06: Terminal AM Gain and Bias Parameters H4-02 and H4-05 set the terminal FM and AM output signal level equal to 100% of the monitor (gain). Parameters H4-03 and H4-06 set the bias added to the monitor output for terminals FM and AM. Both are set as a percentage, where 100% equals 10 Vdc analog output. The output voltage of both terminals is limited to 10 Vdc. Select an output signal range between 0 to +10 Vdc or -10 to +10 Vdc using parameters H4-07 and H4-08. Figure 5.32 illustrates how gain and bias settings work. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H4-02 Terminal FM Gain -999.9 to 999.9% 100.0% H4-03 Terminal FM Bias -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0% H4-05 Terminal AM Gain -999.9 to 999.9% 50.0% H4-06 Terminal AM Bias -999.9 to 999.9% 0.0% Using Gain and Bias to Adjust Output Signal Level The output signal is adjustable while the drive is stopped. Terminal FM 1. View the value set to H4-02 (Terminal FM Monitor Gain) on the digital operator. A voltage equal to 100% of the parameter being set in H4-01 will be output from terminal FM. 2. Adjust H4-02 viewing the monitor connected to the terminal FM. 3. View the value set to H4-03 on the digital operator, terminal FM will output a voltage equal to 0% of the parameter being set in H4-01. 4. Adjust H4-03 viewing the output signal on the terminal FM. Terminal AM 5 1. View the value set to H4-05 (Terminal AM Monitor Gain) on the digital operator. A voltage equal to 100% of the parameter being set in H4-04 will be output from terminal AM. 2. Adjust H4-05 viewing the monitor connected to the terminal AM. 3. View the value set to H4-06 on the digital operator, terminal AM will output a voltage equal to 0% of the parameter being set in H4-04. 4. Adjust H4-06 viewing the output signal on the terminal AM.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H4-01 | Terminal FM Monitor Selection | 000 to 999 | 102 |
| H4-04 | Terminal AM Monitor Selection | 000 to 999 | 103 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H4-02 | Terminal FM Gain | -999.9 to 999.9% | 100.0% |
| H4-03 | Terminal FM Bias | -999.9 to 999.9% | 0.0% |
| H4-05 | Terminal AM Gain | -999.9 to 999.9% | 50.0% |
| H4-06 | Terminal AM Bias | -999.9 to 999.9% | 0.0% |
Source page
Page 208
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 208 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.7 H: Terminal Functions
Example 1: Set H4-02 to 50% for an output signal of 5 V at terminal FM when the monitored value is at 100%.
Example 2: Set H4-02 to 150% for an output signal of 10 V at terminal FM when the monitored value is at 76.7%. Figure5.32 H4-07, 08 = 0 H4-07, 08 = 1 common_TMonly
15(cid:2)V Gain = 150% Output Voltage Bias = 0% 10(cid:2)V Gain = 100% 10 V Bias = 0% Output Voltage G Bi a a i s n 0 1 % 50% 5 V G Bi a a i s n = = 0 5 % 0% -100% Gain 100% 5 V Bias 0% 100% Monitor Value -5 V Gain 50% Bias 0% 0 V -10 V 0% Monitor Value 100% -15 V Figure 5.32 Analog Output Gain and Bias Setting Example 1 and 2 Example 3: Set H4-03 to 30% for an output signal of 3 V at terminal FM when the monitored value is at 0%. Figure5.33 YEG H4-07, 08 = 0 H4-07, 08 = 1 Gain = 100% Bias = 30% 10V Gain = 100% 10 V Output Voltage Bias = 0% Bias 30% 3 V Output Voltage Gain 100% -100% 100% 3 V G Bi a a i s n 0 1 % 00% -4 V Monitor Value 0 V -10 V 0% Monitor Value 100% Figure 5.33 Analog Output Gain and Bias Setting Example 3 H4-07, H4-08: Terminal FM, AM Signal Level Selection Sets the voltage output level of U parameter (monitor parameter) data to terminal FM and terminal AM using parameters H4-07 and H4-08. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H4-07 Terminal FM Signal Level Selection 0 or 1 0 H4-08 Terminal AM Signal Level Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: 0 to 10 V Setting 1: -10 V to 10 V H5: MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication Serial communication is possible in the drive using the built-in RS-422/485 port (terminals R+, R-, S+, S-) and programmable logic controllers (PLCs) or similar devices running the MEMOBUS/Modbus protocol. The H5- parameters are used to set up the drive for MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications. Refer to MEMOBUS/ Modbus Communications on page 399 for detailed descriptions of the H5- parameters.
208 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H4-07 | Terminal FM Signal Level Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| H4-08 | Terminal AM Signal Level Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
Source page
Page 209
5.8 L: Protection Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 209 sliateD retemaraP 5.8 L: Protection Functions L1: Motor Protection L1-01: Motor Overload Protection Selection The drive has an electronic overload protection function that estimates the motor overload level based on output current, output speed, thermal motor characteristics, and time. An oL1 fault will be triggered when motor overload is detected and drive output will be shut off. L1-01 sets the overload protection function characteristics according to the motor being used. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L1-01 Motor Overload Protection Selection 0 to 3, 5 Determined by A1-02 Note: 1. When the motor protection function is enabled (L1-01≠ 0), an oL1 alarm can be output through one of the multi-function outputs by setting H2-01 to 1F. The output will close when the motor overload level reaches 90% of the oL1 detection level. 2. Set L1-01 to a value between 1 and 5 when running a single motor from the drive to select a method to protect the motor from overheat. An external thermal relay is not necessary. Setting 0: Disabled (motor overload protection is not provided) Use this setting if no motor overheat protection is desired. Setting 1: General-purpose motor (standard self-cooled) Because the motor is self-cooled, the overload tolerance drops when the motor speed is lowered. The drive appropriately adjusts the electrothermal trigger point according to the motor overload characteristics, protecting the motor from overheat throughout the entire speed range. Overload Tolerance Cooling Ability Overload Characteristics 150 60 s Rated Speed = 100% Speed A: Max. speed for 200LJ and above B: Max. speed for 160MJ to 180 LJ 100 C: Max. speed for 132MJ and below 90 Motor designed to operate from line power. Continuous operation at less than line power Motor cooling is most effective when running at frequency with 100% load can trigger motor rated base frequency (check the motor nameplate or overload protection (oL1). A fault is output and the 6 5 0 0 Continuous specifications). motor will coast to stop. A B C 05 33 100120 167200 Speed (%) Setting 2: Drive dedicated motor (speed range for constant torque: 1:10) Use this setting when operating a drive duty motor that allows constant torque in a speed range of 1:10. The drive will allow the motor to run with 100% load from 10% up to 100% speed. Running at slower speeds with full load can trigger an overload fault. 5 Overload Tolerance Cooling Ability Overload Characteristics Motor is designed to effectively cool itself even at Continuous operation with 100% load from 5 Hz to low speeds. 50 Hz. )%( euqroT Rated Speed=100% Speed 60 s A: Max. speed for 200LJ and above B: Max. speed for 160MJ to 180 LJ C: Max. speed for 132MJ and below A B C Speed (%) )%( euqroT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 209 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 150 100 55 50 Continuous 0110 100120 167 200
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L1-01 | Motor Overload Protection Selection | 0 to 3, 5 | Determined by A1-02 |
| Overload Tolerance | Cooling Ability | Overload Characteristics |
|---|---|---|
| 150 Rated Speed = 100% Speed 60 s A: Max. speed for 200LJ and above B: Max. speed for 160MJ to 180 LJ 100 C: Max. speed for 132MJ and below )%( 90 euqroT 60 50 Continuous A B C 0533 100120167200 Speed (%) | Motor designed to operate from line power. Motor cooling is most effective when running at rated base frequency (check the motor nameplate or specifications). | Continuous operation at less than line power frequency with 100% load can trigger motor overload protection (oL1). A fault is output and the motor will coast to stop. |
| Overload Tolerance | Cooling Ability | Overload Characteristics |
|---|---|---|
| 150 Rated Speed=100% Speed 60 s A: Max. speed for 200LJ and above B: Max. speed for 160MJ to 180 LJ C: Max. speed for 132MJ and below )%( 100 euqroT 55 50 A B Continuous C 0110 100120 167200 Speed (%) | Motor is designed to effectively cool itself even at low speeds. | Continuous operation with 100% load from 5 Hz to 50 Hz. |
| 60 s |
|---|
| Continuou |
Source page
Page 210
5.8 L: Protection Functions
Setting 3: Vector motor (speed range for constant torque: 1:100) Use this setting when operating a drive-dedicated motor that allows constant torque in a speed range of 1:100. This motor type is allowed to run with 100% load from 1% up to 100% speed. Running slower speeds with full load can trigger an overload fault.
Overload Tolerance Cooling Ability Overload Characteristics 150 Rated Speed=100% Speed A: Max. speed for 200LJ and above B: Max. speed for 160MJ to 180 LJ 100 C: Max. speed for 132MJ and below 90 Motor is designed to effectively cool itself at Continuous operation with 100% load from 0.5 Hz to ultra-low speeds. 50 Hz. 50 Continuous A B C 0 1 100120 167200 Speed (%) Setting 5: Constant torque PM motors (constant torque range of 1:500) Sets protection characteristics needed when driving a PM with constant torque. These motors allow for a speed control from 0.2% to 100% when operating with 100% load. Slower speeds with 100% load will trigger overload. Overload Tolerance Cooling Ability Overload Characteristics
Motor is designed to effectively cool itself at Continuous operation with 100% load from 0.2% to ultra-low speeds (about 0.2% of base speed). 100% of base speed.
L1-02: Motor Overload Protection Time
This setting rarely requires adjustment. Sets the time it takes the drive to detect motor overheat due to overload. If the motor overload tolerance protection time when an overload of 150% is imposed after continuous operation at 100% is clear, set that time as the value.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L1-02 Motor Overload Protection Time 0.1 to 5.0 min 1.0 min Defaulted to operate with an allowance of 150% overload operation for one minute in a hot start; after continuous operation at 100%.
Figure 5.34 shows an example of the electrothermal protection operation time using a general-purpose motor operating at the value of E1-06, Motor Base Speed, with L1-02 set to one minute. Motor overload protection operates in the area between a cold start and a hot start.
• Cold start: Characteristics of motor protection operation time in response to an overload situation that was suddenly reached when starting a stationary motor. • Hot start: Characteristics of motor protection operation time in response to an overload situation that occurred while the motor was operating continuously at or below its rated current.
210 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual )%( euqroT 60 s 150 Instantaneous rating (60 s) 125 115 100 83 77 67 00.2 100 120 130 150 Percent of base speed (%) )%( euqroT C o n tin u o u s SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 210 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
| Overload Tolerance | Cooling Ability | Overload Characteristics |
|---|---|---|
| 150 Rated Speed=100% Speed A: Max. speed for 200LJ and above 60 s B: Max. speed for 160MJ to 180 LJ 100 C: Max. speed for 132MJ and below )%( 90 euqroT 50 Continuous A B C 0 1 100120 167200 Speed (%) | Motor is designed to effectively cool itself at ultra-low speeds. | Continuous operation with 100% load from 0.5 Hz to 50 Hz. |
| 60 s | Column |
|---|---|
| Continuou | s |
| Overload Tolerance | Cooling Ability | Overload Characteristics |
|---|---|---|
| Instantaneous rating (60 s) 150 125 115 )%( 100 C ontinuous euqroT 83 77 67 00.2 100 120 130 150 Percent of base speed (%) | Motor is designed to effectively cool itself at ultra-low speeds (about 0.2% of base speed). | Continuous operation with 100% load from 0.2% to 100% of base speed. |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L1-02 | Motor Overload Protection Time | 0.1 to 5.0 min | 1.0 min |
Source page
Page 211
5.8 L: Protection Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 211 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 211 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Figure5.34 Operation time (minutes) common_TMonly 10 7 3 Cold start (Characteristics when an overload occurs 1 at a complete stop) 0.4 Hot start (Characteristics when an overload occurs during continuous operation at 100%) 0.1 Motor current (%) 0 100 150 200 E2-01 = 100% motor current Figure 5.34 Protection Operation Time for General Purpose Motors at the Rated Output Frequency Motor Protection Using a Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC thermistor) A motor PTC thermistor can be connected to an analog input of the drive. This input is used by the drive for motor overheat protection. When the PTC thermistor input signal reaches the motor overheat alarm level, an oH3 alarm will be triggered and the drive will continue operation according to the setting of L1-03. When the PTC thermistor input signal reaches the overheat fault level, an oH4 fault will be triggered, a fault signal will be output, and the drive will stop the motor using the stop method setting in L1-04. Connect the PTC thermistor between terminals AC and A2 as shown in Figure 5.35. Set parameter H3-09 to 0 and parameter H3-10 to E. Figure5.35 Multi-function digital input Drive MA Fault output MB +V (+10.5 V, 20 mA) MC Branch resistor M1 12 kΩ M2 A2 (0-10 V) M3 Multi-function PTC M4 digital outputs thermistor M5 AC M6 Figure 5.35 Connection of a Motor PTC Thermistor 5
Source page
Page 212
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 212 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.8 L: Protection Functions
The PTC thermistor must have the following characteristics for one motor phase. The drives motor overload detection requires three PTC thermistors to be connected in series.
Figure5.36 Class F Class H Resistance (Ω) 150°C 180°C YEG 1330
550 Tr: threshold value Temperature Tr’ Tr - 5K (oH3 Alarm Level) Tr Tr + 5K (oH4 Fault Level) Figure 5.36 Motor PTC Thermistor Characteristics Overheat detection using a PTC thermistor is configured with parameters L1-03, L1-04, and L1-05 as explained below.
L1-03: Motor Overheat Alarm Operation Selection (PTC thermistor input) Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. Sets the drive operation when the PTC thermistor input signal reaches the motor overheat alarm level (oH3).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L1-03 Motor Overheat Alarm Operation Selection (PTC thermistor input) 0 to 3 3 Setting 0: Ramp to stop The drive stops the motor using the deceleration time 1 set in parameter C1-02.
Setting 1: Coast to stop The drive output is switched off and the motor coasts to stop. Setting 2: Emergency Stop (Fast Stop)
The drive stops the motor using the deceleration time set in parameter C1-09. Setting 3: Alarm only The operation is continued and an oH3 alarm is displayed on the digital operator.
L1-04: Motor Overheat Fault Operation Selection (PTC thermistor input) Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. Sets the drive operation when the PTC thermistor input signal reaches the motor overheat fault level (oH4).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L1-04 Motor Overheat Fault Operation Selection (PTC thermistor input) 0 to 2 1 Setting 0: Ramp to stop The drive stops the motor using the deceleration time 1 set in parameter C1-02. Setting 1: Coast to Stop
The drive output is switched off and the motor coasts to stop. Setting 2: Emergency Stop (Fast Stop) The drive stops the motor using the deceleration time set in parameter C1-09.
212 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L1-03 | Motor Overheat Alarm Operation Selection (PTC thermistor input) | 0 to 3 | 3 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L1-04 | Motor Overheat Fault Operation Selection (PTC thermistor input) | 0 to 2 | 1 |
Source page
Page 213
5.8 L: Protection Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 213 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 213 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 L1-05: Motor Temperature Input Filter Time (PTC thermistor input) Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. Applies a filter on the PTC thermistor input signal to prevent inadvertent motor overheat faults. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L1-05 Motor Temperature Input Filter Time (PTC thermistor input) 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.20 s L1-13: Continuous Electrothermal Operation Selection Determines whether to hold the current value of the electrothermal motor protection (L1-01) when the power supply is interrupted. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L1-13 Continuous Electrothermal Operation Selection 0 or 1 1 Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled L2: Undervoltage Detection L2-05: Undervoltage Detection Level (Uv) Determines the voltage at which a Uv1 fault is triggered. This setting rarely needs to be changed. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L2-05<1> Undervoltage Detection Level 150 to 210 Vdc Determined by E1-01 <1> Values shown are specific to 200 V class drives; double the values for 400 V class drives. Note: Install an AC reactor option on the input side of the power supply when setting L2-05 below the default value to prevent damage to drive circuitry. L3: Stall Prevention When the load is too heavy or acceleration ramps are too short, the motor may be unable to keep up with the speed reference, resulting in excessive slip. During acceleration, this usually causes an overcurrent fault (oC), drive overload (oL2), or motor overload (oL1). The drive can prevent the motor from stalling and still reach the desired speed without the user needing to change the acceleration or deceleration ramp settings. The Stall Prevention function can be set separately for acceleration, operating at constant speeds, and deceleration. L3-01: Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration Stall Prevention during acceleration (L3-01) prevents tripping with overcurrent (oC), motor overload (oL1), or drive overload (oL2) faults common when accelerating with heavy loads. L3-01 determines the type of Stall Prevention the drive uses during acceleration. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default 5 L3-01 Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration 0 to 2 1 Setting 0: Disabled No Stall Prevention is provided. If the acceleration time is too short, the drive may not be able to get the motor up to speed fast enough, causing an overload fault. Setting 1: Enabled Enables Stall Prevention during acceleration. If the output current rises above the Stall Prevention level set in L3-02, then the drive stops accelerating. Acceleration will not resume until the output current falls 15% below the setting in L3-02. The Stall Prevention level is automatically reduced in the constant power range.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L1-05 | Motor Temperature Input Filter Time (PTC thermistor input) | 0.00 to 10.00 s | 0.20 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L1-13 | Continuous Electrothermal Operation Selection | 0 or 1 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L2-05<1> | Undervoltage Detection Level | 150 to 210 Vdc | Determined by E1-01 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L3-01 | Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration | 0 to 2 | 1 |
Source page
Page 214
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 214 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.8 L: Protection Functions
Figure5.37 Output current common_TMonly Stall Prevention Level L3-02 During Acceleration L3-02 -15%
Time Output speed
Controls the output speed to prevent the motor from stalling Time Figure 5.37 Stall Prevention During Acceleration for Induction Motors Setting 2: Intelligent Stall Prevention The drive disregards the selected acceleration time and attempts to accelerate in the minimum time. The acceleration rate is adjusted so the current does not exceed the value set to parameter L3-02.
L3-02: Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration Sets the output current level at which the Stall Prevention during acceleration is activated.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L3-02 Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration 0 to 150% <1> <1> <1> The upper limit and default value are determined by the carrier frequency reduction (L8-38). • Lower L3-02 if stalling occurs when using a motor that is relatively small compared to the drive. • Also set parameter L3-03 when operating the motor in the constant power range.
L3-05: Stall Prevention Selection during Run Determines how Stall Prevention works during Run. Stall Prevention during run prevents the motor from stalling by automatically reducing the speed when a transient overload occurs while the motor is running at constant speed.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L3-05 Stall Prevention Selection during Run 0 to 2 1
Note: 1. This function is available in V/f control mode. 2. Stall Prevention during run is disabled when the output frequency is 6 Hz or lower regardless of the L3-05 and L3-06 settings. Setting 0: Disabled Drive runs at the set speed reference. A heavy load may cause the motor to stall and trip the drive with an oC or oL fault. Setting 1: Decelerate using C1-02 If the current exceeds the Stall Prevention level set in parameter L3-06, then the drive will decelerate at decel ramp 1 (C1-02). Once the current level drops below the value of L3-06 minus 2% for 100 ms, the drive accelerates back to the speed reference at the active acceleration ramp.
Setting 2: Decelerate using C1-04 Same as setting 1 except the drive decelerates at decel ramp 2 (C1-04).
L3-06: Stall Prevention Level during Run Sets the Stall Prevention level during run as a percentage of the drive rate output current.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L3-06 Stall Prevention Level during Run 30 to 150%<1> <1> <1> The upper limit and default for this setting is determined by L8-38.
214 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L3-02 | Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration | 0 to 150% <1> | <1> |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L3-05 | Stall Prevention Selection during Run | 0 to 2 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L3-06 | Stall Prevention Level during Run | 30 to 150%<1> | <1> |
Source page
Page 215
5.8 L: Protection Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 215 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 215 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 L4: Speed Detection These parameters set up the speed agree and speed detection functions which can be assigned to the multi-function output terminals. L4-01, L4-02: Speed Agreement Detection Level and Detection Width Parameter L4-01 sets the detection level for the digital output functions “User-set speed agree 1,” “Speed detection 1,” and “Speed detection 2.” Parameter L4-02 sets the hysteresis level for these functions. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L4-01 Speed Agreement Detection Level 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0% L4-02 Speed Agreement Detection Width 0.0 to 40.0% 4.0% For details on setting 2, 3, 4, and 5, refer to H2-01 to H2-05: Terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P1-C1, and P2-C2 Function Selection on page 195. L4-03, L4-04: Speed Agreement Detection Level and Detection Width (+/-) Parameter L4-03 sets the detection level for the digital output functions “Speed agree 2,” “User-set speed agree 2,” “Speed detection 3,” and “Speed detection 4.” Parameter L4-04 sets the hysteresis level for these functions. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L4-03 Speed Agreement Detection Level (+/-) -100.0 to 100.0% 0.0% L4-04 Speed Agreement Detection Width (+/-) 0.0 to 40.0% 4.0% For details on setting 13, 14, 15, and 16, refer to H2-01 to H2-05: Terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, M5-M6, P1-C1, and P2-C2 Function Selection on page 195. L4-05: Speed Reference Loss Detection Selection The drive can detect a loss of an analog speed reference from input A1 and A2. Speed reference loss is detected when the speed reference falls below 10% of the previous reference, or below 5% of the maximum output frequency within 400 ms. Figure5.38 Analog 100% speed reference 10% common_TMonly 400 ms Figure 5.38 Loss of Reference Function Parameter L4-05 selects the operation when a speed reference loss is detected. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L4-05 Speed Reference Loss Detection Selection 0 or 1 0 5 Setting 0: Stop Drive follows the speed reference (which is no longer present) and simply stops the motor. Setting 1: Continue operation with reduced speed reference The drive will continue the operation at the speed reference value set in parameter L4-06. When the external speed reference value is restored, the operation is continued with the external speed reference. L4-06: Speed Reference at Reference Loss Sets the speed reference level the drive runs with when L4-05 = 1 and a reference loss was detected. The value is set as a percentage of the speed reference before the loss was detected. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L4-06 Speed Reference at Reference Loss 0.0 to 100.0% 80.0%
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L4-01 | Speed Agreement Detection Level | 0.0 to 100.0% | 0.0% |
| L4-02 | Speed Agreement Detection Width | 0.0 to 40.0% | 4.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L4-03 | Speed Agreement Detection Level (+/-) | -100.0 to 100.0% | 0.0% |
| L4-04 | Speed Agreement Detection Width (+/-) | 0.0 to 40.0% | 4.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L4-05 | Speed Reference Loss Detection Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L4-06 | Speed Reference at Reference Loss | 0.0 to 100.0% | 80.0% |
Source page
Page 216
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 216 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.8 L: Protection Functions
L4-07: Speed Agree Detection Selection Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. Determines when speed detection is active using parameters L4-01 through L4-04.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L4-07 Speed Agree Detection Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: No detection during baseblock Setting 1: Detection always enabled L4-13: Door Zone Level
Sets the speed level for the car door to open. Once the car slows to the speed set in L4-13, a multi-function output terminal set for “Door zone reached” will close (H2- = 52).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L4-13 Door Zone Level 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0%
L5: Automatic Fault Reset After a fault has occurred, Fault Restart attempts to automatically restart the motor and continue operation instead of stopping. The inverter can reset faults automatically. The maximum number of resets can be selected as well as the operation mode of the fault relay.
The drive attempts to reset itself after one of the faults listed below has occurred. All other faults will need to be reset externally.
Fault Name Fault Name GF Ground Fault ov DC Bus Overvoltage LF Output Phase Loss rr Braking Transistor Fault oC Overcurrent UL3 Undertorque Detection 1 oH1 Heatsink Overheat UL4 Undertorque Detection 2 oL1 Motor Overload SE1 Sequence Error 1 oL2 Drive Overload SE2 Sequence Error 2 oL3 Overtorque Detection 1 SE3 Sequence Error 3 oL4 Overtorque Detection 2 - - Fault Reset Time Chart Parameter L5-01 sets the number of times the drive can attempt to reset itself after one of the faults in the table above occurs. The time chart below illustrates how fault reset works. Figure5.39 Fault common_ TMonly DC Injection/ DC Injection/ Position Lock Position Lock Output Speed Up or Down command Safe Disable Inputs (H1-HC, H2-HC) <2> Brake Control (H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 50) Fault (H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = E) Auto Reset <1>
Figure 5.39 Fault Reset Time Chart <1> The drive will accept an auto reset signal once the Up and Down commands have been removed. <2> Software baseblock (H1- = 8, or 9) can also be used instead of Safe Disable inputs
216 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L4-07 | Speed Agree Detection Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L4-13 | Door Zone Level | 0.0 to 100.0% | 0.0% |
| Fault | Name | Fault | Name |
|---|---|---|---|
| GF | Ground Fault | ov | DC Bus Overvoltage |
| LF | Output Phase Loss | rr | Braking Transistor Fault |
| oC | Overcurrent | UL3 | Undertorque Detection 1 |
| oH1 | Heatsink Overheat | UL4 | Undertorque Detection 2 |
| oL1 | Motor Overload | SE1 | Sequence Error 1 |
| oL2 | Drive Overload | SE2 | Sequence Error 2 |
| oL3 | Overtorque Detection 1 | SE3 | Sequence Error 3 |
| oL4 | Overtorque Detection 2 | - | - |
Source page
Page 217
5.8 L: Protection Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 217 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 217 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Use parameter L5-06 to set up automatic fault reset. To output a signal during fault reset, set one of the output terminals to “Reset enabled” (H2- = 1E). L5-01: Number of Auto Reset Attempts Sets the number of times that the drive may attempt to reset itself. The drive will continuously attempt to reset. If it resets successfully, the reset counter is increased. This operation is repeated each time a fault occurs. When the counter reaches the number set in L5-01, the operation stops and the fault has to be reset manually after correcting the cause. The number of fault reset is reset to zero when: • The drive operates normally for ten minutes following a fault reset. • A fault is cleared manually after protective functions are triggered. • The power supply is cycled. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L5-01 Number of Auto Reset Attempts 0 to 10 Times 0 Time L5-02: Fault Output Operation during Auto Reset Determines if a fault output is triggered (H2- = E) when the drive attempts to reset. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L5-02 Fault Output Operation during Auto Reset 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: No fault output Setting 1: Fault output is set L5-06: Undervoltage Fault Reset Selection Determines whether a limit should be placed on the number of reset attempts after a Uv1 fault. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L5-06 Undervoltage Fault Reset Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: Restrict auto-reset attempts to L5-01 after Uv1 Setting 1: No limit on auto-reset attempts after Uv1 L6: Torque Detection The drive provides two independent torque detection functions that trigger an alarm or fault signal when the load is too heavy (oL), or suddenly drops (UL). These functions are set up using the L6- parameters. Program the digital outputs as shown below to indicate the underload or overload condition to an external device. NOTICE: Damage to Equipment. Use the Torque Detection function of the drive to notify the PLC of potential overcurrent or overload situations at the load prior to a drive overload fault. Failure to comply may cause the drive to fault with a coasting motor and potentially damage equipment. 5 Note: When overtorque occurs in the application, the drive may stop due to overcurrent (oC) or overload (oL1). To prevent this, an overload situation should be indicated to the controller before oC or oL1 occur in the drive. Use the torque detection for this purpose. H2-01 through H2-05 Setting Description B Torque detection 1, N.O. (output closes when overload or underload is detected) 18 Torque detection 2, N.O. (output close when overload or underload is detected)
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L5-01 | Number of Auto Reset Attempts | 0 to 10 Times | 0 Time |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L5-02 | Fault Output Operation during Auto Reset | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L5-06 | Undervoltage Fault Reset Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| H2-01 through H2-05 Setting | Description |
|---|---|
| B | Torque detection 1, N.O. (output closes when overload or underload is detected) |
| 18 | Torque detection 2, N.O. (output close when overload or underload is detected) |
Source page
Page 218
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 218 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.8 L: Protection Functions
Figure 5.40 and Figure 5.41 show the function of overtorque and undertorque detection.
Figure5.40 Motor current / torque common_TMonly 10% hysteresis 10% hysteresis L6-02/05
L6-03/06 L6-03/06 Torque detection 1 (NO) or Torque detection 2 (NO) ON ON Figure 5.40 Overtorque Detection Operation Figure5.41 Motor current / torque 10% hysteresis common_T Monly L6-02/05 L6-03/06 L6-03/06 Torque detection 1 (NO) or Torque detection 2 (NO) ON ON Figure 5.41 Undertorque Detection Operation Note: 1. The torque detection function uses a hysteresis of 10% of the drive rated output current and motor rated torque. 2. In V/f, the level is set as a percentage of the drive rated output current. In OLV, CLV, and CLV/PM, it is set as a percentage of the motor rated torque. L6-01, L6-04: Torque Detection Selection 1, 2 The torque detection function is triggered when the current or torque exceeds the levels set in L6-02 and L6-05 for longer than the time set in L6-03 and L6-06. L6-01 and L6-04 select the conditions for detection and the operation that follows.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L6-01 Torque Detection Selection 1 0 to 8 0 L6-04 Torque Detection Selection 2 0 to 8 0 Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: oL3, oL4 at speed agree (Alarm) Overtorque detection is active only when the output speed is equal to the speed reference, i.e., no detection during acceleration and deceleration. The operation continues after detection and an oL3/oL4 alarm is triggered.
Setting 2: oL3, oL4 at run (Alarm) Overtorque detection works as long as the Up/Down command is active. The operation continues after detection and an oL3 or oL4 alarm is triggered. Setting 3: oL3, oL4 at speed agree (Fault)
Overtorque detection is active only when the output speed is equal to the speed reference, i.e., no detection during acceleration and deceleration. The operation is stopped and an oL3 or oL4 fault is triggered. Setting 4: oL3, oL4 at run (Fault) Overtorque detection works as long as a Up/Down command is active. Operation stops and an oL3 or oL4 fault is triggered.
Setting 5: UL3, UL4 at speed agree (Alarm) Undertorque detection is active only when the output speed is equal to the speed reference, i.e., no detection during acceleration and deceleration. The operation continues after detection and an oL3 or oL4 alarm is triggered. Setting 6: UL3, UL4 at run (Alarm)
Undertorque detection works as long as the Up/Down command is active. The operation continues after detection and an oL3 or oL4 alarm is triggered.
218 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Column | L6-03/06 ON | Column | Column | Column | L6-03/06 ON | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| ON | ON |
| Column | L6-03/06 ON | Column | Column | L6-03/06 ON | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| ON | ON |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L6-01 | Torque Detection Selection 1 | 0 to 8 | 0 |
| L6-04 | Torque Detection Selection 2 | 0 to 8 | 0 |
Source page
Page 219
5.8 L: Protection Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 219 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 219 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Setting 7: UL3, UL4 at speed agree (Fault) Undertorque detection is active only when the output speed is equal to the speed reference, i.e., no detection during acceleration and deceleration. The operation is stopped and an oL3 or oL4 fault is triggered. Setting 8: UL3, UL4 at run (Fault) Undertorque detection works as long as a Up/Down command is active. Operation stops and an oL3 or oL4 fault is triggered. L6-02, L6-05: Torque Detection Level 1, 2 These parameters set the detection levels for the torque detection functions 1 and 2. In V/f control mode, these levels are set as a percentage of the drive rated output current, while in vector control modes these levels are set as a percentage of the motor rated torque. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L6-02 Torque Detection Level 1 0 to 300% 150% L6-05 Torque Detection Level 2 0 to 300% 150% L6-03, L6-06: Torque Detection Time 1, 2 These parameters determine the time required to trigger an alarm or fault after exceeding the levels in L6-02 and L6-05. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.1 s L6-06 Torque Detection Time 2 0.0 to 10.0 s 0.1 s L7: Torque Limit The torque limit function can be used to limit the torque in each of the four quadrants individually and thereby protect the elevator. It can be used in OLV, CLV, and CLV/PM control modes. The limit can be set by parameters. A digital output programmed for “During torque limit” (H2-01 through H2-05 = 30) will be switched when the drive is operating at the torque limit. Setting Torque Limits The torque limits are defined by parameters L7-01 to L7-04 for each of the four operation quadrants. Figure 5.42 shows which of the limit settings is applied in each quadrant. Note: The maximum output torque is ultimately limited by the drive output current. Output torque will not exceed the limit set for the drive rated current, even if the torque limits are set to higher values. Figure5.42 positive torque reference REV run regenerative FWD run motoring Parameter L7-04 Parameter L7-01 quadrant 2 quadrant 1 REV motor rotation FWD motor rotation quadrant 3 quadrant 4 5 Parameter L7-02 Parameter L7-03 REV run motoring FWD run regenerative common_TMonly negative torque reference Figure 5.42 Torque Limit Parameters
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L6-02 | Torque Detection Level 1 | 0 to 300% | 150% |
| L6-05 | Torque Detection Level 2 | 0 to 300% | 150% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L6-03 | Torque Detection Time 1 | 0.0 to 10.0 s | 0.1 s |
| L6-06 | Torque Detection Time 2 | 0.0 to 10.0 s | 0.1 s |
Source page
Page 220
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 220 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.8 L: Protection Functions
L7-01 to L7-04: Torque Limits
These parameters set the torque limits in each operation mode. A setting of 100% is equal to the motor rated torque.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L7-01 Forward Torque Limit 0 to 300% 300% L7-02 Reverse Torque Limit 0 to 300% 300% L7-03 Forward Regenerative Torque Limit 0 to 300% 300% L7-04 Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit 0 to 300% 300% L7-16: Torque Limit Process at Start Assigns a time filter to allow the torque limit to build at start.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L7-16 Torque Limit Process at Start 0 to 1 1 Setting 0: Disabled Toque limit is created at start without a delay time. Disable L7-16 to maximize response time when the application requires sudden acceleration or deceleration at start. Setting 1: Enabled
A time filter is added to allow the torque limit to build at start.
L8: Drive Protection
L8-02: Overheat Alarm Level Sets the overheat alarm (oH) detection level.
The drive will output an alarm when the heatsink temperature exceeds the alarm level set in parameter L8-02. When an output terminal is set for the oH pre-alarm (H2- = 20), the switch will close when the heatsink temperature rises above L8-02.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level 50 to 150°C Determined by o2-04 L8-03: Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection
Sets the operation when an overheat pre-alarm is detected.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection 0 to 3 3 Setting 0: Ramp to stop If an overheat alarm occurs, the drive decelerates to stop using the deceleration ramp currently selected. If a digital output is programmed for “fault” (H2- = E), this output will be triggered.
Setting 1: Coast to stop If heatsink overheat (oH) occurs, the drive switches off the output and the motor coasts to stop. If a digital output is programmed for “fault” (H2- = E), this output will be triggered.
Setting 2: Emergency Stop If an overheat alarm occurs, the drive decelerates to stop using the Emergency Stop ramp (C1-09). If a digital output is programmed for “fault” (H2- = E), this output will be triggered. Setting 3: Alarm only If an overheat alarm occurs, an alarm is output and the drive continues operation.
220 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L7-01 | Forward Torque Limit | 0 to 300% | 300% |
| L7-02 | Reverse Torque Limit | 0 to 300% | 300% |
| L7-03 | Forward Regenerative Torque Limit | 0 to 300% | 300% |
| L7-04 | Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit | 0 to 300% | 300% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L7-16 | Torque Limit Process at Start | 0 to 1 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-02 | Overheat Alarm Level | 50 to 150°C | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-03 | Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection | 0 to 3 | 3 |
Source page
Page 221
5.8 L: Protection Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 221 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 221 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 L8-05: Input Phase Loss Protection Selection Enables or disables the input phase loss detection. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-05 Input Phase Loss Protection Selection 0 to 3<1> 1<2> <1> Setting 1 cannot be selected for models CIMR-LF that are in compliance with IEC/EN 61508 SIL3 Safety Integrity Level 3. <2> The default is 2 for models CIMR-LF that are in compliance with IEC/EN 61508 SIL3 Safety Integrity Level 3. Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled Setting 2: Enabled during operation Setting 3: Enabled during constant speed A phase loss on the power supply side is detected by measuring the voltage ripple in the DC bus and the drive input voltage. Input phase loss (PF) detection is typically triggered by single phase losses, voltage drop or phase imbalance. Input phase loss detection is disabled when Rescue Operation is activated by one of the input terminals. L8-06: Input Phase Loss Detection Level Determines the level for input phase loss detection when a ripple is observed in the DC bus. Phase loss is detected when the value set to L8-06 is greater than the difference between the peak value and the lowest value of the voltage ripple. 100% detection level = voltage (200 V or 400 V) × 2 No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level 0.0 to 50.0% Determined by o2-04 L8-62: Operation Selection at Input Phase Loss Sets stopping method when a input phase loss fault (PF) occurs. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-62 Operation Selection at Input Phase Loss 0 to 3 1 Setting 0: Ramp to stop. Decelerates to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-02. Setting 1: Coast to stop Setting 2: Emergency stop. Decelerates to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. Setting 3: Alarm only. Drive continues operation. L8-07: Output Phase Loss Protection Enables or disables the output phase loss detection, which is triggered when the output current falls below 5% of the drive rated current. Note: 1. Nuisance output phase loss detection may occur if the motor's rated current is significantly less than the drive rated current. Disable this parameter in such cases. 2. Output phase loss detection is not possible when the drive is running a PM motor with light load. 5 3. Set parameters S1-02 and S1-04 as follows when setting L8-07 to 3. An incorrect setting may result in poor performance or nuisance faults or alarms. Set S1-02 (DC Injection Current at Start) to a value greater than 15%. Set S1-04 (DC Injection/Position Lock Time at Start) to a value greater than 100 ms. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-07 Output Phase Loss Protection <1><2> 0 <1> The setting range changes depending on drive software versions. PRG: 7017 or earlier: 0 to 2 PRG: 7200 or later: 0 to 3 <2> Setting 3 is available in the control mode V/f or OLV. Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Fault when one phase is lost An output phase loss fault (LF) is triggered when one output phase is lost. The output shuts off and the motor coasts to stop.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-05 | Input Phase Loss Protection Selection | 0 to 3<1> | 1<2> |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-06 | Input Phase Loss Detection Level | 0.0 to 50.0% | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-62 | Operation Selection at Input Phase Loss | 0 to 3 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-07 | Output Phase Loss Protection | <1><2> | 0 |
Source page
Page 222
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 222 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.8 L: Protection Functions
Setting 2: Fault when two phases are lost An output phase loss fault (LF) is triggered when two output phases are lost. The output shuts off and the motor coasts to stop.
Setting 3: Fault at phase loss at start or when two phases lost mid-operation An output phase loss fault (LF) is triggered when one phase is lost at motor start or when two phases are lost while running at speed. The output shuts off, the motor coasts to a stop. L8-09: Output Ground Fault Detection Selection
Enables or disables the output ground fault detection.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-09 Output Ground Fault Detection Selection 0 or 1 1 Setting 0: Disabled
Ground faults are not detected. Setting 1: Enabled A ground fault (GF) is triggered when high leakage current or a ground short circuit occurs in one or two output phases.
L8-10: Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection
Selects the heatsink cooling fan operation.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-10 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection 0 to 2 0 Setting 0: Run with timer The fan is switched on when a Up/Down command is active. It is switched off with the delay set in parameter L8-11 after the Up/Down command has been released. Using this setting extends the fan lifetime.
Setting 1: Run always The fan runs whenever power is supplied to the drive. Setting 2: Temperature controlled
Cooling fan operated depending on the temperature of the drives heatsink. L8-11: Heatsink Cooling Fan Off Delay Time
Sets the cooling fan switch off-delay time if parameter L8-10 is set to 0.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-11 Heatsink Cooling Fan Off Delay Time 0 to 300 s 60 s L8-12: Ambient Temperature Setting
If the temperature where the drive is mounted is above the specified values, the drive rated current must be reduced for optimal performance life. By setting the ambient temperature to parameter L8-12 and adjusting the installation method setting in L8-35, the drive rating automatically adapts to safe values.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-12 Ambient Temperature Setting -10 to 50°C 40°C L8-15: oL2 (Drive Overload) Characteristics Selection at Low Speeds
Selects whether the drive overload capability (oL fault detection level) is reduced at low speeds in order to prevent premature output transistor failures. Note: Contact Yaskawa for consultation first before disabling this setting.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-15 oL2 Characteristics Selection at Low Speed 0 or 1 1
222 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-09 | Output Ground Fault Detection Selection | 0 or 1 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-10 | Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection | 0 to 2 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-11 | Heatsink Cooling Fan Off Delay Time | 0 to 300 s | 60 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-12 | Ambient Temperature Setting | -10 to 50°C | 40°C |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-15 | oL2 Characteristics Selection at Low Speed | 0 or 1 | 1 |
Source page
Page 223
5.8 L: Protection Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 223 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 223 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Setting 0: Protection disabled at low speed The overload protection level is not reduced. Frequently operating the drive with high output current at low speed can lead to premature drive faults. Setting 1: protection enabled at low speed The overload protection level (oL2 fault detection level) is automatically reduced at speeds below 6 Hz. L8-27: Overcurrent Detection Gain Adjusts the overcurrent detection level when running in CLV/PM to prevent motor damage. A setting of 100% is equal to the motor rated current. When the drive rated current is considerably higher than the motor rated current, use this parameter to decrease the overcurrent level in order to prevent motor demagnetization by too high current. Overcurrent detection will use whichever value is the lowest: the overcurrent level for the drive, or the motor rated current multiplied by L8-27. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-27 Overcurrent Detection Gain 0.0 to 300.0% 300.0% L8-29: Current Unbalance Detection (LF2) Enables or disables output current imbalance detection when running in CLV/PM. Current unbalance can heat up a PM motor and lead to demagnetization of the magnets. The current imbalance detection function prevents such motor damage by monitoring output current and triggering the LF2 fault when current unbalance occurs. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-29 Current Unbalance Detection (LF2) 0 or 1 1 Setting 0: Disabled No current unbalance protection is provided to the motor. Setting 1: Enabled The LF2 fault is triggered if an output current imbalance is detected. Drive output shuts off and the motor coasts to stop. L8-35: Installation Selection Selects the type of installation for the drive and changes the drive overload (oL2) limits accordingly. Note: This parameter is not reset when the drive is initialized. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-35 Installation Selection 0 or 2 Determined by o2-04 Setting 0: IP20 enclosure For an IP20 enclosure drive installed with at a minimum of 30 mm space to the next drive or a cabinet wall. Setting 2: IP20/NEMA 1, UL Type 1 enclosure For drives compliant with IP20/NEMA 1, UL Type 1 enclosure specifications. 5 L8-38: Automatic Torque Boost Function When the output current reaches a certain level the drive automatically reduces the carrier frequency to the level set in L8-39. Because lowering the carrier frequency increases the overload tolerance, the drive is capable of creating considerably more torque. When the output current falls, the carrier frequency switches back to the value set in C6-03. Note: 1. Automatically lowering the carrier frequency increases motor noise. 2. Confirm drive capacity so that the maximum output current is less than the current limit. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-38 Automatic Torque Boost Function 0 or 3 0 Setting 0: Disabled The carrier frequency is not automatically reduced.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-27 | Overcurrent Detection Gain | 0.0 to 300.0% | 300.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-29 | Current Unbalance Detection (LF2) | 0 or 1 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-35 | Installation Selection | 0 or 2 | Determined by o2-04 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-38 | Automatic Torque Boost Function | 0 or 3 | 0 |
Source page
Page 224
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 224 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.8 L: Protection Functions
Setting 3: Enabled The torque capability is improved by reducing the carrier frequency when the output current exceeds a certain value.
L8-39: Reduced Carrier Frequency Determines value the carrier frequency is reduced to by the torque boost function.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-39 Reduced Carrier Frequency 1.0 to 15.0 kHz 3.0 kHz L8-55: Internal Braking Transistor Protection Enables or disables protection for the internal braking transistor.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-55 Internal Braking Transistor Protection 0 or 1 1 Setting 0: Disabled Disable braking transistor protection when not using the internal braking transistor, including the following instances:
• When using a regen converter such as DC5. • When using a regen unit such as RC5. • When using external braking transistor options like CDBR units. • When using the drive in common DC bus applications and the internal braking chopper is not installed. Enabling L8-55 under such conditions can incorrectly trigger a braking transistor fault (rF).
Setting 1: Enabled The following models come with a built-in braking transistor: • CIMR-L20008 to 20115 • CIMR-L40005 to 40060
Enable L8-55 when connecting a braking resistor or a braking resistor unit to the drive built-in braking transistor. Overload Tolerance for Internal Braking Transistor
Below, Figure 5.43 show the overload tolerance level for the drive’s built-in braking transistor. Figure5.43 % 100 Braking Torque = 30%
50% 230 50 8 70% 90 500 30 100% 16 58 160 760 Usage 20 5 common_ (%ED) 130% TMonly (%) 43 106 270 1200 10 150% 380 21 67 150 600 5 80 170 420 3 29 1800 2 1 2 5 10 20 50 100 200 500 1000 2000 Operation Time (s) Figure 5.43 Overload Tolerance for Braking Transistor (CIMR-L20008 to 20115, CIMR-L40005 to 40060)
224 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-39 | Reduced Carrier Frequency | 1.0 to 15.0 kHz | 3.0 kHz |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-55 | Internal Braking Transistor Protection | 0 or 1 | 1 |
| Column | Brak | Column | ing Torqu | e = 30 | % | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 50 | % | 230 | ||||||||||||||
| 50 | % | |||||||||||||||
| 70 | % | 8 | 90 | 500 | ||||||||||||
| 10 | 0% | 16 | 58 | 160 | 760 | |||||||||||
| 10 | 0% | 760 | ||||||||||||||
| 13 | 5 0% | 43 | 106 | 270 | 1200 | |||||||||||
| 15 | 0% | 21 | 67 | 150 | 380 | 600 | ||||||||||
| 150 | ||||||||||||||||
| 8 | 0 1 | 70 | 420 | |||||||||||||
| 8 | 0 | 1 | 70 | |||||||||||||
| 29 | 1800 |
Source page
Page 225
5.8 L: Protection Functions
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 225 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 225 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 L8-77: Oscillation Suppression If speed oscillations with the same frequency as the output frequency occur with an unloaded motor, parameter L8-77 can be adjusted to suppress these oscillations. While watching the motor speed, increase or decrease L8-77 until the oscillation disappears. This parameter rarely requires adjustment. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-77 Oscillation Suppression -100 to 100 0 L8-88: Safe Disable Operation Mode Determines the operation performed by the drive when the Safe Disable input is activated. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-88 Safe Disable Operation Mode 0 or 1 1 Setting 0: Mode 0 Setting 1: Mode 1 When the Safe Disabled Input is triggered, the operator displays and alarm, and the corresponding output terminal will react as follows. L8-88 Safe Di S s e a l b e l c e t i O o p n eration Alarm Display during Safety Disable Alarm Output (H2- = 10) D (H r 2 iv - e R e = a d 6 y ) 0 (mode 0) Hbb ALM flashes ON OFF 1 (mode1) Hbb ALM flashes OFF ON L8-89: Current Monitoring Selection Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. Enables or disables the Current Monitoring function. When this parameter is set to 1 (Enabled), the current monitoring level (L8-99) is added to the conditions required to turn off the Motor Contactor Feedback command at a stop. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default L8-89 Current Monitoring Selection 0, 1 0 Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled L8-99: Current Monitoring Level Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. Sets the current monitoring level as a percentage of the drive’s rated current. When the output current is equal to or below the set level, the Motor Contactor Feedback command turns off if the current monitoring selection is enabled (L8-89 = 1). This parameter is also used to activate the Motor Current Monitor (H2- = 5C). No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default 5 L8-99 Current Monitoring Level 0.0 to 50.0% 10.0%
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-77 | Oscillation Suppression | -100 to 100 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-88 | Safe Disable Operation Mode | 0 or 1 | 1 |
| L8-88 | Safe Disable Operation Selection | Alarm Display during Safety Disable | Alarm Output (H2- = 10) | Drive Ready (H2- = 6) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0 (mode 0) | Hbb | ALM flashes | ON | OFF |
| 1 (mode1) | Hbb | ALM flashes | OFF | ON |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-89 | Current Monitoring Selection | 0, 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| L8-99 | Current Monitoring Level | 0.0 to 50.0% | 10.0% |
Source page
Page 226
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 226 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.9 n: Special Adjustments
5.9 n: Special Adjustments
These parameters handle a variety of specialized adjustments and functions, including AFR Control, resistance between motor lines, PM motor control functions, and current detection adjustments.
n1: Hunting Prevention
n1-08: Leakage Current Vibration Control Selection
Selects the method of Leakage-Current Vibration Control. Parameter n1-08 does not typically require adjustment from it's default value. This parameter rarely needs to be changed.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n1-08<1> Leakage Current Vibration Control Selection 0 or 1 0 <1> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7200 or later. Setting 0: Method 1
Setting 1: Method 2 n2: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Tuning
These parameters are used to achieve speed stability when a load is suddenly applied or removed.
Note: Properly set all motor parameters or perform Auto-Tuning before making changes to the AFR parameters. n2-01: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Gain
Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain in the AFR.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n2-01 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Gain 0.00 to 10.00 1.00 Although this parameter rarely needs to be changed, it may require adjustment in the following situations:
• If hunting occurs, increase the setting value in steps of 0.05 while checking the response. • If response is low, decrease the setting value in steps of 0.05 while checking the response. n2-02, n2-03: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 1, 2
Parameter n2-02 sets the time constant normally used by AFR. Parameter n2-03 sets the time constant during regenerative operation.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n2-02 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 1 0 to 2000 ms 50 ms n2-03 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 2 0 to 2000 ms 750 ms Note: Setting parameter n2-02 higher than n2-03 will trigger an oPE08 error.
Although these parameters rarely need to be changed, they may require adjustment in the following situations: • If hunting occurs, increase n2-02. If response is low, decrease it. • Increase n2-03 if overvoltage occurs with high inertia loads at the end of acceleration or with sudden load changes. • If setting n2-02 to a higher value, also increase C4-02 (Torque Compensation Delay Time Constant 1) proportionally.
226 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n1-08<1> | Leakage Current Vibration Control Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n2-01 | Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Gain | 0.00 to 10.00 | 1.00 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n2-02 | Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 1 | 0 to 2000 ms | 50 ms |
| n2-03 | Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 2 | 0 to 2000 ms | 750 ms |
Source page
Page 227
5.9 n: Special Adjustments
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 227 sliateD retemaraP n5: Inertia Compensation Enabling Inertia Compensation improves the responsiveness of the drive to speed reference changes in applications where a high speed control proportional gain setting (C5-01, C5-03, C5-13) would lead to problems with overshoot, undershoot, or oscillation. Figure 5.44 gives an example of overshoot reduction by Inertia Compensation. Parameters related to this function and the function principle are illustrated in Figure 5.45. Inertia Compensation can only be used in Closed Loop Vector Control for induction or PM motors (A1-02 = 3 or 7). Note: Prior to using Feed Forward, always perform Auto-Tuning or set the correct motor data manually. Also perform ASR Auto-Tuning to set the speed loop gain (C5-01, C5-03, C5-13), or adjust it manually. Fine-tune the other speed control loop parameters (C5-) if required. Figure5.44 1050 Overshoot Time (s) Conventional Speed Control Inertia Compensation Control Figure 5.44 Overshoot Suppression by Inertia Compensation Figure5.45 Figure 5.45 Inertia Compensation Note: Prior to using Inertia Compensation, always perform Auto-Tuning or set the correct motor data manually. and adjust the Speed Control Loop. n5-01: Inertia Compensation Selection Enables or disables the Inertia Compensation function. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n5-01 Inertia Compensation Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: Disabled 5 Setting 1: Enabled n5-02: Motor Acceleration Time Sets the time required to accelerate the motor from a full stop up to the rated speed at the rated torque. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n5-02 Motor Acceleration Time 0.001 to 10.000 s Determined by o2-04 Calculation The motor acceleration time can be calculated by, Where: • JMotor is the motor inertia in kgm2. • nrated is the rated speed of the motor in r/min • Trated is the rated torque of the motor in N⋅m. )nim/r( deepS rotoM )nim/r( deepS rotoM SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 227 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 1050 Suppresses overshoot at the end of acceleration 900 900 750 750 0 0 0 0.5 1 0 0.5 1 Time (s) common_TMonly Inertia Compensation Output common_TMonly U6-26 Inertia Compensation Torque Speed Compensation Value reference after Inertia Soft Starter Compensation n5-02/03 + S L p o e o e p d P C a o n n d tr o I l + + L S o p o e p e D d e C la o y n t a r n o d l Torque reference Speed - C5-01/02/03/04 Torque Limits U1-01 Reference /13/14 C5-06, L7-(cid:3)(cid:3) Speed U6-25 U1-09 Feedback Speed Control Loop Output π J n n5-02 = Motor rated 30 T rated
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n5-01 | Inertia Compensation Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n5-02 | Motor Acceleration Time | 0.001 to 10.000 s | Determined by o2-04 |
Source page
Page 228
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 228 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.9 n: Special Adjustments
Measuring Acceleration Time Take the following steps when measuring the motor acceleration time.
1. Decouple motor and load. 2. Perform Auto-Tuning or manually enter the correct motor data. 3. Properly set up the speed loop (ASR). 4. Set the acceleration time to zero. 5. Set the forward torque limit in parameter L7-01 to 100%. 6. Set the speed reference equal to the motor rated speed. 7. While monitoring the motor speed in U1-05, start the motor in the forward direction and measure the time it takes to reach the rated speed. 8. Reverse the parameter settings above and set the measured time to parameter n5-02. n5-03: Inertia Compensation Gain Parameter n5-03 sets the inertia ratio of the load connected to the motor.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n5-03 Inertia Compensation Gain 0.00 or 100.00 1.00 Calculate the value for n5-03 as explained below.
• JMot - Motor inertia in kgm2 ΣJ = J TS i2 + Σm 3 π 0 n v r_Elev 2 • • T nr r _ _ M M o o t t - - R R a a t t e e d d m m o o t t o o r r s to p r e q e u d e i n in r / N m m in r_Mot • JTS - Traction sheave inertia in kgm2 n5-03 = ΣJ / J • i - Gear ratio (nLoad/nMot) Mot • vr_Elev - Rated elevator speed in m/s • Σm - Mass of all moved parts (car, counterweight, ropes, load<1>) in kg <1> Insert 0 kg for the load to calculate the lowest setting, insert the elevator rated load to calculate the maximum setting for n5-03. Use the lower of calculated values for initial trials and increase n5-03 gradually until the desired performance is achieved. Speed Feedback Compensation: Speed Observer Enabling the Speed Feedback Compensation can reduce oscillation and increase responsiveness to the speed reference by compensating for phase delay. Note: 1. Set n5-07 to 1 to use the Speed Feedback Compensation. 2. Set C5-17 (motor inertia) and C5-18 (load inertia ratio) to the correct values before using the Speed Feedback Compensation. 3. If the product of C5-17 × C5-18 is relatively large, the estimated speed will be very slow. 4. Reduce the products of C5-17 × C5-18 if oscillation is a problem. 5. C5-18 to at least 1.1 when using the Speed Feedback Compensation. A setting of 1.0 or less disables the Speed Feedback Compensation. Adjusting the Speed Feedback Compensation Follow the procedure below to set up the Speed Feedback Compensation 1. Set the drive for Closed Loop Vector for PM motors. 2. Enter the correct data from the motor nameplate and the motor test report to the E5- parameters. 3. Set all ASR-related parameters (C5-) to their most appropriate values. 4. Set the Speed Feedback Compensation to operate in test mode (n5-07). 5. Connect the ropes to the motor. 6. Start operating the elevator while looking at the Speed Feedback Compensation output monitor (U6-56) and the motor speed feedback (U1-05). 7. Adjust the Speed Feedback Compensation gain (n5-08) and C5-18 so that the monitor values in U6-56 and U1-05 are relatively low.
228 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n5-03 | Inertia Compensation Gain | 0.00 or 100.00 | 1.00 |
Source page
Page 229
5.9 n: Special Adjustments
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 229 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 229 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Figure 5.46 shows a block diagram for the Speed Feedback Compensation. Figure5.46 Torque U1-09 ASR Limit Torque Reference O Sp p e e e ra d ting + Kn (1+1/ST) q-Axis - C5-01, -02 Current L7- Control q-Axis Current n5-07 = 1 Speed Observer Gain (P) = 0, 2 = 1 S ou p t e p e u d t m O o b n se ito rv r er n5-08 = 2 = 0, 2 n5-07 Speed Feedback U6-56 common_TMonly Figure 5.46 Speed Feedback Compensation Operation n5-07: Speed Feedback Compensation Selection Enables or disables the Speed Feedback Compensation. Enabling the Speed Feedback Compensation can help stop motor oscillation that results from setting the ASR proportional gain (C5-01) to a high value for faster speed response. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n5-07 Speed Feedback Compensation Selection 0 to 2 0 Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled Setting 2: Speed Feedback Compensation test mode n5-08: Speed Feedback Compensation Gain (P) Sets the proportional gain for the Speed Feedback Compensation. Although this parameter rarely requires adjustment, increasing the gain can help improve responsiveness relative to the load. Lower setting if oscillation occurs. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n5-08 Speed Feedback Compensation Gain (P) 0.00 to 300.00 3.00 n6: Online Tuning Online Tuning compensates insufficient torque and diminished speed control accuracy due to fluctuating motor temperature. n6-01: Online Tuning Selection Selects the type of motor data Online Tuning uses for Open Loop Vector Control. 5 No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n6-01 Online Tuning Selection 0 to 2 2 Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Line-to-line resistance tuning This setting enables line-to-line resistance online tuning. This procedure is effective for speed values up to 6 Hz and improves the overload capacity in the low speed range by adjusting the value set for the motor resistance. Setting 2: Voltage correction The drive adjusts the output voltage during run to improve overload tolerance and minimize the effects of high temperatures on speed accuracy. Note: This setting can only be selected if the Energy Saving function is disabled (b8-01 = 0).
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n5-07 | Speed Feedback Compensation Selection | 0 to 2 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n5-08 | Speed Feedback Compensation Gain (P) | 0.00 to 300.00 | 3.00 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n6-01 | Online Tuning Selection | 0 to 2 | 2 |
Source page
Page 230
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 230 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.9 n: Special Adjustments
n6-05: Online Tuning Gain Sets the compensation gain for the voltage correction in the Online Tuning function (n6-01 = 2). Although this parameter rarely needs to be changed, increase the set value in steps of 0.1 if an overload fault occurs during voltage correction.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n6-05 Online Tuning Gain 0.1 to 50.0 1.0 n8: PM Motor Control Tuning
Parameters in the n8 group are used to adjust the Initial Rotor Pole Position Search function and other PM motor control related functions like the current control loop in CLV/PM or voltage saturation prevention (voltage limit).
Initial Rotor Pole Position Search Settings When a PM motor with a non-absolute encoder such as an incremental encoder with a PG-X3 option is used, the drive needs to search for the rotor pole position before it can operate the motor. This search is performed always:
• when the Up/Down command is issued for the first time after the power has been switched on. • after one of the following errors occurred: dv1, dv2, dv3, dv4, dv6, dv7, PGo, PGoH. • when an Up/Down command issued after the setting of parameter n8-35 had been changed. With default settings the drive will generate a dv8 error if initial rotor pole position search fails (n8-86 = 1). The brake control output (H2- = 50) will not open in this case.
When not using the drive’s brake sequence, include the Motor Pole Search Status signal (digital output programmed for H2- = 61) so that the brake can open only if motor pole position search has been finished successfully. Refer to Setting 61: Motor pole search status on page 203 for details. n8-01: Initial Polarity Estimation Current
Sets the current used for the initial rotor position estimation as a percentage of the motor rated current.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n8-01 Initial Polarity Estimation Current 0 to 100% 50% n8-02: Pole Attraction Current
Sets the pull-in current used to detect rotor position. This setting rarely needs to be changed.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n8-02 Pole Attraction Current 0 to 150% 80% n8-35: Initial Rotor Position Detection Selection
Selects how the rotor position is detected at start.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n8-35 Initial Rotor Position Detection Selection 1 or 2 1 Setting 1: High Frequency Injection
High frequency is injected in order to detect the rotor position. Some noise may be generated from the motor at start. Setting 2: Pulse injection A pulse signal is injected into the motor in order to detect the rotor position.
n8-36: High Frequency Injection Level Sets the frequency level used for High Frequency Injection.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n8-36 High Frequency Injection 25 to 1000 Hz 500 Hz
230 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n6-05 | Online Tuning Gain | 0.1 to 50.0 | 1.0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n8-01 | Initial Polarity Estimation Current | 0 to 100% | 50% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n8-02 | Pole Attraction Current | 0 to 150% | 80% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n8-35 | Initial Rotor Position Detection Selection | 1 or 2 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n8-36 | High Frequency Injection | 25 to 1000 Hz | 500 Hz |
Source page
Page 231
5.9 n: Special Adjustments
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 231 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 231 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 n8-37: High Frequency Injection Amplitude Sets the amplitude for High Frequency Injection as a percentage of the voltage (200 V or 400 V). No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n8-37 High Frequency Injection Amplitude 0.0 to 99.9% 20.0% n8-81: High Frequency Injection during Rescue Operation Sets the frequency used for High Frequency Injection during Rescue Operation. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n8-81 High Frequency Injection during Rescue Operation 25 to 1000 Hz 90 Hz n8-82: High Frequency Injection Amplitude during Rescue Operation Sets the amplitude for High Frequency Injection during Rescue Operation as a percentage of the voltage (200 V or 400 V). No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n8-82 High Frequency Injection Amplitude during Rescue Operation 0.1 to 99.9% 15.0% n8-84: Polarity Detection Current Sets the current level (E5-03) as a percentage for detecting polarity during Initial Polarity Estimation. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n8-84 Polarity Detection Current 0 to 150% 100% n8-86: Magnet Pole Search Error Detection Selection Enables fault detection for Initial Polarity Estimation (dv8). No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n8-86 Magnet Pole Search Error Detection Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: Disabled After searching for the rotor pole position one time, the drive starts using the detected rotor position. If the detected position is wrong, an error occurs when the drive attempts to run the motor. The initial pole search takes approximately 1.5 s. Setting 1: Enabled The rotor pole position search is executed multiple times. The drive starts using the detected rotor position only if there is no difference between the search results. Otherwise a dv8 error will be output. The initial pole search takes approximately 1.5 to 5.0 s. Other Settings Parameters n8-29 to n8-33 can be used to adjust the current control loop. Adjustment is not normally required. 5 Parameter n8-62 sets a voltage limit in order to prevent voltage saturation. n8-29: q-Axis Current Control Gain during Normal Operation Sets the q-Axis proportional gain for the automatic current regulator. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n8-29 q-Axis Current Control Gain during Normal Operation 0 to 2000 rad/s 1000 rad/s n8-30: q-Axis Current Control Integral Time during Normal Operation Sets the q-Axis integral time for the automatic current regulator. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n8-30 q-Axis Current Control Integral Time during Normal Operation 0.0 to 100.0 ms 10.0 ms
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n8-37 | High Frequency Injection Amplitude | 0.0 to 99.9% | 20.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n8-81 | High Frequency Injection during Rescue Operation | 25 to 1000 Hz | 90 Hz |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n8-82 | High Frequency Injection Amplitude during Rescue Operation | 0.1 to 99.9% | 15.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n8-84 | Polarity Detection Current | 0 to 150% | 100% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n8-86 | Magnet Pole Search Error Detection Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n8-29 | q-Axis Current Control Gain during Normal Operation | 0 to 2000 rad/s | 1000 rad/s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n8-30 | q-Axis Current Control Integral Time during Normal Operation | 0.0 to 100.0 ms | 10.0 ms |
Source page
Page 232
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 232 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.9 n: Special Adjustments
n8-32: d-Axis Current Control Gain during Normal Operation Sets the d-Axis proportional gain for the automatic current regulator.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n8-32 d-Axis Current Control Gain during Normal Operation 0 to 2000 rad/s 1000 rad/s n8-33: d-Axis Current Control Integral Time during Normal Operation Sets the d-Axis integral time for the automatic current regulator.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n8-33 d-Axis Current Control Integral Time during Normal Operation 0.0 to 100.0 ms 10.0 ms n8-62: Output Voltage Limit Sets the output voltage limit to prevent voltage saturation of the motor. Avoid setting this value higher than the input voltage on the motor nameplate to maintain optimum motor performance.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n8-62<1> Output Voltage Limit 0.0 to 230.0 Vac 200 Vac <1> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double values when using a 400 V class drive. n9: Current Detection Adjustments
n9-60: A/D Conversion Start Delay
Sets a delay time used for A/D conversion of the current. This value rarely needs to be changed. However, it can help to resolve speed ripple problems at constant speed when using a PM motor. Prior to adjusting this value, make sure all other parameters (motor data, speed loop settings) are adjusted correctly.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default n9-60 A/D Conversion Start Delay 0.0 to 40.0 μs Determined by o2-04
232 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n8-32 | d-Axis Current Control Gain during Normal Operation | 0 to 2000 rad/s | 1000 rad/s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n8-33 | d-Axis Current Control Integral Time during Normal Operation | 0.0 to 100.0 ms | 10.0 ms |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n8-62<1> | Output Voltage Limit | 0.0 to 230.0 Vac | 200 Vac |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| n9-60 | A/D Conversion Start Delay | 0.0 to 40.0 μs | Determined by o2-04 |
Source page
Page 233
5.10 o: Operator Related Settings
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 233 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 233 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 5.10 o: Operator Related Settings These parameters control the various functions, features, and display of the digital operator. o1: Digital Operator Display Selection These parameters determine the data display on the digital operator. o1-01: Drive Mode Unit Monitor Selection When using an LED operator, pressing the up arrow key will display the following data: speed reference → rotational direction → output speed → output current → o1-01 selection. Parameter o1-01 allows the user select the content of the last monitor in this sequence. This is done by entering the 1 part of U1-. Certain monitors are not available in some control modes. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default 105 to 699 o1-01 Drive Mode Unit Monitor Selection U1-04 (Control Mode) to 106 (U1-06) U6-99 (Option Monitor 20)<1> <1> U2- and U3- parameters cannot be selected. o1-02: User Monitor Selection after Power Up Selects which monitor parameter is displayed upon power up. Certain monitors are not available in some control modes. Refer to U: Monitor Parameters on page 258 for a list of monitors. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o1-02 User Monitor Selection after Power Up 1 to 5 1 Setting 1: Speed reference (U1-01) Setting 2: Motor direction Setting 3: Output speed (U1-02) Setting 4: Output current (U1-03) Setting 5: User-selected monitor (set by o1-01) If o1-02 is set to 5, o1-01 can be used to change the content of this monitor. o1-03: Digital Operator Display Unit Selection Sets the units used to display speed related settings and monitors as well as accel/decel rate settings and jerk settings. Refer to Digital Operator Display Unit Selection on page 95. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o1-03 Digital Operator Display Unit Selection 0 to 6 1 Setting 0: 0.01 Hz units Setting 1: 0.01% units (100% = max. output frequency) Setting 2: r/min units (calculated by the max output frequency and the no. of motor poles) Setting 3: User-set units (use o1-10, o1-11) 5 Set o1-03 to 3 for user-set units, then set parameters o1-10 and o1-11. Set the value use for the maximum frequency reference to o1-10. The placement of the decimal point in this number should be set to o1-11. For example, to have the maximum output speed displayed as “100.00”, set the o1-10 = 1000 and o1-11 = 2 (i.e., 1000 with 2 decimal points). Setting 4: Elevator units 1 (speed in m/s, accel/decel rate and jerk in s) Setting 5: Elevator units 2 (speed in m/s, accel/decel rate in m/s2, jerk in m/s3) Setting 6: Elevator units 3 (speed in ft/min, accel/decel rate in ft/s2, jerk in ft/s3)
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o1-01 | Drive Mode Unit Monitor Selection | 105 to 699 U1-04 (Control Mode) to U6-99 (Option Monitor 20)<1> | 106 (U1-06) |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o1-02 | User Monitor Selection after Power Up | 1 to 5 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o1-03 | Digital Operator Display Unit Selection | 0 to 6 | 1 |
Source page
Page 234
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 234 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.10 o: Operator Related Settings
o1-04: V/f Pattern Setting Units
Determines the units used for the frequency reference when setting parameters that create the V/f pattern: E1-04, E1-06, E1-09, E1-11, and E2-04. For motor 2, this includes parameters E3-04, E3-06, E3-07, E3-09, and E4-04. Enabled only in vector control modes (CLV and CLV/PM).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o1-04 V/f Pattern Setting Units 0 or 1 Determined by A1-02 Setting 0: Hz Setting 1: r/min Note: For motor 2, o1-04 can only be set to 0 for Hertz. o1-05: LCD Contrast Control
Sets the brightness of the LCD operator (option). Lower the setting to make the LCD brighter or raise the setting to make the LCD darker.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o1-05<1> LCD Contrast Control 0 to 5 3 <1> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7200 or later. o1-06: User Monitor Selection Mode
Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. The digital operator display monitors shown directly below the active monitor are the next two sequential monitors. If o1-06 (User Monitor Selection Mode) is set to “1: 3 Monitor Selectable”, those two monitors are locked as specified by parameters o1-07 and o1-08 and will not change as the top parameter is scrolled with the Up/Down Arrow keys.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o1-06 User Monitor Selection Mode 0, 1 0 Setting 0: 3 Monitor Sequential (Displays the next 2 sequential monitors) Setting 1: 3 Monitor Selectable (o1-07, and o1-08 selected monitor is displayed)
o1-07: Second Line Monitor Selection Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. For example, set “104” to display monitor parameter U1-04. Selects the monitor displayed on the second line. The monitor parameter number is entered into the spaces provided: U-. Some monitors are only available in certain control modes.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default 101 to 699 o1-07 Second Line Monitor Selection U1-01 (Speed Reference) to 102 U6-99 (Option Monitor 20) o1-08: Third Line Monitor Selection Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. For example, set “104” to display monitor parameter U1-04. Selects the monitor displayed on the third line. The monitor parameter number is entered into the spaces provided: U-. Some monitors are only available in certain control modes.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default 101 to 699 o1-08 Third Line Monitor Selection U1-01 (Speed Reference) to 103 U6-99 (Option Monitor 20)
234 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o1-04 | V/f Pattern Setting Units | 0 or 1 | Determined by A1-02 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o1-05<1> | LCD Contrast Control | 0 to 5 | 3 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o1-06 | User Monitor Selection Mode | 0, 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o1-07 | Second Line Monitor Selection | 101 to 699 U1-01 (Speed Reference) to U6-99 (Option Monitor 20) | 102 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o1-08 | Third Line Monitor Selection | 101 to 699 U1-01 (Speed Reference) to U6-99 (Option Monitor 20) | 103 |
Source page
Page 235
5.10 o: Operator Related Settings
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o1-10 | User-Set Display Units Maximum Value | 1 to 60000 | Determined by o1-03 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o1-11 | User-Set Display Units Decimal Display | 0 to 3 | Determined by o1-03 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o1-12 | Length Units | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o1-20 | Traction Sheave Diameter | 100 to 2000 mm<1> | 400 mm<1> |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o1-21 | Roping Ratio | 1 to 4 | 2 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o1-22 | Mechanical Gear Ratio | <1> | Determined by A1-02 |
Source page
Page 236
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 236 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.10 o: Operator Related Settings
o1-23: HBB Non Display Select Shows or hides the HBB command on the digital operator while the safety signal is being input.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o1-23<1> HBB Non Display Select 0 or 1 0 <1> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7200 or later. Setting 0: Show HBB
HBB is displayed on the digital operator while the safety signal is being input. Setting 1: Hide HBB HBB is not displayed on the digital operator while the safety signal is being input.
o2: Digital Operator Keypad Functions
These parameters determine the functions assigned to the operator keys.
o2-01: LO/RE (LOCAL/REMOTE) Key Function Selection Parameter o2-01 determines whether the LO/RE key on the digital operator will be enabled or not for switching between LOCAL and REMOTE.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o2-01 LO/RE Key Function Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: Disabled The LO/RE key is disabled. Setting 1: Enabled
The LO/RE switches between LOCAL and REMOTE operation. Switching is possible during stop only. When LOCAL is selected, the LED indicator on the LO/RE key will light up. o2-02: STOP Key Function Selection
Determines if the STOP key on the digital operator can still be used to stop drive operation when the drive is being controlled from a remote source (i.e., not from digital operator).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o2-02 STOP Key Function Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled
The STOP key will terminate drive operation even if the Up/Down command source is not assigned to the digital operator. Cycle the Up/Down command to restart the drive if the drive has been stopped by pressing the STOP key. o2-03: User Parameter Default Value
After completely setting up drive parameters, save the values as user-set defaults with parameter o2-03. After saving the values, parameter A1-03 (Initialize Parameters) will offer the choice of “1110: User Initialize”. Selecting 1110 resets all parameters to the user-set default values. Refer to A1-03: Initialize Parameters on page 153 for details on drive initialization.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o2-03 User Parameter Default Value 0 to 2 0 Setting 0: No change (awaiting command) Setting 1: Set User Initialize values The current parameter settings are saved as user-set default for a later User Initialization. Setting o2-03 to 1 and pressing the ENTER key saves the values and returns the display to 0.
236 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o1-23<1> | HBB Non Display Select | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o2-01 | LO/RE Key Function Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o2-02 | STOP Key Function Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o2-03 | User Parameter Default Value | 0 to 2 | 0 |
Source page
Page 237
5.10 o: Operator Related Settings
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 237 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 237 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Setting 2: Clear User Initialize Values All user-set defaults for “User Initialize” are cleared. Setting o2-03 to 2 and pressing the ENTER key erases the values and returns the display to 0. o2-04: Drive Model Selection This parameter must be set when replacing the control board or the terminal board for any reason. For information on the drive model selection, refer to Defaults by Drive Model Selection (o2-04) on page 395. NOTICE: Drive performance will suffer and protective functions will not operate properly if the correct drive capacity is not set to o2-04. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o2-04 Drive Model Selection - Determined by drive capacity o2-05: Speed Reference Setting Method Selection Determines if the ENTER key must be pressed after changing the speed reference using the digital operator while in the Drive Mode. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o2-05 Speed Reference Setting Method Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: ENTER key required Every time the speed reference is changed using the digital operator, the ENTER key must be pressed for the drive to accept the change. Setting 1: ENTER key not required The output speed changes immediately when the reference is changed by the up or down arrow keys on the digital operator. The ENTER key does not need to be pressed. The speed reference is saved for 5 s after it is changed. The operator display flashes when settings can be made for the frequency reference. Figure5.47 common_TMonly Figure 5.47 Ready for Setting Speed Reference o2-06: Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Disconnected Determines whether the drive will stop when the digital operator is removed in LOCAL mode or when b1-02 is set to 0. When the operator is reconnected, the display will indicate that it was disconnected. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o2-06 Digital Operator Disconnection Operation 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: Continue operation 5 The operation is continued. Setting 1: Trigger a fault The operation is stopped and an “oPr” fault is triggered. The motor coasts to stop.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o2-04 | Drive Model Selection | - | Determined by drive capacity |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o2-05 | Speed Reference Setting Method Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o2-06 | Digital Operator Disconnection Operation | 0 or 1 | 0 |
Source page
Page 238
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 238 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.10 o: Operator Related Settings
o3: Copy Function
These parameters control the Copy function of the digital operator. The Copy function stores parameter settings into the memory of the digital operator to facilitate the transfer of those settings to other drives that are the same model, capacity, and same control mode setting. Refer to Copy Function Related Displays on page 291 for a description of errors and displays.
o3-01 Copy Function Selection Instructs the drive to Read, Write, or Verify parameter settings.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o3-01 Copy Function Selection 0 to 3 0
Setting 0: Copy Select (no function) Setting 1: INV → OP READ Copies all parameters from the drive to the digital operator. Note: The copy protection for the digital operator is enabled by default. Set o3-02 to 1 to unlock copy protection. Setting 2: OP → INV WRITE
Compares the parameters in the drive with the parameter settings saved on the digital operator for matches. Setting 3: OP ↔ INV VERIFY Parameters in the drive are compared with the parameter settings saved on the digital operator to see if they match.
o3-02 Copy Allowed Selection Allows and restricts the use of the Copy function.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o3-02 Copy Allowed Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled
o4: Maintenance Monitor Settings
o4-01: Cumulative Operation Time Setting Sets the cumulative operation time of the drive. The user can also manually set this parameter to begin keeping track of operation time from some desired value. Total operation time can be viewed in monitor U4-01.
Note: The value in o4-01 is set in 10 h units. For example, a setting of 30 will set the cumulative operation time counter to 300 h. 300 h will also be displayed in monitor U4-01. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o4-01 Cumulative Operation Time Setting 0 to 9999 0 o4-02: Cumulative Operation Time Selection
Selects the conditions for how the drive keeps track of its total operation time. This time log can be viewed in U4-01.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o4-02 Cumulative Operation Time Selection 0 or 1 1 Setting 0: Power on time
The drive logs the time it is connected to a power supply, regardless if the motor is running or not. Setting 1: Run time The drive logs the time that the output is active. This includes whenever the Up/Down command is active (even if the motor is not rotating) and when there is voltage output.
238 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o3-01 | Copy Function Selection | 0 to 3 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o3-02 | Copy Allowed Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o4-01 | Cumulative Operation Time Setting | 0 to 9999 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o4-02 | Cumulative Operation Time Selection | 0 or 1 | 1 |
Source page
Page 239
5.10 o: Operator Related Settings
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 239 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 239 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 o4-03: Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting Sets the value for how long the cooling fan has been operating. This value can be viewed in monitor U4-03. Parameter o4-03 also sets the base value used for the cooling fan maintenance, which is displayed in U4-04. Reset this parameter to 0 after replacing the cooling fan. Note: 1. The value in o4-03 increases after every 10 hours of use. A setting of 30 will set the cooling fan operation time counter to 300 h. “300” will be displayed in monitor U4-03. 2. The cooling fan may require maintenance at an earlier date in harsher environments. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o4-03 Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting 0 to 9999 0 o4-05: Capacitor Maintenance Setting Sets value of the maintenance monitor for the DC bus capacitors displayed in U4-05 as a percentage of the total expected performance life. Reset this value to 0 after replacing the DC bus capacitors. Note: The actual maintenance time will depend on the environment where the drive is used. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o4-05 Capacitor Maintenance Setting 0 to 150% 0% o4-07: DC Bus Pre-charge Relay Maintenance Setting Sets the value of the softcharge bypass relay maintenance time displayed in U4-06 as a percentage of the total expected performance life. Reset this value to 0 after replacing the bypass relay. Note: The actual maintenance time will depend on the environment where the drive is used. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o4-07 DC Bus Pre-charge Relay Maintenance Setting 0 to 150% 0% o4-09: IGBT Maintenance Setting Sets the value of the IGBT maintenance time displayed in U4-07 as a percentage of the total expected performance life. Reset this value to 0 after replacing the IGBTs. Note: The actual maintenance time will depend on the environment where the drive is used. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o4-09 IGBT Maintenance Setting 0 to 150% 0% o4-11: U2, U3 Initialization Resets the fault trace and fault history monitors (U2- and U3-). Initializing the drive does not reset these monitors. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o4-11 U2, U3 Initialization 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: No action The drive keeps the record already saved concerning fault trace and fault history. 5 Setting 1: Reset fault data Resets the data for the U2- and U3- monitors. Once o4-11 is set to 1 and the ENTER key is pressed, fault data is erased and the display returns to 0.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o4-03 | Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting | 0 to 9999 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o4-05 | Capacitor Maintenance Setting | 0 to 150% | 0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o4-07 | DC Bus Pre-charge Relay Maintenance Setting | 0 to 150% | 0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o4-09 | IGBT Maintenance Setting | 0 to 150% | 0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o4-11 | U2, U3 Initialization | 0 or 1 | 0 |
Source page
Page 240
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 240 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.10 o: Operator Related Settings
o4-12: kWh Monitor Initialization
Resets the kWh monitors U4-10 and U4-11. Initializing the drive or cycling the power does not reset these monitors.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o4-12 kWh Monitor Initialization 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: No Action The kWh data are kept.
Setting 1: Reset kWh Data Resets the kWh counter. The monitors U4-10 and U4-11 will display “0” after they are initialized. Once o4-12 is set to 1 and the ENTER key is pressed, kWh data is erased and the display returns to 0.
o4-13: Number of Travels Counter Reset The number of travels counter displayed in U4-24/25 is not reset when the power is cycled or the drive is initialized. Use o4-13 to reset U4-24/25.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o4-13 Number of Travels Counter Reset 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: No Action Keeps the number of travels counter.
Setting 1: Resets the Number of Travels Resets the number of travels counter. The monitor U4-24/25 will show 0. Once o4-13 is set to 1 and the ENTER key is pressed, the counter value is erased and the display returns to 0. o4-15: Maintenance Alarm Snooze Period
After a maintenance alarm output has been triggered, o4-15 determines the level that will trigger the next alarm for the same component. The same alarm will be triggered by the detection level that triggered the original alarm plus the level set in o4-15.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o4-15 Maintenance Alarm Setting 0 to 20% 2% <1> <1> Parameter setting value is not reset to the default value during drive initialization (A1-03). o4-16: Maintenance Monitoring Selection
Selects the Maintenance Monitor by using bits 0 to 3.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default o4-16 Maintenance Monitoring Selection 0000 to 1111 1000 <1> <1> Parameter setting value is not reset to the default value during drive initialization (A1-03).
All bits = 0: Maintenance Monitors are disabled bit 0: LT1 (cooling fan) bit 1: LT2 (DC bus capacitors) bit 2: LT3 (soft-charge bypass relay) bit 3: LT4 (IGBTs have passed 90% of the their life expectancy)
240 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o4-12 | kWh Monitor Initialization | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o4-13 | Number of Travels Counter Reset | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o4-15 | Maintenance Alarm Setting | 0 to 20% | 2% <1> |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| o4-16 | Maintenance Monitoring Selection | 0000 to 1111 | 1000 <1> |
Source page
Page 241
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 241 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 241 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 5.11 S: Elevator Parameters This section describes various functions and faults needed to operate an elevator application: braking sequence, slip compensation, optimal adjustments at start and stop, Rescue Operation, and elevator-related faults. S1: Brake Sequence The drive supports braking sequences using an analog input terminal to control torque compensation at start (H3- = 14), and braking sequences that do not require an analog input to set the torque compensation level. Refer to Brake Sequence on page 116 for details. S1-01: Zero Speed Level at Stop Determines the speed to begin applying DC Injection (or Position Lock) when the drive is ramping to stop (b1-03 = 0). Set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S1-01 Zero Speed Level at Stop 0.000 to 9.999% Determined by A1-02 The function set by S1-01 changes depending on the control mode: • V/f Control or OLV Control (A1-02 = 0, 2) For these control modes, parameter S1-01 sets the starting speed for DC Injection Braking at stop. Once the output speed falls below the setting of S1-01, the amount of DC Injection Braking current set in S1-03 is injected into the motor for the time set in parameter S1-05. • CLV Control or CLV/PM Control (A1-02 = 3, 7) For these control modes, parameter S1-01 sets the starting speed for Position Lock at stop. Once the motor speed falls below the setting of S1-01, Position Lock is enabled for the time set in parameter S1-05. S1-02: DC Injection Current at Start Determines the amount of current to use for DC Injection at start. Set as a percentage of the drive rated current. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S1-02 DC Injection Current at Start 0 to 100% 50% S1-03: DC Injection Current at Stop Determines the amount of current to use for DC Injection at stop. Set as a percentage of the drive rated current. When using OLV Control, the DC injection current is determined by multiplying S1-03 by S3-25 or S3-26. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S1-03 DC Injection Current at Stop 0 to 100% 50% S1-04: DC Injection / Position Lock Time at Start Determines how long the drive should perform DC Injection at start. In CLV and CLV/PM, S1-04 determines how long Position Lock should be performed. During this time, the drive allows motor flux to develop, which is essential for 5 applying torque quickly once the brake is released. A setting of 0.00 disables S1-04. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S1-04 DC Injection / Position Lock Time at Start 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.40 s S1-05: DC Injection / Position Lock Time at Stop Determines how long the drive should perform DC Injection at stop. In CLV and CLV/PM, S1-05 determines how long Position Lock should be performed. A setting of 0.00 disables S1-05. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S1-05 DC Injection / Position Lock Time at Stop 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.60 s
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S1-01 | Zero Speed Level at Stop | 0.000 to 9.999% | Determined by A1-02 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S1-02 | DC Injection Current at Start | 0 to 100% | 50% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S1-03 | DC Injection Current at Stop | 0 to 100% | 50% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S1-04 | DC Injection / Position Lock Time at Start | 0.00 to 10.00 s | 0.40 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S1-05 | DC Injection / Position Lock Time at Stop | 0.00 to 10.00 s | 0.60 s |
Source page
Page 242
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 242 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
S1-06: Brake Release Delay Time Determines the time that must pass after an Up/Down command is entered before the output terminal set for “Brake control” (H2- = 50) is triggered. Adjusting this delay time can help when there is not enough time to develop the appropriate amount of motor flux. Be sure to also increase the time S1-04 when setting S1-06 to relatively long delay time.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S1-06 Brake Release Delay Time 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.20 s S1-07: Brake Close Delay Time Determines the time that must pass after zero speed is reached before the output terminal set for "Brake control" (H2- = 50) is released.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S1-07 Brake Close Delay Time 0.00 to [S1-05] 0.10 s S1-10: Run Command Delay Time Sets the time the drive waits after receiving an Up/Down command before starting operation. The time set should give the motor contactor enough time to close.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S1-10 Run Command Delay Time 0.00 to 1.00 s 0.10 s S1-11: Output Contactor Open Delay Time Determines the time that must pass for an output terminal set for “Output contactor control” (H2- = 51) to be released after the drive has stopped and drive output has been shut off.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S1-11 Output Contactor Open Delay Time 0.00 to 1.00 s 0.10 s S1-12: Motor Contactor Control During Auto-Tuning Selection Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7016 or later. Determines the state of the output contactor control command (H2- = 51) during Auto-Tuning. The contactor closes as soon as the Enter key is pressed in the Auto-Tuning start menu.
242 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S1-06 | Brake Release Delay Time | 0.00 to 10.00 s | 0.20 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S1-07 | Brake Close Delay Time | 0.00 to [S1-05] | 0.10 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S1-10 | Run Command Delay Time | 0.00 to 1.00 s | 0.10 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S1-11 | Output Contactor Open Delay Time | 0.00 to 1.00 s | 0.10 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S1-12 | Motor Contactor Control during Auto-Tuning | 0 to 2<1><2> | 0 |
Source page
Page 243
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 243 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 243 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 S1-26: Emergency Stop Start Level Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. Sets the Emergency Stop Start Level as a percentage of the Maximum Output Frequency. This setting is available when the control mode is set to Closed Loop Vector Control (A1-02 = 3) or Closed Loop Vector Control for PM Motors (A1-02 = 7) and the stopping method is set to Elevator Emergency Stop (b1-03 = 4). The drive coasts to a stop after the Up/Down command is cleared and when the value of U1-05 (Speed Feedback) is equal to or greater than the value of S1-26 (Emergency Stop Start Level). The drive ramps to a stop after the Up/Down command is cleared and when the value of U1-05 (Speed Feedback) is lower than the value of S1-26 (Emergency Stop Start Level). No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S1-26 Emergency Stop Start Level 0.0 to 100.0% 10.0% S2: Slip Compensation for Elevators The slip compensation function automatically adjusts the speed reference for leveling operation depending on the load measured at constant speed. S2 parameters tune the slip compensation function to improve the landing accuracy. Slip Compensation requires that the drive be set for V/f Control or Open Loop Vector Control. S2-01: Motor Rated Speed Sets the rated speed of the motor. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S2-01 Motor Rated Speed 300 to 1800 rpm 1380 rpm S2-02/S2-03: Slip Compensation Gain in Motoring Mode / Regenerative Mode Slip compensation for leveling speed can be set separately for motoring and regenerative states to help improve the accuracy of leveling. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S2-02 Slip Compensation Gain in Motoring Mode 0.0 to 5.0 0.7 S2-03 Slip Compensation Gain in Regenerative Mode 0.0 to 5.0 1.0 S2-05: Slip Compensation Torque Detection Delay Time Sets a delay time before detecting torque for slip compensation. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S2-05 Slip Compensation Torque Detection Delay Time 0 to 10000 ms 1000 ms S2-06: Slip Compensation Torque Detection Filter Time Constant Sets the filter time constant applied to the torque signal used for the slip compensation value calculation. 5 No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S2-06 Slip Compensation Torque Detection Filter Time Constant 0 to 2000 ms 500 ms
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S1-26 | Emergency Stop Start Level | 0.0 to 100.0% | 10.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S2-01 | Motor Rated Speed | 300 to 1800 rpm | 1380 rpm |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S2-02 | Slip Compensation Gain in Motoring Mode | 0.0 to 5.0 | 0.7 |
| S2-03 | Slip Compensation Gain in Regenerative Mode | 0.0 to 5.0 | 1.0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S2-05 | Slip Compensation Torque Detection Delay Time | 0 to 10000 ms | 1000 ms |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S2-06 | Slip Compensation Torque Detection Filter Time Constant | 0 to 2000 ms | 500 ms |
Source page
Page 244
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 244 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
S3: Start/Stop Optimization
S3-01 / S3-02: Position Lock Gain at Start 1 / 2
Sets gain levels 1 and 2 for the Position Lock at start function. Position Lock at start adjusts the internal torque reference value depending on the position deviation to hold the car in place when the brake is released. S3-01 sets the gain used to adjust the speed reference During Position Lock. S3-02 sets gain to adjust the internal torque reference directly (Anti-Rollback function). Increase S3-01 and S3-02 if there is a problem with rollback when the brake is released. Decrease S3-01 and S3-02 if motor oscillation occurs during Position Lock.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-01 Position Lock Gain at Start 1 0 to 100 5 S3-02 Position Lock Gain at Start 2 (Anti-Rollback Gain) 0.00 to 100.00 0.00 Note: 1. Check the C5- parameters to make sure the speed control loop settings are correct before making any adjustments to the Position Lock gain. 2. Sometimes a fault may occur with detecting the direction of motor rotation (dv4) when using Closed Loop Vector for PM motors. To correct this, either increase the settings of S3-01 and S3-02, or increase the number of pulses needed to trigger dv4 (F1-19). S3-03: Position Lock Gain at Stop
Sets the gain used by the Position Lock control loop at stop to hold the car in place while the brake is applied. Setting S3-03 to a high value will increase the ability of the drive to hold the car in place. Setting S3-03 too high can cause motor oscillation and car vibration.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-03 Position Lock Gain at Stop 0 to 100 5 Note: 1. Check the C5- parameters to make sure the speed control loop settings are correct before making any adjustments to the Position Lock gain. 2. Faults may occur when detecting the direction of motor rotation (dv4) when using CLV/PM. To correct this, either increase the settings of S3-01 and S3-02, or increase the number of pulses required to trigger dv4 (F1-19). S3-04: Position Lock Bandwidth Determines the bandwidth around the locked position to enable a digital output set for H2- = 33 (within position lock bandwidth). The output will be triggered when the car moves from the Position Lock start point to plus or minus the number of pulses set to S3-04.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-04 Position Lock Bandwidth 0 to 16383 10 S3-10: Starting Torque Compensation Increase Time Sets a time constant for the torque reference to reach 300%. Enabled by setting an analog input terminal for torque compensation (H3- = 14).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-10 Starting Torque Compensation Increase Time 0 to 5000 ms 500 ms S3-12: Starting Torque Compensation Bias in Down Direction Adds a bias to torque compensation in the Down direction.
Refer to Adjusting the Torque Compensation at Start on page 118 for details.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-12 Starting Torque Compensation Bias in Down Direction -40.0 to 40.0% 0.00%
244 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-01 | Position Lock Gain at Start 1 | 0 to 100 | 5 |
| S3-02 | Position Lock Gain at Start 2 (Anti-Rollback Gain) | 0.00 to 100.00 | 0.00 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-03 | Position Lock Gain at Stop | 0 to 100 | 5 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-04 | Position Lock Bandwidth | 0 to 16383 | 10 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-10 | Starting Torque Compensation Increase Time | 0 to 5000 ms | 500 ms |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-12 | Starting Torque Compensation Bias in Down Direction | -40.0 to 40.0% | 0.00% |
Source page
Page 245
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 245 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 245 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 S3-14: Torque Compensation Diminish Speed Sets the speed level for torque compensation to diminish during the time determined by S3-15. Set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). A setting of 0.0% disables this function. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-14 Torque Compensation Diminish Speed 0.0 to 200.0% 0.0% S3-15: Torque Compensation Diminish Time Sets the time for torque compensation to diminish when motor speed reaches the level set in S3-14. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-15 Torque Compensation Diminish Time 0 to 5000 ms 1000 ms S3-16: Torque Limit Reduction Time Torque 300% After Position Lock at stop, S3-16 determines the length of time to reduce the torque limit rate = S3-16 No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-16 Torque Limit Reduction Time 0 to 10000 ms 100 ms S3-20: Dwell 2 Speed Reference Sets the speed reference for the Dwell 2 function. Note: Setting this parameter to 0.00 disables the Dwell 2 function. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-20 Dwell 2 Speed Reference 0.00 to 100.00% 0.00% Figure5.48 Run Command ON SFS output C1-01 Motor speed C1-07 C2-01 S3-21 S3-20 Figure 5.48 Dwell Speed Reference at Start S3-21: Dwell 2 End Speed The Dwell 2 function will end when the drive reaches this speed. A setting of 0.00 will disable the acceleration rate switch that occurs at the end of Dwell 2. 5 No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-21 Dwell 2 End Speed 0.00 to 100.00% 0.00% S3-25: DC Injection Gain in Regenerative Operation In OLV Control, S3-25 sets a gain level for DC Injection at stop (S1-03) for when the regenerative load reaches 100%. At that time, the current applied during DC Injection at stop is determined as S1-03 × S3-25. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-25 DC Injection Gain in Regenerative Operation 0 to 400% 100%
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-14 | Torque Compensation Diminish Speed | 0.0 to 200.0% | 0.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-15 | Torque Compensation Diminish Time | 0 to 5000 ms | 1000 ms |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-16 | Torque Limit Reduction Time | 0 to 10000 ms | 100 ms |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-20 | Dwell 2 Speed Reference | 0.00 to 100.00% | 0.00% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-21 | Dwell 2 End Speed | 0.00 to 100.00% | 0.00% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-25 | DC Injection Gain in Regenerative Operation | 0 to 400% | 100% |
Source page
Page 246
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 246 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
S3-26: DC Injection Gain in Motoring Operation
In OLV Control, S3-26 sets a gain level for DC Injection at stop (S1-03) when the motoring load reaches 100%. At that time, the current applied during DC Injection at stop is determined as S1-03 × S3-26.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-26 DC Injection Gain in Motoring Operation 0 to 400% 20% S3-27: Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 1
Adjusts the analog signal from a load sensor for torque compensation. Refer to Adjusting the Torque Compensation at Start on page 118 for details.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-27 Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 1 -100.0 to 100.0% -50.0% S3-28: Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 2
Adjusts the analog signal from a load sensor for torque compensation. Refer to Adjusting the Torque Compensation at Start on page 118 for details.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-28 Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 2 -100.0 to 100.0% 50.0% S3-29: Analog Input from Load Sensor with Load Condition 1
Adjusts the analog signal from a load sensor for torque compensation. Refer to Adjusting the Torque Compensation at Start on page 118 for details.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-29 Analog Input from Load Sensor with Load Condition 1 -100.0 to 100.0% 0.0% S3-30: Analog Input from Load Sensor with Load Condition 2
Adjusts the analog signal from a load sensor for torque compensation. Refer to Adjusting the Torque Compensation at Start on page 118 for details.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-30 Analog Input from Load Sensor with Load Condition 2 -100.0 to 100.0% 100.0% S3-34: Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1
Sets an intermediary value for the torque bias used for Anti-Rollback when Position Lock at start is performed. This setting rarely needs to be changed.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-34 Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0% S3-35: Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 2
Sets a maximum value for the torque bias used for Anti-Rollback when Position Lock at start is performed. This setting rarely needs to be changed.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-35 Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 2 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0% S3-37: Position Deviation Level to Apply Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1
Sets the position deviation level to activate at Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 (S3-34). This setting rarely needs to be changed.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-37 Position Deviation Level to Apply Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 0 to 32767 0
246 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-26 | DC Injection Gain in Motoring Operation | 0 to 400% | 20% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-27 | Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 1 | -100.0 to 100.0% | -50.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-28 | Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 2 | -100.0 to 100.0% | 50.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-29 | Analog Input from Load Sensor with Load Condition 1 | -100.0 to 100.0% | 0.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-30 | Analog Input from Load Sensor with Load Condition 2 | -100.0 to 100.0% | 100.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-34 | Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 | 0.0 to 100.0% | 0.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-35 | Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 2 | 0.0 to 100.0% | 0.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-37 | Position Deviation Level to Apply Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 | 0 to 32767 | 0 |
Source page
Page 247
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 247 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 247 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 S3-38: Position Deviation Level to Apply Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 2 Determines the position deviation level when the drive should switch from the Anti-Rollback torque bias set in S3-34 to the torque bias set in S3-35. This setting rarely needs to be changed. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-38 Position Deviation Level to Apply Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 2 0 to 32767 0 S3-39: Anti-Rollback Integral Gain Determines the drive responsiveness for Anti-Rollback during Position Lock. Increasing the value set to S3-39 may help if there is still too much deviation from the Position Lock start position after Position Lock gain 1 and gain 2 have already been adjusted. Lower S3-39 if oscillation occurs. This parameter rarely needs to be changed. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-39 Anti-Rollback Integral Gain -30.00 to 30.00 0.00 S3-40: Anti-Rollback Movement Detection Sets the amount of speed feedback signal pulses to detect a movement of the rotor. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-40 Anti-Rollback Movement Detection 0 to 100 pulses 1 pulse S3-41: Position Lock Gain at Start 2 Reduction Sets a reduction factor for the Position Lock Gain at Start 2 (Anti Rollback Gain) set in parameter S3-02. If the motor rotation (i.e., car movement) is below the movement detection level set to S3-40, the drive will reduce the Anti-Rollback gain according to the gain reduction level set in S3-41. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S3-41 Position Lock Gain at Start 2 Reduction 0.00 to 1.00 0.50 S4: Rescue Operation Rescue Operation switches to a backup battery or some other UPS during a power outage. Refer to Rescue Operation on page 121 for details. S4-01: Light Load Direction Search Selection Enables and disables the Light Load Direction Search. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S4-01 Light Load Direction Search Selection 0 to 2 0 Setting 0: Disabled 5 Setting 1: Enabled Setting 2: Enabled for motor 1 only S4-02: Light Load Direction Search Method Determines the method used to perform Light Load Direction Search. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S4-02 Light Load Direction Search Method 0 or 1 1 Setting 0: Output current Setting 1: Detect direction of regeneration
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-38 | Position Deviation Level to Apply Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 2 | 0 to 32767 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-39 | Anti-Rollback Integral Gain | -30.00 to 30.00 | 0.00 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-40 | Anti-Rollback Movement Detection | 0 to 100 pulses | 1 pulse |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S3-41 | Position Lock Gain at Start 2 Reduction | 0.00 to 1.00 | 0.50 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S4-01 | Light Load Direction Search Selection | 0 to 2 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S4-02 | Light Load Direction Search Method | 0 or 1 | 1 |
Source page
Page 248
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 248 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
S4-03: Light Load Direction Search Time
Sets the time to perform Light Load Direction Search.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S4-03 Light Load Direction Search Time 0.0 to 5.0 s 1.0 s S4-04: Light Load Direction Search Speed Reference
Sets the speed reference to use during Light Load Direction Search.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S4-04 Light Load Direction Search Speed Reference 0.00 to 20.00% Determined by A-02 S4-05: Rescue Operation Torque Limit
Sets the torque limit used during Rescue Operation.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S4-05 Rescue Operation Torque Limit 0 to 300% 100% S4-06: Rescue Operation Power Supply Selection
Specifies the type of backup power supply the drive should switch to when the power goes out.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S4-06 Rescue Operation Power Supply Selection 0 to 2 0 Setting 0: Battery Setting 1: UPS (single-phase) Setting 2: UPS (three-phase)
S4-07: UPS Power Sets the capacity of the UPS.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S4-07 UPS Power 0.0 to 100.0 kVA 0.0 kVA S4-08: UPS Operation Speed Limit Selection Determines how a speed limit should be applied to the Rescue Operation speed (S4-15) when operating from a UPS. The drive calculates the appropriate speed limit based on the UPS capacity set in S4-07. This speed limit helps prevent voltage saturation and motor stall during Rescue Operation.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S4-08 UPS Operation Speed Limit Selection 0 to 2 2 Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled until Light Load Direction Search is complete Setting 2: Enabled until stop S4-12: DC Bus Voltage during Rescue Operation
Sets the DC bus voltage during Rescue Operation.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S4-12 DC Bus Voltage during Rescue Operation 0 to 1150 V 0 V
248 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S4-03 | Light Load Direction Search Time | 0.0 to 5.0 s | 1.0 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S4-04 | Light Load Direction Search Speed Reference | 0.00 to 20.00% | Determined by A-02 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S4-05 | Rescue Operation Torque Limit | 0 to 300% | 100% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S4-06 | Rescue Operation Power Supply Selection | 0 to 2 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S4-07 | UPS Power | 0.0 to 100.0 kVA | 0.0 kVA |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S4-08 | UPS Operation Speed Limit Selection | 0 to 2 | 2 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S4-12 | DC Bus Voltage during Rescue Operation | 0 to 1150 V | 0 V |
Source page
Page 249
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 249 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 249 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 S4-13: Rescue Operation Power Supply Deterioration Detection Level Determines at which level of backup power supply deterioration a PF5 fault is triggered. The following conditions will trigger PF5: • During Rescue Operation, DC bus voltage < [S4-12 × (S4-13 - 10%)] • 100 ms after Rescue Operation has been triggered, the DC bus voltage does not rise above S4-12 × S4-13 before the motor starts No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S4-13 Rescue Operation Power Supply Deterioration Detection Level 10 to 100% 80% S4-15: Speed Reference Selection at Rescue Operation Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7016 or later. Selects the speed reference used for Rescue Operation. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S4-15 Speed Reference Selection for Rescue Operation 0, 1 0 Setting 0: The setting of parameter d1-25 is used as speed reference for Rescue Operation Setting 1: The speed selected by digital inputs is used as speed reference S5: Short Floor Operation Short Floor Function Short Floor automatically adjusts the speed in order to reduce the leveling time if leveling speed was activated before the selected speed was reached. Short Floor is enabled setting S5-01 = 1. The drive calculates the distance to decelerate from rated speed to the leveling speed, then controls the stop so that the stopping time is shortened. In Figure 5.49 below, area S indicates the distance for a stop from nominal speed. Figure5.49 Speed d1-19 (nominal speed) S nominal speed × 0.4 d1-26 (leveling speed) <1> 0 t Figure 5.49 Speed During Normal Operation <1> The drive will recognize the speed reference that is lower than the Leveling Speed Detection Level (d1-28) as the leveling speed if the speed priority is set for multi-step speed reference (d1-18 = 0 or 3). Advance Short Floor 5 Advanced Short Floor minimizes the operation time to arrive at a designated floor. It uses the leveling speed once the leveling speed command is entered via one of the multi-function inputs (H1- = 53). Advance Short Floor calculates optimal speed based on the Short Floor Minimum Constant Speed Time (S5-03) and the currently selected deceleration rate. Table 5.14 explains the Short Floor and Advance Short Floor functions.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S4-13 | Rescue Operation Power Supply Deterioration Detection Level | 10 to 100% | 80% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S4-15 | Speed Reference Selection for Rescue Operation | 0, 1 | 0 |
Source page
Page 250
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 250 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
Table 5.14 Short Floor Operation Example Le In v p e u li t n T g i m Sp in e g ed Short Floor Advanced Short Floor
Operating speed d1-19 (Nominal Speed) Constant speed operation at rated speed d1-26 (normal stop (Leveling Speed) sequence) 0 Time H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 53 (Leveling Speed) <1> ON(close) (The speed is 40% of the nominal speed or more.) (The speed is over Optimum Speed.) Operating d1-19 speed (Nominal Speed) O sp p e e e r d ating d1-19 40% of nominal (Nominal Speed) speed Optimal Speed 0 Time d (L 1 e - v 2 e 6 ling Speed) 0 d (L 1 e - v 2 e 6 ling Speed) H (L 1 ev - e (cid:2) lin (cid:2) g S = p 5 ee 3 d) <1> ON(close) H (L 1 ev -(cid:2) elin (cid:2) g S = p 5 ee 3 d) <1> ON(close) Time During acceleration (The speed is optimal speed or less.) (The speed is less than 40% of the nominal speed.) O sp p e e e r d ating d (N 1 o - m 19 inal Speed) O sp p e e e r d ating S5-03 d (N 1 o - m 19 inal Speed) 40% of nominal Optimal Speed speed d1-26 0 d (L 1 e - v 2 e 6 ling Speed) 0 Time (Leveling Speed) H (L 1 ev -(cid:2) elin (cid:2) g S = p 5 e 3 ed) <1> ON(close) Time ( H L 1 ev - e (cid:2) lin (cid:2) g S = p 5 ee 3 d) <1> ON(close) (The speed is 40% of the nominal speed or more.) Operating speed d1-19 (Nominal Speed) 40% of nominal speed d1-26 0 (Leveling Speed) Time H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 53 Constant speed (Leveling Speed) <1> ON(close) l o e p ss e r t a h t a io n n t h a e t Not Available. rated speed (The speed is less than 40% of the nominal speed.) Operating d1-19 speed (Nominal Speed) 40% of nominal speed d1-26 (Leveling Speed) 0 Time H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 53 (Leveling Speed) <1> ON(close) Before start Operates at the leveling speed. <1> The drive will recognize the speed reference that is lower than the Leveling Speed Detection Level (d1-28) as the leveling speed if the speed priority is set for multi-step speed reference (d1-18 = 0 or 3).
250 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Leveling Speed Input Timing | Short Floor | Advanced Short Floor |
|---|---|---|
| Constant speed operation at rated speed (normal stop sequence) | Operating speed d1-19 (Nominal Speed) d1-26 (Leveling Speed) 0 Time H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 53 ON(close) (Leveling Speed) <1> | |
| During acceleration | (The speed is 40% of the nominal speed or more.) Operating d1-19 speed (Nominal Speed) 40% of nominal speed d1-26 0 (Leveling Speed) Time H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 53 ON(close) (Leveling Speed) <1> | (The speed is over Optimum Speed.) Operating speed d1-19 (Nominal Speed) Optimal Speed d1-26 0 (Leveling Speed) Time H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 53 ON(close) (Leveling Speed) <1> |
| (The speed is less than 40% of the nominal speed.) Operating d1-19 speed (Nominal Speed) 40% of nominal speed d1-26 (Leveling Speed) 0 Time H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 53 (Leveling Speed) <1> ON(close) | (The speed is optimal speed or less.) Operating d1-19 speed (Nominal Speed) S5-03 Optimal Speed d1-26 0 (Leveling Speed) Time H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 53 ON(close) (Leveling Speed) <1> | |
| Constant speed operation at less than the rated speed | (The speed is 40% of the nominal speed or more.) Operating speed d1-19 (Nominal Speed) 40% of nominal speed d1-26 (Leveling Speed) 0 Time H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 53 (Leveling Speed) <1> ON(close) | Not Available. |
| (The speed is less than 40% of the nominal speed.) Operating d1-19 speed (Nominal Speed) 40% of nominal speed d1-26 (Leveling Speed) 0 Time H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 53 (Leveling Speed) <1> ON(close) | ||
| Before start | Operates at the leveling speed. |
Source page
Page 251
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 251 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 251 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 S5-01: Short Floor Operation Selection Enables and disables the Short Floor function. Note: 1. The Short Floor and Advanced Short Floor functions cannot be used during Rescue Operation. 2. Do not use Short Floor or Advanced Short Floor when the analog input terminals are configured to supply the speed reference. 3. The drive will accelerate or decelerate to the specified speed reference at the specified Accel/Decel rate if the speed priority is set for multi-step speed reference (d1-18 = 0 or 3) and the leveling speed reference is selected during Short Floor or Advanced Short Floor. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S5-01 Short Floor Operation Selection 0 to 2 0 Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled (Short Floor Operation) Setting 2: Enabled (Advanced Short Floor Operation) S5-02: Nominal Speed for Short Floor Calculation Determines the rated speed used to calculate the distance for the Short Floor function when speed priority is set for Multi-step Speed Reference (d1-18 = 0 or 3). No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S5-02 Nominal Speed for Short Floor Calculation 0.0 to 100.0% 0.0% S5-03: Short Floor Minimum Constant Speed Time Sets the minimum time of the constant speed operation when the Advanced Short Floor function is enabled (S5-01 = 2). No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S5-03 Short Floor Minimum Constant Speed Time 0 to 2.0 s 0.0 s S5-04: Distance Calculation Acceleration Time Gain Sets the gain used to adjust the jerk at acceleration for an optimum speed calculation when Short Floor Operation Selection (S5-01) is set to 2. • Increase the gain level set to S5-04 and S5-05 if the leveling time is too short or if the optimum speed calculated by the drive is too fast. • Decrease the gain level set to S5-04 and S5-05 if the leveling time is too long or if the optimum speed calculated by the drive is too slow. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S5-04 Distance Calculation Acceleration Time Gain 50.0 to 200.0% 150.0% Note: Setting S5-04 too low may trigger an overrun due to faster optimum speeds and shortened leveling times. Avoid setting this gain less than 100%. S5-05: Distance Calculation Deceleration Time Gain Sets the gain used to adjust the jerk at deceleration and optimum speed calculation when Short Floor Operation Selection (S5-01) is set to 2. 5 • Increase the gain level set to S5-04 and S5-05 if the leveling time is too short or if the optimum speed calculated by the drive is too fast. • Decrease the gain level set to S5-04 and S5-05 if the leveling time is too long or if the optimum speed calculated by the drive is too slow. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S5-05 Distance Calculation Deceleration Time Gain 50.0 to 200.0% 150.0% Note: Setting S5-05 too low may trigger an overrun due to faster optimum speeds and shortened leveling times. Avoid setting this gain less than 100%.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S5-01 | Short Floor Operation Selection | 0 to 2 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S5-02 | Nominal Speed for Short Floor Calculation | 0.0 to 100.0% | 0.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S5-03 | Short Floor Minimum Constant Speed Time | 0 to 2.0 s | 0.0 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S5-04 | Distance Calculation Acceleration Time Gain | 50.0 to 200.0% | 150.0% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S5-05 | Distance Calculation Deceleration Time Gain | 50.0 to 200.0% | 150.0% |
Source page
Page 252
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 252 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
Leveling Distance Control
Leveling Distance Control uses the accel/decel rate, jerk settings, and stopping distance to automatically calculate a speed sequence and arrive at the designated floor with increased accuracy. Two types of Leveling Distance Control are available that allow the user to select the Stopping Method (S5-10).
Direct Landing Direct Landing (S5-10 = 1) is activated at the start of deceleration, and brings the elevator car to the designated floor without the use of the leveling speed. Direct Landing disables Leveling Distance Control, and uses a speed reference calculated by multiplying E1-04 times S5-13. If a Stop distance correction command (H1- = 5C) is triggered during Direct Landing, then the drive will switch to the stop distance set in S5-12 for the remaining distance. Direct Landing will end once data from the encoder indicates that the stopping distance is 0.
Figure 5.50 illustrates a Direct Landing Operation example. Table 5.15 Conditions for Direct Landing
Speed Priority Direct Landing Start Conditions Multi-step speed sequence Speed reference ≥ E1-04 × S5-13 and the Up/Down command is not active or the speed reference is 0. (d1-18 = 0, 3) High speed reference has priority (d1-18 = 1) The Up/Down command is not active, the speed reference is 0, or the leveling speed reference has been selected by one of the Leveling speed reference has priority multi-function input terminals (H1-). (d1-18 = 2)
252 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Speed Priority | Direct Landing Start Conditions |
|---|---|
| Multi-step speed sequence (d1-18 = 0, 3) | Speed reference ≥ E1-04 × S5-13 and the Up/Down command is not active or the speed reference is 0. |
| High speed reference has priority (d1-18 = 1) | The Up/Down command is not active, the speed reference is 0, or the leveling speed reference has been selected by one of the multi-function input terminals (H1-). |
| Leveling speed reference has priority (d1-18 = 2) |
Source page
Page 253
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 253 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 253 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Run Command ON OFF (Forward [Up] / Reverse [Down]) H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 5C OFF (Stop Distance Correction) H2-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 51 ON Output Contactor Open (Output Contactor Control) Delay Time (S1-11) H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 56 ON (Motor Contactor Feedback) Run Command Delay Time (S1-10) Brake Release Delay Time (S1-06) H2-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 50 (Brake Control) ON OFF Brake Close Operation Delay Time Speed (S1-07) Zero Speed S1<1> Zero Speed at Start at Stop S2 Time <1> <1> Area S1 is the deceleration distance (S5-11) from the start of deceleration to stop. Area S2 is the stopping distance (S5-12) from the point at which the stopping distance compensation signal is entered to when the car arrives at the designated floor. Figure 5.50 Direct Landing Operation Example Leveling Distance Control Leveling Distance Control (S5-10 = 2) uses the leveling speed reference for the remaining distance to arrive at the designated floor. Leveling Distance Control is activated when the conditions listed in Table 5.16 are met. Table 5.16 Leveling Distance Control Operation Speed Priority Selection Multi-Function Input Terminal Settings Leveling Distance Control Start Conditions Multi-step speed sequence - The Up/Down command is not active or the speed reference is 0. (d1-18 = 0, 3) Leveling speed reference is selected The Up/Down command is not active, or all input terminals set for High speed reference has priority (H1- = 53). H1- = 50 to 53 are open. (d1-18 = 1) Leveling speed reference is not selected (H1- ≠ 53). Up/Down command is not active. Rated speed reference is selected The Up/Down command is not active, or all input terminals set for Multi-step speed sequence (H1- = 50). H1- = 50 to 53 are open. (d1-18 = 2) Rated speed reference is not selected (H1- ≠ 50). Up/Down command is not active. 5
| ON | Output Contactor Open Delay Time (S1-11) | Column |
|---|---|---|
| ON | Brake Close Delay Time (S1-07) Zero Speed at Stop | |
| ON S1<1> |
| Speed Priority Selection | Multi-Function Input Terminal Settings | Leveling Distance Control Start Conditions |
|---|---|---|
| Multi-step speed sequence (d1-18 = 0, 3) | - | The Up/Down command is not active or the speed reference is 0. |
| High speed reference has priority (d1-18 = 1) | Leveling speed reference is selected (H1- = 53). | The Up/Down command is not active, or all input terminals set for H1- = 50 to 53 are open. |
| Leveling speed reference is not selected (H1- ≠ 53). | Up/Down command is not active. | |
| Multi-step speed sequence (d1-18 = 2) | Rated speed reference is selected (H1- = 50). | The Up/Down command is not active, or all input terminals set for H1- = 50 to 53 are open. |
| Rated speed reference is not selected (H1- ≠ 50). | Up/Down command is not active. |
Source page
Page 254
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 254 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
Run Command ON OFF (Forward [Up] / Reverse [Down]) OFF ON OFF H2-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 53 (Not Zero Speed) H2-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 51 ON Output Contactor Open (Output Contactor Control) Delay Time (S1-11) H1-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 56 ON (Motor Contactor Feedback) Run Command Delay Time (S1-10) Brake Release Delay Time (S1-06) H2-(cid:2)(cid:2) = 50 (Brake Control) ON OFF Brake Close Delay Time Operation (S1-07) Speed Zero Speed Zero Speed at Start at Stop S Time <1> <1> Area S is the stopping distance (S5-12) from the point at which leveling operation is complete to when the car arrives at the designated floor. Figure 5.51 Operation Sequence Example for Leveling Distance Control S5-10: Stopping Method Selection Selects the stopping method.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S5-10 Stopping Method Selection 0 to 2 0 Setting 0: Disable Setting 1: Direct Landing Setting 2: Leveling Distance Control S5-11: Deceleration Distance
Sets the deceleration distance when Stop Distance Control is enabled. Refer to Direct Landing on page 252 for details.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S5-11 Deceleration Distance 0 to 32767 mm <1> 0 mm <1> The setting range becomes 0.00 to 650.00 inches when the length units are set for inches (o1-12 = 1).
S5-12: Stop Distance Sets the stopping distance when Stop Distance Control is enabled. Refer to Direct Landing on page 252 and Leveling Distance Control on page 253 for details.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S5-12 Stop Distance 0 to 10000 mm <1> 0 mm
<1> The setting range becomes 0.00 to 393.00 inches when the length units are set for inches (o1-12 = 1). S5-13: Direct Landing Minimum Speed Level Sets the speed level for the start of Direct Landing. Direct Landing is disabled if the starting speed for Direct Landing is less than the maximum output speed multiplied by this parameter (E1-04 × S5-13).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S5-13 Direct Landing Minimum Speed Level 0 to 100% 20%
254 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Output Contactor Open Delay Time (S1-11) |
|---|
| Brake Close Delay Time (S1-07) Zero Speed at Stop |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S5-10 | Stopping Method Selection | 0 to 2 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S5-11 | Deceleration Distance | 0 to 32767 mm <1> | 0 mm |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S5-12 | Stop Distance | 0 to 10000 mm <1> | 0 mm |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S5-13 | Direct Landing Minimum Speed Level | 0 to 100% | 20% |
Source page
Page 255
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 255 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 255 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 S6: Faults for Elevator Applications S6-01: Motor Contactor Response Error (SE1) Detection/Reset Selection Determines when the drive should detect a motor contactor response error (SE1). SE1 is triggered if there is no response from the motor contactor within the time set in S6-10 after the contactor control output has been set. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S6-01 Motor Contactor Response Error (SE1) Detection/Reset Selection 0 to 2 0 Setting 0: Detect during stop, SE1 must be manually reset Setting 1: Detect during stop, SE1 can be automatically reset Setting 2: No SE1 detection S6-02: Starting Current Error (SE2) Detection Delay Time Sets a delay time for starting current error (SE2). SE2 is detected when the drive output current is below 25% after the Up/Down command has been entered and the brake release time and the time set to S6-02 have both passed. The brake control command will not be issued (brake stays applied). No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S6-02 Starting Current Error (SE2) Detection Delay Time 0.00 to [S1-04 - S1-06] 200 ms S6-03: SE2 Detect Current Level Note: Available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. Sets the level of current applied to the motor when the Brake Control command is activated, as a percentage of the Motor No-load Current (E2-03). A Starting Current Error (SE2) occurs when the drive’s output current is less than the value in S6-03 after both the Brake Release Delay Time (S1-06) and the SE2 Detection Delay Time (S6-02) have passed after a RUN command. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S6-03 SE2 Detect Current Level 0 to 100% 25% S6-04: Output Current Error (SE3) Detection Delay Time Sets a delay time for detecting an output current fault (SE3). SE3 is detected when the drive output current drops below 25% after the brake has released. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S6-04 Output Current Error (SE3) Detection Delay Time 0 to 5000 ms 200 ms S6-05: Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time Sets a delay time for detecting a brake response error (SE4). SE4 is detected when an output terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and an input terminal set for “Brake feedback” (H1- = 79H) do not match for the time set to S6-05. 5 SE4 is detected for the time set to S6-05 if the Brake Response Monitor function is disabled (S6-07 = 0) and the following status conditions occur during the time set to S6-05. Note: S6-07 is available for drives with software versions PRG: 7207 or later. • The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: the output terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and the multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). • The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: the output terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and the multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH). SE4 is detected for the time set to S6-05 if the Brake Response Monitor function is enabled (S6-07 = 1) and the following status conditions occur during the time set to S6-05 when the drive starts or while stopped. Note: If “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) is set to the multi-function digital input terminal, a SE4 fault will be triggered by “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH), not “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H).
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S6-01 | Motor Contactor Response Error (SE1) Detection/Reset Selection | 0 to 2 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S6-02 | Starting Current Error (SE2) Detection Delay Time | 0.00 to [S1-04 - S1-06] | 200 ms |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S6-03 | SE2 Detect Current Level | 0 to 100% | 25% |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S6-04 | Output Current Error (SE3) Detection Delay Time | 0 to 5000 ms | 200 ms |
Source page
Page 256
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 256 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
• The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: one multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and one of two multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). • The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: one multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and both two multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S6-05 Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time 0 to 10000 ms 500 ms S6-06: Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time During Run
Set the time required to detect the SE4 fault (Brake Response Error) during run when the Brake Response Monitor function is enabled (S6-07 = 1). If the following status conditions occur during run, SE4 is detected for the time set to S6-06. Note: If “Brake feedback 2” (H1- =5BH) is set to the multi-function digital input terminal, a SE4 fault will be triggered by “Brake feedback 2” (H1- =5BH), not “Brake feedback 1” (H1- =79H). • The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: one multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and one of two multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). • The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: one multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and both two multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S6-06<1> Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time During Run 0 to 60000 ms<2> 500 ms <1> This parameter is available for drives with software versions PRG: 7207 or later. <2> When S6-06 = 0 (0 ms), brake response error (SE4) is not detected. S6-07: Brake Response Monitor Selection
Enables and disables the Brake Response Monitor function. To use this function, first enable this parameter, then set two multi-function digital input terminals to “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H) or both to “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH). Example: H1-07 = 5BH and H1-08 = 5BH, H1-07 = 79H and H1-08 = 79H
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S6-07<1> Brake Response Monitor Selection 0 or 1 0 <1> This parameter is available for drives with software versions PRG: 7207 or later. Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled Note: Using any of the following settings for the multi-function digital input terminals triggers an oPE03 fault if the Brake Response Monitor function is enabled (S6-07 = 1). If “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H) or “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) are not set to any multi-function digital input terminals. If “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H) is set to only one multi-function digital input terminal. If “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) is set to only one multi-function digital input terminal. If “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H) and “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) are each set to two multi-function digital input terminals. If “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H) or “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) is set to three or more multi-function digital input terminals. S6-08: Brake Response Error (SE4) Fault Reset Selection Selects fault reset methods when the BRM function is enabled (S6-07 = 1) and an SE4 fault is triggered. The SE4 fault can only be reset by executing the fault reset (S6-08 = 1) when the BRM function is enabled (S6-07 = 1).
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S6-08<1> Brake Response Error (SE4) Fault Reset Selection 0 or 1 0 <1> This parameter is available for drives with software versions PRG: 7207 or later.
256 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S6-05 | Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time | 0 to 10000 ms | 500 ms |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S6-06<1> | Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time During Run | 0 to 60000 ms<2> | 500 ms |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S6-07<1> | Brake Response Monitor Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S6-08<1> | Brake Response Error (SE4) Fault Reset Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
Source page
Page 257
5.11 S: Elevator Parameters
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 257 sliateD retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 257 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Setting 0: Normal operation Setting 1: Execute SE4 Fault Reset S6-10: Overacceleration Detection Level If the elevator car accelerates at an abnormal rate, the drive triggers an overacceleration fault (dv6) and the motor coasts to stop. Parameter S6-10 determines the acceleration rate that triggers the dv6 fault. A setting of 0.0 m/s2 disables overacceleration detection. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S6-10 Overacceleration Detection Level 0.0 to 20.0 m/s2 1.5 m/s2<1> <1> Default setting is determined by parameter o1-03. If o1-03 is set to 0 through 5, the default is 1.5 m/s2. If o1-03 is set to 6, the default is 5.0 ft/ s2 (setting range: 0.0 to 50.0 ft/s2). S6-11: Overacceleration Detection Time Sets the time that the acceleration must exceed the overacceleration detection level before as fault is triggered. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S6-11 Overacceleration Detection Time 0 to 5000 ms 50 ms S6-12: Overacceleration Detection Selection Determines the conditions for detecting an overacceleration situation. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S6-12 Overacceleration Detection Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: Always enabled Setting 1: During run only S6-15: Speed Reference Loss Detection Enabled or disables detection for missing speed reference (FrL). No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S6-15 Speed Reference Loss Detection 0 or 1 1 Setting 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled S6-16: Restart after Baseblock Selection Allows the drive to restart the motor after returning to normal operation from Baseblock state (H1- = 8/9) or from Safe Torque-Off state (Safe Disable inputs H1 and H2 enabled) while the Up/Down command is still active. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default S6-16 Restart after Baseblock Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: No restart after Baseblock or Safe Torque-Off Do not restart the motor when leaving the Baseblock or Safe Torque-Off state even if an Up/Down command is still 5 active. Setting 1: Restart after Baseblock or Safe Torque-Off Restart when the Up/Down command is still active while the Baseblock or Safe Torque-Off state is left. To use this function with the Safe Disable function, parameter L8-88 must be set to 1. T: Motor Tuning Auto-Tuning automatically sets and tunes parameters required for optimal motor performance. Refer to Auto-Tuning on page 99 for details on Auto-Tuning parameters.
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S6-10 | Overacceleration Detection Level | 0.0 to 20.0 m/s2 | 1.5 m/s2<1> |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S6-11 | Overacceleration Detection Time | 0 to 5000 ms | 50 ms |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S6-12 | Overacceleration Detection Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S6-15 | Speed Reference Loss Detection | 0 or 1 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| S6-16 | Restart after Baseblock Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
Source page
Page 258
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 258 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
5.12 U: Monitor Parameters
5.12 U: Monitor Parameters
Monitor parameters let the user view various aspects of drive performance using the digital operator display. Some monitors can be output from terminals FM and AM by assigning the specific monitor parameter number (U-) to H4-01 and H4-04. Refer to H4-01, H4-04: Terminal FM, AM Monitor Selection on page 207 for details on assigning functions to an analog output.
U1: Operation Status Monitors
Status monitors display drive status data such as output speed and output current. Refer to U1: Operation Status Monitors on page 387 for a complete list of U1- monitors and descriptions.
U2: Fault Trace
Use these monitor parameters to view the status of various drive aspects when a fault occurs. This information is helpful for finding out why a fault occurred. Refer to U2: Fault Trace on page 389 for a complete list of U2- monitors and descriptions.
U2- monitors are not reset when the drive is initialized. Refer to o4-11: U2, U3 Initialization on page 239 for instructions on how to reset these monitor values. Note: Fault trace (i.e., the fault history) is not kept when CPF00, CPF01, CPF06, CPF24, oFA00, oFb00, oFC00, Uv1, Uv2, and Uv3 occur.
U3: Fault History These parameters display faults that have occurred during operation as well as the drive operation time when those faults occurred. Refer to U3: Fault History on page 390 for a complete list of U3- monitors and descriptions.
U3- monitors are not reset when the drive is initialized. Refer to o4-11: U2, U3 Initialization on page 239 for instructions on how to reset these monitor values. Note: Fault trace (i.e., the fault history) is not kept when CPF00, CPF01, CPF06, CPF24, oFA00, oFb00, oFC00, Uv1, Uv2, and Uv3 occur.
U4: Maintenance Monitors
Maintenance monitors show: • Runtime data of the drive and cooling fans and number of Up/Down commands issued • Maintenance data and replacement information for various drive components • kWh data • Highest peak current that has occurred and output speed at the time the peak current occurred • Motor overload status information • Detailed information about the present Up/Down command and speed reference source selection
Refer to U4: Maintenance Monitors on page 390 for a complete list of U4- monitors and descriptions.
U6: Control Monitors
Control monitors show: • Reference data for the output voltage and vector control • Data on PM motor rotor synchronization, forward phase compensation, and flux positioning • Pulse data from the motor encoder • Pulse data for Position Lock control • Speed Loop and Inertia Compensation control monitors Refer to Figure 5.10 on page 169 for details and an illustration showing where monitors are located in the speed control loop block.
258 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 259
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 259 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides descriptions of the drive faults, alarms, errors, related displays, and guidance for troubleshooting.
6.1 SECTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 6.2 DRIVE ALARMS, FAULTS, AND ERRORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 6.3 FAULT DETECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 6.4 ALARM DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
6.5 OPERATOR PROGRAMMING ERRORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 6.6 AUTO-TUNING FAULT DETECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 6.7 COPY FUNCTION RELATED DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 6.8 DIAGNOSING AND RESETTING FAULTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 259
Source page
Page 260
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 260 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.1 Section Safety
6.1 Section Safety
Do not connect or disconnect wiring or service the drive while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before touching any components.
WA RNING
Sudden Movement Hazard
Ensure there are no short circuits between the main circuit terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) or between the ground and main circuit terminals before restarting the drive. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death and will cause damage to equipment.
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not operate equipment with covers removed. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
The diagrams in this section may illustrate drives without covers or safety shields to display details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual. Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal.
Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use equipment. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Maintenance, inspection and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives. Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry, or without eye protection.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing and wear eye protection before beginning work on the drive.
Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Fire Hazard
Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque. Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections.
Improperly tightened terminal screws can also cause erroneous equipment operation.
260 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| DANGER |
|---|
| Electrical Shock Hazard Do not connect or disconnect wiring or service the drive while the power is on. Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before touching any components. |
| WA RNING |
|---|
| Sudden Movement Hazard Ensure there are no short circuits between the main circuit terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) or between the ground and main circuit terminals before restarting the drive. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death and will cause damage to equipment. Electrical Shock Hazard Do not operate equipment with covers removed. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. The diagrams in this section may illustrate drives without covers or safety shields to display details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual. Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal. Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case. Do not allow unqualified personnel to use equipment. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Maintenance, inspection and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives. Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry, or without eye protection. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing and wear eye protection before beginning work on the drive. Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Fire Hazard Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque. Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections. Improperly tightened terminal screws can also cause erroneous equipment operation. |
Source page
Page 261
6.1 Section Safety
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 261 gnitoohselbuorT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 261 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 WA RNING Do not connect the AC power line to the output motor terminals of the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output terminals. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output terminals. • Do not connect AC line power to output terminals U, V, and W. • Make sure that the power supply lines are connected to main circuit input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 (or R/L1 and S/ L2 for single-phase power). NOTICE Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry. Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage. Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive. Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring. Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive. Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the product. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking circuit. Carefully review instruction manual TOBP C720600 0 when connecting a braking option to the drive. Do not modify the drive circuitry. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for modification of the product made by the user. Check all the wiring after installing the drive and connecting other devices to ensure that all connections are correct. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. Equipment Hazard Do not check or test control circuit signals while the drive is running. Improper use of test equipment could result in damage to the drive circuitry by short circuit. Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the unit. Failure to comply could result in damage to the sensitive devices within the drive. 6
| WA RNING |
|---|
| Do not connect the AC power line to the output motor terminals of the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output terminals. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output terminals. • Do not connect AC line power to output terminals U, V, and W. • Make sure that the power supply lines are connected to main circuit input terminals R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 (or R/L1 and S/ L2 for single-phase power). |
| NOTICE |
|---|
| Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry. Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage. Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive. Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring. Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive. Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the product. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking circuit. Carefully review instruction manual TOBPC7206000 when connecting a braking option to the drive. Do not modify the drive circuitry. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for modification of the product made by the user. Check all the wiring after installing the drive and connecting other devices to ensure that all connections are correct. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. Equipment Hazard Do not check or test control circuit signals while the drive is running. Improper use of test equipment could result in damage to the drive circuitry by short circuit. Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the unit. Failure to comply could result in damage to the sensitive devices within the drive. |
Source page
Page 262
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 262 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.2 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors
6.2 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors
Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors Check the digital operator for information about possible faults if the drive or motor fails to operate. Refer to Using the Digital Operator on page 81.
If problems occur that are not covered in this manual, contact the nearest Yaskawa representative with the following information: • Drive model • Software version • Date of purchase • Description of the problem
Table 6.1 contains descriptions of the various types of alarms, faults, and errors that may occur while operating the drive. Contact Yaskawa in the event of drive failure.
Table 6.1 Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors Type Drive Response When the drive detects a fault: • The digital operator displays text indicating the specific fault and the ALM indicator LED remains lit until the fault is reset. Faults • The fault interrupts drive output and the motor coasts to a stop. • Some faults allow the user to select the stopping method when the fault occurs. • Fault output terminals MA-MC will close, and MB-MC will open. The drive will remain inoperable until the fault is cleared. Refer to Fault Reset Methods on page294. When the drive detects an alarm or a minor fault: • The digital operator displays text indicating the specific alarm or minor fault, and the ALM indicator LED flashes. Minor Faults and Alarms • • T A h m e u d l r t i i v -f e u c n o c n ti t o in n u c e o s n r t u a n c n t i o n u g t p th u e t s m et o t t o o r b , e a l t t r h ip o p u e g d h w so h m en e a a l m ar i m no s r a f ll a o u w lt t ( h H e 2 u - s er to = s e 1 l 0 ec ) t c a lo s s t e o s p . p I i f n t g h e m o e u th tp o u d t w is h s e e n t t t o h e b a e l a tr r i m pp o e c d c . urs. • The digital operator displays text indicating a specific alarm and ALM indicator LED flashes. To reset the a minor fault or alarm, remove whatever is causing the problem. An operation error occurs when parameter settings conflict or do not match hardware settings (such as with an option card). When the drive detects an operation error: Operation Errors • The digital operator displays text indicating the specific error. • Multi-function contact outputs do not operate. The drive will not operate the motor until the error has been reset. Correct the settings that caused the operation error to clear the error. Tuning errors occur while performing Auto-Tuning. When the drive detects a tuning error: • The digital operator displays text indicating the specific error. Tuning Errors • Multi-function contact outputs do not operate. • Motor coasts to stop. Remove the cause of the error and repeat the Auto-Tuning process. Copy Function Errors occur when using the digital operator or the USB Copy Unit to copy, read, or verify parameter settings. • The digital operator displays text indicating the specific error. Copy Function Errors • Multi-function contact outputs do not operate. Pressing any key on the digital operator will clear the fault. Investigate the cause of the problem (such as model incompatibility) and try again.
262 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Type | Drive Response |
|---|---|
| Faults | When the drive detects a fault: • The digital operator displays text indicating the specific fault and the ALM indicator LED remains lit until the fault is reset. • The fault interrupts drive output and the motor coasts to a stop. • Some faults allow the user to select the stopping method when the fault occurs. • Fault output terminals MA-MC will close, and MB-MC will open. The drive will remain inoperable until the fault is cleared. Refer to Fault Reset Methods on page294. |
| Minor Faults and Alarms | When the drive detects an alarm or a minor fault: • The digital operator displays text indicating the specific alarm or minor fault, and the ALM indicator LED flashes. • The drive continues running the motor, although some alarms allow the user to select a stopping method when the alarm occurs. • A multi-function contact output set to be tripped when a minor fault (H2- = 10) closes. If the output is set to be tripped. • The digital operator displays text indicating a specific alarm and ALM indicator LED flashes. To reset the a minor fault or alarm, remove whatever is causing the problem. |
| Operation Errors | An operation error occurs when parameter settings conflict or do not match hardware settings (such as with an option card). When the drive detects an operation error: • The digital operator displays text indicating the specific error. • Multi-function contact outputs do not operate. The drive will not operate the motor until the error has been reset. Correct the settings that caused the operation error to clear the error. |
| Tuning Errors | Tuning errors occur while performing Auto-Tuning. When the drive detects a tuning error: • The digital operator displays text indicating the specific error. • Multi-function contact outputs do not operate. • Motor coasts to stop. Remove the cause of the error and repeat the Auto-Tuning process. |
| Copy Function Errors | Copy Function Errors occur when using the digital operator or the USB Copy Unit to copy, read, or verify parameter settings. • The digital operator displays text indicating the specific error. • Multi-function contact outputs do not operate. Pressing any key on the digital operator will clear the fault. Investigate the cause of the problem (such as model incompatibility) and try again. |
Source page
Page 263
6.2 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 263 gnitoohselbuorT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 263 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Alarm and Error Displays Faults Table 6.2 gives an overview of possible fault codes. Conditions such as overvoltages can trip faults and alarms. It is important to distinguish between faults and alarms to determine the proper corrective actions. When the drive detects a fault, the ALM indicator LED lights, the fault code appears on the digital operator, and the fault contact MA-MB-MC triggers. An alarm is present if the ALM LED blinks and the fault code on the digital operator flashes. Refer to Minor Faults and Alarms on page 264 for a list of alarm codes. Table 6.2 Fault Displays (1) Digital Operator Display Digital Operator Display Name Page Name Page LED Operator LCD Operator LED Operator LCD Operator boL Braking Transistor Overload 267 EF0 Option Card External Fault 270 to bUS Option Communication Error 267 EF3 to EF8 External Fault (input terminal S3 to S8) 270 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication CE 267 Err EEPROM Write Error 271 Error CF Control Fault 267 FrL Speed Reference Missing 271 CoF Current Offset Fault 267 GF Ground Fault 271 LF Output Phase Loss 271 , CPF00, CPF01 Control Circuit Error 267 <1> LF2 Output Current Imbalance 271 CPF02 A/D Conversion Error 268 oC Overcurrent 272 Option Card Connection Error at Option CPF03 Control Board Connection Error 268 oFA00 Connector CN5-A, Option Card Fault at 272 Option Connector CN5-A Option Card Fault at Option Connector CPF06 EEPROM Data Error 268 oFA01 272 CN5-A , CPF07, Terminal Board Connection Error 268 , oFA05, oFA06 272 CPF08 to , oFA10, oFA11 272 , CPF11 to CPF14, Control Circuit Error 268 CPF16 to CPF21 Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port to CN5-A <1> to oFA12 to oFA17 272 CPF22 Hybrid IC Failure 268 CPF23 Control Board Connection Error 268 to oFA30 to oFA43 272 CPF24 Drive Unit Signal Fault 268 CPF25 Terminal Board not Connected 268 oFb00 Option Card Connection Error (CN5-B) 273 to oFb01 Option Card Fault (CN5-B) 273 CPF26 to CPF34 Control Circuit Error 269 oFb02 Option Card Fault (CN5-B) 273 6 , CPF35 A/D Conversion Error 269 oFb03, oFb11 Option Card Error (CN5-B) 273 Speed Deviation (for Control Mode with dEv Encoder) 269 to oFb12 to oFb17 Option Card Connection Error (CN5-B) 273 dv1 Encoder Z Pulse Fault 269 dv2 Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection 269 oFC00 Option Card Connection Error (CN5-C) 273 dv3 Inversion Detection 269 oFC01 Option Card Fault (CN5-C) 273 dv4 Inversion Prevention Detection 269 oFC02 Option Card Fault (CN5-C) 273 dv6 Overacceleration Detection 270 , oFC03, oFC11 Option Card Error (CN5-C) 273 dv7 Rotor Polarity Detection Timeover 270
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Name | Page |
|---|---|---|---|
| LED Operator | LCD Operator | ||
| boL | Braking Transistor Overload | 267 | |
| bUS | Option Communication Error | 267 | |
| CE | MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error | 267 | |
| CF | Control Fault | 267 | |
| CoF | Current Offset Fault | 267 | |
| , <1> | CPF00, CPF01 | Control Circuit Error | 267 |
| CPF02 | A/D Conversion Error | 268 | |
| CPF03 | Control Board Connection Error | 268 | |
| CPF06 | EEPROM Data Error | 268 | |
| , | CPF07, CPF08 | Terminal Board Connection Error | 268 |
| to , to | CPF11 to CPF14, CPF16 to CPF21 | Control Circuit Error | 268 |
| <1> | CPF22 | Hybrid IC Failure | 268 |
| CPF23 | Control Board Connection Error | 268 | |
| CPF24 | Drive Unit Signal Fault | 268 | |
| CPF25 | Terminal Board not Connected | 268 | |
| to | CPF26 to CPF34 | Control Circuit Error | 269 |
| CPF35 | A/D Conversion Error | 269 | |
| dEv | Speed Deviation (for Control Mode with | 269 | |
| dv1 | Encoder) Encoder Z Pulse Fault | 269 | |
| dv2 | Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection | 269 | |
| dv3 | Inversion Detection | 269 | |
| dv4 | Inversion Prevention Detection | 269 | |
| dv6 | Overacceleration Detection | 270 | |
| dv7 | Rotor Polarity Detection Timeover | 270 |
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Name | Page |
|---|---|---|---|
| LED Operator | LCD Operator | ||
| EF0 | Option Card External Fault | 270 | |
| to | EF3 to EF8 | External Fault (input terminal S3 to S8) | 270 |
| Err | EEPROM Write Error | 271 | |
| FrL | Speed Reference Missing | 271 | |
| GF | Ground Fault | 271 | |
| LF | Output Phase Loss | 271 | |
| LF2 | Output Current Imbalance | 271 | |
| oC | Overcurrent | 272 | |
| oFA00 | Option Card Connection Error at Option Connector CN5-A, Option Card Fault at Option Connector CN5-A | 272 | |
| oFA01 | Option Card Fault at Option Connector CN5-A | 272 | |
| , | oFA05, oFA06 | Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-A | 272 |
| , | oFA10, oFA11 | 272 | |
| to | oFA12 to oFA17 | 272 | |
| to | oFA30 to oFA43 | 272 | |
| oFb00 | Option Card Connection Error (CN5-B) | 273 | |
| oFb01 | Option Card Fault (CN5-B) | 273 | |
| oFb02 | Option Card Fault (CN5-B) | 273 | |
| , | oFb03, oFb11 | Option Card Error (CN5-B) | 273 |
| to | oFb12 to oFb17 | Option Card Connection Error (CN5-B) | 273 |
| oFC00 | Option Card Connection Error (CN5-C) | 273 | |
| oFC01 | Option Card Fault (CN5-C) | 273 | |
| oFC02 | Option Card Fault (CN5-C) | 273 | |
| , | oFC03, oFC11 | Option Card Error (CN5-C) | 273 |
Source page
Page 264
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 264 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.2 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors
Digital Operator Display Digital Operator Display Name Page Name Page LED Operator LCD Operator LED Operator LCD Operator dv8 PM Rotor Position Estimation Error 270 - - - - Table 6.3 Fault Displays (2) Digital Operator Display Digital Operator Display Name Page Name Page LED Operator LCD Operator LED Operator LCD Operator PF5 Rescue Operation Power Supply 276 to oFC12 to oFC17 Option Card Connection Error (CN5-C) 273 Deterioration Error Encoder Disconnected (for Control Mode PGo 277 with Encoder) Encoder Disconnected (when using oFC50 Encoder Option AD Conversion Error 273 PGoH encoder) 277 oFC51 Encoder Option Analog Circuit Error 274 rF Braking Resistor Fault 277 oFC52 Encoder Communication Timeout 274 rr Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault 277 oFC53 Encoder Communication Data Error 274 SC IGBT Short Circuit 277 oFC54 Encoder Error 274 SCF<2> Safety Circuit Fault 277 oH Heatsink Overheat 274 SE1 Motor Contactor Response Error 277 oH1 Heatsink Overheat 274 SE2 Starting Current Error 277 Motor Overheat Alarm oH3 274 SE3 Output Current Error 277 (PTC thermistor input) Motor Overheat Fault oH4 (PTC thermistor input) 275 SE4 Brake Response Error 278 oL1 Motor Overload 275 SvE Position Lock Error 278 oL2 Drive Overload 275 STo Motor Pull Out or Step Out Detection 278 oL3 Overtorque Detection 1 275 UL3 Undertorque Detection 1 278 oL4 Overtorque Detection 2 275 UL4 Undertorque Detection 2 278 oPr Operator Connection Fault 276 Uv1 DC Bus Undervoltage 278 oS Overspeed 276 Uv2 Control Power Supply Voltage Fault 279 ov DC Bus Overvoltage 276 Uv3 Soft Charge Circuit Fault 279 PF Input Phase Loss 276 voF Output Voltage Detection Error 279
<1> Displayed as , when occurring at drive power up. When one of the faults occurs after successfully starting the drive, the display will show , <2> Displayed only for models in compliance with IEC/EN 61508 SIL3 Safety Integrity Level 3. Minor Faults and Alarms Refer to Table 6.4 for an overview of possible alarm codes. Conditions such as overvoltages can trip faults and alarms. It is important to distinguish between faults and alarms to determine the proper corrective actions. When the drive detects an alarm, the ALM indicator LED blinks and the alarm code display flashes. Most alarms trigger a digital output programmed for alarm output (H2- = 10). A fault (not an alarm) is present if the ALM LED lights without blinking. Refer to Faults on page 263 for information on fault codes.
Table 6.4 Minor Fault and Alarm Displays
LED D O ig pe it r a a l t O or perato L r C D D is O pl p a e y rator Name Min (H or 2 - F a ul t = O 1 u 0 t ) put Page AEr Node ID Setting Error (CANopen) YES 280
bb Drive Baseblock No output 280 boL Braking Transistor Overload YES 280
bUS Option Communication Error YES 280 CALL Serial Communication Stand By YES 280 CE MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error YES 281
264 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Name | Page |
|---|---|---|---|
| LED Operator | LCD Operator | ||
| dv8 | PM Rotor Position Estimation Error | 270 |
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Name | Page |
|---|---|---|---|
| LED Operator | LCD Operator | ||
| - | - | - | - |
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Name | Page |
|---|---|---|---|
| LED Operator | LCD Operator | ||
| to | oFC12 to oFC17 | Option Card Connection Error (CN5-C) | 273 |
| oFC50 | Encoder Option AD Conversion Error | 273 | |
| oFC51 | Encoder Option Analog Circuit Error | 274 | |
| oFC52 | Encoder Communication Timeout | 274 | |
| oFC53 | Encoder Communication Data Error | 274 | |
| oFC54 | Encoder Error | 274 | |
| oH | Heatsink Overheat | 274 | |
| oH1 | Heatsink Overheat | 274 | |
| oH3 | Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) | 274 | |
| oH4 | Motor Overheat Fault (PTC thermistor input) | 275 | |
| oL1 | Motor Overload | 275 | |
| oL2 | Drive Overload | 275 | |
| oL3 | Overtorque Detection 1 | 275 | |
| oL4 | Overtorque Detection 2 | 275 | |
| oPr | Operator Connection Fault | 276 | |
| oS | Overspeed | 276 | |
| ov | DC Bus Overvoltage | 276 | |
| PF | Input Phase Loss | 276 |
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Name | Page |
|---|---|---|---|
| LED Operator | LCD Operator | ||
| PF5 | Rescue Operation Power Supply | 276 | |
| PGo | Deterioration Error Encoder Disconnected (for Control Mode with Encoder) | 277 | |
| PGoH | Encoder Disconnected (when using encoder) | 277 | |
| rF | Braking Resistor Fault | 277 | |
| rr | Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault | 277 | |
| SC | IGBT Short Circuit | 277 | |
| SCF<2> | Safety Circuit Fault | 277 | |
| SE1 | Motor Contactor Response Error | 277 | |
| SE2 | Starting Current Error | 277 | |
| SE3 | Output Current Error | 277 | |
| SE4 | Brake Response Error | 278 | |
| SvE | Position Lock Error | 278 | |
| STo | Motor Pull Out or Step Out Detection | 278 | |
| UL3 | Undertorque Detection 1 | 278 | |
| UL4 | Undertorque Detection 2 | 278 | |
| Uv1 | DC Bus Undervoltage | 278 | |
| Uv2 | Control Power Supply Voltage Fault | 279 | |
| Uv3 | Soft Charge Circuit Fault | 279 | |
| voF | Output Voltage Detection Error | 279 |
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Name | Minor Fault Output (H2- = 10) | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| LED Operator | LCD Operator | |||
| AEr | Node ID Setting Error (CANopen) | YES | 280 | |
| bb | Drive Baseblock | No output | 280 | |
| boL | Braking Transistor Overload | YES | 280 | |
| bUS | Option Communication Error | YES | 280 | |
| CALL | Serial Communication Stand By | YES | 280 | |
| CE | MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error | YES | 281 |
Source page
Page 265
6.2 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 265 gnitoohselbuorT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 265 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 LED D O ig pe it r a a l t O or perato L r C D D is O pl p a e y rator Name Min (H or 2 - F a ul t = O 1 u 0 t ) put Page CrST Cannot Reset YES 281 dEv Speed Deviation (for Control Mode with Encoder) YES 281 EF Up/Down Command Error YES 281 EF0 Option Card External Fault YES 281 to EF3 to EF8 External Fault (input terminal S3 to S8) YES 281 L8-88 = 0: YES Hbb Safe Disable Circuit Fault Signal (H1-HC, H2-HC) Release 282 L8-88 = 1: No (default) L8-88 = 0: YES HbbF Safe Disable Circuit Fault Signal (H1-HC, H2-HC) Release L8-88 = 1: No (default) 282 HCA High Current Alarm YES 282 LT-1 Cooling Fan Maintenance Time No output<1> 282 LT-2 Capacitor Maintenance Time No output<1> 282 LT-3 Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance Time No output<1> 282 LT-4 IGBT Maintenance Time (90%) No output<1> 282 oH Heatsink Overheat YES 283 oH3 Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) YES 283 oL3 Overtorque Detection 1 YES 283 oL4 Overtorque Detection 2 YES 283 oS Overspeed (for Control Mode with Encoder) YES 283 ov DC Bus Overvoltage YES 283 PASS MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. Test Mode Complete No output 284 PGo Encoder Disconnected (for Control Mode with Encoder) YES 284 PGoH Encoder Disconnected (when using an encoder) YES 284 SE MEMOBUS/Modbus Self Test Failed YES 284 TrPC IGBT Maintenance Time (90%) YES 284 UL3 Undertorque Detection 1 YES 284 UL4 Undertorque Detection 2 YES 284 Uv Undervoltage YES 284 voF Output Voltage Detection Error YES 284 <1> Output when H2- = 2F. Operation Errors Table 6.5 Operation Error Displays 6 Digital Operator Display Digital Operator Display Name Page Name Page LED Operator LCD Operator LED Operator LCD Operator oPE01 Drive Capacity Setting Error 285 oPE08 Parameter Selection Error 286 oPE02 Parameter Setting Range Error 285 oPE10 V/f Pattern Setting Error 286 Multi-function Digital Input Setting oPE03 Error 285 oPE16 Energy Saving Constants Error 286 oPE04 Terminal Board Mismatch Error 285 oPE18 Parameter Setting Error, Online Tuning 286 Parameter Setting Error oPE05 Reference Source Selection Error 285 oPE20 PG-F3 Setting Error 286 oPE06 Control Mode Selection Error 285 oPE21 Elevator Parameter Setting Fault 286 Multi-function Analog Input Selection oPE07 286 - - - - Error
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Name | Minor Fault Output (H2- = 10) | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| LED Operator | LCD Operator | |||
| CrST | Cannot Reset | YES | 281 | |
| dEv | Speed Deviation (for Control Mode with Encoder) | YES | 281 | |
| EF | Up/Down Command Error | YES | 281 | |
| EF0 | Option Card External Fault | YES | 281 | |
| EF3 to EF8 | External Fault (input terminal S3 to S8) | YES | 281 | |
| to | Hbb | Safe Disable Circuit Fault Signal (H1-HC, H2-HC) Release | L8-88 = 0: YES L8-88 = 1: No (default) | 282 |
| HbbF | Safe Disable Circuit Fault Signal (H1-HC, H2-HC) Release | L8-88 = 0: YES L8-88 = 1: No (default) | 282 | |
| HCA | High Current Alarm | YES | 282 | |
| LT-1 | Cooling Fan Maintenance Time | No output<1> | 282 | |
| LT-2 | Capacitor Maintenance Time | No output<1> | 282 | |
| LT-3 | Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance Time | No output<1> | 282 | |
| LT-4 | IGBT Maintenance Time (90%) | No output<1> | 282 | |
| oH | Heatsink Overheat | YES | 283 | |
| oH3 | Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) | YES | 283 | |
| oL3 | Overtorque Detection 1 | YES | 283 | |
| oL4 | Overtorque Detection 2 | YES | 283 | |
| oS | Overspeed (for Control Mode with Encoder) | YES | 283 | |
| ov | DC Bus Overvoltage | YES | 283 | |
| PASS | MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. Test Mode Complete | No output | 284 | |
| PGo | Encoder Disconnected (for Control Mode with Encoder) | YES | 284 | |
| PGoH | Encoder Disconnected (when using an encoder) | YES | 284 | |
| SE | MEMOBUS/Modbus Self Test Failed | YES | 284 | |
| TrPC | IGBT Maintenance Time (90%) | YES | 284 | |
| UL3 | Undertorque Detection 1 | YES | 284 | |
| UL4 | Undertorque Detection 2 | YES | 284 | |
| Uv | Undervoltage | YES | 284 | |
| voF | Output Voltage Detection Error | YES | 284 |
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Name | Page |
|---|---|---|---|
| LED Operator | LCD Operator | ||
| oPE01 | Drive Capacity Setting Error | 285 | |
| oPE02 | Parameter Setting Range Error | 285 | |
| oPE03 | Multi-function Digital Input Setting Error | 285 | |
| oPE04 | Terminal Board Mismatch Error | 285 | |
| oPE05 | Reference Source Selection Error | 285 | |
| oPE06 | Control Mode Selection Error | 285 | |
| oPE07 | Multi-function Analog Input Selection Error | 286 |
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Name | Page |
|---|---|---|---|
| LED Operator | LCD Operator | ||
| oPE08 | Parameter Selection Error | 286 | |
| oPE10 | V/f Pattern Setting Error | 286 | |
| oPE16 | Energy Saving Constants Error | 286 | |
| oPE18 | Parameter Setting Error, Online Tuning Parameter Setting Error | 286 | |
| oPE20 | PG-F3 Setting Error | 286 | |
| oPE21 | Elevator Parameter Setting Fault | 286 | |
| - | - | - | - |
Source page
Page 266
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 266 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.2 Drive Alarms, Faults, and Errors
Auto-Tuning Errors Table 6.6 Auto-Tuning Error Displays
Digital Operator Display Digital Operator Display Name Page Name Page LED Operator LCD Operator LED Operator LCD Operator End1 Excessive V/f Setting 287 Er-05 No-Load Current Error 288 Motor Iron Core Saturation Coefficient End2 Error 287 Er-08 Rated Slip Error 288 End3 Rated Current Setting Alarm 287 Er-09 Acceleration Error 289 End4 Adjusted Slip Calculation Error 287 Er-10 Motor Direction Error 289 End5 Resistance Tuning Error 287 Er-11 Motor Speed Error 289 End6 Leakage Inductance Alarm 287 Er-12 Current Detection Error 289
266 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Name | Page |
|---|---|---|---|
| LED Operator | LCD Operator | ||
| End1 | Excessive V/f Setting | 287 | |
| End2 | Motor Iron Core Saturation Coefficient Error | 287 | |
| End3 | Rated Current Setting Alarm | 287 | |
| End4 | Adjusted Slip Calculation Error | 287 | |
| End5 | Resistance Tuning Error | 287 | |
| End6 | Leakage Inductance Alarm | 287 | |
| End7 | No-Load Current Alarm | 287 | |
| End8 | Rescue Operation Speed Warning | 288 | |
| End9 | Rescue Operation Rotor Pole Position Search Warning | 288 | |
| End10 | Rescue Operation Rotor Polarity Detection Warning | 288 | |
| Er-01 | Motor Data Error | 288 | |
| Er-02 | Alarm | 288 | |
| Er-03 | STOP Button Input | 288 | |
| Er-04 | Line-to-Line Resistance Error | 288 |
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Name | Page |
|---|---|---|---|
| LED Operator | LCD Operator | ||
| Er-05 | No-Load Current Error | 288 | |
| Er-08 | Rated Slip Error | 288 | |
| Er-09 | Acceleration Error | 289 | |
| Er-10 | Motor Direction Error | 289 | |
| Er-11 | Motor Speed Error | 289 | |
| Er-12 | Current Detection Error | 289 | |
| Er-13 | Leakage Inductance Error | 289 | |
| Er-18 | Induction Voltage Error | 289 | |
| Er-19 | PM Inductance Error | 289 | |
| Er-20 | Stator Resistance Error | 289 | |
| Er-21 | Z Pulse Correction Error | 290 | |
| Er-22 | Initial Rotor Pole Search Error | 290 | |
| Er-23 | Non-rotating Encoder Offset Tuning Warning | 290 | |
| - | - | - | - |
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Name | Page |
|---|---|---|---|
| LED Operator | LCD Operator | ||
| CoPy | Writing parameter settings (flashing) | 291 | |
| CPEr | Control mode mismatch | 291 | |
| CPyE | Error writing data | 291 | |
| CSEr | Copy unit error | 291 | |
| dFPS | Drive model mismatch | 291 | |
| ECE | Copy Error | 291 | |
| ECS | Checksum Error | 291 | |
| EdE | Write Impossible | 291 | |
| EiF | Write Data Error | 291 | |
| End | Task completed | 292 | |
| EPE | ID Mismatch | 292 | |
| ErE | Data Error | 292 | |
| EvE | Verify Error | 292 | |
| iFEr | Communication error | 292 | |
| ndAT | Model, voltage class, capacity mismatch | 292 | |
| rdEr | Error reading data | 292 | |
| rEAd | Reading parameter settings (flashing) | 292 | |
| vAEr | Voltage class, capacity mismatch | 292 | |
| vFyE | Parameter setting mismatch | 292 | |
| vrFy | Comparing parameter settings (flashing) | 292 |
Source page
Page 267
6.3 Fault Detection
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 267 gnitoohselbuorT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 267 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 6.3 Fault Detection Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions Faults are detected for drive protection, and cause the drive to stop while triggering the fault output terminal MA-MB-MC. Remove the cause of the fault and manually clear the fault before attempting to run the drive again. Table 6.8 Detailed Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions Digital Operator Display Fault Name Braking Transistor Overload boL The braking transistor has reached its overload level. Cause Possible Solution The wrong braking resistor is installed. Make sure the rating of the braking resistor fits drive and application. Use an external braking transistor if necessary. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Option Communication Error bUS • The connection was lost after establishing initial communication. • Only detected when the Up/Down command speed reference is assigned to an option card. Cause Possible Solution No signal was received from the PLC. • Check for faulty wiring. Faulty communications wiring or an existing short • Correct the wiring. circuit. • Check for disconnected cables and short circuits and repair as needed. • Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise. • Counteract noise in the control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring. A communications data error occurred due to noise. • Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise. Use surge absorbers if necessary. • Use only recommended cables or other shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or on the drive input power side. • Separate all communication wiring from drive power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the drive power supply input. The option card is damaged. Replace the option card if there are no problems with the wiring and the error continues to occur. The option card is not properly connected to the drive. • The connector pins on the option card do not line up properly with the connector pins on the drive. • Reinstall the option card. Digital Operator Display Fault Name MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error CE Communication data was not received for the amount of time set in parameter, H5-09 Communication Fault Detection Time. Cause Possible Solution • Check for faulty wiring. Faulty communications wiring or an existing short • Correct the wiring. circuit. • Check for disconnected cables and short circuits and repair as needed. • Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise. • Counteract noise in the control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring. Communication data error occurred due to noise. • Use only recommended cables or other shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or on the drive input power side. • Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise. Use surge absorbers if required. • Separate all communication wiring from drive power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the drive power supply input. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Control Fault CF The torque limit was reached continuously for three seconds or longer while ramping to stop in OLV Control. Cause Possible Solution Motor parameters are improperly set. Check the motor parameter settings and repeat Auto-Tuning. Torque limit is too low. Set the torque limit to the most appropriate setting (L7-01 through L7-04). Load inertia is too big. • Adjust the deceleration ramp (C1-02, -04, -06, -08). • Set the speed reference to the minimum value and interrupt the Up/Down command when the drive finishes decelerating. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Current Offset Fault CoF The current sensor is damaged or there was residual induction current in the motor (e.g., during sudden deceleration or when coasting) when the drive attempted to start the motor. Cause Possible Solution Due to residual induction current in the motor when the • Create a motor restart sequence that allows enough time for the residual induction voltage to dissipate. drive attempted to start the motor, the drive attempted to • Enable Speed Search at start (b3-01 = 1). Use the multi-function terminals to execute External Speed Search 1 and 2 (H1- = 6 adjust the current offset value beyond the allowable 61 or 62). range. Note: When using a PM motor, both External Speed Search 1 and 2 perform the same operation. Hardware is damaged. Replace the drive. Replace the drive. Digital Operator Display Fault Name or CPF00 or CPF01 Control Circuit Error <1> Cause Possible Solution • Cycle power to the drive. There is a self diagnostic error in control circuit. • Set the frequency to the minimum value and interrupt the Run command when the drive finishes decelerating. Connector on the operator is damaged. Replace the operator.
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| boL | Braking Transistor Overload | |
| The braking transistor has reached its overload level. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The wrong braking resistor is installed. | Make sure the rating of the braking resistor fits drive and application. Use an external braking transistor if necessary. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| bUS | Option Communication Error | |
| • The connection was lost after establishing initial communication. • Only detected when the Up/Down command speed reference is assigned to an option card. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| No signal was received from the PLC. | • Check for faulty wiring. • Correct the wiring. • Check for disconnected cables and short circuits and repair as needed. | |
| Faulty communications wiring or an existing short circuit. | ||
| A communications data error occurred due to noise. | • Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise. • Counteract noise in the control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring. • Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise. Use surge absorbers if necessary. • Use only recommended cables or other shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or on the drive input power side. • Separate all communication wiring from drive power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the drive power supply input. | |
| The option card is damaged. | Replace the option card if there are no problems with the wiring and the error continues to occur. | |
| The option card is not properly connected to the drive. | • The connector pins on the option card do not line up properly with the connector pins on the drive. • Reinstall the option card. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| CE | MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error | |
| Communication data was not received for the amount of time set in parameter, H5-09 Communication Fault Detection Time. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Faulty communications wiring or an existing short circuit. | • Check for faulty wiring. • Correct the wiring. • Check for disconnected cables and short circuits and repair as needed. | |
| Communication data error occurred due to noise. | • Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise. • Counteract noise in the control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring. • Use only recommended cables or other shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or on the drive input power side. • Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise. Use surge absorbers if required. • Separate all communication wiring from drive power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the drive power supply input. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| CF | Control Fault | |
| The torque limit was reached continuously for three seconds or longer while ramping to stop in OLV Control. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Motor parameters are improperly set. | Check the motor parameter settings and repeat Auto-Tuning. | |
| Torque limit is too low. | Set the torque limit to the most appropriate setting (L7-01 through L7-04). | |
| Load inertia is too big. | • Adjust the deceleration ramp (C1-02, -04, -06, -08). • Set the speed reference to the minimum value and interrupt the Up/Down command when the drive finishes decelerating. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| CoF | Current Offset Fault | |
| The current sensor is damaged or there was residual induction current in the motor (e.g., during sudden deceleration or when coasting) when the drive attempted to start the motor. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Due to residual induction current in the motor when the drive attempted to start the motor, the drive attempted to adjust the current offset value beyond the allowable range. | • Create a motor restart sequence that allows enough time for the residual induction voltage to dissipate. • Enable Speed Search at start (b3-01 = 1). Use the multi-function terminals to execute External Speed Search 1 and 2 (H1- = 61 or 62). Note: When using a PM motor, both External Speed Search 1 and 2 perform the same operation. | |
| Hardware is damaged. Replace the drive. | Replace the drive. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| or <1> | CPF00 or CPF01 | Control Circuit Error |
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| There is a self diagnostic error in control circuit. | • Cycle power to the drive. • Set the frequency to the minimum value and interrupt the Run command when the drive finishes decelerating. | |
| Connector on the operator is damaged. | Replace the operator. |
Source page
Page 268
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 268 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.3 Fault Detection
Digital Operator Display Fault Name A/D Conversion Error CPF02 An A/D conversion error or control circuit error occurred. Cause Possible Solution • Cycle power to the drive. Control circuit is damaged. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Control Board Connection Error CPF03 Connection error between the control board and the drive Cause Possible Solution • Turn off the power and check the connection between the control board and the drive There is a connection error. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. • Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise. • Counteract noise in the control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring. Drive fails to operate properly due to noise interference. • Use only recommended cables or other shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or on the drive input power side. • Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise and use surge absorbers if required. • Separate all communication wiring from drive power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the drive power supply input. Digital Operator Display Fault Name EEPROM Memory Data Error CPF06 An error in the data saved to EEPROM Cause Possible Solution • Turn off the power and check the connection between the control board and the drive. There is an error in EEPROM control circuit. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. The power supply was switched off while parameters Reinitialize the drive (A1-03). were being saved to the drive. Power to the control board was lost while writing Reinitialize the drive (A1-03). parameter settings during Rescue Operation. Digital Operator Display Fault Name CPF07 Terminal Board Connection Error CPF08 Cause Possible Solution • Turn off the power and check the connection between the control board and the drive. There is a faulty connection between the terminal board • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for and control board. instructions on replacing the control board. Digital Operator Display Fault Name to , to C C P P F F 1 1 1 6 t t o o C C P P F F 1 2 4 1 , Control Circuit Error <1> Cause Possible Solution • Cycle power to the drive. Hardware is damaged. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. Digital Operator Display Fault Name CPF22 Hybrid IC Failure Cause Possible Solution • Cycle power to the drive. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page293. Hybrid IC failure on the power board • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Control Board Connection Error CPF23 Connection error between the control board and the drive Cause Possible Solution • Turn the power off and check the connection between the control board and the drive. Hardware is damaged. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Drive Unit Signal Fault CPF24 The drive capacity cannot be detected correctly (drive capacity is checked when the drive is powered up). Cause Possible Solution Hardware is damaged. If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. Digital Operator Display Fault Name CPF25 Terminal Board not Connected Cause Possible Solution Terminal board is not connected correctly. Reconnect the terminal board to the connector on the drive, then cycle the power to the drive. 268 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| CPF02 | A/D Conversion Error | |
| An A/D conversion error or control circuit error occurred. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Control circuit is damaged. | • Cycle power to the drive. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| CPF03 | Control Board Connection Error | |
| Connection error between the control board and the drive | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| There is a connection error. | • Turn off the power and check the connection between the control board and the drive • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| Drive fails to operate properly due to noise interference. | • Check the various options available to minimize the effects of noise. • Counteract noise in the control circuit, main circuit, and ground wiring. • Use only recommended cables or other shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or on the drive input power side. • Ensure that other equipment such as switches or relays do not cause noise and use surge absorbers if required. • Separate all communication wiring from drive power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the drive power supply input. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| CPF06 | EEPROM Memory Data Error | |
| An error in the data saved to EEPROM | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| There is an error in EEPROM control circuit. | • Turn off the power and check the connection between the control board and the drive. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| The power supply was switched off while parameters were being saved to the drive. | Reinitialize the drive (A1-03). | |
| Power to the control board was lost while writing parameter settings during Rescue Operation. | Reinitialize the drive (A1-03). | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| CPF07 | Terminal Board Connection Error | |
| CPF08 | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| There is a faulty connection between the terminal board and control board. | • Turn off the power and check the connection between the control board and the drive. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| to , to <1> | CPF11 to CPF14, CPF16 to CPF21 | Control Circuit Error |
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Hardware is damaged. | • Cycle power to the drive. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| CPF22 | Hybrid IC Failure | |
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Hybrid IC failure on the power board | • Cycle power to the drive. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page293. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| CPF23 | Control Board Connection Error | |
| Connection error between the control board and the drive | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Hardware is damaged. | • Turn the power off and check the connection between the control board and the drive. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| CPF24 | Drive Unit Signal Fault | |
| The drive capacity cannot be detected correctly (drive capacity is checked when the drive is powered up). | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Hardware is damaged. | If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| CPF25 | Terminal Board not Connected | |
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Terminal board is not connected correctly. | Reconnect the terminal board to the connector on the drive, then cycle the power to the drive. |
Source page
Page 269
6.3 Fault Detection
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 269 gnitoohselbuorT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 269 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Digital Operator Display Fault Name Control Circuit Error to CPF26 to CPF34 CPU error Cause Possible Solution If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for Hardware is damaged. instructions on replacing the control board. Digital Operator Display Fault Name A/D Conversion Error CPF35 An A/D conversion error or control circuit error occurred. Cause Possible Solution • Cycle power to the drive. A/D conversion is damaged. Control circuit is damaged. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Speed Deviation (for Control Mode with Encoder) dEv The deviation between the speed reference and speed feedback is greater than the setting in F1-10 for longer than the time set to F1-11. Cause Possible Solution Load is too heavy. Reduce the load. Accel/decel ramp is too short. Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). The load is locked up. Check the machine. Parameters are not set appropriately. Check the settings of parameters F1-10 and F1-11. The motor brake is not applied. Ensure the motor brake operates properly with a brake control command from the drive. During Rescue Operation, either the DC bus voltage • Check the DC bus voltage setting for Rescue Operation (S4-12). dropped below S4-12 × (S4-13 - 10%), or 100 ms after • Lower the speed reference set for Rescue Operation (S4-15). triggering Rescue Operation, the DC bus voltage did not • Check the backup power supply. It may need to be replaced with another UPS if it has become worn and can no longer provide reach S4-12 × S4-13 before the motor started. enough power. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Encoder Z Pulse Fault dv1 The motor turned one full rotation without the Z Pulse being detected. Cause Possible Solution Encoder is not connected, not wired properly, or is • Make sure the encoder is properly connected and all shielded lines are properly grounded. damaged. • If the problem continues after cycling power, then replace either the PG option card or the encoder itself. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection dv2 The Z pulse is out of phase by more than 5 degrees for the number of times specified in parameter F1-17. Cause Possible Solution Noise interference along the encoder cable. Separate the encoder cable lines from the source of the noise. Encoder cable is not wired properly. Rewire the encoder and make sure all shielded lines are properly grounded. PG option card or the encoder is damaged. If the problem continues after cycling power, replace the PG option card or the encoder. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Inversion Detection dv3 The torque reference and acceleration are in opposite directions and the speed reference and actual motor speed differ by over 30% for the number of times set to F1-18. Cause Possible Solution Set the encoder offset to E5-11 as specified on the motor nameplate. Replacing the encoder or changing the motor/encoder The encoder offset is not set properly to E5-11. rotation direction requires readjustment of the encoder offset. An external force on the load side has caused the motor • Make sure the motor is rotating in the right direction. to move. • Look for any problems on the load side that might cause the motor to rotate in the opposite direction. Noise interference along the encoder cable is disturbing the encoder signals. Properly rewire the PG encoder and connect all lines including shielded line. Encoder is disconnected, not wired properly, or the PG option card or the encoder itself is damaged. Rotational direction for the encoder set to F1-05 is the Properly connect the motor lines for each phase (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3). opposite of the order of the motor lines. Digital Operator Display Fault Name 6 Inversion Prevention Detection Pulses indicate that the motor is rotating in the opposite direction of the speed reference. Set the number of pulses to trigger dv4 inverse detection to F1-19. Note: Set F1-19 to 0 to disable inverse detection in applications where the motor may rotate in the opposite direction of the speed reference. Cause Possible Solution • Set the encoder offset to E5-11 as specified on the motor nameplate. The encoder offset is not set properly to E5-11. • If the problem continues after cycling power, then replace either the PG option card or the encoder itself. Replacing the encoder or changing the motor/encoder rotation direction requires readjustment of the encoder offset. Noise interference along the encoder cable is disturbing • Make sure the motor is rotating in the correct direction. the encoder signals. • Look for any problems on the load side that might be causing the motor to rotate in the opposite direction. Encoder is disconnected, not wired properly, or the PG • Rewire the encoder and make sure all lines including shielded line are properly connected. option card or the encoder itself is damaged. • If the problem continues after cycling power, replace the PG option card or the encoder.
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| to | CPF26 to CPF34 | Control Circuit Error |
| CPU error | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Hardware is damaged. | If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| CPF35 | A/D Conversion Error | |
| An A/D conversion error or control circuit error occurred. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| A/D conversion is damaged. Control circuit is damaged. | • Cycle power to the drive. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| dEv | Speed Deviation (for Control Mode with Encoder) | |
| The deviation between the speed reference and speed feedback is greater than the setting in F1-10 for longer than the time set to F1-11. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Load is too heavy. | Reduce the load. | |
| Accel/decel ramp is too short. | Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). | |
| The load is locked up. | Check the machine. | |
| Parameters are not set appropriately. | Check the settings of parameters F1-10 and F1-11. | |
| The motor brake is not applied. | Ensure the motor brake operates properly with a brake control command from the drive. | |
| During Rescue Operation, either the DC bus voltage dropped below S4-12 × (S4-13 - 10%), or 100 ms after triggering Rescue Operation, the DC bus voltage did not reach S4-12 × S4-13 before the motor started. | • Check the DC bus voltage setting for Rescue Operation (S4-12). • Lower the speed reference set for Rescue Operation (S4-15). • Check the backup power supply. It may need to be replaced with another UPS if it has become worn and can no longer provide enough power. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| dv1 | Encoder Z Pulse Fault | |
| The motor turned one full rotation without the Z Pulse being detected. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Encoder is not connected, not wired properly, or is damaged. | • Make sure the encoder is properly connected and all shielded lines are properly grounded. • If the problem continues after cycling power, then replace either the PG option card or the encoder itself. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| dv2 | Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection | |
| The Z pulse is out of phase by more than 5 degrees for the number of times specified in parameter F1-17. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Noise interference along the encoder cable. | Separate the encoder cable lines from the source of the noise. | |
| Encoder cable is not wired properly. | Rewire the encoder and make sure all shielded lines are properly grounded. | |
| PG option card or the encoder is damaged. | If the problem continues after cycling power, replace the PG option card or the encoder. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| dv3 | Inversion Detection | |
| The torque reference and acceleration are in opposite directions and the speed reference and actual motor speed differ by over 30% for the number of times set to F1-18. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The encoder offset is not set properly to E5-11. | Set the encoder offset to E5-11 as specified on the motor nameplate. Replacing the encoder or changing the motor/encoder rotation direction requires readjustment of the encoder offset. | |
| An external force on the load side has caused the motor to move. | • Make sure the motor is rotating in the right direction. • Look for any problems on the load side that might cause the motor to rotate in the opposite direction. | |
| Noise interference along the encoder cable is disturbing the encoder signals. | Properly rewire the PG encoder and connect all lines including shielded line. | |
| Encoder is disconnected, not wired properly, or the PG option card or the encoder itself is damaged. | ||
| Rotational direction for the encoder set to F1-05 is the opposite of the order of the motor lines. | Properly connect the motor lines for each phase (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3). | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| dv4 | Inversion Prevention Detection | |
| Pulses indicate that the motor is rotating in the opposite direction of the speed reference. Set the number of pulses to trigger inverse detection to F1-19. Note: Set F1-19 to 0 to disable inverse detection in applications where the motor may rotate in the opposite direction of the speed reference. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The encoder offset is not set properly to E5-11. | • Set the encoder offset to E5-11 as specified on the motor nameplate. • If the problem continues after cycling power, then replace either the PG option card or the encoder itself. Replacing the encoder or changing the motor/encoder rotation direction requires readjustment of the encoder offset. | |
| Noise interference along the encoder cable is disturbing the encoder signals. | • Make sure the motor is rotating in the correct direction. • Look for any problems on the load side that might be causing the motor to rotate in the opposite direction. | |
| Encoder is disconnected, not wired properly, or the PG option card or the encoder itself is damaged. | • Rewire the encoder and make sure all lines including shielded line are properly connected. • If the problem continues after cycling power, replace the PG option card or the encoder. |
Source page
Page 270
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 270 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.3 Fault Detection
Digital Operator Display Fault Name Overacceleration Detection dv6 The acceleration of the elevator car exceeds the overacceleration detection level (S6-10) Cause Possible Solution Set E5-11 to the encoder offset value written on the motor nameplate. The encoder offset needs to be adjusted whenever the The encoder offset (E5-11) is incorrect. encoder is replaced or when reversing the direction of the motor. Noise along the encoder cable. Cables for the motor encoder are not wired properly, or Check the encoder wiring for any loose connections. Make sure that the shielded line is properly grounded. the PG option card (or the encoder itself) is damaged. Incorrect motor data has been set to the E5 parameters. Check the values set to the E5 parameters to make sure they match the information on the motor nameplate. Mechanical data for the elevator have not been set up Check parameters o1-20, o1-21, and o1-22 and set them to the correct values for the elevator. correctly. The acceleration is too fast. Check and adjust the acceleration rate and the jerk at acceleration start set in parameter C2-01. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Rotor Polarity Detection Timeover dv7 Unable to detect the magnetic poles within the designated time. Cause Possible Solution Battery voltage is too low. Charge the battery. • Check for wiring errors and ensure the output cable is connected properly. The output cable is disconnected. • Correct the wiring. The motor winding is damaged. • Check the resistance between motor lines. • Replace the motor if the winding is damaged. The output terminal is loose. Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Size on page69. Digital Operator Display Fault Name PM Rotor Position Estimation Error dv8 An invalid value resulted from Initial Pole Search. Note: Reset the fault and try Initial Pole Search again. Cause Possible Solution Motor characteristics have changed. Parameters that control Initial Pole Search are set Repeat the setup process. incorrectly (set up may be incomplete). Perform Stationary Auto-Tuning or Initial Pole Search Auto-Tuning. Parameters for the motor encoder are set to the wrong values (set up may be incomplete). Brake was released during Initial Pole Search or during Check the brake sequence. power loss. The brake must remain applied during Initial Pole Search and whenever the power supply is interrupted. Initial Pole Search cannot be performed on the motor Use a PG option card that is compatible with both the drive and an absolute encoder. being used. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Option Card External Fault EF0 An external fault condition is present. Cause Possible Solution An external fault was received from the PLC with other • Remove the cause of the external fault. than F6-03 = 3 “alarm only” (the drive continued to run • Remove the external fault input from the PLC. after external fault). Problem with the PLC program. Check the PLC program and correct problems. Digital Operator Display Fault Name External Fault (input terminal S3) EF3 External fault at multi-function input terminal S3. External Fault (input terminal S4) EF4 External fault at multi-function input terminal S4. External Fault (input terminal S5) EF5 External fault at multi-function input terminal S5. External Fault (input terminal S6) EF6 External fault at multi-function input terminal S6. External Fault (input terminal S7) EF7 External fault at multi-function input terminal S7 External Fault (input terminal S8) EF8 External fault at multi-function input terminal S8 Cause Possible Solution An external device has tripped an alarm function. Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the fault. Wiring is incorrect. • Ensure the signal lines have been connected properly to the terminals assigned for external fault detection (H1- = 20 to 2B). • Reconnect the signal line. • Check for unused terminals set for H1- = 20 to 2B (External Fault). Incorrect multi-function contact input setting • Change the terminal settings. 270 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| dv6 | Overacceleration Detection | |
| The acceleration of the elevator car exceeds the overacceleration detection level (S6-10) | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The encoder offset (E5-11) is incorrect. | Set E5-11 to the encoder offset value written on the motor nameplate. The encoder offset needs to be adjusted whenever the encoder is replaced or when reversing the direction of the motor. | |
| Noise along the encoder cable. | Check the encoder wiring for any loose connections. Make sure that the shielded line is properly grounded. | |
| Cables for the motor encoder are not wired properly, or the PG option card (or the encoder itself) is damaged. | ||
| Incorrect motor data has been set to the E5 parameters. | Check the values set to the E5 parameters to make sure they match the information on the motor nameplate. | |
| Mechanical data for the elevator have not been set up correctly. | Check parameters o1-20, o1-21, and o1-22 and set them to the correct values for the elevator. | |
| The acceleration is too fast. | Check and adjust the acceleration rate and the jerk at acceleration start set in parameter C2-01. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| dv7 | Rotor Polarity Detection Timeover | |
| Unable to detect the magnetic poles within the designated time. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Battery voltage is too low. | Charge the battery. | |
| The output cable is disconnected. | • Check for wiring errors and ensure the output cable is connected properly. • Correct the wiring. | |
| The motor winding is damaged. | • Check the resistance between motor lines. • Replace the motor if the winding is damaged. | |
| The output terminal is loose. | Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Size on page69. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| dv8 | PM Rotor Position Estimation Error | |
| An invalid value resulted from Initial Pole Search. Note: Reset the fault and try Initial Pole Search again. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Motor characteristics have changed. | Repeat the setup process. Perform Stationary Auto-Tuning or Initial Pole Search Auto-Tuning. | |
| Parameters that control Initial Pole Search are set incorrectly (set up may be incomplete). | ||
| Parameters for the motor encoder are set to the wrong values (set up may be incomplete). | ||
| Brake was released during Initial Pole Search or during power loss. | Check the brake sequence. The brake must remain applied during Initial Pole Search and whenever the power supply is interrupted. | |
| Initial Pole Search cannot be performed on the motor being used. | Use a PG option card that is compatible with both the drive and an absolute encoder. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| EF0 | Option Card External Fault | |
| An external fault condition is present. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| An external fault was received from the PLC with other than F6-03 = 3 “alarm only” (the drive continued to run after external fault). | • Remove the cause of the external fault. • Remove the external fault input from the PLC. | |
| Problem with the PLC program. | Check the PLC program and correct problems. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| EF3 | External Fault (input terminal S3) | |
| External fault at multi-function input terminal S3. | ||
| EF4 | External Fault (input terminal S4) | |
| External fault at multi-function input terminal S4. | ||
| EF5 | External Fault (input terminal S5) | |
| External fault at multi-function input terminal S5. | ||
| EF6 | External Fault (input terminal S6) | |
| External fault at multi-function input terminal S6. | ||
| EF7 | External Fault (input terminal S7) | |
| External fault at multi-function input terminal S7 | ||
| EF8 | External Fault (input terminal S8) | |
| External fault at multi-function input terminal S8 | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| An external device has tripped an alarm function. | Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the fault. | |
| Wiring is incorrect. | • Ensure the signal lines have been connected properly to the terminals assigned for external fault detection (H1- = 20 to 2B). • Reconnect the signal line. | |
| Incorrect multi-function contact input setting | • Check for unused terminals set for H1- = 20 to 2B (External Fault). • Change the terminal settings. |
Source page
Page 271
6.3 Fault Detection
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 271 gnitoohselbuorT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 271 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Digital Operator Display Fault Name EEPROM Write Error Err Data cannot be written to the EEPROM. Cause Possible Solution • Press . Noise has corrupted data while writing to the EEPROM. • Correct the parameter setting. • Cycle power to the drive. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page293. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for Hardware problem. instructions on replacing the control board. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Speed Reference Missing FrL Parameter d1-18 is set to 3, leveling speed detection is not assigned to a digital input (H1- ≠ 53) and no speed was selected while an Up or Down command was entered. Cause Possible Solution • Make sure the selected speed selection method matches the elevator controller sequence. Check parameter d1-18 and H1- Parameter d1-18 is set to 1, H1- is not set to 53 and settings. no speed was selected at start. • Make sure the elevator controller is connected properly. • Make sure the elevator controller selects the speed properly. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Ground Fault GF A current short to ground exceeded 50% of rated current on the output side of the drive. Cause Possible Solution • Check the insulation resistance of the motor. Motor insulation is damaged. • Replace the motor. • Check the motor cable. • Remove the short circuit and turn the power back on. A damaged motor cable is creating a short circuit. • Check the resistance between the cable and the ground terminal . • Replace the cable. • Reduce the carrier frequency. The leakage current at the drive output is too high. • Reduce the amount of stray capacitance. The drive started to run during a current offset fault or The value set exceeds the allowable setting range while the drive automatically adjusts the current offset (this happens only when while coasting to a stop. attempting to restart a PM motor that is coasting to stop). If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for Hardware problem. instructions on replacing the control board. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Output Phase Loss LF • Phase loss on the output side of the drive. • Setting L8-07 to 1 or 2 enables Phase Loss Detection. Cause Possible Solution The output cable is disconnected. • Check for wiring errors and properly connect the output cable. • Correct the wiring. • Check the resistance between motor lines. The motor winding is damaged. • Replace the motor if the winding is damaged. The output terminal is loose. Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Size on page69. The rated current of the motor being used is less than 5% Check the drive and motor capacities. of the drive rated current. If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for An output transistor is damaged. instructions on replacing the control board. A single-phase motor is being used. The drive cannot operate a single phase motor. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Output Current Imbalance (detected when L8-29 = 1) LF2 One or more of the phases in the output current is lost. Cause Possible Solution • Check for faulty wiring or poor connections on the output side of the drive. Phase loss has occurred on the output side of the drive. • Correct the wiring. 6 Terminal wires on the output side of the drive are loose. Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Size on page69. If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for The output circuit is damaged. instructions on replacing the control board. • Measure the line-to-line resistance for each motor phase. Ensure all values are the same. Motor impedance or motor phases are uneven. • Replace the motor.
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| Err | EEPROM Write Error | |
| Data cannot be written to the EEPROM. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Noise has corrupted data while writing to the EEPROM. | • Press . • Correct the parameter setting. • Cycle power to the drive. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page293. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| Hardware problem. | If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| FrL | Speed Reference Missing | |
| Parameter d1-18 is set to 3, leveling speed detection is not assigned to a digital input (H1- ≠ 53) and no speed was selected while an Up or Down command was entered. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Parameter d1-18 is set to 1, H1- is not set to 53 and no speed was selected at start. | • Make sure the selected speed selection method matches the elevator controller sequence. Check parameter d1-18 and H1- settings. • Make sure the elevator controller is connected properly. • Make sure the elevator controller selects the speed properly. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| GF | Ground Fault | |
| A current short to ground exceeded 50% of rated current on the output side of the drive. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Motor insulation is damaged. | • Check the insulation resistance of the motor. • Replace the motor. | |
| A damaged motor cable is creating a short circuit. | • Check the motor cable. • Remove the short circuit and turn the power back on. | |
| • Check the resistance between the cable and the ground terminal . • Replace the cable. | ||
| The leakage current at the drive output is too high. | • Reduce the carrier frequency. • Reduce the amount of stray capacitance. | |
| The drive started to run during a current offset fault or while coasting to a stop. | The value set exceeds the allowable setting range while the drive automatically adjusts the current offset (this happens only when attempting to restart a PM motor that is coasting to stop). | |
| Hardware problem. | If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| LF | Output Phase Loss | |
| • Phase loss on the output side of the drive. • Setting L8-07 to 1 or 2 enables Phase Loss Detection. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The output cable is disconnected. | • Check for wiring errors and properly connect the output cable. • Correct the wiring. | |
| The motor winding is damaged. | • Check the resistance between motor lines. • Replace the motor if the winding is damaged. | |
| The output terminal is loose. | Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Size on page69. | |
| The rated current of the motor being used is less than 5% of the drive rated current. | Check the drive and motor capacities. | |
| An output transistor is damaged. | If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| A single-phase motor is being used. | The drive cannot operate a single phase motor. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| LF2 | Output Current Imbalance (detected when L8-29 = 1) | |
| One or more of the phases in the output current is lost. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Phase loss has occurred on the output side of the drive. | • Check for faulty wiring or poor connections on the output side of the drive. • Correct the wiring. | |
| Terminal wires on the output side of the drive are loose. | Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Size on page69. | |
| The output circuit is damaged. | If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| Motor impedance or motor phases are uneven. | • Measure the line-to-line resistance for each motor phase. Ensure all values are the same. • Replace the motor. |
Source page
Page 272
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 272 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.3 Fault Detection
Digital Operator Display Fault Name Overcurrent oC Drive sensors have detected an output current greater than the specified overcurrent level. Cause Possible Solution The motor has been damaged due to overheating or the • Check the insulation resistance. motor insulation is damaged. • Replace the motor. • Check the motor cables. One of the motor cables has shorted out or there is a • Remove the short circuit and reapply power to the drive. grounding problem. • Check the resistance between the motor cables and the ground terminal . • Replace damaged cables. • Check the drive output side short circuit for broken output transistor. B1 and U/V/W The drive is damaged. - (negative) and U/V/W • Contact your Yaskawa representative or nearest Yaskawa sales office. • Measure the current flowing into the motor. The load is too heavy. • Replace the drive with a larger capacity drive if the current value exceeds the rated current. • Determine if there is sudden fluctuation in the current level. • Reduce the load to avoid sudden changes in the current level or switch to a larger drive. Calculate the amount of torque required for the desired acceleration and/or deceleration ramp relative to the inertia moment of the load. Accel/decel ramp is too fast. If the drive is not capable of producing that much torque in time, try the following setting changes: • Reduce the acceleration and/or deceleration ramp (i.e., increase the accel/decel time). • Use a larger capacity drive. The drive is attempting to operate a specialized motor or • Check the motor capacity. a motor larger than the maximum size allowed. • Ensure that the rated capacity of the drive is greater than or equal to the capacity rating found on the motor nameplate. Magnetic contactor (MC) on the output side of the drive has turned on or off. Set up the operation sequence so that the MC is not tripped while the drive is outputting current. • Check the ratios between the voltage and frequency. V/f setting is not operating as expected. • Set parameters E1-04 through E1-10 appropriately (E3-04 through E3-10 for motor 2). • Lower the voltage if it is too high relative to the frequency. Excessive torque compensation. • Check the amount of torque compensation. • Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed loss and less current. • Review the possible solutions provided for handling noise interference. Drive fails to operate properly due to noise interference. • Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and ground wiring. The overcurrent level has exceeded the value set to L8-27. (PM control modes) Correct the value set to overcurrent detection gain (L8-27). • Check which motor control method the drive is set to (A1-02). The motor control method and motor do not match. • For IM motors, set A1-02 = “0”, “2”, or “3”. • For PM motors, set A1-02 = “7”. The rated output current of the drive is too small Use a larger drive. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Option Card Connection Error at Option Connector CN5-A, Option Card Fault at Option Connector CN5-A oFA00 Option compatibility error Cause Possible Solution The option card installed into port CN5-A is incompatible with the drive. Check if the drive supports the option card to be installed. Contact Yaskawa for assistance. A PG option card is connected to option port CN5-A PG option cards are supported by option ports CN5-B and CN5-C only. Place the PG option card into the correct option port. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Option Card Fault at Option Connector CN5-A oFA01 Option not properly connected Cause Possible Solution • Turn the power off and reconnect the option card. • Check if the option card is properly plugged into the option port. Make sure the card is fixed properly. The option board connection to port CN5-A is faulty. • If the option is not a communication option card, try to use the card in another option port. If the option card works properly in a different option port, replace the drive because port CN5-A is damaged. If the error persists (oFb01 or oFC01 occur), replace the option card. Digital Operator Display Fault Name , oFA05, oFA06 , oFA10, oFA11 Option card error occurred at option port CN5-A to oFA12 to oFA17 to oFA30 to oFA43 Cause Possible Solution • Cycle power to the drive. Option card or hardware is damaged. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. 272 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| oC | Overcurrent | |
| Drive sensors have detected an output current greater than the specified overcurrent level. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The motor has been damaged due to overheating or the motor insulation is damaged. | • Check the insulation resistance. • Replace the motor. | |
| One of the motor cables has shorted out or there is a grounding problem. | • Check the motor cables. • Remove the short circuit and reapply power to the drive. | |
| • Check the resistance between the motor cables and the ground terminal . • Replace damaged cables. | ||
| The drive is damaged. | • Check the drive output side short circuit for broken output transistor. B1 and U/V/W - (negative) and U/V/W • Contact your Yaskawa representative or nearest Yaskawa sales office. | |
| The load is too heavy. | • Measure the current flowing into the motor. • Replace the drive with a larger capacity drive if the current value exceeds the rated current. • Determine if there is sudden fluctuation in the current level. • Reduce the load to avoid sudden changes in the current level or switch to a larger drive. | |
| Accel/decel ramp is too fast. | Calculate the amount of torque required for the desired acceleration and/or deceleration ramp relative to the inertia moment of the load. If the drive is not capable of producing that much torque in time, try the following setting changes: • Reduce the acceleration and/or deceleration ramp (i.e., increase the accel/decel time). • Use a larger capacity drive. | |
| The drive is attempting to operate a specialized motor or a motor larger than the maximum size allowed. | • Check the motor capacity. • Ensure that the rated capacity of the drive is greater than or equal to the capacity rating found on the motor nameplate. | |
| Magnetic contactor (MC) on the output side of the drive has turned on or off. | Set up the operation sequence so that the MC is not tripped while the drive is outputting current. | |
| V/f setting is not operating as expected. | • Check the ratios between the voltage and frequency. • Set parameters E1-04 through E1-10 appropriately (E3-04 through E3-10 for motor 2). • Lower the voltage if it is too high relative to the frequency. | |
| Excessive torque compensation. | • Check the amount of torque compensation. • Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed loss and less current. | |
| Drive fails to operate properly due to noise interference. | • Review the possible solutions provided for handling noise interference. • Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and ground wiring. | |
| The overcurrent level has exceeded the value set to L8-27. (PM control modes) | Correct the value set to overcurrent detection gain (L8-27). | |
| The motor control method and motor do not match. | • Check which motor control method the drive is set to (A1-02). • For IM motors, set A1-02 = “0”, “2”, or “3”. • For PM motors, set A1-02 = “7”. | |
| The rated output current of the drive is too small | Use a larger drive. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oFA00 | Option Card Connection Error at Option Connector CN5-A, Option Card Fault at Option Connector CN5-A | |
| Option compatibility error | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The option card installed into port CN5-A is incompatible with the drive. | Check if the drive supports the option card to be installed. Contact Yaskawa for assistance. | |
| A PG option card is connected to option port CN5-A | PG option cards are supported by option ports CN5-B and CN5-C only. Place the PG option card into the correct option port. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oFA01 | Option Card Fault at Option Connector CN5-A | |
| Option not properly connected | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The option board connection to port CN5-A is faulty. | • Turn the power off and reconnect the option card. • Check if the option card is properly plugged into the option port. Make sure the card is fixed properly. • If the option is not a communication option card, try to use the card in another option port. If the option card works properly in a different option port, replace the drive because port CN5-A is damaged. If the error persists (oFb01 or oFC01 occur), replace the option card. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| , | oFA05, oFA06 | Option card error occurred at option port CN5-A |
| oFA10, oFA11 | ||
| , to | oFA12 to oFA17 | |
| oFA30 to oFA43 | ||
| to Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Option card or hardware is damaged. | • Cycle power to the drive. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. |
Source page
Page 273
6.3 Fault Detection
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 273 gnitoohselbuorT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 273 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Digital Operator Display Fault Name Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-B oFb00 Option compatibility error Cause Possible Solution The option card installed into port CN5-B is incompatible with the drive. Make sure the drive supports the option card to be installed. Contact Yaskawa for assistance. A communication option card has been installed in Communication option cards are only supported by option port CN5-A. It is not possible to install more than one comm. option. option port CN5-B. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-B oFb01 Option not properly connected Cause Possible Solution • Turn off the power and reconnect the option card. • Check if the option card is properly plugged into the option port. Make sure the card is fixed properly. The option board connection to port CN5-B is faulty. • Try to use the card in another option port (in case of a PG option use port CN5-C). If the option cards works in the other port, replace the drive because port CN5-B is damaged. If the error persists (oFA01 or oFC01 occur), replace the option board. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-B oFb02 Same type of option card already connected Cause Possible Solution An option card of the same type is already installed in Except for PG options, each option card type can only be installed once. Make sure only one type of option card is connected. option port CN5-A. An input option card is already installed in option port Install a comm. option, a digital input option, or an analog input option. The same type of card cannot be installed twice. CN5-A. Digital Operator Display Fault Name to oFb03 to oFb11 Option card error occurred at Option Port CN5-B to oFb12 to oFb17 Cause Possible Solution • Cycle power to the drive. Option card or hardware is damaged. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Option Card Connection Error at Option Port CN5-C oFC00 Option compatibility error Cause Possible Solution The option card installed into port CN5-C is Confirm that the drive supports the option card to be installed. Contact Yaskawa for assistance. incompatible with the drive. A communication option card has been installed in Communication option cards are only supported by option port CN5-A. It is not possible to install more than one comm. option. option port CN5-C. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-C oFC01 Option not properly connected Cause Possible Solution • Turn the power off and reconnect the option card. The option board connection to port CN5-C is faulty. • Check if the option card is properly plugged into the option port. Make sure the card is fixed properly. • Try to use the card in another option port (in case of a PG option use port CN5-B). If the option card works in a different port, replace the drive because port CN5-C is damaged. If the error persists (oFA01 or oFb01 occur), replace the option board. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-C oFC02 A maximum of two PG option boards can be used simultaneously. Remove the PG option board installed into option port CN5-A. Cause Possible Solution An option card of the same type is already installed in option port CN5-A or CN5-B. Except for PG options, each option card type can only be installed once. Make sure only one type of option card is connected. An input option card is already installed in option port Make sure that a comm. option, a digital input option, or an analog input option is installed. The same type of card cannot be CN5-A or CN5-B. installed twice. Three PG option boards are installed. A maximum of two PG option boards can be used simultaneously. Remove the PG option board installed into option port CN5-A. 6 Digital Operator Display Fault Name to oFC03 to oFC11 Option card error occurred at option port CN5-C to oFC12 to oFC17 Cause Possible Solution • Cycle power to the drive. Option card or hardware is damaged. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Encoder Option AD Conversion Error oFC50 Error with the A/D conversion level (VCC level), or A/D conversion timed out. Cause Possible Solution The PG option card is damaged. Replace the PG option card.
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| oFb00 | Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-B | |
| Option compatibility error | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The option card installed into port CN5-B is incompatible with the drive. | Make sure the drive supports the option card to be installed. Contact Yaskawa for assistance. | |
| A communication option card has been installed in option port CN5-B. | Communication option cards are only supported by option port CN5-A. It is not possible to install more than one comm. option. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oFb01 | Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-B | |
| Option not properly connected | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The option board connection to port CN5-B is faulty. | • Turn off the power and reconnect the option card. • Check if the option card is properly plugged into the option port. Make sure the card is fixed properly. • Try to use the card in another option port (in case of a PG option use port CN5-C). If the option cards works in the other port, replace the drive because port CN5-B is damaged. If the error persists (oFA01 or oFC01 occur), replace the option board. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oFb02 | Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-B | |
| Same type of option card already connected | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| An option card of the same type is already installed in option port CN5-A. | Except for PG options, each option card type can only be installed once. Make sure only one type of option card is connected. | |
| An input option card is already installed in option port CN5-A. | Install a comm. option, a digital input option, or an analog input option. The same type of card cannot be installed twice. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| to | oFb03 to oFb11 | Option card error occurred at Option Port CN5-B |
| oFb12 to oFb17 | ||
| to Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Option card or hardware is damaged. | • Cycle power to the drive. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oFC00 | Option Card Connection Error at Option Port CN5-C | |
| Option compatibility error | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The option card installed into port CN5-C is incompatible with the drive. | Confirm that the drive supports the option card to be installed. Contact Yaskawa for assistance. | |
| A communication option card has been installed in option port CN5-C. | Communication option cards are only supported by option port CN5-A. It is not possible to install more than one comm. option. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oFC01 | Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-C | |
| Option not properly connected | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The option board connection to port CN5-C is faulty. | • Turn the power off and reconnect the option card. • Check if the option card is properly plugged into the option port. Make sure the card is fixed properly. • Try to use the card in another option port (in case of a PG option use port CN5-B). If the option card works in a different port, replace the drive because port CN5-C is damaged. If the error persists (oFA01 or oFb01 occur), replace the option board. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oFC02 | Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-C | |
| A maximum of two PG option boards can be used simultaneously. Remove the PG option board installed into option port CN5-A. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| An option card of the same type is already installed in option port CN5-A or CN5-B. | Except for PG options, each option card type can only be installed once. Make sure only one type of option card is connected. | |
| An input option card is already installed in option port CN5-A or CN5-B. | Make sure that a comm. option, a digital input option, or an analog input option is installed. The same type of card cannot be installed twice. | |
| Three PG option boards are installed. | A maximum of two PG option boards can be used simultaneously. Remove the PG option board installed into option port CN5-A. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| to | oFC03 to oFC11 | Option card error occurred at option port CN5-C |
| to | oFC12 to oFC17 | |
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Option card or hardware is damaged. | • Cycle power to the drive. • If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oFC50 | Encoder Option AD Conversion Error | |
| Error with the A/D conversion level (VCC level), or A/D conversion timed out. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The PG option card is damaged. | Replace the PG option card. |
Source page
Page 274
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 274 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.3 Fault Detection
Digital Operator Display Fault Name Encoder Option Analog Circuit Error oFC51 Incorrect signal level (+2.5 V signal) Cause Possible Solution The PG option card is damaged. Replace the PG option card. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Encoder Communication Timeout oFC52 Signal encoder timed out waiting to receive data Cause Possible Solution Encoder cable wiring is wrong. Correct the wiring. Encoder cable is disconnected. Reconnect the cable. Parameters for Encoder Selection (F1-50) are set to the wrong values. Set parameter F1-50 to the proper value. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Encoder Communication Data Error oFC53 Serial encoder CRC checksum error Cause Possible Solution Encoder cable wiring is wrong. Correct the wiring. Encoder cable is disconnected. Reconnect the cable. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Encoder Error oFC54 Alarm reading EnDat absolute position data from encoder (OR flag from EnDat error for overvoltage, undervoltage, etc.) Cause Possible Solution Power supply to encoder is wired incorrectly. Correct the wiring. The power supply circuit of the PG option card is damaged. Replace the PG option card. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Heatsink Overheat oH The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the overheat pre-alarm level set to L8-02. Default value for L8-02 is determined by drive capacity (o2-04). Cause Possible Solution • Check the temperature surrounding the drive. Verify temperature is within drive specifications. Surrounding temperature is too high. • Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel. • Install a fan or air conditioner to cool the surrounding area. • Remove anything near the drive that might be producing excessive heat. • Measure the output current. Load is too heavy. • Decrease the load. • Lower the carrier frequency (C6-03). Internal cooling fan is stopped. • Replace the cooling fan. Refer to Cooling Fan Component Names on page304. • After replacing the drive, reset the cooling fan maintenance parameter (o4-03 = 0). Digital Operator Display Fault Name Heatsink Overheat oH1 The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the drive overheat level. The overheat level is determined by drive capacity (o2-04). Cause Possible Solution • Check the temperature surrounding the drive. • Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel. Surrounding temperature is too high. • Install a fan or air conditioner to cool the surrounding area. • Remove anything near the drive that might be producing excessive heat. • Measure the output current. Load is too heavy. • Lower the carrier frequency (C6-03). • Reduce the load. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) oH3 • The motor overheat signal to analog input terminal A1 or A2 exceeded the alarm detection level. • Detection requires multi-function analog input H3-02 or H3-10 be set to “E”. Cause Possible Solution Motor thermostat wiring is fault (PTC thermistor input). Repair the PTC thermistor input wiring. There is a fault on the machine side (e.g., the machine is • Check the status of the machine. locked up). • Remove the cause of the fault. • Check the size of the load, the accel/decel times, and the cycle times. • Decrease the load. • Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). • Adjust the preset V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10). This will mainly involve reducing E1-08 and E1-10. Motor has overheated • Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10 too much, as this reduces load tolerance at low speeds. • Check the motor rated current. • Enter the motor rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate (E2-01). • Ensure the motor cooling system is operating normally. • Repair or replace the motor cooling system. 274 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| oFC51 | Encoder Option Analog Circuit Error | |
| Incorrect signal level (+2.5 V signal) | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The PG option card is damaged. | Replace the PG option card. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oFC52 | Encoder Communication Timeout | |
| Signal encoder timed out waiting to receive data | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Encoder cable wiring is wrong. | Correct the wiring. | |
| Encoder cable is disconnected. | Reconnect the cable. | |
| Parameters for Encoder Selection (F1-50) are set to the wrong values. | Set parameter F1-50 to the proper value. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oFC53 | Encoder Communication Data Error | |
| Serial encoder CRC checksum error | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Encoder cable wiring is wrong. | Correct the wiring. | |
| Encoder cable is disconnected. | Reconnect the cable. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oFC54 | Encoder Error | |
| Alarm reading EnDat absolute position data from encoder (OR flag from EnDat error for overvoltage, undervoltage, etc.) | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Power supply to encoder is wired incorrectly. | Correct the wiring. | |
| The power supply circuit of the PG option card is damaged. | Replace the PG option card. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oH | Heatsink Overheat | |
| The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the overheat pre-alarm level set to L8-02. Default value for L8-02 is determined by drive capacity (o2-04). | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Surrounding temperature is too high. | • Check the temperature surrounding the drive. Verify temperature is within drive specifications. • Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel. • Install a fan or air conditioner to cool the surrounding area. • Remove anything near the drive that might be producing excessive heat. | |
| Load is too heavy. | • Measure the output current. • Decrease the load. • Lower the carrier frequency (C6-03). | |
| Internal cooling fan is stopped. | • Replace the cooling fan. Refer to Cooling Fan Component Names on page304. • After replacing the drive, reset the cooling fan maintenance parameter (o4-03 = 0). | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oH1 | Heatsink Overheat | |
| The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the drive overheat level. The overheat level is determined by drive capacity (o2-04). | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Surrounding temperature is too high. | • Check the temperature surrounding the drive. • Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel. • Install a fan or air conditioner to cool the surrounding area. • Remove anything near the drive that might be producing excessive heat. | |
| Load is too heavy. | • Measure the output current. • Lower the carrier frequency (C6-03). • Reduce the load. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oH3 | Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) | |
| • The motor overheat signal to analog input terminal A1 or A2 exceeded the alarm detection level. • Detection requires multi-function analog input H3-02 or H3-10 be set to “E”. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Motor thermostat wiring is fault (PTC thermistor input). | Repair the PTC thermistor input wiring. | |
| There is a fault on the machine side (e.g., the machine is locked up). | • Check the status of the machine. • Remove the cause of the fault. | |
| Motor has overheated | • Check the size of the load, the accel/decel times, and the cycle times. • Decrease the load. • Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). | |
| • Adjust the preset V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10). This will mainly involve reducing E1-08 and E1-10. • Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10 too much, as this reduces load tolerance at low speeds. | ||
| • Check the motor rated current. • Enter the motor rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate (E2-01). • Ensure the motor cooling system is operating normally. • Repair or replace the motor cooling system. |
Source page
Page 275
6.3 Fault Detection
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 275 gnitoohselbuorT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 275 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Digital Operator Display Fault Name Motor Overheat Fault (PTC thermistor input) oH4 • The motor overheat signal to analog input terminal A1 or A2 exceeded the fault detection level. • Detection requires that multi-function analog input H3-02 or H3-10 = “E”. Cause Possible Solution Motor thermostat wiring is fault (PTC thermistor input). Repair the PTC thermistor input wiring. There is a fault on the machine side (e.g., the machine is • Check the status of the machine. locked up). • Remove the cause of the fault. • Check the size of the load, the accel/decel times, and the cycle times. • Decrease the load. • Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). Adjust the preset V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10). This will mainly involve reducing E1-08 and E1-10. Be careful not to lower Motor has overheated. E1-08 and E1-10 too much because this reduces load tolerance at low speeds. • Check the motor rated current. • Enter the motor rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate (E2-01). • Ensure the motor cooling system is operating normally. • Repair or replace the motor cooling system. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Motor Overload oL1 The electronic motor overload protection tripped. Cause Possible Solution Reduce the load. Load is too heavy. Note: After the value of U4-16 has decreased to one less than 100, reset oL1. The value of U4-16 must be less than 100 before oL1 can be reset. Cycle times are too short during acceleration and Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). deceleration. • Reduce the load. A general purpose motor is driven below the rated speed • Increase the speed. with too high load. • If the motor is supposed to operate at low speeds, either increase the motor capacity or use a motor specifically designed to operate in the desired speed range. • Adjust the user-set V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10) by reducing E1-08 and E1-10. The output voltage is too high. • Do not set E1-08 and E1-10 too low. This reduces load tolerance at low speeds. • Check the motor-rated current. The wrong motor rated current is set to E2-01. • Enter the value written on the motor nameplate to parameter E2-01. • Check the rated frequency indicated on the motor nameplate. The Base Frequency is set incorrectly. • Enter the rated frequency to E1-06 (Base Frequency). Multiple motors are running off the same drive. Disable the motor protection function (L1-01 = 0) and install a thermal relay to each motor. • Check the motor characteristics. The electrical thermal protection characteristics and • Correct the type of motor protection that has been selected (L1-01). motor overload characteristics do not match. • Install an external thermal relay. The electrical thermal relay is operating at the wrong • Check the current rating listed on the motor nameplate. level. • Check the value set for the motor rated current (E2-01). Output current fluctuation due to power supply loss Check the power supply for phase loss. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Drive Overload oL2 The thermal sensor of the drive triggered overload protection. Cause Possible Solution Load is too heavy. Reduce the load. Accel/decel ramp is too short. Increase the settings for the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). • Adjust the preset V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10) by reducing E1-08 and E1-10. The output voltage is too high. • Do not lower E1-08 and E1-10 excessively. This reduces load tolerance at low speeds. Drive capacity is too small. Replace the drive with a larger model. • Reduce the load when operating at low speeds. Overload occurred when operating at low speeds. • Replace the drive with a model that is one frame size larger. • Lower the carrier frequency (C6-03). Excessive torque compensation. Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed loss but less current. Output current fluctuation due to input phase loss Check the power supply for phase loss. Digital Operator Display Fault Name oL3 Overtorque Detection 1 6 The current has exceeded the value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer than the allowable time (L6-03). Cause Possible Solution Parameter settings are not appropriate for the load. Check the settings of parameters L6-02 and L6-03. Fault on the machine side (e.g., machine is locked up). Check the status of the load. Remove the cause of the fault. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Overtorque Detection 2 oL4 The current has exceeded the value set for Overtorque Detection 2 (L6-05) for longer than the allowable time (L6-06). Cause Possible Solution Parameter settings are not appropriate for the load. Check the settings of parameters L6-05 and L6-06.
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| oH4 | Motor Overheat Fault (PTC thermistor input) | |
| • The motor overheat signal to analog input terminal A1 or A2 exceeded the fault detection level. • Detection requires that multi-function analog input H3-02 or H3-10 = “E”. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Motor thermostat wiring is fault (PTC thermistor input). | Repair the PTC thermistor input wiring. | |
| There is a fault on the machine side (e.g., the machine is locked up). | • Check the status of the machine. • Remove the cause of the fault. | |
| Motor has overheated. | • Check the size of the load, the accel/decel times, and the cycle times. • Decrease the load. • Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). | |
| Adjust the preset V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10). This will mainly involve reducing E1-08 and E1-10. Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10 too much because this reduces load tolerance at low speeds. | ||
| • Check the motor rated current. • Enter the motor rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate (E2-01). • Ensure the motor cooling system is operating normally. • Repair or replace the motor cooling system. | ||
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oL1 | Motor Overload | |
| The electronic motor overload protection tripped. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Load is too heavy. | Reduce the load. Note: After the value of U4-16 has decreased to one less than 100, reset oL1. The value of U4-16 must be less than 100 before oL1 can be reset. | |
| Cycle times are too short during acceleration and deceleration. | Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). | |
| A general purpose motor is driven below the rated speed with too high load. | • Reduce the load. • Increase the speed. • If the motor is supposed to operate at low speeds, either increase the motor capacity or use a motor specifically designed to operate in the desired speed range. | |
| The output voltage is too high. | • Adjust the user-set V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10) by reducing E1-08 and E1-10. • Do not set E1-08 and E1-10 too low. This reduces load tolerance at low speeds. | |
| The wrong motor rated current is set to E2-01. | • Check the motor-rated current. • Enter the value written on the motor nameplate to parameter E2-01. | |
| The Base Frequency is set incorrectly. | • Check the rated frequency indicated on the motor nameplate. • Enter the rated frequency to E1-06 (Base Frequency). | |
| Multiple motors are running off the same drive. | Disable the motor protection function (L1-01 = 0) and install a thermal relay to each motor. | |
| The electrical thermal protection characteristics and motor overload characteristics do not match. | • Check the motor characteristics. • Correct the type of motor protection that has been selected (L1-01). • Install an external thermal relay. | |
| The electrical thermal relay is operating at the wrong level. | • Check the current rating listed on the motor nameplate. • Check the value set for the motor rated current (E2-01). | |
| Output current fluctuation due to power supply loss | Check the power supply for phase loss. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oL2 | Drive Overload | |
| The thermal sensor of the drive triggered overload protection. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Load is too heavy. | Reduce the load. | |
| Accel/decel ramp is too short. | Increase the settings for the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). | |
| The output voltage is too high. | • Adjust the preset V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10) by reducing E1-08 and E1-10. • Do not lower E1-08 and E1-10 excessively. This reduces load tolerance at low speeds. | |
| Drive capacity is too small. | Replace the drive with a larger model. | |
| Overload occurred when operating at low speeds. | • Reduce the load when operating at low speeds. • Replace the drive with a model that is one frame size larger. • Lower the carrier frequency (C6-03). | |
| Excessive torque compensation. | Reduce the torque compensation gain (C4-01) until there is no speed loss but less current. | |
| Output current fluctuation due to input phase loss | Check the power supply for phase loss. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oL3 | Overtorque Detection 1 | |
| The current has exceeded the value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer than the allowable time (L6-03). | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Parameter settings are not appropriate for the load. | Check the settings of parameters L6-02 and L6-03. | |
| Fault on the machine side (e.g., machine is locked up). | Check the status of the load. Remove the cause of the fault. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oL4 | Overtorque Detection 2 | |
| The current has exceeded the value set for Overtorque Detection 2 (L6-05) for longer than the allowable time (L6-06). | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Parameter settings are not appropriate for the load. | Check the settings of parameters L6-05 and L6-06. |
Source page
Page 276
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 276 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.3 Fault Detection
Digital Operator Display Fault Name External Digital Operator Connection Fault • The external operator has been disconnected from the drive. oPr Note: An oPr fault will occur when all of the following conditions are true: Output is interrupted when the operator is disconnected (o2-06 = 1). The Up/Down command is assigned to the operator (b1-02 = 0 and LOCAL has been selected). Cause Possible Solution • Check the connection between the operator and the drive. External operator is not properly connected to the drive. • Replace the cable if damaged. • Turn off the drive input power and disconnect the operator. Then reconnect the operator and turn the drive input power back on. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Overspeed oS The motor speed feedback exceeded the F1-08 setting. Cause Possible Solution • Reduce the settings for C5-01 (Speed Control Proportional Gain 1) and increase C5-02 (Speed Control Integral Time 1). Overshoot is occurring. • If using a closed loop vector mode, enable Inertia Compensation. Inappropriate parameter settings. Check the setting for the overspeed detection level and the overspeed detection time (F1-08 and F1-09). Digital Operator Display Fault Name DC Bus Overvoltage ov Voltage in the DC bus has exceeded the overvoltage detection level. • For 200 V class: approximately 410 V • For 400 V class: approximately 820 V Cause Possible Solution • Increase the deceleration ramp (C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, C1-08). Deceleration ramp is too short and regenerative energy • Make sure the braking resistor rating/external braking transistor rating fits the application. is flowing from the motor into the drive. • If an external braking transistor is used, make sure it is connected properly and working as expected. • Check if sudden drive acceleration triggers an overvoltage alarm. Fast acceleration ramp causes the motor to overshoot the • Increase the acceleration ramp (C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, C1-07). speed reference. • Increase the jerk setting in C2-02 (decrease if o1-03 > 3) Install a DC reactor. Surge voltage entering from the drive input power. Note: Voltage surge can result from a thyristor convertor and phase advancing capacitor using the same input power supply. Ground fault in the output circuit causes the DC bus • Check the motor wiring for ground faults. capacitor to overcharge. • Correct grounding shorts and turn the power back on. • Check the voltage. Drive input power voltage is too high. • Lower drive input power voltage within the limits listed in the specifications. • Check braking transistor wiring for errors. The braking transistor is wired incorrectly. • Properly rewire the braking resistor device. Encoder cable is disconnected. Reconnect the cable. Encoder cable wiring is wrong. Correct the wiring. Noise interference along the encoder wiring. Separate the wiring from the source of the noise (often the output lines from the drive). Drive fails to operate properly due to noise interference. • Review the list of possible solutions provided for controlling noise. • Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and ground wiring. • Adjust the parameters that control hunting. Motor hunting occurs. • Adjust the AFR time constant (n2-02 and n2-03). Digital Operator Display Fault Name Input Phase Loss PF Drive input power has an open phase or has a large imbalance of voltage between phases. Detected when L8-05 = 1, 2, 3 (enabled). Cause Possible Solution There is phase loss in the drive input power. • Check for wiring errors in the main circuit drive input power. • Correct the wiring. • Ensure the terminals are tightened properly. There is loose wiring in the drive input power terminals. • Apply the tightening torque as specified in this manual. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page60. There is excessive fluctuation in the drive input power • Check the voltage from the drive input power. voltage. • Review the possible solutions for stabilizing the drive input power. There is poor balance between voltage phases. • Stabilize drive input power or disable phase loss detection. • Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05). • Replace the capacitor if U4-05 is greater than 90%. For instructions on replacing the capacitor, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. The main circuit capacitors are worn. Check for problems with the drive input power. If drive input power appears normal but the alarm continues to occur, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. Digital Operator Display Fault Name PF5 Rescue Operation Power Supply Deterioration Error Cause Possible Solution During Rescue Operation, either the DC bus voltage • Check the DC bus voltage setting for Rescue Operation (S4-12). dropped below S4-12 × (S4-13 - 10%), or 100 ms after • Lower the speed reference set for Rescue Operation (S4-15). triggering Rescue Operation, the DC bus voltage did not • Check the backup power supply. It may need to be replaced with another UPS if it has become worn and can no longer provide reach S4-12 × S4-13 before the motor started. enough power. 276 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| oPr | External Digital Operator Connection Fault | |
| • The external operator has been disconnected from the drive. Note: An oPr fault will occur when all of the following conditions are true: Output is interrupted when the operator is disconnected (o2-06 = 1). The Up/Down command is assigned to the operator (b1-02 = 0 and LOCAL has been selected). | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| External operator is not properly connected to the drive. | • Check the connection between the operator and the drive. • Replace the cable if damaged. • Turn off the drive input power and disconnect the operator. Then reconnect the operator and turn the drive input power back on. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| oS | Overspeed | |
| The motor speed feedback exceeded the F1-08 setting. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Overshoot is occurring. | • Reduce the settings for C5-01 (Speed Control Proportional Gain 1) and increase C5-02 (Speed Control Integral Time 1). • If using a closed loop vector mode, enable Inertia Compensation. | |
| Inappropriate parameter settings. | Check the setting for the overspeed detection level and the overspeed detection time (F1-08 and F1-09). | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| ov | DC Bus Overvoltage | |
| Voltage in the DC bus has exceeded the overvoltage detection level. • For 200 V class: approximately 410 V • For 400 V class: approximately 820 V | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Deceleration ramp is too short and regenerative energy is flowing from the motor into the drive. | • Increase the deceleration ramp (C1-02, C1-04, C1-06, C1-08). • Make sure the braking resistor rating/external braking transistor rating fits the application. • If an external braking transistor is used, make sure it is connected properly and working as expected. | |
| Fast acceleration ramp causes the motor to overshoot the speed reference. | • Check if sudden drive acceleration triggers an overvoltage alarm. • Increase the acceleration ramp (C1-01, C1-03, C1-05, C1-07). • Increase the jerk setting in C2-02 (decrease if o1-03 > 3) | |
| Surge voltage entering from the drive input power. | Install a DC reactor. Note: Voltage surge can result from a thyristor convertor and phase advancing capacitor using the same input power supply. | |
| Ground fault in the output circuit causes the DC bus capacitor to overcharge. | • Check the motor wiring for ground faults. • Correct grounding shorts and turn the power back on. | |
| Drive input power voltage is too high. | • Check the voltage. • Lower drive input power voltage within the limits listed in the specifications. | |
| The braking transistor is wired incorrectly. | • Check braking transistor wiring for errors. • Properly rewire the braking resistor device. | |
| Encoder cable is disconnected. | Reconnect the cable. | |
| Encoder cable wiring is wrong. | Correct the wiring. | |
| Noise interference along the encoder wiring. | Separate the wiring from the source of the noise (often the output lines from the drive). | |
| Drive fails to operate properly due to noise interference. | • Review the list of possible solutions provided for controlling noise. • Review the section on handling noise interference and check the control circuit lines, main circuit lines, and ground wiring. | |
| Motor hunting occurs. | • Adjust the parameters that control hunting. • Adjust the AFR time constant (n2-02 and n2-03). | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| PF | Input Phase Loss | |
| Drive input power has an open phase or has a large imbalance of voltage between phases. Detected when L8-05 = 1, 2, 3 (enabled). | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| There is phase loss in the drive input power. | • Check for wiring errors in the main circuit drive input power. • Correct the wiring. | |
| There is loose wiring in the drive input power terminals. | • Ensure the terminals are tightened properly. • Apply the tightening torque as specified in this manual. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page60. | |
| There is excessive fluctuation in the drive input power voltage. | • Check the voltage from the drive input power. • Review the possible solutions for stabilizing the drive input power. | |
| There is poor balance between voltage phases. | • Stabilize drive input power or disable phase loss detection. | |
| The main circuit capacitors are worn. | • Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05). • Replace the capacitor if U4-05 is greater than 90%. For instructions on replacing the capacitor, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. | |
| Check for problems with the drive input power. If drive input power appears normal but the alarm continues to occur, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. | ||
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| PF5 | Rescue Operation Power Supply Deterioration Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| During Rescue Operation, either the DC bus voltage dropped below S4-12 × (S4-13 - 10%), or 100 ms after triggering Rescue Operation, the DC bus voltage did not reach S4-12 × S4-13 before the motor started. | • Check the DC bus voltage setting for Rescue Operation (S4-12). • Lower the speed reference set for Rescue Operation (S4-15). • Check the backup power supply. It may need to be replaced with another UPS if it has become worn and can no longer provide enough power. |
Source page
Page 277
6.3 Fault Detection
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 277 gnitoohselbuorT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 277 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Digital Operator Display Fault Name Encoder Disconnected (for Control Mode with Encoder) PGo No encoder pulses are received for longer than the time set to F1-14. Cause Possible Solution Encoder cable is disconnected. Reconnect the cable. Encoder cable wiring is wrong. Correct the wiring. Encoder has no power. Check the power line to the encoder. Motor brake is not released. Ensure the motor brake releases properly. During Rescue Operation, either the DC bus voltage • Check the DC bus voltage setting for Rescue Operation (S4-12). dropped below S4-12 × (S4-13 - 10%), or 100 ms after • Lower the speed reference set for Rescue Operation (S4-15). triggering Rescue Operation, the DC bus voltage did not • Check the backup power supply. It may need to be replaced with another UPS if it has become worn and can no longer provide reach S4-12 × S4-13 before the motor started. enough power. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Encoder Disconnected (detected when using an encoder) PGoH Encoder cable is not connected properly. Cause Possible Solution Encoder cable is disconnected. Reconnect the cable. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Braking Resistor Fault rF The resistance of the braking resistor being used is too low. Cause Possible Solution The proper braking resistor option has not been Select the braking resistor option so that fits to the drives braking transistor specification. installed. A regenerative converter, regenerative unit or braking unit is being used and the +1 or +3 terminal is connected Disable the braking transistor protection selection (set L8-55 to 1). to - terminal. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault rr The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed. Cause Possible Solution The braking transistor is damaged. • Cycle power to the drive and check if the fault reoccurs. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page293. • Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a The control circuit is damaged. Yaskawa representative. Digital Operator Display Fault Name IGBT Short Circuit SC Short Circuit or Ground Fault is detected Cause Possible Solution IGBT fault. • Check the wiring to the motor. • Turn the power supply off and then on again to check operation. IGBT short circuit detection circuit fault. If the problem continues, contact your Yaskawa representative or nearest Yaskawa sales office. • Check the drive output side short circuit for broken output transistor. B1 and U/V/W The drive is damaged. - (negative) and U/V/W • Contact your Yaskawa representative or nearest Yaskawa sales office. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Safety Circuit Fault <2> SCF Safety Circuit Fault is detected. Cause Possible Solution The safety circuit is damaged. If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Motor Contactor Response Error SE1 Motor contactor does not respond within the time set to S1-10 (Run Command Delay Time). Cause Possible Solution There is a problem with the motor contactor or auxiliary switch. Check the motor contactor, auxiliary switches and the wiring of the contactor feedback signal. Digital Operator Display Fault Name 6 Starting Current Error SE2 The output current was lower than 25% of the motor no-load current at start. Cause Possible Solution The motor contactor is open. Check the contactor for any problems. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Output Current Error SE3 The output current was lower than 25% of the motor no-load current during operation. Cause Possible Solution The motor contactor opened. Check the contactor for any problems.
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| PGo | Encoder Disconnected (for Control Mode with Encoder) | |
| No encoder pulses are received for longer than the time set to F1-14. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Encoder cable is disconnected. | Reconnect the cable. | |
| Encoder cable wiring is wrong. | Correct the wiring. | |
| Encoder has no power. | Check the power line to the encoder. | |
| Motor brake is not released. | Ensure the motor brake releases properly. | |
| During Rescue Operation, either the DC bus voltage dropped below S4-12 × (S4-13 - 10%), or 100 ms after triggering Rescue Operation, the DC bus voltage did not reach S4-12 × S4-13 before the motor started. | • Check the DC bus voltage setting for Rescue Operation (S4-12). • Lower the speed reference set for Rescue Operation (S4-15). • Check the backup power supply. It may need to be replaced with another UPS if it has become worn and can no longer provide enough power. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| PGoH | Encoder Disconnected (detected when using an encoder) | |
| Encoder cable is not connected properly. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Encoder cable is disconnected. | Reconnect the cable. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| rF | Braking Resistor Fault | |
| The resistance of the braking resistor being used is too low. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The proper braking resistor option has not been installed. | Select the braking resistor option so that fits to the drives braking transistor specification. | |
| A regenerative converter, regenerative unit or braking unit is being used and the +1 or +3 terminal is connected to - terminal. | Disable the braking transistor protection selection (set L8-55 to 1). | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| rr | Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault | |
| The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The braking transistor is damaged. | • Cycle power to the drive and check if the fault reoccurs. Refer to Diagnosing and Resetting Faults on page293. • Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. | |
| The control circuit is damaged. | ||
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| SC | IGBT Short Circuit | |
| Short Circuit or Ground Fault is detected | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| IGBT fault. | • Check the wiring to the motor. • Turn the power supply off and then on again to check operation. If the problem continues, contact your Yaskawa representative or nearest Yaskawa sales office. | |
| IGBT short circuit detection circuit fault. | ||
| The drive is damaged. | • Check the drive output side short circuit for broken output transistor. B1 and U/V/W - (negative) and U/V/W • Contact your Yaskawa representative or nearest Yaskawa sales office. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| <2> | SCF | Safety Circuit Fault |
| Safety Circuit Fault is detected. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The safety circuit is damaged. | If the problem continues, replace the control board or the entire drive. Contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative for instructions on replacing the control board. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| SE1 | Motor Contactor Response Error | |
| Motor contactor does not respond within the time set to S1-10 (Run Command Delay Time). | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| There is a problem with the motor contactor or auxiliary switch. | Check the motor contactor, auxiliary switches and the wiring of the contactor feedback signal. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| SE2 | Starting Current Error | |
| The output current was lower than 25% of the motor no-load current at start. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The motor contactor is open. | Check the contactor for any problems. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| SE3 | Output Current Error | |
| The output current was lower than 25% of the motor no-load current during operation. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The motor contactor opened. | Check the contactor for any problems. |
Source page
Page 278
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 278 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.3 Fault Detection
Digital Operator Display Fault Name Brake Feedback Error • The input terminal set for “Brake feedback” (H1- = 79H) or “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) did not respond within the SE4 error time set to S6-05 after an output terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) closed. • With the Brake Response Monitor function enabled (S6-07 = 1), the following status conditions occur and continue during run SE4 for the time set to S6-06. • The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: one multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and one of two multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). • The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: one multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and both two multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). Cause Possible Solution The feedback contact on the brake is defective or the Check the brake feedback contact and the wiring. wiring is incorrect. The brake control circuit does not work properly. Ensure the motor brake operates properly with a brake control command from the drive. • Check the contactor for any problems. The motor contactor or relay for the brake is open. • With the Brake Response Monitor function enabled (S6-07 = 1), check the motor contactor or relay. Reset the fault to set S6-08 to 1 if there are no problems. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Position Lock Error SvE Position deviation during Position Lock. Cause Possible Solution Torque limit is set too low. Set the torque limit to an appropriate value using parameters L7-01 to L7-04. Excessive load torque. Reduce the amount of load torque. Noise interference along encoder wiring. Check the encoder signal for noise interference. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Motor Pull Out or Step Out Detection STo Motor pull out or step out has occurred. Motor has exceeded its pull out torque. Cause Possible Solution The wrong motor code has been set (Yaskawa motors • Enter the correct motor code for the PM being used into the E5 parameters. only). • For special-purpose motors, enter the correct data to all E5 parameters according to the Test Report provided for the motor. • Reduce the load. Load is too heavy. • Increase the motor or drive capacity. Accel/decel ramp is too short. • Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). • Increase the jerk setting in C2-02 through C2-05 (decrease if o1-03 > 3). Digital Operator Display Fault Name Undertorque Detection 1 UL3 The current has fallen below the minimum value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer than the allowable time (L6-03). Cause Possible Solution Parameter settings are not appropriate for the load. Check the settings of parameters L6-02 and L6-03. There is a fault on the machine side. Check the load for any problems. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Undertorque Detection 2 UL4 The current has fallen below the minimum value set for torque detection (L6-05) for longer than the allowable time (L6-06). Cause Possible Solution Parameter settings are not appropriate for the load. Check the settings of parameters L6-05 and L6-06. There is a fault on the machine side. Check the load for any problems. Digital Operator Display Fault Name DC Bus Undervoltage One of the following conditions occurred while the drive was running: Uv1 • Voltage in the DC bus fell below the undervoltage detection level (L2-05) • For 200 V class: approximately 190 V • For 400 V class: approximately 380 V (350 V when E1-01 is less than 400) Cause Possible Solution Input power phase loss. • The main circuit drive input power is wired incorrectly. • Correct the wiring. • Ensure there are no loose terminals. One of the drive input power wiring terminals is loose. • Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page60. There is a problem with the voltage from the drive input • Check the voltage. • Correct the voltage to be within the range listed in drive input power specifications. power. • If there is no problem with the power supply to the main circuit, check for problems with the main circuit magnetic contactor. The power has been interrupted. Correct the drive input power. • Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05). The main circuit capacitors are worn. • Replace either the control board or the entire drive if U4-05 exceeds 90%. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. • Cycle power to the drive and see if the fault reoccurs. • If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, The relay or contactor on the soft-charge bypass circuit contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. is damaged. • Check monitor U4-06 for the performance life of the soft-charge bypass. • Replace either the control board or the entire drive if U4-06 exceeds 90%. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. 278 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| SE4 | Brake Feedback Error | |
| • The input terminal set for “Brake feedback” (H1- = 79H) or “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) did not respond within the SE4 error time set to S6-05 after an output terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) closed. • With the Brake Response Monitor function enabled (S6-07 = 1), the following status conditions occur and continue during run for the time set to S6-06. • The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: one multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and one of two multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). • The state of the following signals (release/close) do not match: one multi-function digital input terminal set for “Brake release” (H2- = 50H) and both two multi-function digital input terminals set for “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H). | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The feedback contact on the brake is defective or the wiring is incorrect. | Check the brake feedback contact and the wiring. | |
| The brake control circuit does not work properly. | Ensure the motor brake operates properly with a brake control command from the drive. | |
| The motor contactor or relay for the brake is open. | • Check the contactor for any problems. • With the Brake Response Monitor function enabled (S6-07 = 1), check the motor contactor or relay. Reset the fault to set S6-08 to 1 if there are no problems. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| SvE | Position Lock Error | |
| Position deviation during Position Lock. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Torque limit is set too low. | Set the torque limit to an appropriate value using parameters L7-01 to L7-04. | |
| Excessive load torque. | Reduce the amount of load torque. | |
| Noise interference along encoder wiring. | Check the encoder signal for noise interference. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| STo | Motor Pull Out or Step Out Detection | |
| Motor pull out or step out has occurred. Motor has exceeded its pull out torque. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The wrong motor code has been set (Yaskawa motors only). | • Enter the correct motor code for the PM being used into the E5 parameters. • For special-purpose motors, enter the correct data to all E5 parameters according to the Test Report provided for the motor. | |
| Load is too heavy. | • Reduce the load. • Increase the motor or drive capacity. | |
| Accel/decel ramp is too short. | • Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). • Increase the jerk setting in C2-02 through C2-05 (decrease if o1-03 > 3). | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| UL3 | Undertorque Detection 1 | |
| The current has fallen below the minimum value set for torque detection (L6-02) for longer than the allowable time (L6-03). | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Parameter settings are not appropriate for the load. | Check the settings of parameters L6-02 and L6-03. | |
| There is a fault on the machine side. | Check the load for any problems. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| UL4 | Undertorque Detection 2 | |
| The current has fallen below the minimum value set for torque detection (L6-05) for longer than the allowable time (L6-06). | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Parameter settings are not appropriate for the load. | Check the settings of parameters L6-05 and L6-06. | |
| There is a fault on the machine side. | Check the load for any problems. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| Uv1 | DC Bus Undervoltage | |
| One of the following conditions occurred while the drive was running: • Voltage in the DC bus fell below the undervoltage detection level (L2-05) • For 200 V class: approximately 190 V • For 400 V class: approximately 380 V (350 V when E1-01 is less than 400) | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Input power phase loss. | • The main circuit drive input power is wired incorrectly. • Correct the wiring. | |
| One of the drive input power wiring terminals is loose. | • Ensure there are no loose terminals. • Apply the tightening torque specified in this manual to fasten the terminals. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page60. | |
| There is a problem with the voltage from the drive input power. | • Check the voltage. • Correct the voltage to be within the range listed in drive input power specifications. • If there is no problem with the power supply to the main circuit, check for problems with the main circuit magnetic contactor. | |
| The power has been interrupted. | Correct the drive input power. | |
| The main circuit capacitors are worn. | • Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05). • Replace either the control board or the entire drive if U4-05 exceeds 90%. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. | |
| The relay or contactor on the soft-charge bypass circuit is damaged. | • Cycle power to the drive and see if the fault reoccurs. • If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. • Check monitor U4-06 for the performance life of the soft-charge bypass. • Replace either the control board or the entire drive if U4-06 exceeds 90%. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. |
Source page
Page 279
6.3 Fault Detection
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 279 gnitoohselbuorT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 279 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Digital Operator Display Fault Name Control Power Supply Voltage Fault Uv2 Voltage is too low for the control drive input power. Cause Possible Solution • Cycle power to the drive. Check if the fault reoccurs. Control power supply wiring is damaged. • If the problem continues, replace the control board, the entire drive, or the control power supply. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. • Cycle power to the drive. Check if the fault reoccurs. Internal circuitry is damaged. • If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Soft-Charge Bypass Circuit Fault Uv3 The soft-charge bypass circuit failed. Cause Possible Solution • Cycle power to the drive and see if the fault reoccurs. • If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, The relay or contactor on the soft-charge bypass circuit contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. is damaged. • Check monitor U4-06 for the performance life of the soft-charge bypass. • Replace either the control board or the entire drive if U4-06 exceeds 90%. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. Digital Operator Display Fault Name Output Voltage Detection Error voF Problem detected with the voltage on the output side of the drive. Cause Possible Solution Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa Hardware is damaged. representative. <1> Displayed as or when occurring at drive power up. When one of the faults occurs after successfully starting the drive, the display will show or . <2> Displayed only for models in compliance with IEC/EN 61508 SIL3 Safety Integrity Level 3. 6
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| Uv2 | Control Power Supply Voltage Fault | |
| Voltage is too low for the control drive input power. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Control power supply wiring is damaged. | • Cycle power to the drive. Check if the fault reoccurs. • If the problem continues, replace the control board, the entire drive, or the control power supply. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. | |
| Internal circuitry is damaged. | • Cycle power to the drive. Check if the fault reoccurs. • If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| Uv3 | Soft-Charge Bypass Circuit Fault | |
| The soft-charge bypass circuit failed. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| The relay or contactor on the soft-charge bypass circuit is damaged. | • Cycle power to the drive and see if the fault reoccurs. • If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. • Check monitor U4-06 for the performance life of the soft-charge bypass. • Replace either the control board or the entire drive if U4-06 exceeds 90%. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Fault Name | |
| voF | Output Voltage Detection Error | |
| Problem detected with the voltage on the output side of the drive. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solution | |
| Hardware is damaged. | Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or a Yaskawa representative. |
Source page
Page 280
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 280 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.4 Alarm Detection
6.4 Alarm Detection
Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions Alarms are drive protection functions that do not necessarily cause the drive to stop. Once the cause of an alarm is removed, the drive will return to the same status as before the alarm occurred.
When an alarm has been triggered, the ALM light on the digital operator display blinks and the alarm code display flashes. If a multi-function output is set for an alarm (H2- = 10), that output terminal will be triggered for certain alarms. Refer to Minor Faults and Alarms on page 264 for information on alarm that trigger an alarm output. Note: If a multi-function output is set to close when an alarm occurs (H2- = 10), it will also close when maintenance periods are reached, triggering alarms LT-1 through LT-4 (triggered only if H2- = 2F). Table 6.9 Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions
Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Communication Option Node ID Setting Error (CANopen) AEr Option card node address is outside the acceptable setting range. Cause Possible Solutions Station number is set outside the possible setting range. Set parameter F6-35 to the proper value if a CANopen option card is used. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Baseblock bb Drive output interrupted as indicated by an external baseblock signal. Cause Possible Solutions External baseblock signal was entered via one of the multi-function input terminals (S3 to S8). Check external sequence and baseblock signal input timing. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Braking Transistor Overload boL The braking transistor in the drive has been overloaded. Cause Possible Solutions The proper braking resistor has not been installed. Select the optimal braking resistor. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Option Communication Error bUS • After initial communication was established, the connection was lost. • Assign a Up/Down command or speed reference to the option card. Cause Possible Solutions • Check for faulty wiring. Connection is broken or master controller stopped communicating. • Correct the wiring. • Check for disconnected cables and short circuits. Repair as needed. Option card is damaged. If there are no problems with the wiring and the fault continues to occur, replace the option card. The option card is not properly connected to the • The connector pins on the option card are not properly lined up with the connector pins on the drive. drive. • Reinstall the option card. • Check options available to minimize the effects of noise. • Take steps to counteract noise in the control circuit wiring, main circuit lines and ground wiring. • Try to reduce noise on the controller side. A data error occurred due to noise. • Use surge absorbers on magnetic contactors or other equipment causing the disturbance. • Use recommended cables or some other type of shielded line. Ground the shield to the controller side or on the input power side. • All wiring for comm. devices should be separated from drive input power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the drive input power. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Serial Communication Stand By CALL Communication has not yet been established. Cause Possible Solutions Communications wiring is faulty, there is a short • Check for wiring errors. • Correct the wiring. circuit, or something is not connected properly. • Check for disconnected cables and short circuits. Repair as needed. Programming error on the master side. Check communications at start-up and correct programming errors. • Perform a self-diagnostics check. Communications circuitry is damaged. • If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. A termination resistor must be installed at both ends of a communication line. Slave drives must have the internal termination resistor Termination resistor setting is incorrect. switch set correctly. Place DIP switch S2 to the ON position. 280 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Minor Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| AEr | Communication Option Node ID Setting Error (CANopen) | |
| Option card node address is outside the acceptable setting range. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Station number is set outside the possible setting range. | Set parameter F6-35 to the proper value if a CANopen option card is used. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| bb | Baseblock | |
| Drive output interrupted as indicated by an external baseblock signal. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| External baseblock signal was entered via one of the multi-function input terminals (S3 to S8). | Check external sequence and baseblock signal input timing. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| boL | Braking Transistor Overload | |
| The braking transistor in the drive has been overloaded. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The proper braking resistor has not been installed. | Select the optimal braking resistor. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| bUS | Option Communication Error | |
| • After initial communication was established, the connection was lost. • Assign a Up/Down command or speed reference to the option card. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Connection is broken or master controller stopped communicating. | • Check for faulty wiring. • Correct the wiring. • Check for disconnected cables and short circuits. Repair as needed. | |
| Option card is damaged. | If there are no problems with the wiring and the fault continues to occur, replace the option card. | |
| The option card is not properly connected to the drive. | • The connector pins on the option card are not properly lined up with the connector pins on the drive. • Reinstall the option card. | |
| A data error occurred due to noise. | • Check options available to minimize the effects of noise. • Take steps to counteract noise in the control circuit wiring, main circuit lines and ground wiring. • Try to reduce noise on the controller side. • Use surge absorbers on magnetic contactors or other equipment causing the disturbance. • Use recommended cables or some other type of shielded line. Ground the shield to the controller side or on the input power side. • All wiring for comm. devices should be separated from drive input power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the drive input power. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| CALL | Serial Communication Stand By | |
| Communication has not yet been established. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Communications wiring is faulty, there is a short circuit, or something is not connected properly. | • Check for wiring errors. • Correct the wiring. • Check for disconnected cables and short circuits. Repair as needed. | |
| Programming error on the master side. | Check communications at start-up and correct programming errors. | |
| Communications circuitry is damaged. | • Perform a self-diagnostics check. • If the problem continues, replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. | |
| Termination resistor setting is incorrect. | A termination resistor must be installed at both ends of a communication line. Slave drives must have the internal termination resistor switch set correctly. Place DIP switch S2 to the ON position. |
Source page
Page 281
6.4 Alarm Detection
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 281 gnitoohselbuorT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 281 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error CE Control data was not received correctly for two seconds. Cause Possible Solutions • Check options available to minimize the effects of noise. • Take steps to counteract noise in the control circuit wiring, main circuit lines, and ground wiring. A data error occurred due to noise. • Reduce noise on the controller side. • Use surge absorbers for the magnetic contactors or other components that may be causing the disturbance. • Use only recommended shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or on the drive input power side. • Separate all wiring for comm. devices from drive input power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the drive input power supply. • Check the H5 parameter settings as well as the protocol setting in the controller. Communication protocol is incompatible. • Ensure settings are compatible. The Communication Fault Detection Time (H5-09) • Check the PLC. is set shorter than the time required for a • Change the software settings in the PLC. communication cycle to take place. • Set a longer Communication Fault Detection Time (H5-09). Incompatible PLC software settings or there is a • Check the PLC. hardware problem. • Remove the cause of the error on the controller side. Communications cable is disconnected or damaged. • Check the connector to make sure the cable has a signal. • Replace the communications cable. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name CrST Cannot Reset Cause Possible Solutions A fault reset command was entered while the Up/ • Ensure that a Up/Down command cannot be entered from the external terminals or option card during fault reset. Down command was still present. • Turn off the Up/Down command. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Speed Deviation (when using a PG option card) dEv The deviation between the speed reference and speed feedback is greater than the setting in F1-10 for longer than the time in F1-11. Cause Possible Solutions Load is too heavy Reduce the load. Accel/decel ramp is too short. Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). The load is locked up. Check the machine. Parameter settings are inappropriate. Check the settings of parameters F1-10 and F1-11. The motor brake is not applied. Ensure the motor brake operates properly with a brake control command from the drive. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Up/Down Command Error EF Both forward run and reverse run closed simultaneously for over 0.5 s. Cause Possible Solutions Check the forward and reverse command sequence and correct the problem. Sequence error Note: When minor fault EF detected, motor ramps to stop. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Option Card External Fault EF0 An external fault condition is present. Cause Possible Solutions An external fault was received from the PLC with F6-03 = 3 (causing the drive to continue running • Remove the cause of the external fault. • Remove the external fault input from the PLC. when an external fault occurs). There is a problem with the PLC program. Check the PLC program and correct problems. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name External fault (input terminal S3) EF3 External fault at multi-function input terminal S3. External fault (input terminal S4) EF4 External fault at multi-function input terminal S4. External fault (input terminal S5) EF5 External fault at multi-function input terminal S5. External fault (input terminal S6) EF6 External fault at multi-function input terminal S6. 6 External fault (input terminal S7) EF7 External fault at multi-function input terminal S7. External fault (input terminal S8) EF8 External fault at multi-function input terminal S8. Cause Possible Solutions An external device has tripped an alarm function. Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the multi-function input value. Wiring is incorrect. • Ensure the signal lines have been connected properly to the terminals assigned for external fault detection (H1-=2Cto2F). • Reconnect the signal line. • Check if the unused terminals have been set for H1-=2Cto2F (External Fault). Multi-function contact inputs are set incorrectly. • Change the terminal settings.
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Minor Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| CE | MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error | |
| Control data was not received correctly for two seconds. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| A data error occurred due to noise. | • Check options available to minimize the effects of noise. • Take steps to counteract noise in the control circuit wiring, main circuit lines, and ground wiring. • Reduce noise on the controller side. • Use surge absorbers for the magnetic contactors or other components that may be causing the disturbance. • Use only recommended shielded line. Ground the shield on the controller side or on the drive input power side. • Separate all wiring for comm. devices from drive input power lines. Install an EMC noise filter to the drive input power supply. | |
| Communication protocol is incompatible. | • Check the H5 parameter settings as well as the protocol setting in the controller. • Ensure settings are compatible. | |
| The Communication Fault Detection Time (H5-09) is set shorter than the time required for a communication cycle to take place. | • Check the PLC. • Change the software settings in the PLC. • Set a longer Communication Fault Detection Time (H5-09). | |
| Incompatible PLC software settings or there is a hardware problem. | • Check the PLC. • Remove the cause of the error on the controller side. | |
| Communications cable is disconnected or damaged. | • Check the connector to make sure the cable has a signal. • Replace the communications cable. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| CrST | Cannot Reset | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| A fault reset command was entered while the Up/ Down command was still present. | • Ensure that a Up/Down command cannot be entered from the external terminals or option card during fault reset. • Turn off the Up/Down command. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| dEv | Speed Deviation (when using a PG option card) | |
| The deviation between the speed reference and speed feedback is greater than the setting in F1-10 for longer than the time in F1-11. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Load is too heavy | Reduce the load. | |
| Accel/decel ramp is too short. | Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). | |
| The load is locked up. | Check the machine. | |
| Parameter settings are inappropriate. | Check the settings of parameters F1-10 and F1-11. | |
| The motor brake is not applied. | Ensure the motor brake operates properly with a brake control command from the drive. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| EF | Up/Down Command Error | |
| Both forward run and reverse run closed simultaneously for over 0.5 s. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Sequence error | Check the forward and reverse command sequence and correct the problem. Note: When minor fault EF detected, motor ramps to stop. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| EF0 | Option Card External Fault | |
| An external fault condition is present. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| An external fault was received from the PLC with F6-03 = 3 (causing the drive to continue running when an external fault occurs). | • Remove the cause of the external fault. • Remove the external fault input from the PLC. | |
| There is a problem with the PLC program. | Check the PLC program and correct problems. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| EF3 | External fault (input terminal S3) | |
| External fault at multi-function input terminal S3. | ||
| EF4 | External fault (input terminal S4) | |
| External fault at multi-function input terminal S4. | ||
| EF5 | External fault (input terminal S5) | |
| External fault at multi-function input terminal S5. | ||
| EF6 | External fault (input terminal S6) | |
| External fault at multi-function input terminal S6. | ||
| EF7 | External fault (input terminal S7) | |
| External fault at multi-function input terminal S7. | ||
| EF8 | External fault (input terminal S8) | |
| External fault at multi-function input terminal S8. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| An external device has tripped an alarm function. | Remove the cause of the external fault and reset the multi-function input value. | |
| Wiring is incorrect. | • Ensure the signal lines have been connected properly to the terminals assigned for external fault detection (H1-=2Cto2F). • Reconnect the signal line. | |
| Multi-function contact inputs are set incorrectly. | • Check if the unused terminals have been set for H1-=2Cto2F (External Fault). • Change the terminal settings. |
Source page
Page 282
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 282 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.4 Alarm Detection
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Minor Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| Hbb | Safe Disable Circuit Fault Signal (H1-HC, H2-HC) Release | |
| Both Safe Disable Input channels are open. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Both Safe Disable Inputs H1 and H2 are open. | • Check signal status at the input terminals H1 and H2. • Check the Sink/Source Selection for the digital inputs. • If the Safe Disable function is not utilized, check if the terminals H1-HC, and H2-HC are linked. | |
| Internally, both Safe Disable channels are broken. | Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| HbbF | Safe Disable Circuit Fault Signal (H1-HC, H2-HC) Release | |
| One Safe Disable channel is open while the other one is closed. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The signals to the Safe Disable inputs are wrong or the wiring is incorrect. | Check signal status at the input terminals H1 and H2. If the Safe Disable function is not utilized, the terminals H1-HC, and H2-HC must be linked. | |
| One of the Safe Disable channels is faulty. | Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| HCA | High Current Alarm | |
| Drive current exceeded overcurrent warning level (150% of the rated current). | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Load is too heavy. | Either reduce the load for applications with repetitive operation (repetitive stops and starts, etc.), or replace the drive. | |
| Accel/decel ramp is too short. | Calculate the amount of torque required for the desired acceleration and/or deceleration ramp relative to the inertia moment of the load. If the torque level is not right for the load, take the following steps: • Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). • Increase the capacity of the drive. | |
| A special-purpose motor is being used, or the drive is attempting to run a motor greater than the maximum allowable capacity. | • Check the motor capacity. • Use a motor appropriate for the drive. Ensure the motor is within the allowable capacity range. | |
| The current level increased due to a momentary power loss or while attempting to perform a fault reset. | The alarm will appear only briefly. There is no need to take action to prevent the alarm from occurring in such instances. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| LT-1 | Cooling Fan Maintenance Time | |
| The cooling fan has reached its expected maintenance period and may need to be replaced. Note: An alarm output (H2- = 10) will only be triggered if H2- = 2F. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The cooling fan has reached 90% of its expected performance life. | Replace the cooling fan and reset the Maintenance Monitor by setting o4-03 to 0. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| LT-2 | Capacitor Maintenance Time | |
| The main circuit and control circuit capacitors are nearing the end of their expected performance life. Note: An alarm output (H2- = 10) will only be triggered if H2- = 2F. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The main circuit and control circuit capacitors have reached 90% of their expected performance life. | Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| LT-3 | Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance Time | |
| The DC bus soft charge relay is nearing the end of its expected performance life. Note: An alarm output (H2- = 10) will only be triggered if H2- = 2F. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The DC bus soft charge relay has reached 90% of expected performance life. | Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| LT-4 | IGBT Maintenance Time (90%) | |
| IGBTs have reached 90% of their expected performance life. Note: An alarm output (H2- = 10) will only be triggered if H2- = 2F. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| IGBTs have reached 90% of their expected performance life. | Check the load, carrier frequency, and output speed. NOTICE: Optimize Performance Life. To maximize drive performance life, make sure the drive output current does not exceed 150% of the drive rated current. Expected performance life estimates the number of drive starts at three million times if output current does not exceed 150%. This assumes the carrier frequency is at its default setting (8 kHz for models CIMR-L20008 to 20115, 40005 to 40091, 5 kHz for models CIMR-L20145 to 20283, 40112 to 40216, and 2 kHz for models CIMR-L20346, 20415) and a peak current of less than 150% of the drive rated current. |
Source page
Page 283
6.4 Alarm Detection
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 283 gnitoohselbuorT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 283 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Heatsink Overheat oH The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the overheat pre-alarm level set to L8-02 (90-100°C). Default value for L8-02 is determined by drive capacity (o2-04). Cause Possible Solutions • Check the surrounding temperature. Surrounding temperature is too high • Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel. • Install a fan or air conditioner to cool surrounding area. • Remove anything near drive that may cause extra heat. • Replace the cooling fan. Refer to Cooling Fan Component Names on page304. Internal cooling fan has stopped. • After replacing the drive, reset the cooling fan maintenance parameter to (o4-03 = “0”). • Provide proper installation space around the drive as indicated in the manual. Refer to Installation Orientation and Spacing on page38. Airflow around the drive is restricted. • Allow for the specified space and ensure that there is sufficient circulation around the control panel. • Check for dust or foreign materials clogging cooling fan. • Clear debris caught in the fan that restricts air circulation. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) oH3 • The motor overheat signal to analog input terminal A1 or A2 exceeded the alarm detection level. • Detection requires multi-function analog input H3-02 or H3-10 be set to “E”. Cause Possible Solutions Motor thermostat wiring is fault (PTC thermistor Repair the PTC thermistor input wiring. input). There is a fault on the machine side (e.g., the • Check the status of the machine. machine is locked up). • Remove the cause of the fault. • Check the size of the load, the accel/decel times, and the cycle times. • Decrease the load. • Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). • Adjust the preset V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10). This will mainly involve reducing E1-08 and E1-10. Motor has overheated • Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10 too much, as this reduces load tolerance at low speeds. • Check the motor rated current. • Enter the motor rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate (E2-01). • Ensure the motor cooling system is operating normally. • Repair or replace the motor cooling system. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Overtorque Detection 1 oL3 Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, CLV/PM) was greater than L6-02 for longer than the time set in L6-03. Cause Possible Solutions Inappropriate parameter settings. Check parameters L6-02 and L6-03. There is a fault on the machine side (e.g., the • Check the status of the machine. machine is locked up). • Remove the cause of the fault. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Overtorque Detection 2 oL4 Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, CLV/PM) was greater than L6-05 for longer than the time set in L6-06. Cause Possible Solutions Parameter settings are not appropriate. Check parameters L6-05 and L6-06. There is a fault on the machine side (e.g., the • Check the status of the machine being used. machine is locked up). • Remove the cause of the fault. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Overspeed (for Control Mode with Encoder) oS The motor speed feedback exceeded the F1-08 setting. Cause Possible Solutions Inappropriate parameter settings. Check the setting for the overspeed detection level and the overspeed detection time (F1-08 and F1-09). Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name DC Bus Overvoltage ov The DC bus voltage exceeded the trip point. For 200 V class: approximately 410 V For 400 V class: approximately 820 V Cause Possible Solutions 6 • Install a DC reactor or an AC reactor. Surge voltage present in the drive input power. • Voltage surge can result from a thyristor convertor and a phase advancing capacitor operating on the same drive input power system. The motor is short-circuited. • Check the motor power cable, relay terminals and motor terminal box for short circuits. Ground current has over-charged the main circuit • Correct grounding shorts and turn the power back on. capacitors via the drive input power. • Review possible solutions for handling noise interference. Noise interference causes the drive to operate • Review section on handling noise interference and check control circuit lines, main circuit lines and ground wiring. incorrectly. • If the magnetic contactor is identified as a source of noise, install a surge protector to the MC coil. Set number of fault reset (L5-01) to a value other than 0. Encoder cable is disconnected. Reconnect the cable. Encoder cable wiring is wrong. Correct the wiring. Noise interference along encoder wiring. Separate encoder wiring from the source of the noise (often output wiring from the drive).
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Minor Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| oH | Heatsink Overheat | |
| The temperature of the heatsink exceeded the overheat pre-alarm level set to L8-02 (90-100°C). Default value for L8-02 is determined by drive capacity (o2-04). | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Surrounding temperature is too high | • Check the surrounding temperature. • Improve the air circulation within the enclosure panel. • Install a fan or air conditioner to cool surrounding area. • Remove anything near drive that may cause extra heat. | |
| Internal cooling fan has stopped. | • Replace the cooling fan. Refer to Cooling Fan Component Names on page304. • After replacing the drive, reset the cooling fan maintenance parameter to (o4-03 = “0”). | |
| Airflow around the drive is restricted. | • Provide proper installation space around the drive as indicated in the manual. Refer to Installation Orientation and Spacing on page38. • Allow for the specified space and ensure that there is sufficient circulation around the control panel. | |
| • Check for dust or foreign materials clogging cooling fan. • Clear debris caught in the fan that restricts air circulation. | ||
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| oH3 | Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) | |
| • The motor overheat signal to analog input terminal A1 or A2 exceeded the alarm detection level. • Detection requires multi-function analog input H3-02 or H3-10 be set to “E”. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Motor thermostat wiring is fault (PTC thermistor input). | Repair the PTC thermistor input wiring. | |
| There is a fault on the machine side (e.g., the machine is locked up). | • Check the status of the machine. • Remove the cause of the fault. | |
| Motor has overheated | • Check the size of the load, the accel/decel times, and the cycle times. • Decrease the load. • Increase the acceleration and deceleration times (C1-01 through C1-08). | |
| • Adjust the preset V/f pattern (E1-04 through E1-10). This will mainly involve reducing E1-08 and E1-10. • Be careful not to lower E1-08 and E1-10 too much, as this reduces load tolerance at low speeds. | ||
| • Check the motor rated current. • Enter the motor rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate (E2-01). • Ensure the motor cooling system is operating normally. • Repair or replace the motor cooling system. | ||
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| oL3 | Overtorque Detection 1 | |
| Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, CLV/PM) was greater than L6-02 for longer than the time set in L6-03. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Inappropriate parameter settings. | Check parameters L6-02 and L6-03. | |
| There is a fault on the machine side (e.g., the machine is locked up). | • Check the status of the machine. • Remove the cause of the fault. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| oL4 | Overtorque Detection 2 | |
| Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, CLV/PM) was greater than L6-05 for longer than the time set in L6-06. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Parameter settings are not appropriate. | Check parameters L6-05 and L6-06. | |
| There is a fault on the machine side (e.g., the machine is locked up). | • Check the status of the machine being used. • Remove the cause of the fault. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| oS | Overspeed (for Control Mode with Encoder) | |
| The motor speed feedback exceeded the F1-08 setting. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Inappropriate parameter settings. | Check the setting for the overspeed detection level and the overspeed detection time (F1-08 and F1-09). | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| ov | DC Bus Overvoltage | |
| The DC bus voltage exceeded the trip point. For 200 V class: approximately 410 V For 400 V class: approximately 820 V | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Surge voltage present in the drive input power. | • Install a DC reactor or an AC reactor. • Voltage surge can result from a thyristor convertor and a phase advancing capacitor operating on the same drive input power system. | |
| The motor is short-circuited. | • Check the motor power cable, relay terminals and motor terminal box for short circuits. • Correct grounding shorts and turn the power back on. | |
| Ground current has over-charged the main circuit capacitors via the drive input power. | ||
| Noise interference causes the drive to operate incorrectly. | • Review possible solutions for handling noise interference. • Review section on handling noise interference and check control circuit lines, main circuit lines and ground wiring. • If the magnetic contactor is identified as a source of noise, install a surge protector to the MC coil. | |
| Set number of fault reset (L5-01) to a value other than 0. | ||
| Encoder cable is disconnected. | Reconnect the cable. | |
| Encoder cable wiring is wrong. | Correct the wiring. | |
| Noise interference along encoder wiring. | Separate encoder wiring from the source of the noise (often output wiring from the drive). |
Source page
Page 284
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 284 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.4 Alarm Detection
Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name PASS MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Test Mode Complete
Cause Possible Solutions MEMOBUS/Modbus test has finished normally. This verifies that the test was successful. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Encoder Disconnected (for Control Mode with Encoder) PGo Detected when no encoder signal is received for a time longer than setting in F1-14. Cause Possible Solutions Encoder cable is disconnected. Reconnect the cable. Encoder cable wiring is wrong. Correct the wiring. Encoder does not have enough power. Make sure the correct power supply is properly connected to the encoder. Motor brake is not released. Ensure the brake releases properly Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Encoder Disconnected (detected when using an encoder) PGoH Encoder cable has become disconnected. Cause Possible Solutions Encoder cable is disconnected. Reconnect the cable. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name SE MEMOBUS/Modbus Self Test Failed Cause Possible Solutions A digital input set to 67H (MEMOBUS/Modbus Stop the drive and run the test again. test) was closed while the drive was running. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name IGBT Maintenance Time (90%) TrPC IGBTs have reached 90% of their expected performance life. Note: This alarm will not trigger a multi-function output terminal that is set for alarm output (H2- = 10). Cause Possible Solutions IGBTs have reached 90% of their expected Replace the drive. performance life. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Undertorque Detection 1 UL3 Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, CLV/PM) less than L6-02 for longer than L6-03 time. Cause Possible Solutions Inappropriate parameter settings. Check parameters L6-02 and L6-03. Load has dropped or decreased significantly. Check for broken parts in the transmission system. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Undertorque Detection 2 UL4 Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, CLV/PM) less than L6-05 for longer than L6-06 time. Cause Possible Solutions Inappropriate parameter settings. Check parameters L6-05 and L6-06. The load has dropped or decreased significantly. Check for broken parts in the transmission system. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Undervoltage One of the following conditions was true when the drive was stopped and a Up/Down command was entered: Uv • DC bus voltage dropped below the level specified in L2-05. • Contactor to suppress inrush current in the drive was opened. • Low voltage in the control drive input power. This alarm outputs only if L2-01 is not 0 and DC bus voltage is under L2-05. Cause Possible Solutions Phase loss in the drive input power. Check for wiring errors in the main circuit drive input power. Correct the wiring. • Ensure the terminals have been properly tightened. Loose wiring in the drive input power terminals. • Apply the tightening torque to the terminals as specified. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page60. There is a problem with the drive input power • Check the voltage. voltage. • Lower the voltage of the drive input power so that it is within the limits listed in the specifications. • Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05). Drive internal circuitry is worn. • Replace either the control board or the entire drive if U4-05 exceeds 90%. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. The drive input power transformer is too small and • Check for an alarm when the magnetic contactor, line breaker, and leakage breaker are closed. voltage drops when the power is switched on. • Check the capacity of the drive input power transformer. Air inside the drive is too hot. Check the temperature inside the drive. The CHARGE light is broken or disconnected. Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. Digital Operator Display Minor Fault Name Output Voltage Detection Error voF There is a problem with the output voltage. Cause Possible Solutions Hardware is damaged. Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. 284 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Minor Fault Name |
|---|---|---|
| PASS | MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Test Mode Complete | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| MEMOBUS/Modbus test has finished normally. | This verifies that the test was successful. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| PGo | Encoder Disconnected (for Control Mode with Encoder) | |
| Detected when no encoder signal is received for a time longer than setting in F1-14. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Encoder cable is disconnected. | Reconnect the cable. | |
| Encoder cable wiring is wrong. | Correct the wiring. | |
| Encoder does not have enough power. | Make sure the correct power supply is properly connected to the encoder. | |
| Motor brake is not released. | Ensure the brake releases properly | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| PGoH | Encoder Disconnected (detected when using an encoder) | |
| Encoder cable has become disconnected. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Encoder cable is disconnected. | Reconnect the cable. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| SE | MEMOBUS/Modbus Self Test Failed | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| A digital input set to 67H (MEMOBUS/Modbus test) was closed while the drive was running. | Stop the drive and run the test again. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| TrPC | IGBT Maintenance Time (90%) | |
| IGBTs have reached 90% of their expected performance life. Note: This alarm will not trigger a multi-function output terminal that is set for alarm output (H2- = 10). | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| IGBTs have reached 90% of their expected performance life. | Replace the drive. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| UL3 | Undertorque Detection 1 | |
| Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, CLV/PM) less than L6-02 for longer than L6-03 time. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Inappropriate parameter settings. | Check parameters L6-02 and L6-03. | |
| Load has dropped or decreased significantly. | Check for broken parts in the transmission system. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| UL4 | Undertorque Detection 2 | |
| Drive output current (or torque in OLV, CLV, CLV/PM) less than L6-05 for longer than L6-06 time. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Inappropriate parameter settings. | Check parameters L6-05 and L6-06. | |
| The load has dropped or decreased significantly. | Check for broken parts in the transmission system. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| Uv | Undervoltage | |
| One of the following conditions was true when the drive was stopped and a Up/Down command was entered: • DC bus voltage dropped below the level specified in L2-05. • Contactor to suppress inrush current in the drive was opened. • Low voltage in the control drive input power. This alarm outputs only if L2-01 is not 0 and DC bus voltage is under L2-05. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Phase loss in the drive input power. | Check for wiring errors in the main circuit drive input power. Correct the wiring. | |
| Loose wiring in the drive input power terminals. | • Ensure the terminals have been properly tightened. • Apply the tightening torque to the terminals as specified. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torque on page60. | |
| There is a problem with the drive input power voltage. | • Check the voltage. • Lower the voltage of the drive input power so that it is within the limits listed in the specifications. | |
| Drive internal circuitry is worn. | • Check the maintenance time for the capacitors (U4-05). • Replace either the control board or the entire drive if U4-05 exceeds 90%. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. | |
| The drive input power transformer is too small and voltage drops when the power is switched on. | • Check for an alarm when the magnetic contactor, line breaker, and leakage breaker are closed. • Check the capacity of the drive input power transformer. | |
| Air inside the drive is too hot. | Check the temperature inside the drive. | |
| The CHARGE light is broken or disconnected. | Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Minor Fault Name | |
| voF | Output Voltage Detection Error | |
| There is a problem with the output voltage. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Hardware is damaged. | Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. |
Source page
Page 285
6.5 Operator Programming Errors
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 285 gnitoohselbuorT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 285 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 6.5 Operator Programming Errors oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions An Operator Programming Error (oPE) occurs when a contradictory parameter is set or an individual parameter is set to an inappropriate value. The drive will not operate until the parameter or parameters causing the problem are set correctly. An oPE, however, does not trigger an alarm or fault output. If an oPE occurs, investigate the cause and refer to Table 6.10 for the appropriate action. When an oPE appears on the operator display, press the ENTER button to view U1-18 and see which parameter is causing the oPE. Table 6.10 oPE Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions Digital Operator Display Error Name Drive Capacity Setting Fault oPE01 Drive capacity and the value set to o2-04 do not match. Cause Possible Solutions The drive model selection (o2-04) and the actual capacity of the drive are not the same. Correct the value set to o2-04. Digital Operator Display Error Name Parameter Range Setting Error oPE02 Use U1-18 to find parameters set outside the range. Cause Possible Solutions Parameters were set outside the possible setting range. Set parameters to the proper values. Note: When multiple errors occur at the same time, other errors are given precedence over oPE02. Digital Operator Display Error Name Multi-function Digital Input Selection Error oPE03 A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function contact inputs H1-03 to H1-08. Cause Possible Solutions • The same function is assigned to two multi-function inputs. • Excludes “Brake feedback” and “Brake feedback 2.” • Ensure all multi-function inputs are assigned to different functions. • The Brake feedback (H1- = 79H) or Brake feedback 2 (H1- = 5BH) function is • Re-enter the multi-function settings to ensure this does not occur. assigned to three or more multi-function inputs. One of the multi-function digital input terminals is set as follows with the Brake Response Monitor function enabled (S6-07 = 1). • If “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H) or “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) are not set • I t te o f r “ a m B n i y r n a a m k l e . u f lt e i e -f d u b n a c c t k io 1 n ” d ( i H gi 1 ta - l i np u = t 7 te 9 r H m ) i n is a l s s e . t to only one multi-function digital input S “B et r a tw ke o f m ee u d l b ti a -f c u k n 2 c ” ti o (H n 1 d - i git al i = n p 5 u B t H te ) r s m im in u a l l t s a n to e o “ u B s r l a y k . e feedback 1” (H1- = 79H) or the • If “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) is set to only one multi-function digital input (Example: H1-07 = 79H and H1-08 = 79H) terminal. • If “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H) and “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) are each set to two multi-function digital input terminals. Motor contactor feedback and Motor contactor feedback 2 (56 vs. 5A) are selected Check for contradictory settings assigned to the multi-function input terminals simultaneously. simultaneously. Correct setting errors. Digital Operator Display Error Name oPE04 Terminal Board Mismatch Error Cause Possible Solutions The drive, control board, or terminal board has been replaced and the parameter settings To load the parameter settings to the drive that are stored in the terminal board, set A1-03 to between the control board and the terminal board no longer match. 5550. Initialize parameters after drive replacement by setting A1-03 to 1110 or 2220. Digital Operator Display Error Name oPE05 Reference Source Selection Error Cause Possible Solutions Speed reference is assigned to an option card (b1-01 = 3) but an input option card is not 6 connected to the drive. Reconnect the input option card to the drive. The Up/Down command is assigned to an option card (b1-02 = 3) but an input option card is not connected to the drive. Although the digital card input is set for BCD special for a 5 digit input (F3-01 = 6), the data Set the input data for 16 bit (F3-03 = 2). length is set for 8 bit or 12 bit (F3-03 = 0, 1). Digital Operator Display Error Name Control Mode Selection Error oPE06 Correct the setting for the control method. Cause Possible Solutions A control mode has been selected that requires a PG option card to be installed, but no option • Connect a PG option card. card is installed (A1-02 = 3 or 7). • Correct the value set to A1-02.
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Error Name |
|---|---|---|
| oPE01 | Drive Capacity Setting Fault | |
| Drive capacity and the value set to o2-04 do not match. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The drive model selection (o2-04) and the actual capacity of the drive are not the same. | Correct the value set to o2-04. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| oPE02 | Parameter Range Setting Error | |
| Use U1-18 to find parameters set outside the range. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Parameters were set outside the possible setting range. | Set parameters to the proper values. | |
| Note: When multiple errors occur at the same time, other errors are given precedence over oPE02. | ||
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| oPE03 | Multi-function Digital Input Selection Error | |
| A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function contact inputs H1-03 to H1-08. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| • The same function is assigned to two multi-function inputs. • Excludes “Brake feedback” and “Brake feedback 2.” | • Ensure all multi-function inputs are assigned to different functions. • Re-enter the multi-function settings to ensure this does not occur. | |
| • The Brake feedback (H1- = 79H) or Brake feedback 2 (H1- = 5BH) function is assigned to three or more multi-function inputs. | ||
| One of the multi-function digital input terminals is set as follows with the Brake Response Monitor function enabled (S6-07 = 1). • If “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H) or “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) are not set to any multi-function digital input terminals. • If “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H) is set to only one multi-function digital input terminal. • If “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) is set to only one multi-function digital input terminal. • If “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H) and “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) are each set to two multi-function digital input terminals. | Set two multi-function digital input terminals to “Brake feedback 1” (H1- = 79H) or the “Brake feedback 2” (H1- = 5BH) simultaneously. (Example: H1-07 = 79H and H1-08 = 79H) | |
| Motor contactor feedback and Motor contactor feedback 2 (56 vs. 5A) are selected simultaneously. | Check for contradictory settings assigned to the multi-function input terminals simultaneously. Correct setting errors. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| oPE04 | Terminal Board Mismatch Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The drive, control board, or terminal board has been replaced and the parameter settings between the control board and the terminal board no longer match. | To load the parameter settings to the drive that are stored in the terminal board, set A1-03 to 5550. Initialize parameters after drive replacement by setting A1-03 to 1110 or 2220. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| oPE05 | Reference Source Selection Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Speed reference is assigned to an option card (b1-01 = 3) but an input option card is not connected to the drive. | Reconnect the input option card to the drive. | |
| The Up/Down command is assigned to an option card (b1-02 = 3) but an input option card is not connected to the drive. | ||
| Although the digital card input is set for BCD special for a 5 digit input (F3-01 = 6), the data length is set for 8 bit or 12 bit (F3-03 = 0, 1). | Set the input data for 16 bit (F3-03 = 2). | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| oPE06 | Control Mode Selection Error | |
| Correct the setting for the control method. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| A control mode has been selected that requires a PG option card to be installed, but no option card is installed (A1-02 = 3 or 7). | • Connect a PG option card. • Correct the value set to A1-02. |
Source page
Page 286
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 286 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.5 Operator Programming Errors
Digital Operator Display Error Name Multi-function Analog Input Selection Error oPE07 A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function analog inputs H3-02 and H3-10. Cause Possible Solutions At least two analog input terminals are set to the same function (i.e., parameters H3-02 and Change the settings to H3-02 and H3-10 so that functions no longer conflict. Note: Both 0 (speed reference bias) and F (not used) can be set to H3-02 and H3-10 at the H3-10 have the same setting). same time. Digital Operator Display Error Name Parameter Selection Error oPE08 A function has been set that cannot be used in the motor control method selected. Cause Possible Solutions Attempted to use a function that is not valid for the selected control mode. Check the motor control method and the functions available. In Open Loop Vector Control, n2-02 is greater than n2-03 Correct parameter settings so that n2-02 is less than n2-03. b1-14 (Phase Order Selection) is set to 1 (Switch phase order) when in using a PG option card. Correct the parameter settings. Note: Use U1-18 to find parameters that are set outside the specified setting range. Other errors are given precedence over oPE08 when multiple errors occur simultaneously. Digital Operator Display Error Name V/f Pattern Setting Error oPE10 The following setting errors have occurred where: E1-04 is greater than or equal to E1-06, E1-06 is greater than or equal to E1-07, E1-07 is greater than or equal to E1-09, or E1-09 is greater than or equal to E1-11. Cause Possible Solutions Correct the settings for E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, E1-09, and E1-11 (for motor 2, correct E3-04, - E3-06, E3-07, E3-09, and E3-11). Digital Operator Display Error Name oPE16 Energy Savings Constants Error Cause Possible Solutions Energy saving coefficients are out of the allowable range. Check and correct the motor data in E5 parameters. Digital Operator Display Error Name Parameter Setting Error, Online Tuning Parameter Setting Error • The input from load cell with load condition 1 (S3-29) is set to the same value as load oPE18 condition 2 (S3-30). • DWELL 2 related parameters are not set correctly. • Parameters that control Online Tuning are not set correctly. Cause Possible Solutions S3-29 and S3-30 are set to the same value, meaning that the input from load cell with load Correct the values set to S3-29 and S3-30. condition 1 (S3-29) is set to the same value as load condition 2 (S3-30). The Dwell 2 speed reference in S3-20 is greater than 0.00 but is still less than the Dwell 2 End Speed in S3-21. Correct the values set to S3-20 and S3-21. Open Loop Vector Control is selected (A1-02 = 2), Online Tuning is enabled (n6-01 = 2), and one of the following contradictory settings exists: • E2-02 is set to 30% or less of its factory default. Correct the values set to E2-02, E2-03, or/and E2-06. • E2-06 is set to 50% or less of its factory default. • E2-03 = 0 Digital Operator Display Error Name PG-F3 Setting Error oPE20 The encoder signal frequency is too high. Cause Possible Solutions With the entered encoder resolution (F1-01), maximum output frequency (E1-04), and motor • Set F1-01 to the correct encoder resolution. pole number (E5-04,) the calculation encoder signal frequency exceeds 50 kHz (with PG-F3 • Reduce the maximum output frequency of the drive in parameter E1-04 so the encoder option) or 20 kHz (with PG-E3 option). signal frequency at maximum speed is lower than 50 kHz. Digital Operator Display Error Name Elevator Parameter Setting Fault oPE21 Elevator parameters are not set correctly. Cause Possible Solutions The DC Injection / Position Lock Time at Stop (S1-05) is set to a value lower than the Brake Close Delay Time (S1-07). Correct parameter settings so that S1-05 > S1-07. • The deceleration distance (S5-11) is set to value lower than the minimum deceleration distance (U4-43). • Correct parameter settings so that S5-11 > U4-43. • Correct parameter settings so that S5-12 > U4-44. • The stop distance (S5-12) is set to a value lower than the minimum stop distance (U4-44). Both S5-10 and S5-01 are enabled at the same time. Correct the setting in parameters S5-01 and S5-10. 286 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Error Name |
|---|---|---|
| oPE07 | Multi-function Analog Input Selection Error | |
| A contradictory setting is assigned to multi-function analog inputs H3-02 and H3-10. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| At least two analog input terminals are set to the same function (i.e., parameters H3-02 and H3-10 have the same setting). | Change the settings to H3-02 and H3-10 so that functions no longer conflict. Note: Both 0 (speed reference bias) and F (not used) can be set to H3-02 and H3-10 at the same time. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| oPE08 | Parameter Selection Error | |
| A function has been set that cannot be used in the motor control method selected. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Attempted to use a function that is not valid for the selected control mode. | Check the motor control method and the functions available. | |
| In Open Loop Vector Control, n2-02 is greater than n2-03 | Correct parameter settings so that n2-02 is less than n2-03. | |
| b1-14 (Phase Order Selection) is set to 1 (Switch phase order) when in using a PG option card. | Correct the parameter settings. | |
| Note: Use U1-18 to find parameters that are set outside the specified setting range. Other errors are given precedence over oPE08 when multiple errors occur simultaneously. | ||
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| oPE10 | V/f Pattern Setting Error | |
| The following setting errors have occurred where: E1-04 is greater than or equal to E1-06, E1-06 is greater than or equal to E1-07, E1-07 is greater than or equal to E1-09, or E1-09 is greater than or equal to E1-11. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| - | Correct the settings for E1-04, E1-06, E1-07, E1-09, and E1-11 (for motor 2, correct E3-04, E3-06, E3-07, E3-09, and E3-11). | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| oPE16 | Energy Savings Constants Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Energy saving coefficients are out of the allowable range. | Check and correct the motor data in E5 parameters. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| oPE18 | Parameter Setting Error, Online Tuning Parameter Setting Error | |
| • The input from load cell with load condition 1 (S3-29) is set to the same value as load condition 2 (S3-30). • DWELL 2 related parameters are not set correctly. • Parameters that control Online Tuning are not set correctly. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| S3-29 and S3-30 are set to the same value, meaning that the input from load cell with load condition 1 (S3-29) is set to the same value as load condition 2 (S3-30). | Correct the values set to S3-29 and S3-30. | |
| The Dwell 2 speed reference in S3-20 is greater than 0.00 but is still less than the Dwell 2 End Speed in S3-21. | Correct the values set to S3-20 and S3-21. | |
| Open Loop Vector Control is selected (A1-02 = 2), Online Tuning is enabled (n6-01 = 2), and one of the following contradictory settings exists: • E2-02 is set to 30% or less of its factory default. • E2-06 is set to 50% or less of its factory default. • E2-03 = 0 | Correct the values set to E2-02, E2-03, or/and E2-06. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| oPE20 | PG-F3 Setting Error | |
| The encoder signal frequency is too high. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| With the entered encoder resolution (F1-01), maximum output frequency (E1-04), and motor pole number (E5-04,) the calculation encoder signal frequency exceeds 50 kHz (with PG-F3 option) or 20 kHz (with PG-E3 option). | • Set F1-01 to the correct encoder resolution. • Reduce the maximum output frequency of the drive in parameter E1-04 so the encoder signal frequency at maximum speed is lower than 50 kHz. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| oPE21 | Elevator Parameter Setting Fault | |
| Elevator parameters are not set correctly. | ||
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The DC Injection / Position Lock Time at Stop (S1-05) is set to a value lower than the Brake Close Delay Time (S1-07). | Correct parameter settings so that S1-05 > S1-07. | |
| • The deceleration distance (S5-11) is set to value lower than the minimum deceleration distance (U4-43). • The stop distance (S5-12) is set to a value lower than the minimum stop distance (U4-44). | • Correct parameter settings so that S5-11 > U4-43. • Correct parameter settings so that S5-12 > U4-44. | |
| Both S5-10 and S5-01 are enabled at the same time. | Correct the setting in parameters S5-01 and S5-10. |
Source page
Page 287
6.6 Auto-Tuning Fault Detection
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 287 gnitoohselbuorT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 287 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 6.6 Auto-Tuning Fault Detection Auto-Tuning faults in this section are displayed on the digital operator and will cause the motor to coast to a stop. Auto-Tuning faults do not trigger a multi-function digital output set for fault or alarm output. An End error on the digital operator display indicates Auto-Tuning has successfully completed with discrepancies in the calculations. Check the cause of the End error using the tables in this section and perform Auto-Tuning again after fixing the cause. The drive may be used in the application if no cause can be identified despite the existence of an End error. An Er error indicates that Auto-Tuning has not completed successfully. Check for the cause of the error using the tables in this section, and perform Auto-Tuning again after fixing the cause. Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions Table 6.11 Auto-Tuning Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions Digital Operator Display Error Name End1 Excessive V/f Setting (detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning, and displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete) Cause Possible Solutions The torque reference exceeded 20% during Auto-Tuning. • Before Auto-Tuning the drive, verify the information written on the motor nameplate and enter that data to T1-03 through T1-05. The results from Auto-Tuning the no-load current • Enter proper information to parameters T1-03 to T1-05 and repeat Auto-Tuning. exceeded 80%. Digital Operator Display Error Name End2 Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient (detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning and displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete) Cause Possible Solutions Motor data entered during Auto-Tuning was • Make sure the data entered to the T1 parameters match the information written on the motor nameplate. incorrect. • Restart Auto-Tuning and enter the correct information. Results from Auto-Tuning are outside the parameter setting range, assigning the iron-core saturation Check and correct faulty motor wiring. coefficient (E2-07, E2-08) a temporary value. Digital Operator Display Error Name End3 Rated Current Setting Alarm (displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete) Cause Possible Solutions The correct current rating printed on the nameplate • Check the setting of parameter T1-04. was not entered into T1-04. • Check the motor data and repeat Auto-Tuning. Digital Operator Display Error Name End4 Adjusted Slip Calculation Error Cause Possible Solutions The slip that was calculated is outside the allowable • Make sure the data entered for Auto-Tuning is correct. range. • Execute Rotational Auto-Tuning instead. If not possible, try Stationary Auto-Tuning 2. Digital Operator Display Error Name End5 Resistance Tuning Error Cause Possible Solutions The resistance value that was calculated is outside • Double-check the data that was entered for the Auto-Tuning process. the allowable range. • Check the motor and motor cable connection for faults. Digital Operator Display Error Name End6 Leakage Inductance Alarm Cause Possible Solutions • Check the setting of parameter A1-02. 6 A1-02 setting error • Check the control mode and repeat Auto-Tuning. The leakage inductance value that was calculated is outside the allowable range. Double-check the data that was entered for the Auto-Tuning process. Digital Operator Display Error Name End7 No-Load Current Alarm Cause Possible Solutions The entered no-load current value was outside the Check and correct faulty motor wiring. allowable range. Auto-Tuning results were less than 5% of the motor rated current. Double-check the data that was entered for the Auto-Tuning process.
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Error Name |
|---|---|---|
| End1 | Excessive V/f Setting (detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning, and displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete) | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The torque reference exceeded 20% during Auto-Tuning. | • Before Auto-Tuning the drive, verify the information written on the motor nameplate and enter that data to T1-03 through T1-05. • Enter proper information to parameters T1-03 to T1-05 and repeat Auto-Tuning. | |
| The results from Auto-Tuning the no-load current exceeded 80%. | ||
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| End2 | Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient (detected only during Rotational Auto-Tuning and displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete) | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Motor data entered during Auto-Tuning was incorrect. | • Make sure the data entered to the T1 parameters match the information written on the motor nameplate. • Restart Auto-Tuning and enter the correct information. | |
| Results from Auto-Tuning are outside the parameter setting range, assigning the iron-core saturation coefficient (E2-07, E2-08) a temporary value. | Check and correct faulty motor wiring. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| End3 | Rated Current Setting Alarm (displayed after Auto-Tuning is complete) | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The correct current rating printed on the nameplate was not entered into T1-04. | • Check the setting of parameter T1-04. • Check the motor data and repeat Auto-Tuning. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| End4 | Adjusted Slip Calculation Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The slip that was calculated is outside the allowable range. | • Make sure the data entered for Auto-Tuning is correct. • Execute Rotational Auto-Tuning instead. If not possible, try Stationary Auto-Tuning 2. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| End5 | Resistance Tuning Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The resistance value that was calculated is outside the allowable range. | • Double-check the data that was entered for the Auto-Tuning process. • Check the motor and motor cable connection for faults. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| End6 | Leakage Inductance Alarm | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| A1-02 setting error | • Check the setting of parameter A1-02. • Check the control mode and repeat Auto-Tuning. | |
| The leakage inductance value that was calculated is outside the allowable range. | Double-check the data that was entered for the Auto-Tuning process. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| End7 | No-Load Current Alarm | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The entered no-load current value was outside the allowable range. | Check and correct faulty motor wiring. | |
| Auto-Tuning results were less than 5% of the motor rated current. | Double-check the data that was entered for the Auto-Tuning process. |
Source page
Page 288
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 288 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.6 Auto-Tuning Fault Detection
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Error Name |
|---|---|---|
| End8 | Rescue Operation Speed Warning | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| High frequency injection calculations for the battery power supply were below 10 Hz. | For Rescue Operation, either switch to a larger battery (at least 280 Vdc for a 200 V class drive, 560 Vdc for the 400 V class) or switch to an absolute encoder and the PG-F3 option card. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| End9 | Rescue Operation Rotor Pole Position Search Warning | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| While operating from the backup battery, pole diversion exceeded 40 degrees. | For Rescue Operation, either switch to a larger battery (at least 280 Vdc for a 200 V class drive, 560 Vdc for the 400 V class) or switch to an absolute encoder and the PG-F3 option card. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| End10 | Rescue Operation Rotor Polarity Detection Warning | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| While operating from the backup battery, the Id value between poles was less than 5%. | For Rescue Operation, either switch to a larger battery (at least 280 Vdc for a 200 V class drive, 560 Vdc for the 400 V class) or switch to an absolute encoder and the PG-F3 option card. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| Er-01 | Motor Data Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Motor data or data entered during Auto-Tuning was incorrect. | • Check that the motor data entered to T1 parameters matches motor nameplate input before Auto-Tuning. • Start Auto-Tuning over again and enter the correct information. | |
| Motor output power and motor-rated current settings (T1-02 and T1-04) do not match. | • Check the drive and motor capacities. • Correct the settings of parameters T1-02 and T1-04. | |
| Motor rated current and detected no-load current are not consistent with another. | • Check the motor rated current and no-load current. • Correct the settings of parameters T1-04 and E2-03. | |
| Base frequency and motor rated speed (T1-05 and T1-07) do not match. | • Set T1-05 and T1-07 to the correct value. • Check if the correct pole number was entered to T1-06. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| Er-02 | Alarm | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| An alarm was triggered during Auto-Tuning. | Exit the Auto-Tuning menu, check the alarm code, remove the alarm cause, and repeat Auto-Tuning. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| Er-03 | STOP Button Input | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Auto-Tuning canceled by pressing STOP button. | Auto-Tuning did not complete properly and will have to be performed again. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| Er-04 | Line-to-Line Resistance Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Motor data entered during Auto-Tuning was incorrect. | • Make sure the data entered to the T1 parameters match the information written on the motor nameplate. • Restart Auto-Tuning and enter the correct information. | |
| Results from Auto-Tuning are outside the parameter setting range or the tuning process took too long. | Check and correct faulty motor wiring. | |
| Motor cable or cable connection faulty. | ||
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| Er-05 | No-Load Current Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Motor data entered during Auto-Tuning was incorrect. | • Make sure the data entered to the T1 parameters match the information written on the motor nameplate. • Restart Auto-Tuning and enter the correct information. | |
| Results from Auto-Tuning are outside the parameter setting range or the tuning process took too long. | • Check and correct faulty motor wiring. • Perform Rotational Auto-Tuning. Remember that the rope must be fully removed from the motor and the brake must be released to perform Rotational Auto-Tuning. | |
| The load during Rotational Auto-Tuning was too high. | • Disconnect the motor from machine and restart Auto-Tuning. If motor and load cannot be uncoupled make sure the load is lower than 30%. • If a mechanical brake is installed, make sure it is fully lifted during tuning. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| Er-08 | Rated Slip Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Motor data entered during Auto-Tuning was incorrect. | • Make sure the data entered to the T1 parameters match the information written on the motor nameplate. • Restart Auto-Tuning and enter the correct information. | |
| Drive-calculated values outside parameter setting range or the tuning process took too long. | • Check and correct faulty motor wiring. • Perform Rotational Auto-Tuning. Remember that the rope must be fully removed from the motor and the brake must be released to perform Rotational Auto-Tuning. | |
| The load during rotational Auto-Tuning was too high. | • Disconnect the motor from machine and restart Auto-Tuning. If motor and load cannot be uncoupled make sure the load is lower than 30%. • If a mechanical brake is installed, make sure it is fully lifted during tuning. |
Source page
Page 289
6.6 Auto-Tuning Fault Detection
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 289 gnitoohselbuorT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 289 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Digital Operator Display Error Name Er-09 Acceleration Error Cause Possible Solutions The motor did not accelerate for the specified Lengthen the acceleration ramp (C1-01). acceleration ramp. Torque limit when motoring is too low (L7-01 and • Check the settings of parameters L7-01 and L7-02. L7-02). • Increase the setting of L7-01 and L7-02. The load during Rotational Auto-Tuning was too • Disconnect the motor from machine and restart Auto-Tuning. If motor and load cannot be uncoupled make sure the load is lower than 30%. high. • If a mechanical brake is installed, make sure it is fully lifted during tuning. Digital Operator Display Error Name Er-10 Motor Direction Error Cause Possible Solutions The encoder signal lines are not properly connected Check and correct wiring to the PG encoder. to the drive. Check the motor speed monitor U1-05 while turning the motor manually in forward direction. If the sign displayed is negative, Motor and PG direction are opposite. change the setting of parameter F1-05. The load pulled the motor in the opposite direction of the speed reference and the torque exceeded Uncouple the motor from the load and repeat Auto-Tuning. 100%. Digital Operator Display Error Name Er-11 Motor Speed Fault Cause Possible Solutions • Lengthen the acceleration ramp set to C1-01 (i.e., increase the acceleration time.) Torque reference is too high. • Disconnect the machine from the motor, if possible. Digital Operator Display Error Name Er-12 Current Detection Error Cause Possible Solutions One of the motor phases is missing: (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3). Check motor wiring and correct any problems. Current exceeded the current rating of the drive. • Check the motor wiring for a short between motor lines. • Make sure the motor contactor is closed during tuning. The current is too low. • Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, The current is too low. contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. Attempted Auto-Tuning without motor connected to the drive. Connect the motor and perform Auto-Tuning. Current detection signal error. Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. Digital Operator Display Error Name Er-13 Leakage Inductance Error Cause Possible Solutions Drive was unable to complete tuning for leakage • Check all wiring and correct any mistakes. • Double-check the motor rated current value that was entered to T1-04 for Auto-Tuning. inductance within 300 seconds. • Check the motor rated current value written on the motor nameplate and enter the correct value. Digital Operator Display Error Name Er-18 Induction Voltage Error Cause Possible Solutions The induced voltage constant attempted to set a Double-check the data entered to the T2- parameters, and perform Auto-Tuning again. value outside the allowable setting range. Digital Operator Display Error Name Er-19 Inductance Error Cause Possible Solutions The induced voltage constant attempted to set a Double-check the data entered to the T2- parameters, and perform Auto-Tuning again. value to E5-08 or E5-09 outside the allowable range. 6 Digital Operator Display Error Name Er-20 Stator Resistance Error Cause Possible Solutions Stator resistance tuning attempted to set a value to Double-check the data entered to the T2- parameters, and perform Auto-Tuning again. E5-06 that is outside the allowable setting range.
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Error Name |
|---|---|---|
| Er-09 | Acceleration Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The motor did not accelerate for the specified acceleration ramp. | Lengthen the acceleration ramp (C1-01). | |
| Torque limit when motoring is too low (L7-01 and L7-02). | • Check the settings of parameters L7-01 and L7-02. • Increase the setting of L7-01 and L7-02. | |
| The load during Rotational Auto-Tuning was too high. | • Disconnect the motor from machine and restart Auto-Tuning. If motor and load cannot be uncoupled make sure the load is lower than 30%. • If a mechanical brake is installed, make sure it is fully lifted during tuning. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| Er-10 | Motor Direction Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The encoder signal lines are not properly connected to the drive. | Check and correct wiring to the PG encoder. | |
| Motor and PG direction are opposite. | Check the motor speed monitor U1-05 while turning the motor manually in forward direction. If the sign displayed is negative, change the setting of parameter F1-05. | |
| The load pulled the motor in the opposite direction of the speed reference and the torque exceeded 100%. | Uncouple the motor from the load and repeat Auto-Tuning. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| Er-11 | Motor Speed Fault | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Torque reference is too high. | • Lengthen the acceleration ramp set to C1-01 (i.e., increase the acceleration time.) • Disconnect the machine from the motor, if possible. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| Er-12 | Current Detection Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| One of the motor phases is missing: (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3). | Check motor wiring and correct any problems. | |
| Current exceeded the current rating of the drive. | • Check the motor wiring for a short between motor lines. • Make sure the motor contactor is closed during tuning. • Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, The current is too low. contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. | |
| The current is too low. | ||
| Attempted Auto-Tuning without motor connected to the drive. | Connect the motor and perform Auto-Tuning. | |
| Current detection signal error. | Replace either the control board or the entire drive. For instructions on replacing the control board, contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| Er-13 | Leakage Inductance Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Drive was unable to complete tuning for leakage inductance within 300 seconds. | • Check all wiring and correct any mistakes. • Double-check the motor rated current value that was entered to T1-04 for Auto-Tuning. • Check the motor rated current value written on the motor nameplate and enter the correct value. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| Er-18 | Induction Voltage Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The induced voltage constant attempted to set a value outside the allowable setting range. | Double-check the data entered to the T2- parameters, and perform Auto-Tuning again. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| Er-19 | Inductance Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The induced voltage constant attempted to set a value to E5-08 or E5-09 outside the allowable range. | Double-check the data entered to the T2- parameters, and perform Auto-Tuning again. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| Er-20 | Stator Resistance Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Stator resistance tuning attempted to set a value to E5-06 that is outside the allowable setting range. | Double-check the data entered to the T2- parameters, and perform Auto-Tuning again. |
Source page
Page 290
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 290 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.6 Auto-Tuning Fault Detection
290 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Error Name |
|---|---|---|
| Er-21 | Z Pulse Correction Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Motor is coasting when Auto-tuning is initiated. | Make sure the motor has stopped completely. Repeat Auto-Tuning. | |
| Either the motor or the encoder on the motor is not properly wired. | Check the wiring for the motor and the encoder. Repeat Auto-Tuning. | |
| The direction for the encoder is set incorrectly, or the number of pulses set for the encoder is incorrect. | Check the direction setting by F1-05 and b1-14 and number of pulses (F1-01) set for the encoder. Repeat Auto-Tuning. | |
| Encoder is damaged. | Check the signal output from the encoder attached to the motor. Replace the encoder if damaged. | |
| PG-E3 option detected excess position error with the ERN1387 encoder. | If other possible solutions are not successful, perform Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| Er-22 | Initial Rotor Pole Search Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Parameters set by Initial Rotor Pole Search Tuning were outside the acceptable range. | Switch to an absolute encoder and to the PG-F3 option card. | |
| During normal operation, pole diversion exceeded 20 degrees. | ||
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| Er-23 | Non-rotating Encoder Offset Tuning Warning | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Pole diversion exceeded 15 degrees three times. | Remove the ropes and conduct Rotational Auto-Tuning for Encoder Offset (T2-01 = 3). | |
| Parameters set by Encoder Offset Tuning were outside the acceptable range. | ||
| Digital Operator Display | Error Name | |
| Er-24 | Auto-Tuning Error for PG-E3 Encoder Characteristics | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The signal lines between the PG-E3 option card and encoder are disconnected at the R+ and R- terminals. | Refer to the installation manual for the PG-E3 option card for information on correct connection of signal lines. | |
| Excessive electrical interference at the PG-E3 option card. | ||
| The software for the PG-E3 option card does not support the Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics. | Check the software version (PRG) for the PG-E3 option card. The software version PRG: 1102 or later support Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics. |
Source page
Page 291
6.7 Copy Function Related Displays
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 291 gnitoohselbuorT SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 291 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 6.7 Copy Function Related Displays Tasks, Errors, and Troubleshooting The table below lists the messages and errors that may appear when using the Copy function. When executing the tasks offered by the Copy function, the operator will indicate the task being performed. When an error occurs, a code appears on the operator to indicate the error. Note that errors related to the Copy function do not trigger a multi-function output terminal that has been set up to close when a fault or alarm occurs. To clear an error, simply press any key on the operator and the error display will disappear. Table 6.12 lists the corrective action that can be taken when an error occurs. Note: 1. Whenever using the copy function, the drive should be fully stopped. 2. The drive will not accept an Up/Down command while the Copy function is being executed. 3. Parameters can only be saved to a drive when the voltage class, capacity, control mode, and software version match. Table 6.12 Copy Function Task and Error Displays Digital Operator Display Task CoPy Writing Parameter Settings (flashing) Cause Possible Solutions Parameters are being written to the drive. Not an error. Digital Operator Display Task CPEr Control Mode Mismatch Cause Possible Solutions Control mode of the parameters to be loaded onto the drive and Check the control mode for the parameters that are to be loaded onto the drive and the control mode set to the drive those the control mode already set to the drive don’t match. parameters will be written to. Set the same control mode using parameter A1-02 and try again. Digital Operator Display Task CPyE Error Writing Data Cause Possible Solutions Failed writing parameters. Try writing parameters again. Digital Operator Display Task CSEr Copy Unit Error Cause Possible Solutions Hardware fault Replace the operator or the USB Copy Unit. Digital Operator Display Task dFPS Drive Model Mismatch Cause Possible Solutions • The drives used in the copy and write process are not the same model. • The drive from which the parameters were copied is a Check the model number of the drive from which the parameters were copied and the model of the drive to which you are attempting to write the parameters. Make sure the two drives are the same model and have the same software version. different model. • The drive to be written to is a different model. Digital Operator Display Task ECE Copy Error Cause Possible Solutions Attempted to read data from the encoder during undervoltage. Make sure there is no undervoltage fault or alarm, then try reading the data again. Digital Operator Display Task ECS Checksum Error Cause Possible Solutions Checksum error occurred when attempting to read data from Try copying the data again. 6 the encoder. Digital Operator Display Task EdE Write Impossible Cause Possible Solutions Drive settings do not permit writing to the encoder (F1-51 = 0), or there was a CPF24 while attempting to write to the Set the drive to allow encoder to be written to (F1-51 = 1) and try writing the data again. encoder. Digital Operator Display Task EiF Write Data Error Cause Possible Solutions Communication error occurred while attempting to write to the Make sure communications are normal and try writing to the encoder again. encoder.
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Task |
|---|---|---|
| CoPy | Writing Parameter Settings (flashing) | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Parameters are being written to the drive. | Not an error. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| CPEr | Control Mode Mismatch | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Control mode of the parameters to be loaded onto the drive and the control mode already set to the drive don’t match. | Check the control mode for the parameters that are to be loaded onto the drive and the control mode set to the drive those parameters will be written to. Set the same control mode using parameter A1-02 and try again. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| CPyE | Error Writing Data | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Failed writing parameters. | Try writing parameters again. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| CSEr | Copy Unit Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Hardware fault | Replace the operator or the USB Copy Unit. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| dFPS | Drive Model Mismatch | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| • The drives used in the copy and write process are not the same model. • The drive from which the parameters were copied is a different model. • The drive to be written to is a different model. | Check the model number of the drive from which the parameters were copied and the model of the drive to which you are attempting to write the parameters. Make sure the two drives are the same model and have the same software version. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| ECE | Copy Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Attempted to read data from the encoder during undervoltage. | Make sure there is no undervoltage fault or alarm, then try reading the data again. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| ECS | Checksum Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Checksum error occurred when attempting to read data from the encoder. | Try copying the data again. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| EdE | Write Impossible | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Drive settings do not permit writing to the encoder (F1-51 = 0), or there was a CPF24 while attempting to write to the encoder. | Set the drive to allow encoder to be written to (F1-51 = 1) and try writing the data again. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| EiF | Write Data Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Communication error occurred while attempting to write to the encoder. | Make sure communications are normal and try writing to the encoder again. |
Source page
Page 292
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 292 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.7 Copy Function Related Displays
Digital Operator Display Task End Task Complete Cause Possible Solutions Finished reading, writing, or verifying parameters. Not an error. Digital Operator Display Task EPE ID Mismatch Cause Possible Solutions Attempted to acquire machine data from an encoder that does Try again after writing machine data to the encoder. not have any machine data written to it yet. Digital Operator Display Task ErE Data Error Cause Possible Solutions Attempted to write data to the encoder during undervoltage. Make sure there is no undervoltage fault or alarm and try again. Digital Operator Display Task EvE Verify Error Cause Possible Solutions Drive parameters and the data saved to the encoder do not match. Use the Verify Menu to check parameter settings and try again. Digital Operator Display Task iFEr Communication Error Cause Possible Solutions A communication error occurred between the drive and the Check the cable connection. operator or the USB copy unit. A non-compatible cable is being used to connect the USB Copy Unit and the drive. Use the cable originally packaged with the USB Copy Unit. Digital Operator Display Task ndAT Model, Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch Cause Possible Solutions The drive from which the parameters were copied and the drive to which you are attempting to write have different Make sure model numbers and specifications are the same for both drives. electrical specifications, capacities, are set to different control modes, or are different models. The device being used to write the parameters is blank and Making sure all connections are correct, and copy the parameter settings onto the USB Copy Unit or the operator. does not have any parameters saved on it. Digital Operator Display Task rdEr Error Reading Data Cause Possible Solutions Failed while attempting to read parameter settings from the Press and hold the READ key on the USB Copy Unit for at least one second to have the unit read parameters from the drive. drive. Digital Operator Display Task rEAd Reading Parameter Settings (flashing) Cause Possible Solutions Displayed while the parameter settings are being read onto the USB Copy Unit. Not an error. Digital Operator Display Task vAEr Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch Cause Possible Solutions The drive the parameters were copied from and the drive you performing the Verify mode on have different electrical Make sure electrical specifications and capacities are the same for both drives. specifications or are a different capacity. Digital Operator Display Task vFyE Parameter settings in the drive and those saved to the copy function are not the same Cause Possible Solutions Indicates that parameter settings that have been Read and To synchronize parameters, either write the parameters saved on the USB Copy Unit or LCD digital operator onto the drive, loaded onto the Copy Unit or Digital Operator are different. or Read the parameter settings on the drive onto the USB Copy Unit. Digital Operator Display Task vrFy Comparing Parameter Settings (flashing) Cause Possible Solutions The Verify mode has confirmed that parameters settings on the drive and parameters read to the copy device are identical. Not an error. 292 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Digital Operator Display | Column | Task |
|---|---|---|
| End | Task Complete | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Finished reading, writing, or verifying parameters. | Not an error. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| EPE | ID Mismatch | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Attempted to acquire machine data from an encoder that does not have any machine data written to it yet. | Try again after writing machine data to the encoder. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| ErE | Data Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Attempted to write data to the encoder during undervoltage. | Make sure there is no undervoltage fault or alarm and try again. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| EvE | Verify Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Drive parameters and the data saved to the encoder do not match. | Use the Verify Menu to check parameter settings and try again. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| iFEr | Communication Error | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| A communication error occurred between the drive and the operator or the USB copy unit. | Check the cable connection. | |
| A non-compatible cable is being used to connect the USB Copy Unit and the drive. | Use the cable originally packaged with the USB Copy Unit. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| ndAT | Model, Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The drive from which the parameters were copied and the drive to which you are attempting to write have different electrical specifications, capacities, are set to different control modes, or are different models. | Make sure model numbers and specifications are the same for both drives. | |
| The device being used to write the parameters is blank and does not have any parameters saved on it. | Making sure all connections are correct, and copy the parameter settings onto the USB Copy Unit or the operator. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| rdEr | Error Reading Data | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Failed while attempting to read parameter settings from the drive. | Press and hold the READ key on the USB Copy Unit for at least one second to have the unit read parameters from the drive. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| rEAd | Reading Parameter Settings (flashing) | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Displayed while the parameter settings are being read onto the USB Copy Unit. | Not an error. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| vAEr | Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The drive the parameters were copied from and the drive you performing the Verify mode on have different electrical specifications or are a different capacity. | Make sure electrical specifications and capacities are the same for both drives. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| vFyE | Parameter settings in the drive and those saved to the copy function are not the same | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| Indicates that parameter settings that have been Read and loaded onto the Copy Unit or Digital Operator are different. | To synchronize parameters, either write the parameters saved on the USB Copy Unit or LCD digital operator onto the drive, or Read the parameter settings on the drive onto the USB Copy Unit. | |
| Digital Operator Display | Task | |
| vrFy | Comparing Parameter Settings (flashing) | |
| Cause | Possible Solutions | |
| The Verify mode has confirmed that parameters settings on the drive and parameters read to the copy device are identical. | Not an error. |
Source page
Page 293
6.8 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults
| Column | Step | Column | Display/Result |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. | Turn on the drive input power. The first screen displays. | - MODE - DRV Rdy Speed Ref (OPR) U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | |
| 2. | Press or until the monitor screen is displayed. | - MODE - DRV Rdy Monitor Menu U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | |
| 3. | Press to display the parameter setting screen. | -MONITR- DRVRdy Monitor U1 -01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | |
| 4. | Press and to scroll to monitor U2-02. The fault code shown in U2-02 is the fault that occurred last. | - MONITR - DRV Rdy Last Fault U2-02= oC U2-03= 0.00% RSEQ U2-04= 0.00% LREF FWDFWD/REV | |
| 7. | Press to view drive status information when fault occurred. Parameters U2-03 through U2-20 help determine the cause of a fault. Parameters to be monitored differ depending on the control mode. | - MONITR - DRV Rdy Frequency Ref U2-03= 0.00% U2-04= 0.00% RSEQ U2-05= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV - MONITR - DRV Rdy Heatsink Temp U2-20= XX °C U2-01= ----- RSEQ U2-02= ----- LREF FWDFWD/REV |
| - MODE - DRV Rdy | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|
| Speed Ref (OPR) | ||
| U1-01= 0.00% | ||
| U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | RSEQ | |
| LREF | ||
| FWD/REV |
| - MODE - DRV Rdy | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|
| Monitor Menu | ||
| U1-01= 0.00% U1-02= 0.00% | ||
| RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | RSEQ LREF | |
| FWD/REV |
| -MONITR- DRVRdy Monitor U1 -01= 0.00% | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|
| U1-02= 0.00% RSEQ U1-03= 0.00A LREF FWDFWD/REV | RSEQ LREF | |
| FWD/REV |
| - MONITR - DRV Rdy Last Fault U2-02= oC U2-03= 0.00% | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|
| RSEQ U2-04= 0.00% LREF FWDFWD/REV | RSEQ LREF | |
| FWD/REV |
| - MONITR - DRV Rdy Frequency Ref U2-03= 0.00% | Column |
|---|---|
| RSEQ LREF |
| - MONITR - DRV Rdy Heatsink Temp U2-20= XX °C | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|
| U2-01= ----- RSEQ U2-02= ----- LREF FWDFWD/REV | RSEQ | |
| LREF | ||
| FWD/REV |
Source page
Page 294
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 294 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
6.8 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults
Fault Reset Methods
When a fault occurs, the cause of the fault must be removed and the drive must be restarted. The table below lists the different ways to restart the drive.
After the Fault Occurs Procedure
YEG DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALARM - MODE - DRV oC Fix the cause of the fault, restart the drive, and Press on the digital operator when error code is Ove F r W cu D rre R nt ESET reset the fault displayed. RESET F1 F2 ESC RLOE RESET ENTER RUN STOP Drive Resetting via Fault Reset Digital Input S4 C S4 lo i s s e s t e h t e f n o r o p “F en a u th lt e R f e a s u e lt t ” s i a g s n d a e l f d a i u g l i t t a ( l H i 1 n - p 0 u 4 t = vi a 1 4 te ). rminal S4. Fault Reset Switch S4 Fault Reset Digital Input SC Digital Input Common 2 ON If the above methods do not reset the fault, turn off the drive main power supply. Reapply power after the digital operator display is out. 1 OFF Note: 1. If the Up/Down command is present, the drive will disregard any attempts to reset the fault. Remove the Up/Down command before attempting to clear a fault situation. 2. The SE4 fault can only be reset by executing the fault reset (S6-08 = 1) when the BRM function is enabled (S6-07 = 1).
294 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| After the Fault Occurs | Procedure | Column |
|---|---|---|
| Fix the cause of the fault, restart the drive, and reset the fault | Press on the digital operator when error code is displayed. | YEG DIGITAL OPERATOR JVOP-180 ALARM - MODE - DRV oC Overcurrent FWDRESET RESET F1 F2 ESC RLOE RESET ENTER RUN STOP |
| Resetting via Fault Reset Digital Input S4 | Close then open the fault signal digital input via terminal S4. S4 is set for “Fault Reset” as default (H1-04 = 14). | Drive Fault Reset Switch S4 Fault Reset Digital Input SC Digital Input Common |
| If the above methods do not reset the fault, turn off the drive main power supply. Reapply power after the digital operator display is out. | 2 ON 1 OFF |
| TOR JVOP-180 ALARM |
|---|
| E - DRV oC vercurrent FWDRESET |
| F2 RLOE ENTER |
| UN STOP |
Source page
Page 295
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 295 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Periodic Inspection & Maintenance
This chapter describes the periodic inspection and maintenance of the drive to ensure that it receives the proper care to maintain overall performance.
7.1 SECTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 7.2 INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 7.3 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 7.4 DRIVE COOLING FANS AND CIRCULATION FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
7.5 DRIVE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 295
Source page
Page 296
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 296 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
7.1 Section Safety
7.1 Section Safety
Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on.
WA RNING
Ensuring Safety during Auto-Tuning
When using a PM motor for the first time, or when replacing the drive or PM motor, always make sure that motor parameter have been set properly and the speed detection function accurately prior to operation. Using a PM motor requires that the encoder offset be set correctly in addition to entering motor data to corresponding parameters. If the motor, encoder, or drive is ever replaced, be sure to perform Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning. Insufficient torque can cause the elevator car to move in the direction of the load, or cause the motor to behave erratically (reverse operation, stand still, sudden accelerations, etc.).
For more information, refer to the instruction manual included with the motor. Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not connect or disconnect wiring to the drive or motor while the power is on. Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level.
Do not operate equipment with covers removed. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual.
Do not attempt to modify or alter the drive in any way not explained in this manual. Yaskawa is not responsible damage caused by modification of the product made by the user. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from operation of damaged equipment. The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual.
Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting ungrounded electrical equipment. Always ground the ground terminal. (200 V Class: Ground to 100 Ω or less, 400 V Class: Ground to 10 Ω or less)
Verify motor wiring bare wire ends do not contact the drive chassis or enclosure when wiring drive terminals U/ T1, V/T2, W/T3.
Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death due to electrical shock.
296 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| DANGER |
|---|
| Electrical Shock Hazard Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait for at least the time specified on the warning label once all indicators are OFF, and then measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm it has reached a safe level. |
| WA RNING |
|---|
| Ensuring Safety during Auto-Tuning When using a PM motor for the first time, or when replacing the drive or PM motor, always make sure that motor parameter have been set properly and the speed detection function accurately prior to operation. Using a PM motor requires that the encoder offset be set correctly in addition to entering motor data to corresponding parameters. If the motor, encoder, or drive is ever replaced, be sure to perform Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning. Insufficient torque can cause the elevator car to move in the direction of the load, or cause the motor to behave erratically (reverse operation, stand still, sudden accelerations, etc.). For more information, refer to the instruction manual included with the motor. Electrical Shock Hazard Do not connect or disconnect wiring to the drive or motor while the power is on. Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicator LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50 Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure the DC bus voltage level to confirm safe level. Do not operate equipment with covers removed. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual. Do not attempt to modify or alter the drive in any way not explained in this manual. Yaskawa is not responsible damage caused by modification of the product made by the user. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury from operation of damaged equipment. The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual. Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting ungrounded electrical equipment. Always ground the ground terminal. (200 V Class: Ground to 100 Ω or less, 400 V Class: Ground to 10 Ω or less) Verify motor wiring bare wire ends do not contact the drive chassis or enclosure when wiring drive terminals U/ T1, V/T2, W/T3. Failure to comply may result in serious injury or death due to electrical shock. |
Source page
Page 297
7.1 Section Safety
| WA RNING |
|---|
| Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing, and wear eye protection before beginning work on the drive. Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the equipment. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives. Switch off and lock power supply and lock the switch before wiring terminals. Failure to comply could result in serious injury or death. Fire Hazard Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque. Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections. Do not use an improper voltage source. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire. Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power. Do not use improper combustible materials in drive installation, repair or maintenance. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire. Attach the drive or braking resistors to metal or other noncombustible material. |
| CAUTION |
|---|
| Burn Hazard Do not touch a hot drive heatsink. Failure to comply could result in minor or moderate injury. Shut off the power to the drive when replacing the cooling fan. To prevent burns, wait at least 15 minutes and make sure heatsink has cooled down. |
Source page
Page 298
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 298 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
7.1 Section Safety
NOTICE Equipment Hazard
Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage. Improper sequencing of output motor circuits could result in damage to the drive. Do not connect electromagnetic switches or magnetic contactors to the output motor circuits without proper sequencing. Do not open the main circuit between the drive and the motor while the PM motor is rotating.
Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry.
Do not connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage.
Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive. Follow cooling fan replacement instructions. The cooling fan cannot operate properly when it is installed incorrectly and could seriously damage the drive. Follow the instructions in this manual to replace the cooling fan, making sure that the label is on top before inserting the cooling fan into the drive. To ensure maximum useful product life, replace both cooling fans when performing maintenance.
Do not connect the AC power line to the output motor terminals of the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output terminals. could result in death or serious injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output terminals.
Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring. Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive.
Do not modify the drive circuitry.
Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified.
Check all the wiring to ensure that all connections are correct after installing the drive and connecting any other devices. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive.
Make sure wiring to motor terminals U, V, and W connect the corresponding U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 output terminals on the drive. Wiring to the wrong terminals will reverse the phase order, causing the motor to operate in reverse. This could cause the elevator car to fall when attempting to go up.
Never use a magnet contactor on the input side of the drive.
Refrain from switching an input contactor more often than once every 30 minutes. Normally the drive I/O should be used to stop and start the motor. Do not operate damaged equipment.
Failure to comply could result in further damage to the equipment. Do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts.
298 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| NOTICE |
|---|
| Equipment Hazard Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage. Improper sequencing of output motor circuits could result in damage to the drive. Do not connect electromagnetic switches or magnetic contactors to the output motor circuits without proper sequencing. Do not open the main circuit between the drive and the motor while the PM motor is rotating. Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry. Do not connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage. Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive. Follow cooling fan replacement instructions. The cooling fan cannot operate properly when it is installed incorrectly and could seriously damage the drive. Follow the instructions in this manual to replace the cooling fan, making sure that the label is on top before inserting the cooling fan into the drive. To ensure maximum useful product life, replace both cooling fans when performing maintenance. Do not connect the AC power line to the output motor terminals of the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output terminals. could result in death or serious injury by fire as a result of drive damage from line voltage application to output terminals. Do not use unshielded cable for control wiring. Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive. Do not modify the drive circuitry. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified. Check all the wiring to ensure that all connections are correct after installing the drive and connecting any other devices. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. Make sure wiring to motor terminals U, V, and W connect the corresponding U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 output terminals on the drive. Wiring to the wrong terminals will reverse the phase order, causing the motor to operate in reverse. This could cause the elevator car to fall when attempting to go up. Never use a magnet contactor on the input side of the drive. Refrain from switching an input contactor more often than once every 30 minutes. Normally the drive I/O should be used to stop and start the motor. Do not operate damaged equipment. Failure to comply could result in further damage to the equipment. Do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts. |
Source page
Page 299
7.2 Inspection
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 299 & noitcepsnI cidoireP ecnanetniaM SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 299 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 7.2 Inspection Power electronics have limited life and may exhibit changes in characteristics or performance deterioration after years of use under normal conditions. To help avoid such problems, it is important to perform preventive maintenance and periodic inspection on the drive. Drives contain a variety of power electronics such as power transistors, semiconductors, capacitors, resistors, fans, and relays. The electronics in the drive serve a critical role in maintaining proper motor control. Follow the inspection lists provided in this chapter as a part of a regular maintenance program. Note: The drive will require more frequent inspection if it is placed in harsh environments, such as: • High ambient temperatures • Frequent starting and stopping • Fluctuations in the AC supply or load • Excessive vibrations or shock loading • Dust, metal dust, salt, sulfuric acid, chlorine atmospheres • Poor storage conditions. Perform the first equipment inspection one to two years after installation. Recommended Daily Inspection Table 7.1 outlines the recommended daily inspection for Yaskawa drives. Check the following items on a daily basis to avoid premature deterioration in performance or product failure. Copy this checklist and mark the “Checked” column after each inspection. Table 7.1 General Recommended Daily Inspection Checklist Inspection Category Inspection Points Corrective Action Checked • Check the load coupling. Motor Inspect for abnormal oscillation or noise coming from the motor. • Measure motor vibration. • Tighten all loose components. Check for excessive load. • Excessive load. Inspect for abnormal heat generated from the drive or motor and visible discoloration. • Loose connections. • Dirty heatsink or motor. Cooling • Ambient temperature. Check for the following: Inspect drive cooling fan operation. • Clogged or dirty fan. • Correct fan operation parameter setting. Environment Verify the drive environment complies with the specifications listed Eliminate the source of contaminants or correct poor in Installation Environment on page37. environment. Check for the following: The drive output current should not be higher than the motor or drive Load rating for an extended period of time. • Excessive load. • Correct motor parameter settings. • Correct the voltage or power supply to within nameplate Power Supply Voltage Check main power supply and control voltages. specifications. • Verify all main circuit phases. 7
| Inspection Category | Inspection Points | Corrective Action | Checked |
|---|---|---|---|
| Motor | Inspect for abnormal oscillation or noise coming from the motor. | • Check the load coupling. • Measure motor vibration. • Tighten all loose components. | |
| Cooling | Inspect for abnormal heat generated from the drive or motor and visible discoloration. | Check for excessive load. • Excessive load. • Loose connections. • Dirty heatsink or motor. • Ambient temperature. | |
| Inspect drive cooling fan operation. | Check for the following: • Clogged or dirty fan. • Correct fan operation parameter setting. | ||
| Environment | Verify the drive environment complies with the specifications listed in Installation Environment on page37. | Eliminate the source of contaminants or correct poor environment. | |
| Load | The drive output current should not be higher than the motor or drive rating for an extended period of time. | Check for the following: • Excessive load. • Correct motor parameter settings. | |
| Power Supply Voltage | Check main power supply and control voltages. | • Correct the voltage or power supply to within nameplate specifications. • Verify all main circuit phases. |
Source page
Page 300
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 300 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
7.2 Inspection
Recommended Periodic Inspection
Table 7.2 outlines the recommended periodic inspections for Yaskawa drive installations. Although periodic inspections should generally be performed once a year, the drive may require more frequent inspection in harsh environments or with rigorous use. Operating and environmental conditions, along with experience in each application, will determine the actual inspection frequency for each installation. Periodic inspection will help to avoid premature deterioration in performance or product failure. Copy this checklist and mark the “Checked” column after each inspection.
| Inspection Area | Inspection Points | Corrective Action | Checked |
|---|---|---|---|
| Main Circuit Periodic Inspection | |||
| General | • Inspect equipment for discoloration from overheating or deterioration. • Inspect for damaged or deformed parts. | • Replace damaged components as required. • The drive has few serviceable parts and may require complete drive replacement. | |
| Inspect for dirt, foreign particles, or dust collection on components. | • Inspect enclosure door seal if used. • Remove foreign particles and dust by sucking them out with a vacuum cleaner to avoid touching parts. • Replace components if cleaning is not possible. | ||
| Conductors and Wiring | • Inspect wiring and connections for discoloration, damage, or heat stress. • Inspect wire insulation and shielding for wear. | Repair or replace damaged wiring. | |
| Terminals | Inspect terminals for stripped, damaged, or loose connections. | Tighten loose screws and replace damaged screws or terminals. | |
| Relays and Contactors | • Inspect contactors and relays for excessive noise during operation. • Inspect coils for signs of overheating such as melted or cracked insulation. | • Check coil voltage for overvoltage or undervoltage conditions. • Replace damaged removable relays contactors or circuit board. | |
| Braking Resistors | Inspect for discoloration of heat stress on or around resistors. | • Minor discoloration may be acceptable. • Check for loose connections if discoloration exists. | |
| Electrolytic Capacitor | • Inspect for leaking, discoloration, or cracks. • Check if the cap has come off, for any swelling, or if the sides have burst open. | The drive has few serviceable parts and may require complete drive replacement. | |
| Diode, IGBT (Power Transistor) | Inspect for dust or other foreign material collected on the surface. | Remove foreign particles and dust by sucking them out with a vacuum cleaner to avoid touching parts. | |
| Motor Periodic Inspection | |||
| Operation Check | Check for increased vibration or abnormal noise. | Stop the motor and contact qualified maintenance personnel as required. | |
| Control Circuit Periodic Inspection | |||
| General | • Inspect terminals for stripped, damaged, or loose connections. • Make sure all terminals have been properly tightened. | • Tighten loose screws and replace damaged screws or terminals. • If terminals are integral to a circuit board, then board or drive replacement may be required. | |
| Circuit Boards | Check for any odor, discoloration, and rust. Make sure connections are properly fastened and that no dust or oil mist has accumulated on the surface of the board. | • Fix any loose connections. • If an antistatic cloth or vacuum plunger cannot be used, replace the board. • Do not use any solvents to clean the board. • Remove foreign particles and dust by sucking them out with a vacuum cleaner to avoid touching parts. • The drive has few serviceable parts and may require complete drive replacement. | |
| Cooling System Periodic Inspection | |||
| Cooling Fan, Circulation Fan, Control Board Cooling Fan | • Check for abnormal oscillation or unusual noise. • Check for damaged or missing fan blades. | • Replace as required. • Refer to Drive Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans on page303 for information on cleaning or replacing the fan. | |
| Heatsink | Inspect for dust or other foreign material collected on the surface. | Remove foreign particles and dust by sucking them out with a vacuum cleaner to avoid touching parts. | |
| Air Duct | Inspect air intake and exhaust openings. They must be free from obstruction and properly installed. | • Visually inspect the area. • Clear obstructions and clean air duct as required. | |
| Display Periodic Inspection | |||
| Digital Operator | • Make sure data appears on the operator properly. • Inspect for dust or other foreign material that may have collected on surrounding components. | • Contact a Yaskawa representative if there is any trouble with the display or keypad. • Clean the digital operator. |
Source page
Page 301
7.3 Periodic Maintenance
| Component | Estimated Performance Life |
|---|---|
| Cooling Fan, Circulation Fan | 10 years |
| Electrolytic Capacitors | 10 years<1> |
| Parameter | Component | Contents |
|---|---|---|
| U4-03 | Cooling Fan, Circulation Fan, Control Board Cooling Fan | Displays the accumulated operation time of the fan, from 0 to 99999 hours. This value is automatically reset to 0 once it reaches 99999. |
| U4-04 | Displays the accumulated fan operation time as a percentage of the specified maintenance period. | |
| U4-05 | DC Bus Capacitors | Displays the accumulated time the capacitors are used as a percentage of the specified maintenance period. |
| U4-06 | Inrush (pre-charge) Relay | Displays the number of times the drive is powered up as a percentage of the performance life of the inrush circuit. |
| U4-07 | IGBT | Displays the percentage of the maintenance period reached by the IGBTs. |
Source page
Page 302
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 302 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
7.3 Periodic Maintenance
Alarm Outputs for Maintenance Monitors
An output can be set up to inform the user when a specific components has neared its expected performance life. When one of multi-function digital output terminals has been assigned the maintenance monitor function (H2- = 2F), the terminal will close when the cooling fan, DC bus capacitors, or DC bus pre-charge relay reach 90% of the expected performance life, or when the IGBTs have reached 50% of their expected performance life. Additionally the digital operator will display an alarm like shown in Table 7.5 to indicate the specific components that may need maintenance.
Table 7.5 Maintenance Alarms Alarm Display Function Corrective Action LED Operator LCD Operator <1> LT-1 The cooling fans have reached 90% of their designated lifetime. Replace the cooling fan. The DC bus capacitors have reached 90% of their designated <1> LT-2 lifetime. Replace the drive. <1> LT-3 T lif h e e t i D m C e. bus charge circuit has reached 90% of its designated Replace the drive. <1> LT-4 The IGBTs have reached 50% of their designated lifetime. Check the load, carrier frequency, and output frequency. <2> TrPC The IGBTs have reached 90% of their designated lifetime. Replace the drive. <1> This alarm message will be output only if the Maintenance Monitor function is assigned to one of the digital outputs (H2- = 2F). The alarm will also trigger a digital output that is programmed for alarm indication (H2- = 10). <2> This alarm message will always be output, even if the Maintenance Monitor function is not assigned to any of the digital outputs (H2- = 2F). The alarm will also trigger a digital output that is programmed for alarm indication (H2- = 10). Related Drive Parameters Use parameters o4-03, o4-05, o4-07, and o4-09 to reset a Maintenance Monitor to zero after replacing a specific component. Refer to Parameter Table on page 354 for details on parameter settings.
NOTICE: If these parameters are not reset after the corresponding parts have been replaced, the Maintenance Monitor function will continue to count down the performance life from the value that was reached with the old part. If the Maintenance Monitor is not reset, the drive will not have the correct value of the performance life for the new component.
302 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Alarm Display | Column | Function | Corrective Action |
|---|---|---|---|
| LED Operator | LCD Operator | ||
| <1> | LT-1 | The cooling fans have reached 90% of their designated lifetime. | Replace the cooling fan. |
| <1> | LT-2 | The DC bus capacitors have reached 90% of their designated lifetime. | Replace the drive. |
| <1> | LT-3 | The DC bus charge circuit has reached 90% of its designated lifetime. | Replace the drive. |
| <1> | LT-4 | The IGBTs have reached 50% of their designated lifetime. | Check the load, carrier frequency, and output frequency. |
| <2> | TrPC | The IGBTs have reached 90% of their designated lifetime. | Replace the drive. |
Source page
Page 303
7.4 Drive Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 303 & noitcepsnI cidoireP ecnanetniaM SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 303 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 7.4 Drive Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans Follow the instructions in this manual to replace the cooling fan, making sure that the label is on top before inserting the cooling fan into the drive. NOTICE: Follow cooling fan replacement instructions. The cooling fan cannot operate properly when installed incorrectly and could seriously damage the drive. To ensure maximum useful product life, replace all cooling fans when performing maintenance. Contact your Yaskawa representative or the nearest Yaskawa sales office to order replacement cooling fans as required. For drives with multiple cooling fans, replace all the fans when performing maintenance to ensure maximum product performance life. Number of Cooling Fans Three-Phase 200 V Class Three-Phase 400 V Class CI M M o R d - e L l Cooling Fans Circulation Fans Page CI M M o R d - e L l Cooling Fans Circulation Fans C C o o n o t l r i o n l g B F o a a n r s d Page 20008 - - 4A0005 - - - 20011 - - 4A0006 1 - - 20018 1 - 4A0009 1 - - 20025 2 - 4A0015 2 - - 305 305 20033 2 - 4A0018 2 - - 20047 2 - 4A0024 2 - - 20060 2 - 4A0031 2 - - 20075 2 - 4A0039 2 - - 20085 2 - 4A0045 2 - - 307 307 20115 2 - 4A0060 2 - - 20145 2 - 4A0075 2 - - 309 20180 2 - 4A0091 2 - - 20215 3 - 4A0112 2 - - 311 20283 3 - 4A0150 2 - - 311 20346 3 1 4A0180 3 - - 20415 3 1 4A0216 3 - - 7
| Three-Phase 200 V Class | Column | Column | Column | Three-Phase 400 V Class | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Model CIMR-L | Cooling Fans | Circulation Fans | Page | Model CIMR-L | Cooling Fans | Circulation Fans | Control Board Cooling Fans | Page |
| 20008 | - | - | 305 | 4A0005 | - | - | - | 305 |
| 20011 | - | - | 4A0006 | 1 | - | - | ||
| 20018 | 1 | - | 4A0009 | 1 | - | - | ||
| 20025 | 2 | - | 4A0015 | 2 | - | - | ||
| 20033 | 2 | - | 4A0018 | 2 | - | - | ||
| 20047 | 2 | - | 4A0024 | 2 | - | - | ||
| 20060 | 2 | - | 4A0031 | 2 | - | - | ||
| 20075 | 2 | - | 4A0039 | 2 | - | - | ||
| 20085 | 2 | - | 307 | 4A0045 | 2 | - | - | 307 |
| 20115 | 2 | - | 4A0060 | 2 | - | - | ||
| 20145 | 2 | - | 311 | 4A0075 | 2 | - | - | 309 |
| 20180 | 2 | - | 4A0091 | 2 | - | - | ||
| 20215 | 3 | - | 4A0112 | 2 | - | - | 311 | |
| 20283 | 3 | - | 4A0150 | 2 | - | - | ||
| 20346 | 3 | 1 | 4A0180 | 3 | - | - | ||
| 20415 | 3 | 1 | 4A0216 | 3 | - | - |
Source page
Page 304
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 304 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
7.4 Drive Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans
Cooling Fan Component Names
YEG
A - Fan Cover D - Cooling Fan B - Fan finger guard E - Fan Unit Case C - Cable Cover F - Circulation Fan Figure 7.1 Cooling Fan Replacement
304 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 305
7.4 Drive Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans
Source page
Page 306
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 306 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
7.4 Drive Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans
Installing the Cooling Fan
NOTICE: Prevent Equipment Damage. Follow cooling fan replacement instructions. Improper cooling fan replacement could result in damage to equipment. When installing the replacement cooling fan into the drive, make sure the fan is facing upwards. To ensure maximum useful product life, replace all cooling fans when performing maintenance. Reverse the procedure described above to reinstall the cooling fan. 1. Install the replacement fan into the drive, ensuring the alignment pins line up as shown in the figure below. Figure7.4
B C
YEG
A - Push the connectors together C - Make sure the pins align completely properly. B - Label facing up Figure 7.4 Installing the Cooling Fan: 20018 to 20075, 40006 to 40039 2. Properly connect the fan power lines, then place the cable back into the recess of the drive. Figure7.5
YEG A
A - Back B - Front Figure 7.5 Cooling Fan Power Supply Connectors: 20018 to 20075, 40006 to 40039 3. While pressing in on the hooks on the left and right sides of the fan finger guard, guide the fan finger guard until it clicks back into place. Figure7.6
YEG
Figure 7.6 Reattach the Fan Cover: 20018 to 20075, 40006 to 40039 4. Turn the power supply back on and reset the cooling fan operation time for the Maintenance Monitor by setting o4-03 to 0.
306 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 307
7.4 Drive Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans
Source page
Page 308
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 308 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
7.4 Drive Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans
Installing the Cooling Fan
1. Properly connect the fan power lines. 2. Place the power supply connectors and cable back into the recess of the drive. Figure7.9 YEG A
A - Back B - Front Figure 7.9 Cooling Fan Power Supply Connectors: 20085, 20115, 40045, and 40060 3. Install the replacement fan into the drive. Figure7.10
YEG Insert the fan at an angle so that it tilts towards the front of the drive. Next press down on the back of the fan that still protrudes from the drive so that the fan snaps into place. Figure 7.10 Installing the Cooling Fan: 20085, 20115, 40045, and 40060 4. Tilt up the back end of the fan finger guard and slide the fan finger guard into the opening near the front of the drive, then guide the fan finger guard into place. Figure7.11
Insertion area
Front of drive Back of drive Cross-Section YEG Fan finger guard Back of drive
Hook Hook Front of drive Figure 7.11 Reattach the Fan Cover: 20085, 20115, 40045, and 40060
308 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 309
7.4 Drive Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans
Source page
Page 310
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 310 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
7.4 Drive Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans
Installing the Cooling Fan Reverse the procedure described above to reinstall the cooling fan.
1. Install the replacement fan into the drive. Align the pins as shown in Figure 7.15. Figure7.15
YEG
Figure 7.15 Installing the Cooling Fan: 40075 and 40091 2. Properly connect the fan power lines then replace the power supply connectors and cables into the recess of the drive. Figure7.16 A YEG
A - Back B - Front Figure 7.16 Cooling Fan Power Supply Connectors: 40075 and 40091 3. Angle the fan cover as shown in Figure 7.15 and insert the connector tabs into the corresponding holes on the drive. Figure7.17 Holes for connector tabs.
Fan finger guard Four tabs Back of Drive YEG
Hook Hook Front of Drive Figure 7.17 Reattach the Fan Cover: 40075 and 40091
310 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 311
7.4 Drive Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans
Source page
Page 312
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 312 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
7.4 Drive Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans
3. Remove the screws holding the fan unit in place and slide the fan unit out of the drive. Figure7.20 YEG
Figure 7.20 Removing the Fan Unit: 20145 to 20415, and 40112 to 40216 4. Remove the fan guard and replace the cooling fans. Note: Do not pinch the fan cable between parts when reassembling the fan unit. Figure7.21 4(cid:3)0216 2(cid:3)0346, 2(cid:3)0415
A A 2(cid:3)0145 to 2(cid:3)0283 4(cid:3)0112 to 4(cid:3)0180 A B B
C C C
YEG D
A - Fan guard C - Cooling Fan B - Cable Cover D - Circulation Fan Figure 7.21 Fan Unit Disassembly: 20145 to 20415, and 40112 to 40216 Cooling Fan Wiring: CIMR-L20145, 20180, 40112, and 40150
1. Position the protective tube so that the fan connector sits in the center of the protective tube. Protective tube common
TMonly
2. Place the fan connector covered by the tube as shown in Figure 7.22.
312 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 313
7.4 Drive Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 313 & noitcepsnI cidoireP ecnanetniaM SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 313 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Figure7.22 2(cid:3)0145, 2(cid:3)0180, 4(cid:3)0112 4(cid:3)0150 Fan B1 Fan B2 Connector for fan B1 Connector for fan B2 YEG Figure 7.22 Cooling Fan Wiring for Models 20145, 20180, 40112 and 40150 3. Make sure that the protective tube does not stick out beyond the fan guard. 4. Double-check the relay connector to ensure that it is properly connected. Cooling Fan Wiring: CIMR-L20215, 20283, and 40180 1. Position the protective tube so that the fan connector sits in the center of the protective tube. Protective tube COMMON TMonly 2. Insert the connector for fan B2 and guide the lead wire for fan B2 so the cable hook holds it in place. Insert the connector for fan B1. Figure7.23 Cable hook Fan B1 Fan B2 Common_ TMonly Connector for fan B2 Connector for fan B1 Figure 7.23 Cooling Fan Wiring: 20215, 20283, and 40180 3. Make sure that the protective tube does not stick out beyond the fan guard. 7
Source page
Page 314
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 314 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
7.4 Drive Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans
Cooling Fan Wiring: CIMR-L20346, 20415, and 40216
1. Position the protective tube so that the fan connector sits in the center of the protective tube. Protective tube Common _TMonly
2. In the space between fans 1 and 2, place the fan connector for fan B2 in front of the fan connector for fan B1. 3. Place the connector for fan B3 between fans B2 and B3. Figure7.24 common_TMonly Connector for fan B1 Cable cover
Fan B3
Fan B1 Fan B2
Connector for fan
Connector for fan B2 Figure 7.24 Cooling Fan Wiring: 20346, 20415, and 40216 4. Double-check the relay connector to ensure that it is properly connected. 5. Reattach the cable cover to its original position and tighten the screws so that the fan guard holds the cable cover in place. Note: Do not pinch the fan cable between parts when reassembling the fan unit. Installing the Cooling Fan Unit
1. Reverse the procedure described above to reinstall the cooling fan unit. Figure7.25 YEG
Figure 7.25 Installing the Cooling Fan Unit: 20145 to 20415, and 40216 2. Reattach the covers and digital operator. 3. Turn the power supply back on and reset the cooling fan operation time for the Maintenance Monitor by setting o4-03 to 0.
314 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 315
7.5 Drive Replacement
Source page
Page 316
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 316 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
7.5 Drive Replacement
Replacing the Drive
YEG
Figure 7.27 Drive Replacement: Removing the Terminal Cover 2. Loosen the screws holding the terminal board in place. Remove the screw securing the bottom cover and remove the bottom cover from the drive. Figure7.28
YEG
Figure 7.28 Drive Replacement: Removing the Control Terminal Board 3. Slide the terminal board as illustrated by the arrows to remove it from the drive along with the bottom cover.
316 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 317
7.5 Drive Replacement
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 317 & noitcepsnI cidoireP ecnanetniaM SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 317 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Figure7.29 YEG Figure 7.29 Drive Replacement: Remove the Control Terminal Board Figure7.30 YEG Figure 7.30 Drive Replacement: Removable Control Terminal Board Disconnected from the Drive 4. Disconnect all option cards and options. Make sure they are intact before reusing them. 5. Replace the drive and wire the main circuit. Installing the Drive 1. After wiring the main circuit, connect the terminal block to the drive as shown in Figure 7.31. Use the installation screw to fasten the terminal block into place. Figure7.31 YEG Figure 7.31 Drive Replacement: Installing the Control Terminal Board 2. Reconnect all options to the new drive in the same way they were installed in the old drive. Connect option boards to the same option ports in the new drive that were used in the old drive. 3. Put the terminal cover back into its original place. 4. After powering on the drive, all parameter settings are transferred from the terminal board to the drive memory. If an oPE04 error occurs, load the parameter settings saved on the terminal board to the new drive by setting 7 parameter A1-03 to 5550. Reset the Maintenance Monitor function timers by setting parameters o4-01 through o4-12 to 0, and parameter o4-13 to 1.
Source page
Page 318
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 318 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
7.5 Drive Replacement
318 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 319
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 319 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Peripheral Devices & Options
This chapter explains the installation of peripheral devices and options available for the drive.
8.1 SECTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 8.2 DRIVE OPTIONS AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
8.3 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 8.4 OPTION CARD INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 8.5 INSTALLING PERIPHERAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 319
Source page
Page 320
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 320 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
8.1 Section Safety
8.1 Section Safety
Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before touching any components.
WA RNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not operate equipment with covers removed. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual. Do not change wiring, remove covers, connectors or options cards, or attempt to service the drive with power applied to the drive.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all power to the drive and check for unsafe voltages before servicing.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the equipment. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives. Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing and wear eye protection before beginning work on the drive. Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case.
Always properly ground the motor-side grounding terminal. Fire Hazard
Always use braking resistors that are equipped with a thermal overload relay contact, and utilize this contact to switch off the drive in case of braking resistor overheat.
When connecting the braking resistors to the drive internal braking transistor, make sure the braking transistor will not be overloaded with the required duty cycle and the selected resistance value. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire from overheating resistors. Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque.
Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections. Applications using a braking option should wire a thermal relay so that the output contactor opens when the thermal relay trips.
Inadequate braking circuit protection could result in death or serious injury by fire from overheating resistors.
320 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| DANGER |
|---|
| Electrical Shock Hazard Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before touching any components. |
| WA RNING |
|---|
| Electrical Shock Hazard Do not operate equipment with covers removed. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual. Do not change wiring, remove covers, connectors or options cards, or attempt to service the drive with power applied to the drive. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Disconnect all power to the drive and check for unsafe voltages before servicing. Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the equipment. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives. Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing and wear eye protection before beginning work on the drive. Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case. Always properly ground the motor-side grounding terminal. Fire Hazard Always use braking resistors that are equipped with a thermal overload relay contact, and utilize this contact to switch off the drive in case of braking resistor overheat. When connecting the braking resistors to the drive internal braking transistor, make sure the braking transistor will not be overloaded with the required duty cycle and the selected resistance value. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire from overheating resistors. Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque. Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections. Applications using a braking option should wire a thermal relay so that the output contactor opens when the thermal relay trips. Inadequate braking circuit protection could result in death or serious injury by fire from overheating resistors. |
Source page
Page 321
8.1 Section Safety
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 321 & seciveD larehpireP snoitpO SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 321 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 WA RNING Confirm an actual motor overload condition is not present prior to increasing the thermal oL trip detection setting. Check local electrical codes before making adjustments to motor thermal overload settings. Sudden Movement Hazard Install a properly controlled contactor on the input-side of the drive for applications where power should be removed from the drive during a fault condition. Improper equipment sequencing could result in death or serious injury. NOTICE Equipment Hazard Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage. Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive. Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry. Do not connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage. Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive. Insulate shields with heat shrink tubing or tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment. Improper wiring practices could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to short circuit. Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals. Improper application of peripheral devices could result in drive performance degradation due to improper power supply. Only connect recommended devices to the drives braking transistor terminals. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking circuit. Carefully review instruction manual TOBP C720600 0 when connecting a braking option to the drive. Never use a magnet contactor on the input side of the drive frequently to start and stop the motor. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. Properly integrate auxiliary contacts into the control logic circuit to avoid unnecessary fault displays caused by contactors or output switches placed between drive and motor. Improper installation of input and output contactors could result in damage to the drive. Improper application of devices on drive output circuits can damage the drive Do not connect unapproved LC or RC interference suppression filters, capacitors, ground fault circuits, or overvoltage protection devices to the drive. Improper application of peripheral devices could result in malfunction of drive due to electrical interference. 8 Follow manufacturer recommendations when installing electrical devices near the drive and take precautions to shield the drive from electrical interference. Properly integrate auxiliary contacts into the control logic circuit to avoid unnecessary fault displays caused by contactors or output switches placed between drive and motor. Improper installation of input and output contactors could result in damage to the drive.
| WA RNING |
|---|
| Confirm an actual motor overload condition is not present prior to increasing the thermal oL trip detection setting. Check local electrical codes before making adjustments to motor thermal overload settings. Sudden Movement Hazard Install a properly controlled contactor on the input-side of the drive for applications where power should be removed from the drive during a fault condition. Improper equipment sequencing could result in death or serious injury. |
| NOTICE |
|---|
| Equipment Hazard Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage. Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive. Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry. Do not connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage. Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive. Insulate shields with heat shrink tubing or tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment. Improper wiring practices could result in drive or equipment malfunction due to short circuit. Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals. Improper application of peripheral devices could result in drive performance degradation due to improper power supply. Only connect recommended devices to the drives braking transistor terminals. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking circuit. Carefully review instruction manual TOBPC7206000 when connecting a braking option to the drive. Never use a magnet contactor on the input side of the drive frequently to start and stop the motor. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. Properly integrate auxiliary contacts into the control logic circuit to avoid unnecessary fault displays caused by contactors or output switches placed between drive and motor. Improper installation of input and output contactors could result in damage to the drive. Improper application of devices on drive output circuits can damage the drive Do not connect unapproved LC or RC interference suppression filters, capacitors, ground fault circuits, or overvoltage protection devices to the drive. Improper application of peripheral devices could result in malfunction of drive due to electrical interference. Follow manufacturer recommendations when installing electrical devices near the drive and take precautions to shield the drive from electrical interference. Properly integrate auxiliary contacts into the control logic circuit to avoid unnecessary fault displays caused by contactors or output switches placed between drive and motor. Improper installation of input and output contactors could result in damage to the drive. |
Source page
Page 322
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 322 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
8.2 Drive Options and Peripheral Devices
8.2 Drive Options and Peripheral Devices
The following table of peripheral devices lists the names of the various accessories and options available for Yaskawa drives. Contact Yaskawa or your Yaskawa agent to order these peripheral devices.
• Peripheral Device Selection: Refer to the Yaskawa catalog for selection and part numbers. • Peripheral Device Installation: Refer to the corresponding option manual for installation instructions. Table 8.1 Available Peripheral Devices Option Model Number Description Power Options Improves the power factor by suppressing harmonic distortion from the power DC Reactor - supply. Protects the drive when operating from a large power supply and improves the AC Reactor - power factor by suppressing harmonic distortion. Highly recommended for power supplies that exceed 600 kVA. Braking Unit CDBR Series External braking transistor Input / Output Option Cards Provides extra multi-function analog output terminals. Analog Monitor AO-A3 Output channels: 2 Output voltage: -10 to 10 V, 11 bit (signed) Used to set the speed reference by digital inputs Input channels: 18 (including SET signal and SIGN signal) Digital Input DI-A3 Input signal type: BCD 16 bit (4 digit), 12 bit (3 digit), 8 bit (2 digit) Input signal: 24 Vdc, 8 mA Provides extra insulated multi-function digital outputs. Digital Output DO-A3 Photocoupler relays: 6 (48 V, up to 50 mA) Contact relays: 2 (250 Vac/up to 1 A, 30 Vdc/up to 1 A) Motor Speed Feedback Option Cards For speed feedback input by connecting a motor encoder Input: 3 track (can be used with one or two tracks), for HTL encoder connection, Complementary Signal Encoder PG-B3 50 kHz max Output: 3 track, open collector Encoder power supply: 12 V, max current 200 mA For speed feedback input by connecting a motor encoder Input: 3 track (can be used with one or two tracks), line driver, 300 kHz max Line Driver Encoder PG-X3 Output: 3 track, line driver Encoder power supply: 5 V or 12 V, max current 200 mA Encoder type: EnDat 2.1/01, EnDat 2.2/01, EnDat 2.2/22 (HEIDENHAIN) and HIPERPACE (SICK STEGMANN) (Software version:7016 or later) Maximum input frequency: 50 kHz EnDat or HIPERFACE Encoder PG-F3 Pulse monitor: Matches RS-422 level Output voltage: 5 V ±5%, 8 V ±10% Maximum output current: 200 mA Wiring length: 20 m max. for the encoder, 30 m max. for the pulse monitor Encoder type: ERN1387 (HEIDENHAIN) Maximum input frequency: 50 kHz Pulse monitor: Matches RS-422 level ERN1387 Encoder PG-E3 Output voltage: 5 V ±5% Maximum output current: 200 mA Wiring length: 20 m max. for the encoder, 30 m max. for the pulse monitor Communication Options Cards CANopen SI-S3 Connects to a CANopen network Interface Options LED Operator JVOP-182 5-digits LED operator; max. cable length for remote usage: 3 m Extension cable (1 m or 3 m) to connect the digital operator for remote operation Remote Operator Cable WV001/WV003 RJ-45, 8 pin straight through, UTP CAT5e cable Allows the user to copy and verify parameter settings between drives. Can also be USB Copy Unit JVOP-181 used as an adapter to connect the drive to the USB port on a PC. Mechanical Options NEMA 1 Kit EZZ021136 Parts to make the drive conform to IP20/NEMA 1, UL Type 1 enclosure requirements Installation Support Set A EZZ020642A For installing the digital operator keypad on the outside of an enclosure panel that Installation Support Set B EZZ020642B houses the drive. Also refer to Digital Operator Remote Installation on page40. Others 200 V class: PS-A10LB 24 V Power Supply 400 V class: PS-A10HB Option to supply the drive controller with 24 Vdc power during main power loss PC Software Tools DriveWizard Plus Contact Yaskawa PC tool for drive setup and parameter management 322 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Option | Model Number | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Power Options | ||
| DC Reactor | - | Improves the power factor by suppressing harmonic distortion from the power supply. |
| AC Reactor | - | Protects the drive when operating from a large power supply and improves the power factor by suppressing harmonic distortion. Highly recommended for power supplies that exceed 600 kVA. |
| Braking Unit | CDBR Series | External braking transistor |
| Input / Output Option Cards | ||
| Analog Monitor | AO-A3 | Provides extra multi-function analog output terminals. Output channels: 2 Output voltage: -10 to 10 V, 11 bit (signed) |
| Digital Input | DI-A3 | Used to set the speed reference by digital inputs Input channels: 18 (including SET signal and SIGN signal) Input signal type: BCD 16 bit (4 digit), 12 bit (3 digit), 8 bit (2 digit) Input signal: 24 Vdc, 8 mA |
| Digital Output | DO-A3 | Provides extra insulated multi-function digital outputs. Photocoupler relays: 6 (48 V, up to 50 mA) Contact relays: 2 (250 Vac/up to 1 A, 30 Vdc/up to 1 A) |
| Motor Speed Feedback Option Cards | ||
| Complementary Signal Encoder | PG-B3 | For speed feedback input by connecting a motor encoder Input: 3 track (can be used with one or two tracks), for HTL encoder connection, 50 kHz max Output: 3 track, open collector Encoder power supply: 12 V, max current 200 mA |
| Line Driver Encoder | PG-X3 | For speed feedback input by connecting a motor encoder Input: 3 track (can be used with one or two tracks), line driver, 300 kHz max Output: 3 track, line driver Encoder power supply: 5 V or 12 V, max current 200 mA |
| EnDat or HIPERFACE Encoder | PG-F3 | Encoder type: EnDat 2.1/01, EnDat 2.2/01, EnDat 2.2/22 (HEIDENHAIN) and HIPERPACE (SICK STEGMANN) (Software version:7016 or later) Maximum input frequency: 50 kHz Pulse monitor: Matches RS-422 level Output voltage: 5 V ±5%, 8 V ±10% Maximum output current: 200 mA Wiring length: 20 m max. for the encoder, 30 m max. for the pulse monitor |
| ERN1387 Encoder | PG-E3 | Encoder type: ERN1387 (HEIDENHAIN) Maximum input frequency: 50 kHz Pulse monitor: Matches RS-422 level Output voltage: 5 V ±5% Maximum output current: 200 mA Wiring length: 20 m max. for the encoder, 30 m max. for the pulse monitor |
| Communication Options Cards | ||
| CANopen | SI-S3 | Connects to a CANopen network |
| Interface Options | ||
| LED Operator | JVOP-182 | 5-digits LED operator; max. cable length for remote usage: 3 m |
| Remote Operator Cable | WV001/WV003 | Extension cable (1 m or 3 m) to connect the digital operator for remote operation RJ-45, 8 pin straight through, UTP CAT5e cable |
| USB Copy Unit | JVOP-181 | Allows the user to copy and verify parameter settings between drives. Can also be used as an adapter to connect the drive to the USB port on a PC. |
| Mechanical Options | ||
| NEMA 1 Kit | EZZ021136 | Parts to make the drive conform to IP20/NEMA 1, UL Type 1 enclosure requirements |
| Installation Support Set A | EZZ020642A | For installing the digital operator keypad on the outside of an enclosure panel that houses the drive. Also refer to Digital Operator Remote Installation on page40. |
| Installation Support Set B | EZZ020642B | |
| Others | ||
| 24 V Power Supply | 200 V class: PS-A10LB 400 V class: PS-A10HB | Option to supply the drive controller with 24 Vdc power during main power loss |
| PC Software Tools | ||
| DriveWizard Plus | Contact Yaskawa | PC tool for drive setup and parameter management |
Source page
Page 323
8.3 Connecting Peripheral Devices
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 323 & seciveD larehpireP snoitpO 8.3 Connecting Peripheral Devices Figure 8.1 illustrates how to configure the drive and motor to operate with various peripheral devices. Refer to the specific manual for the devices shown below for more detailed installation instructions. Figure8.1 ypoC yfireV daeR Figure 8.1 Connecting Peripheral Devices <1> Terminals +1 and +2 for connecting a DC choke are available only in units CIMR-L20008 to 20075 and CIMR-L40005 to 40039. Drives above have built in DC chokes. <2> Terminals B1 and B2 for connecting a braking resistor are available only in units CIMR-L20008 to 20115 and CIMR-L40005 to 40060. <3> When using an external braking chopper in drives from CIMR-L20008 to 20115 and CIMR-L40005 to 40060 connect the chopper to drive terminals B1 and -. When using larger drives connect the chopper to terminals +3 and -. <4> To obtain the driver and software of USB Copy Unit, CopyUnitManager and DriveWizardPlus, access the following site: Europe: http://www.yaskawa.eu.com 8 tinU ypoC BSU RREMOC KCOL AWAKSAY181-POVJ SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 323 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Engineering Software Tools DriveWi<za4r>d LED Operator/LCD Operator Power Supply USB Cable < U 4 S > B Copy unit (Type-AB) Molded Case Circuit Breaker PC (MCCB) USB Cable and/or (Type-AB, sold separately) G C (G i r r o F c u C u n i I t ) d I n F te a r u r l u t pter Drive B < 1 2> B2 +3(B < 1 3 ) > − Magnetic Contactor (MC) +2 +1 DC Reactor <1> AC Reactor Thermal Relay Braking Resistor Unit Braking Unit Zero-phase Reactor Fuse Ground I N n o p i u s t e S F id ilt e er 2 p 4 o w V e c r o s n u t p ro p l ly R/L1S/L2T/L3 U/T1V/T2W/T3 unit Output Side Noise Filter Motor M Co a n g t n a e c t t i o c r Z R e e r a o c - t p o h r ase YEG (switches to line power) Ground
Source page
Page 324
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 324 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
8.4 Option Card Installation
8.4 Option Card Installation
This section provides instructions on installing the option cards listed in Table 8.2.
Prior to Installing the Option
Prior to installing the option, wire the drive, make the necessary connections to the drive terminals, and verify that the drive functions normally. Refer to the Table 8.2 for information on wiring and connecting the drive. Table 8.2 below lists the number of option cards that can be connected to the drive and the drive connectors for connecting those option cards.
Table 8.2 Option Card Installation Option Card Connector Number of Cards Possible PG-B3, PG-X3 CN5-C 2<1> PG-F3<2>, PG-E3 CN5-C 1 DO-A3, AO-A3 CN5-A, B, C 1 SI-S3, DI-A3<3> CN5-A 1 <1> If two PG option cards are connected, use both CN5-B and CN5-C. If only one PG option card is connected to the drive, use the CN5-C connector. <2> These option cards are not available for the application with Motor 2 Selection. <3> When DI-A3 is to be used as monitors, the card can be connected to any of CN5-A, CN5-B or CN5-C. The input status of DI-A3 can then be viewed using U1-17. Figure 8.2 shows an exploded view of the drive with the option and related components for reference. Figure8.2 L A K B C J D I E
F H G YEG A - Insertion point for CN5 G - Removable tabs for wire routing B - Option card H - Ground wire C - Included screws I - Drive grounding terminal (FE) D - Front cover J - Connector CN5-A E - Digital operator K - Connector CN5-B F - Terminal cover L - Connector CN5-C Figure 8.2 Installing an Option Card
324 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Option Card | Connector | Number of Cards Possible |
|---|---|---|
| PG-B3, PG-X3 | CN5-C | 2<1> |
| PG-F3<2>, PG-E3 | CN5-C | 1 |
| DO-A3, AO-A3 | CN5-A, B, C | 1 |
| SI-S3, DI-A3<3> | CN5-A | 1 |
Source page
Page 325
8.4 Option Card Installation
Source page
Page 326
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 326 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
8.4 Option Card Installation
3. Connect one end of the ground wire (H) to the ground terminal (I) using one of the remaining screws (C). Connect the other end of the ground wire (H) to the remaining ground terminal and installation hole on the option (B) using the last remaining provided screw (C). Figure8.5 YEG B
326 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 327
8.4 Option Card Installation
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 327 & seciveD larehpireP snoitpO SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 327 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 5. For the PG-B3 and PG-X3 Option, wire the motor PG encoder to the terminal block. Refer to Figure 8.8 and Figure 8.12 for wiring instructions. Refer to Terminal Functions on page 328 for a detailed description of the option terminal functions. Connecting PG-B3 Option Parameter Settings and Connections for Different Encoder Types • Connecting a Single-Pulse Encoder When using a single-pulse encoder in V/f with PG control mode, connect the pulse output from the PG to the option and set drive parameter F1-21 to 0. • Connecting a Two-Pulse Encoder When using a two-pulse encoder, connect the A and B pulse outputs on the PG to the option and set F1-21 to 1. When using a two-pulse encoder in Closed Loop Vector control mode, connect pulse outputs A and B from the encoder to the corresponding terminals on the option. • Connecting a Two-Pulse Encoder with Z Marker Pulse When using a two-pulse encoder with Z marker pulse, connect the A, B, and Z pulse outputs to the corresponding terminals on the option. Control Method V/f with PG Closed Loop Vector No. of Encoders 1 (CN5-C) 2 (CN5-B) 1 (CN5-C) 2 (CN5-B) Single Pulse (A) F1-21 = 0 F1-37 = 0 N/A N/A Two Pulse (AB Quadrature) F1-21 = 1 F1-37 = 1 No setting required No setting required Two Pulse with Marker (ABZ) F1-21 = 1 F1-37 = 1 No setting required No setting required Connection Diagram of PG-B3 Refer to Table 8.3 for a detailed description of the option board terminal functions. Refer to Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques on page 329 for information on making cables. R/L1 U/T1 S/L2 V/T2 M T/L3 W/T3 YASKAWA TB1 Drive PG(cid:15)B3 A+ 3 Option A(cid:15) 4 5 B+ B(cid:15) 6 PG Z+ Z(cid:15) SD NC FE E TB2 1 IP IG 2 CN5 A IG O A pulse monitor signal BO B pulse monitor signal IG FE Z IG O Z pulse monitor signal Ground wire Twisted-pair shielded line B3 Main circuit terminal Control circuit terminal 8 <1> Ground the shield on the PG side and the drive side. If noise problems arise in the PG signal, remove the shield ground from one end of the signal line or remove the shield ground connection on both ends. Figure 8.8 PG-B3 Option and Encoder Connection Diagram Note: The PG-B3 Option reads a maximum input frequency from the PG encoder of 50 kHz. Be sure to select an PG encoder with an output pulse frequency of maximum 50 kHz when operating at maximum speed.
| Control Method | V/f with PG | Column | Closed Loop Vector | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| No. of Encoders | 1 (CN5-C) | 2 (CN5-B) | 1 (CN5-C) | 2 (CN5-B) |
| Single Pulse (A) | F1-21 = 0 | F1-37 = 0 | N/A | N/A |
| Two Pulse (AB Quadrature) | F1-21 = 1 | F1-37 = 1 | No setting required | No setting required |
| Two Pulse with Marker (ABZ) | F1-21 = 1 | F1-37 = 1 | No setting required | No setting required |
| R/L1 U/T1 S/L2 V/T2 T/L3 W/T3 YASKAWA Drive | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN5 | |||
| FE |
| 5 | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|
| 6 |
Source page
Page 328
8.4 Option Card Installation
Take the following steps to prevent erroneous operation caused by noise interference:
• Use shielded wire for the PG encoder signal lines. • Limit the length of all motor output power cables to less than 100 m. Limit the length of open-collector output lines to less than 50 m. • Use separate conduit or cable tray dividers to separate option control wiring, main circuit input power wiring, and motor output power cables. Interface Circuit • Complementary Output Figure8.8 PG-B3 12 V IP Vcc PG Encoder 330 Ω A+,B+,Z+ A,B,Z 470 Ω A-,B-,Z- 0 V 330 Ω IG 0 V AO,BO,ZO Monitor Signals IG Figure 8.9 Complementary Outputs for the Interface Circuit • Open-Collector Outputs
Figure8.9 PG(cid:15)B3 12 V IP Vcc PG Encoder 330 Ω A+,B+,Z+ 470 Ω A(cid:15),B(cid:15),Z(cid:15) A,B,Z 330 Ω IG 0 V AO,BO,ZO Monitor Signals IG Figure 8.10 Open-Collector Outputs for the Interface Circuit Terminal Functions Table 8.3 Option Terminal Functions Terminal Block Terminal Function Description A+ A+ pulse signal input A- A- pulse signal input • Pulse signal inputs from the PG. B+ B+ pulse signal input • Signal inputs from complementary and open-collector outputs • Signal level TB1 B- B- pulse signal input H level: 8 to 12 V Z+ Z+ pulse signal input L level: 2.0 V or less Z- Z- pulse signal input SD NC pin (open) For use when cables shields should not be grounded FE Ground Used for grounding shielded lines IP PG power supply • Output voltage: 12.0 V ± 5% IG PG power supply common • Max output current: 200 mA<1> AO A pulse monitor signal • Outputs the monitor signal for the A, B, and Z pulses from the PG speed TB2 BO B pulse monitor signal control card ZO Z pulse monitor signal • For open collector outputs from the option • Max voltage: 24 V IG Monitor signal common • Max current: 30 mA <1> A separate UL Listed class 2 power supply is necessary when the PG requires more than 200 mA to operate.
328 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual A+A-B+B-Z+Z- SDFE IP IG AOIGBOIGZOIG SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 328 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 TB1 TB2
| Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | 0 V 0 V |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| AO,BO,ZO | |||||
| IG |
| Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | 470 Ω A(cid:15),B(cid:15),Z(cid:15) | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| AO,BO,ZO | |||||||
| IG |
| Column | Column | Terminal Block | Terminal | Function | Description |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| TB1 A+ A- IP B+ IG B- Z+ Z- AO IGBO SDFE IG ZO IG TB2 | A+ | A+ pulse signal input | • Pulse signal inputs from the PG. • Signal inputs from complementary and open-collector outputs • Signal level H level: 8 to 12 V L level: 2.0 V or less | ||
| A- | A- pulse signal input | ||||
| TB1 | B+ | B+ pulse signal input | |||
| B- | B- pulse signal input | ||||
| Z+ Z- | Z+ pulse signal input Z- pulse signal input | ||||
| SD | NC pin (open) | For use when cables shields should not be grounded | |||
| FE IP IG | Ground PG power supply PG power supply common | Used for grounding shielded lines • Output voltage: 12.0 V ± 5% • Max output current: 200 mA<1> | |||
| TB2 | AO BO ZO IG | A pulse monitor signal B pulse monitor signal Z pulse monitor signal Monitor signal common | • Outputs the monitor signal for the A, B, and Z pulses from the PG speed control card • For open collector outputs from the option • Max voltage: 24 V • Max current: 30 mA |
| Column | Column | A+ | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| A- B | IP I | |||||
| + B- | G | |||||
| Z+ Z | A | |||||
| - SDFE | O IGBO IG |
Source page
Page 329
8.4 Option Card Installation
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 329 & seciveD larehpireP snoitpO SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 329 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques Wire gauge and torque specifications are listed in Table 8.4. For simpler and more reliable wiring, use crimp ferrules on the wire ends. Refer to the option manuals for the wire size and torque specifications of other options. Table 8.4 Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques Terminal Signal S S c i r z e e w Tighte ( n l N b in . i m g n . T ) orque Applica m bl m e 2 Ga B ug a e re s Cabl R e ecom m m m . 2 Gauge Applica m bl m e 2 G C a r u im g p es Termi R n e a c ls om m m m . 2 Gauge Wire Type A+, A-, B+, Stranded wire: B-, Z+, Z-, 0.25 to 1.0 Shielded twisted pair, etc. FE, IP, IG M2 0.22 to 0.25 0.75 (24 to 17 AWG) 0.5 0.25 to 0.5 (1.95 to 2.21) (18 AWG) Solid wire: (20 AWG) (24 to 20 AWG) AO, IG, BO, 0.25 to 1.5 Shielded cable, IG, ZO, IG (24 to 16 AWG) etc. Crimp Terminals Yaskawa recommends using CRIMPFOX 6 by Phoenix Contact or equivalent crimp terminals with the specifications listed in Table 8.5 for wiring to ensure proper connections. Note: Properly trim wire ends so loose wire ends do not extend from the crimp terminals. Table 8.5 Crimp Terminal Sizes - Wire m G m a 2 uge Phoenix Contact Model m L m m d m 1 m d m 2 AI 0.25 - 6YE 0.25 (24 AWG) AI 0.25 - 6BU 10.5 0.8 2 d1 6 mm d2 0.34 (22 AWG) AI 0.34 - 6TQ 10.5 0.8 2 L 0.5 (20 AWG) AI 0.5 - 6WH 12 1.1 2.5 PG Encoder Cables for PG-B3 Option Yaskawa recommends using a LMA-B-S185Y (complementary output) for cables running between the PG-B3 Option and the PG as show in Figure 8.11. For instructions on wiring the terminal block, refer to Table 8.3. Figure8.10 TB1 TB2 A+ A- B+ B- Z+ Z- SD FE IP IG AO IG BO IG ZO IG 3 4 5 6 E 1 2 TA1 A G PG encoder side B H F B3 C E D L (Pin) Figure 8.11 Wiring PG Encoder Cable Table 8.6 Connecting the PG Encoder Cable Specification PG Encoder Cable Option Terminal Wire Color Pin IP 1 Blue C IG 2 White H A+ 3 Yellow B 8 A- 4 White G B+ 5 Green A B- 6 White F FE E N/A (shield) D Table 8.7 PG Encoder Cable Types Length Type Length Type 10 m (32 ft.) W5010 50 m (164 ft.) W5050 30 m (98 ft.) W5030 100 m (328 ft.) W5100
| Terminal Signal | Screw Size | Tightening Torq Nm (lb.in.) | ue Bare Cable Applicable Gauges Recomm. Gauge mm2 mm2 | Column | Crimp Terminals | Column | Wire Type |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Recomm. Gauge mm2 | Applicable Gauges mm2 | Recomm. Gauge mm2 | |||||
| A+, A-, B+, B-, Z+, Z-, FE, IP, IG | M2 | 0.22 to 0.25 (1.95 to 2.21) | 0.75 (18 AWG) | Stranded wire: 0.25 to 1.0 (24 to 17 AWG) Solid wire: 0.25 to 1.5 (24 to 16 AWG) | 0.5 (20 AWG) | 0.25 to 0.5 (24 to 20 AWG) | Shielded twisted pair, etc. |
| AO, IG, BO, IG, ZO, IG | Shielded cable, etc. |
| - | Wire Gauge mm2 | Phoenix Contact Model | L mm | d1 mm | d2 mm |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| d1 6 mm d2 L | 0.25 (24 AWG) | AI 0.25 - 6YE AI 0.25 - 6BU | 10.5 | 0.8 | 2 |
| 0.34 (22 AWG) | AI 0.34 - 6TQ | 10.5 | 0.8 | 2 | |
| 0.5 (20 AWG) | AI 0.5 - 6WH | 12 | 1.1 | 2.5 |
| Option Terminal | PG Encoder Cable | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| Wire | Color | Pin | |
| IP | 1 | Blue | C |
| IG | 2 | White | H |
| A+ | 3 | Yellow | B |
| A- | 4 | White | G |
| B+ | 5 | Green | A |
| B- | 6 | White | F |
| FE | E | N/A (shield) | D |
| Length | Type | Length | Type |
|---|---|---|---|
| 10 m (32 ft.) | W5010 | 50 m (164 ft.) | W5050 |
| 30 m (98 ft.) | W5030 | 100 m (328 ft.) | W5100 |
Source page
Page 330
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 330 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
8.4 Option Card Installation
Connecting PG-X3 Option Parameter Settings and Connections for Different Encoder Types • Connecting a Single-Pulse Encoder When using a single-pulse encoder in V/f with PG control mode, connect the pulse output from the PG to the option and set drive parameter F1-21 to 0. • Connecting a Two-Pulse Encoder When using a two-pulse encoder, connect the A and B pulse outputs on the PG to the option and set F1-21 to 1. When using a two-pulse encoder in Closed Loop Vector control mode, connect pulse outputs A and B from the encoder to the corresponding terminals on the option. • Connecting a Two-Pulse Encoder with Z Marker Pulse When using a two-pulse encoder with Z marker pulse, connect the A, B, and Z pulse outputs to the corresponding terminals on the option. When using a two-pulse encoder in CLV/PM control mode, connect pulse outputs A and B from the encoder to the corresponding terminals on the option.
Control Method V/f with PG Closed Loop Vector No. of Encoders 1 (CN5-C) 2 (CN5-B) 1 (CN5-C) 2 (CN5-B) Single Pulse (A) F1-21 = 0 F1-37 = 0 N/A N/A Two Pulse (AB Quadrature) F1-21 = 1 F1-37 = 1 No setting required No setting required Two Pulse with Marker (ABZ) F1-21 = 1 F1-37 = 1 No setting required No setting required Connection Diagram of PG-X3 Refer to Table 8.8 for a detailed description of the option board terminal functions.
The positioning of jumper CN3 selects the PG encoder power supply voltage (5.5 V or 12 V). Select the voltage level for the PG encoder connected to the option and motor. If the wrong voltage is selected, the PG encoder may not operate properly or may become damaged as a result. Refer to Setting the PG Encoder Power Supply Voltage on page 331 for details.
R/L1 U/T1 S/L2 V/T2 M T/L3 W/T3 YASKAWA TB1 Drive PG(cid:15)X3 A+ Option A(cid:15) B+ PG B(cid:15) Z+ Z(cid:15) SD NC FE IP12 CN3 TB2 IP5 IP IG IG SG CN5-B a+ A pulse monitor signal or a(cid:15) CN5-C b+ B pulse monitor signal b(cid:15) z+ Z pulse monitor signal FE z(cid:15) Ground wire twisted-pair shielded line X3 main circuit terminal control circuit terminal <1> Ground the shield on the PG side and the drive side. If noise problems arise in the PG signal, remove the shield ground from one end of the signal line or remove the shield ground connection on both ends. Figure 8.12 PG-X3 Option and PG Encoder Connection Diagram Note: The PG-X3 Option reads a maximum input frequency from the PG of 300 kHz. Be sure to select a PG with an output pulse frequency of maximum 300 kHz when operating at maximum speed. 330 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Control Method | V/f with PG | Column | Closed Loop Vector | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| No. of Encoders | 1 (CN5-C) | 2 (CN5-B) | 1 (CN5-C) | 2 (CN5-B) |
| Single Pulse (A) | F1-21 = 0 | F1-37 = 0 | N/A | N/A |
| Two Pulse (AB Quadrature) | F1-21 = 1 | F1-37 = 1 | No setting required | No setting required |
| Two Pulse with Marker (ABZ) | F1-21 = 1 | F1-37 = 1 | No setting required | No setting required |
| R/L1 U/T1 S/L2 V/T2 T/L3 W/T3 YASKAWA Drive | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN5-B or CN5-C | |||
| FE |
| TB2 | Column |
|---|---|
| IP |
Source page
Page 331
8.4 Option Card Installation
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 331 & seciveD larehpireP snoitpO Take the following steps to prevent erroneous operation caused by noise interference: • Use shielded wire for the PG encoder signal lines. • Use separate conduit or cable tray dividers to separate option control wiring, main circuit input power wiring, and motor output power cables. Interface Circuit Figure8.11 PG(cid:15)X3 PG Encoder A+,B+,Z+ A,B,Z 600 Ω A(cid:15),B(cid:15),Z(cid:15) 26LS32 level a+,b+,z+ A,B,Z 26LS31 level a(cid:15),b(cid:15),z(cid:15) Monitor Signals 26LS31 level SG Figure 8.13 Interface Circuit (PG-X3) Terminal Functions Table 8.8 Option Terminal Functions Terminal Block Terminal Function Description A+ A+ pulse signal input A- A- pulse signal input B+ B+ pulse signal input • Inputs for the A channel, B channel, and Z pulses from the PG encoder B- B- pulse signal input • Signal level matches RS-422 TB1 Z+ Z+ pulse signal input Z- Z- pulse signal input Open connection connectors for use when cable shields should not be SD NC pin (open) grounded FE Ground Used as the shield ground termination point. IP PG encoder power supply • Output voltage: 12.0 V ± 5% or 5.5 V ± 5% IG PG encoder power supply common • Max. output current: 200 mA<1> SG Monitor signal common a+ A+ pulse monitor signal TB2 a- A- pulse monitor signal • Output signal for monitoring A channel, B channel, and Z pulses from the b+ B+ pulse monitor signal PG encoder b- B- pulse monitor signal • Signal level matches RS-422 z+ Z+ pulse monitor signal z- Z- pulse monitor signal <1> A separate UL Listed class 2 power supply is necessary when the PG requires more than 200 mA to operate. Setting the PG Encoder Power Supply Voltage For the PG-X3 Option, set the voltage for the PG encoder power supply using jumper CN3 located on the option. NOTICE: The positioning of jumper CN3 selects the PG encoder power supply voltage (5.5 V or 12 V). Select the voltage level for the PG encoder connected to the option and motor. If the wrong voltage is selected, the PG encoder may not operate properly or may become damaged as a result. Table 8.9 Setting the PG Encoder Power Supply Voltage (IP) with Jumper CN3 Voltage Level 5.5 V ± 5% (default) 12.0 V ± 5% Jumper CN3 8 A+A−B+B−Z+Z− SDFE IPIG SGa+a−b+b−z+z− SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 331 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 TB1 TB2 5.5 V 12 V 5.5 V 12 V CN3 CN3
| Terminal Block | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Terminal | Function | Description |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| TB1 A+A−B+B−Z+Z− IPIG SGa+ a− SDFE b+ b− z+ z− TB2 | A+ | A+ pulse signal input | • Inputs for the A channel, B channel, and Z pulses from the PG encoder • Signal level matches RS-422 | |||||
| A- | A- pulse signal input | |||||||
| B+ B- | B+ pulse signal input B- pulse signal input | |||||||
| IPIG | TB1 | Z+ Z- | Z+ pulse signal input Z- pulse signal input | |||||
| S | SD | NC pin (open) | Open connection connectors for use when cable shields should not be grounded | |||||
| Ga+ a | FE IP | Ground PG encoder power supply | Used as the shield ground termination point. • Output voltage: 12.0 V ± 5% or 5.5 V ± 5% | |||||
| − b+ b− z | IG SG a+ | PG encoder power supply common Monitor signal common A+ pulse monitor signal | • Max. output current: 200 mA<1> | |||||
| TB2 | a- b+ | A- pulse monitor signal B+ pulse monitor signal | • Output signal for monitoring A channel, B channel, and Z pulses from the PG encoder • Signal level matches RS-422 | |||||
| b- | B- pulse monitor signal | |||||||
| z+ | Z+ pulse monitor signal | |||||||
| z- | Z- pulse monitor signal |
| Column | A−B+ |
|---|---|
| B−Z | |
| +Z− |
| Voltage Level | 5.5 V ± 5% (default) | 12.0 V ± 5% |
|---|---|---|
| Jumper CN3 | 5.5 V 12 V CN3 | 5.5 V 12 V CN3 |
Source page
Page 332
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 332 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
8.4 Option Card Installation
Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques
Wire gauge and torque specifications are listed in Table 8.10. For simpler and more reliable wiring, use crimp ferrules on the wire ends. Refer to the option manuals for the wire size and torque specifications of other options. Table 8.10 Wire Gauges and Tightening Torques
Terminal Signal S S c i r z e e w Tighte ( n l N b in . i m g n . T ) orque Applica m bl m e 2 Ga B ug a e re s Cabl R e ecom m m m . 2 Gauge Applica m bl m e 2 G C a r u im g p es Termi R n e a c ls om m m m . 2 Gauge Wire Type
A+, A-, B+, Stranded wire: Shielded twisted B-, Z+, Z-, 0.25 to 1.0 SD, FE, IP, IG 0.22 to 0.25 0.75 (24 to 17 AWG) 0.5 0.25 to 0.5 pair, etc. M2 (1.95 to 2.21) (18 AWG) Solid wire: (20 AWG) (24 to 20 AWG) a+, a-, b+, 0.25 to 1.5 Shielded cable, b-, z+, z-, SG (24 to 16 AWG) etc. Crimp Terminals Yaskawa recommends using CRIMPFOX 6 by Phoenix Contact or equivalent crimp terminals with the specifications listed in Table 8.11 for wiring to ensure proper connections. Note: Properly trim wire ends so loose wire ends do not extend from the crimp terminals. Table 8.11 Crimp Terminal Sizes Wire m G m a 2 uge Phoenix Contact Model m L m m d m 1 m d m 2 0.25 (24 AWG) AI 0.25 - 6YE 10.5 0.8 2 AI 0.25 - 6BU d1 6 mm d2 0.34 (22 AWG) AI 0.34 - 6TQ 10.5 0.8 2 L 0.5 (20 AWG) AI 0.5 - 6WH 12 1.1 2.5 6. Route the option wiring. Depending on the drive model, some drives may require routing the wiring through the side of the front cover to the outside. For drive models CIMR-L20008 through 20033 and 40005 through 40018, cut out the perforated openings on the left side of the drive front cover as shown in Figure 8.14-A and leave no sharp edges to damage wiring. Route the wiring inside the enclosure as shown in Figure 8.14-B for drive models CIMR-L20047 through 20415 and 40024 through 40216 that do not require routing through the front cover. Figure8.12
B A
A - Route wires through the openings B - Use the open space provided provided on the left side of the inside the drive to route option front cover. <1> wiring. (CIMR-L20008 through 20033 (CIMR-L20047 through 20415 and 40005 through 40018) and 40024 through 40216) <1> The drive will not meet IP20/NEMA 1, UL Type 1 requirements if wiring is exposed outside the enclosure. Figure 8.14 Wire Routing Examples
332 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Terminal Signal | Screw Size | Tightening Torque Nm (lb.in.) | Bare Cable | Column | Crimp Terminals | Column | Wire Type |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Applicable Gauges mm2 | Recomm. Gauge Applic mm2 | able Gauges mm2 | Recomm. Gauge mm2 | ||||
| A+, A-, B+, B-, Z+, Z-, SD, FE, IP, IG | M2 | 0.22 to 0.25 (1.95 to 2.21) | 0.75 (18 AWG) | Stranded wire: 0.25 to 1.0 (24 to 17 AWG) Solid wire: ( 0.25 to 1.5 (24 to 16 AWG) | 0.5 20 AWG) | 0.25 to 0.5 (24 to 20 AWG) | Shielded twisted pair, etc. |
| a+, a-, b+, b-, z+, z-, SG | Shielded cable, etc. |
| Column | Wire Gauge mm2 | L Phoenix Contact Model m | m | d1 mm | d2 mm |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| d1 6 mm d2 L | 0.25 (24 AWG | AI 0.25 - 6YE ) 10 AI 0.25 - 6BU | .5 | 0.8 | 2 |
| 0.34 (22 AWG | ) AI 0.34 - 6TQ 10 | .5 | 0.8 | 2 | |
| 0.5 (20 AWG | ) AI 0.5 - 6WH 1 | 2 | 1.1 | 2.5 |
Source page
Page 333
8.4 Option Card Installation
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 333 & seciveD larehpireP snoitpO SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 333 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 7. Replace and secure the front covers of the drive (D, F) and replace the digital operator (E). Figure8.13 YEG D E F Figure 8.15 Replace the Front Covers and Digital Operator Note: Take proper precautions when wiring the option so that the front covers will easily fit back onto the drive. Make sure cables are not pinched between the front covers and the drive when replacing the covers. 8. For the PG-B3 and PG-X3 Option, set drive parameters A1-02: Control Method Selection on page 153 and F1: PG Speed Control Card on page 363 for proper motor rotation. With a two-pulse or three-pulse PG encoder, the leading pulse determines the motor rotation direction. A PG encoder signal with leading A pulse is considered to be rotating forward (counter-clockwise when viewing rotation from motor load side). Figure8.14 The A pulse leads, followed by the B pulse displaced at 90 degrees A pulse B pulse Time → Figure 8.16 Displacement of A and B Pulses After connecting the PG encoder outputs to the option, apply power to the drive and manually rotate the motor and check the rotation direction by viewing monitor U1-05 on the digital operator. Reverse motor rotation is indicated by a negative value for U1-05; forward motor rotation is indicated by a positive value. If monitor U1-05 indicates that the forward direction is opposite of what is intended, set F1-05 to 1, or reverse the two A pulse wires with the two B pulse wires on option terminal TB1 as shown in Figure 8.17. Figure8.15 B3 A+ A- B+ B- Z+ Z- A+ A- B+ B- Z+ Z- 3 4 5 6 5 6 3 4 Figure 8.17 A Channel and B Channel Wire Switching If switching the wires is inconvenient, set drive parameter F1-05 to 1 to switch the direction of how the option reads pulses from the PG encoder output. Please note that when the drive is initialized using A1-03 =1110, 2220, 3330, the value for F1-05 will reset to factory default and the parameter will need to be adjusted again to switch the direction. 8
Source page
Page 334
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 334 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
8.5 Installing Peripheral Devices
8.5 Installing Peripheral Devices
This section describes the proper steps and precautions to take when installing or connecting various peripheral devices to the drive.
NOTICE: Use a class 2 power supply (UL standard) when connecting to the control terminals. Improper application of peripheral devices could result in drive performance degradation due to improper power supply. Refer to NEC Article 725 Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Remote-Control, Signaling, and Power Limited Circuits for requirements concerning class 2 power supplies. Dynamic Braking Options
A braking resistor or an external braking transistor combined with a braking resistor must be installed in order to dissipate the energy fed back to the drive during regenerative operation. NOTICE: Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the product. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking circuit. Carefully review the braking resistor instruction manual when connecting a braking resistor option to the drive.
Installing a Braking Unit: CDBR Type When using a CDBR braking unit or any other external braking transistor or a regenerative converter, disable the internal braking transistor protection function by setting parameter L8-55 to 0. To install a CDBR type braking unit, connect either the B1 terminal of the drive (CIMR-L20008 through 20115 and 40005 through 40060) or +3 terminal of the drive (units CIMR-L20008 through 20145 and 20415 and 40075 to 40260) to the positive terminal on the braking unit. Then, wire the negative terminals on the drive and braking unit together. Terminal +2 is not used.
Connect the braking resistor to CDBR terminals +0 and -0. Wire the thermal overload relay contact of the CDBR and the braking resistor in series, and connect this signal to a drive digital input. Use this input to trigger a fault in the drive in case a CDBR or braking resistor overload occurs. Disable dynamic braking transistor protection by setting L8-55 = 0.
Note: To install a CDBR type braking unit to the drive with built-in dynamic braking transistor (CIMR-L20008 through 20115 and 40005 through 40060), connect the drive’s B1 terminal to the positive terminal on the braking unit. Next wire the negative terminals on the drive and braking unit together. Terminal B2 is not used.
334 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 335
8.5 Installing Peripheral Devices
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 335 & seciveD larehpireP snoitpO Figure8.16 Braking Unit (CDBR type) Braking Resistor + 3 + + 0 Thermal Overload Drive Trip Contact − − − 0 3 4 YEG Thermal Trip Contact Figure 8.18 Connecting a Braking Unit (CDBR type) and Braking Resistor Unit (CIMR-L20145 to 20415 and L40075 to 40216) Using Braking Units in Parallel When multiple braking units are used, they must be installed with a master-slave configuration with a single braking unit acting as the master. Figure 8.19 illustrates how to wire braking units in parallel. Wire the thermal overload contacts of all CDBRs and all braking resistors in series, then connect this signal to a drive digital input. This input can be used to trigger a fault in the drive in case of overload in any of the CDBRs or braking resistors. Figure8.17 Braking Resistor Braking Resistor Braking Resistor Overheat Contact Overheat Contact Overheat Contact (Thermal Trip Contact) (Thermal Trip Contact) (Thermal Trip Contact) Braking Braking Braking Resistor Resistor Resistor MASTER Drive SLAVE +15 5 1 6 2 Braking Unit 2 Figure 8.19 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel 8 rotceteD leveL SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 335 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 + 3 − − + + 0 − 0 − + + 0 − 0 − + + 0 − 0 MASTER MASTER SLAVE SLAVE 1 5 1 5 6 2 6 2 Braking Unit 1 Braking Unit 3 YEG 3 4 3 4 3 4 Thermal trip contact Thermal trip contact Thermal trip contact
| − + + 0 − 0 MASTER rotceteD leveL SLAVE +15 5 1 6 2 Braking Unit 1 3 4 | Column | + + 0 | − 0 R +15 5 6 | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| MASTE rotceteD leveL SLAVE |
Source page
Page 336
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 336 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
8.5 Installing Peripheral Devices
Installing a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
Install a MCCB for line protection between the power supply and the main circuit power supply input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. This protects the main circuit and devices wired to the main circuit while also providing overload protection. Consider the following when selecting and installing a MCCB:
Residual currents occurring in drive installations can contain AC, DC, and high frequency components that may prevent a normal RCD/RCM from operating as desired. If an RCD/RCM is required in the installation, always use an all-current- sensitive device (Type B according to IEC/EN 60755) to ensure proper ground fault interruption. Leakage currents generated by the drive during normal operation may trip an RCD or RCM even if a ground fault is not present. Factors that influence the leakage current are:
• Size of the AC drive • AC drive carrier frequency • Motor cable type and length • EMI/RFI filter If the RCD/RCM trips spuriously consider changing these items or use an RCD/RCM with a higher trip level.
Note: Choose a RCD/RCM designed specifically for an AC drive. The operation time should be at least 0.1 s with sensitivity amperage of at least 200 mA per drive. The output waveform of the drive may cause an increase in leakage current. This may in turn cause the leakage breaker to malfunction. Increase the sensitivity amperage or lower the carrier frequency to correct the problem.
336 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 337
8.5 Installing Peripheral Devices
Source page
Page 338
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 338 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
8.5 Installing Peripheral Devices
Connecting an AC or DC Reactor
Reactor Placement
When connecting to a power supply transformer with greater than 600 kVA capacity, or when switching a phase advance capacitor, large peak current can flow through the input power supply circuit and damage converter components in the drive. As a preventive measure, install an AC or DC reactor to the input side of the drive. Installing an AC or DC reactor will also help improve the power factor.
Install an AC or DC reactor if a DC drive or another type of thyristor converter is running from the same power system, regardless of the power supply conditions shown in Figure 8.21. Note: A DC reactor is built in to the drive models CIMR-L20085 to 20415 and 40045 to 40216. Figure8.19 4000 Power supply harmonics reactor required Power Supply YEG Capacity (kVA) 600 Reactor unnecessary
0 60 400 Drive Capacity (kVA) Figure 8.21 Installing a Reactor Connecting an AC Reactor
Figure8.20 C D A B U X R/L1 V Y S/L2 Common_ W Z T/L3 TMonly
A - Power supply C - AC reactor B - MCCB D - Drive Figure 8.22 Connecting an AC Reactor Connecting a DC Reactor
A DC reactor can be installed to drive models CIMR-L20008 to 20075 and 40005 to 40039. When installing a DC reactor, remove the jumper between terminals +1 and +2 (terminals are jumpered for shipment). The jumper must be installed if not using a DC reactor. Refer to Figure 8.23 for an example of DC reactor wiring. Figure8.21 C A B R/L1 S/L2 T/L3 +1 +2 Common_ TMonly D
A - Power supply C - Drive B - MCCB D - DC Reactor Figure 8.23 Connecting a DC Reactor
338 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Y S/L2 |
|---|
| Z T/L3 |
Source page
Page 339
8.5 Installing Peripheral Devices
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 339 & seciveD larehpireP snoitpO SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 339 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Connecting a Noise Filter Reducing Radiated, Conducted, and Induced Noise Drives generate noise that can potentially affect surrounding devices like PLCs, etc. • Radiated Noise: Electromagnetic waves noise throughout the radio bandwidth radiated from the drive and cables. • Conducted Noise: Noise generated by the drive and emitted to through the power lines. • Induced Noise: Noise generated by electromagnetic induction can affect control signal lines. Take the following measurements to prevent noise causing malfunction of other drives or devices: • Install all components on a well grounded metal plate. • Keep the motor cable as short as possible. • Use noise filters on the input side of the drive to reduce conducted noise. • Install noise filters on the input and output side of the drive, install the drive in a metal enclosure panel and use a shielded motor cable to reduce radiated noise. • Use shielded motor and control circuit lines and lay control circuit lines at least 30 cm away from power lines in order to prevent malfunction due to induced noise. Figure8.22 A C D E B MCCB R/L1 U/T1 F G S/L2 V/T2 M T/L3 W/T3 H I YEG J A - Metal enclosure F - Shielded motor cable B - Power supply G - Motor C - Input noise filter H - Separate at least 30 cm D - Drive I - Control signal lines E - Output noise filter J - Controller Figure 8.24 Reducing Radio Frequency Noise Input-Side Noise Filter Drive outputs generate noise as a result of high-speed switching. This noise flows from inside the drive back to the power supply, possibly affecting other equipment. Installing a noise filter to the input side of the drive can reduce the amount of noise flowing back into the power supply. This also prevents noise from entering the drive from the power supply. • Use a noise filter specifically designed for AC drives. • Install the noise filter as close as possible to the drive. Figure8.23 B C A MCCB R U R/L1 S V S/L2 T W T/L3 E MCCB 8 YEG D A - Power supply C - Drive B - Input-side noise filter D - Other control device Figure 8.25 Input-Side Noise Filter (Three-Phase 200/400 V) This drive is tested according to European standards IEC/EN 61800-5-1 and complies with the EMC guidelines. Refer to EMC Directive Compliance on page 432 for details about EMC filter selection and installation.
| Column | Column | S/L2 |
|---|---|---|
| T/L3 |
| V/T2 | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| W/T3 |
| R U | S/L2 |
|---|---|
| S V | T/L3 |
| T W E |
Source page
Page 340
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 340 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
8.5 Installing Peripheral Devices
Output-Side Noise Filter A noise filter on the output side of the drive reduces inductive noise and radiated noise. Figure 8.26 illustrates an example of output-side noise filter wiring.
NOTICE: Do not connect phase-advancing capacitors or LC/RC noise filters to the output circuits. Improper application of noise filters could result in damage to the drive. Figure8.24 B C A MCCB D R/L1 U/T1 1 4 S/L2 V/T2 2 5 M T/L3 W/T3 3 6 YEG
A - Power supply C - Output-side noise filter B - Drive D - Motor Figure 8.26 Output-Side Noise Filter
Installing Input Fuses Yaskawa recommends installing a fuse to the input side of the drive to prevent damage to the drive if a short circuit occurs.
Select the appropriate fuse from the table below. Table 8.12 Input Fuses
Fuse Type Fuse Type Model Manufacturer: Bussmann Model Manufacturer: Bussmann CIMR-L Model Fuse Ampere Rating CIMR-L Model Fuse Ampere Rating Three-Phase 200 V Class Three-Phase 400 V Class 20008 FWH-70B 70 40005 FWH-70B 70 20011 FWH-70B 70 40006 FWH-70B 70 20018 FWH-90B 90 40009 FWH-90B 90 20025 FWH-100B 100 40015 FWH-80B 80 20033 FWH-200B 200 40018 FWH-100B 100 20047 FWH-200B 200 40024 FWH-125B 125 20060 FWH-200B 200 40031 FWH-200B 200 20075 FWH-300A 300 40039 FWH-250A 250 20085 FWH-300A 300 40045 FWH-250A 250 20115 FWH-350A 350 40060 FWH-250A 250 20145 FWH-400A 400 40075 FWH-250A 250 20180 FWH-400A 400 40091 FWH-250A 250 20215 FWH-600A 600 40112 FWH-350A 350 20283 FWH-700A 700 40150 FWH-400A 400 20346 FWH-800A 800 40180 FWH-500A 500 20415 FWH-1000B 1000 40216 FWH-600A 600 Attachment for External Heatsink Mounting An external attachment can be used to project the heatsink outside of an enclosure to ensure that there is sufficient air circulation around the heatsink. Contact a Yaskawa sales representative or Yaskawa directly for more information on this attachment.
340 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| V/T2 |
|---|
| W/T3 |
| Model CIMR-L | Fuse Type | Column | Model CIMR-L | Fuse Type | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Manufacturer: Bussmann | Manufacturer: Bussmann | ||||
| Model | Fuse Ampere Rating | Model | Fuse Ampere Rating | ||
| Three-Phase 200 V Class | Three-Phase 400 V Class | ||||
| 20008 | FWH-70B | 70 | 40005 | FWH-70B | 70 |
| 20011 | FWH-70B | 70 | 40006 | FWH-70B | 70 |
| 20018 | FWH-90B | 90 | 40009 | FWH-90B | 90 |
| 20025 | FWH-100B | 100 | 40015 | FWH-80B | 80 |
| 20033 | FWH-200B | 200 | 40018 | FWH-100B | 100 |
| 20047 | FWH-200B | 200 | 40024 | FWH-125B | 125 |
| 20060 | FWH-200B | 200 | 40031 | FWH-200B | 200 |
| 20075 | FWH-300A | 300 | 40039 | FWH-250A | 250 |
| 20085 | FWH-300A | 300 | 40045 | FWH-250A | 250 |
| 20115 | FWH-350A | 350 | 40060 | FWH-250A | 250 |
| 20145 | FWH-400A | 400 | 40075 | FWH-250A | 250 |
| 20180 | FWH-400A | 400 | 40091 | FWH-250A | 250 |
| 20215 | FWH-600A | 600 | 40112 | FWH-350A | 350 |
| 20283 | FWH-700A | 700 | 40150 | FWH-400A | 400 |
| 20346 | FWH-800A | 800 | 40180 | FWH-500A | 500 |
| 20415 | FWH-1000B | 1000 | 40216 | FWH-600A | 600 |
Source page
Page 341
8.5 Installing Peripheral Devices
Source page
Page 342
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 342 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
8.5 Installing Peripheral Devices
342 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 343
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 343 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Appendix: A
Specifications
A.1 THREE-PHASE 200 V CLASS DRIVES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 A.2 THREE-PHASE 400 V CLASS DRIVES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 A.3 DRIVE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 A.4 DRIVE WATT LOSS DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 A.5 DRIVE DERATING DATA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 343
Source page
Page 344
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 344 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
A.1 Three-Phase 200 V Class Drives
A.1 Three-Phase 200 V Class Drives
Table A.1 Power Ratings (Three-Phase 200 V Class) Item Specification CIMR-L2 0008 0011 0018 0025 0033 0047 0060 0075 0085 0115 0145 0180 0215 0283 0346 0415 Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 (kW)<1> Input Current (A)<2> 7.5 11 18.9 28 37 52 68 80 82 111 136 164 200 271 324 394 Rated Voltage Rated Frequency Three-phase 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz<3> Input Allowable Voltage Fluctuation -15 to 10% Allowable Frequency Fluctuation ±5% Input Power (kVA) 4.1 5.8 9.5 14 18 27 36 44 37 51 62 75 91 124 148 180 Rated Output Capacity (kVA)<4> 3 4.2 6.7 9.5 12.6 17.9 23 29 32 44 55 69 82 108 132 158 <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <6> <6> <6> <6> <6> <6> 8 11 17.5 25 33 47 60 75 85 115 145 180 215 283 346 415 Rated Output Current (A) <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <6> <6> <6> <6> <6> <6> Output Overload Tolerance 150% of rated output current for 60 s Carrier Frequency User adjustable between 2 and 15 kHz User adjustable between 2 and 10 kHz Maximum Output Voltage (V) Three-phase 200 to 240 V (proportional to input voltage) Maximum Output Speed (Hz) 200 Hz (user-set) <1> The motor capacity (kW) refers to a Yaskawa 4-pole motor. The rated output current of the drive output amps should be equal to or greater than the motor rated current. Select the appropriate capacity drive if operating the motor continuously above motor nameplate current. <2> Assumes operation at the rated output current. Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring connections, and power supply impedance. <3> DC is not available for UL standards. <4> Rated motor capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 220 V. <5> Carrier frequency can be set up to 8 kHz while keeping this current rating. Higher carrier frequency settings require derating. <6> Carrier frequency can be set up to 5 kHz while keeping this current rating. Higher carrier frequency settings require derating.
344 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Item | Column | Specification | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| CIMR-L2 | 0008 | 0011 | 0018 | 0025 | 0033 | 0047 | 0060 | 0075 | 0085 | 0115 | 0145 | 0180 | 0215 | 0283 | 0346 | 0415 | |
| Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity (kW)<1> | 1.5 | 2.2 | 4.0 | 5.5 | 7.5 | 11 | 15 | 18.5 | 22 | 30 | 37 | 45 | 55 | 75 | 90 | 110 | |
| Input | Input Current (A)<2> | 7.5 | 11 | 18.9 | 28 | 37 | 52 | 68 | 80 | 82 | 111 | 136 | 164 | 200 | 271 | 324 | 394 |
| Rated Voltage Rated Frequency | Three-phase 200 to 240 V 50/60 Hz<3> | ||||||||||||||||
| Allowable Voltage Fluctuation | -15 to 10% | ||||||||||||||||
| Allowable Frequency Fluctuation | ±5% | ||||||||||||||||
| Input Power (kVA) | 4.1 | 5.8 | 9.5 | 14 | 18 | 27 | 36 | 44 | 37 | 51 | 62 | 75 | 91 | 124 | 148 | 180 | |
| Output | Rated Output Capacity (kVA)<4> | 3 <5> | 4.2 <5> | 6.7 <5> | 9.5 <5> | 12.6 <5> | 17.9 <5> | 23 <5> | 29 <5> | 32 <5> | 44 <5> | 55 <6> | 69 <6> | 82 <6> | 108 <6> | 132 <6> | 158 <6> |
| Rated Output Current (A) | 8 <5> | 11 <5> | 17.5 <5> | 25 <5> | 33 <5> | 47 <5> | 60 <5> | 75 <5> | 85 <5> | 115 <5> | 145 <6> | 180 <6> | 215 <6> | 283 <6> | 346 <6> | 415 <6> | |
| Overload Tolerance | 150% of rated output current for 60 s | ||||||||||||||||
| Carrier Frequency | User adjustable between 2 and 15 kHz | User adjustable between 2 and 10 kHz | |||||||||||||||
| Maximum Output Voltage (V) | Three-phase 200 to 240 V (proportional to input voltage) | ||||||||||||||||
| Maximum Output Speed (Hz) | 200 Hz (user-set) |
Source page
Page 345
A.2 Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 345 snoitacificepS SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 345 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 A.2 Three-Phase 400 V Class Drives Table A.2 Power Ratings (Three-Phase 400 V Class) Item Specification CIMR-L4 0005 0006 0009 0015 0018 0024 0031 0039 0045 0060 0075 0091 0112 0150 0180 0216 Maximum Applicable Motor 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 Capacity (kW)<1> Input Current 4.4 6 10.4 15 20 29 39 44 43 58 71 86 105 142 170 207 (A)<2> Rated Voltage Rated Frequency Three-phase 380 to 480 Vac 50/60 Hz 510 to 680 Vdc<3> Input Allowable Voltage -15 to 10% Fluctuation Allowable Frequency ±5% Fluctuation Input Power (kVA) 4.3 6.1 10.0 14.6 19.2 28.4 37.5 46.6 39.3 53.0 64.9 78.6 96.0 129.9 155 189 Rated Output 3.7 4.2 7 11.3 13.7 18.3 24 30 34 48 57 69 85 114 137 165 Capacity (kVA)<4> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <6> <6> <6> <6> Rated Output 4.8 5.5 9.2 14.8 18 24 31 39 45 60 75 91 112 150 180 216 Current (A) <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <5> <6> <6> <6> <6> Overload Tolerance 150% of rated output current for 60 s Output User adjustable between 2 and Carrier Frequency User adjustable between 2 and 15 kHz 10 kHz Maximum Output Three-phase 380 to 480 V (proportional to input voltage) Voltage (V) Maximum Output 200 Hz (user-adjustable) Speed (Hz) <1> The motor capacity (kW) refers to a Yaskawa 4-pole motor. The rated output current of the drive output amps should be equal to or greater than the motor rated current. Select the appropriate capacity drive if operating the motor continuously above motor nameplate current. <2> Assumes operation at the rated output current. Input current rating varies depending on the power supply transformer, input reactor, wiring conditions, and power supply impedance. <3> DC is not available for UL standards. <4> Rated motor capacity is calculated with a rated output voltage of 440 V. <5> Carrier frequency can be set up to 8 kHz while keeping this current rating. Higher carrier frequency settings require derating. <6> Carrier frequency can be set up to 5 kHz while keeping this current rating. Higher carrier frequency settings require derating. A
| Item | Column | Specification | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| CIMR-L4 | 0005 | 0006 | 0009 | 0015 | 0018 | 0024 | 0031 | 0039 | 0045 | 0060 | 0075 | 0091 | 0112 | 0150 | 0180 | 0216 | |
| Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity (kW)<1> | 1.5 | 2.2 | 4.0 | 5.5 | 7.5 | 11 | 15 | 18.5 | 22 | 30 | 37 | 45 | 55 | 75 | 90 | 110 | |
| Input | Input Current (A)<2> | 4.4 | 6 | 10.4 | 15 | 20 | 29 | 39 | 44 | 43 | 58 | 71 | 86 | 105 | 142 | 170 | 207 |
| Rated Voltage Rated Frequency | Three-phase 380 to 480 Vac 50/60 Hz 510 to 680 Vdc<3> | ||||||||||||||||
| Allowable Voltage Fluctuation | -15 to 10% | ||||||||||||||||
| Allowable Frequency Fluctuation | ±5% | ||||||||||||||||
| Input Power (kVA) | 4.3 | 6.1 | 10.0 | 14.6 | 19.2 | 28.4 | 37.5 | 46.6 | 39.3 | 53.0 | 64.9 | 78.6 | 96.0 | 129.9 | 155 | 189 | |
| Output | Rated Output Capacity (kVA)<4> | 3.7 <5> | 4.2 <5> | 7 <5> | 11.3 <5> | 13.7 <5> | 18.3 <5> | 24 <5> | 30 <5> | 34 <5> | 48 <5> | 57 <5> | 69 <5> | 85 <6> | 114 <6> | 137 <6> | 165 <6> |
| Rated Output Current (A) | 4.8 <5> | 5.5 <5> | 9.2 <5> | 14.8 <5> | 18 <5> | 24 <5> | 31 <5> | 39 <5> | 45 <5> | 60 <5> | 75 <5> | 91 <5> | 112 <6> | 150 <6> | 180 <6> | 216 <6> | |
| Overload Tolerance | 150% of rated output current for 60 s | ||||||||||||||||
| Carrier Frequency | User adjustable between 2 and 15 kHz | User adjustable between 2 and 10 kHz | |||||||||||||||
| Maximum Output Voltage (V) | Three-phase 380 to 480 V (proportional to input voltage) | ||||||||||||||||
| Maximum Output Speed (Hz) | 200 Hz (user-adjustable) |
Source page
Page 346
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 346 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
A.3 Drive Specifications
A.3 Drive Specifications
Note: 1. Perform rotational Auto-Tuning to obtain the performance specifications given below. 2. For optimum performance life of the drive, install the drive in an environment that meets the required specifications. Item Specification The following control methods can be set using drive parameters: • V/f Control (V/f) Control Method • Open Loop Vector Control (OLV) • Closed Loop Vector Control (CLV) • Closed Loop Vector Control for PM (CLV/PM) Frequency Control Range 0.01 to 200 Hz Frequency Accuracy Digital input: within ±0.01% of the max output speed (-10 to +40°C) (Temperature Fluctuation) Analog input: within ±0.1% of the max output speed (25 ±10°C) Digital inputs: 0.01 Hz Frequency Setting Resolution Analog inputs: 1/2048 of the maximum output speed setting (11 bit plus sign) Output Speed Resolution 0.001 Hz Frequency Setting Signal Main speed frequency reference: DC -10 to +10 V (20 kΩ), DC 0 to +10 V (20 kΩ), 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω) V/f: 150% at 3 Hz Starting Torque<1> OLV: 200% at 0.3 Hz CLV, CLV/PM: 200% at 0 r/min V/f: 1:40 Control Speed Control Range<1> OLV: 1:200 Characteristics CLV, CLV/PM: 1:1500 OLV: ±0.2% (25 ±10°C) Speed Control Accuracy<1> CLV: ±0.02% (25 ±10°C) OLV: 10 Hz (25 ±10°C) Speed Response<1> CLV: 100 Hz<2> CLV/PM: 100 Hz<2> Torque Limit Parameters setting allow separate limits in four quadrants (available in OLV, CLV, CLV/PM) 0.0 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings, unit changeable to m/s2 or Accel/Decel Ramp ft/s2) Braking Transistor Models CIMR-L20008 to 20115, 40005 to 40060 have a built-in braking transistor. V/f Characteristics Freely programmable Inertia Compensation, Position Lock at Start and Stop/Anti-Rollback Function, Overtorque/Undertorque Detection, Torque Limit, Speed Reference, Accel/decel Switch, 5 Zone Jerk Settings, Auto-Tuning (Stationary and Rotational Motor/Encoder Offset Tuning), Dwell, Cooling Fan on/off Switch, Slip Compensation, Torque Compensation, DC Injection Braking at Start and Main Control Functions Stop, MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. (RS-422/485 max, 115.2 kbps), Fault Reset, Removable Terminal Block with Parameter Backup Function, Online Tuning, High Frequency Injection, Short Floor, Rescue Operation (Light Load Direction Search Function), Inspection Run, Brake Sequence, Speed related parameters with elevator units display, etc. Motor Protection Electronic thermal overload relay Momentary Overcurrent Protection Drive stops when output current exceeds 200% of rated output current Overload Protection Drive stops after 60 s at 150% of rated output current<3> Overvoltage Protection 200 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approx. 410 V 400 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approx. 820 V Protection Functions Undervoltage Protection 200 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage falls below approx. 190 V 400 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage falls below approx. 380 V Heatsink Overheat Protection Thermistor Stall Prevention Stall Prevention is available during acceleration, and during run. Ground Protection Electronic circuit protection<4> DC Bus Charge LED Remains lit until DC bus voltage falls below 50 V Area of Use Indoors Ambient Temperature IP20 enclosure: -10 to +50°C Humidity 95 RH% or less (no condensation) Environment Storage Temperature -20 to 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation) Altitude Up to 1000 meters without derating, up to 3000 meters with output current and voltage derating 10 to 20 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 Vibration/Shock 20 to 55 Hz: 5.9 m/s2 (CIMR-L20008 to 20180, 40005 to 40150) or 2.0 m/s2 (CIMR-L20215 to 20415, 40180 to 40216) • UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc: UL508C Power Conversion Equipment • IEC/EN 61800-3, IEC/EN 61800-5-1 • ISO International Organization for Standardization: ISO/EN 13849-1 Cat. 3 PLd Safety of machinery - Safety-related parts of control systems (models CIMR-LA) Standards ISO/EN 13849-1 Cat. 3 PLe Safety of machinery - Safety-related parts of control systems (models CIMR-LF) • IEC International Electrotechnical Commission: IEC/EN 61508 SIL2 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related systems safety integrity level 2 (models CIMR-LA) IEC/EN 61508 SIL3 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related systems safety integrity level 3 (models CIMR-LF) Protection Design IP20 enclosure <1> The accuracy of these values depends on motor characteristics, ambient conditions, and drive settings. Specifications may vary with different motors and with changing motor temperature. Contact Yaskawa for consultation. <2> For drives with B or earlier as the design revision order, 50 Hz is required. The design revision order and software version are printed on the nameplate affixed to the side of the drive. Refer to Model Number on page 28 for details. <3> Overload protection may be triggered when operating with 150% of the rated output current if the output speed is less than 6 Hz. <4> Ground protection cannot be provided when the impedance of the ground fault path is too low, or when the drive is powered up while a ground fault is present at the output. 346 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Item | Column | Specification |
|---|---|---|
| Control Characteristics | Control Method | The following control methods can be set using drive parameters: • V/f Control (V/f) • Open Loop Vector Control (OLV) • Closed Loop Vector Control (CLV) • Closed Loop Vector Control for PM (CLV/PM) |
| Frequency Control Range | 0.01 to 200 Hz | |
| Frequency Accuracy (Temperature Fluctuation) | Digital input: within ±0.01% of the max output speed (-10 to +40°C) Analog input: within ±0.1% of the max output speed (25 ±10°C) | |
| Frequency Setting Resolution | Digital inputs: 0.01 Hz Analog inputs: 1/2048 of the maximum output speed setting (11 bit plus sign) | |
| Output Speed Resolution | 0.001 Hz | |
| Frequency Setting Signal | Main speed frequency reference: DC -10 to +10 V (20 kΩ), DC 0 to +10 V (20 kΩ), 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω) | |
| Starting Torque<1> | V/f: 150% at 3 Hz OLV: 200% at 0.3 Hz CLV, CLV/PM: 200% at 0 r/min | |
| Speed Control Range<1> | V/f: 1:40 OLV: 1:200 CLV, CLV/PM: 1:1500 | |
| Speed Control Accuracy<1> | OLV: ±0.2% (25 ±10°C) CLV: ±0.02% (25 ±10°C) | |
| Speed Response<1> | OLV: 10 Hz (25 ±10°C) CLV: 100 Hz<2> CLV/PM: 100 Hz<2> | |
| Torque Limit | Parameters setting allow separate limits in four quadrants (available in OLV, CLV, CLV/PM) | |
| Accel/Decel Ramp | 0.0 to 6000.0 s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings, unit changeable to m/s2 or ft/s2) | |
| Braking Transistor | Models CIMR-L20008 to 20115, 40005 to 40060 have a built-in braking transistor. | |
| V/f Characteristics | Freely programmable | |
| Main Control Functions | Inertia Compensation, Position Lock at Start and Stop/Anti-Rollback Function, Overtorque/Undertorque Detection, Torque Limit, Speed Reference, Accel/decel Switch, 5 Zone Jerk Settings, Auto-Tuning (Stationary and Rotational Motor/Encoder Offset Tuning), Dwell, Cooling Fan on/off Switch, Slip Compensation, Torque Compensation, DC Injection Braking at Start and Stop, MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. (RS-422/485 max, 115.2 kbps), Fault Reset, Removable Terminal Block with Parameter Backup Function, Online Tuning, High Frequency Injection, Short Floor, Rescue Operation (Light Load Direction Search Function), Inspection Run, Brake Sequence, Speed related parameters with elevator units display, etc. | |
| Protection Functions | Motor Protection | Electronic thermal overload relay |
| Momentary Overcurrent Protection | Drive stops when output current exceeds 200% of rated output current | |
| Overload Protection | Drive stops after 60 s at 150% of rated output current<3> | |
| Overvoltage Protection | 200 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approx. 410 V 400 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage exceeds approx. 820 V | |
| Undervoltage Protection | 200 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage falls below approx. 190 V 400 V class: Stops when DC bus voltage falls below approx. 380 V | |
| Heatsink Overheat Protection | Thermistor | |
| Stall Prevention | Stall Prevention is available during acceleration, and during run. | |
| Ground Protection | Electronic circuit protection<4> | |
| DC Bus Charge LED | Remains lit until DC bus voltage falls below 50 V | |
| Environment | Area of Use | Indoors |
| Ambient Temperature | IP20 enclosure: -10 to +50°C | |
| Humidity | 95 RH% or less (no condensation) | |
| Storage Temperature | -20 to 60°C (short-term temperature during transportation) | |
| Altitude | Up to 1000 meters without derating, up to 3000 meters with output current and voltage derating | |
| Vibration/Shock | 10 to 20 Hz: 9.8 m/s2 20 to 55 Hz: 5.9 m/s2 (CIMR-L20008 to 20180, 40005 to 40150) or 2.0 m/s2 (CIMR-L20215 to 20415, 40180 to 40216) | |
| Standards | • UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc: UL508C Power Conversion Equipment • IEC/EN 61800-3, IEC/EN 61800-5-1 • ISO International Organization for Standardization: ISO/EN 13849-1 Cat. 3 PLd Safety of machinery - Safety-related parts of control systems (models CIMR-LA) ISO/EN 13849-1 Cat. 3 PLe Safety of machinery - Safety-related parts of control systems (models CIMR-LF) • IEC International Electrotechnical Commission: IEC/EN 61508 SIL2 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related systems safety integrity level 2 (models CIMR-LA) IEC/EN 61508 SIL3 Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related systems safety integrity level 3 (models CIMR-LF) | |
| Protection Design | IP20 enclosure |
Source page
Page 347
A.4 Drive Watt Loss Data
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 347 snoitacificepS SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 347 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 A.4 Drive Watt Loss Data Table A.3 Watt Loss 200 V Class Three-Phase Models Model Number Carrier Frequency 8 kHz CIMR-L Rated Amps (A) Heatsink Loss (W) Interior Unit Loss (W) Total Loss (W) 20008 8.0<1> 43.0 52.0 95.0 20011 11.0<1> 64.0 58.0 122.0 20018 17.5<1> 100.7 67.4 168.1 20025 25.0<1> 194.4 92.3 286.6 20033 33.0<1> 213.8 104.8 318.7 20047 47.0<1> 280.2 129.9 410.2 20060 60.0<1> 394.9 162.8 557.7 20075 75.0<1> 459.8 220.9 680.7 20085 85.0<1> 510.3 210.9 721.2 20115 115.0<1> 662.4 250.0 912.4 20145 145.0<2> 815.9 306.3 1122.2 20180 180.0<2> 976.0 378.1 1354.1 20215 215.0<2> 1514.0 466.1 1980.0 20283 283.0<2> 1936.2 587.8 2523.9 20346 346.0<2> 2563.9 782.9 3346.8 20415 415.0<2> 2672.1 954.1 3626.2 <1> These values assume the carrier frequency is set to 8 kHz or less. <2> These values assume the carrier frequency is set to 5 kHz or less. Table A.4 Watt Loss 400 V Class Three-Phase Models Model Number Carrier Frequency 8 kHz CIMR-L Rated Amps (A) Heatsink Loss (W) Interior Unit Loss (W) Total Loss (W) 40005 4.8<1> 37.0 49.0 87.0 40006 5.5<1> 48.0 53.0 101.0 40009 9.2<1> 68.5 61.0 129.5 40015 14.8<1> 135.4 85.7 221.1 40018 18.0<1> 149.9 97.0 246.9 40024 24.0<1> 208.0 115.1 323.2 40031 31.0<1> 262.6 140.8 403.4 40039 39.0<1> 329.8 179.4 509.2 40045 45.0<1> 348.5 169.6 518.1 40060 60.0<1> 484.1 217.2 701.3 40075 75.0<1> 563.4 254.0 817.4 40091 91.0<1> 722.6 299.0 1021.7 40112 112.0<2> 908.2 416.4 1324.6 40150 150.0<2> 1340.3 580.1 1920.3 40180 180.0<2> 1771.4 541.0 2312.5 40216 216.0<2> 2360.2 715.1 3075.3 <1> These values assume the carrier frequency is set to 8 kHz or less. <2> These values assume the carrier frequency is set to 5 kHz or less. A
| Model Number CIMR-L | Carrier Frequency 8 kHz | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Rated Amps (A) | Heatsink Loss (W) | Interior Unit Loss (W) | Total Loss (W) | |
| 20008 | 8.0<1> | 43.0 | 52.0 | 95.0 |
| 20011 | 11.0<1> | 64.0 | 58.0 | 122.0 |
| 20018 | 17.5<1> | 100.7 | 67.4 | 168.1 |
| 20025 | 25.0<1> | 194.4 | 92.3 | 286.6 |
| 20033 | 33.0<1> | 213.8 | 104.8 | 318.7 |
| 20047 | 47.0<1> | 280.2 | 129.9 | 410.2 |
| 20060 | 60.0<1> | 394.9 | 162.8 | 557.7 |
| 20075 | 75.0<1> | 459.8 | 220.9 | 680.7 |
| 20085 | 85.0<1> | 510.3 | 210.9 | 721.2 |
| 20115 | 115.0<1> | 662.4 | 250.0 | 912.4 |
| 20145 | 145.0<2> | 815.9 | 306.3 | 1122.2 |
| 20180 | 180.0<2> | 976.0 | 378.1 | 1354.1 |
| 20215 | 215.0<2> | 1514.0 | 466.1 | 1980.0 |
| 20283 | 283.0<2> | 1936.2 | 587.8 | 2523.9 |
| 20346 | 346.0<2> | 2563.9 | 782.9 | 3346.8 |
| 20415 | 415.0<2> | 2672.1 | 954.1 | 3626.2 |
| Model Number CIMR-L | Carrier Frequency 8 kHz | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Rated Amps (A) | Heatsink Loss (W) | Interior Unit Loss (W) | Total Loss (W) | |
| 40005 | 4.8<1> | 37.0 | 49.0 | 87.0 |
| 40006 | 5.5<1> | 48.0 | 53.0 | 101.0 |
| 40009 | 9.2<1> | 68.5 | 61.0 | 129.5 |
| 40015 | 14.8<1> | 135.4 | 85.7 | 221.1 |
| 40018 | 18.0<1> | 149.9 | 97.0 | 246.9 |
| 40024 | 24.0<1> | 208.0 | 115.1 | 323.2 |
| 40031 | 31.0<1> | 262.6 | 140.8 | 403.4 |
| 40039 | 39.0<1> | 329.8 | 179.4 | 509.2 |
| 40045 | 45.0<1> | 348.5 | 169.6 | 518.1 |
| 40060 | 60.0<1> | 484.1 | 217.2 | 701.3 |
| 40075 | 75.0<1> | 563.4 | 254.0 | 817.4 |
| 40091 | 91.0<1> | 722.6 | 299.0 | 1021.7 |
| 40112 | 112.0<2> | 908.2 | 416.4 | 1324.6 |
| 40150 | 150.0<2> | 1340.3 | 580.1 | 1920.3 |
| 40180 | 180.0<2> | 1771.4 | 541.0 | 2312.5 |
| 40216 | 216.0<2> | 2360.2 | 715.1 | 3075.3 |
Source page
Page 348
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 348 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
A.5 Drive Derating Data
A.5 Drive Derating Data
The drive can be operated at above the rated temperature, altitude, and default carrier frequency by derating the drive capacity.
Rated Current Depending on Carrier Frequency
Table A.5 shows the drive output current depending on the carrier frequency settings. The 2 kHz value is equal to the Normal Duty rated current. If the carrier frequency is increased above 2 kHz in ND, the rated output current is reduced.
The 8 kHz and 5 kHz values are equal to the Heavy Duty rated current. They define the value up to which the carrier frequency can be increased in HD without a current derating (default HD carrier frequency is 2 kHz). Increasing the carrier frequency above 8 kHz or 5 kHz reduces the rated output current. Use the data in Table A.5 to linearly calculate output current values for carrier frequencies not listed in the tables.
Table A.5 Carrier Frequency and Current Derating Three-Phase 200 V Class Three-Phase 400 V Class Model Rated Current (A) Model Rated Current (A) CIMR-L 2 kHz 8 kHz 15 kHz CIMR-L 2 kHz 8 kHz 15 kHz 20008 8 8 6.4 40005 4.8 4.8 2.9 20011 11 11 8.8 40006 5.5 5.5 3.3 20018 17.5 17.5 14 40009 9.2 9.2 5.5 20025 25 25 20 40015 14.8 14.8 8.9 20033 33 33 26.4 40018 18 18 10.8 20047 47 47 37.6 40024 24 24 14.4 20060 60 60 48 40031 31 31 18.6 20075 75 75 53 40039 39 39 23.4 20085 85 85 60 40045 45 45 27 20115 115 115 81 40060 60 60 36 20145 145 145 116 40075 75 75 45 20180 180 180 144 40091 91 91 55 20215 215 215 172 40112 112 112 78 20283 283 283 226 40150 150 150 105 20346 346 346 277 40180 180 180 126 20415 415 415 332 40216 216 216 151
348 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Three-Phase 200 V Class | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| Model CIMR-L | Rated Current (A) | ||
| 2 kHz | 8 kHz | 15 kHz | |
| 20008 | 8 | 8 | 6.4 |
| 20011 | 11 | 11 | 8.8 |
| 20018 | 17.5 | 17.5 | 14 |
| 20025 | 25 | 25 | 20 |
| 20033 | 33 | 33 | 26.4 |
| 20047 | 47 | 47 | 37.6 |
| 20060 | 60 | 60 | 48 |
| 20075 | 75 | 75 | 53 |
| 20085 | 85 | 85 | 60 |
| 20115 | 115 | 115 | 81 |
| 20145 | 145 | 145 | 116 |
| 20180 | 180 | 180 | 144 |
| 20215 | 215 | 215 | 172 |
| 20283 | 283 | 283 | 226 |
| 20346 | 346 | 346 | 277 |
| 20415 | 415 | 415 | 332 |
| Three-Phase 400 V Class | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| Model CIMR-L | Rated Current (A) | ||
| 2 kHz | 8 kHz | 15 kHz | |
| 40005 | 4.8 | 4.8 | 2.9 |
| 40006 | 5.5 | 5.5 | 3.3 |
| 40009 | 9.2 | 9.2 | 5.5 |
| 40015 | 14.8 | 14.8 | 8.9 |
| 40018 | 18 | 18 | 10.8 |
| 40024 | 24 | 24 | 14.4 |
| 40031 | 31 | 31 | 18.6 |
| 40039 | 39 | 39 | 23.4 |
| 40045 | 45 | 45 | 27 |
| 40060 | 60 | 60 | 36 |
| 40075 | 75 | 75 | 45 |
| 40091 | 91 | 91 | 55 |
| 40112 | 112 | 112 | 78 |
| 40150 | 150 | 150 | 105 |
| 40180 | 180 | 180 | 126 |
| 40216 | 216 | 216 | 151 |
Source page
Page 349
A.5 Drive Derating Data
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 349 snoitacificepS SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 349 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Carrier Frequency Derating Derate the drive according to Figure A.1 to Figure A.4 as the carrier frequency increases above the factory default setting. FigureA.1 2(cid:3)0008 to 2(cid:3)0060 Drive Rated 2(cid:3)0075 to 2(cid:3)0115 80% of Drive Rated 70% of Drive Rated Common_ TMonly 0 8 kHz 15 kHz Figure A.1 Carrier Frequency Derating (CIMR-L20008 to 20115) FigureA.2 2(cid:3)0145 to 2(cid:3)0415 Drive Rated 80% of Drive Rated YEG 0 5 kHz 10 kHz Figure A.2 Carrier Frequency Derating (CIMR-L20145 to 20415) FigureA.3 Drive Rated 4(cid:3) 4(cid:3) 00 0 0 0 5 9 1 to 60% of Drive Rated Common_ TMonly 0 8 kHz 15 kHz Figure A.3 Carrier Frequency Derating (CIMR-L40005 to 40091) FigureA.4 4(cid:3)0112 to 4(cid:3)0216 Drive Rated 70% of Drive Rated YEG A 0 5 kHz 10 kHz Figure A.4 Carrier Frequency Derating (CIMR-L40112 to 40216)
Source page
Page 350
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 350 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
A.5 Drive Derating Data
Temperature Derating
To ensure the maximum performance life, the drives output current must be derated when the drive is installed in areas with high ambient temperature. In order to ensure reliable drive overload protection, the parameters L8-12 and L8-35 must also be set according to the installation conditions.
Parameter Settings
No. Name Description Range Def. L8-12 Ambient Temperature Setting Adjust the drive overload (oL2) protection level when the drive is installed in an environment -10 to 50 40°C that exceeds its ambient temperature rating. 0: IP20 Enclosure L8-35 Installation Method Selection 2: IP20/NEMA 1, UL Type 1 Enclosure 0 or 2 0 IP20 Enclosure Drive operation between -10°C and 50°C allows 100% continuous current without derating. Altitude Derating
The drive standard ratings are valid for an installation altitude up to 1000 m. If the altitude exceeds 1000 m both the drive rated voltage and the rated output current must be derated for 1% per 100 m. The maximum altitude is 3000 m.
350 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Name | Description | Range | Def. |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| L8-12 | Ambient Temperature Setting | Adjust the drive overload (oL2) protection level when the drive is installed in an environment that exceeds its ambient temperature rating. | -10 to 50 | 40°C |
| L8-35 | Installation Method Selection | 0: IP20 Enclosure 2: IP20/NEMA 1, UL Type 1 Enclosure | 0 or 2 | 0 |
Source page
Page 351
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 351 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Appendix: B
Parameter List
This appendix contains a full listing of all parameters and settings available in the drive.
B.1 UNDERSTANDING THE PARAMETER TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 B.2 PARAMETER GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 B.3 PARAMETER TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 B.4 CONTROL MODE DEPENDENT PARAMETER DEFAULT VALUES. . . . . . . . . 394 B.5 DEFAULTS BY DRIVE MODEL SELECTION (O2-04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 B.6 DEFAULTS AND SETTING RANGES BY DISPLAY UNIT SELECTION (O1-03)397
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 351
Source page
Page 352
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 352 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.1 Understanding the Parameter Table
B.1 Understanding the Parameter Table
Control Modes, Symbols, and Terms The table below lists terms and symbols used in this section to indicate which parameters are available in which control modes.
Note: Refer to Control Mode Selection on page 26 for detailed instructions on each control mode. Table B.1 Symbols and Icons Used in the Parameter Table Symbol Description
All Modes Parameter is available in all control modes. V/f Parameter is available when operating the drive with V/f Control.
OLV Parameter is available when operating the drive with Open Loop Vector. CLV Parameter is available when operating the drive with Closed Loop Vector.
CLV/PM Parameter is available when operating the drive with Closed Loop Vector for PM motors.
Parameter can be changed during run. Motor 2 Refers to a second motor when the drive is operating two motors. Switch between these motors using the multi-function input terminals. Note: If a parameter is not available in a certain control mode, the symbol for that control mode is grayed out.
352 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Symbol | Description |
|---|---|
| All Modes | Parameter is available in all control modes. |
| V/f | Parameter is available when operating the drive with V/f Control. |
| OLV | Parameter is available when operating the drive with Open Loop Vector. |
| CLV | Parameter is available when operating the drive with Closed Loop Vector. |
| CLV/PM | Parameter is available when operating the drive with Closed Loop Vector for PM motors. |
| Parameter can be changed during run. | |
| Motor 2 | Refers to a second motor when the drive is operating two motors. Switch between these motors using the multi-function input terminals. |
Source page
Page 353
B.2 Parameter Groups
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 353 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 353 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 B.2 Parameter Groups Parameter Group Name Page Parameter Group Name Page A1 Initialization 354 L1 Motor Protection 373 A2 User Parameters 354 L2 Undervoltage Detection 374 b1 Operation Mode Selection 355 L3 Stall Prevention 374 b2 Magnetic Flux Compensation 355 L4 Speed Detection 374 b4 Delay Timers 355 L5 Fault Reset 375 b6 Dwell Function 355 L6 Torque Detection 375 b7 Droop Control 356 L7 Torque Limit 375 b8 Energy Saving 356 L8 Drive Protection 376 C1 Acceleration and Deceleration Ramps 356 n2 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Tuning 377 C2 Jerk Settings 357 n5 Inertia Compensation 377 C3 Slip Compensation 357 n6 Online Tuning 378 C4 Torque Compensation 357 n8 PM Motor Control Tuning 378 C5 Speed Control Loop Settings 358 n9 Current Detection Adjustments 379 C6 Carrier Frequency 359 o1 Digital Operator Display Selection 379 d1 Speed Reference 359 o2 Digital Operator Keypad Functions 380 d6 Field Forcing 360 o3 Copy Function 380 E1 V/f Pattern 361 o4 Maintenance Monitor Settings 381 E2 Motor Parameters 361 S1 Brake Sequence 381 E3 V/f Pattern for Motor 2 362 S2 Slip Compensation for Elevators 382 E4 Motor 2 Parameters 362 S3 Start/Stop Optimization 382 E5 PM Motor Settings 363 S4 Rescue Operation 384 F1 Encoder/PG Feedback Settings 363 S5 Short Floor Operation 384 F3 Digital Input Card (DI-A3) 365 S6 Error Detection 385 F4 Analog Monitor Card (AO-A3) 365 T1 Induction Motor Auto-Tuning 386 F5 Digital Output Card (DO-A3) 366 T2 PM Motor Auto-Tuning 386 F6 Communication Option Card 366 U1 Operation Status Monitors 387 H1 Multi-Function Digital Inputs 367 U2 Fault Trace 389 H2 Multi-Function Digital Outputs 369 U3 Fault History 390 H3 Multi-Function Analog Inputs 371 U4 Maintenance Monitors 390 H4 Multi-Function Analog Outputs 372 U6 Control Monitors 393 H5 MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication 372 - - - B
| Parameter Group | Name | Page | Parameter Group | Name | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| A1 | Initialization | 354 | L1 | Motor Protection | 373 |
| A2 | User Parameters | 354 | L2 | Undervoltage Detection | 374 |
| b1 | Operation Mode Selection | 355 | L3 | Stall Prevention | 374 |
| b2 | Magnetic Flux Compensation | 355 | L4 | Speed Detection | 374 |
| b4 | Delay Timers | 355 | L5 | Fault Reset | 375 |
| b6 | Dwell Function | 355 | L6 | Torque Detection | 375 |
| b7 | Droop Control | 356 | L7 | Torque Limit | 375 |
| b8 | Energy Saving | 356 | L8 | Drive Protection | 376 |
| C1 | Acceleration and Deceleration Ramps | 356 | n2 | Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Tuning | 377 |
| C2 | Jerk Settings | 357 | n5 | Inertia Compensation | 377 |
| C3 | Slip Compensation | 357 | n6 | Online Tuning | 378 |
| C4 | Torque Compensation | 357 | n8 | PM Motor Control Tuning | 378 |
| C5 | Speed Control Loop Settings | 358 | n9 | Current Detection Adjustments | 379 |
| C6 | Carrier Frequency | 359 | o1 | Digital Operator Display Selection | 379 |
| d1 | Speed Reference | 359 | o2 | Digital Operator Keypad Functions | 380 |
| d6 | Field Forcing | 360 | o3 | Copy Function | 380 |
| E1 | V/f Pattern | 361 | o4 | Maintenance Monitor Settings | 381 |
| E2 | Motor Parameters | 361 | S1 | Brake Sequence | 381 |
| E3 | V/f Pattern for Motor 2 | 362 | S2 | Slip Compensation for Elevators | 382 |
| E4 | Motor 2 Parameters | 362 | S3 | Start/Stop Optimization | 382 |
| E5 | PM Motor Settings | 363 | S4 | Rescue Operation | 384 |
| F1 | Encoder/PG Feedback Settings | 363 | S5 | Short Floor Operation | 384 |
| F3 | Digital Input Card (DI-A3) | 365 | S6 | Error Detection | 385 |
| F4 | Analog Monitor Card (AO-A3) | 365 | T1 | Induction Motor Auto-Tuning | 386 |
| F5 | Digital Output Card (DO-A3) | 366 | T2 | PM Motor Auto-Tuning | 386 |
| F6 | Communication Option Card | 366 | U1 | Operation Status Monitors | 387 |
| H1 | Multi-Function Digital Inputs | 367 | U2 | Fault Trace | 389 |
| H2 | Multi-Function Digital Outputs | 369 | U3 | Fault History | 390 |
| H3 | Multi-Function Analog Inputs | 371 | U4 | Maintenance Monitors | 390 |
| H4 | Multi-Function Analog Outputs | 372 | U6 | Control Monitors | 393 |
| H5 | MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication | 372 | - | - | - |
Source page
Page 354
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 354 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
B.3 Parameter Table
A: Initialization Parameters The A parameter group creates the operating environment for the drive. This includes the parameter Access Level, Motor Control Method, Password, User Parameters and more.
A1: Initialization Parameters
No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 0: English 1: Japanese 2: German 3: French 4: Italian A1-00 5: Spanish (100H) 6: Portuguese Default: 0 Language Selection 7: Chinese Min: 0 152 8: Czech Max: 12 <1> 9: Russian 10: Turkish 11: Polish 12: Greek Note: 1. Language selection settings 8 to 12 can be selected from an LCD operator with version (REV) F or later. The version number of the LCD operator's PRG software is shown on the back of the digital operator. 2. Language selection settings 8 to 12 are available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. ( A 10 1 1 -0 H 1 ) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 2 Access Level Selection 0: View and set A1-01 and A1-04. U- parameters can also be viewed. Min: 0 152 1: User Parameters (access to a set of parameters selected by the user, A2-01 to A2-32) Max: 2 2: Advanced Access (access to view and set all parameters) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ ( A 10 1 2 -0 H 2 ) Control Method Selection 0: V/f Control D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 153 <1> 2 3 : : O Cl p o e s n e d L L oo o p o p V e V c e t c o t r o C r C on o t n ro tr l ol Max: 7 7: Closed Loop Vector Control for PM Motors All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 A1-03 Initialize Parameters 0: No initialization Min: 0 153 (103H) 1110: User Initialize (parameter values must be stored using parameter o2-03) Max: 5550 2220: 2-wire initialization 5550: oPE04 error reset A1-04 (104H) Password All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0000 Min: 0000 154 ( A 10 1 5 -0 H 5 ) Password Setting W thr h o e u n g h th A e 1 v - a 0 lu 3 e , a s n e d t i A nt 2 o - 0 A 1 1 t - h 0 r 4 o u d g o h es A n 2 o - t 3 m 3 a c t a c n h n t o h t e b v e a c lu h e a n s g e e t d in . to A1-05, parameters A1-01 Max: 9999 <1> Parameter setting value is not reset to the default value when the drive is initialized. A2: User Parameters No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page A2-01 to All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default:<5> A2-32 User Parameters 1 to 32 Min: A1-00 156 (106 to 125H) Parameters that were recently edited are listed here. The user can also select parameters to Max: S6-16 appear here for quick access. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 ( A 12 2 6 -3 H 3 ) U Se s l e e r c P ti a o r n ameter Automatic 0: Parameters A2-01 through A2-32 are reserved for the user to create a list of User Parameters. Min: 0 156 1: Save history of recently viewed parameters. Recently edited parameters will be saved to Max: 1 A2-17 through A2-32 for quick access. <5> Default setting is determined by the control mode (A1-02).
354 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| A1-00 (100H) <1> | Language Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: English 1: Japanese 2: German 3: French 4: Italian 5: Spanish 6: Portuguese 7: Chinese 8: Czech 9: Russian 10: Turkish 11: Polish 12: Greek Note: 1. Language selection settings 8 to 12 can be selected from an LCD operator with version (REV) F or later. The version number of the LCD operator's PRG software is shown on the back of the digital operator. 2. Language selection settings 8 to 12 are available in drive software PRG: 7017 or later. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 12 | 152 |
| A1-01 (101H) | Access Level Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: View and set A1-01 and A1-04. U- parameters can also be viewed. 1: User Parameters (access to a set of parameters selected by the user, A2-01 to A2-32) 2: Advanced Access (access to view and set all parameters) | Default: 2 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 152 |
| A1-02 (102H) <1> | Control Method Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: V/f Control 2: Open Loop Vector Control 3: Closed Loop Vector Control 7: Closed Loop Vector Control for PM Motors | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 7 | 153 |
| A1-03 (103H) | Initialize Parameters | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: No initialization 1110: User Initialize (parameter values must be stored using parameter o2-03) 2220: 2-wire initialization 5550: oPE04 error reset | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 5550 | 153 |
| A1-04 (104H) | Password | All Modes common_ TMonly When the value set into A1-04 does not match the value set into A1-05, parameters A1-01 through A1-03, and A2-01 through A2-33 cannot be changed. | Default: 0000 Min: 0000 Max: 9999 | 154 |
| A1-05 (105H) | Password Setting |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| A2-01 to A2-32 (106 to 125H) | User Parameters 1 to 32 | All Modes common_ TMonly Parameters that were recently edited are listed here. The user can also select parameters to appear here for quick access. | Default:<5> Min: A1-00 Max: S6-16 | 156 |
| A2-33 (126H) | User Parameter Automatic Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Parameters A2-01 through A2-32 are reserved for the user to create a list of User Parameters. 1: Save history of recently viewed parameters. Recently edited parameters will be saved to A2-17 through A2-32 for quick access. | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 156 |
Source page
Page 355
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 355 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 355 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 b: Application Application parameters configure the source of the Up/Down command, timer functions, the Dwell function, the Droop Control function, Energy Savings, and a variety of other application-related settings. b1: Operation Mode Selection No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 ( b 1 1 8 - 0 0 H 1 ) Speed Reference Selection 0 1 : : A D n ig a i l t o a g l o in p p e u ra t t t o e r rminals M M i a n x : : 0 3 157 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications 3: Option card All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 b1-02 Up/Down Command Selection 0: Digital operator Min: 0 158 (181H) 1: Digital input terminals Max: 3 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications 3: Option card All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ ( b 1 1 8 - 2 0 H 3 ) Stopping Method Selection 0 1 : : R Co am as p t t t o o s s t t o o p p D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 158 4: Elevator Emergency Stop Max: 4 Note: Setting 4 is available in the control mode CLV or CLV/PM for drives with software versions PRG: 7017 or later. The setting is 0 or 1 for software version PRG: 7016. b1-06 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 (185H) Digital Input Reading 0 1 : : I I n n p p u u t t s is t a r t e u a s d i s tw re ic a e d a o n n d c e p r a o n c d e s p s r e o d c e o s n s l e y d i i f m th m e e s d t i a a tu te s l y is ( t f h o e r q sa u m ic e k i r n e s b p o o t n h s r e e ) a . dings (robust M M i a n x : : 0 1 158 against noisy signals). b1-08 Up/Down Command Selection All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 (187H) while in Programming Mode 0 1: : U U p p/ / D D o o w w n n c c o o m m m m a a n n d d n ac o c t e a p c t c e e d p w te h d i l w e h i i n l e t h in e P th r e o g P r r a o m gr m am in m g i M ng o d M e. ode. M M i a n x : : 0 2 159 2: Prohibit entering Programming Mode during run. b1-14 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (1C3H) Phase Order Selection 0: U-V-W M M i a n x : : 0 1 159 1: U-W-V b2: Magnetic Flux Compensation No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page ( b 1 2 9 - 0 0 H 8 ) M Va a l g u n e etic Flux Compensation V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l % t: 0% 159 Sets the magnetic flux compensation as a percentage of the no-load current value (E2-03). Max: 1000% b4: Delay Timers No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page b4-01 Default: 0.0 s (1A3H) Timer Function On-Delay Time All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M M i a n x : : 0 3 . 0 0 0 s 0.0 s 160 b4-02 Timer Function Off-Delay Time o U u s t e p d u t t o i s s e tr t i g th g e e r o e n d - d b e y l a a y d a ig n i d t a o l f i f n -d p e u l t a p y r o ti g m ra e m s f m or e d a t d o i g H it 1 a - l tim e = r o 1 u 8 t ) p . ut (H2- = 12). The D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 s .0 s 160 (1A4H) Max: 3000.0 s b6: Dwell Function No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page Default: 0.0% b6-01 (1B6H) Dwell Speed at Start Min: 0.0% 160 Max: 100.0% Default: 0.0 s b6-02 (1B7H) Dwell Time at Start All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M M i a n x : : 0 1 . 0 0 . 0 s s 160 Parameters b6-01 and b6-02 set the speed to hold and the time to maintain that speed at start. Default: 0.0% (1 b B 6- 8 0 H 3 ) Dwell Speed at Stop Parameters b6-03 and b6-04 set the speed to hold and the time to maintain that speed at stop. Min: 0.0% 161 Max: 100.0% Default: 0.0 s b6-04 (1B9H) Dwell Time at Stop M M i a n x : : 0 1 . 0 0 . 0 s s 161 B
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| b1-01 (180H) | Speed Reference Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: Digital operator 1: Analog input terminals 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications 3: Option card | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 3 | 157 |
| b1-02 (181H) | Up/Down Command Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: Digital operator 1: Digital input terminals 2: MEMOBUS/Modbus communications 3: Option card | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 3 | 158 |
| b1-03 (182H) | Stopping Method Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Ramp to stop 1: Coast to stop 4: Elevator Emergency Stop Note: Setting 4 is available in the control mode CLV or CLV/PM for drives with software versions PRG: 7017 or later. The setting is 0 or 1 for software version PRG: 7016. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 4 | 158 |
| b1-06 (185H) | Digital Input Reading | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Input status is read once and processed immediately (for quick response). 1: Input is read twice and processed only if the status is the same in both readings (robust against noisy signals). | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 158 |
| b1-08 (187H) | Up/Down Command Selection while in Programming Mode | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Up/Down command not accepted while in the Programming Mode. 1: Up/Down command accepted while in the Programming Mode. 2: Prohibit entering Programming Mode during run. | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 159 |
| b1-14 (1C3H) | Phase Order Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: U-V-W 1: U-W-V | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 159 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| b2-08 (190H) | Magnetic Flux Compensation Value | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the magnetic flux compensation as a percentage of the no-load current value (E2-03). | Default: 0% Min: 0% Max: 1000% | 159 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| b4-01 (1A3H) | Timer Function On-Delay Time | common_ All Modes TMonly Used to set the on-delay and off-delay times for a digital timer output (H2- = 12). The output is triggered by a digital input programmed to H1- = 18). | Default: 0.0 s Min: 0.0 s Max: 3000.0 s | 160 |
| b4-02 (1A4H) | Timer Function Off-Delay Time | Default: 0.0 s Min: 0.0 s Max: 3000.0 s | 160 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| b6-01 (1B6H) | Dwell Speed at Start | All Modes common_ TMonly Parameters b6-01 and b6-02 set the speed to hold and the time to maintain that speed at start. Parameters b6-03 and b6-04 set the speed to hold and the time to maintain that speed at stop. | Default: 0.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 100.0% | 160 |
| b6-02 (1B7H) | Dwell Time at Start | Default: 0.0 s Min: 0.0 s Max: 10.0 s | 160 | |
| b6-03 (1B8H) | Dwell Speed at Stop | Default: 0.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 100.0% | 161 | |
| b6-04 (1B9H) | Dwell Time at Stop | Default: 0.0 s Min: 0.0 s Max: 10.0 s | 161 |
Source page
Page 356
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 356 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
b7: Droop Control
No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page (1 b C 7- A 0 H 1 ) V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0.0% Droop Control Gain Min: 0.0% 161 Sets the speed reduction gain applied at a torque reference of 100%. Set as a percentage of Max: 100.0% motor base speed. b7-02 (1CBH) Droop Control Delay Time V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 3 0 . s 05 s 161 Used to adjust the responsiveness of Droop Control. Max: 2.00 s b8: Energy Saving No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page b8-01 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (1CCH) Energy Saving Control Selection 0: Disabled M Ma in x : : 0 1 161 1: Enabled b8-16 Energy Saving Control Constant V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0.10 162 (1F8H) (Ki) Enter the Energy Saving value (Ki) as specified on the motor name plate. (for IPM motors only) Max: 2.00 b8-17 Energy Saving Control Constant V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 1.00 162 (1F9H) (Kt) Enter the Energy Saving value (Kt) as specified on the motor name plate. (for IPM motors only) Max: 2.00 C: Tuning C parameters are used to adjust the acceleration and deceleration ramps, jerk settings, slip compensation, torque compensation, and carrier frequency selections. C1: Acceleration and Deceleration Ramps
No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page C1-01 (200H) Acceleration Ramp 1 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 163 Sets the ramp to accelerate from 0 to maximum speed. C1-02 (201H) Deceleration Ramp 1 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 163 Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum speed to 0. C1-03 (202H) Acceleration Ramp 2 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 163 Sets the ramp to accelerate from 0 to maximum speed. C1-04 (203H) Deceleration Ramp 2 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 163 Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum speed to 0. C1-05 Default: 1.50 s<6><8> (204H) A A c c c c e e l l e T ra im tio e n 1 R ) amp 3 (Motor 2 Set A s l t l h M e r o a d m e p s to accelerate from 0 to maximum speed. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M M i a n x : : 0 6 . 0 0 0 0 . 0 s 0 s<6><8> 163 C1-06 (205H) Deceleration Ramp 3 (Motor 2 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 163 Decel Time 1) Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum speed to 0. C1-07 (206H) Acceleration Ramp 4 (Motor 2 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 163 Accel Time 2) Sets the ramp to accelerate from 0 to maximum speed. C1-08 (207H) Deceleration Ramp 4 (Motor 2 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 163 Decel Time 2) Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum speed to 0. C1-09 Emergency Stop Ramp All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 164 (208H) Sets the ramp for the Emergency Stop function. C1-10 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (209H) Accel/Decel Setting Resolution 0: 0.01 s unit M Ma in x : : 0 1 165 1: 0.1 s unit ( C 20 1 A -1 H 1 ) Accel/Decel Switching Speed All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : % 0.0% 164 Sets the speed to switch between accel/decel ramp settings. Max: 100.0% 356 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| b7-01 (1CAH) | Droop Control Gain | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the speed reduction gain applied at a torque reference of 100%. Set as a percentage of motor base speed. | Default: 0.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 100.0% | 161 |
| b7-02 (1CBH) | Droop Control Delay Time | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Used to adjust the responsiveness of Droop Control. | Default: 0.05 s Min: 0.03 s Max: 2.00 s | 161 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| b8-01 (1CCH) | Energy Saving Control Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Enabled | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 161 |
| b8-16 (1F8H) | Energy Saving Control Constant (Ki) | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Enter the Energy Saving value (Ki) as specified on the motor name plate. (for IPM motors only) | Default: 0.10 Min: 0.00 Max: 2.00 | 162 |
| b8-17 (1F9H) | Energy Saving Control Constant (Kt) | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Enter the Energy Saving value (Kt) as specified on the motor name plate. (for IPM motors only) | Default: 1.00 Min: 0.00 Max: 2.00 | 162 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C1-01 (200H) | Acceleration Ramp 1 | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the ramp to accelerate from 0 to maximum speed. | Default: 1.50 s<6><8> Min: 0.00 s Max: 600.00 s<6><8> | 163 |
| C1-02 (201H) | Deceleration Ramp 1 | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum speed to 0. | 163 | |
| C1-03 (202H) | Acceleration Ramp 2 | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the ramp to accelerate from 0 to maximum speed. | 163 | |
| C1-04 (203H) | Deceleration Ramp 2 | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum speed to 0. | 163 | |
| C1-05 (204H) | Acceleration Ramp 3 (Motor 2 Accel Time 1) | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the ramp to accelerate from 0 to maximum speed. | 163 | |
| C1-06 (205H) | Deceleration Ramp 3 (Motor 2 Decel Time 1) | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum speed to 0. | 163 | |
| C1-07 (206H) | Acceleration Ramp 4 (Motor 2 Accel Time 2) | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the ramp to accelerate from 0 to maximum speed. | 163 | |
| C1-08 (207H) | Deceleration Ramp 4 (Motor 2 Decel Time 2) | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the ramp to decelerate from maximum speed to 0. | 163 | |
| C1-09 (208H) | Emergency Stop Ramp | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the ramp for the Emergency Stop function. | 164 | |
| C1-10 (209H) | Accel/Decel Setting Resolution | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: 0.01 s unit 1: 0.1 s unit | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 165 |
| C1-11 (20AH) | Accel/Decel Switching Speed | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the speed to switch between accel/decel ramp settings. | Default: 0.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 100.0% | 164 |
Source page
Page 357
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 357 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 357 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1.0 s C1-12 (246H) Motor 2 Acceleration Time Sets the acceleration time for motor 2. Min: 0.0 s 165 Note: Parameter C1-12 determines the acceleration time for motor 2 as long as d1-27 is not set Max: 600.0 s to 0.00 Hz. C1-13 Motor 2 Acceleration Time V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 1 s . 0 s 165 (247H) Sets the deceleration time for motor 2. Max: 600.0 s C1-15 Inspection Deceleration Ramp All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0 . s 00 s <6><8> 165 (260H) Sets the deceleration ramp used for inspection run. Max: 2.00 s<6><8> <6> Setting ranges and defaults vary by the setting units determined by parameter o1-03. Refer to Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03) on page 397. <8> Setting range value is dependent on parameter C1-10, Accel/Decel Setting Resolution. When C1-10 = 0 (units of 0.01 seconds), the setting range becomes 0.00 to 600.00 seconds. C2: Jerk Settings No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page C2-01 Default: 0.50 s<6> (20BH) Jerk at Accel Start All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M M i a n x : : 0 1 . 0 0 . 0 0 0 s s<6> 165 ( C 20 2 C -0 H 2 ) Jerk at Accel End F be iv lo e w d . ifferent jerk values can be set. They are automatically applied as shown in the figure D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0 . s 50 s<6> 165 Max: 10.00 s<6> C2-03 Up/Do O wn u t c p o u m t s m p a e n e d d ON OFF Default: 0.50 s<6> (20DH) Jerk at Decel Start C2-02 C2-03 Min: 0.00 s 165 C2-01 C2-04 C2-05 Max: 10.00 s<6> ( C 20 2 E -0 H 4 ) Jerk at Decel End C2 T -0 im 5 e D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0 . s 50 s<6> 165 Max: 10.00 s<6> ( C 25 2 F -0 H 5 ) Jerk below Leveling Speed All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0 . s 50 s<6> 165 Sets the jerk used when the speed reference is lower than the leveling speed setting. Max: 10.00 s<6> <6> Setting ranges and defaults vary by the setting units determined by parameter o1-03. Refer to Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03) on page 397. C3: Slip Compensation No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page C3-01 (20FH) Slip Compensation Gain V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 1.0 166 Sets the gain for the motor slip compensation function. Max: 2.5 ( C 21 3 0 -0 H 2 ) S T l i i m p e Compensation Primary Delay V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t m : 2 s 000 ms 166 Adjusts the slip compensation function delay time. Max: 10000 ms C3-03 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 200% Slip Compensation Limit Min: 0% 166 (211H) Sets an upper limit for the slip compensation function as a percentage of motor rated slip for Max: 250% motor 1 (E2-02). V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 C3-04 Slip Compensation Selection (212H) during Regeneration 0: Disabled. Min: 0 166 1: Enabled above 6 Hz. Max: 2 2: Enabled whenever slip compensation is possible. V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ C3-05 Output Voltage Limit Operation 0: Disabled. M De in fa : u 0 lt: <5> 167 (213H) Selection 1: Enabled. Automatically decreases motor flux when output voltage saturation is reached. Max: 1 Note: Available control modes for parameter C3-05 vary by drive model: Models CIMR-L20008 to 20415, 40005 to 40216: Available when A1-02 = 2, 3 <5> Default setting is determined by the control mode (A1-02). C4: Torque Compensation No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page ( C 21 4 5 -0 H 1 ) V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1.00 Torque Compensation Gain Min: 0.00 168 Sets the gain for the automatic torque (voltage) boost function and helps to produce better Max: 2.50 B starting torque. C4-02 (216H) T D o e r l q a u y e T C im om e pensation Primary V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l t m : s <5> 168 Sets the torque compensation filter time. Max: 60000 ms
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C1-12 (246H) | Motor 2 Acceleration Time | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the acceleration time for motor 2. Note: Parameter C1-12 determines the acceleration time for motor 2 as long as d1-27 is not set to 0.00 Hz. | Default: 1.0 s Min: 0.0 s Max: 600.0 s | 165 |
| C1-13 (247H) | Motor 2 Acceleration Time | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the deceleration time for motor 2. | Default: 1.0 s Min: 0.0 s Max: 600.0 s | 165 |
| C1-15 (260H) | Inspection Deceleration Ramp | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the deceleration ramp used for inspection run. | Default: 0.00 s <6><8> Min: 0.00 s Max: 2.00 s<6><8> | 165 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C2-01 (20BH) | Jerk at Accel Start | All Modes common_ TMonly Five different jerk values can be set. They are automatically applied as shown in the figure below. Up/Down command ON OFF Output speed C2-02 C2-03 C2-01 C2-04 C2-05 C2-05 Time | Default: 0.50 s<6> Min: 0.00 s Max: 10.00 s<6> | 165 |
| C2-02 (20CH) | Jerk at Accel End | Default: 0.50 s<6> Min: 0.00 s Max: 10.00 s<6> | 165 | |
| C2-03 (20DH) | Jerk at Decel Start | Default: 0.50 s<6> Min: 0.00 s Max: 10.00 s<6> | 165 | |
| C2-04 (20EH) | Jerk at Decel End | Default: 0.50 s<6> Min: 0.00 s Max: 10.00 s<6> | 165 | |
| C2-05 (25FH) | Jerk below Leveling Speed | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the jerk used when the speed reference is lower than the leveling speed setting. | Default: 0.50 s<6> Min: 0.00 s Max: 10.00 s<6> | 165 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C3-01 (20FH) | Slip Compensation Gain | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the gain for the motor slip compensation function. | Default: 1.0 Min: 0.0 Max: 2.5 | 166 |
| C3-02 (210H) | Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Adjusts the slip compensation function delay time. | Default: 2000 ms Min: 0 ms Max: 10000 ms | 166 |
| C3-03 (211H) | Slip Compensation Limit | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets an upper limit for the slip compensation function as a percentage of motor rated slip for motor 1 (E2-02). | Default: 200% Min: 0% Max: 250% | 166 |
| C3-04 (212H) | Slip Compensation Selection during Regeneration | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled above 6 Hz. 2: Enabled whenever slip compensation is possible. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 166 |
| C3-05 (213H) | Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled. 1: Enabled. Automatically decreases motor flux when output voltage saturation is reached. Note: Available control modes for parameter C3-05 vary by drive model: Models CIMR-L20008 to 20415, 40005 to 40216: Available when A1-02 = 2, 3 | Default: <5> Min: 0 Max: 1 | 167 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C4-01 (215H) | Torque Compensation Gain | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the gain for the automatic torque (voltage) boost function and helps to produce better starting torque. | Default: 1.00 Min: 0.00 Max: 2.50 | 168 |
| C4-02 (216H) | Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the torque compensation filter time. | Default: <5> Min: 0 ms Max: 60000 ms | 168 |
Source page
Page 358
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 358 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page
( C 21 4 7 -0 H 3 ) T S o ta r r q t ue Compensation at Forward V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : % 0.0% 168 Sets torque compensation at forward start as a percentage of motor torque. Max: 200.0% C4-04 Torque Compensation at Reverse V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 2 t: 0 0 0 . . 0 0% % 168 (218H) Start Sets torque compensation at reverse start as a percentage of motor torque. Max: 0.0% C4-05 Torque Compensation Time V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t m : 1 s 0 ms 169 (219H) Constant Sets the time constant for torque compensation at forward start and reverse start (C4-03 and Max: 200 ms C4-04). <5> Default setting is determined by the control mode (A1-02). C5: Speed Control Loop Settings No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page C5-01 (21BH) Speed Control Loop Proportional V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 <5> 170 Gain 1 Sets the proportional gain 1 of the speed control loop. Max: 300.00 C5-02 (21CH) S 1 peed Control Loop Integral Time V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 < 0 5 > s 170 Sets the integral time 1 of the speed control loop. Max: 10.000 s C5-03 (21DH) Speed Control Loop Proportional V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 <5> 170 Gain 2 Sets the proportional gain 2 of the speed control loop. Max: 300.00 C5-04 (21EH) S 2 peed Control Loop Integral Time V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0 0 .5 s 00 s 170 Sets the integral time 2 of the speed control loop. Max: 10.000 s ( C 22 5 0 -0 H 6 ) S D p e e la e y d T C i o m n e tr C ol o L n o st o a p n t Primary V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0 0 .0 s 04 s 170 Sets the filter time constant for the time from the speed loop to the torque command output. Max: 0.500 s C5-07 Speed Control Settings Switching V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : % <5> 170 (221H) Speed Sets the speed for switching between proportional gain 1, 2, 3 and integral time 1, 2, 3. Max: 100.0% ( C 22 5 2 -0 H 8 ) Speed Control Loop Integral Limit V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l % t: 400% 171 Sets the speed control loop integral upper limit as a percentage of rated torque. Max: 400% C5-13 (272H) S G p a e in ed 3 Control Loop Proportional V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 <5> 170 Sets the proportional gain 3 of the speed control loop. Max: 300.00 C5-14 (273H) Speed Control Loop Integral Time V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e in fa : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 < 0 5> s 170 3 Sets the integral time 3 of the speed control loop. Max: 10.000 s C5-16 Speed Control Loop Delay Time V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0 0 .0 s 00 s 171 (271H) during Position Lock Sets a delay to the torque command output from speed control loop during Position Lock. Max: 0.500 s C5-17 Motor Inertia V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 < 0 4 1 > kgm2 171 (276H) Sets the motor inertia. Max: 600.00 kgm2 C5-18 Load Inertia Ratio V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 1.0 171 (277H) Sets the ratio between the motor and load inertia. Max: 6000.0 C5-19 (274H) Speed Control Loop Proportional V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De in fa : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 <5> 171 Gain Time during Position Lock Sets the Speed Control Loop Proportional gain used during Position Lock. Max: 300.00 C5-20 (275H) Speed Control Loop Integral Time V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 :0 0 . 0 1 0 s 0 s 171 during Position Lock Sets the Speed Control Loop Integral time used during Position Lock. Max: 10.000 s V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ C5-50 Sets the mechanical vibration filter frequency in units of 1 Hz. Default: 0 Hz (B14H) Set Vibrational Frequency Filter Note: Set C5-50 to 0 (Hz) to disable the filter. The frequencies from 1 to 19 Hz cannot be set. Min: 20 Hz 171 <45> Test equipment may be required to determine the mechanical resonance frequency. Setting Max: 1000 Hz C5-50 to an improper frequency will result in ineffective filtering of the effects of mechanical resonance. <4> Default setting value varies by the drive model (o2-04). <5> Default setting is determined by the control mode (A1-02). <45> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7200 or later. 358 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C4-03 (217H) | Torque Compensation at Forward Start | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets torque compensation at forward start as a percentage of motor torque. | Default: 0.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 200.0% | 168 |
| C4-04 (218H) | Torque Compensation at Reverse Start | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets torque compensation at reverse start as a percentage of motor torque. | Default: 0.0% Min: -200.0% Max: 0.0% | 168 |
| C4-05 (219H) | Torque Compensation Time Constant | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the time constant for torque compensation at forward start and reverse start (C4-03 and C4-04). | Default: 10 ms Min: 0 ms Max: 200 ms | 169 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C5-01 (21BH) | Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 1 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the proportional gain 1 of the speed control loop. | Default: <5> Min: 0.00 Max: 300.00 | 170 |
| C5-02 (21CH) | Speed Control Loop Integral Time 1 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the integral time 1 of the speed control loop. | Default: <5> Min: 0.000 s Max: 10.000 s | 170 |
| C5-03 (21DH) | Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 2 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the proportional gain 2 of the speed control loop. | Default: <5> Min: 0.00 Max: 300.00 | 170 |
| C5-04 (21EH) | Speed Control Loop Integral Time 2 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the integral time 2 of the speed control loop. | Default: 0.500 s Min: 0.000 s Max: 10.000 s | 170 |
| C5-06 (220H) | Speed Control Loop Primary Delay Time Constant | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the filter time constant for the time from the speed loop to the torque command output. | Default: 0.004 s Min: 0.000 s Max: 0.500 s | 170 |
| C5-07 (221H) | Speed Control Settings Switching Speed | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the speed for switching between proportional gain 1, 2, 3 and integral time 1, 2, 3. | Default: <5> Min: 0.0% Max: 100.0% | 170 |
| C5-08 (222H) | Speed Control Loop Integral Limit | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the speed control loop integral upper limit as a percentage of rated torque. | Default: 400% Min: 0% Max: 400% | 171 |
| C5-13 (272H) | Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 3 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the proportional gain 3 of the speed control loop. | Default:<5> Min: 0.00 Max: 300.00 | 170 |
| C5-14 (273H) | Speed Control Loop Integral Time 3 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the integral time 3 of the speed control loop. | Default:<5> Min: 0.000 s Max: 10.000 s | 170 |
| C5-16 (271H) | Speed Control Loop Delay Time during Position Lock | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets a delay to the torque command output from speed control loop during Position Lock. | Default: 0.000 s Min: 0.000 s Max: 0.500 s | 171 |
| C5-17 (276H) | Motor Inertia | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the motor inertia. | Default: <4> Min: 0.0001 kgm2 Max: 600.00 kgm2 | 171 |
| C5-18 (277H) | Load Inertia Ratio | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the ratio between the motor and load inertia. | Default: 1.0 Min: 0.0 Max: 6000.0 | 171 |
| C5-19 (274H) | Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain Time during Position Lock | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the Speed Control Loop Proportional gain used during Position Lock. | Default:<5> Min: 0.00 Max: 300.00 | 171 |
| C5-20 (275H) | Speed Control Loop Integral Time during Position Lock | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the Speed Control Loop Integral time used during Position Lock. | Default:0.100 s Min: 0.000 s Max: 10.000 s | 171 |
| C5-50 (B14H) <45> | Set Vibrational Frequency Filter | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the mechanical vibration filter frequency in units of 1 Hz. Note: Set C5-50 to 0 (Hz) to disable the filter. The frequencies from 1 to 19 Hz cannot be set. Test equipment may be required to determine the mechanical resonance frequency. Setting C5-50 to an improper frequency will result in ineffective filtering of the effects of mechanical resonance. | Default: 0 Hz Min: 20 Hz Max: 1000 Hz | 171 |
Source page
Page 359
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 359 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 359 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 C6: Carrier Frequency No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page ( C 22 6 5 -0 H 3 ) Carrier Frequency All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 1 l . t 0 : k < H 4> z 172 Sets the carrier frequency. Max: 15.0 kHz All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ C6-06 PWM Method Selects PWM modulation method. D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 172 (228H) 0: 2-phase/3-phase conversion Max: 2 1: 2-phase modulation 2: 3-phase modulation C6-09 Carrier Frequency during V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 172 (22BH) Rotational Auto-Tuning 0: Carrier Frequency = 5 kHz Max: 1 1: Setting value for C6-03 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 C6-21 Inspection Operation Carrier (245H) Frequency Sets the carrier frequency during Inspection Run. Min: 0 172 0: Setting value for C6-03 Max: 1 1: Carrier Frequency = 2 kHz C6-23 Carrier Frequency during Initial V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (25EH) Motor Pole Search S 0: e t C s a t r h r e ie c r a F rr r i e e q r u f e r n eq cy u e = n c 2 y k w H h z en estimating the initial polarity. M M i a n x : : 0 1 172 1: Setting value for C6-03 C6-31 Carrier Frequency during Rescue All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (7 < 7 3 A 9 H > ) Operation S 0: e t C s 6 th -0 e 3 c s a e rr tt i i e n r g frequency during Rescue Operation. M M i a n x : : 0 1 172 1: 2 kHz <4> Default setting value varies by the drive model (o2-04). <39> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7016 or later. d: Speed References Speed Reference parameters are used to set the various speed reference values during operation. d1: Speed Reference No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page d1-01 (280H) Speed Reference 1 173 d1-02 (281H) Speed Reference 2 173 d1-03 (282H) Speed Reference 3 173 d1-04 (283H) Speed Reference 4 173 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0.00%<6> Min: 0.00% ( d 2 1 8 - 4 0 H 5 ) b S y et p s a th ra e m S e p t e e e r d o 1 re -0 fe 3 r . ence for the drive when d1-18 is set to 0 or 3. Setting units are determined Max: 100.00%<6> Speed Reference 5 173 d1-06 (285H) Speed Reference 6 173 d1-07 (286H) Speed Reference 7 173 d1-08 (287H) Speed Reference 8 173 B
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| C6-03 (225H) | Carrier Frequency | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the carrier frequency. | Default: <4> Min: 1.0 kHz Max: 15.0 kHz | 172 |
| C6-06 (228H) | PWM Method | common_ All Modes TMonly Selects PWM modulation method. 0: 2-phase/3-phase conversion 1: 2-phase modulation 2: 3-phase modulation | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 172 |
| C6-09 (22BH) | Carrier Frequency during Rotational Auto-Tuning | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Carrier Frequency = 5 kHz 1: Setting value for C6-03 | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 172 |
| C6-21 (245H) | Inspection Operation Carrier Frequency | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the carrier frequency during Inspection Run. 0: Setting value for C6-03 1: Carrier Frequency = 2 kHz | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 172 |
| C6-23 (25EH) | Carrier Frequency during Initial Motor Pole Search | V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM common_ TMonly Sets the carrier frequency when estimating the initial polarity. 0: Carrier Frequency = 2 kHz 1: Setting value for C6-03 | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 172 |
| C6-31 (77AH) <39> | Carrier Frequency during Rescue Operation | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the carrier frequency during Rescue Operation. 0: C6-03 setting 1: 2 kHz | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 172 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| d1-01 (280H) | Speed Reference 1 | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the Speed reference for the drive when d1-18 is set to 0 or 3. Setting units are determined by parameter o1-03. | Default: 0.00%<6> Min: 0.00% Max: 100.00%<6> | 173 |
| d1-02 (281H) | Speed Reference 2 | 173 | ||
| d1-03 (282H) | Speed Reference 3 | 173 | ||
| d1-04 (283H) | Speed Reference 4 | 173 | ||
| d1-05 (284H) | Speed Reference 5 | 173 | ||
| d1-06 (285H) | Speed Reference 6 | 173 | ||
| d1-07 (286H) | Speed Reference 7 | 173 | ||
| d1-08 (287H) | Speed Reference 8 | 173 |
Source page
Page 360
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 360 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _
d1-18 Speed Reference Selection Mode S 0: e t U s s t e h e m m ul o t d i- e s p o e f e s d p r e e e f d e r r e e n fe c r e e s n ( c d e 1 s -0 el 1 e c to ti o d n 1 - b 0 y 8 ) digital inputs. D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 1 173 (2C0H) 1: High speed reference has priority (d1-19 to d1-23, d1-26) Max: 3 2: Leveling speed reference has priority (d1-19 to d1-23, d1-26) 3: Use multi-speed references d1-02 to d1-08, no speed selection stops the drive. Drive will stop when all input terminals programmed for speed references (H1- = 3, 4, 5) are open. d1-19 (2C1H) Nominal Speed All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 1 % 00.00%<6> 174 Sets the nominal speed reference when d1-18 = 1 or 2. Max: 100.00%<6> d1-20 (2C2H) Intermediate Speed 1 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0 % .00%<6> 174 Sets intermediate speed reference 1 when d1-18 = 1 or 2. Max: 100.00%<6> d1-21 (2C3H) Intermediate Speed 2 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0 % .00%<6> 174 Sets intermediate speed reference 2 when d1-18 = 1 or 2. Max: 100.00%<6> d1-22 (2C4H) Intermediate Speed 3 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0 % .00%<6> 174 Sets intermediate speed reference 3 when d1-18 = 1 or 3. Max: 100.00%<6> d1-23 (2C5H) Releveling Speed All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0 % .00%<6> 174 Sets speed reference for releveling when d1-18 = 1 or 2. Max: 100.00%<6> d1-24 (2C6H) Inspection Operation Speed All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 5 % 0.00%<6> 174 Sets speed reference when inspection operation is enabled. Max: 100.00%<6> d1-25 (2C7H) Rescue Operation Speed All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 1 % 0.00%<6> 174 Sets the speed reference during inspection operation. Max: 100.00%<6> d1-26 (2C8H) Leveling Speed All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 8 % .00%<6> 174 Sets leveling speed reference when d1-18 = 1 or 2. Max: 100.00%<6> V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ d1-27 Sets the speed reference for motor 2. Default: 0.00 Hz (2C9H) Motor 2 Speed Reference Note: Min: 0.00 Hz 175 1. If set to 0.00, the drive will control motor 1 instead. Max: 200.00 Hz 2. When using motor 2, be sure that the accel/decel times are set in parameters C1-12 and C1-13. d1-28 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0.0% (2CAH) Leveling Speed Detection Level Used when d1-18 = 0 or 3. If the speed reference selected is lower than d1-28, then the drive M M i a n x : : 0 1 . 0 0 0 % .0% 175 uses the leveling speed as the speed reference. d1-29 Inspection Speed Detection Level All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : % 0.0% 175 (2CBH) Used when d1-18 = 0 or 3. If the speed reference selected is higher than d1-28 but lower or Max: 100.0% equal to d1-29, then the drive uses inspection speed as the speed reference. <6> Setting ranges and defaults vary by the setting units determined by parameter o1-03. Refer to Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03) on page 397. d6: Field Forcing No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page d6-03 Field Forcing Selection V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 175 (2A2H) 0: Disabled Max: 1 1: Enabled d6-06 Field Forcing Limit V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 1 l 0 t: 0 4 % 00% 175 (2A5H) Sets the upper limit of the excitation current command during magnetic field forcing. A setting Max: 400% of 100% is equal to motor no-load current. Disabled only during DC Injection Braking.
360 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| d1-18 (2C0H) | Speed Reference Selection Mode | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the mode of speed reference selection by digital inputs. 0: Use multi-speed references (d1-01 to d1-08) 1: High speed reference has priority (d1-19 to d1-23, d1-26) 2: Leveling speed reference has priority (d1-19 to d1-23, d1-26) 3: Use multi-speed references d1-02 to d1-08, no speed selection stops the drive. Drive will stop when all input terminals programmed for speed references (H1- = 3, 4, 5) are open. | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 3 | 173 |
| d1-19 (2C1H) | Nominal Speed | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the nominal speed reference when d1-18 = 1 or 2. | Default: 100.00%<6> Min: 0.00% Max: 100.00%<6> | 174 |
| d1-20 (2C2H) | Intermediate Speed 1 | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets intermediate speed reference 1 when d1-18 = 1 or 2. | Default: 0.00%<6> Min: 0.00% Max: 100.00%<6> | 174 |
| d1-21 (2C3H) | Intermediate Speed 2 | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets intermediate speed reference 2 when d1-18 = 1 or 2. | Default: 0.00%<6> Min: 0.00% Max: 100.00%<6> | 174 |
| d1-22 (2C4H) | Intermediate Speed 3 | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets intermediate speed reference 3 when d1-18 = 1 or 3. | Default: 0.00%<6> Min: 0.00% Max: 100.00%<6> | 174 |
| d1-23 (2C5H) | Releveling Speed | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets speed reference for releveling when d1-18 = 1 or 2. | Default: 0.00%<6> Min: 0.00% Max: 100.00%<6> | 174 |
| d1-24 (2C6H) | Inspection Operation Speed | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets speed reference when inspection operation is enabled. | Default: 50.00%<6> Min: 0.00% Max: 100.00%<6> | 174 |
| d1-25 (2C7H) | Rescue Operation Speed | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the speed reference during inspection operation. | Default: 10.00%<6> Min: 0.00% Max: 100.00%<6> | 174 |
| d1-26 (2C8H) | Leveling Speed | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets leveling speed reference when d1-18 = 1 or 2. | Default: 8.00%<6> Min: 0.00% Max: 100.00%<6> | 174 |
| d1-27 (2C9H) | Motor 2 Speed Reference | V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM common_ TMonly Sets the speed reference for motor 2. Note: 1. If set to 0.00, the drive will control motor 1 instead. 2. When using motor 2, be sure that the accel/decel times are set in parameters C1-12 and C1-13. | Default: 0.00 Hz Min: 0.00 Hz Max: 200.00 Hz | 175 |
| d1-28 (2CAH) | Leveling Speed Detection Level | All Modes common_ TMonly Used when d1-18 = 0 or 3. If the speed reference selected is lower than d1-28, then the drive uses the leveling speed as the speed reference. | Default: 0.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 100.0% | 175 |
| d1-29 (2CBH) | Inspection Speed Detection Level | All Modes common_ TMonly Used when d1-18 = 0 or 3. If the speed reference selected is higher than d1-28 but lower or equal to d1-29, then the drive uses inspection speed as the speed reference. | Default: 0.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 100.0% | 175 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| d6-03 (2A2H) | Field Forcing Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Enabled | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 175 |
| d6-06 (2A5H) | Field Forcing Limit | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the upper limit of the excitation current command during magnetic field forcing. A setting of 100% is equal to motor no-load current. Disabled only during DC Injection Braking. | Default: 400% Min: 100% Max: 400% | 175 |
Source page
Page 361
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 361 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 361 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 E: Motor Parameters E1: V/f Pattern No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ E1-01 Input Voltage Setting This parameter must be set to the power supply voltage. M De i f n a : u 1 l 5 t: 5 2 V 00 V <9> 176 (300H) W E1 A -0 R 1 N fo IN r t G he ! E pr l o ec te tr c i t c iv al e S fe h a o t c u k r e H s a o z f a t r h d e . d D r r i i v v e e t o in f p u u n t c v ti o o l n ta p g r e o ( p n e o r t l y m . F o a to il r u v re o l t t o a g d e o ) s m o u m st a b y e r e s s e u t l i t n i n Max: 255 V<9> equipment damage and/or death or personal injury. ( E 30 1 2 -0 H 3 ) V/f Pattern Selection V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - lt: F 176 F: Custom V/f, E1-04 through E1-13 settings define the V/f pattern Max: F ( E 30 1 3 -0 H 4 ) Maximum Output Frequency M De i f n a : u < lt 2 : 3 < > 5> 176 Max: 200.0 Hz E1-05 Maximum Voltage All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 1 V 90.0 V<9> 176 (304H) To set linear V/f characteristics, set the same values for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the Max: 255.0 V<9> ( E 30 1 5 -0 H 6 ) Base Frequency s r E u e 1 t le t - i 0 s n : 9 g ≤ fo E r 1 E - 1 0 - 7 0 < 8 E w 1 il - l 0 b 6 e ≤ d i Ε s 1 re − g 1 a 1 r d ≤ e d E . 1 E -0 n 4 sure that the five frequencies are set according to these M M De i a f n x a : : u 0 2 l . t 0 0 : 0 < H . 5 0 > z Hz 176 Note that if E1-11 = 0, then both E1-11 and E1-12 are disabled, and the above conditions do not E1-07 Middle Output Frequency apply. D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 3 H .0 z Hz 176 (306H) Output Voltage (V) Max: 200.0 Hz E1-05 E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Voltage E1-12 M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : V <2><9> 176 (307H) E1-13 Max: 255.0 V<9> E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : H <5 z > 176 (308H) E1-08 Max: 200.0 Hz ( E 30 1 9 -1 H 0 ) M Vo i l n ta im ge um Output Frequency E1-10 M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : V <2><9> 176 Max: 255.0 V<9> E1-11 E1-09 E1-07 E1-06 E1-11E1-04 Default: 0.0 Hz (30AH) Middle Output Frequency 2 Note: Some parameters may not be availab F le re d q e u p e e n n c d y i ( n H g z o ) n the control mode. Min: 0.0 Hz 176 <11> • E1-07, E1-08 and E-10 are available only in the V/f control and Open Loop Vector control Max: 120.0 Hz E1-12 modes. Default: 0.0 V<9> (30BH) Middle Output Frequency Voltage 2 • E1-11, E1-12 and E-13 are available only in the V/f control and Closed Loop Vector control Min: 0.0 V 176 <11> modes. Max: 255.0 V<9> E1-13 Default: 0.0 V<9> (30CH) Base Voltage Min: 0.0 V 176 <13> Max: 255.0 V<9> <2> Default setting is dependent on the control mode (A1-02) and the drive model (o2-04). <5> Default setting is determined by the control mode (A1-02). <9> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double the value when using a 400 V class drive. <11> Parameter is ignored when E1-11 and E1-12 are set to 0.0. <13> When E1-13 (Base Voltage) is set to 0.0, output voltage is controlled with E1-05 (Maximum Voltage) = E1-13. When Auto-Tuning is performed, E1-05 and E1-13 are automatically set to the same value. <23> Setting range depends on the type of motor being used. CLV allows a setting range of 10.0 to 200.0 Hz, while CLV/PM allows a setting range of 4.0 to 200.0 Hz. E2: Motor Parameters No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page Default: <4> ( E 30 2 E -0 H 1 ) Motor Rated Current V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M cu i r n re : n 1 t 0% of drive rated 177 Sets the motor nameplate full load current in Amps. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Max: 200% of drive rated current<10> ( E 30 2 F -0 H 2 ) Motor Rated Slip V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 < H 4> z 177 Sets the motor rated slip. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Max: 20.00 Hz E2-03 Motor No-Load Current V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l t A : <4> 178 (310H) Sets the no-load current for the motor. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Max: E2-01<10> ( E 3 2 11 -0 H 4 ) Number of Motor Poles V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 2 lt: 4 178 Sets the number of motor poles. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Max: 48 E2-05 Motor Line-to-Line Resistance V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 < 0 4 > Ω 178 (312H) Sets the phase-to-phase motor resistance. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Max: 65.000 Ω B E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : % <4> 178 (313H) Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of motor rated voltage. Max: 40.0% Automatically set during Auto-Tuning.
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| E1-01 (300H) | Input Voltage Setting | All Modes common_ TMonly This parameter must be set to the power supply voltage. WARNING! Electrical Shock Hazard. Drive input voltage (not motor voltage) must be set in E1-01 for the protective features of the drive to function properly. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage and/or death or personal injury. | Default: 200 V <9> Min: 155 V Max: 255 V<9> | 176 |
| E1-03 (302H) | V/f Pattern Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly F: Custom V/f, E1-04 through E1-13 settings define the V/f pattern | Default: F Min: - Max: F | 176 |
| E1-04 (303H) | Maximum Output Frequency | common_ All Modes TMonly To set linear V/f characteristics, set the same values for E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-08 will be disregarded. Ensure that the five frequencies are set according to these rules: E1-09 ≤ E1-07 < E1-06 ≤ Ε1−11 ≤ E1-04 Note that if E1-11 = 0, then both E1-11 and E1-12 are disabled, and the above conditions do not apply. Output Voltage (V) E1-05 E1-12 E1-13 E1-08 E1-10 E1-09 E1-07 E1-06E1-11E1-04 Frequency (Hz) Note: Some parameters may not be available depending on the control mode. • E1-07, E1-08 and E-10 are available only in the V/f control and Open Loop Vector control modes. • E1-11, E1-12 and E-13 are available only in the V/f control and Closed Loop Vector control modes. | Default: <5> Min: <23> Max: 200.0 Hz | 176 |
| E1-05 (304H) | Maximum Voltage | Default: 190.0 V<9> Min: 0.0 V Max: 255.0 V<9> | 176 | |
| E1-06 (305H) | Base Frequency | Default:<5> Min: 0.0 Hz Max: 200.0 Hz | 176 | |
| E1-07 (306H) | Middle Output Frequency | Default: 3.0 Hz Min: 0.0 Hz Max: 200.0 Hz | 176 | |
| E1-08 (307H) | Middle Output Frequency Voltage | Default: <2><9> Min: 0.0 V Max: 255.0 V<9> | 176 | |
| E1-09 (308H) | Minimum Output Frequency | Default: <5> Min: 0.0 Hz Max: 200.0 Hz | 176 | |
| E1-10 (309H) | Minimum Output Frequency Voltage | Default: <2><9> Min: 0.0 V Max: 255.0 V<9> | 176 | |
| E1-11 (30AH) <11> | Middle Output Frequency 2 | Default: 0.0 Hz Min: 0.0 Hz Max: 120.0 Hz | 176 | |
| E1-12 (30BH) <11> | Middle Output Frequency Voltage 2 | Default: 0.0 V<9> Min: 0.0 V Max: 255.0 V<9> | 176 | |
| E1-13 (30CH) <13> | Base Voltage | Default: 0.0 V<9> Min: 0.0 V Max: 255.0 V<9> | 176 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| E2-01 (30EH) | Motor Rated Current | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the motor nameplate full load current in Amps. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. | Default: <4> Min: 10% of drive rated current Max: 200% of drive rated current<10> | 177 |
| E2-02 (30FH) | Motor Rated Slip | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the motor rated slip. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. | Default: <4> Min: 0.00 Hz Max: 20.00 Hz | 177 |
| E2-03 (310H) | Motor No-Load Current | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the no-load current for the motor. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. | Default: <4> Min: 0 A Max: E2-01<10> | 178 |
| E2-04 (311H) | Number of Motor Poles | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the number of motor poles. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. | Default: 4 Min: 2 Max: 48 | 178 |
| E2-05 (312H) | Motor Line-to-Line Resistance | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the phase-to-phase motor resistance. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. | Default: <4> Min: 0.000 Ω Max: 65.000 Ω | 178 |
| E2-06 (313H) | Motor Leakage Inductance | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of motor rated voltage. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. | Default: <4> Min: 0.0% Max: 40.0% | 178 |
Source page
Page 362
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 362 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page
E2-07 Motor Iron-Core Saturation V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0.50 178 (314H) Coefficient 1 Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux. Automatically set during Max: 0.50 Auto-Tuning. E2-08 Motor Iron-Core Saturation V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u E lt 2 : - 0 0 . 7 75 178 (315H) Coefficient 2 Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux. Automatically set during Max: 0.75 Auto-Tuning. E2-09 Motor Mechanical Loss V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : % 0.0% 179 (316H) Sets the motor mechanical loss as a percentage of motor rated power (kW). Max: 10.0% E2-10 Motor Iron Loss for Torque V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De in fa : u 0 l t W : <4> 179 (317H) Compensation Sets the motor iron loss. Max: 65535 W E2-11 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: <4> Motor Rated Power Min: 0.00 kW 179 (318H) Sets the motor rated power in kilowatts (1 HP = 0.746 kW). Automatically set during Max: 650.00 kW Auto-Tuning. <4> Default setting value varies by the drive model (o2-04). <10> The display resolution depends on the rated output power of the drive. Models CIMR-L20008 to 20033 and 40005 to 40018 display values in 0.01 A units, while models CIMR-L20047 to 20415 and 40024 to 40216 display values in 0.1 A units. E3: V/f Pattern for Motor 2 These parameters are hidden when a PM motor control mode has been selected for motor 1 (A1-02 = 7). No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page E3-04 Default: 50.0 Hz Motor 2 Maximum Output (3 < 1 3 A 1 H > ) Frequency V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M M i a n x : : 1 2 0 0 . 0 0 . 0 H H z z 180 E3-05 These parameters are only applicable when E1-03 is set to F. Default: 190.0 V<9> (31BH) Motor 2 Maximum Voltage To set linear V/f characteristics, set the same values for E3-07 and E3-09. In this case, the Min: 0.0 V 180 <31> setting for E3-08 will be disregarded. Ensure that the four frequencies are set according to these Max: 255.0 V<9> E3-06 rules or an oPE10 fault will occur: Default: 50.0 Hz (31CH) Motor 2 Base Frequency E3-09 ≤ E3-07 < E3-06 ≤ E3-04 Min: 0.0 Hz 180 <31> Max: 200.0 Hz E3-07 Output Voltage (V) Default: 3.0 Hz (31DH) Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency E3-05 Min: 0.0 Hz 180 <31> Max: 200.0 Hz E3-08 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Default: <4><9> (31EH) Voltage Min: 0.0 V 180 <31> E3-08 Max: 255.0 V<9> E3-09 Default: 0.5 Hz Motor 2 Minimum Output (31FH) Frequency E3-10 Min: 0.0 Hz 180 <31> E3-09 E3-07 E3-04 Max: 200.0 Hz E3-10 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency (Hz) Default: <4><9> (320H) Frequency Voltage Min: 0.0 V 180 <31> Max: 255.0 V<9> <4> Default setting value is dependent on the drive model (o2-04). <9> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double the value when using a 400 V class drive. <31> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7012 or later. E4: Motor 2 Parameters These parameters are hidden when a PM motor control mode has been selected for motor 1 (A1-02 = 7). No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page Default: <4> ( E 3 4 2 - 1 0 H 1 ) Motor 2 Rated Current V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M cu i r n re : n 1 t 0% of drive rated 181 Sets the full load current for motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Max: 200% of drive rated current <10> E4-02 Motor 2 Rated Slip V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 < H 4> z 181 (322H) Sets the rated slip for motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: 20.00 Hz E4-03 Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l t A : <4> 181 (323H) Sets the no-load current for motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Min: [E4-01] <10> E4-04 Motor 2 Motor Poles V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 2 lt: 4 181 (324H) Sets the number of poles of motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Max: 48 E4-05 Motor 2 Line-to-Line Resistance V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De in fa : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 < 0 4 > Ω 181 (325H) Sets the phase-to-phase resistance for motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. Max: 65.000 Ω 362 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| E2-07 (314H) | Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 1 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. | Default: 0.50 Min: 0.00 Max: 0.50 | 178 |
| E2-08 (315H) | Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 2 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. | Default: 0.75 Min: E2-07 Max: 0.75 | 178 |
| E2-09 (316H) | Motor Mechanical Loss | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the motor mechanical loss as a percentage of motor rated power (kW). | Default: 0.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 10.0% | 179 |
| E2-10 (317H) | Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the motor iron loss. | Default: <4> Min: 0 W Max: 65535 W | 179 |
| E2-11 (318H) | Motor Rated Power | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the motor rated power in kilowatts (1 HP = 0.746 kW). Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. | Default: <4> Min: 0.00 kW Max: 650.00 kW | 179 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| E3-04 (31AH) <31> | Motor 2 Maximum Output Frequency | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly These parameters are only applicable when E1-03 is set to F. To set linear V/f characteristics, set the same values for E3-07 and E3-09. In this case, the setting for E3-08 will be disregarded. Ensure that the four frequencies are set according to these rules or an oPE10 fault will occur: E3-09 ≤ E3-07 < E3-06 ≤ E3-04 Output Voltage (V) E3-05 E3-08 E3-10 E3-09 E3-07 E3-04 Frequency (Hz) | Default: 50.0 Hz Min: 10.0 Hz Max: 200.0 Hz | 180 |
| E3-05 (31BH) <31> | Motor 2 Maximum Voltage | Default: 190.0 V<9> Min: 0.0 V Max: 255.0 V<9> | 180 | |
| E3-06 (31CH) <31> | Motor 2 Base Frequency | Default: 50.0 Hz Min: 0.0 Hz Max: 200.0 Hz | 180 | |
| E3-07 (31DH) <31> | Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency | Default: 3.0 Hz Min: 0.0 Hz Max: 200.0 Hz | 180 | |
| E3-08 (31EH) <31> | Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage | Default: <4><9> Min: 0.0 V Max: 255.0 V<9> | 180 | |
| E3-09 (31FH) <31> | Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency | Default: 0.5 Hz Min: 0.0 Hz Max: 200.0 Hz | 180 | |
| E3-10 (320H) <31> | Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage | Default: <4><9> Min: 0.0 V Max: 255.0 V<9> | 180 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| E4-01 (321H) | Motor 2 Rated Current | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the full load current for motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. | Default: <4> Min: 10% of drive rated current Max: 200% of drive rated current <10> | 181 |
| E4-02 (322H) | Motor 2 Rated Slip | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the rated slip for motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. | Default: <4> Min: 0.00 Hz Min: 20.00 Hz | 181 |
| E4-03 (323H) | Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the no-load current for motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. | Default: <4> Min: 0 A Min: [E4-01] <10> | 181 |
| E4-04 (324H) | Motor 2 Motor Poles | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the number of poles of motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. | Default: 4 Min: 2 Max: 48 | 181 |
| E4-05 (325H) | Motor 2 Line-to-Line Resistance | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the phase-to-phase resistance for motor 2. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. | Default: <4> Min: 0.000 Ω Max: 65.000 Ω | 181 |
Source page
Page 363
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 363 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 363 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page E4-06 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: <4> Motor 2 Leakage Inductance Min: 0.0% 182 (326H) Sets the voltage drop for motor 2 due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of rated Max: 40.0% voltage. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. <4> Default setting value is dependent on the drive model (o2-04). <10> The display resolution depends on the rated output power of the drive. Models CIMR-L20008 to 20033 and 40005 to 40018 display values in 0.01 A units, while models CIMR-L20047 to 20415 and 40024 to 40216 display values in 0.1 A units. E5: PM Motor Settings No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page (3 E 2 5 A -0 H 2 ) Motor Rated Power V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 1 : 0 < k 4> W 182 <1> Sets the rated capacity of the motor. Max: 650.00 kW Default: <4> ( E 32 5 B -0 H 3 ) Motor Rated Current V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M cu i r n re : n 1 t 0% of drive rated 182 <1> Sets the motor rated current. Max: 200% of drive rated current<10> ( E 32 5 C -0 H 4 ) Number of Motor Poles V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 2 lt: 12 182 <1> Sets the number of motor poles. Max: 120<43> (3 E 2 5 < D - 1 0 > H 5 ) M (S o in t g o l r e S P ta h t a o s r e R ) esistance Sets the V s / t f ator resistance O (1 L p V hase value). CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M M De i a f n x a : : u 0 6 l . t 5 0 : . 0 0 < 0 0 4 0 > Ω Ω 182 ( E 32 5 E -0 H 6 ) Motor d-Axis Inductance V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 < m 4> H 182 <1> Sets the d-axis inductance. Max: 600.00 mH ( E 32 5 F -0 H 7 ) Motor q-Axis Inductance V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 < m 4> H 182 <1> Sets the q-axis inductance. Max: 600.00 mH E5-09 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : m <4 V > /(rad/s) (331H) Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 183 Sets the induced phase peak voltage in units of 0.1 mV (rad/s) [electrical angle]. Max: <1> When setting this parameter, E5-24 should be set to 0.0. 6500.0 mV/(rad/s) E5-11 Encoder Offset V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 1 t: 8 0 0 . d 0 e d g eg 183 (333H) Sets the offset between the rotor magnetic axis and the encoder zero position. Set during Max: 180 deg Encoder Offset Tuning. Default: E5-24 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 0 M .0 in m : V/(r/min) 183 (353H) Sets the induced phase-to-phase rms voltage in units of 0.1 mV/(r/min) [mechanical angle]. 0.0 mV/(r/min) When setting this parameter, E5-09 should be set to 0.0. Max: 6500.0 mV/(r/min) <1> Parameter setting value is not reset to the default value when the drive is initialized. <4> Default setting value is determined by the drive model (o2-04). <10> The display resolution depends on the rated output power of the drive. Models CIMR-L20008 to 20033 and 40005 to 40018 display values in 0.01 A units, while models CIMR-L20047 to 20415 and 40024 to 40216 display values in 0.1 A units. <43> When PG-E3 option connected: Max setting = 48 F: Option Settings F parameters are used to program the drive for Encoder and PG feedback from the motor and to function with option cards. F1: PG Speed Control Card No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page F1-01 Encoder 1 Resolution V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 1 l t p : p < r 5> 184 (380H) Sets the encoder resolution (number of pulses per revolution) Max: 60000 ppr<34> V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 ( F 3 1 8 - 1 0 H 2 ) O Ci p r e c r u a i t t i o (P n G S o e ) lection at PG Open 0 1 : : R C a o m as p t t t o o s s t t o o p p . . Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-02. M M i a n x : : 0 3 184 B 2: Emergency Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. 3: Alarm only.
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| E4-06 (326H) | Motor 2 Leakage Inductance | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the voltage drop for motor 2 due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of rated voltage. Automatically set during Auto-Tuning. | Default: <4> Min: 0.0% Max: 40.0% | 182 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| E5-02 (32AH) <1> | Motor Rated Power | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the rated capacity of the motor. | Default: <4> Min: 0.10 kW Max: 650.00 kW | 182 |
| E5-03 (32BH) <1> | Motor Rated Current | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the motor rated current. | Default: <4> Min: 10% of drive rated current Max: 200% of drive rated current<10> | 182 |
| E5-04 (32CH) <1> | Number of Motor Poles | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the number of motor poles. | Default: 12 Min: 2 Max: 120<43> | 182 |
| E5-05 (32DH) <1> | Motor Stator Resistance (Single Phase) | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the stator resistance (1 phase value). | Default: <4> Min: 0.000 Ω Max: 65.000 Ω | 182 |
| E5-06 (32EH) <1> | Motor d-Axis Inductance | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the d-axis inductance. | Default: <4> Min: 0.00 mH Max: 600.00 mH | 182 |
| E5-07 (32FH) <1> | Motor q-Axis Inductance | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the q-axis inductance. | Default: <4> Min: 0.00 mH Max: 600.00 mH | 182 |
| E5-09 (331H) <1> | Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the induced phase peak voltage in units of 0.1 mV (rad/s) [electrical angle]. When setting this parameter, E5-24 should be set to 0.0. | Default: <4> Min: 0.0 mV/(rad/s) Max: 6500.0 mV/(rad/s) | 183 |
| E5-11 (333H) | Encoder Offset | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the offset between the rotor magnetic axis and the encoder zero position. Set during Encoder Offset Tuning. | Default: 0.0 deg Min: -180 deg Max: 180 deg | 183 |
| E5-24 (353H) | Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the induced phase-to-phase rms voltage in units of 0.1 mV/(r/min) [mechanical angle]. When setting this parameter, E5-09 should be set to 0.0. | Default: 0.0 mV/(r/min) Min: 0.0 mV/(r/min) Max: 6500.0 mV/(r/min) | 183 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| F1-01 (380H) | Encoder 1 Resolution | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the encoder resolution (number of pulses per revolution) | Default: <5> Min: 1 ppr Max: 60000 ppr<34> | 184 |
| F1-02 (381H) | Operation Selection at PG Open Circuit (PGo) | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Ramp to stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-02. 1: Coast to stop. 2: Emergency Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. 3: Alarm only. | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 3 | 184 |
Source page
Page 364
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 364 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 ( F 3 1 8 - 2 0 H 3 ) O (o p S e ) ration Selection at Overspeed 0 1 : : R C a o m as p t t t o o s s t t o o p p . . Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-02. M Ma in x : : 0 3 184 2: Emergency Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. 3: Alarm only. V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 3 F1-04 Operation Selection at Deviation 0: Ramp to stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-02. Min: 0 185 (383H) 1: Coast to stop. Max: 3 2: Emergency Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. 3: Alarm only. F1-05 Encoder 1 Rotation Direction V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 185 (384H) Selection 0: A phase leads B in the up direction Max: 1 1: B phase leads A in the up direction F1-06 PG 1 Pulse Monitor Output V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 (385H) Division Ratio S C e N ts 5 - th C e . B di y v i s s e io tt n in r g a t “ i x o y f z o ” r , t t h h e e p d u iv ls i e s i m on o n ra it t o io r b u e se c d o m of e s th = e [ P ( G 1 + o p x t ) i o / n y z c ] a . r I d f i o n n s l t y a l u le s d in t g o t c h o e n A ne p c u to ls r e M M i a n x : : 1 132 185 for one track input, then the input ratio will be 1:1, regardless of what F1-06 is set to. ( F 3 1 8 - 7 0 H 8 ) Overspeed Detection Level V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l % t: 115% 184 Sets the overspeed detection level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. Max: 120% F1-09 Overspeed Detection Delay Time V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 s .0 s 184 (388H) Sets the time in seconds for an overspeed situation to trigger a fault (oS). Max: 2.0 s ( F 3 1 8 - 9 1 H 0 ) E D x e c te e c s t s i i o v n e L S e p v e e e l d Deviation V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l % t: 10% 185 Sets the speed deviation detection level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. Max: 50% F1-11 Excessive Speed Deviation V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 s .5 s 185 (38AH) Detection Delay Time Sets the time in seconds for a speed deviation situation to trigger a fault (dEv). Max: 10.0 s (3 F 8 1 D -1 H 4 ) PG Open-Circuit Detection Time V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 2 s .0 s 184 Sets the time required to trigger a PG Open fault (PGo). Max: 10.0 s F1-18 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 10 dv3 Detection Selection Min: 0 185 (3ADH) 0: Disabled Max: 10 n: Sets the number of dv3 situations that may be detected before triggering an actual dv3 fault. (3 F A 1- E 1 H 9 ) dv4 Detection Selection 0: Disa V bl / e f d OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M M e i a f n x a : : u 0 5 lt 0 : 0 1 0 28 185 n: Number of pulses that the A and B pulse are reversed that triggers dv4 detection. F1-20 PG Option Card Disconnect V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 (3B4H) Detection 1 0: Disabled M Ma in x : : 0 1 186 1: Enabled V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ F1-29 dEv Detection Condition Selection Selects when DEV is active. D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 2 186 (3BFH) 0: After speed reference, soft starter output and motor speed have matched once. Max: 2 1: After speed reference and soft starter output have matched once. 2: Always during Run V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ F1-50 Default: 0 (3D2H) Encoder Selection Selects the encoder connected the PG-F3 option. Min: 0 186 <39> 0 1: : E E n n D D a a t t 2 2 . . 2 1 / / 2 0 2 1 , S 2 e . r 2 i / a 0 l 1 C S o e m ri m al u C n o ic m at m io u n nication + Sin/Cos Max: 2 2: HIPERFACE F1-51 PGoH Detection Level V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 1 l % t: 80% 186 (3D3H) Sets the level for detecting PG Hardware Fault (PGoH). Available when F1-20 = 1 Max: 100% V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ F1-52 Communication Speed of Serial Selects the communication speed between the PG-F3 option and serial encoder. Default: 0 (3 < D 3 4 9 H > ) Encoder Selection 0 1 : : 1 5 M 00 k b p b s p / s 9 / 6 1 0 9 0 2 0 b 0 p s bps M Ma in x : : 0 3 187 2: 1M bps/38400 bps 3: 1M bps/38400 bps F1-63 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 PG-E3 R Track Selection Min: 0 187 (2DFH) 0: Disabled Max: 1 1: Enabled F1-66 to F1-81 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (B9AH to Encoder Adjust 1 to 16 Min: 0 187 BA9H) Sets encoder offsets 1 to 16 for the PG-E3 option card. These parameters are automatically set Max: FF by the execution of Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics. <44> <5> Default setting is determined by the control mode (A1-02). <34> Setting range is 1 to 15000 ppr when the drive is set for CLV/PM. <39> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7016 or later. <44> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. 364 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| F1-03 (382H) | Operation Selection at Overspeed (oS) | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Ramp to stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-02. 1: Coast to stop. 2: Emergency Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. 3: Alarm only. | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 3 | 184 |
| F1-04 (383H) | Operation Selection at Deviation | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Ramp to stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-02. 1: Coast to stop. 2: Emergency Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. 3: Alarm only. | Default: 3 Min: 0 Max: 3 | 185 |
| F1-05 (384H) | Encoder 1 Rotation Direction Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: A phase leads B in the up direction 1: B phase leads A in the up direction | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 185 |
| F1-06 (385H) | PG 1 Pulse Monitor Output Division Ratio | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the division ratio for the pulse monitor used of the PG option card installed to connector CN5-C. By setting “xyz”, the division ratio becomes = [(1 + x) / yz]. If only using the A pulse for one track input, then the input ratio will be 1:1, regardless of what F1-06 is set to. | Default: 1 Min: 1 Max: 132 | 185 |
| F1-08 (387H) | Overspeed Detection Level | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the overspeed detection level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. | Default: 115% Min: 0% Max: 120% | 184 |
| F1-09 (388H) | Overspeed Detection Delay Time | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the time in seconds for an overspeed situation to trigger a fault (oS). | Default: 0.0 s Min: 0.0 s Max: 2.0 s | 184 |
| F1-10 (389H) | Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Level | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the speed deviation detection level as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. | Default: 10% Min: 0% Max: 50% | 185 |
| F1-11 (38AH) | Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Delay Time | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the time in seconds for a speed deviation situation to trigger a fault (dEv). | Default: 0.5 s Min: 0.0 s Max: 10.0 s | 185 |
| F1-14 (38DH) | PG Open-Circuit Detection Time | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the time required to trigger a PG Open fault (PGo). | Default: 2.0 s Min: 0.0 s Max: 10.0 s | 184 |
| F1-18 (3ADH) | dv3 Detection Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled n: Sets the number of dv3 situations that may be detected before triggering an actual dv3 fault. | Default: 10 Min: 0 Max: 10 | 185 |
| F1-19 (3AEH) | dv4 Detection Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled n: Number of pulses that the A and B pulse are reversed that triggers dv4 detection. | Default: 128 Min: 0 Max: 5000 | 185 |
| F1-20 (3B4H) | PG Option Card Disconnect Detection 1 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Enabled | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 186 |
| F1-29 (3BFH) | dEv Detection Condition Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Selects when DEV is active. 0: After speed reference, soft starter output and motor speed have matched once. 1: After speed reference and soft starter output have matched once. 2: Always during Run | Default: 2 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 186 |
| F1-50 (3D2H) <39> | Encoder Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Selects the encoder connected the PG-F3 option. 0: EnDat 2.1/01, 2.2/01 Serial Communication + Sin/Cos 1: EnDat 2.2/22 Serial Communication 2: HIPERFACE | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 186 |
| F1-51 (3D3H) | PGoH Detection Level | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the level for detecting PG Hardware Fault (PGoH). Available when F1-20 = 1 | Default: 80% Min: 1% Max: 100% | 186 |
| F1-52 (3D4H) <39> | Communication Speed of Serial Encoder Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Selects the communication speed between the PG-F3 option and serial encoder. 0: 1M bps/9600 bps 1: 500k bps/19200 bps 2: 1M bps/38400 bps 3: 1M bps/38400 bps | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 3 | 187 |
| F1-63 (2DFH) | PG-E3 R Track Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Enabled | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 187 |
| F1-66 to F1-81 (B9AH to BA9H) <44> | Encoder Adjust 1 to 16 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets encoder offsets 1 to 16 for the PG-E3 option card. These parameters are automatically set by the execution of Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: FFFF | 187 |
Source page
Page 365
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 365 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 365 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 F3: Digital Input Card (DI-A3) No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 0: BCD, 1% units 1: BCD, 0.1% units 2: BCD, 0.01% units 3: BCD, 1 Hz units ( F 3 3 9 - 0 0 H 1 ) DI-A3 Option Card Input Selection 4 5 6 : : : B B B C C C D D D , , c 0 0 u . . s 1 0 t 1 o H m H z i z u z e u n d n it i s s t e s tting (5 digit), 0.02 Hz units D M M e i a f n x a : : u 0 7 lt: 0 187 7: Binary input The unit and the setting range are determined by F3-03. F3-03 = 0: 255/100% (-255 to +255) F3-03 = 1: 40961/100% (-4095 to +4095) F3-03 = 2: 30000/100% (-33000 to +33000) When the digital operator units are set to be displayed in Hertz or user-set units (o1-03 = 2 or 3), the units for F3-01 are determined by parameter o1-03. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 2 F3-03 DI-A3 Option Card Data Length (3B9H) Selection 0: 8 bit Min: 0 188 1: 12 bit Max: 2 2: 16 bit F4: Analog Monitor Card (AO-A3) No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page F4-01 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 102 Terminal V1 Function Selection Min: 000 188 (391H) Sets the monitor signal for output from terminal V1. Set this parameter to the last three digits of Max: 999 the desired U- monitor. Some U parameters are available only in certain control modes. F4-02 (392H) Terminal V1 Gain All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 9 t: 9 9 1 . 0 9 0 % .0% 188 Sets the gain for voltage output via terminal V1. Max: 999.9% F4-03 Terminal V2 Function Selection All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l 0 t: 0 103 188 (393H) S th e e t s d t e h s e ir m ed o U ni tor - sig n a m l o fo n r i t o o u r. t p S u o t m fr e o U m p te a r r m am in e a t l e V rs 2 a . r S e e a t v t a h i i l s a p b a le r a o m nl e y te i r n t o ce t r h t e a i l n a s c t o t n h t r r e o e l d m ig o i d t e s s o . f Max: 999 F4-04 (394H) Terminal V2 Gain All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 9 t: 9 9 5 . 0 9 .0 % % 188 Sets the gain for voltage output via terminal V2. Max: 999.9% F4-05 (395H) Terminal V1 Bias All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 9 t: 9 0 9 . . 0 9 % % 188 Sets the amount of bias added to the voltage output via terminal V1. Max: 999.9% F4-06 (396H) Terminal V2 Bias All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 9 t: 9 0 9 . . 0 9 % % 188 Sets the amount of bias added to the voltage output via terminal V2. Max: 999.9% Default: 1 ( F 3 4 9 - 7 0 H 7 ) T S e e r le m c i t n io a n l V1 Signal Level All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M M i a n x : : 0 1 189 0: 0 to 10 V Default: 1 F4-08 Terminal V2 Signal Level 1: -10 to 10 V Min: 0 189 (398H) Selection Max: 1 B
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| F3-01 (390H) | DI-A3 Option Card Input Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: BCD, 1% units 1: BCD, 0.1% units 2: BCD, 0.01% units 3: BCD, 1 Hz units 4: BCD, 0.1 Hz units 5: BCD, 0.01 Hz units 6: BCD customized setting (5 digit), 0.02 Hz units 7: Binary input The unit and the setting range are determined by F3-03. F3-03 = 0: 255/100% (-255 to +255) F3-03 = 1: 40961/100% (-4095 to +4095) F3-03 = 2: 30000/100% (-33000 to +33000) When the digital operator units are set to be displayed in Hertz or user-set units (o1-03 = 2 or 3), the units for F3-01 are determined by parameter o1-03. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 7 | 187 |
| F3-03 (3B9H) | DI-A3 Option Card Data Length Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: 8 bit 1: 12 bit 2: 16 bit | Default: 2 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 188 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| F4-01 (391H) | Terminal V1 Function Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the monitor signal for output from terminal V1. Set this parameter to the last three digits of the desired U- monitor. Some U parameters are available only in certain control modes. | Default: 102 Min: 000 Max: 999 | 188 |
| F4-02 (392H) | Terminal V1 Gain | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the gain for voltage output via terminal V1. | Default: 100.0% Min: -999.9% Max: 999.9% | 188 |
| F4-03 (393H) | Terminal V2 Function Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the monitor signal for output from terminal V2. Set this parameter to the last three digits of the desired U- monitor. Some U parameters are available only in certain control modes. | Default: 103 Min: 000 Max: 999 | 188 |
| F4-04 (394H) | Terminal V2 Gain | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the gain for voltage output via terminal V2. | Default: 50.0% Min: -999.9% Max: 999.9% | 188 |
| F4-05 (395H) | Terminal V1 Bias | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the amount of bias added to the voltage output via terminal V1. | Default: 0.0% Min: -999.9% Max: 999.9% | 188 |
| F4-06 (396H) | Terminal V2 Bias | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the amount of bias added to the voltage output via terminal V2. | Default: 0.0% Min: -999.9% Max: 999.9% | 188 |
| F4-07 (397H) | Terminal V1 Signal Level Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: 0 to 10 V 1: -10 to 10 V | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 189 |
| F4-08 (398H) | Terminal V2 Signal Level Selection | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 189 |
Source page
Page 366
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 366 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
F5: Digital Output Card (DO-A3)
No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page F5-01 Default: 0 Terminal P1-C1 Output Selection Min: 0 189 (399H) Max: 161 F5-02 Default: 1 Terminal P2-C2 Output Selection Min: 0 189 (39AH) Max: 161 F5-03 Default: 2 Terminal P3-C3 Output Selection Min: 0 189 (39BH) Max: 161 F5-04 Default: 4 (39CH) Terminal P4-C4 Output Selection All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M M i a n x : : 0 161 189 F5-05 Terminal P5-C5 Output Selection S te e r t m s i t n h a e l s f u P n 1 c t t i h o r n o u fo g r h c P o 6 n . tact output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and photocoupler output D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 6 189 (39DH) Max: 161 F5-06 Default: 37 Terminal P6-C6 Output Selection Min: 0 189 (39EH) Max: 161 F5-07 Default: F Terminal M1-M2 Output Selection Min: 0 189 (39FH) Max: 161 F5-08 Default: F Terminal M3-M4 Output Selection Min: 0 189 (3A0H) Max: 161 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (3 F A 5- 1 0 H 9 ) DO-A3 Output Mode Selection 0: Output terminals are each assigned separate output functions. Min: 0 189 1: Binary code output Max: 2 2: Use output terminal functions selected by parameters F5-01 through F5-08. F6: Communication Option Card For more details on a specific option card, refer to the instruction manual for the option card. No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 (3 F A 6- 2 0 H 1 ) O Co p m er m at u io n n i c S a e ti l o e n ct s i o E n r r a o f r t er 0 1 : : R C a o m as p t t t o o s s t t o o p p . . Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-02. M Ma in x : : 0 3 189 2: Emergency Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. 3: Alarm only. F6-02 E C x o t m er m na u l n F ic a a u t l i t o f n r o O m p tion Detection All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 190 (3A3H) Selection 0: Always detected Max: 1 1: Detection during run only All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ External Fault from Default: 1 (3 F A 6- 4 0 H 3 ) C Se o l m ec m ti u on nication Option Operation 0 1 : : R C a o m as p t t t o o s s t t o o p p . . Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-02. M Ma in x : : 0 3 190 2: Emergency Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. 3: Alarm only. (3 F A 6- 5 0 H 4 ) bUS Error Detection Time All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 2 s .0 s - Sets the delay time for error detection if a bus error occurs. Max: 5.0 s F6-06 Torque Limit Selection from V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 Min: 0 190 (3A7H) Communications Option 0: Disabled. Torque limit from option card disabled. Max: 1 1: Enabled. Torque limit from option card enabled. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ F6-08 Default: 0 (36 < A 1> H) Reset Communication Parameter A 1 0 : : 1 C R -0 o e 3 s m e . m t a u ll n i c c o a m tio m n u - n re ic la a t t e io d n p - a re ra la m te e d te p rs a r ( a F m 6- e ter s ) ( F a 6 re - no t ) r e w se h t e w n h th e e n d th ri e v d e r i i s v e in i i s t i i a n l i i t z i e a d li z u e s d in u g s ing M Ma in x : : 0 1 190 A1-03. (3 F D 6- 0 3 H 5 ) CANopen Node ID All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 - Sets the node address. Max: 126 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 0: Auto-detection 1: 10 kbps F6-36 2: 20 kbps Default: 6 (3D1H) CANopen Communication Speed 3: 50 kbps Min: 0 - 4: 125 kbps Max: 8 5: 250 kbps 6: 500 kbps 7: 800 kbps 8: 1 Mbps <1> Parameter setting value is not reset to the default value when the drive is initialized. 366 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| F5-01 (399H) | Terminal P1-C1 Output Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the function for contact output terminals M1-M2, M3-M4, and photocoupler output terminals P1 through P6. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 161 | 189 |
| F5-02 (39AH) | Terminal P2-C2 Output Selection | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 161 | 189 | |
| F5-03 (39BH) | Terminal P3-C3 Output Selection | Default: 2 Min: 0 Max: 161 | 189 | |
| F5-04 (39CH) | Terminal P4-C4 Output Selection | Default: 4 Min: 0 Max: 161 | 189 | |
| F5-05 (39DH) | Terminal P5-C5 Output Selection | Default: 6 Min: 0 Max: 161 | 189 | |
| F5-06 (39EH) | Terminal P6-C6 Output Selection | Default: 37 Min: 0 Max: 161 | 189 | |
| F5-07 (39FH) | Terminal M1-M2 Output Selection | Default: F Min: 0 Max: 161 | 189 | |
| F5-08 (3A0H) | Terminal M3-M4 Output Selection | Default: F Min: 0 Max: 161 | 189 | |
| F5-09 (3A1H) | DO-A3 Output Mode Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: Output terminals are each assigned separate output functions. 1: Binary code output 2: Use output terminal functions selected by parameters F5-01 through F5-08. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 189 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| F6-01 (3A2H) | Operation Selection after Communications Error | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: Ramp to stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-02. 1: Coast to stop. 2: Emergency Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. 3: Alarm only. | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 3 | 189 |
| F6-02 (3A3H) | External Fault from Communication Option Detection Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: Always detected 1: Detection during run only | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 190 |
| F6-03 (3A4H) | External Fault from Communication Option Operation Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: Ramp to stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-02. 1: Coast to stop. 2: Emergency Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. 3: Alarm only. | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 3 | 190 |
| F6-04 (3A5H) | bUS Error Detection Time | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the delay time for error detection if a bus error occurs. | Default: 2.0 s Min: 0.0 s Max: 5.0 s | - |
| F6-06 (3A7H) | Torque Limit Selection from Communications Option | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled. Torque limit from option card disabled. 1: Enabled. Torque limit from option card enabled. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 190 |
| F6-08 (36AH) <1> | Reset Communication Parameter | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Communication-related parameters (F6-) are not reset when the drive is initialized using A1-03. 1: Reset all communication-related parameters (F6-) when the drive is initialized using A1-03. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 190 |
| F6-35 (3D0H) | CANopen Node ID | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the node address. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 126 | - |
| F6-36 (3D1H) | CANopen Communication Speed | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Auto-detection 1: 10 kbps 2: 20 kbps 3: 50 kbps 4: 125 kbps 5: 250 kbps 6: 500 kbps 7: 800 kbps 8: 1 Mbps | Default: 6 Min: 0 Max: 8 | - |
Source page
Page 367
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 367 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 367 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 H: Multi-Function Terminals H parameters assign functions to the multi-function input and output terminals. H1: Multi-Function Digital Inputs No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page H1-03 Default: <19> Terminal S3 Function Selection Min: 3 191 (400H) Max: 79 H1-04 Default: <19> Terminal S4 Function Selection Min: 3 191 (401H) Max: 79 ( H 40 1 2 -0 H 5 ) Terminal S5 Function Selection All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M M De i a f n x a : : u 3 7 lt 9 : <19> 191 Assigns a function to the multi-function digital inputs. H1-06 Refer to page 367 to page 368 for a description of setting values. Default: <19> (403H) Terminal S6 Function Selection Note: Unused terminals should be set to F. M M i a n x : : 3 79 191 H1-07 Default: <19> Terminal S7 Function Selection Min: 3 191 (404H) Max: 79 H1-08 Default: F Terminal S8 Function Selection Min: 3 191 (405H) Max: 79 <19> With the speed reference priority d1-18 is set to 0 or 3, the default settings for parameters H1-03 to H1-07 governing input terminals S3 to S7 are: 24, 14, 3, 4, and 5 respectively. When d1-18 is set to 1 or 2, the default settings for H1-03 to H1-07 become 50, 54, 51, 53, and F respectively. H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Settings H Se 1 t - t in g Function Description Page 3 Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 191 4 Multi-Step Speed Reference 2 191 When input terminals are set to Multi-Step Speed References 1 through 3, switching combinations of those 5 Multi-Step Speed Reference 3 terminals will create a multi-step speed sequence using the speed references set in d1-01 through d1-08. 191 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 6 Jog reference selection Closed: Jog frequency reference (d1-17) selected. 191 The Jog frequency can be used when the speed reference selection is not assigned to input terminals (b1-01 ≠ 1) and the speed reference priority is set to use the multi-step speed reference (d1-18 = 0 or 3). All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 7 Accel/decel Ramp Selection 1 Used to switch between accel/decel ramp 1 (set in C1-01, C1-02) and accel/decel ramp 2 (set in C1-03, C1-04). 192 When combined with another input terminal set for “Accel/Decel ramp 2” (H1- = 1A), the drive can also switch between accel/decel ramp 3 (set in C1-05, C1-06) and accel/decel ramp 4 (set in C1-07, C1-08). 8 Baseblock Command (N.O.) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 192 Closed: No drive output 9 Baseblock Command (N.C.) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 192 Open: No drive output All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ F Not Used (Through Mode) 192 Select this setting when the terminal is not used or when using the terminal in the pass-through mode. The terminal does not trigger a drive function but can be used as digital input for the controller the drive is connected to. 14 Fault Reset All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 192 Closed: Resets faults if the cause is cleared and the Up/Down command is removed. 15 Emergency Stop (N.O.) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 192 Closed: Decelerates to stop at the Emergency Stop ramp set to C1-09. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 16 Motor 2 Selection 193 Open: Motor 1(E1-, E3-) Closed: Motor 2 (E2-, E4-) 17 Emergency Stop (N.C.) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 192 Open: Decelerates to stop at the Emergency Stop ramp set to C1-09. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 18 Timer Function Input 193 Triggers the timer set up by parameters b4-01 and b4-02. Must be set in conjunction with the timer function output B (H2- = 12). All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 1A Accel/decel Ramp Selection 2 193 Used in conjunction with an input terminal set for “Accel/decel ramp selection 1” (H1- = 7), and allows the drive to switch between accel/decel ramp 3 and 4.
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| H1-03 (400H) | Terminal S3 Function Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly Assigns a function to the multi-function digital inputs. Refer to page 367 to page 368 for a description of setting values. Note: Unused terminals should be set to F. | Default: <19> Min: 3 Max: 79 | 191 |
| H1-04 (401H) | Terminal S4 Function Selection | Default: <19> Min: 3 Max: 79 | 191 | |
| H1-05 (402H) | Terminal S5 Function Selection | Default: <19> Min: 3 Max: 79 | 191 | |
| H1-06 (403H) | Terminal S6 Function Selection | Default: <19> Min: 3 Max: 79 | 191 | |
| H1-07 (404H) | Terminal S7 Function Selection | Default: <19> Min: 3 Max: 79 | 191 | |
| H1-08 (405H) | Terminal S8 Function Selection | Default: F Min: 3 Max: 79 | 191 |
| H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Settings | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| H1- Setting | Function | Description | Page |
| 3 | Multi-Step Speed Reference 1 | All Modes common_ TMonly When input terminals are set to Multi-Step Speed References 1 through 3, switching combinations of those terminals will create a multi-step speed sequence using the speed references set in d1-01 through d1-08. | 191 |
| 4 | Multi-Step Speed Reference 2 | 191 | |
| 5 | Multi-Step Speed Reference 3 | 191 | |
| 6 | Jog reference selection | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Jog frequency reference (d1-17) selected. The Jog frequency can be used when the speed reference selection is not assigned to input terminals (b1-01 ≠ 1) and the speed reference priority is set to use the multi-step speed reference (d1-18 = 0 or 3). | 191 |
| 7 | Accel/decel Ramp Selection 1 | All Modes common_ TMonly Used to switch between accel/decel ramp 1 (set in C1-01, C1-02) and accel/decel ramp 2 (set in C1-03, C1-04). When combined with another input terminal set for “Accel/Decel ramp 2” (H1- = 1A), the drive can also switch between accel/decel ramp 3 (set in C1-05, C1-06) and accel/decel ramp 4 (set in C1-07, C1-08). | 192 |
| 8 | Baseblock Command (N.O.) | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: No drive output | 192 |
| 9 | Baseblock Command (N.C.) | All Modes common_ TMonly Open: No drive output | 192 |
| F | Not Used (Through Mode) | All Modes common_ TMonly Select this setting when the terminal is not used or when using the terminal in the pass-through mode. The terminal does not trigger a drive function but can be used as digital input for the controller the drive is connected to. | 192 |
| 14 | Fault Reset | All Modes common_ TMonly Closed: Resets faults if the cause is cleared and the Up/Down command is removed. | 192 |
| 15 | Emergency Stop (N.O.) | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Decelerates to stop at the Emergency Stop ramp set to C1-09. | 192 |
| 16 | Motor 2 Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly Open: Motor 1(E1-, E3-) Closed: Motor 2 (E2-, E4-) | 193 |
| 17 | Emergency Stop (N.C.) | All Modes common_ TMonly Open: Decelerates to stop at the Emergency Stop ramp set to C1-09. | 192 |
| 18 | Timer Function Input | common_ All Modes TMonly Triggers the timer set up by parameters b4-01 and b4-02. Must be set in conjunction with the timer function output (H2- = 12). | 193 |
| 1A | Accel/decel Ramp Selection 2 | common_ All Modes TMonly Used in conjunction with an input terminal set for “Accel/decel ramp selection 1” (H1- = 7), and allows the drive to switch between accel/decel ramp 3 and 4. | 193 |
Source page
Page 368
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 368 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Settings H Se 1 t - t in g Function Description Page
All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 20: N.O., Always detected, ramp to stop 21: N.C., Always detected, ramp to stop 22: N.O., During run, ramp to stop 23: N.C., During run, ramp to stop 24: N.O., Always detected, coast to stop 25: N.C., Always detected, coast to stop 20 to 2F External Fault 26: N.O., During run, coast to stop 193 27: N.C., During run, coast to stop 28: N.O., Always detected, Emergency Stop 29: N.C., Always detected, Emergency Stop 2A: N.O., During run, Emergency Stop 2B: N.C., During run, Emergency Stop 2C: N.O., Always detected, alarm only (continue running) 2D: N.C., Always detected, alarm only (continue running) 2E: N.O., During run, alarm only (continue running) 2F: N.C., During run, alarm only (continue running) 50 Nominal Speed All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 194 Closed: Activates the nominal speed (d1-19). 51 Intermediate Speed All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 194 Closed: Activates the Intermediate Speed (d1-20). 52 Releveling Speed All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 194 Closed: Activates the Releveling Speed (d1-23). 53 Leveling Speed All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 194 Closed: Activates the Leveling Speed (d1-26). 54 Inspection Operation All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 194 Closed: Activates Inspection operation using the speed set in d1-24. 55 Rescue Operation All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 194 Closed: Activates rescue operation. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 56 Motor Contactor Feedback 194 Open: Motor contactor open Closed: Motor contactor closed (N.O.) 57 High Speed Limit (Up) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 194 Closed: Uses the leveling speed as the maximum speed when going up. 58 High Speed Limit (Down) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 195 Closed: Uses the leveling speed as the maximum speed when going down. 5A All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Motor Contactor Feedback 2 195 <44> Open: Motor contactor closed (N.C.) Closed: Motor contactor open 5B All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Brake Feedback 2 195 <44> Open: Brake open (N.C.) Closed: Brake closed 5C Floor Sensor V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 195 Closed: Initiate Direct Landing (S5-10 = 1) 67 Communications Test Mode All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 195 Tests the MEMOBUS/Modbus RS-485/422 interface. Displays “PASS” if the test completes successfully. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 79 Brake Feedback 195 Open: Brake closed Closed: Brake open (N.O.) <44> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later.
368 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| H1 Multi-Function Digital Input Settings | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| H1- Setting | Function | Description | Page |
| 20 to 2F | External Fault | common_ All Modes TMonly 20: N.O., Always detected, ramp to stop 21: N.C., Always detected, ramp to stop 22: N.O., During run, ramp to stop 23: N.C., During run, ramp to stop 24: N.O., Always detected, coast to stop 25: N.C., Always detected, coast to stop 26: N.O., During run, coast to stop 27: N.C., During run, coast to stop 28: N.O., Always detected, Emergency Stop 29: N.C., Always detected, Emergency Stop 2A: N.O., During run, Emergency Stop 2B: N.C., During run, Emergency Stop 2C: N.O., Always detected, alarm only (continue running) 2D: N.C., Always detected, alarm only (continue running) 2E: N.O., During run, alarm only (continue running) 2F: N.C., During run, alarm only (continue running) | 193 |
| 50 | Nominal Speed | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Activates the nominal speed (d1-19). | 194 |
| 51 | Intermediate Speed | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Activates the Intermediate Speed (d1-20). | 194 |
| 52 | Releveling Speed | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Activates the Releveling Speed (d1-23). | 194 |
| 53 | Leveling Speed | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Activates the Leveling Speed (d1-26). | 194 |
| 54 | Inspection Operation | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Activates Inspection operation using the speed set in d1-24. | 194 |
| 55 | Rescue Operation | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Activates rescue operation. | 194 |
| 56 | Motor Contactor Feedback | common_ All Modes TMonly Open: Motor contactor open Closed: Motor contactor closed (N.O.) | 194 |
| 57 | High Speed Limit (Up) | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Uses the leveling speed as the maximum speed when going up. | 194 |
| 58 | High Speed Limit (Down) | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Uses the leveling speed as the maximum speed when going down. | 195 |
| 5A <44> | Motor Contactor Feedback 2 | common_ All Modes TMonly Open: Motor contactor closed (N.C.) Closed: Motor contactor open | 195 |
| 5B <44> | Brake Feedback 2 | common_ All Modes TMonly Open: Brake open (N.C.) Closed: Brake closed | 195 |
| 5C | Floor Sensor | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Closed: Initiate Direct Landing (S5-10 = 1) | 195 |
| 67 | Communications Test Mode | All Modes common_ TMonly Tests the MEMOBUS/Modbus RS-485/422 interface. Displays “PASS” if the test completes successfully. | 195 |
| 79 | Brake Feedback | common_ All Modes TMonly Open: Brake closed Closed: Brake open (N.O.) | 195 |
Source page
Page 369
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 369 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 369 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 H2: Multi-Function Digital Outputs No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page Default: 50 H2-01 Terminals M1-M2 Function (40BH) Selection (relay) Min: 0 195 Max: 161 Default: 51 H2-02 Terminals M3-M4 Function (40CH) Selection (relay) Min: 0 195 Max: 161 H2-03 Terminals M5-M6 Function All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 6 Min: 0 195 (40DH) Selection (relay) Refer to H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings on page369 for a description of setting Max: 161 values. H2-04 Terminal P1-C1 Function Default: 37 Min: 0 195 (40EH) Selection (photocoupler) Max: 161 H2-05 Terminal P2-C2 Function Default: F Min: 0 195 (40FH) Selection (photocoupler) Max: 161 H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings H Se 2 t - t in g Function Description Page 0 During Run All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 196 Closed: An Up/Down command is active or voltage is output. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 1 Zero Speed Open: Output speed is greater than the value of E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency) or S1-01 (Zero Speed Level at 196 Stop). Closed: Output frequency is less than or equal to the value of E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency) or S1-01 (Zero Speed Level at Stop). 2 Speed Agree 1 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 196 Closed: Output speed equals the speed reference (plus or minus the hysteresis set to L4-02). 3 User-set Speed Agree 1 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 197 Closed: Output speed and speed reference equal L4-01 (plus or minus the hysteresis set to L4-02). 4 Speed Detection 1 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 197 Closed: Output speed is less than or equal to the value in L4-01 with hysteresis determined by L4-02. 5 Speed Detection 2 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 197 Closed: Output speed is greater than or equal to the value in L4-01 with hysteresis determined by L4-02. 6 Drive Ready (READY) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 198 Closed: Power up is complete and the drive is ready to accept an Up/Down command. 7 DC Bus Undervoltage All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 198 Closed: DC bus voltage is below the Uv trip level set in L2-05. 8 During Baseblock (N.O.) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 198 Closed: Drive has entered the baseblock state (no output voltage). All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 9 Speed Reference Source 198 Open: The speed reference is supplied by an external reference (set in b1-01). Closed: Digital operator supplies the speed reference. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ A Up/Down Command Source 198 Open: The Up/Down command is supplied by an external reference (set in b1-02). Closed: Digital operator supplies the Up/Down command. B Torque Detection 1 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 199 Closed: An overtorque or undertorque situation has been detected. E Fault All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 199 Closed: Fault occurred. (excluding CPF00 and CPF01) F Not used (Through Mode) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 199 Set this value when the terminal is not used or when using the terminal in the pass-through mode. 10 Minor Fault All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 199 Closed: An alarm has been triggered, or the IGBTs have reached 90% of their expected life span. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 11 Fault Reset Command Active 199 Closed: The drive has received a reset command from the multi-function input terminals or from serial network, or the B digital operator’s RESET key has been pressed. 12 Timer Output All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 199 Closed: Timer output.
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| H2-01 (40BH) | Terminals M1-M2 Function Selection (relay) | common_ All Modes TMonly Refer to H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings on page369 for a description of setting values. | Default: 50 Min: 0 Max: 161 | 195 |
| H2-02 (40CH) | Terminals M3-M4 Function Selection (relay) | Default: 51 Min: 0 Max: 161 | 195 | |
| H2-03 (40DH) | Terminals M5-M6 Function Selection (relay) | Default: 6 Min: 0 Max: 161 | 195 | |
| H2-04 (40EH) | Terminal P1-C1 Function Selection (photocoupler) | Default: 37 Min: 0 Max: 161 | 195 | |
| H2-05 (40FH) | Terminal P2-C2 Function Selection (photocoupler) | Default: F Min: 0 Max: 161 | 195 |
| H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| H2- Setting | Function | Description | Page |
| 0 | During Run | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: An Up/Down command is active or voltage is output. | 196 |
| 1 | Zero Speed | common_ All Modes TMonly Open: Output speed is greater than the value of E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency) or S1-01 (Zero Speed Level at Stop). Closed: Output frequency is less than or equal to the value of E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency) or S1-01 (Zero Speed Level at Stop). | 196 |
| 2 | Speed Agree 1 | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Output speed equals the speed reference (plus or minus the hysteresis set to L4-02). | 196 |
| 3 | User-set Speed Agree 1 | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Output speed and speed reference equal L4-01 (plus or minus the hysteresis set to L4-02). | 197 |
| 4 | Speed Detection 1 | All Modes common_ TMonly Closed: Output speed is less than or equal to the value in L4-01 with hysteresis determined by L4-02. | 197 |
| 5 | Speed Detection 2 | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Output speed is greater than or equal to the value in L4-01 with hysteresis determined by L4-02. | 197 |
| 6 | Drive Ready (READY) | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Power up is complete and the drive is ready to accept an Up/Down command. | 198 |
| 7 | DC Bus Undervoltage | All Modes common_ TMonly Closed: DC bus voltage is below the Uv trip level set in L2-05. | 198 |
| 8 | During Baseblock (N.O.) | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Drive has entered the baseblock state (no output voltage). | 198 |
| 9 | Speed Reference Source | common_ All Modes TMonly Open: The speed reference is supplied by an external reference (set in b1-01). Closed: Digital operator supplies the speed reference. | 198 |
| A | Up/Down Command Source | common_ All Modes TMonly Open: The Up/Down command is supplied by an external reference (set in b1-02). Closed: Digital operator supplies the Up/Down command. | 198 |
| B | Torque Detection 1 | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: An overtorque or undertorque situation has been detected. | 199 |
| E | Fault | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Fault occurred. (excluding CPF00 and CPF01) | 199 |
| F | Not used (Through Mode) | All Modes common_ TMonly Set this value when the terminal is not used or when using the terminal in the pass-through mode. | 199 |
| 10 | Minor Fault | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: An alarm has been triggered, or the IGBTs have reached 90% of their expected life span. | 199 |
| 11 | Fault Reset Command Active | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: The drive has received a reset command from the multi-function input terminals or from serial network, or the digital operator’s RESET key has been pressed. | 199 |
| 12 | Timer Output | All Modes common_ TMonly Closed: Timer output. | 199 |
Source page
Page 370
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 370 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings H Se 2 t - t in g Function Description Page
13 Speed Agree 2 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 199 Closed: When drive output frequency equals the speed reference ±L4-04. 14 User-set Speed Agree 2 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 200 Closed: When the drive output speed is equal to the value in L4-03 ±L4-04. 15 Speed Detection 3 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 200 Closed: When the drive output speed is less than or equal to the value in L4-03 ±L4-04. 16 Speed Detection 4 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 201 Closed: When the output speed is greater than or equal to the value in L4-03 ±L4-04. 18 Torque Detection 2 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 199 Closed: Overtorque or undertorque has been detected. 1A During Down Direction All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 201 Closed: Drive is running in the down direction.
1B During Baseblock 2 (N.C.) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 201 Open: Drive has entered the baseblock state (no output voltage). V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 1C Motor 2 Selection 202 Open: Motor 1 is selected Closed: Motor 2 is selected 1D During Regeneration V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 202 Closed: Motor is operated in regenerative mode. 1E Reset Enabled All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 202 Closed: An automatic reset is performed 1F Motor Overload Alarm (oL1) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 202 Closed: oL1 is at 90% of its trip point or greater. An oH3 situation also triggers this alarm. 20 Drive Overheat Pre-alarm (oH) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 202 Closed: Heatsink temperature exceeds the parameter L8-02 value. 2F Maintenance Period All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 202 Closed: Cooling fan, electrolytic capacitors, IGBTs, or the soft charge bypass relay may require maintenance. 30 During Torque Limit V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 202 Closed: When the torque limit has been reached. 33 Within Position Lock Bandwidth V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 202 Closed: Position deviation is within the Position Lock Bandwidth. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 37 During Frequency Output Open: No frequency output from drive when stopped with baseblock, stopped with DC injection braking during initial 202 excitation, or stopped with short circuit braking. Closed: Drive is outputting a frequency. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 47 Input Phase Loss 203 Closed: Input phase loss has occurred Open: Normal operation (no phase loss detected) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 4E Braking Transistor Fault (rr) 203 Closed: The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed. Note: This function is not available in models CIMR-L20145 to 20415, 40075 to 40216. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 50 Brake Control 203 Close: Release brake Open: Apply brake 51 Output Contactor Control All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 203 Closed: Close output contactor 52 Door Zone Reached All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 203 Closed: Indicates that the door zone has been reached. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 53 Not Zero Speed 203 Closed: Speed is greater than the zero speed level set to S1-01 Open: Operating at zero speed level All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 54 Light Load Direction 203 Closed: Light load direction is up Open: Light load direction is down 370 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| H2- Setting | Function | Description | Page |
| 13 | Speed Agree 2 | All Modes common_ TMonly Closed: When drive output frequency equals the speed reference ±L4-04. | 199 |
| 14 | User-set Speed Agree 2 | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: When the drive output speed is equal to the value in L4-03 ±L4-04. | 200 |
| 15 | Speed Detection 3 | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: When the drive output speed is less than or equal to the value in L4-03 ±L4-04. | 200 |
| 16 | Speed Detection 4 | All Modes common_ TMonly Closed: When the output speed is greater than or equal to the value in L4-03 ±L4-04. | 201 |
| 18 | Torque Detection 2 | All Modes common_ TMonly Closed: Overtorque or undertorque has been detected. | 199 |
| 1A | During Down Direction | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Drive is running in the down direction. | 201 |
| 1B | During Baseblock 2 (N.C.) | All Modes common_ TMonly Open: Drive has entered the baseblock state (no output voltage). | 201 |
| 1C | Motor 2 Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Open: Motor 1 is selected Closed: Motor 2 is selected | 202 |
| 1D | During Regeneration | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Closed: Motor is operated in regenerative mode. | 202 |
| 1E | Reset Enabled | All Modes common_ TMonly Closed: An automatic reset is performed | 202 |
| 1F | Motor Overload Alarm (oL1) | All Modes common_ TMonly Closed: oL1 is at 90% of its trip point or greater. An oH3 situation also triggers this alarm. | 202 |
| 20 | Drive Overheat Pre-alarm (oH) | All Modes common_ TMonly Closed: Heatsink temperature exceeds the parameter L8-02 value. | 202 |
| 2F | Maintenance Period | All Modes common_ TMonly Closed: Cooling fan, electrolytic capacitors, IGBTs, or the soft charge bypass relay may require maintenance. | 202 |
| 30 | During Torque Limit | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Closed: When the torque limit has been reached. | 202 |
| 33 | Within Position Lock Bandwidth | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Closed: Position deviation is within the Position Lock Bandwidth. | 202 |
| 37 | During Frequency Output | common_ All Modes TMonly Open: No frequency output from drive when stopped with baseblock, stopped with DC injection braking during initial excitation, or stopped with short circuit braking. Closed: Drive is outputting a frequency. | 202 |
| 47 | Input Phase Loss | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Input phase loss has occurred Open: Normal operation (no phase loss detected) | 203 |
| 4E | Braking Transistor Fault (rr) | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: The built-in dynamic braking transistor failed. Note: This function is not available in models CIMR-L20145 to 20415, 40075 to 40216. | 203 |
| 50 | Brake Control | common_ All Modes TMonly Close: Release brake Open: Apply brake | 203 |
| 51 | Output Contactor Control | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Close output contactor | 203 |
| 52 | Door Zone Reached | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Indicates that the door zone has been reached. | 203 |
| 53 | Not Zero Speed | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Speed is greater than the zero speed level set to S1-01 Open: Operating at zero speed level | 203 |
| 54 | Light Load Direction | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Light load direction is up Open: Light load direction is down | 203 |
Source page
Page 371
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 371 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 371 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings H Se 2 t - t in g Function Description Page Light Load Direction Detection All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 55 203 Status Closed: Ready for Light Load Direction Search Open: Light Load Detection in progress All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 58 Safe Disable Status 203 Closed: Safe Disable terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are open, drive is in a baseblock state Open: Safe Disable terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are closed (normal operation) 5C All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Motor Current Monitor 203 <44> Open: Output current is greater than the value of L8-99. Closed: Output current is less than or equal to the value of L8-99. 60 Internal Cooling Fan Alarm All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 203 Closed: Internal cooling fan alarm 61 Motor Pole Search Status V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 203 Closed: Motor pole search successful All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 100 to 161 Function 0 to 61 with Inverse Output 204 Inverts the output switching of the multi-function output functions. Sets the last two digits of 1 to reverse the output signal of that specific function. <44> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. H3: Multi-Function Analog Inputs No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page H3-01 Terminal A1 Signal Level All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 204 (410H) Selection 0: 0 to 10 V Max: 1 1: -10 to 10 V H3-02 Terminal A1 Function Selection All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 204 (434H) Sets the function of terminal A1. Max: 1F H3-03 (411H) Terminal A1 Gain Setting All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 9 t: 9 9 1 . 0 9 0 % .0% 204 Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-02 when 10 V is input at terminal A1. Max: 999.9% H3-04 (412H) Terminal A1 Bias Setting All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 9 t: 9 0 9 . . 0 9 % % 204 Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-02 when 0 V is input at terminal A1. Max: 999.9% All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 ( H 41 3 7 -0 H 9 ) T S e e r le m c i t n io a n l A2 Signal Level 0: 0 to 10 V Min: 0 205 1: -10 to 10 V Max: 0 Note: Use DIP switch S1 to set input terminal A2 for a current or a voltage input signal. H3-10 Terminal A2 Function Selection All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 205 (418H) Sets the function of terminal A2. Max: 1F H3-11 (419H) Terminal A2 Gain Setting All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 9 t: 9 9 1 . 0 9 0 % .0% 205 Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-10 when 10 V is input at terminal A2. Max: 999.9% H3-12 (41AH) Terminal A2 Bias Setting All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 9 t: 9 0 9 . . 0 9 % % 205 Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-10 when 0 V is input at terminal A2. Max: 999.9% ( H 41 3 B -1 H 3 ) Analog Input Filter Time Constant All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0 . s 03 s 205 Sets a primary delay filter time constant for terminals A1 and A2. Used for noise filtering. Max: 2.00 s H3-16 Offset for Terminal A1 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 5 t: 0 0 0 206 (2F0H) Applies an offset to analog input A1. Can be used for zero adjustment of the analog input. Max: 500 ( H 2F 3 1 -1 H 7 ) Offset for Terminal A2 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 5 t: 0 0 0 206 Applies an offset to analog input A2. Can be used for zero adjustment of the analog input. Max: 500 B
| H2 Multi-Function Digital Output Settings | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| H2- Setting | Function | Description | Page |
| 55 | Light Load Direction Detection Status | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Ready for Light Load Direction Search Open: Light Load Detection in progress | 203 |
| 58 | Safe Disable Status | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Safe Disable terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are open, drive is in a baseblock state Open: Safe Disable terminals H1-HC and H2-HC are closed (normal operation) | 203 |
| 5C <44> | Motor Current Monitor | common_ All Modes TMonly Open: Output current is greater than the value of L8-99. Closed: Output current is less than or equal to the value of L8-99. | 203 |
| 60 | Internal Cooling Fan Alarm | common_ All Modes TMonly Closed: Internal cooling fan alarm | 203 |
| 61 | Motor Pole Search Status | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Closed: Motor pole search successful | 203 |
| 100 to 161 | Function 0 to 61 with Inverse Output | common_ All Modes TMonly Inverts the output switching of the multi-function output functions. Sets the last two digits of 1 to reverse the output signal of that specific function. | 204 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| H3-01 (410H) | Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: 0 to 10 V 1: -10 to 10 V | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 204 |
| H3-02 (434H) | Terminal A1 Function Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the function of terminal A1. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1F | 204 |
| H3-03 (411H) | Terminal A1 Gain Setting | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-02 when 10 V is input at terminal A1. | Default: 100.0% Min: -999.9% Max: 999.9% | 204 |
| H3-04 (412H) | Terminal A1 Bias Setting | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-02 when 0 V is input at terminal A1. | Default: 0.0% Min: -999.9% Max: 999.9% | 204 |
| H3-09 (417H) | Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: 0 to 10 V 1: -10 to 10 V Note: Use DIP switch S1 to set input terminal A2 for a current or a voltage input signal. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 0 | 205 |
| H3-10 (418H) | Terminal A2 Function Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the function of terminal A2. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1F | 205 |
| H3-11 (419H) | Terminal A2 Gain Setting | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-10 when 10 V is input at terminal A2. | Default: 100.0% Min: -999.9% Max: 999.9% | 205 |
| H3-12 (41AH) | Terminal A2 Bias Setting | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the level of the input value selected in H3-10 when 0 V is input at terminal A2. | Default: 0.0% Min: -999.9% Max: 999.9% | 205 |
| H3-13 (41BH) | Analog Input Filter Time Constant | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets a primary delay filter time constant for terminals A1 and A2. Used for noise filtering. | Default: 0.03 s Min: 0.00 s Max: 2.00 s | 205 |
| H3-16 (2F0H) | Offset for Terminal A1 | common_ All Modes TMonly Applies an offset to analog input A1. Can be used for zero adjustment of the analog input. | Default: 0 Min: -500 Max: 500 | 206 |
| H3-17 (2F1H) | Offset for Terminal A2 | common_ All Modes TMonly Applies an offset to analog input A2. Can be used for zero adjustment of the analog input. | Default: 0 Min: -500 Max: 500 | 206 |
Source page
Page 372
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 372 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
H3 Multi-Function Analog Input Settings (H3-02 and H3-10) Setting Function Description (For when output is 100%) Page 0 S (v p a e l e u d e R ad e d fe e r d e n to c e in B p i u a t s signal when multiple All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 206 analog terminals supply the speed reference) E1-04 (maximum output frequency) 2 Auxiliary Speed Reference 1 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 206 (used as a second speed reference) E1-04 (maximum output frequency) 3 Auxiliary Speed Reference 2 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 206 (used as third speed reference) E1-04 (maximum output frequency) E All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ <44> Motor Temperature (PTC thermistor input) oH3 Alarm detection level: 1.18 V 206 oH4 Fault detection level: 2.293 V 14 Torque Compensation (load cell input) V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 206 10 V = Motor rated torque 1F Not used (Through Mode) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 206 Sets this value when the terminal is not used or when using the terminal in the pass-through mode. <44> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. H4: Analog Outputs No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 102 ( H 41 4 D -0 H 1 ) Terminal FM Monitor Selection S Se e t l e t c h t e s d th e e s i d re a d ta m to o n b i e t o o r u p tp a u ra t m th e r t o e u r g to h t m he u l d ti i - g f i u ts n c a t v io ai n l a a b n l a e l o in g U ou tp - ut ter . m Fo in r a e l x F a M mp . le, enter “103” M M i a n x : : 0 9 0 9 0 9 207 for U1-03. H4-02 (41EH) Terminal FM Gain All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 9 t: 9 1 9 0 .9 0 % .0% 207 Sets the signal level at terminal FM that is equal to 100% of the selected monitor value. Max: 999.9% H4-03 (41FH) Terminal FM Bias All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 9 t: 9 0 9 . . 0 9% % 207 Sets the signal level at terminal FM that is equal to 0% of the selected monitor value. Max: 999.9% All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 103 H4-04 (420H) Terminal AM Monitor Selection Selects the data to be output through multi-function analog output terminal AM. Min: 000 207 Set the desired monitor parameter to the digits available in U-. For example, enter “103” Max: 999 for U1-03. H4-05 (421H) Terminal AM Gain All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 9 t: 9 5 9 0 .9 .0 % % 207 Sets the signal level at terminal AM that is equal to 100% of the selected monitor value. Max: 999.9% H4-06 (422H) Terminal AM Bias All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 9 t: 9 0 9 . . 0 9% % 207 Sets the signal level at terminal AM that is equal to 0% of the selected monitor value. Max: 999.9% H4-07 Terminal FM Signal Level All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 208 (423H) Selection 0: 0 to 10 V Max: 1 1: -10 to 10 V H4-08 Terminal AM Signal Level All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 Min: 0 208 (424H) Selection 0: 0 to 10 V Max: 1 1: -10 to 10 V H5: MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication Note: The settings for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications become effective when the drive is restarted. No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page H5-01 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 (425H) Drive Node Address Min: 0 404 <14> S C e y l c e l c e t s p d o r w iv e e r f s o ta r t t i h o e n s n e o t d ti e n g n u to m t b a e k r e ( e a f d f d e r c e t. ss) for MEMOBUS/Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+, S-. Max: FF All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 0: 1200 bps 1: 2400 bps 2: 4800 bps Default: 3 H5-02 Communication Speed Selection 3: 9600 bps Min: 0 404 (426H) 4: 19200 bps Max: 8 5: 38400 bps 6: 57600 bps 7: 76800 bps 8: 115200 bps Cycle power for the setting to take effect. 372 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| H3 Multi-Function Analog Input Settings (H3-02 and H3-10) | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| Setting | Function | Description (For when output is 100%) | Page |
| 0 | Speed Reference Bias (value added to input signal when multiple analog terminals supply the speed reference) | All Modes common_ TMonly E1-04 (maximum output frequency) | 206 |
| 2 | Auxiliary Speed Reference 1 (used as a second speed reference) | All Modes common_ TMonly E1-04 (maximum output frequency) | 206 |
| 3 | Auxiliary Speed Reference 2 (used as third speed reference) | All Modes common_ TMonly E1-04 (maximum output frequency) | 206 |
| E <44> | Motor Temperature (PTC thermistor input) | common_ All Modes TMonly oH3 Alarm detection level: 1.18 V oH4 Fault detection level: 2.293 V | 206 |
| 14 | Torque Compensation (load cell input) | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 10 V = Motor rated torque | 206 |
| 1F | Not used (Through Mode) | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets this value when the terminal is not used or when using the terminal in the pass-through mode. | 206 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| H4-01 (41DH) | Terminal FM Monitor Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly Selects the data to be output through multi-function analog output terminal FM. Set the desired monitor parameter to the digits available in U-. For example, enter “103” for U1-03. | Default: 102 Min: 000 Max: 999 | 207 |
| H4-02 (41EH) | Terminal FM Gain | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the signal level at terminal FM that is equal to 100% of the selected monitor value. | Default: 100.0% Min: -999.9% Max: 999.9% | 207 |
| H4-03 (41FH) | Terminal FM Bias | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the signal level at terminal FM that is equal to 0% of the selected monitor value. | Default: 0.0% Min: -999.9% Max: 999.9% | 207 |
| H4-04 (420H) | Terminal AM Monitor Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly Selects the data to be output through multi-function analog output terminal AM. Set the desired monitor parameter to the digits available in U-. For example, enter “103” for U1-03. | Default: 103 Min: 000 Max: 999 | 207 |
| H4-05 (421H) | Terminal AM Gain | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the signal level at terminal AM that is equal to 100% of the selected monitor value. | Default: 50.0% Min: -999.9% Max: 999.9% | 207 |
| H4-06 (422H) | Terminal AM Bias | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the signal level at terminal AM that is equal to 0% of the selected monitor value. | Default: 0.0% Min: -999.9% Max: 999.9% | 207 |
| H4-07 (423H) | Terminal FM Signal Level Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: 0 to 10 V 1: -10 to 10 V | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 208 |
| H4-08 (424H) | Terminal AM Signal Level Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: 0 to 10 V 1: -10 to 10 V | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 208 |
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| H5-01 (425H) <14> | Drive Node Address | All Modes common_ TMonly Selects drive station node number (address) for MEMOBUS/Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+, S-. Cycle power for the setting to take effect. | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: FF | 404 |
| H5-02 (426H) | Communication Speed Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: 1200 bps 1: 2400 bps 2: 4800 bps 3: 9600 bps 4: 19200 bps 5: 38400 bps 6: 57600 bps 7: 76800 bps 8: 115200 bps Cycle power for the setting to take effect. | Default: 3 Min: 0 Max: 8 | 404 |
Source page
Page 373
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 373 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 373 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 No.(Addr.) Name Description Setting Page All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 H5-03 Communication Parity Selection 0: No parity Min: 0 404 (427H) 1: Even parity Max: 2 2: Odd parity Cycle power for the setting to take effect. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 3 ( H 42 5 8 -0 H 4 ) S C t o o m pp m in u g n i M ca e ti t o h n o d E A rr f o t r e r ( CE) 0 1 : : R Co am as p t t t o o s s t t o o p p M M i a n x : : 0 3 404 2: Emergency Stop 3: Alarm only H5-05 Communication Fault Detection All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 Min: 0 405 (429H) Selection 0: Disabled Max: 1 1: Enabled. If communication is lost for more than two seconds, a CE fault will occur. H5-06 Drive Transmit Wait Time All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 5 l t m : 5 s ms 405 (42AH) Sets the wait time between receiving and sending data. Max: 65 ms H5-07 RTS Control Selection All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 1 405 (42BH) 0: Disabled. RTS is always on. Max: 1 1: Enabled. RTS turns on only when sending. H5-09 Communication Fault Detection All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 2.0 s Min: 0.0 s 405 (435H) Time Sets the time required to detect a communications error. Adjustment may be needed when Max: 10.0 s networking several drives. H5-10 Unit Selection for MEMOBUS/ All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 Min: 0 405 (436H) Modbus Register 0025H 0: 0.1 V units Max: 1 1: 1 V units H5-11 Communications ENTER Function All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (43CH) Selection 0: Drive requires an Enter command before accepting any changes to parameter settings. M M i a n x : : 0 1 406 1: Parameter changes are activated immediately without the Enter command. <14> If this parameter is set to 0, the drive will be unable to respond to MEMOBUS/Modbus commands. L: Protection Functions L parameters provide protection to the drive and motor, including control during momentary power loss, Stall Prevention, frequency detection, fault reset, overtorque detection, torque limits, and other types of hardware protection. L1: Motor Protection No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ ( L 48 1 0 -0 H 1 ) M Se o le to c r ti o O n verload Protection 0 1 : : D G i e s n a e b r l a e l d purpose motor (standard fan cooled) M De i f n a : u 0 lt: <5> 209 2: Drive dedicated motor with a speed range of 1:10 Max: 5 3: Vector motor with a speed range of 1:100 5: PM motor with constant torque characteristics L1-02 Motor Overload Protection Time All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 1 : 1 m .0 in min 210 (481H) Sets the motor thermal overload protection (oL1) time. Max: 5.0 min All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ L1-03 Sets operation when the motor temperature analog input (H3-02 or H3-10 = E) exceeds the oH3 Default: 3 (482H) Motor Overheat Alarm Operation alarm level. Min: 0 212 <44> Selection (PTC thermistor input) 0 1 : : R Co am as p t t t o o s s t t o o p p Max: 3 2: Emergency Stop (Fast Stop) (decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09) 3: Alarm only (“oH3” will flash) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ L1-04 Motor Overheat Fault Operation Sets stopping method when the motor temperature analog input (H3-02 or H3-10 = E) exceeds Default: 1 (483H) Selection (PTC thermistor input) the oH4 fault level. Min: 0 212 <44> 0: Ramp to stop Max: 2 1: Coast to stop 2: Emergency Stop (Fast Stop) (decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09) ( L 48 1 4 -0 H 5 ) Motor Temperature Input Filter All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0 . s 20 s 213 <44> Time (PTC thermistor input) Adjusts the filter for the motor temperature analog input (H3-02 or H3-10 = E). Max: 10.00 s L1-13 Continuous Electrothermal All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 B Min: 0 213 (46DH) Operation Selection 0: Disabled Max: 1 1: Enabled <5> Default setting is determined by the control mode (A1-02). <44> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later.
| No.(Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| H5-03 (427H) | Communication Parity Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: No parity 1: Even parity 2: Odd parity Cycle power for the setting to take effect. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 404 |
| H5-04 (428H) | Stopping Method After Communication Error (CE) | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Ramp to stop 1: Coast to stop 2: Emergency Stop 3: Alarm only | Default: 3 Min: 0 Max: 3 | 404 |
| H5-05 (429H) | Communication Fault Detection Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Enabled. If communication is lost for more than two seconds, a CE fault will occur. | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 405 |
| H5-06 (42AH) | Drive Transmit Wait Time | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the wait time between receiving and sending data. | Default: 5 ms Min: 5 ms Max: 65 ms | 405 |
| H5-07 (42BH) | RTS Control Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Disabled. RTS is always on. 1: Enabled. RTS turns on only when sending. | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 405 |
| H5-09 (435H) | Communication Fault Detection Time | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the time required to detect a communications error. Adjustment may be needed when networking several drives. | Default: 2.0 s Min: 0.0 s Max: 10.0 s | 405 |
| H5-10 (436H) | Unit Selection for MEMOBUS/ Modbus Register 0025H | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: 0.1 V units 1: 1 V units | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 405 |
| H5-11 (43CH) | Communications ENTER Function Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: Drive requires an Enter command before accepting any changes to parameter settings. 1: Parameter changes are activated immediately without the Enter command. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 406 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| L1-01 (480H) | Motor Overload Protection Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Disabled 1: General purpose motor (standard fan cooled) 2: Drive dedicated motor with a speed range of 1:10 3: Vector motor with a speed range of 1:100 5: PM motor with constant torque characteristics | Default: <5> Min: 0 Max: 5 | 209 |
| L1-02 (481H) | Motor Overload Protection Time | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the motor thermal overload protection (oL1) time. | Default: 1.0 min Min: 0.1 min Max: 5.0 min | 210 |
| L1-03 (482H) <44> | Motor Overheat Alarm Operation Selection (PTC thermistor input) | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets operation when the motor temperature analog input (H3-02 or H3-10 = E) exceeds the oH3 alarm level. 0: Ramp to stop 1: Coast to stop 2: Emergency Stop (Fast Stop) (decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09) 3: Alarm only (“oH3” will flash) | Default: 3 Min: 0 Max: 3 | 212 |
| L1-04 (483H) <44> | Motor Overheat Fault Operation Selection (PTC thermistor input) | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets stopping method when the motor temperature analog input (H3-02 or H3-10 = E) exceeds the oH4 fault level. 0: Ramp to stop 1: Coast to stop 2: Emergency Stop (Fast Stop) (decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1-09) | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 212 |
| L1-05 (484H) <44> | Motor Temperature Input Filter Time (PTC thermistor input) | All Modes common_ TMonly Adjusts the filter for the motor temperature analog input (H3-02 or H3-10 = E). | Default: 0.20 s Min: 0.00 s Max: 10.00 s | 213 |
| L1-13 (46DH) | Continuous Electrothermal Operation Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Enabled | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 213 |
Source page
Page 374
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 374 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
L2: Undervoltage Detection
No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page L2-05 Undervoltage Detection Level All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De in fa : u 1 l 5 t: 0 < V 9> d < c 15> 213 (489H) (Uv) Sets the DC bus undervoltage trip level. Max: 210 Vdc<9> <9> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double the value when using a 400 V class drive. <15> Default setting value is dependent on the setting for the input voltage (E1-01). L3: Stall Prevention
No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page
V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 L3-01 Stall Prevention Selection during (48FH) Acceleration 0: Disabled. Min: 0 213 1: General purpose. Acceleration is paused as long as the current is above the L3-02 setting. Max: 2 2: Intelligent. Accelerate in the shortest possible time without exceeding the L3-02 level. L3-02 Stall Prevention Level during V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l % t: <16> 214 (490H) Acceleration Used when L3-01 = 1 or 2. 100% is equal to the drive rated current. Max: 150%<16> V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 ( L 4 3 9 - 3 0 H 5 ) S R t u a n ll Prevention Selection during 0: Disabled. Drive runs at a set frequency. A heavy load may cause speed loss. Min: 0 214 1: Decel time 1. Uses the deceleration ramp set to C1-02 while Stall Prevention is performed. Max: 2 2: Decel time 2. Uses the deceleration ramp set to C1-04 while Stall Prevention is performed. L3-06 Stall Prevention Level during Run V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De in fa : u 3 l 0 t: % <16> 214 (494H) Enabled when L3-05 is set to 1 or 2. 100% is equal to the drive rated current. Max: 150%<16> <16> The setting value is dependent on the setting for the carrier frequency reduction (L8-38). L4: Speed Detection No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page Default: 0.0% L4-01 (499H) Speed Agreement Detection Level All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M M i a n x : : 0 1 . 0 0 0 % .0% 215 L4-01 sets the speed detection level for digital output functions H2- = 3, 4, 5. Default: 4.0% ( L 49 4 A -0 H 2 ) Speed Agreement Detection Width L4-02 sets the hysteresis or allowable margin for speed detection. Min: 0.0% 215 Max: 40.0% L4-03 Speed Agreement Detection Level Default: 0.0% Min: -100.0% 215 (49BH) (+/-) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Max: 100.0% L4-03 sets the speed detection level for digital output functions H2- = 13, 14, 15, 16. L4-04 Speed Agreement Detection Width L4-04 sets the hysteresis or allowable margin for speed detection. Default: 4.0% Min: 0.0% 215 (49CH) (+/-) Max: 40.0% L4-05 Speed Reference Loss Detection All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 Min: 0 215 (49DH) Selection 0: Stop. Drive stops when the speed reference is lost. Max: 1 1: Run. Drive runs at a reduced speed when the speed reference is lost. ( L 4C 4- 2 0 H 6 ) Speed Reference at Reference Loss Set A s l t l h M e p o e d rc e e s ntage of the speed reference that the drive should run with when the speed c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : % 80% 215 reference is lost. Max: 100.0% L4-07 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (470H) Speed Agree Detection Selection 0: No detection during baseblock. Min: 0 216 <44> 1: Detection always enabled. Max: 1 L4-13 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0.0% (4F6H) Door Zone Level S sp e e ts e d th f e a l d l o s o b r e z lo o w ne t h sp is e e le d v l e e l v . el. The “door zone” multi-function digital output is closed when the M M i a n x : : 0 1 . 0 0 0 % .0% 216 <44> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later.
374 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| L2-05 (489H) | Undervoltage Detection Level (Uv) | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the DC bus undervoltage trip level. | Default:<9><15> Min: 150 Vdc Max: 210 Vdc<9> | 213 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| L3-01 (48FH) | Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled. 1: General purpose. Acceleration is paused as long as the current is above the L3-02 setting. 2: Intelligent. Accelerate in the shortest possible time without exceeding the L3-02 level. | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 213 |
| L3-02 (490H) | Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Used when L3-01 = 1 or 2. 100% is equal to the drive rated current. | Default: <16> Min: 0% Max: 150%<16> | 214 |
| L3-05 (493H) | Stall Prevention Selection during Run | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled. Drive runs at a set frequency. A heavy load may cause speed loss. 1: Decel time 1. Uses the deceleration ramp set to C1-02 while Stall Prevention is performed. 2: Decel time 2. Uses the deceleration ramp set to C1-04 while Stall Prevention is performed. | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 214 |
| L3-06 (494H) | Stall Prevention Level during Run | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Enabled when L3-05 is set to 1 or 2. 100% is equal to the drive rated current. | Default: <16> Min: 30% Max: 150%<16> | 214 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| L4-01 (499H) | Speed Agreement Detection Level | All Modes common_ TMonly L4-01 sets the speed detection level for digital output functions H2- = 3, 4, 5. L4-02 sets the hysteresis or allowable margin for speed detection. | Default: 0.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 100.0% | 215 |
| L4-02 (49AH) | Speed Agreement Detection Width | Default: 4.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 40.0% | 215 | |
| L4-03 (49BH) | Speed Agreement Detection Level (+/-) | common_ All Modes TMonly L4-03 sets the speed detection level for digital output functions H2- = 13, 14, 15, 16. L4-04 sets the hysteresis or allowable margin for speed detection. | Default: 0.0% Min: -100.0% Max: 100.0% | 215 |
| L4-04 (49CH) | Speed Agreement Detection Width (+/-) | Default: 4.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 40.0% | 215 | |
| L4-05 (49DH) | Speed Reference Loss Detection Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Stop. Drive stops when the speed reference is lost. 1: Run. Drive runs at a reduced speed when the speed reference is lost. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 215 |
| L4-06 (4C2H) | Speed Reference at Reference Loss | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the percentage of the speed reference that the drive should run with when the speed reference is lost. | Default: 80% Min: 0.0% Max: 100.0% | 215 |
| L4-07 (470H) <44> | Speed Agree Detection Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: No detection during baseblock. 1: Detection always enabled. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 216 |
| L4-13 (4F6H) | Door Zone Level | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the door zone speed level. The “door zone” multi-function digital output is closed when the speed falls below this level. | Default: 0.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 100.0% | 216 |
Source page
Page 375
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 375 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 375 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 L5: Automatic Fault Reset No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page L5-01 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 Number of Auto Reset Attempts Min: 0 217 (49EH) Sets the number of times the drive may attempt to reset after the following faults occur: GF, LF, Max: 10 oC, ov, rr, oH1, oL1, oL2, oL3, oL4, UL3, UL4. L5-02 Fault Output Operation during All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 217 (49FH) Auto Reset 0: Fault output not active. Max: 1 1: Fault output active during reset attempt. L5-06 Undervoltage Fault Reset All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (522H) Selection 0 1 : : A Sa lw m a e y a s s a L u 5 to - m 01 a t c i o c n al d l i y t i r o e n set UV1 M M i a n x : : 0 1 217 L6: Torque Detection No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 0: Disabled 1: oL3 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after detection 2: oL3 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection Default: 0 (4 L A 6- 1 0 H 1 ) Torque Detection Selection 1 4 3 : : o o L L 3 3 d d e e t t e e c c t t i i o o n n o al n w ly a y a s c t a i c v t e i v d e u d ri u n r g in s g p e ru ed n , a o g u re tp e u , t o s u h tp u u ts t d sh o u w t n s d o o n w a n n o o n L 3 a n f a o u L lt 3 fault M M i a n x : : 0 8 218 5: UL3 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after detection 6: UL3 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection 7: UL3 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL3 fault 8: UL3 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL3 fault L6-02 Torque Detection Level 1 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l % t: 150% 219 (4A2H) Sets the overtorque and undertorque detection level. Max: 300% L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 s .1 s 219 (4A3H) Sets the time an overtorque or undertorque condition must exist to trigger torque detection 1. Max: 10.0 s All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 0: Disabled 1: oL4 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after detection L6-04 2: oL4 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection Default: 0 (4A4H) Torque Detection Selection 2 3: oL4 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL4 fault Min: 0 218 4: oL4 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL4 fault Max: 8 5: UL4 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after detection 6: UL4 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection 7: UL4 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL4 fault 8: UL4 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL4 fault (4 L A 6- 5 0 H 5 ) Torque Detection Level 2 Set A s l t l h M e o o v d e e rt s orque and undertorque detection level. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M M e i a f n x a : : u 0 3 l % t 0 : 0 1 % 50% 219 (4 L A 6- 6 0 H 6 ) Torque Detection Time 2 Set A s l t l h M e t o im de e s an overtorque or undertorque condition must exist to trigger torque detecti c T o o M n m o m n o l 2 n y . _ D M M e i a f n x a : : u 0 1 l . t 0 0 : . 0 0 s . 1 s s 219 L7: Torque Limit No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page (4 L A 7- 7 0 H 1 ) Forward Torque Limit V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l % t: 300% 220 Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque. Four individual quadrants Max: 300% can be set. L7-02 Output Torque Default: 300% (4A8H) Reverse Torque Limit Positive Torque M M i a n x : : 0 3 % 00% 220 L7-01 L7-04 Motor L7-03 Forward Regenerative Torque Regeneration r/min Default: 300% (4A9H) Limit REV FWD Min: 0% 220 Regeneration Max: 300% L7-03 L7-04 Reverse Regenerative Torque L7-02 Negative Torque D M e i f n a : u 0 l % t: 300% 220 (4AAH) Limit Max: 300% L7-16 Torque Limit Process at Start V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 1 220 (44DH) 0: Disabled Max: 1 B 1: Enabled
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| L5-01 (49EH) | Number of Auto Reset Attempts | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the number of times the drive may attempt to reset after the following faults occur: GF, LF, oC, ov, rr, oH1, oL1, oL2, oL3, oL4, UL3, UL4. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 10 | 217 |
| L5-02 (49FH) | Fault Output Operation during Auto Reset | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Fault output not active. 1: Fault output active during reset attempt. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 217 |
| L5-06 (522H) | Undervoltage Fault Reset Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: Same as L5-01 condition 1: Always automatically reset UV1 | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 217 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| L6-01 (4A1H) | Torque Detection Selection 1 | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: Disabled 1: oL3 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after detection 2: oL3 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection 3: oL3 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL3 fault 4: oL3 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL3 fault 5: UL3 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after detection 6: UL3 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection 7: UL3 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL3 fault 8: UL3 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL3 fault | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 8 | 218 |
| L6-02 (4A2H) | Torque Detection Level 1 | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the overtorque and undertorque detection level. | Default: 150% Min: 0% Max: 300% | 219 |
| L6-03 (4A3H) | Torque Detection Time 1 | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the time an overtorque or undertorque condition must exist to trigger torque detection 1. | Default: 0.1 s Min: 0.0 s Max: 10.0 s | 219 |
| L6-04 (4A4H) | Torque Detection Selection 2 | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: Disabled 1: oL4 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after detection 2: oL4 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection 3: oL4 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL4 fault 4: oL4 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL4 fault 5: UL4 detection only active during speed agree, operation continues after detection 6: UL4 detection always active during run, operation continues after detection 7: UL4 detection only active during speed agree, output shuts down on an oL4 fault 8: UL4 detection always active during run, output shuts down on an oL4 fault | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 8 | 218 |
| L6-05 (4A5H) | Torque Detection Level 2 | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the overtorque and undertorque detection level. | Default: 150% Min: 0% Max: 300% | 219 |
| L6-06 (4A6H) | Torque Detection Time 2 | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the time an overtorque or undertorque condition must exist to trigger torque detection 2. | Default: 0.1 s Min: 0.0 s Max: 10.0 s | 219 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| L7-01 (4A7H) | Forward Torque Limit | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the torque limit value as a percentage of the motor rated torque. Four individual quadrants can be set. Output Torque Positive Torque L7-01 L7-04 Motor Regeneration r/min REV FWD Regeneration L7-03 L7-02 Negative Torque | Default: 300% Min: 0% Max: 300% | 220 |
| L7-02 (4A8H) | Reverse Torque Limit | Default: 300% Min: 0% Max: 300% | 220 | |
| L7-03 (4A9H) | Forward Regenerative Torque Limit | Default: 300% Min: 0% Max: 300% | 220 | |
| L7-04 (4AAH) | Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit | Default: 300% Min: 0% Max: 300% | 220 | |
| L7-16 (44DH) | Torque Limit Process at Start | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Enabled | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 220 |
| Regeneration | Column |
|---|---|
| Regeneration |
Source page
Page 376
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 376 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
L8: Drive Protection
No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page
(4 L A 8- E 0 H 2 ) Overheat Alarm Level An A o l v l e M rh o e d at e a s larm will occur if the heatsink temperature exceeds the level set in L8-02. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M M e i a f n x a : : u 5 1 l 0 t 5 : ° 0 C < ° 4 C > 220 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation 0 1: : C R o am as p t t t o o s s t t o o p p . . A A f f a a u u l l t t i i s s t t r r i i g g g g e e r r e e d d . . D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 3 220 (4AFH) Selection 2: Emergency Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. A fault is Max: 3 triggered. 3: Continue operation. An alarm is triggered. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Selects the detection of input current phase loss, power supply voltage imbalance, or main circuit electrolytic capacitor deterioration. L8-05 Input Phase Loss Protection 0: Disabled Default: 1<47> (4B1H) Selection 1 2 : : E E n n a a b b l l e e d d a d l u w ri a n y g s operation M Ma in x : : 0 3 221 3: Enabled during constant speed Setting 1 cannot be selected for models CIMR-LF that are in compliance with IEC/EN 61508 SIL3 Safety Integrity Level 3. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ ( L 4B 8- 2 0 H 6 ) Input Phase Loss Detection Level W the h e in n p r u ip t p p l h e a i s s e o if b s th e e rv d e i d f f i e n r e th nc e e D b C et b w u e s e , n e x th p e a n m s a io x n a o n f d t m he i n in im pu u t m b i v a a s l u is e s c a o l f c u th la e t e ri d p p an le d a b r e e c g o r m ea e t s e r D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : % <4> 221 than L8-06. Max: 50.0% Detection Level = 100% = Voltage class × 2(determines standards for setting values) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 0: Disabled Default: 0 ( L 4B 8- 3 0 H 7 ) O Se u l t e p c u ti t o P n hase Loss Protection 1 2: : E E n n a a b b l l e e d d ( ( t t r r i i g g g g e e r r e e d d w by h e a n s i t n w g o le p p h h a a se se s a lo re ss l ) ost) M Ma in x : : 0 3 221 3: Fault at phase loss at start or when two phases lost mid-operation Note: Setting 3 is available in the control mode V/f or OLV for drives with software versions PRG: 7200 or later. L8-09 Output Ground Fault Detection All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 Min: 0 222 (4B5H) Selection 0: Disabled Max: 1 1: Enabled All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ L8-10 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation 0: Run with timer (Fan operates only during run and for L8-11 seconds after stop.) Default: 0 (4B6H) Selection 1: Run always (Cooling fan operates whenever the drive is powered up.) Min: 0 222 2: Temperature controlled (Cooling fan operated depending on the temperature of the drives Max: 2 heatsink.) L8-11 Heatsink Cooling Fan Off Delay All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t s : 60 s 222 (4B7H) Time Sets a delay time to shut off the cooling fan after the Up/Down command is removed when Max: 300 s L8-10 = 0. L8-12 Ambient Temperature Setting All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 1 t: 0 4 °C 0°C 222 (4B8H) Enter the ambient temperature. This value adjusts the oL2 detection level. Max: 50°C L8-15 o C L h 2 ar ( a d c r t i e v r e is o ti v c e s r S lo e a le d c ) tion at Low All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 1 222 (4BBH) Speeds 0: No oL2 level reduction below 6 Hz. Max: 1 1: oL2 level is reduced linearly below 6 Hz. It is halved at 0 Hz. L8-27 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 300.0% Overcurrent Detection Gain Min: 0.0% 223 (4DDH) Sets the gain for overcurrent detection as a percentage of the motor rated current. Overcurrent is Max: 300.0% detected using the drive’s overcurrent level or the value set to L8-27, whichever is lower. L8-29 Current Unbalance Detection V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 Min: 0 223 (4DFH) (LF2) 0: Disabled Max: 1 1: Enabled L8-35 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: <4> (4ECH) Installation Selection Min: 0 223 <1> 0 2 : : I I P P 2 2 0 0 / e N n E c M los A u r 1 e , d U r L iv T e ype 1 enclosure drive Max: 2 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 L8-38 Automatic Torque Boost Selection Torque Boost increases the output current limit while decreasing the carrier frequency when the Min: 0 223 (4EFH) output current exceeds a certain value. Max: 3 0: Disabled 3: Enabled L8-39 Reduced Carrier Frequency All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 1 l . t 0 : 3 k . H 0 z kHz 224 (4F0H) Sets the reduced carrier frequency used by the Torque Boost function. Max: 15.0 kHz L8-55 Internal Braking Transistor All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 (45FH) Protection 0: Disabled. L8-55 should be disabled when using a regen converter or an optional braking unit. M Ma in x : : 0 1 224 1: Protection enabled. 376 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| L8-02 (4AEH) | Overheat Alarm Level | common_ All Modes TMonly An overheat alarm will occur if the heatsink temperature exceeds the level set in L8-02. | Default: <4> Min: 50°C Max: 150°C | 220 |
| L8-03 (4AFH) | Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Ramp to stop. A fault is triggered. 1: Coast to stop. A fault is triggered. 2: Emergency Stop. Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. A fault is triggered. 3: Continue operation. An alarm is triggered. | Default: 3 Min: 0 Max: 3 | 220 |
| L8-05 (4B1H) | Input Phase Loss Protection Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly Selects the detection of input current phase loss, power supply voltage imbalance, or main circuit electrolytic capacitor deterioration. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled always 2: Enabled during operation 3: Enabled during constant speed Setting 1 cannot be selected for models CIMR-LF that are in compliance with IEC/EN 61508 SIL3 Safety Integrity Level 3. | Default: 1<47> Min: 0 Max: 3 | 221 |
| L8-06 (4B2H) | Input Phase Loss Detection Level | All Modes common_ TMonly When ripple is observed in the DC bus, expansion of the input bias is calculated and becomes the input phase if the difference between the max and minimum values of the ripple are greater than L8-06. Detection Level = 100% = Voltage class × 2(determines standards for setting values) | Default: <4> Min: 0.0% Max: 50.0% | 221 |
| L8-07 (4B3H) | Output Phase Loss Protection Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Enabled (triggered by a single phase loss) 2: Enabled (triggered when two phases are lost) 3: Fault at phase loss at start or when two phases lost mid-operation Note: Setting 3 is available in the control mode V/f or OLV for drives with software versions PRG: 7200 or later. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 3 | 221 |
| L8-09 (4B5H) | Output Ground Fault Detection Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Enabled | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 222 |
| L8-10 (4B6H) | Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: Run with timer (Fan operates only during run and for L8-11 seconds after stop.) 1: Run always (Cooling fan operates whenever the drive is powered up.) 2: Temperature controlled (Cooling fan operated depending on the temperature of the drives heatsink.) | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 222 |
| L8-11 (4B7H) | Heatsink Cooling Fan Off Delay Time | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets a delay time to shut off the cooling fan after the Up/Down command is removed when L8-10 = 0. | Default: 60 s Min: 0 s Max: 300 s | 222 |
| L8-12 (4B8H) | Ambient Temperature Setting | common_ All Modes TMonly Enter the ambient temperature. This value adjusts the oL2 detection level. | Default: 40°C Min: -10°C Max: 50°C | 222 |
| L8-15 (4BBH) | oL2 (drive overload) Characteristics Selection at Low Speeds | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: No oL2 level reduction below 6 Hz. 1: oL2 level is reduced linearly below 6 Hz. It is halved at 0 Hz. | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 222 |
| L8-27 (4DDH) | Overcurrent Detection Gain | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the gain for overcurrent detection as a percentage of the motor rated current. Overcurrent is detected using the drive’s overcurrent level or the value set to L8-27, whichever is lower. | Default: 300.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 300.0% | 223 |
| L8-29 (4DFH) | Current Unbalance Detection (LF2) | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Enabled | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 223 |
| L8-35 (4ECH) <1> | Installation Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: IP20 enclosure drive 2: IP20/NEMA 1, UL Type 1 enclosure drive | Default: <4> Min: 0 Max: 2 | 223 |
| L8-38 (4EFH) | Automatic Torque Boost Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly Torque Boost increases the output current limit while decreasing the carrier frequency when the output current exceeds a certain value. 0: Disabled 3: Enabled | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 3 | 223 |
| L8-39 (4F0H) | Reduced Carrier Frequency | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the reduced carrier frequency used by the Torque Boost function. | Default: 3.0 kHz Min: 1.0 kHz Max: 15.0 kHz | 224 |
| L8-55 (45FH) | Internal Braking Transistor Protection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Disabled. L8-55 should be disabled when using a regen converter or an optional braking unit. 1: Protection enabled. | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 224 |
Source page
Page 377
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 377 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 377 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ L8-62 Operation Selection at Input Phase Sets stopping method when a Input phase loss fault (PF) occurs. See parameter L8-05. Default: 1 (529H) Loss 0 1 : : R C a o m as p t t t o o S S t t o o p p - Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-02. M M i a n x : : 0 3 221 2: Emergency Stop - Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. 3: Alarm only - Drive continues operation. ( L 61 8 E -7 H 7 ) Oscillation Suppression Us A ed l l t o M s o u d pp e r s ess speed oscillations that occur with an unloaded motor and that have the c T o M s m o a m n m o l n y e _ D M e i f n a : u - l 1 t: 0 0 0 225 frequency as the output frequency. Max: 100 ( L 2F 8- 5 8 H 8 ) Safe Disable Operation Mode 0: M Al o l d M e o 0 des c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 1 225 1: Mode 1 Max: 1 L8-89 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (B97H) Current Monitoring Selection Enables or disables the Current Monitoring function. Min: 0 225 <44> 0: Disabled Max: 1 1: Enabled ( L B 8 9 - 8 9 H 9 ) Current Monitoring Level Set A s l t l h M e c o u d rr e e s nt monitoring level as a percentage of the drive’s rated current. Sets the le c T v o M e m o l m n o l o n y f _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : % 10.0% 225 <44> current used for L8-89 and H2- = 5C. Max: 50.0% <1> Parameter setting value is not reset to the default value when the drive is initialized. <4> Default setting is determined by the drive model (o2-04). <44> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. <47> The default is 2 for models CIMR-LF that are in compliance with IEC/EN 61508 SIL3 Safety Integrity Level 3. n: Advanced Performance Set-Up The n parameters are used to adjust more advanced performance characteristics such as speed feedback detection, Online Tuning for motor line-to-line resistance, and PM motor control tuning. n1: Hunting Prevention No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page (1 n 1 1 0 - 5 0 H 8 ) L Se e l a e k c a t g io e n Current Vibration Control 0: M Al e l t h M o o d d 1 es c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 226 <45> 1: Method 2 Max: 1 <45> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7200 or later. n2: Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Tuning No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1.00 ( n 5 2 8 - 4 0 H 1 ) S (A p F ee R d ) F G e a e i d n back Detection Control Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain in the automatic frequency regulator Min: 0.00 226 (AFR). Max: 10.00 If hunting occurs, increase the set value. If response is low, decrease the set value. n2-02 Speed Feedback Detection Control V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t m : 5 s 0 ms 226 (585H) (AFR) Time Constant 1 Sets the time constant used for speed feedback detection control (AFR). Max: 2000 ms ( n 5 2 8 - 6 0 H 3 ) S (A p F ee R d ) F T e i e m d e b a C c o k n D st e a t n e t c 2 tion Control V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t m : 7 s 50 ms 226 Sets the AFR time constant to be used during regen. Max: 2000 ms n5: Inertia Compensation No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page n5-01 Inertia Compensation Selection V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 227 (5B0H) 0: Disabled Max: 1 1: Enabled (5 n B 5- 1 0 H 2 ) Motor Acceleration Time V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 < 1 4> s 227 Sets the time required to accelerate the motor at 100% torque from 0 to the nominal speed. Max: 10.000 s n5-03 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1.00 (5B2H) Inertia Compensation Gain Sets the ratio between motor and load inertia. Lower this setting if overshoot occurs at the end M M i a n x : : 0 1 . 0 0 0 0 .00 228 B of acceleration. V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 ( n 1 5 7 - 0 0 H 7 ) S S p el e e e c d t i F on eedback Compensation 0: Disabled Min: 0 229 1: Enabled Max: 2 2: Test Mode
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| L8-62 (529H) | Operation Selection at Input Phase Loss | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets stopping method when a Input phase loss fault (PF) occurs. See parameter L8-05. 0: Ramp to Stop - Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-02. 1: Coast to Stop 2: Emergency Stop - Decelerate to stop using the deceleration ramp in C1-09. 3: Alarm only - Drive continues operation. | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 3 | 221 |
| L8-77 (61EH) | Oscillation Suppression | common_ All Modes TMonly Used to suppress speed oscillations that occur with an unloaded motor and that have the same frequency as the output frequency. | Default: 0 Min: -100 Max: 100 | 225 |
| L8-88 (2F5H) | Safe Disable Operation Mode | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Mode 0 1: Mode 1 | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 225 |
| L8-89 (B97H) <44> | Current Monitoring Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly Enables or disables the Current Monitoring function. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 225 |
| L8-99 (B98H) <44> | Current Monitoring Level | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the current monitoring level as a percentage of the drive’s rated current. Sets the level of current used for L8-89 and H2- = 5C. | Default: 10.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 50.0% | 225 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| n1-08 (1105H) <45> | Leakage Current Vibration Control Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Method 1 1: Method 2 | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 226 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| n2-01 (584H) | Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Gain | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain in the automatic frequency regulator (AFR). If hunting occurs, increase the set value. If response is low, decrease the set value. | Default: 1.00 Min: 0.00 Max: 10.00 | 226 |
| n2-02 (585H) | Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 1 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the time constant used for speed feedback detection control (AFR). | Default: 50 ms Min: 0 ms Max: 2000 ms | 226 |
| n2-03 (586H) | Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 2 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the AFR time constant to be used during regen. | Default: 750 ms Min: 0 ms Max: 2000 ms | 226 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| n5-01 (5B0H) | Inertia Compensation Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Enabled | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 227 |
| n5-02 (5B1H) | Motor Acceleration Time | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the time required to accelerate the motor at 100% torque from 0 to the nominal speed. | Default:<4> Min: 0.001 s Max: 10.000 s | 227 |
| n5-03 (5B2H) | Inertia Compensation Gain | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the ratio between motor and load inertia. Lower this setting if overshoot occurs at the end of acceleration. | Default: 1.00 Min: 0.00 Max: 100.00 | 228 |
| n5-07 (170H) | Speed Feedback Compensation Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 2: Test Mode | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 229 |
Source page
Page 378
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 378 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page
( n 1 5 7 - 1 0 H 8 ) S G p a e in e d ( P F ) eedback Compensation V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 1 2.00 229 Sets the proportional gain for the Speed Feedback Compensation. Max: 300.00 <4> Default setting value is dependent on the drive model (o2-04). n6: Online Tuning
No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 2 n6-01 (570H) Online Tuning Selection 0: Disabled Min: 0 229 1: Line-to-line resistance tuning Max: 2 2: Voltage correction. n6-05 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1.0 Online Tuning Gain Min: 0.1 230 (5C7H) Decrease this setting for motors with a relatively large rotor time constant. Max: 50.0 If overload occurs, increase this setting slowly in increments of 0.1. n8: PM Motor Control Tuning No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page n8-01 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 50% (540H) Initial Polarity Estimation Current Sets the current used for initial rotor position estimation as a percentage of the motor rated M M i a n x : : 0 1 % 00% 230 current (E5-03). If the motor nameplate lists an “Si” value, that value should be entered here. n8-02 Pole Attraction Current V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l % t: 80% 230 (541H) Sets the current during initial polar attraction as a percentage of the motor rated current. Enter a Max: 150% high value when attempting to increase starting torque. (5 n 5 8 C -2 H 9 ) q du -A ri x n i g s N C o u r r m re a n l t O C p o e n r t a ro ti l o G n ain V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t r : a 1 d 0 /s 00 rad/s 231 Sets the q axis proportional gain for the normal control range. Max: 2000 rad/s n8-30 q-Axis Current Control Integral V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 1 m 0 s .0 ms 231 (55DH) Time during Normal Operation Sets the q axis integral time for the normal control range. Max: 100.0 ms ( n 5 8 5 - F 3 H 2 ) d du -A ri x n i g s N C o u r r m re a n l t O C p o e n r t a ro ti l o G n ain V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t r : a 1 d 0 /s 00 rad/s 232 Sets the d axis proportional gain for the normal control range. Max: 2000 rad/s n8-33 d-Axis Current Control Integral V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 1 m 0 s .0 ms 232 (560H) Time during Normal Operation Sets the d axis integral time for the normal control range. Max: 100.0 ms n8-35 Initial Rotor Position Detection V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 1 lt: 1 230 (562H) Selection 1: High frequency injection Max: 2 2: Pulse injection ( n 5 8 6 - 3 3 H 6 ) High Frequency Injection Level V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 2 l 5 t: H 50 z 0 Hz 230 Sets the frequency in Hz for the superimposed signal used for superimposed harmonics. Max: 1000 Hz V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 20.0% ( n 5 8 6 - 4 3 H 7 ) H Am ig p h l F it r u e d q e uency Injection Sets the amplitude for superimposed harmonics according to the voltage class of the motor. Min: 0.0% 231 Adjust this value when there is too much or too little current as a result of the settings assigned Max: 99.9% to motor parameters. n8-62 Output Voltage Limit V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 2 V 00.0 V<9> 232 (57DH) P po re w v e e r n s ts u p o p u l t y p . ut voltage saturation. Should be set just below the voltage provided by the input Max: 230.0 V<9> n8-81 High Frequency Injection during V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 2 l 5 t: H 90 z Hz 231 (2D0H) Rescue Operation Sets the frequency used for Polar Detection Method 1 during Rescue Operation. Max: 1000 Hz n8-82 H Am ig p h l F it r u e d q e u d en u c ri y n g In R je e c s t c io u n e V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 1 : % 15.0% 231 (2D1H) Operation Sets the amplitude for High Frequency Injection during Rescue Operation as a percentage of the Max: 99.9% voltage (200 V or 400 V). n8-84 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 100% Polarity Detection Current Min: 0% 231 (2D3H) Sets the current level (E5-03) as a percentage for detecting polarity during Initial Polarity Max: 150% Estimation. n8-86 Magnet Pole Search Error V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 Min: 0 231 (2D5H) Detection Selection 0: Disabled Max: 1 1: Enabled <9> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double the value when using a 400 V class drive. 378 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| n5-08 (171H) | Speed Feedback Compensation Gain (P) | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the proportional gain for the Speed Feedback Compensation. | Default: 12.00 Min: 0.00 Max: 300.00 | 229 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| n6-01 (570H) | Online Tuning Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Line-to-line resistance tuning 2: Voltage correction. | Default: 2 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 229 |
| n6-05 (5C7H) | Online Tuning Gain | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Decrease this setting for motors with a relatively large rotor time constant. If overload occurs, increase this setting slowly in increments of 0.1. | Default: 1.0 Min: 0.1 Max: 50.0 | 230 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| n8-01 (540H) | Initial Polarity Estimation Current | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the current used for initial rotor position estimation as a percentage of the motor rated current (E5-03). If the motor nameplate lists an “Si” value, that value should be entered here. | Default: 50% Min: 0% Max: 100% | 230 |
| n8-02 (541H) | Pole Attraction Current | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the current during initial polar attraction as a percentage of the motor rated current. Enter a high value when attempting to increase starting torque. | Default: 80% Min: 0% Max: 150% | 230 |
| n8-29 (55CH) | q-Axis Current Control Gain during Normal Operation | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the q axis proportional gain for the normal control range. | Default: 1000 rad/s Min: 0 rad/s Max: 2000 rad/s | 231 |
| n8-30 (55DH) | q-Axis Current Control Integral Time during Normal Operation | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the q axis integral time for the normal control range. | Default: 10.0 ms Min: 0.0 ms Max: 100.0 ms | 231 |
| n8-32 (55FH) | d-Axis Current Control Gain during Normal Operation | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the d axis proportional gain for the normal control range. | Default: 1000 rad/s Min: 0 rad/s Max: 2000 rad/s | 232 |
| n8-33 (560H) | d-Axis Current Control Integral Time during Normal Operation | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the d axis integral time for the normal control range. | Default: 10.0 ms Min: 0.0 ms Max: 100.0 ms | 232 |
| n8-35 (562H) | Initial Rotor Position Detection Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 1: High frequency injection 2: Pulse injection | Default: 1 Min: 1 Max: 2 | 230 |
| n8-36 (563H) | High Frequency Injection Level | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the frequency in Hz for the superimposed signal used for superimposed harmonics. | Default: 500 Hz Min: 25 Hz Max: 1000 Hz | 230 |
| n8-37 (564H) | High Frequency Injection Amplitude | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the amplitude for superimposed harmonics according to the voltage class of the motor. Adjust this value when there is too much or too little current as a result of the settings assigned to motor parameters. | Default: 20.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 99.9% | 231 |
| n8-62 (57DH) | Output Voltage Limit | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Prevents output voltage saturation. Should be set just below the voltage provided by the input power supply. | Default: 200.0 V<9> Min: 0.0 V Max: 230.0 V<9> | 232 |
| n8-81 (2D0H) | High Frequency Injection during Rescue Operation | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the frequency used for Polar Detection Method 1 during Rescue Operation. | Default: 90 Hz Min: 25 Hz Max: 1000 Hz | 231 |
| n8-82 (2D1H) | High Frequency Injection Amplitude during Rescue Operation | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the amplitude for High Frequency Injection during Rescue Operation as a percentage of the voltage (200 V or 400 V). | Default: 15.0% Min: 0.1% Max: 99.9% | 231 |
| n8-84 (2D3H) | Polarity Detection Current | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the current level (E5-03) as a percentage for detecting polarity during Initial Polarity Estimation. | Default: 100% Min: 0% Max: 150% | 231 |
| n8-86 (2D5H) | Magnet Pole Search Error Detection Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Enabled | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 231 |
Source page
Page 379
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 379 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 379 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 n9: Current Detection Adjustments No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page n9-60 A/D Conversion Start Delay V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : μ <4 s > 232 (64DH) Sets a delay time for starting the current signal A/D conversion. This value seldom needs to be Max: 40.0 μs changed. <4> Default setting is determined by the drive model (o2-04). o: Operator Related Parameters The o parameters set up the digital operator displays. o1: Digital Operator Display Selection For more details on the digital operator displays, refer to Digital Operator Display Unit Selection on page 95. No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ o1-01 Switches the display after the power has been turned on. When using an LED operator, pressing Default: 106 (Monitor (500H) Drive Mode Unit Monitor the up arrow key will display the following data: frequency reference → rotational direction → U1-06) 233 Selection output frequency → output current → output voltage → U1-. Min: 105 (This is done by entering the 1 part of U1-. Certain monitors are not available in some Max: 699 control modes.) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ o1-02 o1-02 selects the information that is displayed when the power is turned on. (501H) User Monitor Selection after 1: Speed reference (U1-01) Default: 1 Power Up 2: Direction Min: 1 233 3: Output speed (U1-02) Max: 5 4: Output current (U1-03) 5: User-selected monitor (set by o1-01) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Sets the units the drive should use to display the frequency reference and motor speed monitors. 0: 0.01 Hz ( o 5 1 0 - 2 0 H 3 ) D Se i l g e i c ta ti l o O n perator Display Unit 1 2 3 : : : 0 r U / . m s 0 e 1 i r n % - s ( e c ( l 1 a e l 0 c c 0 t u e % l d a t u = e n d E i t u 1 s s - ( i 0 s n 4 e g ) t t b h y e o n 1 u - m 10 b e a r n o d f o m 1- o 1 to 1 r ) poles setting in E2-04, E4-04, or E5-04) D M M e i a f n x a : : u 0 6 lt: < 1 21> 233 4: Elevator units 1 (speed in m/s, accel/decel rate and jerk in s) 5: Elevator units 2 (speed in m/s, accel/decel rate in m/s2, jerk in m/s3) 6: Elevator units 3 (speed in ft/min, accel/decel rate in ft/s2, jerk in ft/s3) ( o 5 1 0 - 3 0 H 4 ) V/f Pattern Setting Units 0: Hz V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 lt: <5> 234 1: r/min Max: 1 o1-05 (504H) LCD Contrast Control All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 3 234 Sets the brightness of the LCD operator (option). Max: 5 o1-06 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (517H) User Monitor Selection Mode Min: 0 234 <44> 0 1: : 3 3 M M o o n n i i t t o o r r S Se e q le u c e t n ab ti l a e l ( ( o D 1 i - s 0 p 7 la a y n s d t h o e 1 - n 0 e 8 x t s e 2 l e s c e t q e u d e n m ti o a n l i m to o r n is it d o i r s s p ) layed) Max: 1 ( o 5 1 1 - 8 0 H 7 ) Second Line Monitor Selection All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 1 l 0 t: 1 102 234 <44> Selects the monitor displayed on the second line. Max: 699 ( o 5 1 1 - 9 0 H 8 ) Third Line Monitor Selection All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 1 l 0 t: 1 103 234 <44> Selects the monitor displayed on the third line. Max: 699 ( o 5 1 2 - 0 1 H 0 ) U Va s l e u r e -Set Display Units Maximum All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M M De i a f n x a : : u 1 6 lt 0 : 0 < 0 2 0 0> 235 These settings define the display values when o1-03 is set to 3. o1-11 User-Set Display Units Decimal o1-10 sets the display value that is equal to the maximum output frequency. Default: <20> (521H) Display o1-11 sets the position of the decimal position. Min: 0 235 Max: 3 o1-12 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 Length Units Min: 0 235 (739H) 0: Millimeter unit Max: 1 1: Inch unit o1-20 Traction Sheave Diameter V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 1 l 0 t: 0 4 m 00 m mm<38> 235 (575H) Sets the traction sheave diameter for display unit calculations. Max: 2000 mm<38> B
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| n9-60 (64DH) | A/D Conversion Start Delay | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets a delay time for starting the current signal A/D conversion. This value seldom needs to be changed. | Default: <4> Min: 0.0 μs Max: 40.0 μs | 232 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| o1-01 (500H) | Drive Mode Unit Monitor Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly Switches the display after the power has been turned on. When using an LED operator, pressing the up arrow key will display the following data: frequency reference → rotational direction → output frequency → output current → output voltage → U1-. (This is done by entering the 1 part of U1-. Certain monitors are not available in some control modes.) | Default: 106 (Monitor U1-06) Min: 105 Max: 699 | 233 |
| o1-02 (501H) | User Monitor Selection after Power Up | All Modes common_ TMonly o1-02 selects the information that is displayed when the power is turned on. 1: Speed reference (U1-01) 2: Direction 3: Output speed (U1-02) 4: Output current (U1-03) 5: User-selected monitor (set by o1-01) | Default: 1 Min: 1 Max: 5 | 233 |
| o1-03 (502H) | Digital Operator Display Unit Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the units the drive should use to display the frequency reference and motor speed monitors. 0: 0.01 Hz 1: 0.01% (100% = E1-04) 2: r/min (calculated using the number of motor poles setting in E2-04, E4-04, or E5-04) 3: User-selected units (set by o1-10 and o1-11) 4: Elevator units 1 (speed in m/s, accel/decel rate and jerk in s) 5: Elevator units 2 (speed in m/s, accel/decel rate in m/s2, jerk in m/s3) 6: Elevator units 3 (speed in ft/min, accel/decel rate in ft/s2, jerk in ft/s3) | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 6<21> | 233 |
| o1-04 (503H) | V/f Pattern Setting Units | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Hz 1: r/min | Default: <5> Min: 0 Max: 1 | 234 |
| o1-05 (504H) | LCD Contrast Control | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the brightness of the LCD operator (option). | Default: 3 Min: 0 Max: 5 | 234 |
| o1-06 (517H) <44> | User Monitor Selection Mode | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: 3 Monitor Sequential (Displays the next 2 sequential monitors) 1: 3 Monitor Selectable (o1-07 and o1-08 selected monitor is displayed) | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 234 |
| o1-07 (518H) <44> | Second Line Monitor Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly Selects the monitor displayed on the second line. | Default: 102 Min: 101 Max: 699 | 234 |
| o1-08 (519H) <44> | Third Line Monitor Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly Selects the monitor displayed on the third line. | Default: 103 Min: 101 Max: 699 | 234 |
| o1-10 (520H) | User-Set Display Units Maximum Value | All Modes common_ TMonly These settings define the display values when o1-03 is set to 3. o1-10 sets the display value that is equal to the maximum output frequency. o1-11 sets the position of the decimal position. | Default: <20> Min: 1 Max: 60000 | 235 |
| o1-11 (521H) | User-Set Display Units Decimal Display | Default: <20> Min: 0 Max: 3 | 235 | |
| o1-12 (739H) | Length Units | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Millimeter unit 1: Inch unit | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 235 |
| o1-20 (575H) | Traction Sheave Diameter | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the traction sheave diameter for display unit calculations. | Default: 400 mm<38> Min: 100 mm Max: 2000 mm<38> | 235 |
Source page
Page 380
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 380 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _
( o 5 1 7 - 6 2 H 1 ) Roping Ratio S 1: e t 1 s : 1 the roping ratio. D M e i f n a : u 1 lt: 2 235 2: 1:2 Max: 4 3: 1:3 4: 1:4 ( o 5 1 7 - 7 2 H 2 ) Mechanical Gear Ratio V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 1 : 0 <5> 235 Sets the ratio of the gear installed for display unit calculations. Max: <46> o1-23 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (174H) HBB Non Display Select Shows or hides the HBB command on the digital operator while the safety signal is being input. Min: 0 236 <45> 0: Shows HBB Max: 1 1: Hide HBB <5> Default setting is determined by the control mode (A1-02). <20> This parameter appears when the drive displays user-set units (o1-03 = 3). <21> The control mode determines the selections available. In V/f Control, only settings 1 through 3 are permitted. <38> Default setting and setting range changes when inches are selected for the length units (o1-12 = 1). The setting range becomes 3.70 to 78.00 inches, and the default becomes 15.70 inches. <44> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. <45> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7200 or later. <46> The setting range changes depending on drive software versions. PRG: 7017 or earlier: 0.10 to 50.00 PRG: 7200 or later: 0.10 to 100.00 o2: Digital Operator Keypad Functions No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page o2-01 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (505H) LO/RE Key Function Selection 0: Disabled Min: 0 236 1: Enabled. LO/RE key switches between LOCAL and REMOTE operation. Max: 1 o2-02 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (506H) STOP Key Function Selection 0 1 : : D En is a a b b l l e e d d . . S S T T O O P P k k e e y y i s is a d lw is a a y b s le e d n i a n b R le E d. MOTE operation. M Ma in x : : 0 1 236 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 ( o 5 2 0 - 7 0 H 3 ) User Parameter Default Value 0: No change. Min: 0 236 1: Set defaults. Saves parameter settings as default values for a User Initialization. Max: 2 2: Clear all. Clears the default settings that have been saved for a User Initialization. ( o 5 2 0 < - 8 1 0 > H 4 ) Drive Model Selection Ent A er ll t M he o d d ri e v s e model. Setting required only if installing a new control board. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D d M M r e i a i v f n x a e : : u - c - lt a : p D ac e i t t e y rmined by 237 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 ( o 5 2 0 - 9 0 H 5 ) S S p el e e e c d ti R on eference Setting Method 1 0 : : E EN NT T E E R R k k e e y y i m s u n s o t t b r e e q p u re ir s e s d e . d T t h o e e s n p te e r e d a r s e p f e e e r d e n r c e e fe c r a e n n c b e e . adjusted using the up and down M Ma in x : : 0 1 237 arrow keys only. o2-06 Operation Selection when Digital All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (50AH) Operator is Disconnected 0: The drive continues operating if the digital operator is disconnected. M Ma in x : : 0 1 237 1: A fault is triggered (oPr) and the motor coasts to stop. o2-09 Reserved - - - (50DH) <1> Parameter setting value is not reset to the default value when the drive is initialized. o3: Copy Function No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _
( o 5 3 1 - 5 0 H 1 ) Copy Function Selection 0 1 2: : : C O IN o P V p → y → s I e N l O e V c P t W RE R A IT D E ( R (C e o ad p y p a p r a a r m am et e e t r e s r s f r f o r m om th t e h e d r d i i v g e i , t a s l a o v p in e g ra t t h o e r m , w o r n it t i o n g th t e h e d m ig i t t o a l t h o e p e d r r a iv to e r . . ) ) D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 238 3: OP ↔ INV VERIFY (Verify parameter settings on the drive to check if they match the data Max: 3 saved on the operator.) To read the drive’s parameter settings into the digital operator, set o3-02 to 1 (to allow reading). All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 o3-02 (516H) Copy Allowed Selection Selects whether the read operation (o3-01 = 1) is enabled or disabled. Min: 0 238 0: Read operation prohibited Max: 1 1: Read operation allowed
380 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| o1-21 (576H) | Roping Ratio | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the roping ratio. 1: 1:1 2: 1:2 3: 1:3 4: 1:4 | Default: 2 Min: 1 Max: 4 | 235 |
| o1-22 (577H) | Mechanical Gear Ratio | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the ratio of the gear installed for display unit calculations. | Default: <5> Min: 0.10 Max: <46> | 235 |
| o1-23 (174H) <45> | HBB Non Display Select | common_ All Modes TMonly Shows or hides the HBB command on the digital operator while the safety signal is being input. 0: Shows HBB 1: Hide HBB | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 236 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| o2-01 (505H) | LO/RE Key Function Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Enabled. LO/RE key switches between LOCAL and REMOTE operation. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 236 |
| o2-02 (506H) | STOP Key Function Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: Disabled. STOP key is disabled in REMOTE operation. 1: Enabled. STOP key is always enabled. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 236 |
| o2-03 (507H) | User Parameter Default Value | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: No change. 1: Set defaults. Saves parameter settings as default values for a User Initialization. 2: Clear all. Clears the default settings that have been saved for a User Initialization. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 236 |
| o2-04 (508H) <1> | Drive Model Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly Enter the drive model. Setting required only if installing a new control board. | Default: Determined by drive capacity Min: - Max: - | 237 |
| o2-05 (509H) | Speed Reference Setting Method Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: ENTER key must be pressed to enter a speed reference. 1: ENTER key is not required. The speed reference can be adjusted using the up and down arrow keys only. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 237 |
| o2-06 (50AH) | Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Disconnected | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: The drive continues operating if the digital operator is disconnected. 1: A fault is triggered (oPr) and the motor coasts to stop. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 237 |
| o2-09 (50DH) | Reserved | - | - | - |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| o3-01 (515H) | Copy Function Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Copy select 1: INV → OP READ (Read parameters from the drive, saving them onto the digital operator.) 2: OP → INV WRITE (Copy parameters from the digital operator, writing them to the drive.) 3: OP ↔ INV VERIFY (Verify parameter settings on the drive to check if they match the data saved on the operator.) To read the drive’s parameter settings into the digital operator, set o3-02 to 1 (to allow reading). | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 3 | 238 |
| o3-02 (516H) | Copy Allowed Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly Selects whether the read operation (o3-01 = 1) is enabled or disabled. 0: Read operation prohibited 1: Read operation allowed | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 238 |
Source page
Page 381
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 381 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 381 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 o4: Maintenance Monitor Settings No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page (5 o 0 4 B -0 H 1 ) C Se u t m tin u g lative Operation Time Set A s l t l h M e v o a d lu e e s for the cumulative operation time of the drive in units of 10 h. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M M e i a f n x a : : u 0 9 lt 9 : 9 0 9 238 (5 o 0 4 C -0 H 2 ) C Se u l m ec u ti l o at n ive Operation Time 0: L A o ll g s M p o o d w e e s r-on time c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 238 1: Logs operation time when the drive output is active (output operation time). Max: 1 o4-03 Cooling Fan Operation Time All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t h : 0 h 239 (50EH) Setting Sets the value of the fan operation time monitor U4-03 in units of 10 h. Max: 9999 h o4-05 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0% (51DH) Capacitor Maintenance Setting Sets the value of the Maintenance Monitor for the capacitors. See U4-05 to check when the Min: 0% 239 capacitors may need to be replaced. Max: 150% o4-07 DC bus Pre-charge Relay All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0% (523H) Maintenance Setting Sets the value of the Maintenance Monitor for the soft charge bypass relay. See U4-06 to check Min: 0% 239 when the bypass relay may need to be replaced. Max: 150% ( o 5 4 2 - 5 0 H 9 ) IGBT Maintenance Setting Set A s l t l h M e v o a d lu e e s of the Maintenance Monitor for the IGBTs. See U4-07 to check when the c T o M IG m o m n o l B n y T _ s D M e i f n a : u 0 l % t: 0% 239 may need to be replaced. Max: 150% All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 o4-11 U2, U3 Initialization 0: U2- and U3- monitor data is not reset when the drive is initialized (A1-03). Min: 0 239 (510H) 1: Resets the data for the U2- and U3- monitors. Once o4-11 is set to 1 and the ENTER Max: 1 key is pressed, fault data is erased and the display returns to 0. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ o4-12 0: U4-10 and U4-11 monitor data is not reset when the drive is initialized (A1-03). Default: 0 (512H) kWh Monitor Initialization 1: Resets the kWh counter. The monitors U4-10 and U4-11 will display “0” after they are Min: 0 240 initialized. Once o4-12 is set to 1 and the ENTER key is pressed, kWh data is erased and the Max: 1 display returns to 0. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ o4-13 Number of Travels Counter Reset 0: Keep the number of travels counter value. The counter is not reset when the drive is D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 240 (528H) initialized (A1-03). Max: 1 1: Resets the number 0 travels counter. The monitor U4-24/25 will show 0. Once o4-13 is set to 1 and the ENTER key is pressed, the counter value is erased and the display returns to 0. o4-15 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 2% (537H) Maintenance Alarm Snooze Period After a maintenance alarm output has been triggered, o4-15 determines the level that will Min: 0% 240 <1> trigger the next alarm for the same component. The same alarm will be triggered by the Max: 20% detection level that triggered the original alarm plus the level set in o4-15. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ o4-16 Selects the Maintenance Monitor using bits 0 to 3. Default: 1000 (176H) Maintenance Monitoring Selection 0: LT1 (cooling fan) Min: 0000 240 <1> 1: LT2 (DC bus capacitors) Max: 1111 2: LT3 (soft-charge bypass relay) 3: LT4 (IGBTs have passed 90% of the their life expectancy) <1> Parameter setting value is not reset to the default value during drive initialization (A1-03). S: Elevator Parameters This section describes various functions and faults needed to operate an elevator application: braking sequence, slip compensation for elevators, start/stop optimization, Rescue Operation, and elevator-related faults. S1: Brake Sequence No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page S1-01 Zero Speed Level at Stop All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 < 0 5 % > 241 (680H) Determines the speed to begin applying DC Injection (or Position Lock) when the drive is Max: 9.999% ramping to stop (b1-03 = 0). Set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). S1-02 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 50% DC Injection Current at Start Min: 0% 241 (681H) Determines the amount of current to use for DC Injection at start. Set as a percentage of the Max: 100% drive rated current. S1-03 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 50% (682H) DC Injection Current at Stop Determines the amount of current to use for DC Injection at stop. Set as a percentage of the M M i a n x : : 0 1 % 00% 241 B drive rated current.
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| o4-01 (50BH) | Cumulative Operation Time Setting | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the value for the cumulative operation time of the drive in units of 10 h. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 9999 | 238 |
| o4-02 (50CH) | Cumulative Operation Time Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: Logs power-on time 1: Logs operation time when the drive output is active (output operation time). | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 238 |
| o4-03 (50EH) | Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the value of the fan operation time monitor U4-03 in units of 10 h. | Default: 0 h Min: 0 h Max: 9999 h | 239 |
| o4-05 (51DH) | Capacitor Maintenance Setting | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the value of the Maintenance Monitor for the capacitors. See U4-05 to check when the capacitors may need to be replaced. | Default: 0% Min: 0% Max: 150% | 239 |
| o4-07 (523H) | DC bus Pre-charge Relay Maintenance Setting | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the value of the Maintenance Monitor for the soft charge bypass relay. See U4-06 to check when the bypass relay may need to be replaced. | Default: 0% Min: 0% Max: 150% | 239 |
| o4-09 (525H) | IGBT Maintenance Setting | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the value of the Maintenance Monitor for the IGBTs. See U4-07 to check when the IGBTs may need to be replaced. | Default: 0% Min: 0% Max: 150% | 239 |
| o4-11 (510H) | U2, U3 Initialization | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: U2- and U3- monitor data is not reset when the drive is initialized (A1-03). 1: Resets the data for the U2- and U3- monitors. Once o4-11 is set to 1 and the ENTER key is pressed, fault data is erased and the display returns to 0. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 239 |
| o4-12 (512H) | kWh Monitor Initialization | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: U4-10 and U4-11 monitor data is not reset when the drive is initialized (A1-03). 1: Resets the kWh counter. The monitors U4-10 and U4-11 will display “0” after they are initialized. Once o4-12 is set to 1 and the ENTER key is pressed, kWh data is erased and the display returns to 0. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 240 |
| o4-13 (528H) | Number of Travels Counter Reset | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Keep the number of travels counter value. The counter is not reset when the drive is initialized (A1-03). 1: Resets the number 0 travels counter. The monitor U4-24/25 will show 0. Once o4-13 is set to 1 and the ENTER key is pressed, the counter value is erased and the display returns to 0. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 240 |
| o4-15 (537H) <1> | Maintenance Alarm Snooze Period | common_ All Modes TMonly After a maintenance alarm output has been triggered, o4-15 determines the level that will trigger the next alarm for the same component. The same alarm will be triggered by the detection level that triggered the original alarm plus the level set in o4-15. | Default: 2% Min: 0% Max: 20% | 240 |
| o4-16 (176H) <1> | Maintenance Monitoring Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly Selects the Maintenance Monitor using bits 0 to 3. 0: LT1 (cooling fan) 1: LT2 (DC bus capacitors) 2: LT3 (soft-charge bypass relay) 3: LT4 (IGBTs have passed 90% of the their life expectancy) | Default: 1000 Min: 0000 Max: 1111 | 240 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| S1-01 (680H) | Zero Speed Level at Stop | common_ All Modes TMonly Determines the speed to begin applying DC Injection (or Position Lock) when the drive is ramping to stop (b1-03 = 0). Set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). | Default: <5> Min: 0.000% Max: 9.999% | 241 |
| S1-02 (681H) | DC Injection Current at Start | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Determines the amount of current to use for DC Injection at start. Set as a percentage of the drive rated current. | Default: 50% Min: 0% Max: 100% | 241 |
| S1-03 (682H) | DC Injection Current at Stop | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Determines the amount of current to use for DC Injection at stop. Set as a percentage of the drive rated current. | Default: 50% Min: 0% Max: 100% | 241 |
Source page
Page 382
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 382 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0.40 s S1-04 DC Injection/Position Lock Time (683H) at Start Determines how long the drive should perform DC Injection at start. In CLV and CLV/PM, Min: 0.00 s 241 S1-04 determines how long Position Lock should be performed. A setting of 0.00 disables Max: 10.00 s S1-04. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0.60 s ( S 6 1 8 - 4 0 H 5 ) D at C S t I o n p jection/Position Lock Time Determines how long the drive should perform DC Injection at stop. In CLV and CLV/PM, Min: 0.00 s 241 S1-05 determines how long Position Lock should be performed. A setting of 0.00 disables Max: 10.00 s S1-05. S1-06 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0.20 s Brake Release Delay Time Min: 0.00 s 242 (685H) Determines the delay time between the start of DC injection/Position Lock and setting the brake Max: 10.00 s control command (H2- = 50) in order to release the brake at the beginning of the ride. S1-07 Brake Close Delay Time All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0 . s 10 s 242 (686H) D co e m te m rm an in d e ( s H th 2 e - de la y = t 5 im 0) e i b n e o tw rd e e e r n t o re a a p c p h l i y n g t h Z e e b ro ra S k p e e a e t d t h (S e 1 e - n 0 d 1 ) o a f n th d e r e ri s d e e tt . ing the brake control Max: [S1-05] S1-10 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0.10 s (687H) Run Command Delay Time Sets the time that must pass after the Up/Down command is entered until the drive internal Run M M i a n x : : 0 1 . . 0 0 0 0 s s 242 command is set and the ride is started. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0.10 s ( S 6 1 8 - 8 1 H 1 ) O Ti u m tp e ut Contactor Open Delay D co e n te ta r c m to in r e c s o t n h t e ro d l e c l o a m y t m im an e d b ( e H tw 2 e - en sh = u t 5 ti 1 n ) g i o n f o f r t d h e e r o t u o t p re u l t e a o s f e t h th e e d m riv o e to a r n c d o r n e t s a e c t t t o in r g a f t t h e e r a ride M M i a n x : : 0 1 . . 0 0 0 0 s s 242 has finished. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Determines the state of the output contactor control command (H2- = 51) during S1-12 Motor Contactor Control During Auto-Tuning. Default: 0 (6E0H) Auto-Tuning 0: Disabled Min: 0 242 <39> 1: Enabled Max: 2 2: Enabled during Auto-Tuning and HBB Note: Setting 2 is available in the control mode CLV or CLV/PM for drives with software versions PRG: 7017 or later. The setting is 0 or 1 for software version PRG: 7016. (6 S D 1- 7 2 H 6 ) Emergency Stop Start Level V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : % 10.0% 243 <44> Sets the Emergency Stop Start Level as a percentage of the Maximum Output Frequency. Max: 100.0% <5> Default setting is determined by the control mode (A1-02). <39> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7016 or later. <44> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. S2: Slip Compensation for Elevators No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page ( S 68 2 F -0 H 1 ) Motor Rated Speed V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 3 l 0 t: 0 1 r 3 p 8 m 0 rpm 243 Sets the motor rated speed. Max: 1800 rpm S2-02 (690H) Slip Compensation Gain in Default: 0.7 Motoring Mode V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M M i a n x : : 0 5 . . 0 0 243 S2-03 Slip compensation for leveling speed can be set separately for motoring and regenerative states. (691H) Slip Compensation Gain in This can help improve the accuracy of leveling. D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 1.0 243 Regenerative Mode Max: 5.0 S2-05 Slip Compensation Torque V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t m : 1 s 000 ms 243 (693H) Detection Delay Time Sets a delay time before detecting torque for slip compensation. Max: 10000 ms S2-06 Slip Compensation Torque V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t m : 5 s 00 ms 243 (694H) Detection Filter Time Constant Sets the filter time constant applied to the torque signal used for the slip compensation value Max: 2000 ms calculation. S3: Start/Stop Optimization No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page S3-01 (697H) Default: 5 Position Lock Gain at Start 1 Min: 0 244 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Max: 100 S3-02 Sets gain levels 1 and 2 for the Position Lock function. Position Lock at start attempts to keep (698H) Position Lock Gain at Start 2 the car position when opening the brake in order to avoid roll back. D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0 .00 244 (Anti Rollback Gain) Max: 100.00 ( S 6 3 9 - 9 0 H 3 ) V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 5 Position Lock Gain at Stop Min: 0 244 Sets the Position Lock gain at stop. Position Lock at stop keeps the car in position until the Max: 100 brake has been applied entirely. 382 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| S1-04 (683H) | DC Injection/Position Lock Time at Start | common_ All Modes TMonly Determines how long the drive should perform DC Injection at start. In CLV and CLV/PM, S1-04 determines how long Position Lock should be performed. A setting of 0.00 disables S1-04. | Default: 0.40 s Min: 0.00 s Max: 10.00 s | 241 |
| S1-05 (684H) | DC Injection/Position Lock Time at Stop | common_ All Modes TMonly Determines how long the drive should perform DC Injection at stop. In CLV and CLV/PM, S1-05 determines how long Position Lock should be performed. A setting of 0.00 disables S1-05. | Default: 0.60 s Min: 0.00 s Max: 10.00 s | 241 |
| S1-06 (685H) | Brake Release Delay Time | common_ All Modes TMonly Determines the delay time between the start of DC injection/Position Lock and setting the brake control command (H2- = 50) in order to release the brake at the beginning of the ride. | Default: 0.20 s Min: 0.00 s Max: 10.00 s | 242 |
| S1-07 (686H) | Brake Close Delay Time | common_ All Modes TMonly Determines the delay time between reaching Zero Speed (S1-01) and resetting the brake control command (H2- = 50) in order to apply the brake at the end of the ride. | Default: 0.10 s Min: 0.00 s Max: [S1-05] | 242 |
| S1-10 (687H) | Run Command Delay Time | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the time that must pass after the Up/Down command is entered until the drive internal Run command is set and the ride is started. | Default: 0.10 s Min: 0.00 s Max: 1.00 s | 242 |
| S1-11 (688H) | Output Contactor Open Delay Time | common_ All Modes TMonly Determines the delay time between shutting off the output of the drive and resetting the contactor control command (H2- = 51) in order to release the motor contactor after a ride has finished. | Default: 0.10 s Min: 0.00 s Max: 1.00 s | 242 |
| S1-12 (6E0H) <39> | Motor Contactor Control During Auto-Tuning | common_ All Modes TMonly Determines the state of the output contactor control command (H2- = 51) during Auto-Tuning. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 2: Enabled during Auto-Tuning and HBB Note: Setting 2 is available in the control mode CLV or CLV/PM for drives with software versions PRG: 7017 or later. The setting is 0 or 1 for software version PRG: 7016. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 242 |
| S1-26 (6D7H) <44> | Emergency Stop Start Level | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the Emergency Stop Start Level as a percentage of the Maximum Output Frequency. | Default: 10.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 100.0% | 243 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| S2-01 (68FH) | Motor Rated Speed | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the motor rated speed. | Default: 1380 rpm Min: 300 rpm Max: 1800 rpm | 243 |
| S2-02 (690H) | Slip Compensation Gain in Motoring Mode | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Slip compensation for leveling speed can be set separately for motoring and regenerative states. This can help improve the accuracy of leveling. | Default: 0.7 Min: 0.0 Max: 5.0 | 243 |
| S2-03 (691H) | Slip Compensation Gain in Regenerative Mode | Default: 1.0 Min: 0.0 Max: 5.0 | 243 | |
| S2-05 (693H) | Slip Compensation Torque Detection Delay Time | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets a delay time before detecting torque for slip compensation. | Default: 1000 ms Min: 0 ms Max: 10000 ms | 243 |
| S2-06 (694H) | Slip Compensation Torque Detection Filter Time Constant | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the filter time constant applied to the torque signal used for the slip compensation value calculation. | Default: 500 ms Min: 0 ms Max: 2000 ms | 243 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| S3-01 (697H) | Position Lock Gain at Start 1 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets gain levels 1 and 2 for the Position Lock function. Position Lock at start attempts to keep the car position when opening the brake in order to avoid roll back. | Default: 5 Min: 0 Max: 100 | 244 |
| S3-02 (698H) | Position Lock Gain at Start 2 (Anti Rollback Gain) | Default: 0.00 Min: 0.00 Max: 100.00 | 244 | |
| S3-03 (699H) | Position Lock Gain at Stop | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the Position Lock gain at stop. Position Lock at stop keeps the car in position until the brake has been applied entirely. | Default: 5 Min: 0 Max: 100 | 244 |
Source page
Page 383
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 383 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 383 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page S3-04 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 10 Position Lock Bandwidth Min: 0 244 (69AH) Determines the bandwidth around the stop position in which a digital output programmed for Max: 16383 “Within Position Lock Bandwidth” (H2- = 33) is closed. S3-10 Starting Torque Compensation V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 500 ms (69BH) Increase Time S te e r t m s i a n t a i l m fo e r c t o o n r s q t u a e n t c f o o m r p th e e n s t a o t r i q o u n e ( r H e 3 fe - r en ce = t o 1 4 re ) a . ch 300%. Enabled by setting an analog input M M i a n x : : 0 5 0 m 0 s 0 ms 244 S3-12 Starting Torque Compensation V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (69DH) Bias in Down Direction Adds a bias to torque compensation value from the load cell when moving in the down M M i a n x : : - 4 4 0 0 . . 0 0 % % 244 direction. S3-14 Torque Compensation Diminish V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0.0% (69FH) Speed S Se e t t s s a th s e a s p p e e r e c d e n le ta v g e e l f o o f r t t h o e r q m u a e x c i o m m u p m e n o s u a t t p io u n t f t r o e q d u im en i c n y is h (E d 1 u - r 0 i 4 n ) g . A th e s e t t i t m in e g d o e f t e 0 r . m 0% in e d d is b a y b l S es 3 - t 1 h 5 is . M M i a n x : : 0 2 . 0 0 0 % .0% 245 function. S3-15 Torque Compensation Diminish V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1000 ms (6A0H) Time Sets the time for torque compensation to diminish once motor speed reaches the level set in M M i a n x : : 0 5 0 m 0 s 0 ms 245 S3-14. V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ S3-16 Determines the reduction rate used bring the internal torque reference value down to zero after Default: 100 ms (6A1H) Torque Limit Reduction Time Position T L o o rq ck u e a t 3 S 00 to % p has finished. M M i a n x : : 0 1 0 m 0 s 00 ms 245 Rate = S3-16 S3-20 Dwell 2 Speed Reference All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0 % .00 % 245 (6A2H) Sets the speed reference for the Dwell 2 function. Max: 100.00% Note: A setting of 0.00 essentially disables the Dwell 2 function. S3-21 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0.00% (6A5H) Dwell 2 End Speed T N h o e te D : A w e s l e l t 2 ti n fu g n o c f t i 0 o . n 0 0 w w ill i l e l n d d is w ab h l e e n t h th e e a d cc ri e v l e e r r a e t a io c n h e r s a t t e h i s s w s i p tc e h e d t . hat occurs at the end of Dwell M M i a n x : : 0 1 . 0 0 0 0 . % 00 % 245 2. S3-25 DC Injection Gain in Regenerative V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 100% (6A3H) Operation S re e g ts e n th er e a g ti a v i e n . l T ev h e e l c a u p r p re li n e t d a t p o p t l h ie e d D d C u r i i n n j g e c D ti C on I n c j u e r c r t e i n o t n a a t t s s to to p p ( S is 1 d -0 e 3 te ) r f m o i r n w ed h e a n s t S h 1 e - l 0 o 3 a d × i S s 3 1 - 0 2 0 5 % . M M i a n x : : 0 4 % 00% 245 (6 S A 3- 4 2 H 6 ) D O C pe I r n at j i e o c n tion Gain in Motoring S m e o ts to t r h i e n V g g / . f a T in h e le c v u e r l r a e p n p t l a ie p d p O l t i L o e d V th d e u D ri C ng i n D je C c t I i n o j n C e c c L t u i V o rr n e n at t a st t o s p to i p s ( d C S e 1 t L e - V r 0 m 3 /P ) i n M f e o d r w as h S en 1 - t 0 h 3 e × lo a S d 3 - c T i 2 s o M m o 6 1 m n . o l 0 n y 0 _ % D M M e i a f n x a : : u 0 4 l % t 0 : 0 2 % 0% 246 S3-27 Torque Compensation Value with V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: -50% (6BDH) Load Condition 1 Used for starting torque compensation utilizing a load cell signal. Sets the torque compensation M M i a n x : : - 1 1 0 0 0 0 % % 246 value for load condition 1. S3-28 Torque Compensation Value with V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 50% (6BEH) Load Condition 2 Used for starting torque compensation utilizing a load cell signal. Sets the torque compensation M M i a n x : : - 1 1 0 0 0 0 % % 246 value for load condition 2. S3-29 Analog Input from Load Cell with V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 1 t: 0 0 0 . % 0% 246 (6BFH) Load Condition 1 Used for starting torque compensation utilizing a load cell signal. Sets the analog signal level Max: 100% from the load cell for load condition 1. S3-30 Analog Input from Load Cell with V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 1 t: 0 1 0 0 .0 0 % .0% 246 (6C0H) Load Condition 2 Used for starting torque compensation utilizing a load cell signal. Sets the analog signal level Max: 100% from the load cell for load condition 2. S3-34 Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : % 0.0% 246 (6C4H) Sets the Anti-Rollback Bias applied at small position deviations during Position Lock at start. Max: 100.0% S3-35 Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 2 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : % 0.0% 246 (6C5H) Sets the Anti-Rollback Bias applied at large position deviations during Position Lock at start. Max: 100.0% S3-37 Position Deviation Level to Apply V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 246 (6C7H) ARB Torque Bias 1 Sets the position deviation level to active at Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 (S3-34). Max: 32767 S3-38 Position Deviation Level to Apply V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (6C8H) ARB Torque Bias 2 Determines the position deviation level for when the drive should switch from the torque bias M M i a n x : : 0 32767 247 set in S3-34 to the torque bias set in S3-35. ( S 6C 3- 9 3 H 9 ) Anti-Rollback Integral Gain V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 3 t: 0 0 .0 .0 0 0 247 Determines the drive’s responsiveness for Anti-Rollback during Position Lock. Max: 30.00 B S3-40 Anti-Rollback Movement V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t p : u 1 l s p e ulse 247 (6CAH) Detection Sets the amount of pulses for movement detection during Anti-Rollback. Max: 100 pulses
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| S3-04 (69AH) | Position Lock Bandwidth | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Determines the bandwidth around the stop position in which a digital output programmed for “Within Position Lock Bandwidth” (H2- = 33) is closed. | Default: 10 Min: 0 Max: 16383 | 244 |
| S3-10 (69BH) | Starting Torque Compensation Increase Time | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets a time constant for the torque reference to reach 300%. Enabled by setting an analog input terminal for torque compensation (H3- = 14). | Default: 500 ms Min: 0 ms Max: 5000 ms | 244 |
| S3-12 (69DH) | Starting Torque Compensation Bias in Down Direction | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Adds a bias to torque compensation value from the load cell when moving in the down direction. | Default: 0 Min: -40.0% Max: 40.0% | 244 |
| S3-14 (69FH) | Torque Compensation Diminish Speed | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the speed level for torque compensation to diminish during the time determined by S3-15. Sets as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04). A setting of 0.0% disables this function. | Default: 0.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 200.0% | 245 |
| S3-15 (6A0H) | Torque Compensation Diminish Time | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the time for torque compensation to diminish once motor speed reaches the level set in S3-14. | Default: 1000 ms Min: 0 ms Max: 5000 ms | 245 |
| S3-16 (6A1H) | Torque Limit Reduction Time | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Determines the reduction rate used bring the internal torque reference value down to zero after Position Lock at Stop has finished. Torque 300% Rate = S3-16 | Default: 100 ms Min: 0 ms Max: 10000 ms | 245 |
| S3-20 (6A2H) | Dwell 2 Speed Reference | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the speed reference for the Dwell 2 function. Note: A setting of 0.00 essentially disables the Dwell 2 function. | Default: 0.00% Min: 0.00% Max: 100.00% | 245 |
| S3-21 (6A5H) | Dwell 2 End Speed | common_ All Modes TMonly The Dwell 2 function will end when the drive reaches this speed. Note: A setting of 0.00 will disable the acceleration rate switch that occurs at the end of Dwell 2. | Default: 0.00% Min: 0.00% Max: 100.00% | 245 |
| S3-25 (6A3H) | DC Injection Gain in Regenerative Operation | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the gain level applied to the DC injection current at stop (S1-03) for when the load is 100% regenerative. The current applied during DC Injection at stop is determined as S1-03 × S3-25. | Default: 100% Min: 0% Max: 400% | 245 |
| S3-26 (6A4H) | DC Injection Gain in Motoring Operation | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the gain level applied to the DC injection current at stop (S1-03) for when the load is 100% motoring. The current applied during DC Injection at stop is determined as S1-03 × S3-26. | Default: 20% Min: 0% Max: 400% | 246 |
| S3-27 (6BDH) | Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 1 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Used for starting torque compensation utilizing a load cell signal. Sets the torque compensation value for load condition 1. | Default: -50% Min: -100% Max: 100% | 246 |
| S3-28 (6BEH) | Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 2 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Used for starting torque compensation utilizing a load cell signal. Sets the torque compensation value for load condition 2. | Default: 50% Min: -100% Max: 100% | 246 |
| S3-29 (6BFH) | Analog Input from Load Cell with Load Condition 1 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Used for starting torque compensation utilizing a load cell signal. Sets the analog signal level from the load cell for load condition 1. | Default: 0.0% Min: -100% Max: 100% | 246 |
| S3-30 (6C0H) | Analog Input from Load Cell with Load Condition 2 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Used for starting torque compensation utilizing a load cell signal. Sets the analog signal level from the load cell for load condition 2. | Default: 100.0% Min: -100.0% Max: 100% | 246 |
| S3-34 (6C4H) | Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the Anti-Rollback Bias applied at small position deviations during Position Lock at start. | Default: 0.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 100.0% | 246 |
| S3-35 (6C5H) | Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 2 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the Anti-Rollback Bias applied at large position deviations during Position Lock at start. | Default: 0.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 100.0% | 246 |
| S3-37 (6C7H) | Position Deviation Level to Apply ARB Torque Bias 1 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the position deviation level to active at Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 (S3-34). | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 32767 | 246 |
| S3-38 (6C8H) | Position Deviation Level to Apply ARB Torque Bias 2 | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Determines the position deviation level for when the drive should switch from the torque bias set in S3-34 to the torque bias set in S3-35. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 32767 | 247 |
| S3-39 (6C9H) | Anti-Rollback Integral Gain | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Determines the drive’s responsiveness for Anti-Rollback during Position Lock. | Default: 0.00 Min: -30.00 Max: 30.00 | 247 |
| S3-40 (6CAH) | Anti-Rollback Movement Detection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the amount of pulses for movement detection during Anti-Rollback. | Default: 1 pulse Min: 0 pulse Max: 100 pulses | 247 |
Source page
Page 384
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 384 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page
S3-41 Position Lock Gain at Start 2 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 0.50 247 (6CBH) Reduction Sets a reduction factor for the Position Lock Gain at Start 2 (Anti-Rollback Gain) set in Max: 1.00 parameter S3-02. S4: Rescue Operation No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 S4-01 Light Load Direction Search (6A6H) Selection 0: Disabled Min: 0 247 1: Enabled Max: 2 2: Enabled for Motor 1 only S4-02 Light Load Direction Search V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 (6A7H) Method D 0: e O te u rm tp i u n t e C s u h r o r w en t t he drive detects the light load direction. M Ma in x : : 0 1 247 1: Regenerative direction detection S4-03 Light Load Direction Search Time All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 1 s .0 s 248 (6A8H) Sets the time to perform Light Load Direction Search. Max: 5.0 s S4-04 Light Load Direction Search Speed All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 < % 5> 248 (6A9H) Reference Sets the speed reference to use during Light Load Direction Search. Max: 20.00% S4-05 Rescue Operation Torque Limit All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l % t: 100% 248 (6AAH) Sets the torque limit used during Rescue Operation. Max: 300% All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (6 S C 4- C 0 H 6 ) R Se e l s e c c u t e io O n peration Power Supply 0: Battery Min: 0 248 1: UPS (single-phase) Max: 2 2: UPS (3-phase) S4-07 UPS Power All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 k . V 0 A kVA 248 (6CDH) Sets the capacity of the UPS. Max: 100.0 kVA All Modes c T c T o M o M m o m o m n m n o l o l n y n y __ S4-08 UPS Operation Speed Limit Determines how a speed limit should be applied to the Rescue Operation speed (S4-15) when Default: 2 operating from a UPS. Min: 0 248 (6CEH) Selection 0: Disabled Max: 2 1: Enabled until Light Load Direction Search is complete 2: Enabled until stop S4-12 DC Bus Voltage during Rescue All Modes c T c T o M o M m o m o m n m n o l o l n y n y __ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t V : 0 V 248 (6D2H) Operation Sets the DC bus voltage during Rescue Operation. Max: 1150 V S4-13 Rescue Operation Power Supply All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 1 l 0 t: % 80% 249 (6D3H) Deterioration Detection Level Determines at which level of backup power supply deterioration a PF5 fault is triggered. Max: 100% (6 S D 4- A 1 H 5 ) S R p e e sc e u d e R O ef p e e r r e a n t c io e n Selection for All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 lt: 0 249 <39> Selects the speed reference used for Rescue Operation. Max: 1 <5> Default setting is determined by the control mode (A1-02). <39> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7016 or later. S5: Short Floor Operation No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page S5-01 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 (6ABH) Short Floor Operation Selection 0 1 : : D En is a a b b l l e e d d (Short Floor) M Ma in x : : 0 2 251 2: Enabled (Advance Short Floor) S5-02 Nominal Speed for Short Floor All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0.0% Min: 0.0% 251 (6ACH) Calculation When d1-18 (Speed Priority Selection) is set to 0 or 3, S5-02 determines the rated speed used Max: 100.0% during Short Floor. S5-03 Short Floor Minimum Constant All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0.0 s Min: 0.0 s 251 (6ADH) Speed Time Sets the minimum operation time when the Advanced Short Floor function is enabled (S5-01 = Max: 2.0 s 2). (6 S A 5- E 0 H 4 ) D Ti i m st e a n G c a e i C n alculation Acceleration All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 5 l 0 t: . 0 1 % 50.0% 251 Set for acceleration jerk compensation in Distance Calculation. Max: 200.0% (6 S A 5- F 0 H 5 ) D Ti i m st e a n G c a e i C n alculation Deceleration All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 5 l 0 t: . 0 1 % 50.0% 251 Set for deceleration jerk compensation in Distance Calculation. Max: 200.0% 384 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| S3-41 (6CBH) | Position Lock Gain at Start 2 Reduction | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets a reduction factor for the Position Lock Gain at Start 2 (Anti-Rollback Gain) set in parameter S3-02. | Default: 0.50 Min: 0.00 Max: 1.00 | 247 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| S4-01 (6A6H) | Light Load Direction Search Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 2: Enabled for Motor 1 only | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 247 |
| S4-02 (6A7H) | Light Load Direction Search Method | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Determines how the drive detects the light load direction. 0: Output Current 1: Regenerative direction detection | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 247 |
| S4-03 (6A8H) | Light Load Direction Search Time | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the time to perform Light Load Direction Search. | Default: 1.0 s Min: 0.0 s Max: 5.0 s | 248 |
| S4-04 (6A9H) | Light Load Direction Search Speed Reference | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the speed reference to use during Light Load Direction Search. | Default: <5> Min: 0.00% Max: 20.00% | 248 |
| S4-05 (6AAH) | Rescue Operation Torque Limit | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the torque limit used during Rescue Operation. | Default: 100% Min: 0% Max: 300% | 248 |
| S4-06 (6CCH) | Rescue Operation Power Supply Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: Battery 1: UPS (single-phase) 2: UPS (3-phase) | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 248 |
| S4-07 (6CDH) | UPS Power | All Modes common_ TMonly Sets the capacity of the UPS. | Default: 0.0 kVA Min: 0.0 kVA Max: 100.0 kVA | 248 |
| S4-08 (6CEH) | UPS Operation Speed Limit Selection | All Modes ccoommmmoonn__ TTMMoonnllyy Determines how a speed limit should be applied to the Rescue Operation speed (S4-15) when operating from a UPS. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled until Light Load Direction Search is complete 2: Enabled until stop | Default: 2 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 248 |
| S4-12 (6D2H) | DC Bus Voltage during Rescue Operation | All Modes ccoommmmoonn__ TTMMoonnllyy Sets the DC bus voltage during Rescue Operation. | Default: 0 V Min: 0 V Max: 1150 V | 248 |
| S4-13 (6D3H) | Rescue Operation Power Supply Deterioration Detection Level | All Modes common_ TMonly Determines at which level of backup power supply deterioration a PF5 fault is triggered. | Default: 80% Min: 10% Max: 100% | 249 |
| S4-15 (6DAH) <39> | Speed Reference Selection for Rescue Operation | All Modes common_ TMonly Selects the speed reference used for Rescue Operation. | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 249 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| S5-01 (6ABH) | Short Floor Operation Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Enabled (Short Floor) 2: Enabled (Advance Short Floor) | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 251 |
| S5-02 (6ACH) | Nominal Speed for Short Floor Calculation | common_ All Modes TMonly When d1-18 (Speed Priority Selection) is set to 0 or 3, S5-02 determines the rated speed used during Short Floor. | Default: 0.0% Min: 0.0% Max: 100.0% | 251 |
| S5-03 (6ADH) | Short Floor Minimum Constant Speed Time | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets the minimum operation time when the Advanced Short Floor function is enabled (S5-01 = 2). | Default: 0.0 s Min: 0.0 s Max: 2.0 s | 251 |
| S5-04 (6AEH) | Distance Calculation Acceleration Time Gain | common_ All Modes TMonly Set for acceleration jerk compensation in Distance Calculation. | Default: 150.0% Min: 50.0% Max: 200.0% | 251 |
| S5-05 (6AFH) | Distance Calculation Deceleration Time Gain | common_ All Modes TMonly Set for deceleration jerk compensation in Distance Calculation. | Default: 150.0% Min: 50.0% Max: 200.0% | 251 |
Source page
Page 385
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 385 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 385 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 ( S 6B 5- 0 1 H 0 ) Stopping Method Selection 0: Disabled Min: 0 254 1: Direct Landing Max: 2 2: Leveling Distance Control S5-11 Deceleration Distance V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t m : 0 m mm 254 (6B1H) Sets the deceleration distance when Stop Distance Control is enabled. Max: 32767 mm <36> S5-12 Stop Distance V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t m : 0 m mm 254 (6B2H) Sets the stopping distance when Stop Distance Control is enabled. Max: 10000 mm <37> V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 20% (6 S D 5- 6 1 H 3 ) D Le ir v e e c l t Landing Minimum Speed Sets the speed level for the start of Direct Landing. Min: 0% 254 Direct Landing is essentially disabled if the starting speed for Direct Landing is less than the Max: 100% maximum output speed multiplied by this parameter (E1-04 × S5-13). <36> When the length units are set for inches (o1-12 = 1), the setting range becomes 0.00 to 650.00 inches. <37> When the length units are set for inches (o1-12 = 1), the setting range becomes 0.00 to 393.00 inches. S6: Error Detection No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 ( S 6B 6- 3 0 H 1 ) M (SE ot 1 o ) r D C e o t n e t c a t c io to n r / R R e e s s e p t o S n e s l e e c E t r io ro n r 0: Detect during stop, SE1 must be manually reset Min: 0 255 1: Detect during stop, SE1 can be automatically reset Max: 2 2: No SE1 detection S6-02 Starting Current Error (SE2) V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 2 0 m 0 s ms 255 (6B4H) Detection Delay Time Sets a delay time for detecting SE2. Max: [S1-04]-[S1-06] S6-03 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 25% (6B5H) SE2 Detect Current Level Min: 0% 255 <44> S a e p t e s r t c h e e n t l a e g v e e l o o f f t h cu e r M re o n t t o a r p N pl o ie -l d o a to d t C he u r m re o n t t o ( r E w 2 h -0 e 3 n ) t . he Brake Control command is activated, as Max: 100% ( S 6B 6- 6 0 H 4 ) O De u t t e p c u t t i o C n u D rr e e l n a t y E T rr i o m r e (SE3) V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t m : 2 s 00 ms 255 Sets a delay time for detecting SE3. Max: 5000 ms ( S 6B 6- 7 0 H 5 ) B D r e a t k ec e t i R o e n s T po im ns e e Error (SE4) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t m : 5 s 00 ms 255 Sets a delay time for detecting SE4. Max: 10000 ms (1 S A 6 9 -0 8 6 H) Brake Response Error (SE4) All Modes D M e i f n a : u 0 l t m : 5 s 00 ms 256 Detection Time During Run Set the time required to detect the SE4 fault (Brake Response Error) during run when the Brake <48> Response Monitor function is enabled (S6-07 = 1). Max: 60000 ms S6-07 All Modes Default: 0 (1A99H) Brake Response Monitor Selection Enables and disables the Brake Response Monitor function. Min: 0 256 <48> 0: Disabled Max: 1 1: Enabled All Modes S6-08 Brake Response Error (SE4) Fault Selects fault reset methods when the BRM function is enabled (S6-07 = 1) and an SE4 fault is Default: 0 (1A < 9 48 A > H) Reset Selection t 0 r : i g N g o e r r m ed a . l operation M M i a n x : : 0 1 256 1: Execute SE4 Fault Reset ( S 6B 6- 8 1 H 0 ) Overacceleration Detection Level If the el V e / v f ator car acceler O at L es V at an abnormal C ra L t V e, the drive tri C g L ge V r / s P a M n overspeed fault c T ( o M d m o v m n o l 6 n y ) _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : < m 7> /s2 257 and has the motor coast to stop. Parameter S6-10 determines the acceleration rate that triggers a Max: 20.0 m/s2<7> fault. (6 S B 6- 9 1 H 1 ) Overacceleration Detection Time V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t m : 5 s 0 ms 257 Sets a primary delay for detecting overacceleration. Max: 5000 ms S6-12 Overacceleration Detection V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 Min: 0 257 (6BAH) Selection 0: Always enabled Max: 1 1: During run only S6-15 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 (6BBH) Speed Reference Loss Detection 0 E : n D ab is le a d b l o e r d disables detection for speed reference missing (FrL). M M i a n x : : 0 1 257 1: Enabled S6-16 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 0 Restart after Baseblock Selection Min: 0 257 (6BCH) 0: No restart after Baseblock/Safe Torque-Off Max: 1 1: Restart after Baseblock/Safe Torque-Off B <7> Default setting value is determined by the digital operator display unit selection (o1-03). The default is normally 1.5 m/s2, but when o1-03 = 6, the default becomes 5.0 ft/s2 (Setting Range: 0.0 to 50.0 ft/s2). <44> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. <48> This parameter is available for drives with software versions PRG: 7207 or later.
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| S5-10 (6B0H) | Stopping Method Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Disabled 1: Direct Landing 2: Leveling Distance Control | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 254 |
| S5-11 (6B1H) | Deceleration Distance | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the deceleration distance when Stop Distance Control is enabled. | Default: 0 mm Min: 0 mm Max: 32767 mm <36> | 254 |
| S5-12 (6B2H) | Stop Distance | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the stopping distance when Stop Distance Control is enabled. | Default: 0 mm Min: 0 mm Max: 10000 mm <37> | 254 |
| S5-13 (6D6H) | Direct Landing Minimum Speed Level | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the speed level for the start of Direct Landing. Direct Landing is essentially disabled if the starting speed for Direct Landing is less than the maximum output speed multiplied by this parameter (E1-04 × S5-13). | Default: 20% Min: 0% Max: 100% | 254 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| S6-01 (6B3H) | Motor Contactor Response Error (SE1) Detection/Reset Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: Detect during stop, SE1 must be manually reset 1: Detect during stop, SE1 can be automatically reset 2: No SE1 detection | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 2 | 255 |
| S6-02 (6B4H) | Starting Current Error (SE2) Detection Delay Time | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets a delay time for detecting SE2. | Default: 200 ms Min: 0.00 ms Max: [S1-04]-[S1-06] | 255 |
| S6-03 (6B5H) <44> | SE2 Detect Current Level | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the level of current applied to the motor when the Brake Control command is activated, as a percentage of the Motor No-load Current (E2-03). | Default: 25% Min: 0% Max: 100% | 255 |
| S6-04 (6B6H) | Output Current Error (SE3) Detection Delay Time | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets a delay time for detecting SE3. | Default: 200 ms Min: 0 ms Max: 5000 ms | 255 |
| S6-05 (6B7H) | Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time | common_ All Modes TMonly Sets a delay time for detecting SE4. | Default: 500 ms Min: 0 ms Max: 10000 ms | 255 |
| S6-06 (1A98H) <48> | Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time During Run | All Modes Set the time required to detect the SE4 fault (Brake Response Error) during run when the Brake Response Monitor function is enabled (S6-07 = 1). | Default: 500 ms Min: 0 ms Max: 60000 ms | 256 |
| S6-07 (1A99H) <48> | Brake Response Monitor Selection | All Modes Enables and disables the Brake Response Monitor function. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 256 |
| S6-08 (1A9AH) <48> | Brake Response Error (SE4) Fault Reset Selection | All Modes Selects fault reset methods when the BRM function is enabled (S6-07 = 1) and an SE4 fault is triggered. 0: Normal operation 1: Execute SE4 Fault Reset | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 256 |
| S6-10 (6B8H) | Overacceleration Detection Level | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly If the elevator car accelerates at an abnormal rate, the drive triggers an overspeed fault (dv6) and has the motor coast to stop. Parameter S6-10 determines the acceleration rate that triggers a fault. | Default:<7> Min: 0.0 m/s2 Max: 20.0 m/s2<7> | 257 |
| S6-11 (6B9H) | Overacceleration Detection Time | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets a primary delay for detecting overacceleration. | Default: 50 ms Min: 0 ms Max: 5000 ms | 257 |
| S6-12 (6BAH) | Overacceleration Detection Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Always enabled 1: During run only | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 257 |
| S6-15 (6BBH) | Speed Reference Loss Detection | common_ All Modes TMonly Enabled or disables detection for speed reference missing (FrL). 0: Disabled 1: Enabled | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 257 |
| S6-16 (6BCH) | Restart after Baseblock Selection | common_ All Modes TMonly 0: No restart after Baseblock/Safe Torque-Off 1: Restart after Baseblock/Safe Torque-Off | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 257 |
Source page
Page 386
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 386 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
T: Motor Tuning
Enter data into the following parameters to tune the motor and drive for optimal performance. T1: Induction Motor Auto-Tuning
No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _
( T 7 1 0 - 1 0 H 1 ) Auto-Tuning Mode Selection 0 1 2 : : : R S S t t o a a t t t a i i o o ti n n o a a n r r a y y l A A A u u u t t t o o o - - - T T T u u u n n n i i i n n n g g g 1 for Line-to-Line Resistance M M De a i f n x a : : u 0 4 lt: < 0 18 < > 5> 105 4: Stationary Auto-Tuning 2
T1-02 V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: <4> (702H) Motor Rated Power S N e o t t s e t : h U e s m e o t t h o e r f r o a l t l e o d w p in o g w e fo r r a m s u s l p a e t c o if c ie o d n v o e n r t t h h e o m rse o p to o r w n e a r m in e t p o l a k t i e l . owatts: kW = HP × 0.746. M M i a n x : : 0 6 . 5 0 0 0 . 0 k 0 W kW 105 T1-03 Motor Rated Voltage V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 2 V 00.0 V<9> 105 (703H) Sets the motor rated voltage as specified on the motor nameplate. Max: 255.0 V<9> Default: <4> T1-04 Motor Rated Current V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M cu i r n re : n 1 t 0% of drive rated 105 (704H) Sets the motor rated current as specified on the motor nameplate. Max: 200% of drive rated current<10> T1-05 Motor Base Frequency V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 5 H 0 z .0 Hz 105 (705H) Sets the rated frequency of the motor as specified on the motor nameplate. Max: 200.0 Hz ( T 7 1 0 - 6 0 H 6 ) Number of Motor Poles V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 2 lt: 4 106 Sets the number of motor poles as specified on the motor nameplate. Max: 48 T1-07 Motor Base Speed V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t r : / 1 m 4 i 5 n 0 r/min 106 (707H) Sets the rated speed of the motor as specified on the motor nameplate. Max: 24000 r/min ( T 7 1 0 - 8 0 H 8 ) E re n v c o o lu d t e i r o R n) esolution (pulses per V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t p : p 1 r 024 ppr 106 Set the number of pulses per revolution for the PG being used (pulse generator or encoder). Max: 60000 ppr V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ T1-09 Motor No-Load Current Sets the no-load current for the motor. D M e i f n a : u 0 l t A : - 106 (709H) (Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 and 2) A wi f l t l e r a u s t e o tt m in a g ti t c h a e ll y m d o i t s o p r l c a a y p t a h c e i t n y o t - o lo T a 1 d - c 0 u 2 r a re n n d t t f h o e r m a s o t t a o n r d r a a r t d ed 4 c p u o r l r e e n Y t a t s o k T aw 1- a 0 m 4, o t t h o i r s . p E a n r t a e m r e th te e r Max: Up to T1-04<10> no-load current as indicated on the motor test report. V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: - ( T 70 1 A -1 H 0 ) M (St o a t t o i r o n R a a r t y e d A S ut l o ip - Tuning 2) S A e f t t s e r t h s e e t m tin o g to t r h r e a m te o d t s o l r i p c . apacity to T1-02, this parameter will automatically display the motor M M i a n x : : 0 2 . 0 0 . 0 0 0 H H z z 106 slip for a standard 4 pole Yaskawa motor. Enter the motor slip as indicated on the motor test report. <4> Default setting value varies by the drive model (o2-04). <5> Default setting is determined by the control mode (A1-02). <9> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double the value when using a 400 V class drive. <10> The display resolution depends on the rated output power of the drive. Models CIMR-L20008 to 20033 and 40005 to 40018 display values in 0.01 A units, while models CIMR-L20047 to 20415 and 40024 to 40216 display values in 0.1 A units. <18> The variety of Auto-Tuning methods depends on the control mode setting. V/f Control allows T1-01 to be set to 2 or 3, while vector control modes (OLV and CLV) allow T1-01 to be set to 0 through 4. T2: PM Motor Auto-Tuning No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 0: Motor Data input 1: Stationary Auto-Tuning 2: Stationary stator resistance Auto-Tuning ( T 7 2 5 - 0 0 H 1 ) M Se o le to ct r i A on uto-Tuning Mode 3 4 1 : : 0 : I E n E n it n c i o c a d o l e d m r e a r o g f o n f f s e f e s t t e p t s o t r a l o e t t i a o s t e n i a o a r n r c y a h l A p A u a u t r o t a o - m T -T e u u t n e n i r n i s n g A g uto-Tuning D M M e i a f n x a : : u 0 1 lt 2 : 0 107 11: Rotational back EMF constant Auto-Tuning 12: Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics Setting 12 is available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics requires a PG-E3 option with software version 1102 or later. To identify the PG-E3 software version, refer to the PG-E3 labeling on the option, in the field designated “C/N” (S + four digit number). T2-04 Motor Rated Power V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 < k 4> W 107 (730H) Sets the motor rated power as indicated on the motor nameplate. Max: 650.00 kW ( T 7 2 3 - 2 0 H 5 ) Motor Rated Voltage V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M De i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 2 V 00.0 V<9> 107 Enter the motor rated voltage as indicated on the motor nameplate. Max: 255.0 V<9> 386 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| T1-01 (701H) | Auto-Tuning Mode Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Rotational Auto-Tuning 1: Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 2: Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance 4: Stationary Auto-Tuning 2 | Default: 0<5> Min: 0 Max: 4<18> | 105 |
| T1-02 (702H) | Motor Rated Power | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the motor rated power as specified on the motor nameplate. Note: Use the following formula to convert horsepower into kilowatts: kW = HP × 0.746. | Default: <4> Min: 0.00 kW Max: 650.00 kW | 105 |
| T1-03 (703H) | Motor Rated Voltage | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the motor rated voltage as specified on the motor nameplate. | Default: 200.0 V<9> Min: 0.0 V Max: 255.0 V<9> | 105 |
| T1-04 (704H) | Motor Rated Current | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the motor rated current as specified on the motor nameplate. | Default: <4> Min: 10% of drive rated current Max: 200% of drive rated current<10> | 105 |
| T1-05 (705H) | Motor Base Frequency | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the rated frequency of the motor as specified on the motor nameplate. | Default: 50.0 Hz Min: 0.0 Hz Max: 200.0 Hz | 105 |
| T1-06 (706H) | Number of Motor Poles | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the number of motor poles as specified on the motor nameplate. | Default: 4 Min: 2 Max: 48 | 106 |
| T1-07 (707H) | Motor Base Speed | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the rated speed of the motor as specified on the motor nameplate. | Default: 1450 r/min Min: 0 r/min Max: 24000 r/min | 106 |
| T1-08 (708H) | Encoder Resolution (pulses per revolution) | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Set the number of pulses per revolution for the PG being used (pulse generator or encoder). | Default: 1024 ppr Min: 0 ppr Max: 60000 ppr | 106 |
| T1-09 (709H) | Motor No-Load Current (Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 and 2) | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the no-load current for the motor. After setting the motor capacity to T1-02 and the motor rated current to T1-04, this parameter will automatically display the no-load current for a standard 4 pole Yaskawa motor. Enter the no-load current as indicated on the motor test report. | Default: - Min: 0 A Max: Up to T1-04<10> | 106 |
| T1-10 (70AH) | Motor Rated Slip (Stationary Auto-Tuning 2) | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the motor rated slip. After setting the motor capacity to T1-02, this parameter will automatically display the motor slip for a standard 4 pole Yaskawa motor. Enter the motor slip as indicated on the motor test report. | Default: - Min: 0.00 Hz Max: 20.00 Hz | 106 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| T2-01 (750H) | Motor Auto-Tuning Mode Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: Motor Data input 1: Stationary Auto-Tuning 2: Stationary stator resistance Auto-Tuning 3: Initial magnet pole search parameters Auto-Tuning 4: Encoder offset stationary Auto-Tuning 10: Encoder offset rotational Auto-Tuning 11: Rotational back EMF constant Auto-Tuning 12: Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics Setting 12 is available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics requires a PG-E3 option with software version 1102 or later. To identify the PG-E3 software version, refer to the PG-E3 labeling on the option, in the field designated “C/N” (S + four digit number). | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 12 | 107 |
| T2-04 (730H) | Motor Rated Power | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the motor rated power as indicated on the motor nameplate. | Default: <4> Min: 0.00 kW Max: 650.00 kW | 107 |
| T2-05 (732H) | Motor Rated Voltage | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Enter the motor rated voltage as indicated on the motor nameplate. | Default: 200.0 V<9> Min: 0.0 V Max: 255.0 V<9> | 107 |
Source page
Page 387
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 387 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 387 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 No. (Addr.) Name Description Setting Page Default: <4> ( T 73 2 3 -0 H 6 ) Motor Rated Current V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ M cu i r n re : n 1 t 0% of drive rated 107 Enter the motor rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate. Max: 200% of drive rated current<10> T2-08 Number of Motor Poles V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 2 lt: 6 107 (734H) Enter the number of motor poles for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. Max: 120<43> T2-09 Motor Base Speed V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l t r : / 1 m 5 i 0 n r/min 107 (731H) Enter the base speed for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. Max: 24000 r/min T2-10 Single Phase Stator Resistance V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 - 0 Ω 108 (754H) Enter the 1-phase resistance of the stator winding. Max: 65.000 Ω T2-11 Motor d-Axis Inductance V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 - mH 108 (735H) Enter the d-axis inductance for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. Max: 600.00 mH T2-12 Motor q-Axis Inductance V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : 0 - mH 108 (736H) Enter the q-axis inductance for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. Max: 600.00 mH T2-13 Induced Voltage Constant Unit V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Default: 1 Min: 0 108 (755H) Selection 0: mV/(r/min). E5-09 will automatically be set to 0.0, and E5-24 will be used. Max: 1 1: mV/(rad/sec). E5-24 will automatically be set to 0.0, and E5-09 will be used. T2-14 Motor Induced Voltage Constant V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 0 l . t 0 : - 108 (737H) Enter the induced voltage coefficient for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. Max: 6500.0<30> ( T 73 2 8 -1 H 6 ) Encoder Resolution V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 1 l t p : p 1 r 024 ppr 108 Sets the number of pulses per revolution for the PG being used (pulse generator or encoder). Max: 15000 ppr T2-17 Encoder Offset V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u - l 1 t: 8 0 0 . . 0 0 d d e e g g 108 (757H) Sets the offset between encoder offset and the rotor magnetic axis. Max: 180.0 deg (B T2 B - 0 1 H 8 ) Speed Reference for Auto-Tuning V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ D M e i f n a : u 1 l t r : / 1 m 0 i n r/min 108 <44> of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristics S = e 1 ts 2 ) t . he speed reference for execution of Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics (T2-01 Max: 30 r/min V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ T2-19 Rotation Direction for Default: 0 (BB1H) Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Sets the direction of motor rotation for execution of Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder Min: 0 109 <44> Characteristics c 0 h : a F r o a r c w te a r r i d st i ( c U s p ( ) T2-01 = 12). Max: 1 1: Reverse (Down) <4> Default setting value varies by the drive model (o2-04). <9> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double the value when using a 400 V class drive. <10> The display resolution depends on the rated output power of the drive. Models CIMR-L20008 to 20033 and 40005 to 40018 display values in 0.01 A units, while models CIMR-L20047 to 20415 and 40024 to 40216 display values in 0.1 A units. <30> Setting units are determined by the induced voltage constant unit selection for PM motors set to T2-13. <43> When PG-E3 option connected: Max setting = 48 <44> Available in drive software versions PRG: 7017 or later. U: Monitors Monitor parameters allow the user to view drive status, fault information, and other data concerning drive operation. U1: Operation Status Monitors No. (Addr.) Name Description Analo L g ev O e u l tput Unit Page U1-01 Speed Reference All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: Max frequency 0.01% - (40H) Monitors the speed reference. (-10 to +10 V) <29> U1-02 Output Speed All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: Max frequency 0.01% - (41H) Displays the output speed. (-10 to +10 V) <29> U (4 1 2 - H 03 ) Output Current All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 1 cu 0 r V re : n D t rive rated <10><40> - Displays the output current. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ U1-04 0: V/f Control No signal output (43H) Control Method 2: Open Loop Vector Control available - - 3: Closed Loop Vector Control B 7: Closed Loop Vector Control for PM U1-05 Speed Feedback V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: Max Frequency 0.01% - (44H) Displays the motor speed feedback. (-10 to +10 V) <29>
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Setting | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| T2-06 (733H) | Motor Rated Current | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Enter the motor rated current as indicated on the motor nameplate. | Default: <4> Min: 10% of drive rated current Max: 200% of drive rated current<10> | 107 |
| T2-08 (734H) | Number of Motor Poles | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Enter the number of motor poles for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. | Default: 6 Min: 2 Max: 120<43> | 107 |
| T2-09 (731H) | Motor Base Speed | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Enter the base speed for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. | Default: 150 r/min Min: 0 r/min Max: 24000 r/min | 107 |
| T2-10 (754H) | Single Phase Stator Resistance | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Enter the 1-phase resistance of the stator winding. | Default: - Min: 0.000 Ω Max: 65.000 Ω | 108 |
| T2-11 (735H) | Motor d-Axis Inductance | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Enter the d-axis inductance for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. | Default: - Min: 0.00 mH Max: 600.00 mH | 108 |
| T2-12 (736H) | Motor q-Axis Inductance | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Enter the q-axis inductance for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. | Default: - Min: 0.00 mH Max: 600.00 mH | 108 |
| T2-13 (755H) | Induced Voltage Constant Unit Selection | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly 0: mV/(r/min). E5-09 will automatically be set to 0.0, and E5-24 will be used. 1: mV/(rad/sec). E5-24 will automatically be set to 0.0, and E5-09 will be used. | Default: 1 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 108 |
| T2-14 (737H) | Motor Induced Voltage Constant | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Enter the induced voltage coefficient for the motor as indicated on the motor nameplate. | Default: - Min: 0.0 Max: 6500.0<30> | 108 |
| T2-16 (738H) | Encoder Resolution | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the number of pulses per revolution for the PG being used (pulse generator or encoder). | Default: 1024 ppr Min: 1 ppr Max: 15000 ppr | 108 |
| T2-17 (757H) | Encoder Offset | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the offset between encoder offset and the rotor magnetic axis. | Default: 0.0 deg Min: -180.0 deg Max: 180.0 deg | 108 |
| T2-18 (BB0H) <44> | Speed Reference for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristics | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the speed reference for execution of Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics (T2-01 = 12). | Default: 10 r/min Min: 1 r/min Max: 30 r/min | 108 |
| T2-19 (BB1H) <44> | Rotation Direction for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristics | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Sets the direction of motor rotation for execution of Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 encoder characteristics (T2-01 = 12). 0: Forward (Up) 1: Reverse (Down) | Default: 0 Min: 0 Max: 1 | 109 |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Analog Output Level | Unit | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| U1-01 (40H) | Speed Reference | common_ All Modes TMonly Monitors the speed reference. | 10 V: Max frequency (-10 to +10 V) | 0.01% <29> | - |
| U1-02 (41H) | Output Speed | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the output speed. | 10 V: Max frequency (-10 to +10 V) | 0.01% <29> | - |
| U1-03 (42H) | Output Current | common_ All Modes TMonly Displays the output current. | 10 V: Drive rated current | <10><40> | - |
| U1-04 (43H) | Control Method | All Modes common_ TMonly 0: V/f Control 2: Open Loop Vector Control 3: Closed Loop Vector Control 7: Closed Loop Vector Control for PM | No signal output available | - | - |
| U1-05 (44H) | Speed Feedback | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Displays the motor speed feedback. | 10 V: Max Frequency (-10 to +10 V) | 0.01% <29> | - |
Source page
Page 388
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 388 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
No. (Addr.) Name Description Analo L g ev O e u l tput Unit Page
U (4 1 5 - H 06 ) Output Voltage Reference Dis A p l l l a y M s o th d e e o s utput voltage. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: 200 Vrms<9> 0.1 Vac -
U (4 1 6 - H 07 ) DC Bus Voltage Dis A p l l l a y M s o th d e e D s C bus voltage. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: 400 V<9> 1 Vdc -
U (4 1 7 - H 08 ) Output Power Dis A p l l l a y M s o th d e e o s utput power (this value is calculated internally). c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 1 p (- 0 o 1 w 0 V e : t r o D ( + k ri 1 W v 0 e ) V ra ) ted <12> -
U1-09 Torque Reference V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 1 to 0 r q V u : e Motor rated 0.1% - (48H) Monitors the internal torque reference. (-10 to +10 V) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Displays the input terminal status. U1 - 10=00000000 1 Digital input 1 (terminal S1 enabled) 1 Digital input 2 (terminal S2 enabled) 1 Digital input 3 U (4 1 9 - H 10 ) Input Terminal Status YEG 1 ( D te ig rm ita in l i a n l p S u 3 t 4 e nabled) N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output - - (terminal S4 enabled) 1 Digital input 5 (terminal S5 enabled) 1 Digital input 6 (terminal S6 enabled) 1 Digital input 7 (terminal S7 enabled) 1 Digital input 8 (terminal S8 enabled) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Displays the output terminal status. U1 - 11=00000000 1Multi-Function Digital Output (terminal M1-M2) 1Multi-Function YEG D (te ig r i m ta in l O al u M tp 3 u - t M 4) ( U 4 1 A - H 11 ) Output Terminal Status 1 D M i u g l i t t i a -F l u O n u c t t p io u n t N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output - - (terminal M5-M6) 1Multi-Function Digital Output (terminal P1-C1) 1Multi-Function Digital Output (terminal P2-C2) Not Used 1Fault Relay (terminal MA-MC closed MA-MC open) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Displays the drive operation status. U1 - 12=00000000 1During run 1During zero-speed U1-12 YEG 1During down direction No signal output (4BH) Drive Status 1During fault reset available - - signal input 1During speed agree 1Drive ready 1During alarm detection 1During fault detection U1-13 Terminal A1 Input Voltage All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: 100% 0.1% - (4EH) Displays the voltage input to terminal A1. (-10 to +10 V) 388 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Analog Output Level | Unit | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| U1-06 (45H) | Output Voltage Reference | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the output voltage. | 10 V: 200 Vrms<9> | 0.1 Vac | - |
| U1-07 (46H) | DC Bus Voltage | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the DC bus voltage. | 10 V: 400 V<9> | 1 Vdc | - |
| U1-08 (47H) | Output Power | common_ All Modes TMonly Displays the output power (this value is calculated internally). | 10 V: Drive rated power (kW) (-10 to +10 V) | <12> | - |
| U1-09 (48H) | Torque Reference | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Monitors the internal torque reference. | 10 V: Motor rated torque (-10 to +10 V) | 0.1% | - |
| U1-10 (49H) | Input Terminal Status | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the input terminal status. U1 - 10=00000000 1 Digital input 1 (terminal S1 enabled) 1Digital input 2 (terminal S2 enabled) 1 Digital input 3 YEG (terminal S3 enabled) 1 Digital input 4 (terminal S4 enabled) 1 Digital input 5 (terminal S5 enabled) 1 Digital input 6 (terminal S6 enabled) 1 Digital input 7 (terminal S7 enabled) 1 Digital input 8 (terminal S8 enabled) | No signal output available | - | - |
| U1-11 (4AH) | Output Terminal Status | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the output terminal status. U1 - 11=00000000 1Multi-Function Digital Output (terminal M1-M2) 1Multi-Function Digital Output YEG (terminal M3-M4) 1Multi-Function Digital Output (terminal M5-M6) 1Multi-Function Digital Output (terminal P1-C1) 1Multi-Function Digital Output (terminal P2-C2) Not Used 1Fault Relay (terminal MA-MC closed MA-MC open) | No signal output available | - | - |
| U1-12 (4BH) | Drive Status | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the drive operation status. U1 - 12=00000000 1During run 1During zero-speed YEG 1During down direction 1During fault reset signal input 1During speed agree 1Drive ready 1During alarm detection 1During fault detection | No signal output available | - | - |
| U1-13 (4EH) | Terminal A1 Input Voltage | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the voltage input to terminal A1. | 10 V: 100% (-10 to +10 V) | 0.1% | - |
Source page
Page 389
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 389 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 389 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 No. (Addr.) Name Description Analo L g ev O e u l tput Unit Page U1-14 Terminal A2 Input Voltage All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: 100% 0.1% - (4FH) Displays the voltage input to terminal A2. (-10 to +10 V) U1-16 Output Speed after Soft Start All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: Max frequency 0.01% - (53H) Displays output speed with ramp time and jerk settings. Units determined by o1-03. (-10 to +10 V) <29> All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ U (5 1 8 - H 17 ) D St I a - t A us 3 Option Card Input D D i i s sp p l l a a y y s w th il e l a re p f p e e r a e r n c in e h v e a x lu a e d e in ci p m ut a l f r a o s m d e th te e r m D i I n -A ed 3 b o y p t t i h o e n d c i a g r i d ta . l card input selection in F3-01. N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output - - 3FF: Set (1 bit) + sign (1 bit) + 16 bit U (6 1 1 - H 18 ) oPE Fault Parameter Dis A p l l l a y M s o th d e e p s arameter number that caused the oPE02 or oPE08 (Operation error). c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output - - All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Displays the contents of a MEMOBUS/Modbus error. U1 - 19=00000000 1CRC Error U1-19 MEMOBUS/Modbus Error 1Data Length Error No signal output (66H) Code YEG 0Not Used available - - 1Parity Error 1Overrun Error 1Framing Error 1Timed Out 0Not Used U1-25 Software Number (Flash) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output - - (4DH) available FLASH ID U1-26 Software No. (ROM) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output - - (5BH) ROM ID available <9> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double the value when using a 400 V class drive. <10> The display resolution depends on the rated output power of the drive. Models CIMR-L20008 to 20033 and 40005 to 40018 display values in 0.01 A units, while models CIMR-L20047 to 20415 and 40024 to 40216 display values in 0.1 A units. <12> The display resolution depends on the rated output power of the drive. Models CIMR-L20008 to 20033 and 40005 to 40018 display values in 0.01 kW units, while models CIMR-L20047 to 20415 and 40024 to 40216 display values in 0.1 kW units. <29> Setting units are determined by the digital operator display unit selection (o1-03). When o1-03 = 0, the value is set in Hertz. When o1-03 = 4 or 5, the value is displayed in m/s. When o1-03 = 6, the value is displayed in ft/min. <40> When checking the values of U1-03, U2-05 and U4-13 with the digital operator they are displayed in units of amperes, but when they are checked using MEMOBUS communications, the monitor value in MEMOBUS communications is: displayed numeric value / 8192 × drive’s rated current (A), from the condition “8192 (maximum value) = drive’s rated current (A)”. U2: Fault Trace No. (Addr.) Name Description Analo L g ev O e u l tput Unit Page U2-01 Current Fault All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output - - (80H) Displays the current fault. available U (8 2 1 - H 02 ) Previous Fault All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output - - Displays the previous fault. U2-03 Speed Reference at Previous All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output 0.01% - (82H) Fault Displays the speed reference at the previous fault. available <29> U2-04 Output Speed at Previous Fault All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output 0.01% - (83H) Displays the output speed at the previous fault. available <29> U (8 2 4 - H 05 ) O Fa u u tp lt ut Current at Previous Dis A p l l l a y M s o th d e e o s utput current at the previous fault. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output <10><40> - U2-06 Motor Speed at Previous Fault V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output 0.01% - (85H) Displays the motor speed at the previous fault. available <29> U2-07 Output Voltage at Previous All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output 0.1 Vac - (86H) Fault Displays the output voltage at the previous fault. available U (8 2 7 - H 08 ) D Fa C u l B t us Voltage at Previous All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 1 Vdc - B Displays the DC bus voltage at the previous fault. U2-09 Output Power at Previous All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output 0.1 kW - (88H) Fault available Displays the output power at the previous fault.
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Analog Output Level | Unit | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| U1-14 (4FH) | Terminal A2 Input Voltage | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the voltage input to terminal A2. | 10 V: 100% (-10 to +10 V) | 0.1% | - |
| U1-16 (53H) | Output Speed after Soft Start | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays output speed with ramp time and jerk settings. Units determined by o1-03. | 10 V: Max frequency (-10 to +10 V) | 0.01% <29> | - |
| U1-17 (58H) | DI-A3 Option Card Input Status | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the reference value input from the DI-A3 option card. Display will appear in hexadecimal as determined by the digital card input selection in F3-01. 3FFFF: Set (1 bit) + sign (1 bit) + 16 bit | No signal output available | - | - |
| U1-18 (61H) | oPE Fault Parameter | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the parameter number that caused the oPE02 or oPE08 (Operation error). | No signal output available | - | - |
| U1-19 (66H) | MEMOBUS/Modbus Error Code | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the contents of a MEMOBUS/Modbus error. U1 - 19=00000000 1CRC Error 1Data Length Error YEG 0Not Used 1Parity Error 1Overrun Error 1Framing Error 1Timed Out 0Not Used | No signal output available | - | - |
| U1-25 (4DH) | Software Number (Flash) | common_ All Modes TMonly FLASH ID | No signal output available | - | - |
| U1-26 (5BH) | Software No. (ROM) | All Modes common_ TMonly ROM ID | No signal output available | - | - |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Analog Output Level | Unit | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| U2-01 (80H) | Current Fault | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the current fault. | No signal output available | - | - |
| U2-02 (81H) | Previous Fault | common_ All Modes TMonly Displays the previous fault. | No signal output available | - | - |
| U2-03 (82H) | Speed Reference at Previous Fault | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the speed reference at the previous fault. | No signal output available | 0.01% <29> | - |
| U2-04 (83H) | Output Speed at Previous Fault | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the output speed at the previous fault. | No signal output available | 0.01% <29> | - |
| U2-05 (84H) | Output Current at Previous Fault | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the output current at the previous fault. | No signal output available | <10><40> | - |
| U2-06 (85H) | Motor Speed at Previous Fault | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Displays the motor speed at the previous fault. | No signal output available | 0.01% <29> | - |
| U2-07 (86H) | Output Voltage at Previous Fault | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the output voltage at the previous fault. | No signal output available | 0.1 Vac | - |
| U2-08 (87H) | DC Bus Voltage at Previous Fault | common_ All Modes TMonly Displays the DC bus voltage at the previous fault. | No signal output available | 1 Vdc | - |
| U2-09 (88H) | Output Power at Previous Fault | common_ All Modes TMonly Displays the output power at the previous fault. | No signal output available | 0.1 kW | - |
Source page
Page 390
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 390 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
No. (Addr.) Name Description Analo L g ev O e u l tput Unit Page
U2-10 Torque Reference at Previous V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output 0.1% - (89H) Fault available Displays the torque reference at the previous fault. U2-11 Input Terminal Status at All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output - - (8AH) Previous Fault Displays the input terminal status at the previous fault. Displayed as in U1-10. available U (8 2 B - H 12 ) O Pr u e t v p i u o t u T s e F r a m u i l n t al Status at Dis A p l l l a y M s o th d e e o s utput status at the previous fault. Displayed as in U1-11. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output - - U2-13 Drive Operation Status at All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output - - (8CH) Previous Fault Displays the operation status of the drive at the previous fault. Displayed as in U1-12. available U2-14 Cumulative Operation Time at All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output 1 h - (8DH) Previous Fault Displays the cumulative operation time at the previous fault. available
( U 7E 2 0 -1 H 5 ) S Fa o u ft l t Starter Output at Previous Dis A p l l l a y M s o th d e e r s un speed after a soft start when a previous fault occurred. Displayed as in c T U o M m o 1 m n - o l 1 n y _ 6. N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 0 < .0 2 1 9 % > -
( U 7E 2 1 -1 H 6 ) M Pr o ev to io r u q s - A F x au is l t Current at V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 0.1% - Displays the q-axis current for the motor at the previous fault. Displayed as in U6-01. U2-17 Motor d-Axis Current at V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output 0.1% - (7E2H) Previous Fault available Displays the d-axis current for the motor at the previous fault. Displayed as in U6-02. U (8 2 E - H 20 ) H Pr e e a v t i s o in u k s F T a e u m lt perature at Dis A p l l l a y M s o th d e e t s emperature of the heatsink when the most recent fault occurred. Displayed c T o M a m o s m n o l i n y n _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 1°C - U4-08. ( U 7E 2 6 -2 H 1 ) P F e a a u k lt Hold Current during Dis A p l l l a y M s o th d e e p s eak current that occurred just prior to the previous fault. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 0.01 A -
( U 7E 2 7 -2 H 2 ) P F e a a u k lt Hold Frequency during Dis A p l l l a y M s o th d e e o s utput frequency when the peak current displayed in U2-21 occurred. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 0.01 Hz - <10> The display resolution depends on the rated output power of the drive. Models CIMR-L20008 to 20033 and 40005 to 40018 display values in 0.01 A units, while models CIMR-L20047 to 20415 and 40024 to 40216 display values in 0.1 A units. <29> Setting units are determined by the digital operator display unit selection (o1-03). When o1-03 = 0, the value is set in Hertz. When o1-03 = 4 or 5, the value is displayed in m/s. When o1-03 = 6, the value is displayed in ft/min. <40> When checking the values of U1-03, U2-05 and U4-13 with the digital operator they are displayed in units of amperes, but when they are checked using MEMOBUS communications, the monitor value in MEMOBUS communications is: displayed numeric value / 8192 × drive’s rated current (A), from the condition “8192 (maximum value) = drive’s rated current (A)”. U3: Fault History No. (Addr.) Name Description Analo L g ev O e u l tput Unit Page U3-01 to (90 U H 3 t - o 0 4 93H First to 4th Most Recent Fault All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output - - available (800H to Displays the first to the fourth most recent faults. 803H)) U3-05 to All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ U3-10 5th to 10th Most Recent Fault Displays the fifth to the tenth most recent faults. No signal output - - (804H to After ten faults have occurred in the drive, data for the oldest fault is deleted. The most recent available 809H) fault appears in U3-01, with the next most recent fault appearing in U3-02. The data is moved to the next monitor parameter every time a fault occurs. U3-11 to (94 U H 3 t - o 1 4 97H Cumulative Operation Time at All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output 1 h - (80AH to 1st to 4th Most Recent Fault Displays the cumulative operation time when the first to the fourth most recent faults occurred. available 80DH)) U3-15 to U3-20 Cumulative Operation Time at All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output 1 h - (80EH to 5th to 10th Most Recent Fault Displays the cumulative operation time when the fifth to the tenth most recent faults occurred. available 813H) U4: Maintenance Monitors No. (Addr.) Name Description Analo L g ev O e u l tput Unit Page U4-01 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ (4CH, 98H, Displays the cumulative operation time of the drive. The value for the cumulative operation No signal output 99H) Cumulative Operation Time time counter can be reset in parameter o4-01. Use parameter o4-02 to determine if the operation available 1 h - <41> time should start as soon as the power is switched on or only while the Up/Down command is present. The maximum number displayed is 99999, after which the value is reset to 0. 390 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Analog Output Level | Unit | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| U2-10 (89H) | Torque Reference at Previous Fault | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Displays the torque reference at the previous fault. | No signal output available | 0.1% | - |
| U2-11 (8AH) | Input Terminal Status at Previous Fault | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the input terminal status at the previous fault. Displayed as in U1-10. | No signal output available | - | - |
| U2-12 (8BH) | Output Terminal Status at Previous Fault | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the output status at the previous fault. Displayed as in U1-11. | No signal output available | - | - |
| U2-13 (8CH) | Drive Operation Status at Previous Fault | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the operation status of the drive at the previous fault. Displayed as in U1-12. | No signal output available | - | - |
| U2-14 (8DH) | Cumulative Operation Time at Previous Fault | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the cumulative operation time at the previous fault. | No signal output available | 1 h | - |
| U2-15 (7E0H) | Soft Starter Output at Previous Fault | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the run speed after a soft start when a previous fault occurred. Displayed as in U1-16. | No signal output available | 0.01% <29> | - |
| U2-16 (7E1H) | Motor q-Axis Current at Previous Fault | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Displays the q-axis current for the motor at the previous fault. Displayed as in U6-01. | No signal output available | 0.1% | - |
| U2-17 (7E2H) | Motor d-Axis Current at Previous Fault | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Displays the d-axis current for the motor at the previous fault. Displayed as in U6-02. | No signal output available | 0.1% | - |
| U2-20 (8EH) | Heatsink Temperature at Previous Fault | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the temperature of the heatsink when the most recent fault occurred. Displayed as in U4-08. | No signal output available | 1°C | - |
| U2-21 (7E6H) | Peak Hold Current during Fault | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the peak current that occurred just prior to the previous fault. | No signal output available | 0.01 A | - |
| U2-22 (7E7H) | Peak Hold Frequency during Fault | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the output frequency when the peak current displayed in U2-21 occurred. | No signal output available | 0.01 Hz | - |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Analog Output Level | Unit | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| U3-01 to U3-04 (90H to 93H (800H to 803H)) | First to 4th Most Recent Fault | common_ All Modes TMonly Displays the first to the fourth most recent faults. | No signal output available | - | - |
| U3-05 to U3-10 (804H to 809H) | 5th to 10th Most Recent Fault | common_ All Modes TMonly Displays the fifth to the tenth most recent faults. After ten faults have occurred in the drive, data for the oldest fault is deleted. The most recent fault appears in U3-01, with the next most recent fault appearing in U3-02. The data is moved to the next monitor parameter every time a fault occurs. | No signal output available | - | - |
| U3-11 to U3-14 (94H to 97H (80AH to 80DH)) | Cumulative Operation Time at 1st to 4th Most Recent Fault | common_ All Modes TMonly Displays the cumulative operation time when the first to the fourth most recent faults occurred. | No signal output available | 1 h | - |
| U3-15 to U3-20 (80EH to 813H) | Cumulative Operation Time at 5th to 10th Most Recent Fault | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the cumulative operation time when the fifth to the tenth most recent faults occurred. | No signal output available | 1 h | - |
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Analog Output Level | Unit | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| U4-01 (4CH, 98H, 99H) <41> | Cumulative Operation Time | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the cumulative operation time of the drive. The value for the cumulative operation time counter can be reset in parameter o4-01. Use parameter o4-02 to determine if the operation time should start as soon as the power is switched on or only while the Up/Down command is present. The maximum number displayed is 99999, after which the value is reset to 0. | No signal output available | 1 h | - |
Source page
Page 391
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 391 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 391 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 No. (Addr.) Name Description Analo L g ev O e u l tput Unit Page U4-03 All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ (67 9 H B , H 9 ) 4H, Cooling Fan Operation Time D op is e p ra la ti y o s n t t h i e m c e u i m s u re la se ti t v i e n o p p a e r r a a m ti e o t n e r t i o m 4 e -0 o 3 f . t T h h e i c s o v o a l l i u n e g w fa i n ll . r T e h se e t d t e o f a 0 u a l n t d v a s l t u a e rt f c o o r u th n e ti n fa g n a gain N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 1 h - <42> after reaching 99999. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ U (7 4 E - H 04 ) Cooling Fan Maintenance D Pa i r s a p m la e y t s e r m o a 4 in -0 c 3 o c o a li n n g b e f a u n s e u d s a to g e r e ti s m et e t h in is a m s a o n p i e to rc r. e T nt h a e g e fa o n f s i h ts o e u x ld p e b c e t e r d ep p la e c rf e o d r m w a h n e c n e t h li i f s e . N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 1% - monitor reaches 90%. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ U (7 4 C - H 05 ) Capacitor Maintenance D Th is e p c la a y p s a c m it a o i r n s c s i h r o cu u i l t d c b a e p a re c p it l o a r c e u d sa w g h e e ti n m th e i i s n m a o s n a i p to e r r c re e a n c ta h g e e s o 9 f 0 % the . i P r a e r x a p m e e c t t e e r d o p 4 e - r 0 f 5 o r c m an a n b c e e u l s if e e d . N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 1% - to reset this monitor. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ U4-06 Soft Charge Bypass Relay Displays the soft charge bypass relay maintenance time as a percentage of its estimated No signal output 1% - (7D6H) Maintenance performance life. The soft charge relay should be replaced when this monitor reaches 90%. available Parameter o4-07 can be used to reset this monitor. ( U 7D 4- 7 0 H 7 ) IGBT Maintenance Dis A p l l l a y M s o IG de B s T usage time as a percentage of the expected performance life. The IGBTs c T o M s m o h m n o o l u n y _ ld N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 1% - be replaced when this monitor reaches 90%. Parameter o4-09 can be used to reset this monitor. U (6 4 8 - H 08 ) Heatsink Temperature Dis A p l l l a y M s o th d e e h s eatsink temperature. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: 100°C 1°C - U (5 4 E - H 09 ) LED Check Lig A h l t l s M al o l s d e e g s ments of the LED to verify that the display is working properly. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output - - U (5 4 C - H 10 ) kWh, Lower 4 Digits Mo A n l i l t o M rs o t d he e s drive output power. The value is shown as a 9 digit number displayed acro c T s o M s m o m n t o l w n y _ o N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 1 kWh - monitor parameters, U4-10 and U4-11. Example: 12345678.9 kWh is displayed as: U4-11 kWh, Upper 5 Digits U4-10: 678.9 kWh No signal output 1 MWh - (5DH) U4-11: 12345 MWh available ( U 7C 4 F -1 H 3 ) Peak Hold Current Dis A p l l l a y M s o th d e e h s ighest current value that occurred during a ride. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 0. < 0 4 1 0 > A - U4-14 Peak Hold Output Frequency All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output 0.01 Hz - (7D0H) available Displays the output frequency when the current value shown in U4-13 occurred. U4-16 Motor Overload Estimate All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ (7D8H) (oL1) Shows the value of the motor overload detection accumulator. 100% is equal to the oL1 10 V: 100% 0.1% - detection level. ( U 7D 4- 9 1 H 7 ) D (o r L iv 2 e ) Overload Calculations Dis A p l l l a y M s o th d e e l s evel of the drive overload detection (oL2). A value of 100% is equal to the c T o M o m o L m n o l 2 n y _ 10 V = 100% 0.1% - detection level. All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Displays the source for the speed reference as XY-nn. X: indicates which reference is used: 1 = Reference 1 (b1-01) U4-18 Speed Reference Selection Y-nn: indicates the reference source No signal output (7DAH) Results 0-01 = Digital operator available - - 1-01 = Analog (terminal A1) 1-02 = Analog (terminal A2) 2-02 to 8 = Digital Inputs (d1-02 to 8) 3-01 = MEMOBUS/Modbus communications 4-01 = Communication option card U4-19 Speed Reference from All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output 0.01% - (7DBH) MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. Displays the speed reference provided by MEMOBUS/Modbus (decimal). available <29> U4-20 Speed Reference From Option All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output 0.01% - (7DCH) Card Displays the speed reference input by an option card (decimal). available <29> B
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Analog Output Level | Unit | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| U4-03 (67H, 94H, 9BH) <42> | Cooling Fan Operation Time | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the cumulative operation time of the cooling fan. The default value for the fan operation time is reset in parameter o4-03. This value will reset to 0 and start counting again after reaching 99999. | No signal output available | 1 h | - |
| U4-04 (7EH) | Cooling Fan Maintenance | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays main cooling fan usage time in as a percentage of its expected performance life. Parameter o4-03 can be used to reset this monitor. The fan should be replaced when this monitor reaches 90%. | No signal output available | 1% | - |
| U4-05 (7CH) | Capacitor Maintenance | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays main circuit capacitor usage time in as a percentage of their expected performance life. The capacitors should be replaced when this monitor reaches 90%. Parameter o4-05 can be used to reset this monitor. | No signal output available | 1% | - |
| U4-06 (7D6H) | Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the soft charge bypass relay maintenance time as a percentage of its estimated performance life. The soft charge relay should be replaced when this monitor reaches 90%. Parameter o4-07 can be used to reset this monitor. | No signal output available | 1% | - |
| U4-07 (7D7H) | IGBT Maintenance | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays IGBT usage time as a percentage of the expected performance life. The IGBTs should be replaced when this monitor reaches 90%. Parameter o4-09 can be used to reset this monitor. | No signal output available | 1% | - |
| U4-08 (68H) | Heatsink Temperature | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the heatsink temperature. | 10 V: 100°C | 1°C | - |
| U4-09 (5EH) | LED Check | All Modes common_ TMonly Lights all segments of the LED to verify that the display is working properly. | No signal output available | - | - |
| U4-10 (5CH) | kWh, Lower 4 Digits | All Modes common_ TMonly Monitors the drive output power. The value is shown as a 9 digit number displayed across two monitor parameters, U4-10 and U4-11. Example: 12345678.9 kWh is displayed as: U4-10: 678.9 kWh U4-11: 12345 MWh | No signal output available | 1 kWh | - |
| U4-11 (5DH) | kWh, Upper 5 Digits | No signal output available | 1 MWh | - | |
| U4-13 (7CFH) | Peak Hold Current | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the highest current value that occurred during a ride. | No signal output available | 0.01 A <40> | - |
| U4-14 (7D0H) | Peak Hold Output Frequency | common_ All Modes TMonly Displays the output frequency when the current value shown in U4-13 occurred. | No signal output available | 0.01 Hz | - |
| U4-16 (7D8H) | Motor Overload Estimate (oL1) | All Modes common_ TMonly Shows the value of the motor overload detection accumulator. 100% is equal to the oL1 detection level. | 10 V: 100% | 0.1% | - |
| U4-17 (7D9H) | Drive Overload Calculations (oL2) | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the level of the drive overload detection (oL2). A value of 100% is equal to the oL2 detection level. | 10 V = 100% | 0.1% | - |
| U4-18 (7DAH) | Speed Reference Selection Results | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the source for the speed reference as XY-nn. X: indicates which reference is used: 1 = Reference 1 (b1-01) Y-nn: indicates the reference source 0-01 = Digital operator 1-01 = Analog (terminal A1) 1-02 = Analog (terminal A2) 2-02 to 8 = Digital Inputs (d1-02 to 8) 3-01 = MEMOBUS/Modbus communications 4-01 = Communication option card | No signal output available | - | - |
| U4-19 (7DBH) | Speed Reference from MEMOBUS/Modbus Comm. | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the speed reference provided by MEMOBUS/Modbus (decimal). | No signal output available | 0.01% <29> | - |
| U4-20 (7DCH) | Speed Reference From Option Card | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the speed reference input by an option card (decimal). | No signal output available | 0.01% <29> | - |
Source page
Page 392
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 392 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.3 Parameter Table
No. (Addr.) Name Description Analo L g ev O e u l tput Unit Page
All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ Displays the source for the Up/Down command as XY-nn. X: Indicates which Up/Down command source is used: 1 = Reference 1 (b1-02) Y: Input power supply data 0 = Digital operator 1 = External terminals 3 = MEMOBUS/Modbus communications U4-21 Up/Down Command Source 4 = Communication option card No signal output (7DDH) Selection nn: Up/Down command limit status data available - - 00: No limit status. 01: Up/Down command was left on when stopped in the PRG mode 02: Up/Down command was left on when switching from LOCAL to REMOTE operation 03: Waiting for soft charge bypass contactor after power up (Uv or Uv1 flashes after 10 s) 04: Waiting for “Up/Down Command Prohibited” time period to end 05: Emergency Stop (multi-function input, operator) 07: During baseblock while coast to stop with timer 08: Speed reference is below minimal reference during baseblock 09: Waiting for Enter command U4-22 MEMOBUS/Modbus All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output (7DEH) Communications Reference Displays the drive control data set by MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register no. 0001H available - - as a four-digit hexadecimal number. ( U 7D 4- F 2 H 3 ) C Re o f m er m en u c n e ication Option Card Dis A p l l l a y M s o d d ri e v s e control data set by an option card as a four-digit hexadecimal number. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output - - ( U 7E 4 6 -2 H 4 ) N (L u o m w b e e r r 4 o d f i T g r it a ) vels All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 1 time - Displays the lower four digits for the number of trips the drive has made. ( U 7E 4 7 -2 H 5 ) N (H u i m gh b e e r r 4 o f d T ig r i a t v ) els Dis A p l l l a y M s o th d e e u s pper four digits for the number of trips the drive has made. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 1 time - ( U 7E 4 8 -2 H 6 ) M Ac a c x e . l e C r u a r ti r o en n t during Sho A w ll s M th o e d m e a s ximum current that occurred during acceleration. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 0.1 A - ( U 7E 4 9 -2 H 7 ) M De a c x e . l e C r u a r ti r o en n t during Sho A w ll s M th o e d m e a s ximum current that occurred during deceleration. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 0.1 A - (7 U E 4 A -2 H 8 ) M Sp a e x e . d Current during Constant Sho A w ll s M th o e d m e a s ximum current that occurred during ride at top speed. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 0.1 A - (7 U E 4 D -2 H 9 ) M Sp a e x e . d Current during Leveling Sho A w ll s M th o e d m e a s ximum current that occurred during ride at leveling speed. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 0.1 A - ( U 7E 4 E -3 H 0 ) Slip Compensation Value V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ a N v o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 0.01% - Shows the slip compensation value. ( U 7E 4 F -3 H 1 ) Car Acceleration Rate V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 0.01 m/s2 - Shows the car acceleration rate. ( U 7F 4 D -4 H 0 ) S R p e e sc e u d e R O ef p e e r r e a n ti c o e n Limit at Dis A p l l l a y M s o th d e e s s peed limit for Rescue Operation based on how much power the backup ba c T t o M te m o m n r o l y n y _ or N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output 1% - UPS has. Displays 0% when Rescue Operation is not being performed.
( U 85 4 5 -4 H 2 ) Remaining Distance V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 1 S 0 5 - V 1 : 0 = 1: S5-11 1 mm - <35> Displays the remaining distance according to the stopping method selected. S5-10 = 2: S5-12 ( U 85 4 6 -4 H 3 ) Minimum Deceleration V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output 1 mm - <35> Distance Displays the Minimum Deceleration Distance calculated by E1-04. available ( U 85 4 7 -4 H 4 ) Minimum Stop Distance V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ No signal output 1 mm - <35> Displays the Minimum Stop Distance calculated by d1-26. available <29> Setting units are determined by the digital operator display unit selection (o1-03). When o1-03 = 0, the value is set in Hertz. When o1-03 = 4 or 5, the value is displayed in m/s. When o1-03 = 6, the value is displayed in ft/min. <35> o1-12 (Length Units) determines the units. When o1-12 is set to 0, the unit is millimeters. When o1-12 is set to 1, the unit is inch. <40> When checking the values of U1-03, U2-05 and U4-13 with the digital operator they are displayed in units of amperes, but when they are checked using MEMOBUS communications, the monitor value in MEMOBUS communications is: displayed numeric value / 8192 × drive’s rated current (A), from the condition “8192 (maximum value) = drive’s rated current (A)”. <41> The MEMOBUS communications data is in 10 h units. If data in 1 h units are also required, refer to register number 0099H. <42> The MEMOBUS communications data is in 10 h units. If data in 1 h units are also required, refer to register number 009BH. Note: Fault trace (i.e., the fault history) is not maintained when CPF00, CPF01, CPF06, CPF24, oFA00, oFb00, oFC00, Uv1, Uv2, or Uv3 occur.
392 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Analog Output Level | Unit | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| U4-21 (7DDH) | Up/Down Command Source Selection | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the source for the Up/Down command as XY-nn. X: Indicates which Up/Down command source is used: 1 = Reference 1 (b1-02) Y: Input power supply data 0 = Digital operator 1 = External terminals 3 = MEMOBUS/Modbus communications 4 = Communication option card nn: Up/Down command limit status data 00: No limit status. 01: Up/Down command was left on when stopped in the PRG mode 02: Up/Down command was left on when switching from LOCAL to REMOTE operation 03: Waiting for soft charge bypass contactor after power up (Uv or Uv1 flashes after 10 s) 04: Waiting for “Up/Down Command Prohibited” time period to end 05: Emergency Stop (multi-function input, operator) 07: During baseblock while coast to stop with timer 08: Speed reference is below minimal reference during baseblock 09: Waiting for Enter command | No signal output available | - | - |
| U4-22 (7DEH) | MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Reference | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the drive control data set by MEMOBUS/Modbus communications register no. 0001H as a four-digit hexadecimal number. | No signal output available | - | - |
| U4-23 (7DFH) | Communication Option Card Reference | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays drive control data set by an option card as a four-digit hexadecimal number. | No signal output available | - | - |
| U4-24 (7E6H) | Number of Travels (Lower 4 digit) | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the lower four digits for the number of trips the drive has made. | No signal output available | 1 time | - |
| U4-25 (7E7H) | Number of Travels (Higher 4 digit) | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the upper four digits for the number of trips the drive has made. | No signal output available | 1 time | - |
| U4-26 (7E8H) | Max. Current during Acceleration | All Modes common_ TMonly Shows the maximum current that occurred during acceleration. | No signal output available | 0.1 A | - |
| U4-27 (7E9H) | Max. Current during Deceleration | All Modes common_ TMonly Shows the maximum current that occurred during deceleration. | No signal output available | 0.1 A | - |
| U4-28 (7EAH) | Max. Current during Constant Speed | All Modes common_ TMonly Shows the maximum current that occurred during ride at top speed. | No signal output available | 0.1 A | - |
| U4-29 (7EDH) | Max. Current during Leveling Speed | All Modes common_ TMonly Shows the maximum current that occurred during ride at leveling speed. | No signal output available | 0.1 A | - |
| U4-30 (7EEH) | Slip Compensation Value | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Shows the slip compensation value. | No signal output available | 0.01% | - |
| U4-31 (7EFH) | Car Acceleration Rate | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Shows the car acceleration rate. | No signal output available | 0.01 m/s2 | - |
| U4-40 (7FDH) | Speed Reference Limit at Rescue Operation | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the speed limit for Rescue Operation based on how much power the backup battery or UPS has. Displays 0% when Rescue Operation is not being performed. | No signal output available | 1% | - |
| U4-42 (855H) <35> | Remaining Distance | V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM common_ TMonly Displays the remaining distance according to the stopping method selected. | 10 V: S5-10 = 1: S5-11 S5-10 = 2: S5-12 | 1 mm | - |
| U4-43 (856H) <35> | Minimum Deceleration Distance | V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM common_ TMonly Displays the Minimum Deceleration Distance calculated by E1-04. | No signal output available | 1 mm | - |
| U4-44 (857H) <35> | Minimum Stop Distance | V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM common_ TMonly Displays the Minimum Stop Distance calculated by d1-26. | No signal output available | 1 mm | - |
Source page
Page 393
B.3 Parameter Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 393 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 393 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 U6: Control Monitors No. (Addr.) Name Description Analo L g ev O e u l tput Unit Page 10 V: Motor U6-01 Motor Secondary Current (Iq) All Modes c T o M m o m n o l n y _ secondary rated 0.1% - (51H) Displays the value of the motor secondary current (Iq). Motor rated secondary current is 100%. current (-10 to +10 V) U6-02 Motor Excitation Current (Id) V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 1 se 0 c V on : d M ar o y t o r r a ted 0.1% - (52H) Displays the value calculated for the motor excitation current (Id). Motor rated secondary current current is 100%. (-10 to +10 V) U6-03 10 V: Max frequency Speed Control Loop Input (54H) (-10 to +10 V) V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: Motor 0.01% - U6-04 Speed Control Loop Output Displays the input and output values of the speed control loop. secondary rated (55H) current (-10 to +10 V) U6-05 Output Voltage Reference (Vq) V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: 200 Vrms<9> 0.1 Vac - (59H) (-10 to +10 V) Output voltage reference (Vq) for the q-axis. U6-06 Output Voltage Reference (Vd) V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: 200 Vrms<9> 0.1 Vac - (5AH) (-10 to +10 V) Output voltage reference (Vd) for the d-axis. U6-07 q-Axis Current Controller V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: 200 Vrms<9> 0.1% - (5FH) Output (-10 to +10 V) Displays the output value for current control relative to motor secondary current (q-axis). U6-08 d-Axis Current Controller V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: 200 Vrms<9> 0.1% - (60H) Output (-10 to +10 V) Displays the output value for current control relative to motor secondary current (d-axis). U6-13 Flux Position Detection V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: 180 deg 0.1 deg - (7CAH) (sensor) Monitors the value of the flux position detection (sensor). -10 V: -180 deg (7 U C 6 D -1 H 8 ) Speed Detection PG1 Counter Mo A n l i l t o M rs o t d he e s number of pulses for speed detection (PG1). c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: 65536 1 pulse - U6-22 Position Lock Deviation V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 1 pe 0 r V re : v N o o lu . t o i f o n pulses 1 pulse - (62H) Counter Displays how far the rotor has moved from its last position in PG pulses (multiplied by 4). (-10 to +10 V) 10 V: Motor U6-25 Feedback Control Output V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ secondary rated 0.01% - (6BH) current Output monitor for the speed control loop. (-10 to +10 V) 10 V: Motor U (6 6 C - H 26 ) Inertia Compensation Output V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ s c e u c r o re n n d t ary rated 0.01% - Output monitor for Inertia Compensation. (-10 to +10 V) U6-56 Speed Feedback V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM c T o M m o m n o l n y _ 10 V: Max output 0.01% - (7C3H) Compensation Output frequency Displays observed speed when n5-07 = 1 or 2. U6-80 (7 t B o 0 U to 6 - 7 9 B 9 9, Option Monitor 1 to 20 Mo A n l i l t o M rs o r d es e e s rved to display data from option cards. c T o M m o m n o l n y _ N av o a i s l i a g b n l a e l output - - 7F0 to 7F9H) <9> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double the value when using a 400 V class drive. B
| No. (Addr.) | Name | Description | Analog Output Level | Unit | Page |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| U6-01 (51H) | Motor Secondary Current (Iq) | All Modes common_ TMonly Displays the value of the motor secondary current (Iq). Motor rated secondary current is 100%. | 10 V: Motor secondary rated current (-10 to +10 V) | 0.1% | - |
| U6-02 (52H) | Motor Excitation Current (Id) | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Displays the value calculated for the motor excitation current (Id). Motor rated secondary current is 100%. | 10 V: Motor secondary rated current (-10 to +10 V) | 0.1% | - |
| U6-03 (54H) | Speed Control Loop Input | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Displays the input and output values of the speed control loop. | 10 V: Max frequency (-10 to +10 V) | 0.01% | - |
| U6-04 (55H) | Speed Control Loop Output | 10 V: Motor secondary rated current (-10 to +10 V) | |||
| U6-05 (59H) | Output Voltage Reference (Vq) | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Output voltage reference (Vq) for the q-axis. | 10 V: 200 Vrms<9> (-10 to +10 V) | 0.1 Vac | - |
| U6-06 (5AH) | Output Voltage Reference (Vd) | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Output voltage reference (Vd) for the d-axis. | 10 V: 200 Vrms<9> (-10 to +10 V) | 0.1 Vac | - |
| U6-07 (5FH) | q-Axis Current Controller Output | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Displays the output value for current control relative to motor secondary current (q-axis). | 10 V: 200 Vrms<9> (-10 to +10 V) | 0.1% | - |
| U6-08 (60H) | d-Axis Current Controller Output | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Displays the output value for current control relative to motor secondary current (d-axis). | 10 V: 200 Vrms<9> (-10 to +10 V) | 0.1% | - |
| U6-13 (7CAH) | Flux Position Detection (sensor) | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Monitors the value of the flux position detection (sensor). | 10 V: 180 deg -10 V: -180 deg | 0.1 deg | - |
| U6-18 (7CDH) | Speed Detection PG1 Counter | common_ All Modes TMonly Monitors the number of pulses for speed detection (PG1). | 10 V: 65536 | 1 pulse | - |
| U6-22 (62H) | Position Lock Deviation Counter | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Displays how far the rotor has moved from its last position in PG pulses (multiplied by 4). | 10 V: No. of pulses per revolution (-10 to +10 V) | 1 pulse | - |
| U6-25 (6BH) | Feedback Control Output | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Output monitor for the speed control loop. | 10 V: Motor secondary rated current (-10 to +10 V) | 0.01% | - |
| U6-26 (6CH) | Inertia Compensation Output | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Output monitor for Inertia Compensation. | 10 V: Motor secondary rated current (-10 to +10 V) | 0.01% | - |
| U6-56 (7C3H) | Speed Feedback Compensation Output | common_ V/f OLV CLV CLV/PM TMonly Displays observed speed when n5-07 = 1 or 2. | 10 V: Max output frequency | 0.01% | - |
| U6-80 to U6-99 (7B0 to 7B9, 7F0 to 7F9H) | Option Monitor 1 to 20 | common_ All Modes TMonly Monitors reserved to display data from option cards. | No signal output available | - | - |
Source page
Page 394
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 394 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.4 Control Mode Dependent Parameter Default Values
B.4 Control Mode Dependent Parameter Default Values
The tables below list parameters that depend on the control mode selection (A1-02 for motor 1, E3-01 for motor 2). Changing the control mode initializes these parameters to the values shown here.
A1-02 (Control Mode) Dependent Parameters
Table B.2 A1-02 (Control Mode) Dependent Parameters and Default Values Control Modes (A1-02) No. Name Setting Range Resolution V/f (0) OLV (2) CLV (3) CLV/PM (7) C3-05 Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection 0, 1 - - 1 1 0 C4-02 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time 0 to 60000 1 ms 200<22> 50 - - C5-01 Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 1 0.00 to 300.00 0.01 - - 40.00 3.00 C5-02 Speed Control Loop Integral Time 1 0.000 to 10.000 0.001 s - - 0.500 0.300 C5-03 Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 2 0.00 to 300.00 0.01 - - 20.00 3.00 C5-07 Speed Control Loop Gain Switching Speed 0.0 to 100.0 0.1% - - 0.0 2.0 C5-13 Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 3 0.00 to 300.00 0.01 - - 40.00 3.00 C5-14 Speed Control Loop Integral Time 3 0.000 to 10.000 0.001 s - - 0.500 0.300 C5-19 Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain Time 0.00 to 300.00 0.01 - - 40.00 10.00 during Position Lock E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency <23> 0.1 Hz/1 rpm 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 150 rpm E1-06 Base Frequency 0.0 to 120.0 0.1 Hz/1 rpm 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 150 rpm E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Voltage<9> 0.0 to 255.0 0.1 V <3> 12.5 V - - E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency 0.0 to 120.0 0.1 Hz/1 rpm 0.5 Hz 0.3 Hz 0.0 Hz 0 rpm E1-10 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage<9> 0.0 to 255.0 0.1 V <3> 2.5 V - - F1-01 Encoder 1 Resolution 1 to 60000 1 ppr - 1024 2048 F1-05 Encoder 1 Rotation Direction Selection 0, 1 - - - 0 1 L1-01 Motor Overload Protection Selection 0 to 3, 5 - 1 1 1 5 o1-04 V/f Pattern Setting Units 0, 1 - - - 0 1 o1-22 Mechanical Gear Ratio 0.10 to 50.00 0.01 - - 14.00 1.00 S1-01 Zero Speed Level at Stop 0.0000 to 9.999 0.001% 2.400 1.000 0.200 0.350 S4-04 Light Load Direction Search Speed Reference 0.00 to 20.00 0.01% 5.00 5.00 5.00 10.00 <3> For models CIMR-L20008 and 40005, the default setting is 20.0 for E1-08, and 12.5 for E1-10. For models CIMR-L20011 to 20180, 40006 to 40091, the default setting is 18.6 for E1-08, and 9.7 for E1-10. For models CIMR-L20215 to 20415, 40112 to 40216, the default setting is 16.0 for E1-08, and 8.3 for E1-10. <9> Values shown here are for 200 V class drives. Double the value when using a 400 V class drive. <22> Default setting value varies by drive model (o2-04).The default setting for models CIMR-L20115 to 20415, CIMR-L40112 to 40216 is 1000 ms when using V/f control. <23> Setting range depends on the type of motor being used. An induction motor has a setting range of 10.0 to 200.0 Hz, while a PM motor has a setting range of 4.0 to 200.0 Hz. Motor 2 Control Parameters Table B.3 Motor 2 Control Parameters and Default Values No. Name Setting Range Resolution Control Mode: V/f E3-04 to E3-10 The default settings of these parameters depend on drive capacity. Refer to E3: V/f Pattern for Motor 2 on page180 for details.
394 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Name | Setting Range | Resolution | Control Modes (A1-02) | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| V/f (0) | OLV (2) | CLV (3) | CLV/PM (7) | ||||
| C3-05 | Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection | 0, 1 | - | - | 1 | 1 | 0 |
| C4-02 | Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time | 0 to 60000 | 1 ms | 200<22> | 50 | - | - |
| C5-01 | Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 1 | 0.00 to 300.00 | 0.01 | - | - | 40.00 | 3.00 |
| C5-02 | Speed Control Loop Integral Time 1 | 0.000 to 10.000 | 0.001 s | - | - | 0.500 | 0.300 |
| C5-03 | Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 2 | 0.00 to 300.00 | 0.01 | - | - | 20.00 | 3.00 |
| C5-07 | Speed Control Loop Gain Switching Speed | 0.0 to 100.0 | 0.1% | - | - | 0.0 | 2.0 |
| C5-13 | Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 3 | 0.00 to 300.00 | 0.01 | - | - | 40.00 | 3.00 |
| C5-14 | Speed Control Loop Integral Time 3 | 0.000 to 10.000 | 0.001 s | - | - | 0.500 | 0.300 |
| C5-19 | Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain Time during Position Lock | 0.00 to 300.00 | 0.01 | - | - | 40.00 | 10.00 |
| E1-04 | Maximum Output Frequency | <23> | 0.1 Hz/1 rpm | 50.0 Hz | 50.0 Hz | 50.0 Hz | 150 rpm |
| E1-06 | Base Frequency | 0.0 to 120.0 | 0.1 Hz/1 rpm | 50.0 Hz | 50.0 Hz | 50.0 Hz | 150 rpm |
| E1-08 | Middle Output Frequency Voltage<9> | 0.0 to 255.0 | 0.1 V | <3> | 12.5 V | - | - |
| E1-09 | Minimum Output Frequency | 0.0 to 120.0 | 0.1 Hz/1 rpm | 0.5 Hz | 0.3 Hz | 0.0 Hz | 0 rpm |
| E1-10 | Minimum Output Frequency Voltage<9> | 0.0 to 255.0 | 0.1 V | <3> | 2.5 V | - | - |
| F1-01 | Encoder 1 Resolution | 1 to 60000 | 1 ppr | - | 1024 | 2048 | |
| F1-05 | Encoder 1 Rotation Direction Selection | 0, 1 | - | - | - | 0 | 1 |
| L1-01 | Motor Overload Protection Selection | 0 to 3, 5 | - | 1 | 1 | 1 | 5 |
| o1-04 | V/f Pattern Setting Units | 0, 1 | - | - | - | 0 | 1 |
| o1-22 | Mechanical Gear Ratio | 0.10 to 50.00 | 0.01 | - | - | 14.00 | 1.00 |
| S1-01 | Zero Speed Level at Stop | 0.0000 to 9.999 | 0.001% | 2.400 | 1.000 | 0.200 | 0.350 |
| S4-04 | Light Load Direction Search Speed Reference | 0.00 to 20.00 | 0.01% | 5.00 | 5.00 | 5.00 | 10.00 |
| No. | Name | Setting Range | Resolution | Control Mode: V/f |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| E3-04 to E3-10 | The default settings of these parameters depend on drive capacity. Refer to E3: V/f Pattern for Motor 2 on page180 for details. |
Source page
Page 395
B.5 Defaults by Drive Model Selection (o2-04)
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 395 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 395 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 B.5 Defaults by Drive Model Selection (o2-04) The following tables show parameters and default settings that change with the drive model selection (o2-04). Parameter numbers shown in parenthesis are valid for motor 2. Table B.4 200 V Class Drives Default Settings by Drive Model Selection No. Name Unit Default Settings - Model CIMR-L - 20008 20011 20018 20025 20033 20047 20060 20075 o2-04 Drive Model Selection Hex. 65 66 68 6A 6B 6D 6E 6F E2-11 Motor Rated Output kW 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 C5-17 Motor Inertia kgm2 0.0068 0.0088 0.0158 0.026 0.037 0.053 0.076 0.138 C6-03 Carrier Frequency kHz 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 E2-01 (E4-01) Motor Rated Current A 6.2 8.5 14 19.6 26.6 39.7 53 65.8 E2-02 Motor Rated Slip Hz 2.6 2.9 2.73 1.5 1.3 1.7 1.6 1.67 (E4-02) E2-03 Motor No-Load Current A 2.8 3 4.5 5.1 8 11.2 15.2 15.7 (E4-03) ( E E 2 4 - - 0 0 5 5 ) Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Ω 1.997 1.601 0.771 0.399 0.288 0.23 0.138 0.101 E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance % 18.5 18.4 19.6 18.2 15.5 19.5 17.2 20.1 (E4-06) E2-10 Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation W 53 77 112 172 262 245 272 505 E3-08 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage V 20.0 18.6 18.6 18.6 18.6 18.6 18.6 18.6 E3-10 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage V 12.5 9.7 9.7 9.7 9.7 9.7 9.7 9.7 E5-02 Motor Rated Power kW 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 E5-03 Motor Rated Current A 8 11 14.6 20 29.3 37.9 53.2 65 E5-05 Motor Stator Resistance Ω 1.048 0.645 0.331 0.37 0.223 0.153 0.095 0.069 E5-06 Motor d-Axis Inductance mH 6.96 7.03 4.78 5.39 3.58 3.46 2.46 1.99 E5-07 Motor q-Axis Inductance mH 10.58 9.71 6.52 7.36 4.89 4.96 3.7 2.99 E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 mV/(rad/sec) 220.8 235.3 239.3 254.3 237 270 254.3 256.7 L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level °C 115 125 110 120 125 120 120 125 L8-06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level % 15.0 16.0 14.0 18.0 20.0 22.0 20.0 21.0 L8-35 Installation Method Selection - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n5-02 Motor Acceleration Time s 0.166 0.145 0.154 0.168 0.175 0.265 0.244 0.317 n9-60 A/D Conversion Start Delay μsec 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 No. Name Unit Default Settings - Model CIMR-L - 20085 20115 20145 20180 20215 20283 20346 20415 o2-04 Drive Model Selection Hex. 70 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 E2-11 Motor Rated Output kW 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 C5-17 Motor Inertia kgm2 0.165 0.220 0.273 0.333 0.49 0.90 1.10 1.90 C6-03 Carrier Frequency kHz 8 8 5 5 5 5 2 2 E2-01 (E4-01) Motor Rated Current A 77.2 105 131 160 190 260 260 260 E2-02 Motor Rated Slip Hz 1.7 1.8 1.33 1.6 1.43 1.39 1.39 1.39 (E4-02) E2-03 Motor No-Load Current A 18.5 21.9 38.2 44 45.6 72 72 72 (E4-03) ( E E 2 4 - - 0 0 5 5 ) Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Ω 0.079 0.064 0.039 0.03 0.022 0.023 0.023 0.023 E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance % 19.5 20.8 18.8 20.2 20.5 20 20 20 (E4-06) E2-10 Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation W 538 699 823 852 960 1200 1200 1200 E3-08 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage V 18.6 18.6 18.6 18.6 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 E3-10 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage V 9.7 9.7 9.7 9.7 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 E5-02 Motor Rated Power kW 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 E5-03 Motor Rated Current A 76.4 103.5 133.1 149.4 181.6 181.6 181.6 181.6 E5-05 Motor Stator Resistance Ω 0.054 0.041 0.027 0.022 0.016 0.016 0.016 0.016 E5-06 Motor d-Axis Inductance mH 1.7 1.29 0.91 0.9 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 E5-07 Motor q-Axis Inductance mH 2.55 2 1.41 1.39 1.11 1.11 1.11 1.11 E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 mV/(rad/sec) 261.1 260.4 245.1 276 0.317 0.533 0.592 0.646 L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level °C 130 130 130 125 115 120 120 120 B L8-06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level % 21.0 17.0 27.0 28.0 17 16 24 22 L8-35 Installation Method Selection - 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 n5-02 Motor Acceleration Time s 0.355 0.323 0.32 0.387 0.317 0.533 0.592 0.646 n9-60 A/D Conversion Start Delay μsec 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0
| No. | Name | Unit | Default Settings | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| - | Model CIMR-L | - | 20008 | 20011 | 20018 | 20025 | 20033 | 20047 | 20060 | 20075 |
| o2-04 | Drive Model Selection | Hex. | 65 | 66 | 68 | 6A | 6B | 6D | 6E | 6F |
| E2-11 | Motor Rated Output | kW | 1.5 | 2.2 | 4.0 | 5.5 | 7.5 | 11 | 15 | 18.5 |
| C5-17 | Motor Inertia | kgm2 | 0.0068 | 0.0088 | 0.0158 | 0.026 | 0.037 | 0.053 | 0.076 | 0.138 |
| C6-03 | Carrier Frequency | kHz | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 |
| E2-01 (E4-01) | Motor Rated Current | A | 6.2 | 8.5 | 14 | 19.6 | 26.6 | 39.7 | 53 | 65.8 |
| E2-02 (E4-02) | Motor Rated Slip | Hz | 2.6 | 2.9 | 2.73 | 1.5 | 1.3 | 1.7 | 1.6 | 1.67 |
| E2-03 (E4-03) | Motor No-Load Current | A | 2.8 | 3 | 4.5 | 5.1 | 8 | 11.2 | 15.2 | 15.7 |
| E2-05 (E4-05) | Motor Line-to-Line Resistance | Ω | 1.997 | 1.601 | 0.771 | 0.399 | 0.288 | 0.23 | 0.138 | 0.101 |
| E2-06 (E4-06) | Motor Leakage Inductance | % | 18.5 | 18.4 | 19.6 | 18.2 | 15.5 | 19.5 | 17.2 | 20.1 |
| E2-10 | Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation | W | 53 | 77 | 112 | 172 | 262 | 245 | 272 | 505 |
| E3-08 | Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage | V | 20.0 | 18.6 | 18.6 | 18.6 | 18.6 | 18.6 | 18.6 | 18.6 |
| E3-10 | Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage | V | 12.5 | 9.7 | 9.7 | 9.7 | 9.7 | 9.7 | 9.7 | 9.7 |
| E5-02 | Motor Rated Power | kW | 1.5 | 2.2 | 4.0 | 5.5 | 7.5 | 11 | 15 | 18.5 |
| E5-03 | Motor Rated Current | A | 8 | 11 | 14.6 | 20 | 29.3 | 37.9 | 53.2 | 65 |
| E5-05 | Motor Stator Resistance | Ω | 1.048 | 0.645 | 0.331 | 0.37 | 0.223 | 0.153 | 0.095 | 0.069 |
| E5-06 | Motor d-Axis Inductance | mH | 6.96 | 7.03 | 4.78 | 5.39 | 3.58 | 3.46 | 2.46 | 1.99 |
| E5-07 | Motor q-Axis Inductance | mH | 10.58 | 9.71 | 6.52 | 7.36 | 4.89 | 4.96 | 3.7 | 2.99 |
| E5-09 | Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 | mV/(rad/sec) | 220.8 | 235.3 | 239.3 | 254.3 | 237 | 270 | 254.3 | 256.7 |
| L8-02 | Overheat Alarm Level | °C | 115 | 125 | 110 | 120 | 125 | 120 | 120 | 125 |
| L8-06 | Input Phase Loss Detection Level | % | 15.0 | 16.0 | 14.0 | 18.0 | 20.0 | 22.0 | 20.0 | 21.0 |
| L8-35 | Installation Method Selection | - | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
| n5-02 | Motor Acceleration Time | s | 0.166 | 0.145 | 0.154 | 0.168 | 0.175 | 0.265 | 0.244 | 0.317 |
| n9-60 | A/D Conversion Start Delay | μsec | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 |
| No. | Name | Unit | Default Settings | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| - | Model CIMR-L | - | 20085 | 20115 | 20145 | 20180 | 20215 | 20283 | 20346 | 20415 |
| o2-04 | Drive Model Selection | Hex. | 70 | 72 | 73 | 74 | 75 | 76 | 77 | 78 |
| E2-11 | Motor Rated Output | kW | 22 | 30 | 37 | 45 | 55 | 75 | 90 | 110 |
| C5-17 | Motor Inertia | kgm2 | 0.165 | 0.220 | 0.273 | 0.333 | 0.49 | 0.90 | 1.10 | 1.90 |
| C6-03 | Carrier Frequency | kHz | 8 | 8 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 2 | 2 |
| E2-01 (E4-01) | Motor Rated Current | A | 77.2 | 105 | 131 | 160 | 190 | 260 | 260 | 260 |
| E2-02 (E4-02) | Motor Rated Slip | Hz | 1.7 | 1.8 | 1.33 | 1.6 | 1.43 | 1.39 | 1.39 | 1.39 |
| E2-03 (E4-03) | Motor No-Load Current | A | 18.5 | 21.9 | 38.2 | 44 | 45.6 | 72 | 72 | 72 |
| E2-05 (E4-05) | Motor Line-to-Line Resistance | Ω | 0.079 | 0.064 | 0.039 | 0.03 | 0.022 | 0.023 | 0.023 | 0.023 |
| E2-06 (E4-06) | Motor Leakage Inductance | % | 19.5 | 20.8 | 18.8 | 20.2 | 20.5 | 20 | 20 | 20 |
| E2-10 | Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation | W | 538 | 699 | 823 | 852 | 960 | 1200 | 1200 | 1200 |
| E3-08 | Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage | V | 18.6 | 18.6 | 18.6 | 18.6 | 16.0 | 16.0 | 16.0 | 16.0 |
| E3-10 | Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage | V | 9.7 | 9.7 | 9.7 | 9.7 | 8.3 | 8.3 | 8.3 | 8.3 |
| E5-02 | Motor Rated Power | kW | 22 | 30 | 37 | 45 | 55 | 75 | 90 | 110 |
| E5-03 | Motor Rated Current | A | 76.4 | 103.5 | 133.1 | 149.4 | 181.6 | 181.6 | 181.6 | 181.6 |
| E5-05 | Motor Stator Resistance | Ω | 0.054 | 0.041 | 0.027 | 0.022 | 0.016 | 0.016 | 0.016 | 0.016 |
| E5-06 | Motor d-Axis Inductance | mH | 1.7 | 1.29 | 0.91 | 0.9 | 0.72 | 0.72 | 0.72 | 0.72 |
| E5-07 | Motor q-Axis Inductance | mH | 2.55 | 2 | 1.41 | 1.39 | 1.11 | 1.11 | 1.11 | 1.11 |
| E5-09 | Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 | mV/(rad/sec) | 261.1 | 260.4 | 245.1 | 276 | 0.317 | 0.533 | 0.592 | 0.646 |
| L8-02 | Overheat Alarm Level | °C | 130 | 130 | 130 | 125 | 115 | 120 | 120 | 120 |
| L8-06 | Input Phase Loss Detection Level | % | 21.0 | 17.0 | 27.0 | 28.0 | 17 | 16 | 24 | 22 |
| L8-35 | Installation Method Selection | - | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 |
| n5-02 | Motor Acceleration Time | s | 0.355 | 0.323 | 0.32 | 0.387 | 0.317 | 0.533 | 0.592 | 0.646 |
| n9-60 | A/D Conversion Start Delay | μsec | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 |
Source page
Page 396
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 396 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.5 Defaults by Drive Model Selection (o2-04)
Table B.5 400 V Class Drives Default Settings by Drive Capacity No. Name Unit Default Settings - Model CIMR-L - 40005 40006 40009 40015 40018 40024 40031 40039 o2-04 Drive Model Selection Hex. 94 95 97 99 9A 9C 9D 9E E2-11 Motor Rated Output kW 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 C5-17 Motor Inertia kgm2 0.0068 0.0088 0.0158 0.026 0.037 0.053 0.076 0.138 C6-03 Carrier Frequency kHz 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 E2-01 (E4-01) Motor Rated Current A 3.1 4.2 7 9.8 13.3 19.9 26.5 32.9 E2-02 Motor Rated Slip Hz 2.5 3 2.7 1.5 1.3 1.7 1.6 1.67 (E4-02) E2-03 Motor No-Load Current A 1.4 1.5 2.3 2.6 4 5.6 7.6 7.8 (E4-03) ( E E 2 4 - - 0 0 5 5 ) Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Ω 1.01 6.495 3.333 1.595 1.152 0.922 0.55 0.403 E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance % 18.3 18.7 19.3 18.2 15.5 19.6 17.2 20.1 (E4-06) E2-10 Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation W 53 77 130 193 263 385 440 508 E3-08 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage V 40.0 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 E3-10 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage V 25.0 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 E5-02 Motor Rated Power kW 1.5 2.2 4.0 5.5 7.5 11 15 18.5 E5-03 Motor Rated Current A 4.8 5.5 7.3 10 14.6 19 26.6 32.5 E5-05 Motor Stator Resistance Ω 4.192 2.658 1.326 1.479 0.892 0.613 0.378 0.276 E5-06 Motor d-Axis Inductance mH 27.83 28.12 19.11 21.58 14.33 13.84 9.85 7.95 E5-07 Motor q-Axis Inductance mH 42.32 38.85 26.08 29.44 19.56 19.83 14.79 11.94 E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 mV/(rad/sec) 441.7 470.6 478.6 508.4 473.9 540 508.4 513.7 L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level °C 110 110 110 110 115 120 120 115 L8-06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level % 14.0 14.0 14.0 26.0 26.0 21.0 22.0 26.0 L8-35 Installation Method Selection - 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 n5-02 Motor Acceleration Time s 0.166 0.145 0.154 0.168 0.175 0.265 0.244 0.317 n9-60 A/D Conversion Start Delay μsec 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 114.0 No. Name Unit Default Settings - Model CIMR-L - 40045 40060 40075 40091 40112 40150 40180 40216 o2-04 Drive Model Selection Hex. 9F A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 E2-11 Motor Rated Output kW 22 30 37 45 55 75 90 110 C5-17 Motor Inertia kgm2 0.165 0.220 0.273 0.333 0.49 0.90 1.10 1.90 C6-03 Carrier Frequency kHz 8 8 5 5 5 5 2 2 E2-01 (E4-01) Motor Rated Current A 38.6 52.3 65.6 79.7 95 130 156 190 E2-02 Motor Rated Slip Hz 1.7 1.8 1.33 1.6 1.46 1.39 1.4 1.4 (E4-02) E2-03 Motor No-Load Current A 9.2 10.9 19.1 22 24 36 40 49 (E4-03) ( E E 2 4 - - 0 0 5 5 ) Motor Line-to-Line Resistance Ω 0.316 0.269 0.155 0.122 0.088 0.092 0.056 0.046 E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance % 23.5 20.7 18.8 19.9 20 20 20 20 (E4-06) E2-10 Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation W 586 750 925 1125 1260 1600 1760 2150 E3-08 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage V 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 32.0 32.0 32.0 32.0 E3-10 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage V 19.4 19.4 19.4 19.4 16.6 16.6 16.6 16.6 E5-02 Motor Rated Power kW 22 30 37 45 55 75 75 75 E5-03 Motor Rated Current A 38.2 51.8 66.6 74.7 90.8 130.0 130 130 E5-05 Motor Stator Resistance Ω 0.217 0.165 0.107 0.087 0.064 0.022 0.022 0.022 E5-06 Motor d-Axis Inductance mH 6.8 5.15 3.62 3.59 2.87 1.80 1.80 1.80 E5-07 Motor q-Axis Inductance mH 10.22 8 5.63 5.55 4.44 2.80 2.80 2.80 E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 mV/(rad/sec) 522.3 520.8 490.2 552 554.4 1280.0 1280.0 1280.0 L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level °C 120 120 110 120 130 130 120 120 L8-06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level % 18.0 17.0 18.0 20.0 20.0 29.0 17 25 L8-35 Installation Method Selection - 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 n5-02 Motor Acceleration Time s 0.355 0.323 0.32 0.387 0.317 0.533 0.592 0.646 n9-60 A/D Conversion Start Delay μsec 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 14.0 396 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Name | Unit | Default Settings | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| - | Model CIMR-L | - | 40005 | 40006 | 40009 | 40015 | 40018 | 40024 | 40031 | 40039 |
| o2-04 | Drive Model Selection | Hex. | 94 | 95 | 97 | 99 | 9A | 9C | 9D | 9E |
| E2-11 | Motor Rated Output | kW | 1.5 | 2.2 | 4.0 | 5.5 | 7.5 | 11 | 15 | 18.5 |
| C5-17 | Motor Inertia | kgm2 | 0.0068 | 0.0088 | 0.0158 | 0.026 | 0.037 | 0.053 | 0.076 | 0.138 |
| C6-03 | Carrier Frequency | kHz | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 |
| E2-01 (E4-01) | Motor Rated Current | A | 3.1 | 4.2 | 7 | 9.8 | 13.3 | 19.9 | 26.5 | 32.9 |
| E2-02 (E4-02) | Motor Rated Slip | Hz | 2.5 | 3 | 2.7 | 1.5 | 1.3 | 1.7 | 1.6 | 1.67 |
| E2-03 (E4-03) | Motor No-Load Current | A | 1.4 | 1.5 | 2.3 | 2.6 | 4 | 5.6 | 7.6 | 7.8 |
| E2-05 (E4-05) | Motor Line-to-Line Resistance | Ω | 1.01 | 6.495 | 3.333 | 1.595 | 1.152 | 0.922 | 0.55 | 0.403 |
| E2-06 (E4-06) | Motor Leakage Inductance | % | 18.3 | 18.7 | 19.3 | 18.2 | 15.5 | 19.6 | 17.2 | 20.1 |
| E2-10 | Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation | W | 53 | 77 | 130 | 193 | 263 | 385 | 440 | 508 |
| E3-08 | Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage | V | 40.0 | 37.2 | 37.2 | 37.2 | 37.2 | 37.2 | 37.2 | 37.2 |
| E3-10 | Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage | V | 25.0 | 19.4 | 19.4 | 19.4 | 19.4 | 19.4 | 19.4 | 19.4 |
| E5-02 | Motor Rated Power | kW | 1.5 | 2.2 | 4.0 | 5.5 | 7.5 | 11 | 15 | 18.5 |
| E5-03 | Motor Rated Current | A | 4.8 | 5.5 | 7.3 | 10 | 14.6 | 19 | 26.6 | 32.5 |
| E5-05 | Motor Stator Resistance | Ω | 4.192 | 2.658 | 1.326 | 1.479 | 0.892 | 0.613 | 0.378 | 0.276 |
| E5-06 | Motor d-Axis Inductance | mH | 27.83 | 28.12 | 19.11 | 21.58 | 14.33 | 13.84 | 9.85 | 7.95 |
| E5-07 | Motor q-Axis Inductance | mH | 42.32 | 38.85 | 26.08 | 29.44 | 19.56 | 19.83 | 14.79 | 11.94 |
| E5-09 | Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 | mV/(rad/sec) | 441.7 | 470.6 | 478.6 | 508.4 | 473.9 | 540 | 508.4 | 513.7 |
| L8-02 | Overheat Alarm Level | °C | 110 | 110 | 110 | 110 | 115 | 120 | 120 | 115 |
| L8-06 | Input Phase Loss Detection Level | % | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 26.0 | 26.0 | 21.0 | 22.0 | 26.0 |
| L8-35 | Installation Method Selection | - | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
| n5-02 | Motor Acceleration Time | s | 0.166 | 0.145 | 0.154 | 0.168 | 0.175 | 0.265 | 0.244 | 0.317 |
| n9-60 | A/D Conversion Start Delay | μsec | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 114.0 |
| No. | Name | Unit | Default Settings | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| - | Model CIMR-L | - | 40045 | 40060 | 40075 | 40091 | 40112 | 40150 | 40180 | 40216 |
| o2-04 | Drive Model Selection | Hex. | 9F | A1 | A2 | A3 | A4 | A5 | A6 | A7 |
| E2-11 | Motor Rated Output | kW | 22 | 30 | 37 | 45 | 55 | 75 | 90 | 110 |
| C5-17 | Motor Inertia | kgm2 | 0.165 | 0.220 | 0.273 | 0.333 | 0.49 | 0.90 | 1.10 | 1.90 |
| C6-03 | Carrier Frequency | kHz | 8 | 8 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 5 | 2 | 2 |
| E2-01 (E4-01) | Motor Rated Current | A | 38.6 | 52.3 | 65.6 | 79.7 | 95 | 130 | 156 | 190 |
| E2-02 (E4-02) | Motor Rated Slip | Hz | 1.7 | 1.8 | 1.33 | 1.6 | 1.46 | 1.39 | 1.4 | 1.4 |
| E2-03 (E4-03) | Motor No-Load Current | A | 9.2 | 10.9 | 19.1 | 22 | 24 | 36 | 40 | 49 |
| E2-05 (E4-05) | Motor Line-to-Line Resistance | Ω | 0.316 | 0.269 | 0.155 | 0.122 | 0.088 | 0.092 | 0.056 | 0.046 |
| E2-06 (E4-06) | Motor Leakage Inductance | % | 23.5 | 20.7 | 18.8 | 19.9 | 20 | 20 | 20 | 20 |
| E2-10 | Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation | W | 586 | 750 | 925 | 1125 | 1260 | 1600 | 1760 | 2150 |
| E3-08 | Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage | V | 37.2 | 37.2 | 37.2 | 37.2 | 32.0 | 32.0 | 32.0 | 32.0 |
| E3-10 | Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage | V | 19.4 | 19.4 | 19.4 | 19.4 | 16.6 | 16.6 | 16.6 | 16.6 |
| E5-02 | Motor Rated Power | kW | 22 | 30 | 37 | 45 | 55 | 75 | 75 | 75 |
| E5-03 | Motor Rated Current | A | 38.2 | 51.8 | 66.6 | 74.7 | 90.8 | 130.0 | 130 | 130 |
| E5-05 | Motor Stator Resistance | Ω | 0.217 | 0.165 | 0.107 | 0.087 | 0.064 | 0.022 | 0.022 | 0.022 |
| E5-06 | Motor d-Axis Inductance | mH | 6.8 | 5.15 | 3.62 | 3.59 | 2.87 | 1.80 | 1.80 | 1.80 |
| E5-07 | Motor q-Axis Inductance | mH | 10.22 | 8 | 5.63 | 5.55 | 4.44 | 2.80 | 2.80 | 2.80 |
| E5-09 | Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 | mV/(rad/sec) | 522.3 | 520.8 | 490.2 | 552 | 554.4 | 1280.0 | 1280.0 | 1280.0 |
| L8-02 | Overheat Alarm Level | °C | 120 | 120 | 110 | 120 | 130 | 130 | 120 | 120 |
| L8-06 | Input Phase Loss Detection Level | % | 18.0 | 17.0 | 18.0 | 20.0 | 20.0 | 29.0 | 17 | 25 |
| L8-35 | Installation Method Selection | - | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 0 | 0 |
| n5-02 | Motor Acceleration Time | s | 0.355 | 0.323 | 0.32 | 0.387 | 0.317 | 0.533 | 0.592 | 0.646 |
| n9-60 | A/D Conversion Start Delay | μsec | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 | 14.0 |
Source page
Page 397
B.6 Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03)
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 397 tsiL retemaraP SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 397 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 B.6 Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03) Table B.6 shows parameters, default settings, and setting ranges that change according to parameter o1-03, Display Unit Selection. Table B.6 Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03) o1-03 (Digital Operator Display Unit Selection) No. Name (0.01 0 Hz) (0.0 1 1%) (r/m 2 in) (Use 3 r-set) (E un le i v 4 ts a t 1 o ) r (E un le i v t 5 s a t 2 o ) r (E un le i v 6 ts a t 3 o ) r Default C1-01 Acceleration Ramp 1 C1-02 Deceleration Ramp 1 C1-03 Acceleration Ramp 2 C1-04 Deceleration Ramp 2 C C 1 1 - - 0 0 5 6 A D c e c c e e l l e e r r a a t t i i o o n n R R a a m m p p 3 3 0.00 to 600.00 s 0.00 m t / o s 2 <1> 0.00 ft / t s o 2 <1> 1.50 s C1-07 Acceleration Ramp 4 C1-08 Deceleration Ramp 4 C1-09 Emergency Stop Time C1-15 Inspection Run Deceleration Ramp 0.00 s C2-01 Jerk at Accel Start C2-02 Jerk at Accel End C2-03 Jerk at Decel Start 0.00 to 10.00 s 0.00 m t / o s 3 <1> 0.00 f t t / o s3 <1> 0.50 s C2-04 Jerk at Decel End C2-05 Jerk below leveling speed C1-11 Accel/Decel Switching Speed 0.0% d1-01 Speed Reference 1 d1-02 Speed Reference 2 d1-03 Speed Reference 3 d1-04 Speed Reference 4 0.00% d1-05 Speed Reference 5 d1-06 Speed Reference 6 d1-07 Speed Reference 7 d1-08 Speed Reference 8 [E 0 1 . - 0 0 0 4 ] t o Hz 1 0 0 . 0 0 . 0 0 0 to % 0.0 r 0 / m to i n <2> User define 0.00 to<1> m/s 0.0 f 0 t/ m to in <1> d1-19 Nominal Speed 100.0% d1-20 Intermediate Speed 1 d1-21 Intermediate Speed 2 0.00% d1-22 Intermediate Speed 3 d1-23 Releveling Speed d1-24 Inspection Operation Speed 50.00% d1-25 Rescue Operation Speed 10.00% d1-26 Leveling Speed 8.00% <1> Automatically calculated according to the values set to o1-20, o1-21, o1-22, and E2-/E5- parameters. <2> Automatically calculated according to the values set to the E2-/E5- parameters. B
| No. | Name | o1-03 (Digital Operator Display Unit Selection) | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column | Default |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0 (0.01 Hz) | 1 (0.01%) | 2 (r/min) | 3 (User-set) | 4 (Elevator units 1) | 5 (Elevator units 2) | 6 (Elevator units 3) | |||
| C1-01 | Acceleration Ramp 1 | 0.00 to 600.00 s | 0.00 to <1> m/s2 | 0.00 to<1> ft/s2 | 1.50 s | ||||
| C1-02 | Deceleration Ramp 1 | ||||||||
| C1-03 | Acceleration Ramp 2 | ||||||||
| C1-04 | Deceleration Ramp 2 | ||||||||
| C1-05 | Acceleration Ramp 3 | ||||||||
| C1-06 | Deceleration Ramp 3 | ||||||||
| C1-07 | Acceleration Ramp 4 | ||||||||
| C1-08 | Deceleration Ramp 4 | ||||||||
| C1-09 | Emergency Stop Time | ||||||||
| C1-15 | Inspection Run Deceleration Ramp | 0.00 s | |||||||
| C2-01 | Jerk at Accel Start | 0.00 to 10.00 s | 0.00 to <1> m/s3 | 0.00 to <1> ft/s3 | 0.50 s | ||||
| C2-02 | Jerk at Accel End | ||||||||
| C2-03 | Jerk at Decel Start | ||||||||
| C2-04 | Jerk at Decel End | ||||||||
| C2-05 | Jerk below leveling speed | ||||||||
| C1-11 | Accel/Decel Switching Speed | 0.00 to [E1-04] Hz | 0.00 to 100.00% | 0.00 to <2> r/min | User define | 0.00 to<1> m/s | 0.00 to<1> ft/min | 0.0% | |
| d1-01 | Speed Reference 1 | 0.00% | |||||||
| d1-02 | Speed Reference 2 | ||||||||
| d1-03 | Speed Reference 3 | ||||||||
| d1-04 | Speed Reference 4 | ||||||||
| d1-05 | Speed Reference 5 | ||||||||
| d1-06 | Speed Reference 6 | ||||||||
| d1-07 | Speed Reference 7 | ||||||||
| d1-08 | Speed Reference 8 | ||||||||
| d1-19 | Nominal Speed | 100.0% | |||||||
| d1-20 | Intermediate Speed 1 | 0.00% | |||||||
| d1-21 | Intermediate Speed 2 | ||||||||
| d1-22 | Intermediate Speed 3 | ||||||||
| d1-23 | Releveling Speed | ||||||||
| d1-24 | Inspection Operation Speed | 50.00% | |||||||
| d1-25 | Rescue Operation Speed | 10.00% | |||||||
| d1-26 | Leveling Speed | 8.00% |
Source page
Page 398
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 398 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
B.6 Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection (o1-03)
398 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 399
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 399 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Appendix: C
MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications
C.1 MEMOBUS/MODBUS CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 C.2 COMMUNICATION SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
C.3 CONNECTING TO A NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 C.4 MEMOBUS/MODBUS SETUP PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 C.5 DRIVE OPERATIONS BY MEMOBUS/MODBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 C.6 COMMUNICATIONS TIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 C.7 MESSAGE FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 C.8 MESSAGE EXAMPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 C.9 MEMOBUS/MODBUS DATA TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 C.10 ENTER COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 C.11 COMMUNICATION ERRORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 C.12 SELF-DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 399
Source page
Page 400
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 400 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
C.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Configuration
C.1 MEMOBUS/Modbus Configuration
Drives can be controlled from a PLC or other master device via serial communications using the MEMOBUS/Modbus protocol. MEMOBUS/Modbus communications can be configured using one master (PLC) and up to 255 slaves. The drive has slave functionality only, meaning that serial communication is normally initiated from the master and responded to by the slaves.
The master communicates to the specified slave drive. The address or node for each slave must be set beforehand so that the master can communicate with the slave at that address. A slave that receives a command from the master will perform the specified function and then send a response back to the master. FigureC.1 Master (PLC or other)
Slave (Drive)
YEG
Figure C.1 Connecting Multiple Drives to a PLC
400 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 401
C.2 Communication Specifications
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 401 subdoM/SUBOMEM snoitacinummoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 401 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 C.2 Communication Specifications MEMOBUS/Modbus specifications appear in the following table: Item Specifications Interface RS-422, RS-485 Communications Cycle Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization) Communication Speeds Available 1.2; 2.4; 4.8; 9.6; 19.2; 38.4; 57.6; 76.8; 115.2 kbps Data length 8 bit (fixed) Communication Parameters Parity Select even, odd, or none Stop bit 1 bit (fixed) Protocol MEMOBUS/Modbus (using RTU mode only) Max Number of Slaves 255 drives (RS-485) C
| Item | Specifications | Column |
|---|---|---|
| Interface | RS-422, RS-485 | |
| Communications Cycle | Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization) | |
| Communication Parameters | Communication Speeds Available | 1.2; 2.4; 4.8; 9.6; 19.2; 38.4; 57.6; 76.8; 115.2 kbps |
| Data length | 8 bit (fixed) | |
| Parity | Select even, odd, or none | |
| Stop bit | 1 bit (fixed) | |
| Protocol | MEMOBUS/Modbus (using RTU mode only) | |
| Max Number of Slaves | 255 drives (RS-485) |
Source page
Page 402
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 402 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
C.3 Connecting to a Network
C.3 Connecting to a Network
This section explains how to connect the drive to a MEMOBUS/Modbus network and the network termination required for a connection.
Network Cable Connection
Follow the instructions below to connect the drive to a MEMOBUS/Modbus network. 1. With the power shut off, connect the communications cable to the drive and the master. Use terminals R+/S+ and R-/S- for MEMOBUS/Modbus. FigureC.2
YEG IG R+ R- S+ S-
S- Send (-) S+ Send (+) R- Receive (-) P M R+ Receive (+) IG Shield Ground Figure C.2 Serial Communications Cable Connection Terminals Note: Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables. Use shielded cables for the communications cables, and properly shielded clamps to prevent problems with noise. When using RS-485 communications, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R- as shown in the diagram below. 2. Check or set the termination resistor selection at all slaves. Use the description in Network Termination on page 403 for slaves that are L1000A drives. 3. Switch the power on. 4. Set the parameters needed for serial communications (H5-01 through H5-11) using the digital operator. 5. Shut the power off and wait until the display on the digital operator goes out completely. 6. Turn the power back on. 7. The drive is now ready to begin communicating with the master.
402 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 403
C.3 Connecting to a Network
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 403 subdoM/SUBOMEM snoitacinummoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 403 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Wiring Diagram for Multiple Connection Figure C.3 and Figure C.4 explain the wiring diagrams for multiple connections using MEMOBUS/Modbus communication. RS-485 Interface FigureC.3 R- S- Drive R+ S+ PLC S- R- S2 S+ R+ IG IG OFF S- Drive S+ R- S2 R+ IG OFF S- Drive S+ R- S2 common_ R+ ON IG TMonly Figure C.3 RS-485 Interface Note: 1. Turn on the DIP switch on the drive that is located at the end of the network. All other slave devices must have this DIP switch set to the OFF position. 2. Set H5-07 to 1 when using the RS-485 interface. RS-422 Interface FigureC.4 R- S- Drive R+ S+ PLC S- R- S2 S+ R+ IG IG OFF S- Drive S+ R- S2 R+ IG OFF S- Drive S+ R- S2 common_ R+ ON IG TMonly Figure C.4 RS-422 Interface Note: 1. Turn on the DIP switch on the drive that is located at the end of the network. All other slave devices must have this DIP switch set to the OFF position. 2. Set H5-07 to 0 when using the RS-485 interface. Set H5-07 to 1 when using the RS-422 interface in multi-drop circuit. Set H5-07 to 0 when using the RS-422 interface in point-to-point circuit. Network Termination The two ends of the MEMOBUS/Modbus network line have to be terminated. The drive has a built in termination resistor that can be enabled or disabled using DIP switch S2. If a drive is located at the end of a network line, enable the termination resistor by setting DIP switch S2 to the ON position. Disable the termination resistor on all slaves that are not located at the network line end. Refer to MEMOBUS/Modbus Termination on page 74 for details on setting S2. C
| R+ S- |
|---|
| S+ IG |
| Column | Column | S+ R- |
|---|---|---|
| R+ IG | ||
| S+ | ||
| R- R+ | ||
| IG |
| S- |
|---|
| S+ R- |
| R+ IG |
| Column | Column | Column | S- Drive S+ R- S2 R+ IG OFF |
|---|---|---|---|
| R- R+ IG |
| S- |
|---|
| S+ |
| R- |
| R+ |
| IG |
| S- |
|---|
| S+ |
| R- |
| R+ |
| IG |
Source page
Page 404
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 404 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
C.4 MEMOBUS/Modbus Setup Parameters
C.4 MEMOBUS/Modbus Setup Parameters
MEMOBUS/Modbus Serial Communication This section describes parameters necessary to set up MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
H5-01: Drive Slave Address Sets the drive slave address used for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications.
Note: Cycle the power after changing this parameter to enable the new setting.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H5-01 Drive Slave Address 0 to FFH<1> 1FH <1> If the address is set to 0, no response will be provided during communications. Each slave drive must be assigned a unique slave address for serial communications to work. Setting H5-01 to any value besides 0 assigns the drive its address in the network. Slave addresses do not need to be assigned in sequential order, but no two drives may share the same address.
H5-02: Communication Speed Selection Sets the MEMOBUS/Modbus communications speed.
Note: Cycle the power after changing this parameter to enable the new setting.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H5-02 Communication Speed Selection 0 to 5 3
H5-02 Communication Speed H5-02 Communication Speed 0 1200 bps 5 38400 bps 1 2400 bps 6 57600 bps 2 4800 bps 7 76800 bps 3 9600 bps 8 115200 bps 4 19200 bps - - H5-03: Communication Parity Selection Sets the parity used for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. Note: Cycle the power after changing this parameter to enable the new setting.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H5-03 Communication Parity Selection 0 to 2 0 Setting 0: No parity Setting 1: Even parity Setting 2: Odd parity H5-04: Stopping Method after Communication Error
Selects the stopping method after a communications error (CE) has occurred.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H5-04 Stopping Method after Communication Error 0 to 3 3
Setting 0: Ramp to stop (uses the deceleration ramp currently enabled) Setting 1: Coast to stop Setting 2: Emergency Stop Setting 3: Alarm only (continue operation)
404 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H5-01 | Drive Slave Address | 0 to FFH<1> | 1FH |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H5-02 | Communication Speed Selection | 0 to 5 | 3 |
| H5-02 | Communication Speed | H5-02 | Communication Speed |
|---|---|---|---|
| 0 | 1200 bps | 5 | 38400 bps |
| 1 | 2400 bps | 6 | 57600 bps |
| 2 | 4800 bps | 7 | 76800 bps |
| 3 | 9600 bps | 8 | 115200 bps |
| 4 | 19200 bps | - | - |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H5-03 | Communication Parity Selection | 0 to 2 | 0 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H5-04 | Stopping Method after Communication Error | 0 to 3 | 3 |
Source page
Page 405
C.4 MEMOBUS/Modbus Setup Parameters
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 405 subdoM/SUBOMEM snoitacinummoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 405 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 H5-05: Communication Fault Detection Selection Enables or disabled the communication error (CE) detection for MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H5-05 Communication Fault Detection Selection 0 or 1 1 Setting 0: Disabled No communication error detection. The drive continues operation. Setting 1: Enabled If the drive does not receive data from the master for longer than the time set to H5-09, then a CE fault will be triggered and the drive will operate as determined by parameter H5-04. H5-06: Drive Transmit Wait Time Sets the time the drive waits after receiving data from a master before responding. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H5-06 Drive Transmit Wait Time 5 to 65 ms 5 ms FigureC.5 PLC→Drive Drive→PLC PLC→Drive Command message Response message Command message Time common_ TMonly 24 bit length H5-06 setting Figure C.5 Drive Transmit Wait Time Setting H5-07: RTS Control Selection Enables or disables RTS control. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H5-07 RTS Control Selection 0 or 1 1 Setting 0: Disabled. RTS is always on. Use this setting when using RS-485 signals for communications or when using RS-422 signals for point-to-point communications. Setting 1: Enabled. RTS switches while sending. Use this setting when using RS-422 signals for multi-drop communications. H5-09: Communication Fault Detection Time Sets the time the communications must be lost before the drive triggers a CE fault. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H5-09 Communication Fault Detection Time 0.0 to 10.0 s 2.0 s H5-10: Unit Selection for MEMOBUS/Modbus Register 0025H Sets the unit for the output voltage monitor value in MEMOBUS/Modbus register 0025H. No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H5-10 Unit Selection for MEMOBUS/Modbus Register 0025H 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: 0.1 V units Setting 1: 1 V units C
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H5-05 | Communication Fault Detection Selection | 0 or 1 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H5-06 | Drive Transmit Wait Time | 5 to 65 ms | 5 ms |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H5-07 | RTS Control Selection | 0 or 1 | 1 |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H5-09 | Communication Fault Detection Time | 0.0 to 10.0 s | 2.0 s |
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H5-10 | Unit Selection for MEMOBUS/Modbus Register 0025H | 0 or 1 | 0 |
Source page
Page 406
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 406 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
C.4 MEMOBUS/Modbus Setup Parameters
H5-11: Communications Enter Function Selection
Selects whether an Enter command is necessary is needed to change parameter values via MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. Refer to Enter Command on page 423.
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default H5-11 Communications Enter Function Selection 0 or 1 0 Setting 0: Enter command necessary Parameter changes become effective after an Enter command. An Enter command must only be sent after the last parameter change, not for each single parameter.
Setting 1: Enter command not necessary Parameter value changes become effective immediately without the need to send an Enter command.
406 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Parameter Name | Setting Range | Default |
|---|---|---|---|
| H5-11 | Communications Enter Function Selection | 0 or 1 | 0 |
Source page
Page 407
C.5 Drive Operations by MEMOBUS/Modbus
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 407 subdoM/SUBOMEM snoitacinummoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 407 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 C.5 Drive Operations by MEMOBUS/Modbus The drive operations that can be performed by MEMOBUS/Modbus communication depend on drive parameter settings. This section explains the functions that can be used and related parameter settings. Observing the Drive Operation A PLC can perform the following actions with MEMOBUS/Modbus communications at any time regardless of parameter settings (except H5-). • Observe drive status and drive control terminal status from a PLC. • Read and write parameters. • Set and reset faults. • Set multi-function inputs. Note: Input settings from the input terminals S and from MEMOBUS/Modbus communications are both linked by a logical OR operation. Controlling the Drive Select an external reference and adjust the parameters in Table C.1 accordingly to start and stop the drive or set the frequency reference using MEMOBUS/Modbus communications. Table C.1 Setting Parameters for Drive Control from MEMOBUS/Modbus Reference Source Parameter Name Required Setting b1-01 Speed Reference Selection 2 External Reference b1-02 Up/Down command Selection 2 Refer to b1-01: Speed Reference Selection on page 157 and Refer to b1-02: Up/Down Command Selection on page 158 for details on operation mode parameter selections. C
| Reference Source | Parameter | Name | Required Setting |
|---|---|---|---|
| External Reference | b1-01 | Speed Reference Selection | 2 |
| b1-02 | Up/Down command Selection | 2 |
Source page
Page 408
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 408 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
C.6 Communications Timing
C.6 Communications Timing
To prevent overrun in the slave drive, the master should wait a certain time between sending messages to the same drive. In the same way, the slave drive must wait before sending response messages to prevent an overrun in the master. This section explains the message timing.
Command Messages from Master to Drive
The master must wait for a specified time between receiving a response and re-sending the same type of command to the same slave drive to prevent overrun and data loss. The minimum wait time depends on the command as shown in the table below. Table C.2 Minimum Wait Time for Sending Messages
Command Type Example Minimum Wait Time • Control command (Run, Stop) 1 • Set inputs/outputs 5 ms • Read monitors and parameter values H5-11 = 0: 50 ms 2 Write parameters H5-11 = 1: 200 ms <1> 200 ms to 2 s, depending on the number of 3 Save changes using an Enter command parameters that were changed<1> <1> If the drive receives command type 1 data during the minimum wait time, it will perform the command and then respond. However, if it receives a command type 2 or 3 during that time, either a communication error will result or the command will be ignored. FigureC.6 PLC→Drive Drive→PLC PLC→Drive Command message Response message Command message Time common_ 24 bit length M W a a s it t e T r im S e end TMonly Figure C.6 Minimum Wait Time for Sending Messages A timer should be set in the master to check how long it takes for the slave drive (s) to respond to the master. If no response is received within a certain amount of time, the master should try resending the message. Response Messages from Drive to Master
If the drive receives a command from the master, it will process the data received and wait for the time set in H5-06 until it responds. Increase H5-06 if the drive response causes overrun in the master. FigureC.7 PLC→Drive Drive→PLC PLC→Drive Command message Response message Command message Time
common_ TMonly 24 bit length H5-06 setting Figure C.7 Minimum Response Wait Time
408 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Command Type | Example | Minimum Wait Time |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | • Control command (Run, Stop) • Set inputs/outputs • Read monitors and parameter values | 5 ms |
| 2 | Write parameters | H5-11 = 0: 50 ms H5-11 = 1: 200 ms <1> |
| 3 | Save changes using an Enter command | 200 ms to 2 s, depending on the number of parameters that were changed<1> |
Source page
Page 409
C.7 Message Format
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 409 subdoM/SUBOMEM snoitacinummoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 409 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 C.7 Message Format Message Content In MEMOBUS/Modbus communications, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets depends on the command (function) content. SLAVE ADDRESS FUNCTION CODE common_ DATA TMonly ERROR CHECK Slave Address The slave address in the message defines the note the message is sent to. Use addresses between 0 and FF (hex). If a message with slave address 0 is sent (broadcast), the command from the master will be received by all slaves. The slaves do not provide a response to a broadcast type message. Function Code The three types of function codes are shown in the table below. Data Length (bytes) Fu C n o c d ti e on Function Name Command Message Response Message Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum 03H Read MEMOBUS/Modbus registers 8 8 7 37 08H Loopback test 8 8 8 8 10H Write to multiple MEMOBUS/Modbus registers 11 41 8 8 Data Configure consecutive data by combining the MEMOBUS/Modbus register address (test code in case of a loopback test) and the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details. A drive MEMOBUS/Modbus register always has a data length of two bytes. Therefore data written into drive registers must also always have a length of two bytes. Register data read out from the drive will always consist of two bytes. C
| SLAVE ADDRESS |
|---|
| FUNCTION CODE |
| DATA |
| ERROR CHECK |
| Function Code | Function Name | Data Length (bytes) | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Command Message | Response Message | ||||
| Minimum | Maximum | Minimum | Maximum | ||
| 03H | Read MEMOBUS/Modbus registers | 8 | 8 | 7 | 37 |
| 08H | Loopback test | 8 | 8 | 8 | 8 |
| 10H | Write to multiple MEMOBUS/Modbus registers | 11 | 41 | 8 | 8 |
Source page
Page 410
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 410 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
C.7 Message Format
Error Check
The drive uses a CRC-16 (cyclic redundancy check, checksum method) for checking data validity. Use the procedure described below when calculating the CRC-16 checksum for command data or when verifying response data.
Command Data When the drive receives data, it calculates the CRC-16 checksum from the data and compares it to the CRC-16 value received within the message. Both must match before a command is processed.
An initial value of FFFFH (i.e., all 16 bits equal 1) must be used for CRC-16 calculations in the MEMOBUS/Modbus protocol. Calculate the CRC-16 checksum using the following steps: 1. The starting value is FFFFH. 2. Perform an XOR operation of this value and the slave address. 3. Right shift the result. 4. When the overflow bit of the shift operation becomes 1, perform an XOR operation of the result from step 3 above and the fix value A001H. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until eight shift operations have been performed. 6. After eight shift operations, perform an XOR operation with the result and the next data in the message (function code, register address, data). Continue with steps 3 to 5 until the last data has been processed. 7. The result of the last shift or XOR operation is the checksum. The example in Table C.3 shows the CRC-16 calculation of the slave address 02H and the function code 03H, yielding the result 40D1H.
Note: This example does not show the calculation for a complete MEMOBUS/Modbus command. Normally data would follow in the calculation. Table C.3 CRC-16 Checksum Calculation Example Description Calculation Overflow Description Calculation Overflow Initial Value (FFFFH) 1111 1111 1111 1111 Function Code 03H 0000 0000 0000 0011 Address 02H 0000 0000 0000 0010 XOR w result 1000 0001 0011 1101 XOR w initial value 1111 1111 1111 1101 Shift 1 0100 0000 1001 1110 1 Shift 1 0111 1111 1111 1110 1 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001 XOR result 1110 0000 1001 1111 XOR result 1101 1111 1111 1111 Shift 2 0111 0000 0100 1111 1 Shift 2 0110 1111 1111 1111 1 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001 XOR result 1101 0000 0100 1110 XOR result 1100 1111 1111 1110 Shift 3 0110 1000 0010 0111 0 Shift 3 0110 0111 1111 1111 0 Shift 4 0011 0100 0001 0011 1 Shift 4 0011 0011 1111 1111 1 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001 XOR result 1001 0100 0001 0010 XOR result 1001 0011 1111 1110 Shift 5 0100 1010 0000 1001 0 Shift 5 0100 1001 1111 1111 0 Shift 6 0010 0101 0000 0100 1 Shift 6 0010 0100 1111 1111 1 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001 XOR result 1000 0101 0000 0101 XOR result 1000 0100 1111 1110 Shift 7 0100 0010 1000 0010 1 Shift 7 0100 0010 0111 1111 0 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001 Shift 8 0010 0001 0011 1111 1 XOR result 1110 0010 1000 0011 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001 Shift 8 0111 0001 0100 0001 1 XOR result 1000 0001 0011 1110 XOR w A001H 1010 0000 0000 0001 XOR result 1101 0001 0100 0000 1101 0001 0100 0000 Perform operations with next data (function code) CRC-16 D 1 4 0 (Lower) (Upper) Continue from here with next data. Response Data Perform a CRC-16 calculation on the response message data as described above as a validation check. The result should match the CRC-16 checksum received within the response message.
410 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Description | Calculation | Overflow | Description | Calculation | Overflow |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Initial Value (FFFFH) | 1111 1111 1111 1111 | Function Code 03H | 0000 0000 0000 0011 | ||
| Address 02H | 0000 0000 0000 0010 | XOR w result | 1000 0001 0011 1101 | ||
| XOR w initial value | 1111 1111 1111 1101 | Shift 1 | 0100 0000 1001 1110 | 1 | |
| Shift 1 | 0111 1111 1111 1110 | 1 | XOR w A001H | 1010 0000 0000 0001 | |
| XOR w A001H | 1010 0000 0000 0001 | XOR result | 1110 0000 1001 1111 | ||
| XOR result | 1101 1111 1111 1111 | Shift 2 | 0111 0000 0100 1111 | 1 | |
| Shift 2 | 0110 1111 1111 1111 | 1 | XOR w A001H | 1010 0000 0000 0001 | |
| XOR w A001H | 1010 0000 0000 0001 | XOR result | 1101 0000 0100 1110 | ||
| XOR result | 1100 1111 1111 1110 | Shift 3 | 0110 1000 0010 0111 | 0 | |
| Shift 3 | 0110 0111 1111 1111 | 0 | Shift 4 | 0011 0100 0001 0011 | 1 |
| Shift 4 | 0011 0011 1111 1111 | 1 | XOR w A001H | 1010 0000 0000 0001 | |
| XOR w A001H | 1010 0000 0000 0001 | XOR result | 1001 0100 0001 0010 | ||
| XOR result | 1001 0011 1111 1110 | Shift 5 | 0100 1010 0000 1001 | 0 | |
| Shift 5 | 0100 1001 1111 1111 | 0 | Shift 6 | 0010 0101 0000 0100 | 1 |
| Shift 6 | 0010 0100 1111 1111 | 1 | XOR w A001H | 1010 0000 0000 0001 | |
| XOR w A001H | 1010 0000 0000 0001 | XOR result | 1000 0101 0000 0101 | ||
| XOR result | 1000 0100 1111 1110 | Shift 7 | 0100 0010 1000 0010 | 1 | |
| Shift 7 | 0100 0010 0111 1111 | 0 | XOR w A001H | 1010 0000 0000 0001 | |
| Shift 8 | 0010 0001 0011 1111 | 1 | XOR result | 1110 0010 1000 0011 | |
| XOR w A001H | 1010 0000 0000 0001 | Shift 8 | 0111 0001 0100 0001 | 1 | |
| XOR result | 1000 0001 0011 1110 | XOR w A001H | 1010 0000 0000 0001 | ||
| Perform operations with next data (function code) | XOR result | 1101 0001 0100 0000 | |||
| CRC-16 | 1101 0001 0100 0000 | ||||
| D 1 4 0 (Lower) (Upper) | |||||
| Continue from here with next data. |
Source page
Page 411
C.8 Message Examples
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 411 subdoM/SUBOMEM snoitacinummoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 411 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 C.8 Message Examples Below are some examples of command and response messages. Reading Drive MEMOBUS/Modbus Register Contents Using the function code 03H (Read), a maximum of 16 MEMOBUS/Modbus registers can be read out at a time. The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and speed references from the slave 2 drive. Command Message Response Message (normal) Response Message (fault) Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H Upper 00H Data Quantity 08H Error Code 03H Starting No. Lower 20H Upper 00H Upper F1H 1st storage register CRC-16 Upper 00H Lower 65H Lower 31H Data Quantity Lower 04H Next storage Upper 00H Upper 45H register Lower 00H CRC-16 Lower F0H Next storage Upper 00H register Lower 00H Next storage Upper 01H register Lower F4H Upper AFH CRC-16 Lower 82H Loopback Test Function code 08H performs a loopback test. This test returns a response message with exactly the same content as the command message and can be used to check communications between the master and slave. User-defined test code and data values can be set. The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 drive. Command Message Response Message (normal) Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Function Code 08H Function Code 08H Upper 00H Upper 00H Test Code Test Code Lower 00H Lower 00H Upper A5H Upper A5H Data Data Lower 37H Lower 37H Upper DAH Upper DAH CRC-16 CRC-16 Lower 8DH Lower 8DH C
| Command Message | Column | Column | Response Message (normal) | Column | Column | Response Message (fault) | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Slave Address | 02H | Slave Address | 02H | Slave Address | 02H | |||
| Function Code | 03H | Function Code | 03H | Function Code | 83H | |||
| Starting No. | Upper | 00H | Data Quantity | 08H | Error Code | 03H | ||
| Lower | 20H | 1st storage register | Upper | 00H | CRC-16 | Upper | F1H | |
| Data Quantity | Upper | 00H | Lower | 65H | Lower | 31H | ||
| Lower | 04H | Next storage register | Upper | 00H | ||||
| CRC-16 | Upper | 45H | Lower | 00H | ||||
| Lower | F0H | Next storage register | Upper | 00H | ||||
| Lower | 00H | |||||||
| Next storage register | Upper | 01H | ||||||
| Lower | F4H | |||||||
| CRC-16 | Upper | AFH | ||||||
| Lower | 82H |
| Command Message | Column | Column | Response Message (normal) | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Slave Address | 01H | Slave Address | 01H | ||
| Function Code | 08H | Function Code | 08H | ||
| Test Code | Upper | 00H | Test Code | Upper | 00H |
| Lower | 00H | Lower | 00H | ||
| Data | Upper | A5H | Data | Upper | A5H |
| Lower | 37H | Lower | 37H | ||
| CRC-16 | Upper | DAH | CRC-16 | Upper | DAH |
| Lower | 8DH | Lower | 8DH |
Source page
Page 412
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 412 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
C.8 Message Examples
Writing to Multiple Registers
Function code 10H allows the user to write multiple drive MEMOBUS/Modbus registers with one message. This process works similar to reading registers, in that the address of the first register to be written and the data quantity are set in the command message. The data to be written must be consecutive so that the register addresses are in order, starting from the specified address in the command message. The data order must be high byte then lower byte. The following table shows an example of a message where a forward (Up) operation has been set with a speed reference of 100.00% for the slave 1 drive.
If parameter values are changed using the Write command, an Enter command may be necessary to activate or save the data depending on the setting of H5-11. Refer to H5-11: Communications Enter Function Selection on page 406 and Refer to Enter Command on page 423 for detailed descriptions.
Command Message Response Message (normal) Response Message (fault) Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Function Code 10H Function Code 10H Function Code 90H Upper 00H Upper 00H Error Code 02H Starting No. Starting No. Lower 01H Lower 01H Upper CDH CRC-16 Upper 00H Upper 00H Lower C1H Data Quantity Data Quantity Lower 02H Lower 02H Number of Bytes 04H Upper 10H CRC-16 Upper 00H Lower 08H Starting Data Lower 01H Upper 27H Next Data Lower 10H Upper 79H CRC-16 Lower 9FH Note: Double the number of the data quantity for the number of bytes in the command message. Torque Compensation Through MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications Perform the steps below to utilize Torque Compensation Through MEMOBUS/Modbus Communications. Torque Compensation Set-up via MEMOBUS/Modbus 1. Set H3-02 or H3-10 to 14 (Torque Compensation). 2. Set bit 3 (Torque Compensation Input) in the 000FH MEMOBUS/Modbus register to 1. 3. Before entering a run command, set the 0005H MEMOBUS/Modbus register (Torque Compensation, signed) to an appropriate value. Note: Settings for the 0005H register can be made before entering a run command. Troubleshooting Torque Compensation Set-up via MEMOBUS/Modbus 1. If an error message occurs when sending the torque compensation value, check to see if RTS control has been enabled or not (H5-07). 2. Verify that bit 3 in the 000FH MEMOBUS/Modbus register is set to 1 and that the function selection for terminal Al or A2 (H3-02 or H3-10) is set 14 to enable/select torque compensation.
412 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Command Message | Column | Column | Response Message (normal) | Column | Column | Response Message (fault) | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Slave Address | 01H | Slave Address | 01H | Slave Address | 01H | |||
| Function Code | 10H | Function Code | 10H | Function Code | 90H | |||
| Starting No. | Upper | 00H | Starting No. | Upper | 00H | Error Code | 02H | |
| Lower | 01H | Lower | 01H | CRC-16 | Upper | CDH | ||
| Data Quantity | Upper | 00H | Data Quantity | Upper | 00H | Lower | C1H | |
| Lower | 02H | Lower | 02H | |||||
| Number of Bytes | 04H | CRC-16 | Upper | 10H | ||||
| Starting Data | Upper | 00H | Lower | 08H | ||||
| Lower | 01H | |||||||
| Next Data | Upper | 27H | ||||||
| Lower | 10H | |||||||
| CRC-16 | Upper | 79H | ||||||
| Lower | 9FH |
Source page
Page 413
C.9 MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 413 subdoM/SUBOMEM snoitacinummoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 413 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 C.9 MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table Table below lists all MEMOBUS/Modbus data. There are three types of data: command data, monitor data, and broadcast data. Command Data It is possible to both read and write command data. Note: Bits that are not used should be set to 0. Refrain from writing to reserved registers. Register No. Contents 0000H Reserved Operation Commands and Multi-function Inputs bit 0 Up command bit 1 Down command bit 2 External Fault (EF0) bit 3 Fault Reset ComRef bit 4 Note: When the bit at ComCtrl is turned on, commands from MEMOBUS communications take control of the operation. However, when a communications option card is connected, that option card is given priority. 0001H bit 5 ComCtrl bit 6 Multi-Function Input 3 bit 7 Multi-Function Input 4 bit 8 Multi-Function Input 5 bit 9 Multi-Function Input 6 bit A Multi-Function Input 7 bit B Multi-Function Input 8 bit C to F Reserved 0002H Speed Reference Units are determined by parameter o1-03. 0003H Reserved 0004H Torque Limit, 0.1% units, signed 0005H Torque Compensation, 0.1% units, signed<1> 0006H Reserved 0007H Analog Output Terminal FM Setting (10 V/4000 H) 0008H Analog Output Terminal AM Setting (10 V/4000 H) Settings for Multi-Function Digital Outputs bit 0 Multi-Function Relay Output 1 (terminal M1-M2) bit 1 Multi-Function Relay Output 2 (terminal M3-M4) bit 2 Multi-Function Relay Output 3 (terminal M5-M6) bit 3 Multi-Function Photocoupler Output 1 (terminal P1-C1) 0009H bit 4 Multi-Function Photocoupler Output 2 (terminal P2-C2) bit 5 Reserved bit 6 Enables the function in bit 7 bit 7 Fault Contact Output (terminal MA/MB-MC) bit 8 to F Reserved 000AH to 000EH Reserved Control Selection Setting bit 0, 1 Reserved bit 2 Torque limit input (enables the setting from MEMOBUS/Modbus) bit 3 Torque compensation input (enables the setting from MEMOBUS/Modbus) 000FH bit 4 to B Reserved bit C Enable Terminal S5 Input for Broadcast Data bit D Enable Terminal S6 Input for Broadcast Data bit E Enable Terminal S7 Input for Broadcast Data bit F Enable Terminal S8 Input for Broadcast Data 0010H to 001AH Reserved 001BH Analog Monitor Option AO-A3 Analog Output 1 (10 V/4000 H) 001CH Analog Monitor Option AO-A3 Analog Output 2 (10 V/4000 H) 001DH Digital Output Option DO-A3 Output (Binary) 001EH to 001FH Reserved <1> To enable torque compensation function by serial communications, set H3-02 or H3-10 to 14 and set register 000FH bit 3=1. C
| Register No. | Contents | Column |
|---|---|---|
| 0000H | Reserved | |
| 0001H | Operation Commands and Multi-function Inputs | |
| bit 0 | Up command | |
| bit 1 | Down command | |
| bit 2 | External Fault (EF0) | |
| bit 3 | Fault Reset | |
| bit 4 | ComRef Note: When the bit at ComCtrl is turned on, commands from MEMOBUS communications take control of the operation. However, when a communications option card is connected, that option card is given priority. | |
| bit 5 | ComCtrl | |
| bit 6 | Multi-Function Input 3 | |
| bit 7 | Multi-Function Input 4 | |
| bit 8 | Multi-Function Input 5 | |
| bit 9 | Multi-Function Input 6 | |
| bit A | Multi-Function Input 7 | |
| bit B | Multi-Function Input 8 | |
| bit C to F | Reserved | |
| 0002H | Speed Reference | Units are determined by parameter o1-03. |
| 0003H | Reserved | |
| 0004H | Torque Limit, 0.1% units, signed | |
| 0005H | Torque Compensation, 0.1% units, signed<1> | |
| 0006H | Reserved | |
| 0007H | Analog Output Terminal FM Setting (10 V/4000 H) | |
| 0008H | Analog Output Terminal AM Setting (10 V/4000 H) | |
| 0009H | Settings for Multi-Function Digital Outputs | |
| bit 0 | Multi-Function Relay Output 1 (terminal M1-M2) | |
| bit 1 | Multi-Function Relay Output 2 (terminal M3-M4) | |
| bit 2 | Multi-Function Relay Output 3 (terminal M5-M6) | |
| bit 3 | Multi-Function Photocoupler Output 1 (terminal P1-C1) | |
| bit 4 | Multi-Function Photocoupler Output 2 (terminal P2-C2) | |
| bit 5 | Reserved | |
| bit 6 | Enables the function in bit 7 | |
| bit 7 | Fault Contact Output (terminal MA/MB-MC) | |
| bit 8 to F | Reserved | |
| 000AH to 000EH | Reserved | |
| 000FH | Control Selection Setting | |
| bit 0, 1 | Reserved | |
| bit 2 | Torque limit input (enables the setting from MEMOBUS/Modbus) | |
| bit 3 | Torque compensation input (enables the setting from MEMOBUS/Modbus) | |
| bit 4 to B | Reserved | |
| bit C | Enable Terminal S5 Input for Broadcast Data | |
| bit D | Enable Terminal S6 Input for Broadcast Data | |
| bit E | Enable Terminal S7 Input for Broadcast Data | |
| bit F | Enable Terminal S8 Input for Broadcast Data | |
| 0010H to 001AH | Reserved | |
| 001BH | Analog Monitor Option AO-A3 Analog Output 1 (10 V/4000 H) | |
| 001CH | Analog Monitor Option AO-A3 Analog Output 2 (10 V/4000 H) | |
| 001DH | Digital Output Option DO-A3 Output (Binary) | |
| 001EH to 001FH | Reserved |
Source page
Page 414
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 414 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
C.9 MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table
Monitor Data
Monitor data can be read only.
Register No. Contents Drive Status 1 bit 0 During Run bit 1 During Reverse bit 2 Drive Ready bit 3 Fault bit 4 Data Setting Error bit 5 Multi-Function Relay Output (terminal M1-M2) 0020H bit 6 Multi-Function Relay Output (terminal M3-M4) bit 7 Multi-Function Relay Output (terminal M5-M6) bit 8 Multi-Function Photocoupler Output 1 (terminal P1-C1) bit 9 Multi-Function Photocoupler Output 2 (terminal P2-C2) bit A to bit D Reserved bit E When ComRef has been enabled bit F When ComCtrl has been enabled Fault Contents 1 bit 0 Overcurrent (oC), Ground fault (GF) bit 1 Overvoltage (ov) bit 2 Drive Overload (oL2) bit 3 Overheat 1 (oH1) bit 4 Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault (rr) bit 5, 6 Reserved bit 7 EF0, EF3 to EF8: External Fault 0021H bit 8 CPF: Hardware Fault (includes oFx) bit 9 Motor Overload (oL1), Overtorque Detection 1/2 (oL3/oL4), Undertorque Detection 1/2 (UL3/UL4) bit A Encoder Disconnected (PGo), Option Card Hardware Fault (PGoH), Overspeed (oS), Excessive Speed Deviation (dEv) bit B Main Circuit Undervoltage (Uv) bit C Undervoltage (Uv1), Control Power Supply Undervoltage (Uv2), Soft Charge Circuit Fault (Uv3) bit D Output Phase Loss (LF), Input Phase Loss (PF) bit E MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE), Option Communication Error (bUS) bit F Operator Connection Fault (oPr) Data Link Status bit 0 Writing data or switching motors bit 1, 2 Reserved 0022H bit 3 Upper or lower limit error bit 4 Data conformity error bit 5 Writing to EEPROM bit 6 to bit F Reserved 0023H Speed Reference, <1> 0024H Output Speed, <1> 0025H Output Voltage Reference, 0.1 V units (units are determined by parameter H5-10) 0026H Output Current, 0.1 A units 0027H Output Power 0028H Torque Reference Fault Contents 2 bit 0 Reserved bit 1 Ground Fault (GF) bit 2 Input Phase Loss (PF) 0029H bit 3 Output Phase Loss (LF) bit 4, 5 Reserved bit 6 Motor Overheat Fault (PTC thermistor input) (oH4) bit 7 to F Reserved 414 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Register No. | Contents | Column |
|---|---|---|
| 0020H | Drive Status 1 | |
| bit 0 | During Run | |
| bit 1 | During Reverse | |
| bit 2 | Drive Ready | |
| bit 3 | Fault | |
| bit 4 | Data Setting Error | |
| bit 5 | Multi-Function Relay Output (terminal M1-M2) | |
| bit 6 | Multi-Function Relay Output (terminal M3-M4) | |
| bit 7 | Multi-Function Relay Output (terminal M5-M6) | |
| bit 8 | Multi-Function Photocoupler Output 1 (terminal P1-C1) | |
| bit 9 | Multi-Function Photocoupler Output 2 (terminal P2-C2) | |
| bit A to bit D | Reserved | |
| bit E | When ComRef has been enabled | |
| bit F | When ComCtrl has been enabled | |
| 0021H | Fault Contents 1 | |
| bit 0 | Overcurrent (oC), Ground fault (GF) | |
| bit 1 | Overvoltage (ov) | |
| bit 2 | Drive Overload (oL2) | |
| bit 3 | Overheat 1 (oH1) | |
| bit 4 | Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault (rr) | |
| bit 5, 6 | Reserved | |
| bit 7 | EF0, EF3 to EF8: External Fault | |
| bit 8 | CPF: Hardware Fault (includes oFx) | |
| bit 9 | Motor Overload (oL1), Overtorque Detection 1/2 (oL3/oL4), Undertorque Detection 1/2 (UL3/UL4) | |
| bit A | Encoder Disconnected (PGo), Option Card Hardware Fault (PGoH), Overspeed (oS), Excessive Speed Deviation (dEv) | |
| bit B | Main Circuit Undervoltage (Uv) | |
| bit C | Undervoltage (Uv1), Control Power Supply Undervoltage (Uv2), Soft Charge Circuit Fault (Uv3) | |
| bit D | Output Phase Loss (LF), Input Phase Loss (PF) | |
| bit E | MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE), Option Communication Error (bUS) | |
| bit F | Operator Connection Fault (oPr) | |
| 0022H | Data Link Status | |
| bit 0 | Writing data or switching motors | |
| bit 1, 2 | Reserved | |
| bit 3 | Upper or lower limit error | |
| bit 4 | Data conformity error | |
| bit 5 | Writing to EEPROM | |
| bit 6 to bit F | Reserved | |
| 0023H | Speed Reference, <1> | |
| 0024H | Output Speed, <1> | |
| 0025H | Output Voltage Reference, 0.1 V units (units are determined by parameter H5-10) | |
| 0026H | Output Current, 0.1 A units | |
| 0027H | Output Power | |
| 0028H | Torque Reference | |
| 0029H | Fault Contents 2 | |
| bit 0 | Reserved | |
| bit 1 | Ground Fault (GF) | |
| bit 2 | Input Phase Loss (PF) | |
| bit 3 | Output Phase Loss (LF) | |
| bit 4, 5 | Reserved | |
| bit 6 | Motor Overheat Fault (PTC thermistor input) (oH4) | |
| bit 7 to F | Reserved |
Source page
Page 415
C.9 MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 415 subdoM/SUBOMEM snoitacinummoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 415 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Register No. Contents Alarm Contents1 bit 0, 1 Reserved bit 2 Up/Down command Input Error (EF) bit 3 Drive Baseblock (bb) bit 4 Overtorque Detection 1/2 (oL3/4) bit 5 Heatsink Overheat (oH) bit 6 Overvoltage (ov) 002AH bit 7 Undervoltage (Uv) bit 8 Cooling Fan Error (FAn) bit 9 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE) bit A Option Communication Error (bUS) bit B Undertorque Detection 1/2 (UL3/UL4) bit C Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) (oH3) bit D, E Reserved bit F Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL) Input Terminal Status bit 0 Terminal S1 Closed bit 1 Terminal S2 Closed bit 2 Terminal S3 Closed bit 3 Terminal S4 Closed 002BH bit 4 Terminal S5 Closed bit 5 Terminal S6 Closed bit 6 Terminal S7 Closed bit 7 Terminal S8 Closed bit 8 to bit F Reserved Drive Status 2 bit 0 During Run bit 1 Zero Speed bit 2 Speed Agree bit 3 User Speed Agree bit 4 Speed Detection 1 bit 5 Speed Detection 2 bit 6 Drive Ready 002CH bit 7 During Undervoltage bit 8 During Baseblock bit 9 Speed Reference from Operator Keypad bit A Up/Down command from Operator Keypad bit B Over/Undertorque 1, 2 bit C Speed Reference Loss bit D During Fault Reset bit E Fault bit F Communication Timeout Output Terminal Status bit 0 Multi-Function Relay Output (terminal M1-M2) bit 1 Multi-Function Relay Output (terminal M3-M4) bit 2 Multi-Function Relay Output (terminal M5-M6) 002DH bit 3 Multi-Function Photocoupler Output 1 (terminal P1-C1) bit 4 Multi-Function Photocoupler Output 2 (terminal P2-C2) bit 3 to 6 Reserved bit 7 Fault Contact Output (terminal MA/MB-MC) bit 8 to F Reserved 002EH to 0030H Reserved 0031H DC Bus Voltage, 1 Vdc units 0032H Torque Reference (U1-09), 1% units 0033H Reserved 0034H Product Code 1 [ASCII], Product Type (LA for L1000A) 0035H Product Code 2 [ASCII], Region Code 0036H to 003CH Reserved Communications Error Contents <3> bit 0 CRC Error bit 1 Data Length Error bit 2 Reserved 003DH bit 3 Parity Error bit 4 Overrun Error bit 5 Framing Error bit 6 Timeout bit 7 to bit F Reserved C 003EH r/min <4> Output Speed 003FH 0.01% units
| Register No. | Contents | Column |
|---|---|---|
| 002AH | Alarm Contents1 | |
| bit 0, 1 | Reserved | |
| bit 2 | Up/Down command Input Error (EF) | |
| bit 3 | Drive Baseblock (bb) | |
| bit 4 | Overtorque Detection 1/2 (oL3/4) | |
| bit 5 | Heatsink Overheat (oH) | |
| bit 6 | Overvoltage (ov) | |
| bit 7 | Undervoltage (Uv) | |
| bit 8 | Cooling Fan Error (FAn) | |
| bit 9 | MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE) | |
| bit A | Option Communication Error (bUS) | |
| bit B | Undertorque Detection 1/2 (UL3/UL4) | |
| bit C | Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) (oH3) | |
| bit D, E | Reserved | |
| bit F | Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL) | |
| 002BH | Input Terminal Status | |
| bit 0 | Terminal S1 Closed | |
| bit 1 | Terminal S2 Closed | |
| bit 2 | Terminal S3 Closed | |
| bit 3 | Terminal S4 Closed | |
| bit 4 | Terminal S5 Closed | |
| bit 5 | Terminal S6 Closed | |
| bit 6 | Terminal S7 Closed | |
| bit 7 | Terminal S8 Closed | |
| bit 8 to bit F | Reserved | |
| 002CH | Drive Status 2 | |
| bit 0 | During Run | |
| bit 1 | Zero Speed | |
| bit 2 | Speed Agree | |
| bit 3 | User Speed Agree | |
| bit 4 | Speed Detection 1 | |
| bit 5 | Speed Detection 2 | |
| bit 6 | Drive Ready | |
| bit 7 | During Undervoltage | |
| bit 8 | During Baseblock | |
| bit 9 | Speed Reference from Operator Keypad | |
| bit A | Up/Down command from Operator Keypad | |
| bit B | Over/Undertorque 1, 2 | |
| bit C | Speed Reference Loss | |
| bit D | During Fault Reset | |
| bit E | Fault | |
| bit F | Communication Timeout | |
| 002DH | Output Terminal Status | |
| bit 0 | Multi-Function Relay Output (terminal M1-M2) | |
| bit 1 | Multi-Function Relay Output (terminal M3-M4) | |
| bit 2 | Multi-Function Relay Output (terminal M5-M6) | |
| bit 3 | Multi-Function Photocoupler Output 1 (terminal P1-C1) | |
| bit 4 | Multi-Function Photocoupler Output 2 (terminal P2-C2) | |
| bit 3 to 6 | Reserved | |
| bit 7 | Fault Contact Output (terminal MA/MB-MC) | |
| bit 8 to F | Reserved | |
| 002EH to 0030H | Reserved | |
| 0031H | DC Bus Voltage, 1 Vdc units | |
| 0032H | Torque Reference (U1-09), 1% units | |
| 0033H | Reserved | |
| 0034H | Product Code 1 [ASCII], Product Type (LA for L1000A) | |
| 0035H | Product Code 2 [ASCII], Region Code | |
| 0036H to 003CH | Reserved | |
| 003DH | Communications Error Contents <3> | |
| bit 0 | CRC Error | |
| bit 1 | Data Length Error | |
| bit 2 | Reserved | |
| bit 3 | Parity Error | |
| bit 4 | Overrun Error | |
| bit 5 | Framing Error | |
| bit 6 | Timeout | |
| bit 7 to bit F | Reserved | |
| 003EH | Output Speed | r/min <4> |
| 003FH | 0.01% units |
Source page
Page 416
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 416 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
C.9 MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table
Register No. Contents 0040H to 004AH Used for various monitors U1-. Refer to U: Monitors on page387 for parameter details. Drive Status (U1-12) bit 0 During Run bit 1 During Zero Speed bit 2 During Reverse Run bit 3 During Fault Reset Signal Input bit 4 During Speed Agree bit 5 Drive Ready 004BH bit 6 Alarm bit 7 Fault bit 8 During Operation Error (oPE) bit 9 During Momentary Power Loss bit A Motor 2 Selected bit B to D Reserved bit E ComRef status, NetRef status bit F ComCtrl status, NetCtrl status 004CH to 007EH Used for various monitors U1-, U4-, and U6-. Refer to U: Monitors on page387 for parameter details. 007FH Alarm Code, Refer to Alarm Register Contents on page422 for alarm codes. Used for monitors U2-, U3-. Refer to U: Monitors on page387 for parameter details and Refer to Fault Trace Contents on page421 for register 0080H to 0097H value descriptions. U4-01 (Cumulative Operation Time) 0098H, 0099H Example: When U4-01 (Cumulative Operation Time) is 12345 hours, then 0098H = 1234 and 0099H = 5. 009AH, 009BH U4-03 (Cooling Fan Operation Time) Example: When U4-03 (Cooling Fan Operation Time) is 12345 hours, then 009AH = 1234 and 009BH = 5. 009CH to 00AAH Reserved 00ABH Drive Rated Current <2> 00ACH r/min units <4> Speed Feedback (U1-05) 00ADH 0.01% units 00AEH, 00AFH Reserved Register contains ASCII code of the option card. DI-A3 = 0x01 DO-A3 = 0x02 AO-A3 = 0x04 00B0H Option Code Connected to CN5-A PG-B3 = 0x11 PG-X3 = 0x12 PG-F3 = 0x21 PG-E3 = 0x22 Communication Option: Register contains ASCII code of 1st and 3rd digit of the option card type number. Example: Register value is 5353H for “SS” if a SI-S3 option card is installed. 00B1H Reserved 00B2H Option Code Connected to CN5-B 00B3H Option Code Connected to CN5-C 00B4H Reserved 00B5H Output Speed After Soft Start r/min units <4> 00B6H (U1-16) 0.01% units 00B7H r/min units<4> Speed Reference 00B8H 0.01% units 00B9H to 00BEH Reserved 00BFH Lists the last to digits of operation error code oPE. Fault Contents 3 bit 1 Undervoltage (Uv1) bit 2 Control Power Supply Undervoltage (Uv2) bit 3 Soft Charge Circuit Fault (Uv3) bit 4 Short Circuit (SC) bit 5 Ground Fault (GF) bit 6 Overcurrent (oC) bit 7 Overvoltage (ov) 00C0H bit 8 Heatsink Overheat (oH) bit 9 Heatsink Overheat (oH1) bit A Motor Overload (oL1) bit B Drive Overload (oL2) bit C Overtorque Detection 1 (oL3) bit D Overtorque Detection 2 (oL4) bit E Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault (rr) bit F Reserved 416 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Register No. | Contents | Column |
|---|---|---|
| 0040H to 004AH | Used for various monitors U1-. Refer to U: Monitors on page387 for parameter details. | |
| 004BH | Drive Status (U1-12) | |
| bit 0 | During Run | |
| bit 1 | During Zero Speed | |
| bit 2 | During Reverse Run | |
| bit 3 | During Fault Reset Signal Input | |
| bit 4 | During Speed Agree | |
| bit 5 | Drive Ready | |
| bit 6 | Alarm | |
| bit 7 | Fault | |
| bit 8 | During Operation Error (oPE) | |
| bit 9 | During Momentary Power Loss | |
| bit A | Motor 2 Selected | |
| bit B to D | Reserved | |
| bit E | ComRef status, NetRef status | |
| bit F | ComCtrl status, NetCtrl status | |
| 004CH to 007EH | Used for various monitors U1-, U4-, and U6-. Refer to U: Monitors on page387 for parameter details. | |
| 007FH | Alarm Code, Refer to Alarm Register Contents on page422 for alarm codes. | |
| 0080H to 0097H | Used for monitors U2-, U3-. Refer to U: Monitors on page387 for parameter details and Refer to Fault Trace Contents on page421 for register value descriptions. | |
| 0098H, 0099H | U4-01 (Cumulative Operation Time) Example: When U4-01 (Cumulative Operation Time) is 12345 hours, then 0098H = 1234 and 0099H = 5. | |
| 009AH, 009BH | U4-03 (Cooling Fan Operation Time) Example: When U4-03 (Cooling Fan Operation Time) is 12345 hours, then 009AH = 1234 and 009BH = 5. | |
| 009CH to 00AAH | Reserved | |
| 00ABH | Drive Rated Current <2> | |
| 00ACH | Speed Feedback (U1-05) | r/min units <4> |
| 00ADH | 0.01% units | |
| 00AEH, 00AFH | Reserved | |
| 00B0H | Option Code Connected to CN5-A | Register contains ASCII code of the option card. DI-A3 = 0x01 DO-A3 = 0x02 AO-A3 = 0x04 PG-B3 = 0x11 PG-X3 = 0x12 PG-F3 = 0x21 PG-E3 = 0x22 Communication Option: Register contains ASCII code of 1st and 3rd digit of the option card type number. Example: Register value is 5353H for “SS” if a SI-S3 option card is installed. |
| 00B1H | Reserved | |
| 00B2H | Option Code Connected to CN5-B | |
| 00B3H | Option Code Connected to CN5-C | |
| 00B4H | Reserved | |
| 00B5H | Output Speed After Soft Start (U1-16) | r/min units <4> |
| 00B6H | 0.01% units | |
| 00B7H | Speed Reference | r/min units<4> |
| 00B8H | 0.01% units | |
| 00B9H to 00BEH | Reserved | |
| 00BFH | Lists the last to digits of operation error code oPE. | |
| 00C0H | Fault Contents 3 | |
| bit 1 | Undervoltage (Uv1) | |
| bit 2 | Control Power Supply Undervoltage (Uv2) | |
| bit 3 | Soft Charge Circuit Fault (Uv3) | |
| bit 4 | Short Circuit (SC) | |
| bit 5 | Ground Fault (GF) | |
| bit 6 | Overcurrent (oC) | |
| bit 7 | Overvoltage (ov) | |
| bit 8 | Heatsink Overheat (oH) | |
| bit 9 | Heatsink Overheat (oH1) | |
| bit A | Motor Overload (oL1) | |
| bit B | Drive Overload (oL2) | |
| bit C | Overtorque Detection 1 (oL3) | |
| bit D | Overtorque Detection 2 (oL4) | |
| bit E | Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault (rr) | |
| bit F | Reserved |
Source page
Page 417
C.9 MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 417 subdoM/SUBOMEM snoitacinummoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 417 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Register No. Contents Fault Contents 4 bit 0 External Fault at input terminal S3 (EF3) bit 1 External Fault at input terminal S4 (EF4) bit 2 External Fault at input terminal S5 (EF5) bit 3 External Fault at input terminal S6 (EF6) bit 4 External Fault at input terminal S7 (EF7) bit 5 External Fault at input terminal S8 (EF8) bit 6 Reserved 00C1H bit 7 Overspeed (os) bit 8 Excessive Speed Deviation (dEv) bit 9 Encoder Disconnected (PGo) bit A Input Phase Loss (PF) bit B Output Phase Loss (LF) bit C Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) (oH3) bit D Digital Operator Connection Fault (oPr) bit E EEPROM Write Error (Err) bit F Motor Overheat Fault (PTC thermistor input) (oH4) Fault Contents 5 bit 0 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE) bit 1 Option Communication Error (bUS) bit 2, 3 Reserved bit 4 Control Fault (CF) bit 5 Position Lock Error (SvE) 00C2H bit 6 Option External Fault (EF0) bit 7 Reserved bit 8 Undertorque Detection 1 (UL3) bit 9 Undertorque Detection 2 (UL4) bit A to E Reserved bit F Hardware Fault (includes oFx) Fault Contents 6 bit 0 Reserved bit 1 Z Pulse Fault Detection (dv1) bit 2 Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection (dv2) bit 3 Inversion Detection (dv3) 00C3H bit 4 Inversion Prevention Detection (dv4) bit 5 Current Imbalance (LF2) bit 6 Pullout Detection (STo) bit 7 Option Card Hardware Fault (PGoH) bit 8 to F Reserved Fault Contents 7 bit 0 to 4 Reserved bit 5 Current Offset Fault (CoF) bit 6 to B Reserved 00C4H bit C Output Voltage Detection Fault (voF) bit D Reserved bit E Braking Transistor Overload Fault (boL) bit F Reserved Fault Contents 8 bit 0 to 3 Reserved 00C5H bit 4 Overacceleration (dv6) bit 5 to F Reserved 00C6H, 00C7H Reserved Alarm Contents 2 bit 0 Undervoltage (Uv) bit 1 Overvoltage (ov) bit 2 Heatsink Overheat (oH) bit 3 Reserved bit 4 Overtorque 1 (oL3) bit 5 Overtorque 2 (oL4) bit 6 Up/Down commands Input Error (EF) 00C8H bit 7 Drive Baseblock (bb) bit 8 External Fault 3, input terminal S3 (EF3) bit 9 External Fault 4, input terminal S4 (EF4) bit A External Fault 5, input terminal S5 (EF5) bit B External Fault 6, input terminal S6 (EF6) bit C External Fault 7, input terminal S7 (EF7) bit D External Fault 8, input terminal S8 (EF8) C bit E Reserved bit F Overspeed (oS)
| Register No. | Contents | Column |
|---|---|---|
| 00C1H | Fault Contents 4 | |
| bit 0 | External Fault at input terminal S3 (EF3) | |
| bit 1 | External Fault at input terminal S4 (EF4) | |
| bit 2 | External Fault at input terminal S5 (EF5) | |
| bit 3 | External Fault at input terminal S6 (EF6) | |
| bit 4 | External Fault at input terminal S7 (EF7) | |
| bit 5 | External Fault at input terminal S8 (EF8) | |
| bit 6 | Reserved | |
| bit 7 | Overspeed (os) | |
| bit 8 | Excessive Speed Deviation (dEv) | |
| bit 9 | Encoder Disconnected (PGo) | |
| bit A | Input Phase Loss (PF) | |
| bit B | Output Phase Loss (LF) | |
| bit C | Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) (oH3) | |
| bit D | Digital Operator Connection Fault (oPr) | |
| bit E | EEPROM Write Error (Err) | |
| bit F | Motor Overheat Fault (PTC thermistor input) (oH4) | |
| 00C2H | Fault Contents 5 | |
| bit 0 | MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE) | |
| bit 1 | Option Communication Error (bUS) | |
| bit 2, 3 | Reserved | |
| bit 4 | Control Fault (CF) | |
| bit 5 | Position Lock Error (SvE) | |
| bit 6 | Option External Fault (EF0) | |
| bit 7 | Reserved | |
| bit 8 | Undertorque Detection 1 (UL3) | |
| bit 9 | Undertorque Detection 2 (UL4) | |
| bit A to E | Reserved | |
| bit F | Hardware Fault (includes oFx) | |
| 00C3H | Fault Contents 6 | |
| bit 0 | Reserved | |
| bit 1 | Z Pulse Fault Detection (dv1) | |
| bit 2 | Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection (dv2) | |
| bit 3 | Inversion Detection (dv3) | |
| bit 4 | Inversion Prevention Detection (dv4) | |
| bit 5 | Current Imbalance (LF2) | |
| bit 6 | Pullout Detection (STo) | |
| bit 7 | Option Card Hardware Fault (PGoH) | |
| bit 8 to F | Reserved | |
| 00C4H | Fault Contents 7 | |
| bit 0 to 4 | Reserved | |
| bit 5 | Current Offset Fault (CoF) | |
| bit 6 to B | Reserved | |
| bit C | Output Voltage Detection Fault (voF) | |
| bit D | Reserved | |
| bit E | Braking Transistor Overload Fault (boL) | |
| bit F | Reserved | |
| 00C5H | Fault Contents 8 | |
| bit 0 to 3 | Reserved | |
| bit 4 | Overacceleration (dv6) | |
| bit 5 to F | Reserved | |
| 00C6H, 00C7H | Reserved | |
| 00C8H | Alarm Contents 2 | |
| bit 0 | Undervoltage (Uv) | |
| bit 1 | Overvoltage (ov) | |
| bit 2 | Heatsink Overheat (oH) | |
| bit 3 | Reserved | |
| bit 4 | Overtorque 1 (oL3) | |
| bit 5 | Overtorque 2 (oL4) | |
| bit 6 | Up/Down commands Input Error (EF) | |
| bit 7 | Drive Baseblock (bb) | |
| bit 8 | External Fault 3, input terminal S3 (EF3) | |
| bit 9 | External Fault 4, input terminal S4 (EF4) | |
| bit A | External Fault 5, input terminal S5 (EF5) | |
| bit B | External Fault 6, input terminal S6 (EF6) | |
| bit C | External Fault 7, input terminal S7 (EF7) | |
| bit D | External Fault 8, input terminal S8 (EF8) | |
| bit E | Reserved | |
| bit F | Overspeed (oS) |
Source page
Page 418
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 418 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
C.9 MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table
Register No. Contents Alarm Contents 3 bit 0 Excessive Speed Deviation (dEv) bit 1 Encoder Disconnected (PGo) bit 2 Digital Operator Connection Fault (oPr) bit 3 MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE) bit 4 Option Communication Error (bUS) bit 5 Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL) bit 6 Motor Overload (oL1) 00C9H bit 7 Drive Overload (oL2) bit 8 Reserved bit 9 Option Card External fault (EF0) bit A Motor 2 Switch command input during run (rUn) bit B Reserved bit C Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL) bit D Undertorque Detection 1 (UL3) bit E Undertorque Detection 2 (UL4) bit F MEMOBUS/Modbus Test Mode Fault (SE) Alarm Contents 4 bit 0 Reserved bit 1 Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) (oH3) 00CAH bit 2 to 9 Reserved bit A Encoder Disconnected (PGo) bit B to F Reserved Alarm Contents 5 bit 0 to 2 Reserved bit 3 High Current Alarm (HCA) bit 4 Cooling Fan Maintenance Time (LT-1) bit 5 Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance Time (LT-2) 00CBH bit 6 Reserved bit 7 SI-S EEPROM Error (EEP) bit 8 to 9 Reserved bit A Safe Disable Input (HbbF) bit B Safe Disable Input (Hbb) bit C to F Reserved Alarm Contents 6 bit 0 Output Voltage Detection Fault (VoF) bit 1 Reserved 00CCH bit 2 Capacitor Maintenance Time (LT-3) bit 3 IGBT Maintenance Time (50%) (LT-4) bit 4 Braking Transistor Overload Fault (boL) bit 5 to F Reserved 00CDH to 00CFH Reserved CPF Contents 1 bit 0, 1 Reserved bit 2 A/D Conversion Error (CPF02) bit 3 PWM Data Fault (CPF03) bit 4, 5 Reserved bit 6 EEPROM Memory Data Error (CPF06) bit 7 Terminal Board Connection Error (CPF07) 00D0H bit 8 EEPROM Serial Communications Fault (CPF08) bit 9, A Reserved bit B RAM Fault (CPF11) bit C FLASH Memory Fault (CPF12) bit D Watchdog Circuit Exception (CPF13) bit E Control Circuit Fault (CPF14) bit F Reserved 418 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Register No. | Contents | Column |
|---|---|---|
| 00C9H | Alarm Contents 3 | |
| bit 0 | Excessive Speed Deviation (dEv) | |
| bit 1 | Encoder Disconnected (PGo) | |
| bit 2 | Digital Operator Connection Fault (oPr) | |
| bit 3 | MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE) | |
| bit 4 | Option Communication Error (bUS) | |
| bit 5 | Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL) | |
| bit 6 | Motor Overload (oL1) | |
| bit 7 | Drive Overload (oL2) | |
| bit 8 | Reserved | |
| bit 9 | Option Card External fault (EF0) | |
| bit A | Motor 2 Switch command input during run (rUn) | |
| bit B | Reserved | |
| bit C | Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL) | |
| bit D | Undertorque Detection 1 (UL3) | |
| bit E | Undertorque Detection 2 (UL4) | |
| bit F | MEMOBUS/Modbus Test Mode Fault (SE) | |
| 00CAH | Alarm Contents 4 | |
| bit 0 | Reserved | |
| bit 1 | Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) (oH3) | |
| bit 2 to 9 | Reserved | |
| bit A | Encoder Disconnected (PGo) | |
| bit B to F | Reserved | |
| 00CBH | Alarm Contents 5 | |
| bit 0 to 2 | Reserved | |
| bit 3 | High Current Alarm (HCA) | |
| bit 4 | Cooling Fan Maintenance Time (LT-1) | |
| bit 5 | Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance Time (LT-2) | |
| bit 6 | Reserved | |
| bit 7 | SI-S EEPROM Error (EEP) | |
| bit 8 to 9 | Reserved | |
| bit A | Safe Disable Input (HbbF) | |
| bit B | Safe Disable Input (Hbb) | |
| bit C to F | Reserved | |
| 00CCH | Alarm Contents 6 | |
| bit 0 | Output Voltage Detection Fault (VoF) | |
| bit 1 | Reserved | |
| bit 2 | Capacitor Maintenance Time (LT-3) | |
| bit 3 | IGBT Maintenance Time (50%) (LT-4) | |
| bit 4 | Braking Transistor Overload Fault (boL) | |
| bit 5 to F | Reserved | |
| 00CDH to 00CFH | Reserved | |
| 00D0H | CPF Contents 1 | |
| bit 0, 1 | Reserved | |
| bit 2 | A/D Conversion Error (CPF02) | |
| bit 3 | PWM Data Fault (CPF03) | |
| bit 4, 5 | Reserved | |
| bit 6 | EEPROM Memory Data Error (CPF06) | |
| bit 7 | Terminal Board Connection Error (CPF07) | |
| bit 8 | EEPROM Serial Communications Fault (CPF08) | |
| bit 9, A | Reserved | |
| bit B | RAM Fault (CPF11) | |
| bit C | FLASH Memory Fault (CPF12) | |
| bit D | Watchdog Circuit Exception (CPF13) | |
| bit E | Control Circuit Fault (CPF14) | |
| bit F | Reserved |
Source page
Page 419
C.9 MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 419 subdoM/SUBOMEM snoitacinummoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 419 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Register No. Contents CPF Contents 2 bit 0 Clock Fault (CPF16) bit 1 Timing Fault (CPF17) bit 2 Control Circuit Fault (CPF18) bit 3 Control Circuit Fault (CPF19) bit 4 Hardware fault at power up (CPF20) bit 5 Hardware fault at communication start up (CPF21) bit 6 A/D Conversion Fault (CPF22) 00D1H bit 7 PWM Feedback Fault (CPF23) bit 8 Drive Unit Signal Fault (CPF24) bit 9 Terminal board is not properly connected. (CPF25) bit A ASIC BB Circuit Error (CPF26) bit B ASIC PWM Setting Register Error (CPF27) bit C ASIC PWM Pattern Error (CPF28) bit D ASIC On-delay Error (CPF29) bit E ASIC BBON Error (CPF30) bit F ASIC Code Error (CPF31) bit 0 ASIC Start-up Error (CPF32) bit 1 Watch-dog Error (CPF33) 00D2H bit 2 ASIC Power/Clock Error (CPF34) bit 3 External A/D Converter Error (CPF35) bit 4 to F Reserved 00D3H to 00D7H oFA0x Contents (CN5-A) oFA0x Contents (CN5-A) bit 0 Option Compatibility Error (oFA00) bit 1 Option not properly connected (oFA01) 00D8H bit 2 to 4 Reserved bit 5 A/D Conversion Error (oFA05) bit 6 Option Response Error (oFA06) bit 7 to F Reserved oFA1x Contents (CN5-A) bit 0 Option RAM Fault (oFA10) bit 1 Option Operation Mode Fault (SLMOD) (oFA11) bit 2 Drive Receive CRC Error (oFA12) bit 3 Drive Receive Frame Error (oFA13) 00D9H bit 4 Drive Receive Abort Error (oFA14) bit 5 Option Receive CRC Error (oFA15) bit 6 Option Receive Frame Error (oFA16) bit 7 Option Receive Abort Error (oFA17) bit 8 to F Reserved 00DAH to 00DBH Reserved oFA3x Contents (CN5-A) bit 0 Comm. ID Error (oFA30) bit 1 Model Code Error (oFA31) bit 2 Sumcheck Error (oFA32) bit 3 Comm. option timeout waiting for response (oFA33) bit 4 MEMOBUS Timeout (oFA34) bit 5 Drive timeout waiting for response (oFA35) bit 6 CI Check Error (oFA36) 00DBH bit 7 Drive timeout waiting for response (oFA37) bit 8 Control Command Selection Error (oFA38) bit 9 Drive timeout waiting for response (oFA39) bit A Control Response Selection 1 Error (oFA40) bit B Drive timeout waiting for response (oFA41) bit C Control Response Selection 2 Error (oFA42) bit D Control Response Selection Error (oFA43) bit E, F Reserved oFb0x Contents (CN5-B) bit 0 Option compatibility error (oFb00) bit 1 Option not properly connected (oFb01) bit 2 Same type of option card already connected (oFb02) 00DCH bit 3, 4 Reserved bit 5 A/D Conversion Fault (oFb05) bit 6 Option Response Error (oFb06) bit 7 to F Reserved C
| Register No. | Contents | Column |
|---|---|---|
| 00D1H | CPF Contents 2 | |
| bit 0 | Clock Fault (CPF16) | |
| bit 1 | Timing Fault (CPF17) | |
| bit 2 | Control Circuit Fault (CPF18) | |
| bit 3 | Control Circuit Fault (CPF19) | |
| bit 4 | Hardware fault at power up (CPF20) | |
| bit 5 | Hardware fault at communication start up (CPF21) | |
| bit 6 | A/D Conversion Fault (CPF22) | |
| bit 7 | PWM Feedback Fault (CPF23) | |
| bit 8 | Drive Unit Signal Fault (CPF24) | |
| bit 9 | Terminal board is not properly connected. (CPF25) | |
| bit A | ASIC BB Circuit Error (CPF26) | |
| bit B | ASIC PWM Setting Register Error (CPF27) | |
| bit C | ASIC PWM Pattern Error (CPF28) | |
| bit D | ASIC On-delay Error (CPF29) | |
| bit E | ASIC BBON Error (CPF30) | |
| bit F | ASIC Code Error (CPF31) | |
| 00D2H | bit 0 | ASIC Start-up Error (CPF32) |
| bit 1 | Watch-dog Error (CPF33) | |
| bit 2 | ASIC Power/Clock Error (CPF34) | |
| bit 3 | External A/D Converter Error (CPF35) | |
| bit 4 to F | Reserved | |
| 00D3H to 00D7H | oFA0x Contents (CN5-A) | |
| 00D8H | oFA0x Contents (CN5-A) | |
| bit 0 | Option Compatibility Error (oFA00) | |
| bit 1 | Option not properly connected (oFA01) | |
| bit 2 to 4 | Reserved | |
| bit 5 | A/D Conversion Error (oFA05) | |
| bit 6 | Option Response Error (oFA06) | |
| bit 7 to F | Reserved | |
| 00D9H | oFA1x Contents (CN5-A) | |
| bit 0 | Option RAM Fault (oFA10) | |
| bit 1 | Option Operation Mode Fault (SLMOD) (oFA11) | |
| bit 2 | Drive Receive CRC Error (oFA12) | |
| bit 3 | Drive Receive Frame Error (oFA13) | |
| bit 4 | Drive Receive Abort Error (oFA14) | |
| bit 5 | Option Receive CRC Error (oFA15) | |
| bit 6 | Option Receive Frame Error (oFA16) | |
| bit 7 | Option Receive Abort Error (oFA17) | |
| bit 8 to F | Reserved | |
| 00DAH to 00DBH | Reserved | |
| 00DBH | oFA3x Contents (CN5-A) | |
| bit 0 | Comm. ID Error (oFA30) | |
| bit 1 | Model Code Error (oFA31) | |
| bit 2 | Sumcheck Error (oFA32) | |
| bit 3 | Comm. option timeout waiting for response (oFA33) | |
| bit 4 | MEMOBUS Timeout (oFA34) | |
| bit 5 | Drive timeout waiting for response (oFA35) | |
| bit 6 | CI Check Error (oFA36) | |
| bit 7 | Drive timeout waiting for response (oFA37) | |
| bit 8 | Control Command Selection Error (oFA38) | |
| bit 9 | Drive timeout waiting for response (oFA39) | |
| bit A | Control Response Selection 1 Error (oFA40) | |
| bit B | Drive timeout waiting for response (oFA41) | |
| bit C | Control Response Selection 2 Error (oFA42) | |
| bit D | Control Response Selection Error (oFA43) | |
| bit E, F | Reserved | |
| 00DCH | oFb0x Contents (CN5-B) | |
| bit 0 | Option compatibility error (oFb00) | |
| bit 1 | Option not properly connected (oFb01) | |
| bit 2 | Same type of option card already connected (oFb02) | |
| bit 3, 4 | Reserved | |
| bit 5 | A/D Conversion Fault (oFb05) | |
| bit 6 | Option Response Error (oFb06) | |
| bit 7 to F | Reserved |
Source page
Page 420
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 420 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
C.9 MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table
Register No. Contents oFb1x Contents (CN5-B) bit 0 Option RAM Fault (oFb10) bit 1 Option Operation Mode Fault (SLMOD) (oFb11) bit 2 Drive Receive CRC Error (oFb12) bit 3 Drive Receive Frame Error (oFb13) 00DDH bit 4 Drive Receive Abort Error (oFb14) bit 5 Option Receive CRC Error (oFb15) bit 6 Option Receive Frame Error (oFb16) bit 7 Option Receive Abort Error (oFb17) bit 8 to F Reserved 00DEH to 00DFH Reserved oFb3x Contents (CN5-B) bit 0 Comm. ID Error (oFb30) bit 1 Model Code Error (oFb31) bit 2 Sumcheck Error (oFb32) bit 3 Comm. option timeout waiting for response (oFb33) bit 4 MEMOBUS Timeout (oFb34) bit 5 Drive timeout waiting for response (oFb35) bit 6 CI Check Error (oFb36) 00E0H bit 7 Drive timeout waiting for response (oFb37) bit 8 Control Command Selection Error (oFb38) bit 9 Drive timeout waiting for response (oFb39) bit A Control Response Selection 1 Error (oFb40) bit B Drive timeout waiting for response (oFb41) bit C Control Response Selection 2 Error (oFb42) bit D Control Response Selection Error (oFb43) bit E, F Reserved oFC0x Contents (CN5-C) bit 0 Option compatibility error (oFC00) bit 1 Option not properly connected (oFC01) bit 2 Same type of option card already connected (oFC02) 00E1H bit 3, 4 Reserved bit 5 A/D Conversion Fault (oFC05) bit 6 Option Response Error (oFC06) bit 7 to F Reserved oFC1x Contents (CN5-C) bit 0 Option RAM Fault (oFC10) bit 1 Option Operation Mode Fault (SLMOD) (oFC11) bit 2 Drive Receive CRC Error (oFC12) bit 3 Drive Receive Frame Error (oFC13) 00E2H bit 4 Drive Receive Abort Error (oFC14) bit 5 Option Receive CRC Error (oFC15) bit 6 Option Receive Frame Error (oFC16) bit 7 Option Receive Abort Error (oFC17) bit 8 to F Reserved 00E3H Reserved oFC5x Contents (CN5-C) bit 0 oFC50 (Encoder Option AD Conversion Error) bit 1 oFC51 (Encoder Option Analog Circuit Error) 00E4H bit 2 oFC52 (Encoder Communication Timeout) bit 3 oFC53 (Encoder Communication Data Error) bit 4 oFC54 (Encoder Error) bit 5 to F Reserved 00E5H Reserved Fault Contents 9 bit 0-D Reserved 00EAH bit E Safety Circuit Fault (SCF) bit F Reserved 00EBH to 00FFH Reserved <1> Parameter o1-03, Digital Operator Display Selection, determines the units. <2> The display resolution depends on the rated output power of the drive. Models CIMR-L20008 to 20033 and 40005 to 40018 display values in 0.01 A units, while models CIMR-L20047 to 20415 and 40024 to 40216 display values in 0.1 A units. <3> Communication error contents are saved until the fault is reset. <4> Set the number of motor poles to parameter E2-04, E4-04, or E5-05 depending on the motor being used. 420 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Register No. | Contents | Column |
|---|---|---|
| 00DDH | oFb1x Contents (CN5-B) | |
| bit 0 | Option RAM Fault (oFb10) | |
| bit 1 | Option Operation Mode Fault (SLMOD) (oFb11) | |
| bit 2 | Drive Receive CRC Error (oFb12) | |
| bit 3 | Drive Receive Frame Error (oFb13) | |
| bit 4 | Drive Receive Abort Error (oFb14) | |
| bit 5 | Option Receive CRC Error (oFb15) | |
| bit 6 | Option Receive Frame Error (oFb16) | |
| bit 7 | Option Receive Abort Error (oFb17) | |
| bit 8 to F | Reserved | |
| 00DEH to 00DFH | Reserved | |
| 00E0H | oFb3x Contents (CN5-B) | |
| bit 0 | Comm. ID Error (oFb30) | |
| bit 1 | Model Code Error (oFb31) | |
| bit 2 | Sumcheck Error (oFb32) | |
| bit 3 | Comm. option timeout waiting for response (oFb33) | |
| bit 4 | MEMOBUS Timeout (oFb34) | |
| bit 5 | Drive timeout waiting for response (oFb35) | |
| bit 6 | CI Check Error (oFb36) | |
| bit 7 | Drive timeout waiting for response (oFb37) | |
| bit 8 | Control Command Selection Error (oFb38) | |
| bit 9 | Drive timeout waiting for response (oFb39) | |
| bit A | Control Response Selection 1 Error (oFb40) | |
| bit B | Drive timeout waiting for response (oFb41) | |
| bit C | Control Response Selection 2 Error (oFb42) | |
| bit D | Control Response Selection Error (oFb43) | |
| bit E, F | Reserved | |
| 00E1H | oFC0x Contents (CN5-C) | |
| bit 0 | Option compatibility error (oFC00) | |
| bit 1 | Option not properly connected (oFC01) | |
| bit 2 | Same type of option card already connected (oFC02) | |
| bit 3, 4 | Reserved | |
| bit 5 | A/D Conversion Fault (oFC05) | |
| bit 6 | Option Response Error (oFC06) | |
| bit 7 to F | Reserved | |
| 00E2H | oFC1x Contents (CN5-C) | |
| bit 0 | Option RAM Fault (oFC10) | |
| bit 1 | Option Operation Mode Fault (SLMOD) (oFC11) | |
| bit 2 | Drive Receive CRC Error (oFC12) | |
| bit 3 | Drive Receive Frame Error (oFC13) | |
| bit 4 | Drive Receive Abort Error (oFC14) | |
| bit 5 | Option Receive CRC Error (oFC15) | |
| bit 6 | Option Receive Frame Error (oFC16) | |
| bit 7 | Option Receive Abort Error (oFC17) | |
| bit 8 to F | Reserved | |
| 00E3H | Reserved | |
| 00E4H | oFC5x Contents (CN5-C) | |
| bit 0 | oFC50 (Encoder Option AD Conversion Error) | |
| bit 1 | oFC51 (Encoder Option Analog Circuit Error) | |
| bit 2 | oFC52 (Encoder Communication Timeout) | |
| bit 3 | oFC53 (Encoder Communication Data Error) | |
| bit 4 | oFC54 (Encoder Error) | |
| bit 5 to F | Reserved | |
| 00E5H | Reserved | |
| 00EAH | Fault Contents 9 | |
| bit 0-D | Reserved | |
| bit E | Safety Circuit Fault (SCF) | |
| bit F | Reserved | |
| 00EBH to 00FFH | Reserved |
Source page
Page 421
C.9 MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 421 subdoM/SUBOMEM snoitacinummoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 421 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Broadcast Messages Data can be written from the master to all slave devices at the same time. The slave address in a broadcast command message must be set to 00H. All slaves will receive the message, but will not respond. Register No. Contents Digital Input Command bit 0 Up/Down Command (0: Run 1: Stop) bit 1 Direction Command (0: Down, 1: Up) bit 2, 3 Reserved bit 4 External Fault 0001H bit 5 Fault Reset bit 6 to B Reserved bit C Multi-Function Digital Input S5 bit D Multi-Function Digital Input S6 bit E Multi-Function Digital Input S7 bit F Multi-Function Digital Input S8 0002H Speed Reference 100% Fault Trace Contents The table below shows the fault codes that can be read out by MEMOBUS/Modbus commands from the U2- monitor parameters. Table C.4 Fault Trace / History Register Contents Fault Code Fault Name Fault Code Fault Name 0002H Undervoltage (Uv1) 009BH ASIC BB Circuit Error (CPF26) 0003H Control Power Supply Undervoltage (Uv2) 009DH ASIC PWM Pattern Error (CPF28) 0004H Soft Charge Circuit Fault (Uv3) 009EH ASIC On-Delay Error (CPF29) 0005H Short Circuit (SC) 009FH ASIC BBON Error (CPF30) 0006H Ground Fault (GF) 00A0H ASIC Code Error (CPF31) 0007H Overcurrent (oC) 00A1H ASIC Start-p Error (CPF32) 0008H Overvoltage (ov) 00A2H Watch-dog Error (CPF33) 0009H Heatsink Overheat (oH) 00A3H ASIC Power/Clock Error (CPF34) 000AH Heatsink Overheat (oH1) 00A4H External A/D Converter Error (CPF35) 000BH Motor Overload (oL1) 0101H Option compatibility error (oFA00) 000CH Drive Overload (oL2) 0102H Option not properly connected (oFA01) 000DH Overtorque Detection 1 (oL3) 0106H A/D Conversion Error (oFA05) 000EH Overtorque Detection 2 (oL4) 0107H Option Response Error (oFA06) 000FH Dynamic Braking Transistor (rr) 009CH ASIC PWM Setting Register Error (CPF27) 0011H External Fault at input terminal S3 (EF3) 0111H Option RAM Fault (oFA10) 0012H External Fault at input terminal S4 (EF4) 0112H Option Operation Mode Fault (SLMOD) (oFA11) 0013H External Fault at input terminal S5 (EF5) 0113H Drive Receive CRC Error (oFA12) 0014H External Fault at input terminal S6 (EF6) 0114H Drive Receive Frame Error (oFA13) 0015H External Fault at input terminal S7 (EF7) 0115H Drive Receive Abort Error (oFA14) 0016H External Fault at input terminal S8 (EF8) 0116H Option Receive CRC Error (oFA15) 0018H Overspeed (oS) 0117H Option Receive Frame Error (oFA16) 0019H Excessive Speed Deviation (dEv) 0118H Option Receive Abort Error (oFA17) 001AH Encoder Disconnect (PGo) 0131H Comm. ID Error (oFA30) 001BH Input Phase Loss (PF) 0132H Model Code Error (oFA31) 001CH Output Phase Loss (LF) 0133H Sumcheck Error (oFA32) 001DH Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) (oH3) 0134H Comm. option timeout waiting for response (oFA33) 001EH Digital Operator Connection (oPr) 0135H MEMOBUS Timeout (oFA34) 001FH EEPROM Write Error (Err) 0136H Drive timeout waiting for response (oFA35) 0020H Motor Overheat Fault (PTC thermistor input) (oH4) 0137H CI Check Error (oFA36) 0021H MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE) 0138H Drive timeout waiting for response (oFA37) 0022H Option Communication Error (bUS) 0139H Control Command Selection Error (oFA38) 0025H Control fault (CF) 013AH Drive timeout waiting for response (oFA39) 0026H Position Lock Error (SvE) 013BH Control Response Selection 1 Error (oFA40) 0027H Option External Fault (EF0) 013CH Drive timeout waiting for response (oFA41) 0029H Undertorque Detection 1 (UL3) 013DH Control Response Selection 2 Error (oFA42) C 002AH Undertorque Detection 2 (UL4) 013EH Control Response Selection Error (oFA43) 0030H Hardware Fault (including oFx) 0201H Option Connection Error (oFb01)
| Register No. | Contents | Column |
|---|---|---|
| 0001H | Digital Input Command | |
| bit 0 | Up/Down Command (0: Run 1: Stop) | |
| bit 1 | Direction Command (0: Down, 1: Up) | |
| bit 2, 3 | Reserved | |
| bit 4 | External Fault | |
| bit 5 | Fault Reset | |
| bit 6 to B | Reserved | |
| bit C | Multi-Function Digital Input S5 | |
| bit D | Multi-Function Digital Input S6 | |
| bit E | Multi-Function Digital Input S7 | |
| bit F | Multi-Function Digital Input S8 | |
| 0002H | Speed Reference | 100% |
| Fault Code | Fault Name | Fault Code | Fault Name |
|---|---|---|---|
| 0002H | Undervoltage (Uv1) | 009BH | ASIC BB Circuit Error (CPF26) |
| 0003H | Control Power Supply Undervoltage (Uv2) | 009DH | ASIC PWM Pattern Error (CPF28) |
| 0004H | Soft Charge Circuit Fault (Uv3) | 009EH | ASIC On-Delay Error (CPF29) |
| 0005H | Short Circuit (SC) | 009FH | ASIC BBON Error (CPF30) |
| 0006H | Ground Fault (GF) | 00A0H | ASIC Code Error (CPF31) |
| 0007H | Overcurrent (oC) | 00A1H | ASIC Start-p Error (CPF32) |
| 0008H | Overvoltage (ov) | 00A2H | Watch-dog Error (CPF33) |
| 0009H | Heatsink Overheat (oH) | 00A3H | ASIC Power/Clock Error (CPF34) |
| 000AH | Heatsink Overheat (oH1) | 00A4H | External A/D Converter Error (CPF35) |
| 000BH | Motor Overload (oL1) | 0101H | Option compatibility error (oFA00) |
| 000CH | Drive Overload (oL2) | 0102H | Option not properly connected (oFA01) |
| 000DH | Overtorque Detection 1 (oL3) | 0106H | A/D Conversion Error (oFA05) |
| 000EH | Overtorque Detection 2 (oL4) | 0107H | Option Response Error (oFA06) |
| 000FH | Dynamic Braking Transistor (rr) | 009CH | ASIC PWM Setting Register Error (CPF27) |
| 0011H | External Fault at input terminal S3 (EF3) | 0111H | Option RAM Fault (oFA10) |
| 0012H | External Fault at input terminal S4 (EF4) | 0112H | Option Operation Mode Fault (SLMOD) (oFA11) |
| 0013H | External Fault at input terminal S5 (EF5) | 0113H | Drive Receive CRC Error (oFA12) |
| 0014H | External Fault at input terminal S6 (EF6) | 0114H | Drive Receive Frame Error (oFA13) |
| 0015H | External Fault at input terminal S7 (EF7) | 0115H | Drive Receive Abort Error (oFA14) |
| 0016H | External Fault at input terminal S8 (EF8) | 0116H | Option Receive CRC Error (oFA15) |
| 0018H | Overspeed (oS) | 0117H | Option Receive Frame Error (oFA16) |
| 0019H | Excessive Speed Deviation (dEv) | 0118H | Option Receive Abort Error (oFA17) |
| 001AH | Encoder Disconnect (PGo) | 0131H | Comm. ID Error (oFA30) |
| 001BH | Input Phase Loss (PF) | 0132H | Model Code Error (oFA31) |
| 001CH | Output Phase Loss (LF) | 0133H | Sumcheck Error (oFA32) |
| 001DH | Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) (oH3) | 0134H | Comm. option timeout waiting for response (oFA33) |
| 001EH | Digital Operator Connection (oPr) | 0135H | MEMOBUS Timeout (oFA34) |
| 001FH | EEPROM Write Error (Err) | 0136H | Drive timeout waiting for response (oFA35) |
| 0020H | Motor Overheat Fault (PTC thermistor input) (oH4) | 0137H | CI Check Error (oFA36) |
| 0021H | MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE) | 0138H | Drive timeout waiting for response (oFA37) |
| 0022H | Option Communication Error (bUS) | 0139H | Control Command Selection Error (oFA38) |
| 0025H | Control fault (CF) | 013AH | Drive timeout waiting for response (oFA39) |
| 0026H | Position Lock Error (SvE) | 013BH | Control Response Selection 1 Error (oFA40) |
| 0027H | Option External Fault (EF0) | 013CH | Drive timeout waiting for response (oFA41) |
| 0029H | Undertorque Detection 1 (UL3) | 013DH | Control Response Selection 2 Error (oFA42) |
| 002AH | Undertorque Detection 2 (UL4) | 013EH | Control Response Selection Error (oFA43) |
| 0030H | Hardware Fault (including oFx) | 0201H | Option Connection Error (oFb01) |
Source page
Page 422
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 422 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
C.9 MEMOBUS/Modbus Data Table
Fault Code Fault Name Fault Code Fault Name 0032H Z Pulse Fall Detection (dv1) 0202H Same type of option card already connected (oFb02) 0033H Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection (dv2) 0205H A/D Conversion Error (oFb05) 0034H Inversion Detection (dv3) 0206H Option Response Error (oFb06) 0035H Inversion Prevention Detection (dv4) 0210H Option RAM Fault (oFb10) 0036H Output Current Imbalance (LF2) 0211H Option Operation Mode Fault (SLMOD) (oFb11) 0037H Pullout Detection (Sto) 0212H Drive Receive CRC Error (oFb12) 0038H PG Option Card Hardware Fault 0213H Drive Receive Frame Error (oFb13) 0046H Current Offset Fault (CoF) 0214H Drive Receive Abort Error (oFb14) 004DH Output Voltage Detection Fault (voF) 0215H Option Receive CRC Error (oFb15) 0054H Overacceleration (dv6) 0216H Option Receive Frame Error (oFb16) 0055H Motor Contactor Response Error (SE1) 0217H Option Receive Abort Error (oFb17) 0056H Starting Current Error (SE2) 0231H Comm. ID Error (oFb30) 0057H Output Current Error (SE3) 0232H Model Code Error (oFb31) 0058H Brake Feedback Error (SE4) 0233H Sumcheck Error (oFb32) 0059H Reference Missing (FrL) 0234H Comm. option timeout waiting for response (oFb33) 005BH Initial magnet Pole Search Overtime (dv7) 0235H MEMOBUS Timeout (oFb34) 005DH Initial magnet Pole Search Error (dv8) 0236H Drive timeout waiting for response (oFb35) 0083H A/D Conversion Error (CPF02) 0237H CI Check Error (oFb36) 0084H PWM Data Fault (CPF03) 0238H Drive timeout waiting for response (oFb37) 0087H EEPROM Memory Data Error (CPF06) 0239H Control Command Selection Error (oFb38) 0088H Terminal Board Connection Error (CPF07) 023AH Drive timeout waiting for response (oFb39) 0089H EEPROM Serial Communication Fault (CPF08) 023BH Control Response Selection 1 Error (oFb40) 008CH RAM Fault (CPF11) 023CH Drive timeout waiting for response (oFb41) 008DH Flash Memory Circuit Exception (CPF12) 023DH Control Response Selection 2 Error (oFb42) 008EH Watchdog Circuit Exception (CPF13) 023EH Control Response Selection Error (oFb43) 008FH Control Circuit Fault (CPF14) 0300H Option Compatibility Error (oFC00) 0091H Clock Fault (CPF16) 0301H Option not properly connected (oFC01) 0092H Timing Fault (CPF17) 0302H Same type of option card already connected (oFC02) 0093H Control Circuit Fault (CPF18) 0305H A/D Conversion Error (oFC05) 0094H Control Circuit Fault (CPF19) 0306H Option Response Error (oFC06) 0095H Hardware fault at power up (CPF20) 0351H Encoder Option A/D Conversion Error (OFC50) 0096H Hardware fault at communication start up (CPF21) 0352H Encoder Option Analog Circuit Error (OFC51) 0097H A/D Conversion Fault (CPF22) 0353H Encoder Communications Timeout (OFC52) 0098H PWM Feedback Fault (CPF23) 0354H Encoder Communications Data Error (OFC53) 0099H Drive Unit Signal Fault (CPF24) 0355H Encoder Error (OFC54) 009AH Terminal board is not properly connected. (CPF25) 040FH Safety Circuit Fault (SCF) Alarm Register Contents The table below shows the alarm codes that can be read out from MEMOBUS/Modbus register 007FH. Table C.5 Alarm Register 007FH Contents Alarm Code Fault Name Alarm Code Fault Name 0001H Undervoltage (Uv) 0017H Motor Overload (oL1) 0002H Overvoltage (ov) 0018H Drive Overload (oL2) 0003H Heatsink Overheat (oH) 001AH Option Card External Fault (EF0) 0005H Overtorque 1 (oL3) 001DH Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL) 0006H Overtorque 2 (oL4) 001EH Undertorque Detection 1 (UL3) 0007H Up/Down commands input error (EF) 001FH Undertorque Detection 2 (UL4) 0008H Drive Baseblock (bb) 0020H MEMOBUS/Modbus Test Mode Fault (SE) 0009H External Fault at input terminal S3 (EF3) 0022H Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) (oH3) 000AH External Fault at input terminal S4 (EF4) 002BH Encoder Disconnected (PGo) 000BH External Fault at input terminal S5 (EF5) 0034H High Current Alarm (HCA) 000CH External Fault at input terminal S6 (EF6) 0035H Cooling Fan Maintenance Time (LT-1) 000DH External Fault at input terminal S7 (EF7) 0036H Capacitor Maintenance Time (LT-2) 000EH External Fault at input terminal S8 (EF8) 0038H SI-S EEPROM Error (EEP) 0010H Overspeed (oS) 003BH Safe Disable Input (HbbF) 0011H Excessive Speed Deviation (dEv) 003CH Safe Disable Input (Hbb) 0012H Encoder Disconnected (PGo) 0041H Output Voltage Detection Fault (voF) 0014H MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE) 0043H Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance Time (LT-3) 0015H Option Communication Error (bUS) 0044H IGBT Maintenance Time (50%) (LT-4) 0016H Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL) 0045H Braking Transistor Overload (boL) 422 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Fault Code | Fault Name | Fault Code | Fault Name |
|---|---|---|---|
| 0032H | Z Pulse Fall Detection (dv1) | 0202H | Same type of option card already connected (oFb02) |
| 0033H | Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection (dv2) | 0205H | A/D Conversion Error (oFb05) |
| 0034H | Inversion Detection (dv3) | 0206H | Option Response Error (oFb06) |
| 0035H | Inversion Prevention Detection (dv4) | 0210H | Option RAM Fault (oFb10) |
| 0036H | Output Current Imbalance (LF2) | 0211H | Option Operation Mode Fault (SLMOD) (oFb11) |
| 0037H | Pullout Detection (Sto) | 0212H | Drive Receive CRC Error (oFb12) |
| 0038H | PG Option Card Hardware Fault | 0213H | Drive Receive Frame Error (oFb13) |
| 0046H | Current Offset Fault (CoF) | 0214H | Drive Receive Abort Error (oFb14) |
| 004DH | Output Voltage Detection Fault (voF) | 0215H | Option Receive CRC Error (oFb15) |
| 0054H | Overacceleration (dv6) | 0216H | Option Receive Frame Error (oFb16) |
| 0055H | Motor Contactor Response Error (SE1) | 0217H | Option Receive Abort Error (oFb17) |
| 0056H | Starting Current Error (SE2) | 0231H | Comm. ID Error (oFb30) |
| 0057H | Output Current Error (SE3) | 0232H | Model Code Error (oFb31) |
| 0058H | Brake Feedback Error (SE4) | 0233H | Sumcheck Error (oFb32) |
| 0059H | Reference Missing (FrL) | 0234H | Comm. option timeout waiting for response (oFb33) |
| 005BH | Initial magnet Pole Search Overtime (dv7) | 0235H | MEMOBUS Timeout (oFb34) |
| 005DH | Initial magnet Pole Search Error (dv8) | 0236H | Drive timeout waiting for response (oFb35) |
| 0083H | A/D Conversion Error (CPF02) | 0237H | CI Check Error (oFb36) |
| 0084H | PWM Data Fault (CPF03) | 0238H | Drive timeout waiting for response (oFb37) |
| 0087H | EEPROM Memory Data Error (CPF06) | 0239H | Control Command Selection Error (oFb38) |
| 0088H | Terminal Board Connection Error (CPF07) | 023AH | Drive timeout waiting for response (oFb39) |
| 0089H | EEPROM Serial Communication Fault (CPF08) | 023BH | Control Response Selection 1 Error (oFb40) |
| 008CH | RAM Fault (CPF11) | 023CH | Drive timeout waiting for response (oFb41) |
| 008DH | Flash Memory Circuit Exception (CPF12) | 023DH | Control Response Selection 2 Error (oFb42) |
| 008EH | Watchdog Circuit Exception (CPF13) | 023EH | Control Response Selection Error (oFb43) |
| 008FH | Control Circuit Fault (CPF14) | 0300H | Option Compatibility Error (oFC00) |
| 0091H | Clock Fault (CPF16) | 0301H | Option not properly connected (oFC01) |
| 0092H | Timing Fault (CPF17) | 0302H | Same type of option card already connected (oFC02) |
| 0093H | Control Circuit Fault (CPF18) | 0305H | A/D Conversion Error (oFC05) |
| 0094H | Control Circuit Fault (CPF19) | 0306H | Option Response Error (oFC06) |
| 0095H | Hardware fault at power up (CPF20) | 0351H | Encoder Option A/D Conversion Error (OFC50) |
| 0096H | Hardware fault at communication start up (CPF21) | 0352H | Encoder Option Analog Circuit Error (OFC51) |
| 0097H | A/D Conversion Fault (CPF22) | 0353H | Encoder Communications Timeout (OFC52) |
| 0098H | PWM Feedback Fault (CPF23) | 0354H | Encoder Communications Data Error (OFC53) |
| 0099H | Drive Unit Signal Fault (CPF24) | 0355H | Encoder Error (OFC54) |
| 009AH | Terminal board is not properly connected. (CPF25) | 040FH | Safety Circuit Fault (SCF) |
| Alarm Code | Fault Name | Alarm Code | Fault Name |
|---|---|---|---|
| 0001H | Undervoltage (Uv) | 0017H | Motor Overload (oL1) |
| 0002H | Overvoltage (ov) | 0018H | Drive Overload (oL2) |
| 0003H | Heatsink Overheat (oH) | 001AH | Option Card External Fault (EF0) |
| 0005H | Overtorque 1 (oL3) | 001DH | Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL) |
| 0006H | Overtorque 2 (oL4) | 001EH | Undertorque Detection 1 (UL3) |
| 0007H | Up/Down commands input error (EF) | 001FH | Undertorque Detection 2 (UL4) |
| 0008H | Drive Baseblock (bb) | 0020H | MEMOBUS/Modbus Test Mode Fault (SE) |
| 0009H | External Fault at input terminal S3 (EF3) | 0022H | Motor Overheat Alarm (PTC thermistor input) (oH3) |
| 000AH | External Fault at input terminal S4 (EF4) | 002BH | Encoder Disconnected (PGo) |
| 000BH | External Fault at input terminal S5 (EF5) | 0034H | High Current Alarm (HCA) |
| 000CH | External Fault at input terminal S6 (EF6) | 0035H | Cooling Fan Maintenance Time (LT-1) |
| 000DH | External Fault at input terminal S7 (EF7) | 0036H | Capacitor Maintenance Time (LT-2) |
| 000EH | External Fault at input terminal S8 (EF8) | 0038H | SI-S EEPROM Error (EEP) |
| 0010H | Overspeed (oS) | 003BH | Safe Disable Input (HbbF) |
| 0011H | Excessive Speed Deviation (dEv) | 003CH | Safe Disable Input (Hbb) |
| 0012H | Encoder Disconnected (PGo) | 0041H | Output Voltage Detection Fault (voF) |
| 0014H | MEMOBUS/Modbus Communication Error (CE) | 0043H | Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance Time (LT-3) |
| 0015H | Option Communication Error (bUS) | 0044H | IGBT Maintenance Time (50%) (LT-4) |
| 0016H | Serial Communication Transmission Error (CALL) | 0045H | Braking Transistor Overload (boL) |
Source page
Page 423
C.10 Enter Command
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 423 subdoM/SUBOMEM snoitacinummoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 423 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 C.10 Enter Command When writing parameters to the drive from the PLC using MEMOBUS/Modbus communication, parameter H5-11 determines whether an Enter command must be issued to enable these parameters. This section describes the types and functions of the Enter commands. Enter Command Types The drive supports two types of Enter commands as shown in the table below. An Enter command is enabled by writing 0 to register numbers 0900H or 0910H. These registers can only be written to; attempting to read from these registers will cause an error. Table C.6 Enter Command Types Register No. Description 0900H Simultaneously writes data into the EEPROM (non-volatile memory) of the drive and enables the data in RAM. Parameter changes remain after cycling power. 0910H Writes data in the RAM only. Parameter changes are lost when the drive is shut off. Note: Limit the number of times writing to the EEPROM because the EEPROM can only be written to 100,000 times. The Enter command registers are write-only and if these registers are read, the register address will be invalid (Error code: 02H). An Enter command is not required when reference or broadcast data are sent to the drive. Parameter H5-11 and the Enter Command When changing parameters via MEMOBUS/Modbus, H5-11 determines whether an Enter command is necessary to activate parameter changes in the drive. H5-11 Settings H5-11 = 0 H5-11 = 1 How parameter settings are enabled When the Enter command is received from the master. As soon as the value is changed. Upper/lower limit check is performed, taking the settings of related Checks only the upper/lower limits of the parameters that were Upper/lower limit check parameters into account. changed. Not affected. The settings of related parameters remain unchanged. Default value of related parameters They must be changed manually if needed. Default settings of related parameters are changed automatically. Error handling when setting multiple Data is accepted even if one setting is invalid. The invalid setting will Error occurs if only one setting is invalid. All data that was sent are parameters be discarded. No error message occurs. discarded. C
| Register No. | Description |
|---|---|
| 0900H | Simultaneously writes data into the EEPROM (non-volatile memory) of the drive and enables the data in RAM. Parameter changes remain after cycling power. |
| 0910H | Writes data in the RAM only. Parameter changes are lost when the drive is shut off. |
| H5-11 Settings | H5-11 = 0 | H5-11 = 1 |
|---|---|---|
| How parameter settings are enabled | When the Enter command is received from the master. | As soon as the value is changed. |
| Upper/lower limit check | Upper/lower limit check is performed, taking the settings of related parameters into account. | Checks only the upper/lower limits of the parameters that were changed. |
| Default value of related parameters | Not affected. The settings of related parameters remain unchanged. They must be changed manually if needed. | Default settings of related parameters are changed automatically. |
| Error handling when setting multiple parameters | Data is accepted even if one setting is invalid. The invalid setting will be discarded. No error message occurs. | Error occurs if only one setting is invalid. All data that was sent are discarded. |
Source page
Page 424
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 424 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
C.11 Communication Errors
C.11 Communication Errors
MEMOBUS/Modbus Error Codes A list of MEMOBUS/Modbus errors appears below.
When an error occurs, remove whatever caused the error and restart communications.
Error Name Error Code Cause Function Code Error 01H Attempted to set a function code from a PLC other than 03H, 08H, and 10H. Register Number Error 02H • A register number specified in the command message does not exist. • Attempted to send a broadcast message using other register numbers than 0001H or 0002H. Bit Count Error 03H • Read data or write data is greater than 16 bits. Invalid command message quantity. • In a write message, the “Number of Data Items” contained within the message does not equal twice the amount of data words (i.e., the total of Data 1+ Data 2, etc.). Data Setting Error 21H • Control data or parameter write data is outside the allowable setting range. • Attempted to write a contradictory parameter setting. Write Mode Error 22H • During run, the user attempted to write a parameter that cannot be written to during run. • During an EEPROM memory data error (CPF06), the master attempted to write to a parameter other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or o2-04. • Attempted to write to read-only data. DC Bus Undervoltage Write Error 23H During an undervoltage situation, the master attempted to write to parameters that cannot be written to during undervoltage. Write Error During Parameter Process 24H Master attempted writing to the drive while the drive was processing parameter data. Slave Not Responding In the following situations, the slave drive will ignore the command message sent from the master, and not send a response message: • When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message. • When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the drive do not match (remember to set the slave address for the drive using H5-01). • When the gap between two blocks (8-bit) of a message exceeds 24 bits. • When the command message data length is invalid. Note: If the slave address specified in the command message is 00H, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response messages to the master.
424 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Error Code | Error Name |
|---|---|
| Cause | |
| 01H | Function Code Error |
| Attempted to set a function code from a PLC other than 03H, 08H, and 10H. | |
| 02H | Register Number Error |
| • A register number specified in the command message does not exist. • Attempted to send a broadcast message using other register numbers than 0001H or 0002H. | |
| 03H | Bit Count Error |
| • Read data or write data is greater than 16 bits. Invalid command message quantity. • In a write message, the “Number of Data Items” contained within the message does not equal twice the amount of data words (i.e., the total of Data 1+ Data 2, etc.). | |
| 21H | Data Setting Error |
| • Control data or parameter write data is outside the allowable setting range. • Attempted to write a contradictory parameter setting. | |
| 22H | Write Mode Error |
| • During run, the user attempted to write a parameter that cannot be written to during run. • During an EEPROM memory data error (CPF06), the master attempted to write to a parameter other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or o2-04. • Attempted to write to read-only data. | |
| 23H | DC Bus Undervoltage Write Error |
| During an undervoltage situation, the master attempted to write to parameters that cannot be written to during undervoltage. | |
| 24H | Write Error During Parameter Process |
| Master attempted writing to the drive while the drive was processing parameter data. |
Source page
Page 425
C.12 Self-Diagnostics
| V+ AC V- A | 1 A2 FM AM AC | Column | P1 | Column | C1 | Column | P2 | Column | C2 |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| S4 S5 S6 S7 | S8 | SN | SC | SP |
Source page
Page 426
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 426 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
C.12 Self-Diagnostics
426 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 427
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 427 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Appendix: D
Standards Compliance
This appendix explains the guidelines and criteria for maintaining CE and UL standards.
D.1 SECTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 D.2 EUROPEAN STANDARDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 D.3 UL AND CSA STANDARDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 D.4 SAFE DISABLE INPUT FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 D.5 EN81-1/20 CONFORM CIRCUIT WITH ONE MOTOR CONTACTOR. . . . . . . . . 450 D.6 EN81-20 CONFORM CIRCUIT WITH NO MOTOR CONTACTOR . . . . . . . . . . . 451
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 427
Source page
Page 428
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 428 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
D.1 Section Safety
D.1 Section Safety
Do not connect or disconnect wiring or service the drive while the power is on.
Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before touching any components.
WA RNING
Electrical Shock Hazard
Do not operate equipment with covers removed. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual. Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal.
Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case.
Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the equipment. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives. Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing, and wear eye protection before beginning work on the drive. Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
428 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| DANGER |
|---|
| Electrical Shock Hazard Do not connect or disconnect wiring or service the drive while the power is on. Failure to comply will result in death or serious injury. Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. After shutting off the power, wait for at least the amount of time specified on the drive before touching any components. |
| WA RNING |
|---|
| Electrical Shock Hazard Do not operate equipment with covers removed. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. The diagrams in this section may show drives without covers or safety shields to show details. Be sure to reinstall covers or shields before operating the drives and run the drives according to the instructions described in this manual. Always ground the motor-side grounding terminal. Improper equipment grounding could result in death or serious injury by contacting the motor case. Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the equipment. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Maintenance, inspection, and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized personnel familiar with installation, adjustment and maintenance of AC drives. Do not perform work on the drive while wearing loose clothing, jewelry or without eye protection. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings, secure loose clothing, and wear eye protection before beginning work on the drive. Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is on. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury. |
Source page
Page 429
D.1 Section Safety
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 429 sdradnatS ecnailpmoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 429 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 WA RNING Fire Hazard Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque. Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections. Do not use an improper voltage source. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire. Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power. Do not use improper combustible materials in drive installation, repair or maintenance. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire. Attach the drive or braking resistors to metal or other noncombustible material. NOTICE Equipment Hazard Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry. Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage. Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive. Do not use unshielded wire for control wiring. Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive. Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the product. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking circuit. Carefully review instruction manual TOBP C720600 0 when connecting a braking option to the drive. Do not modify the drive circuitry. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified. Check all the wiring to ensure that all connections are correct after installing the drive and connecting other devices. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. D
| WA RNING |
|---|
| Fire Hazard Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque. Loose electrical connections could result in death or serious injury by fire due to overheating of electrical connections. Do not use an improper voltage source. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire. Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power. Do not use improper combustible materials in drive installation, repair or maintenance. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury by fire. Attach the drive or braking resistors to metal or other noncombustible material. |
| NOTICE |
|---|
| Equipment Hazard Observe proper electrostatic discharge procedures (ESD) when handling the drive and circuit boards. Failure to comply may result in ESD damage to the drive circuitry. Never connect or disconnect the motor from the drive while the drive is outputting voltage. Improper equipment sequencing could result in damage to the drive. Do not use unshielded wire for control wiring. Failure to comply may cause electrical interference resulting in poor system performance. Use shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield to the ground terminal of the drive. Do not allow unqualified personnel to use the product. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive or braking circuit. Carefully review instruction manual TOBPC7206000 when connecting a braking option to the drive. Do not modify the drive circuitry. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive and will void warranty. Yaskawa is not responsible for modification of the product made by the user. This product must not be modified. Check all the wiring to ensure that all connections are correct after installing the drive and connecting other devices. Failure to comply could result in damage to the drive. |
Source page
Page 430
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 430 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
D.2 European Standards
D.2 European Standards
FigureD.1
Figure D.1 CE Mark
The CE mark indicates that a product is in compliance with applicable European Directives for safety and environmental regulations. It is required for engaging in business and commerce in Europe. The applicable European Directives for this product are as follows. We declared the CE marking based on the harmonized standards in the following table.
Applicable European Directive Applicable Harmonized Standards Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC) IEC/EN 61800-5-1: 2007 EMC Directive (2004/108/EC) EN 61800-3: 2004/A1: 2012 IEC 61800-3: 2004/A1: 2011 ISO/EN ISO 13849-1/AC: 2009<1> Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC) IEC/EN 62061: 2005 (SILCL3)<1> IEC/EN 61800-5-2: 2007 (SIL3)<1> <1> These standards are in compliance for models CIMR-LF only. The user(s) is solely responsible for ensuring that the end products used with this drive comply with all applicable European directives and with other national regulations (if required). CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance
This drive has been tested according to European standard IEC/EN 61800-5-1, and it fully complies with the Low Voltage Directive.
To comply with the Low Voltage Directive, be sure to meet the following conditions when combining this drive with other devices: Area of Use
Do not use drives in areas with pollution higher than degree 2 and overvoltage category 3 in accordance with EN IEC 60664-1. Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection
Always install fuses at the drive input side. Refer to Input Fuses on page 340 for selecting fuses.
Grounding The drive is designed to be used in T-N (grounded neutral point) networks. If installing the drive in other types of grounded systems, contact your Yaskawa representative for instructions.
CE Standards Compliance for DC Power Supply Input To meet CE standards, the following fuses should be installed. For details, refer to Figure D.2.
430 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Applicable European Directive | Applicable Harmonized Standards |
|---|---|
| Low Voltage Directive (2006/95/EC) | IEC/EN 61800-5-1: 2007 |
| EMC Directive (2004/108/EC) | EN 61800-3: 2004/A1: 2012 IEC 61800-3: 2004/A1: 2011 |
| Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC) | ISO/EN ISO 13849-1/AC: 2009<1> IEC/EN 62061: 2005 (SILCL3)<1> IEC/EN 61800-5-2: 2007 (SIL3)<1> |
Source page
Page 431
D.2 European Standards
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 431 sdradnatS ecnailpmoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 431 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 FigureD.2 DC power supply (converter) Fuse U/T1 + +1 _ _ V/T2 M W/T3 Drive Fuse U/T1 +1 _ V/T2 M W/T3 YEC_common Drive Figure D.2 Example of DC Power Supply Input (two L1000A drives connected in series) Note: 1. When connecting multiple drives together, make sure that each drive has its own fuse. If any one fuse blows, all fuses should be replaced. 2. For an AC power supply, refer to Standard Connection Diagram on page 50. 3. The recommended fuses and fuse holders are made by Fuji Electric. Table D.1 Fuses and Fuse Holders DC Power Supply Input<1> DC Power Supply Input<1> Fuse Fuse Holder Fuse Fuse Holder Drive Model Drive Model CIMR-L Rated CIMR-L Rated Type Sh B o r r e t a -c k i i r n c g u it Qty. Type Qty. Type Sh B o r r e t a -c k i i r n c g u it Qty. Type Qty. Current (kA) Current (kA) 200 V Class 400 V Class 20008 40005 CR2LS-50 20011 2 CM-1A 1 40006 CR6L-50 2 CMS-4 2 20018 CR2LS-100 40009 20025 CR2L-125 40015 CR6L-75 20033 CR2L-150 2 CM-2A 1 40018 20047 CR2L-175 40024 CR6L-100 2 CMS-5 2 20060 CR2L-225 40031 100 CR6L-150 100 20075 CR2L-260 40039 20085 CR2L-300 40045 CR6L-200 20115 CR2L-350 40060 CR6L-250 20145 CR2L-400 40075 2 <2> 20180 CR2L-450 40091 CR6L-300 2 <2> 20215 40112 CR6L-350 CR2L-600 20283 40150 CR6L-400 20346 CS5F-800 40180 200 CS5F-600 200 20415 CS5F-1200 40216 <1> DC is not available for UL standards. <2> Manufacturer does not recommend a specific fuse holder for this fuse. Contact Yaskawa or your nearest sales representative on fuse dimensions. D
| Drive Model CIMR-L | DC Power Supply Input<1> | Column | Column | Column | Column | Drive Model CIMR-L | DC Power Supply Input<1> | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Fuse | Fuse Holder | Fuse | Fuse Holder | ||||||||
| Type | Rated Short-circuit Breaking Current (kA) | Qty. | Type | Qty. | Type | Rated Short-circuit Breaking Current (kA) | Qty. | Type | Qty. | ||
| 200 V Class | 400 V Class | ||||||||||
| 20008 | CR2LS-50 | 100 | 2 | CM-1A | 1 | 40005 | CR6L-50 | 100 | 2 | CMS-4 | 2 |
| 20011 | 40006 | ||||||||||
| 20018 | CR2LS-100 | 40009 | |||||||||
| 20025 | CR2L-125 | 2 | CM-2A | 1 | 40015 | CR6L-75 | 2 | CMS-5 | 2 | ||
| 20033 | CR2L-150 | 40018 | |||||||||
| 20047 | CR2L-175 | 40024 | CR6L-100 | ||||||||
| 20060 | CR2L-225 | 2 | <2> | 40031 | CR6L-150 | ||||||
| 20075 | CR2L-260 | 40039 | |||||||||
| 20085 | CR2L-300 | 40045 | CR6L-200 | 2 | <2> | ||||||
| 20115 | CR2L-350 | 40060 | CR6L-250 | ||||||||
| 20145 | CR2L-400 | 40075 | |||||||||
| 20180 | CR2L-450 | 40091 | CR6L-300 | ||||||||
| 20215 | CR2L-600 | 40112 | CR6L-350 | ||||||||
| 20283 | 40150 | CR6L-400 | |||||||||
| 20346 | CS5F-800 | 200 | 40180 | CS5F-600 | 200 | ||||||
| 20415 | CS5F-1200 | 40216 |
Source page
Page 432
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 432 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
D.2 European Standards
EMC Directive Compliance
This drive is tested according to European standards EN 61800-3, and complies with the EMC Directive. Note: Make sure the protective earthing conductor complies with technical standards and local safety regulations. Because the leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA when an EMC filter is installed, IEC/EN 61800-5-1 states that either the power supply must be automatically disconnected in case of discontinuity of the protective earthing conductor or a protective earthing conductor with a cross-section of at least 10 mm2 (Cu) or 16 mm2 (Al) must be used. EMC Filter Installation
The following conditions must be met to ensure continued compliance with EMC Directive. Refer to EMC Filters on page 434 for EMC filter selection. Installation Method
Verify the following installation conditions to ensure that other devices and machinery used in combination with this drive also comply with EN61800-3. 1. Install an EMC noise filter to the input side specified by Yaskawa for compliance with European standards. 2. Place the drive and EMC noise filter in the same enclosure. 3. Use braided shield cable for the drive and motor wiring, or run the wiring through a metal conduit. 4. Keep wiring as short as possible. Ground the shield on both the drive side and the motor side. FigureD.3 B A D C U/T1 U V/T2 V M W/T3 W
E A - Drive D - Metal conduit B - 10 m max cable length between drive and motor E - Ground wire should be as short as possible. C - Motor
C B
A - Braided shield cable C - Cable clamp (conductive) B - Metal panel Figure D.4 Ground Area
432 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| V/T2 | Column | V |
|---|---|---|
| W/T3 | W |
Source page
Page 433
D.2 European Standards
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 433 sdradnatS ecnailpmoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 433 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Three-Phase 200 V / 400 V Class FigureD.5 L3 L2 Make sure the ground wire is grounded L1 PE Enclosure panel Metal plate Grounding surface (remove any paint or sealant) YEG E LLL333 LLL222 LLL111 Drive EMC noise filter Grounding surface (remove any paint or sealant) Ground plate (scrape off any visible paint) Cable clamp Motor cable (braided shield cable, max. 10 m) Ground the cable shield Motor Figure D.5 EMC Filter and Drive Installation for CE Compliance (Three-Phase 200 V / 400 V Class) D
Source page
Page 434
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 434 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
D.2 European Standards
EMC Filters
Install the drive with the EMC filters below to comply with the IEC/EN 61800-3 requirements. Note: If the Safe Disable function of the drive is part of the safety concept of a machine or installation and used for a safe stop according to EN 60204-1, stop category 0, use these filters recommended by Yaskawa. For all other EMC filters, additional measurements must be performed to prove EMC compatibility. This also applies when using the safe disable function in one motor contactor installations as described in Safe Disable Input Function on page 446. Manufacturer: Schaffner Table D.2 IEC/EN 61800-3 Filters (Manufacturer: Schaffner) Filter Data (Manufacturer: Schaffner)
CI M M o R d - e L l Type Rated ( A C ) urrent W ( e k ig g h ) t D [W im x ( e m n D m s x i ) o H ns ] Y (m x m X ) Figure Three-Phase 200 V Class 20008 FS5972-18-07 18 1.3 141 × 330 × 46 115 × 313 20011 20018 FS5972-35-07 35 2.1 206 × 50 × 355 175 × 336 1 20025 20033 FS5972-60-07 60 4.0 236 × 65 × 408 205 × 390 20047 20060 FS5972-100-35 100 3.4 90 × 150 × 330 65 × 255 20075 20185 FS5972-170-40 170 6.0 120 × 170 × 451 102 × 365 2 20115 20145 FS5972-250-37 250 11.7 130 × 240 × 610 90 × 498 20180 20215 FS5972-410-99 410 10.5 260 × 115 × 386 235 × 120 20283 3 20346 FS5972-600-99 600 11 260 × 135 × 386 235 × 120 20415 Three-Phase 400 V Class 40005 FS5972-10-07 10 1.2 141 × 330 × 46 115 × 313 40006 40009 FS5972-18-07 18 1.3 141 × 46 × 330 115 × 313 40015 40018 FS5972-35-07 35 2.1 206 × 50 × 355 175 × 336 1 40024 40031 40039 FS5972-60-07 60 4 236 × 65 × 408 202 × 390 40045 40060 FS5972-100-35 100 3.4 90 × 150 × 330 65 × 255 2 40075 40091 40112 FS5972-170-35 170 6.0 120 × 170 × 451 102 × 365 2 40150 40180 FS5972-250-37 250 11.7 130 × 240 × 610 90 × 498 40216 FS5972-410-99 410 10.5 260 × 115 × 386 235 × 120 3
434 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Model CIMR-L | Filter Data (Manufacturer: Schaffner) | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Type | Rated Current (A) | Weight (kg) | Dimensions [W x D x H] (mm) | Y x X (mm) | Figure | |
| Three-Phase 200 V Class | ||||||
| 20008 | FS5972-18-07 | 18 | 1.3 | 141 × 330 × 46 | 115 × 313 | 1 |
| 20011 | ||||||
| 20018 | FS5972-35-07 | 35 | 2.1 | 206 × 50 × 355 | 175 × 336 | |
| 20025 | ||||||
| 20033 | FS5972-60-07 | 60 | 4.0 | 236 × 65 × 408 | 205 × 390 | |
| 20047 | ||||||
| 20060 | FS5972-100-35 | 100 | 3.4 | 90 × 150 × 330 | 65 × 255 | 2 |
| 20075 | ||||||
| 20185 | FS5972-170-40 | 170 | 6.0 | 120 × 170 × 451 | 102 × 365 | |
| 20115 | ||||||
| 20145 | FS5972-250-37 | 250 | 11.7 | 130 × 240 × 610 | 90 × 498 | |
| 20180 | ||||||
| 20215 | FS5972-410-99 | 410 | 10.5 | 260 × 115 × 386 | 235 × 120 | 3 |
| 20283 | ||||||
| 20346 | FS5972-600-99 | 600 | 11 | 260 × 135 × 386 | 235 × 120 | |
| 20415 | ||||||
| Three-Phase 400 V Class | ||||||
| 40005 | FS5972-10-07 | 10 | 1.2 | 141 × 330 × 46 | 115 × 313 | 1 |
| 40006 | ||||||
| 40009 | FS5972-18-07 | 18 | 1.3 | 141 × 46 × 330 | 115 × 313 | |
| 40015 | FS5972-35-07 | 35 | 2.1 | 206 × 50 × 355 | 175 × 336 | |
| 40018 | ||||||
| 40024 | ||||||
| 40031 | FS5972-60-07 | 60 | 4 | 236 × 65 × 408 | 202 × 390 | |
| 40039 | ||||||
| 40045 | ||||||
| 40060 | FS5972-100-35 | 100 | 3.4 | 90 × 150 × 330 | 65 × 255 | 2 |
| 40075 | ||||||
| 40091 | FS5972-170-35 | 170 | 6.0 | 120 × 170 × 451 | 102 × 365 | 2 |
| 40112 | ||||||
| 40150 | ||||||
| 40180 | FS5972-250-37 | 250 | 11.7 | 130 × 240 × 610 | 90 × 498 | |
| 40216 | FS5972-410-99 | 410 | 10.5 | 260 × 115 × 386 | 235 × 120 | 3 |
Source page
Page 435
D.2 European Standards
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 435 sdradnatS ecnailpmoC FigureD.6 D Filter Side (LINE) Drive Side (LOAD) Figure D.6 EMC Filter Dimensions Manufacturer: Block Table D.3 IEC/EN 61800-3 Filters (Manufacturer: Block) Filter Data (Manufacturer: Block) CI M M o R d - e L l Type Rated Current (A) W ( e k ig g) ht D [W im ( x e m n D m s x i ) o H ns ] Y x X Figure Three-Phase 200 V Class 20008 FB-40014A 12 2.4 140 × 50 × 301 120 × 285 20011 1 20018 FB-40025A 25 3.0 140 × 55 × 301 120 × 285 20025 20033 FB-40060A 60 4.5 85 × 135 × 310 60 × 255 20047 20060 FB-40072A 72 4.7 85 × 135 × 310 60 × 255 20075 FB-40105A 105 5.3 95 × 150 × 325 65 × 255 2 20085 20115 FB-40170A 170 9.4 130 × 181 × 440 102 × 365 20145 20180 FB-40250A 250 12.4 155 × 220 × 525 125 × 435 D L1 L2 (cid:46)(cid:19) (cid:46)(cid:20) (cid:46)(cid:21) LINE LOAD L2 60A@45°C 25/100/21 3x480/275VAC 50/60Hz FS 5972 - 60 - 07 MADE IN ........ 1L L3 Filter Side (LINE) Filter Side (LINE) Lm 1 N17 L 1 - 51 :EP / mL E N0P3LI2N -N 62E L 2 I :Ee L uqrot dednemLm 3 oc3 L eR (cid:90)(cid:83) 2(cid:90)(cid:78)(cid:83)5(cid:78)(cid:29) 0(cid:29)A F3@xS4485 50°/9 C27 7 255 2V/1 -50 200/5 /6201 0H-z37 (cid:90)(cid:90)(cid:83)(cid:83)(cid:78)(cid:78)(cid:29)(cid:29)fHirisgth c loenankeacgte t oc uerarertnht!, 'LR 1 e1c (cid:90) L o (cid:83) m' (cid:78) m (cid:29)1 e 2 n 3 d 4 e 5 d 6 to 7DL RR r q / u 0 O ePL' 1A : 2 / 2 0 26 A E O8 L - 4 3' 0 0 D RL Nm / PE: 15 L' - 3 173N L m' Drive Side (LOAD) Drive Side (LOAD) H X W Y X H W Y D Figure 1 Figure 2 Y W Figure 3 H D X X YYWWR HIGfiHrs tL cEoAnKnAeGctE t oC UeaRrRthE!NT 3x520/300VAC 50/60Hz 600A@45??C 25/100/21 FS 5972 - 600 - 99 L 3L 3 LLIN2E 1L PE E2NLIL '1L ZuHerOsHt EErRd lAeBiteLrE vITeSrbTiRnOdeMn! '3L L3' PE D LOL 'A2 2A OL 'D L R MADE IN SWITZERLAND SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 435 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 L1 L1'
| Y (cid:46)(cid:19) (cid:46)(cid:20) (cid:46)(cid:21) |
|---|
| LINE 60A@45°C 3x480/275VAC FS 5972 MADE 25/100/21 50/60Hz - 60 - 07 IN ........ LOAD |
| Y |
|---|
| / mL N0P3LI2N -N 62 E 2 :Ee uqrot dednemLm oc3 eR E L I L 3 L 972-250-37 °/C27 255V/1 5000//6201Hz |
| uerarertnht!, RR 67 / 01 / 0840R D LOL 'A2 2A OL 'D L L '3 3 L ' |
| L3 LLIN2E L1 3L 1L PE E2NLIL HIGfiHrs tL cEoAnKnAeGctE 3x520/300VAC FS 5972 MADE YYWWR t oC UeaRrRthE!NT 50/60Hz 600A@45??C 25/100/21 - 600 - 99 ZuHerOsHt EErRd lAeBiteLrE vITeSrbTiRnOdeMn! R IN SWITZERLAND '1L '3L L3' PE D LOL 'A2 2A OL 'D L L1' | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|
| Y |
| Model CIMR-L | Filter Data (Manufacturer: Block) | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Type | Rated Current (A) | Weight (kg) | Dimensions [W x D x H] (mm) | Y x X | Figure | |
| Three-Phase 200 V Class | ||||||
| 20008 | FB-40014A | 12 | 2.4 | 140 × 50 × 301 | 120 × 285 | 1 |
| 20011 | ||||||
| 20018 | FB-40025A | 25 | 3.0 | 140 × 55 × 301 | 120 × 285 | |
| 20025 | FB-40060A | 60 | 4.5 | 85 × 135 × 310 | 60 × 255 | 2 |
| 20033 | ||||||
| 20047 | ||||||
| 20060 | FB-40072A | 72 | 4.7 | 85 × 135 × 310 | 60 × 255 | |
| 20075 | FB-40105A | 105 | 5.3 | 95 × 150 × 325 | 65 × 255 | |
| 20085 | FB-40170A | 170 | 9.4 | 130 × 181 × 440 | 102 × 365 | |
| 20115 | ||||||
| 20145 | ||||||
| 20180 | FB-40250A | 250 | 12.4 | 155 × 220 × 525 | 125 × 435 |
Source page
Page 436
D.2 European Standards
Filter Data (Manufacturer: Block) CI M M o R d - e L l Type Rated Current (A) W ( e k ig g h ) t D [W im x ( e m n D m s x i ) o H ns ] Y x X Figure
20215 20283 FB-40414A 415 26.5 300 × 130 × 500 280 × 340 3 20346 20415 FB-40675A 675 28.5 300 × 130 × 500 280 × 340 4 Three-Phase 400 V Class 40005 FB-40008A 8 2.3 140 × 50 × 301 120 × 285 40006 40007 FB-40014A 12 2.4 140 × 50 × 301 120 × 285 40009 1 40015 FB-40025A 25 3.0 140 × 55 × 301 120 × 285 40018 40024 FB-40044A 44 4.3 180 × 60 × 341 160 × 325 40031 40039 FB-40060A 60 4.5 85 × 135 × 310 60 × 255 40045 40060 FB-40072A 72 4.7 85 × 135 × 310 60 × 255 40075 FB-40105A 105 5.3 95 × 150 × 325 65 × 255 40091 2 40112 FB-40170A 170 9.4 130 × 181 × 440 102 × 365 40150 40180 FB-40250A 250 12.4 155 × 220 × 525 125 × 435 40216 FigureD.7 H W Figure 1 Figure 2
Figure 3 Figure 4
Figure D.7 EMC Filter Dimensions
436 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual Y D Y Y X X D H W Y X D H X H W W Y W D SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 436 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 YEG
| Model CIMR-L | Filter Data (Manufacturer: Block) Dimensions Weight Type Rated Current (A) [W x D x H] Y x X Figure (kg) (mm) | Column | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Rated Current (A) | Weight (kg) | Dimensions [W x D x H] (mm) | Y x X | Figure | ||
| 20215 | FB-40414A | 415 | 26.5 | 300 × 130 × 500 | 280 × 340 | 3 |
| 20283 | ||||||
| 20346 | ||||||
| 20415 | FB-40675A | 675 | 28.5 | 300 × 130 × 500 | 280 × 340 | 4 |
| Three-Phase 400 V Class | ||||||
| 40005 | FB-40008A | 8 | 2.3 | 140 × 50 × 301 | 120 × 285 | 1 |
| 40006 | ||||||
| 40007 | FB-40014A | 12 | 2.4 | 140 × 50 × 301 | 120 × 285 | |
| 40009 | ||||||
| 40015 | FB-40025A | 25 | 3.0 | 140 × 55 × 301 | 120 × 285 | |
| 40018 | ||||||
| 40024 | FB-40044A | 44 | 4.3 | 180 × 60 × 341 | 160 × 325 | |
| 40031 | ||||||
| 40039 | FB-40060A | 60 | 4.5 | 85 × 135 × 310 | 60 × 255 | 2 |
| 40045 | ||||||
| 40060 | FB-40072A | 72 | 4.7 | 85 × 135 × 310 | 60 × 255 | |
| 40075 | FB-40105A | 105 | 5.3 | 95 × 150 × 325 | 65 × 255 | |
| 40091 | ||||||
| 40112 | FB-40170A | 170 | 9.4 | 130 × 181 × 440 | 102 × 365 | |
| 40150 | ||||||
| 40180 | FB-40250A | 250 | 12.4 | 155 × 220 × 525 | 125 × 435 | |
| 40216 |
| Column | X |
|---|---|
| Y |
Source page
Page 437
D.3 UL and CSA Standards
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 437 sdradnatS ecnailpmoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 437 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 D.3 UL and CSA Standards UL Standards Compliance The UL/cUL mark applies to products in the United States and Canada. It indicates that UL has performed product testing and evaluation, and determined that their stringent standards for product safety have been met. For a product to receive UL certification, all components inside that product must also receive UL certification. FigureD.8 Figure D.8 UL/cUL Mark This drive is tested in accordance with UL standard UL508C and complies with UL requirements. To ensure continued compliance when using this drive in combination with other equipment, meet the following conditions: Installation Area Do not install the drive to an area greater than pollution degree 2 (UL standard). Ambient Temperature IP20 enclosure: -10 to +50°C IP00 enclosure with top protective cover: -10 to +40°C IP00 enclosure: -10 to +50°C Main Circuit Terminal Wiring Yaskawa recommends using closed-loop crimp terminals on all drive models. UL/cUL approval requires the use of UL Listed closed-loop crimp terminals when wiring the drive main circuit terminals on models CIMR-L20085 through 20415 and 40045 through 40216. Use only the tools recommended by the terminal manufacturer for crimping. The wire gauges listed in Table D.4 and Table D.5 are Yaskawa recommendations. Refer to local codes for proper wire gauge selections. Table D.4 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications (Three-Phase 200 V Class) For Asia<1> For U.S.A<2> For Europe and China<3> CI M M o R d - e L l Terminal Reco G m a m ug e e nded Ap G p a li u c g a e ble Reco G m a m ug e e nded Ap G p a li u c g a e ble Reco G m a m ug e e nded Ap G p a li u c g a e ble S S c i r z e e w N Ti g T m o h r t ( e q lb n u . i i e n n g .) mm2 mm2 AWG, kcmil AWG, kcmil mm2 mm2 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2 2 to 5.5 14 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 2 to 5.5 14 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6 20008 -, +1, +2 2 2 to 5.5 - 14 to 10 - 2.5 to 6 M4 1.2 to 1.5 <4> (10.6 to 13.3) B1, B2 2 2 to 5.5 - 14 to 10 - 2.5 to 6 2 2 to 5.5 10 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2 2 to 5.5 12 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 2 to 5.5 14 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6 20011 -, +1, +2 2 2 to 5.5 - 14 to 10 - 2.5 to 6 M4 1.2 to 1.5 <4> (10.6 to 13.3) B1, B2 2 2 to 5.5 - 14 to 10 - 2.5 to 6 3.5 2 to 5.5 10 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 5.5 3.5 to 5.5 10 12 to 10 4 2.5 to 6 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3.5 3.5 to 5.5 10 12 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6 2 < 0 4 0 > 18 -, +1, +2 5.5 3.5 to 5.5 - 12 to 10 - 4 to 6 M4 (10 1 . . 6 2 t t o o 1 1 3 .5 .3) B1, B2 2 2 to 5.5 - 14 to 10 - 2.5 to 6 3.5 3.5 to 5.5 10 12 to 10 4 4 to 6 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 5.5 to 14 8 10 to 6 6 4 to 16 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 5.5 to 14 8 10 to 6 6 4 to 16 2.1 to 2.3 M4 20025 -, +1, +2 14 5.5 to 14 - 10 to 6 - 6 to 16 (18.6 to 20.4) <4> B1, B2 3.5 2 to 5.5 - 14 to 10 - 4 to 6 2.0 to 2.5 5.5 5.5 to 8 8 10 to 8 6 6 to 10 M5 (17.7 to 22.1) D
| Model CIMR-L | Terminal | For Asia<1> | Column | For U.S.A<2> | Column | For Europe and China<3> | Column | Screw Size | Tightening Torque Nm (lb.in.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Recommended Gauge mm2 | Applicable Gauge mm2 | Recommended Gauge AWG, kcmil | Applicable Gauge AWG, kcmil | Recommended Gauge mm2 | Applicable Gauge mm2 | ||||
| 20008 <4> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | 14 | 14 to 10 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | M4 | 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | 14 | 14 to 10 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | - | 14 to 10 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| B1, B2 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | - | 14 to 10 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| 2 | 2 to 5.5 | 10 | 14 to 10 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | ||||
| 20011 <4> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | 12 | 14 to 10 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | M4 | 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | 14 | 14 to 10 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | - | 14 to 10 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| B1, B2 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | - | 14 to 10 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| 3.5 | 2 to 5.5 | 10 | 14 to 10 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | ||||
| 20018 <4> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 5.5 | 3.5 to 5.5 | 10 | 12 to 10 | 4 | 2.5 to 6 | M4 | 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 3.5 | 3.5 to 5.5 | 10 | 12 to 10 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | 5.5 | 3.5 to 5.5 | - | 12 to 10 | - | 4 to 6 | |||
| B1, B2 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | - | 14 to 10 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| 3.5 | 3.5 to 5.5 | 10 | 12 to 10 | 4 | 4 to 6 | ||||
| 20025 <4> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 14 | 5.5 to 14 | 8 | 10 to 6 | 6 | 4 to 16 | M4 | 2.1 to 2.3 (18.6 to 20.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 8 | 5.5 to 14 | 8 | 10 to 6 | 6 | 4 to 16 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | 14 | 5.5 to 14 | - | 10 to 6 | - | 6 to 16 | |||
| B1, B2 | 3.5 | 2 to 5.5 | - | 14 to 10 | - | 4 to 6 | |||
| 5.5 | 5.5 to 8 | 8 | 10 to 8 | 6 | 6 to 10 | M5 | 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1) |
Source page
Page 438
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 438 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
D.3 UL and CSA Standards
For Asia<1> For U.S.A<2> For Europe and China<3> CI M M o R d - e L l Terminal Reco G m a m ug e e nded Ap G p a li u c g a e ble Reco G m a m ug e e nded Ap G p a li u c g a e ble Reco G m a m ug e e nded Ap G p a li u c g a e ble S S c i r z e e w N Ti g T m o h r t ( e q lb n u . i i e n n g .) mm2 mm2 AWG, kcmil AWG, kcmil mm2 mm2 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 6 8 to 6 10 6 to 16 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 8 to 14 8 8 to 6 10 6 to 16 M4 2.1 to 2.3 20033 -, +1, +2 14 14 - 6 - 16 (18.6 to 20.4) <4> B1, B2 5.5 3.5 to 5.5 - 12 to 10 - 4 to 6 5.5 5.5 to 8 8 10 to 8 10 6 to 10 M5 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 22 14 to 22 4 6 to 4 16 16 to 25 5.4 to 6.0 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 22 4 6 to 4 16 16 to 25 M6 (47.8 to 53.1) -, +1, +2 22 14 to 22 - 6 to 4 - 16 to 25 20047 2.7 to 3.0 B1, B2 14 5.5 to 14 - 10 to 6 - 6 to 10 M5 (23.9 to 26.6) 5.4 to 6.0 8 8 to 14 6 8 to 6 16 10 to 16 M6 (47.8 to 53.1) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 30 22 to 30 3 4 to 3 25 16 to 25 9.9 to 11.0 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 22 14 to 30 3 4 to 3 16 16 to 25 M8 (87.6 to 97.4) -, +1, +2 30 22 to 30 - 4 to 3 - 25 20060 B1, B2 14 8 to 14 - 8 to 6 - 10 to 16 M5 2.7 to 3.0 (23.9 to 26.6) 5.4 to 6.0 8 8 to 22 6 6 to 4 16 16 to 25 M6 (47.8 to 53.1) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 38 30 to 38 2 3 to 2 35 25 to 35 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 30 22 to 38 2 3 to 2 25 25 to 35 M8 9.9 to 11.0 (87.6 to 97.4) -, +1, +2 38 30 to 38 - 3 to 2 - 25 to 35 20075 2.7 to 3.0 B1, B2 14 14 - 6 - 16 M5 (23.9 to 26.6) 14 14 to 22 6 6 to 4 16 16 to 25 M6 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 38 30 to 50 1/0 3 to 1/0 35 25 to 50 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 38 30 to 50 1/0 3 to 1/0 35 25 to 50 20085 -, +1 60 38 to 60 - 2 to 1/0 - 35 to 50 M8 9 to 11 <5> (79.7 to 97.4) B1, B2 22 14 to 50 - 6 to 1/0 - 16 to 50 14 14 to 38 6 6 to 4 16 16 to 25 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 60 50 to 60 2/0 1 to 2/0 50 35 to 70 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 60 50 to 60 2/0 1 to 2/0 50 35 to 70 18 to 23 20115 -, +1 80 60 to 80 - 1/0 to 3/0 - 50 to 70 M10 (159 to 204) <5> B1, B2 30 22 to 60 - 4 to 2/0 - 25 to 70 9 to 11 22 22 to 38 4 4 25 25 M8 (79.7 to 97.4) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 80 60 to 100 4/0 2/0 to 4/0 70 50 to 95 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 80 60 to 100 4/0 3/0 to 4/0 70 50 to 95 18 to 23 20145 -, +1 50 × 2P 50 to 100 - 1 to 4/0 - 35 to 95 (159 to 204) M10 <5> +3 60 50 to 100 - 1/0 to 4/0 - 50 to 95 9 to 11 22 22 to 60 4 4 to 2 35 25 to 35 (79.7 to 97.4) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 100 80 to 100 1/0 × 2P 1/0 to 2/0 95 70 to 95 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 50 × 2P 50 to 60 1/0 × 2P 1/0 to 2/0 95 70 to 95 18 to 23 20180 -, +1 50 × 2P 50 to 100 - 1 to 4/0 - 35 to 95 (159 to 204) M10 <5> +3 80 60 to 100 - 1/0 to 4/0 - 50 to 95 9 to 11 22 22 to 60 4 4 to 1/0 50 25 to 50 (79.7 to 97.4) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 80 × 2P 38 to 150 3/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300 95 × 2P 95 to 150 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 80 × 2P 38 to 150 3/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300 95 × 2P 95 to 150 M12 (2 3 8 2 3 t t o o 4 3 0 54) 20215 -, +1 80 × 2P 80 to 150 - 3/0 to 300 - 70 to 150 <5> +3 80 × 2P 30 to 150 - 2 to 300 - 35 to 150 M10 (1 1 5 8 9 t t o o 2 2 3 04) 22 22 to 150 3 3 to 300 95 95 to 150 M12 32 to 40 (283 to 354) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 80 × 2P 70 to 150 4/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300 95 × 2P 95 to 150 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 80 × 2P 70 to 200 3/0 × 2P 3/0 to 300 95 × 2P 95 to 150 M12 32 to 40 (283 to 354) 20283 -, +1 150 × 2P 80 to 150 - 3/0 to 300 - 70 to 150 <5> +3 80 × 2P 80 to 150 - 3/0 to 300 - 70 to 150 M10 18 to 23 (159 to 204) 32 to 40 38 38 to 150 2 2 to 300 95 95 to 150 M12 (283 to 354) 438 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Model CIMR-L | Terminal | For Asia<1> | Column | For U.S.A<2> | Column | For Europe and China<3> | Column | Screw Size | Tightening Torque Nm (lb.in.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Recommended Gauge mm2 | Applicable Gauge mm2 | Recommended Gauge AWG, kcmil | Applicable Gauge AWG, kcmil | Recommended Gauge mm2 | Applicable Gauge mm2 | ||||
| 20033 <4> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 14 | 14 | 6 | 8 to 6 | 10 | 6 to 16 | M4 | 2.1 to 2.3 (18.6 to 20.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 14 | 8 to 14 | 8 | 8 to 6 | 10 | 6 to 16 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | 14 | 14 | - | 6 | - | 16 | |||
| B1, B2 | 5.5 | 3.5 to 5.5 | - | 12 to 10 | - | 4 to 6 | |||
| 5.5 | 5.5 to 8 | 8 | 10 to 8 | 10 | 6 to 10 | M5 | 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1) | ||
| 20047 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 22 | 14 to 22 | 4 | 6 to 4 | 16 | 16 to 25 | M6 | 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 14 | 14 to 22 | 4 | 6 to 4 | 16 | 16 to 25 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | 22 | 14 to 22 | - | 6 to 4 | - | 16 to 25 | |||
| B1, B2 | 14 | 5.5 to 14 | - | 10 to 6 | - | 6 to 10 | M5 | 2.7 to 3.0 (23.9 to 26.6) | |
| 8 | 8 to 14 | 6 | 8 to 6 | 16 | 10 to 16 | M6 | 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) | ||
| 20060 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 30 | 22 to 30 | 3 | 4 to 3 | 25 | 16 to 25 | M8 | 9.9 to 11.0 (87.6 to 97.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 22 | 14 to 30 | 3 | 4 to 3 | 16 | 16 to 25 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | 30 | 22 to 30 | - | 4 to 3 | - | 25 | |||
| B1, B2 | 14 | 8 to 14 | - | 8 to 6 | - | 10 to 16 | M5 | 2.7 to 3.0 (23.9 to 26.6) | |
| 8 | 8 to 22 | 6 | 6 to 4 | 16 | 16 to 25 | M6 | 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) | ||
| 20075 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 38 | 30 to 38 | 2 | 3 to 2 | 35 | 25 to 35 | M8 | 9.9 to 11.0 (87.6 to 97.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 30 | 22 to 38 | 2 | 3 to 2 | 25 | 25 to 35 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | 38 | 30 to 38 | - | 3 to 2 | - | 25 to 35 | |||
| B1, B2 | 14 | 14 | - | 6 | - | 16 | M5 | 2.7 to 3.0 (23.9 to 26.6) | |
| 14 | 14 to 22 | 6 | 6 to 4 | 16 | 16 to 25 | M6 | 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) | ||
| 20085 <5> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 38 | 30 to 50 | 1/0 | 3 to 1/0 | 35 | 25 to 50 | M8 | 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 38 | 30 to 50 | 1/0 | 3 to 1/0 | 35 | 25 to 50 | |||
| -, +1 | 60 | 38 to 60 | - | 2 to 1/0 | - | 35 to 50 | |||
| B1, B2 | 22 | 14 to 50 | - | 6 to 1/0 | - | 16 to 50 | |||
| 14 | 14 to 38 | 6 | 6 to 4 | 16 | 16 to 25 | ||||
| 20115 <5> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 60 | 50 to 60 | 2/0 | 1 to 2/0 | 50 | 35 to 70 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 60 | 50 to 60 | 2/0 | 1 to 2/0 | 50 | 35 to 70 | |||
| -, +1 | 80 | 60 to 80 | - | 1/0 to 3/0 | - | 50 to 70 | |||
| B1, B2 | 30 | 22 to 60 | - | 4 to 2/0 | - | 25 to 70 | |||
| 22 | 22 to 38 | 4 | 4 | 25 | 25 | M8 | 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) | ||
| 20145 <5> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 80 | 60 to 100 | 4/0 | 2/0 to 4/0 | 70 | 50 to 95 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 80 | 60 to 100 | 4/0 | 3/0 to 4/0 | 70 | 50 to 95 | |||
| -, +1 | 50 × 2P | 50 to 100 | - | 1 to 4/0 | - | 35 to 95 | |||
| +3 | 60 | 50 to 100 | - | 1/0 to 4/0 | - | 50 to 95 | |||
| 22 | 22 to 60 | 4 | 4 to 2 | 35 | 25 to 35 | 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) | |||
| 20180 <5> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 100 | 80 to 100 | 1/0 × 2P | 1/0 to 2/0 | 95 | 70 to 95 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 50 × 2P | 50 to 60 | 1/0 × 2P | 1/0 to 2/0 | 95 | 70 to 95 | |||
| -, +1 | 50 × 2P | 50 to 100 | - | 1 to 4/0 | - | 35 to 95 | |||
| +3 | 80 | 60 to 100 | - | 1/0 to 4/0 | - | 50 to 95 | |||
| 22 | 22 to 60 | 4 | 4 to 1/0 | 50 | 25 to 50 | 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) | |||
| 20215 <5> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 80 × 2P | 38 to 150 | 3/0 × 2P | 3/0 to 300 | 95 × 2P | 95 to 150 | M12 | 32 to 40 (283 to 354) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 80 × 2P | 38 to 150 | 3/0 × 2P | 3/0 to 300 | 95 × 2P | 95 to 150 | |||
| -, +1 | 80 × 2P | 80 to 150 | - | 3/0 to 300 | - | 70 to 150 | |||
| +3 | 80 × 2P | 30 to 150 | - | 2 to 300 | - | 35 to 150 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) | |
| 22 | 22 to 150 | 3 | 3 to 300 | 95 | 95 to 150 | M12 | 32 to 40 (283 to 354) | ||
| 20283 <5> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 80 × 2P | 70 to 150 | 4/0 × 2P | 3/0 to 300 | 95 × 2P | 95 to 150 | M12 | 32 to 40 (283 to 354) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 80 × 2P | 70 to 200 | 3/0 × 2P | 3/0 to 300 | 95 × 2P | 95 to 150 | |||
| -, +1 | 150 × 2P | 80 to 150 | - | 3/0 to 300 | - | 70 to 150 | |||
| +3 | 80 × 2P | 80 to 150 | - | 3/0 to 300 | - | 70 to 150 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) | |
| 38 | 38 to 150 | 2 | 2 to 300 | 95 | 95 to 150 | M12 | 32 to 40 (283 to 354) |
Source page
Page 439
D.3 UL and CSA Standards
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 439 sdradnatS ecnailpmoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 439 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 For Asia<1> For U.S.A<2> For Europe and China<3> CI M M o R d - e L l Terminal Reco G m a m ug e e nded Ap G p a li u c g a e ble Reco G m a m ug e e nded Ap G p a li u c g a e ble Reco G m a m ug e e nded Ap G p a li u c g a e ble S S c i r z e e w N Ti g T m o h r t ( e q lb n u . i i e n n g .) mm2 mm2 AWG, kcmil AWG, kcmil mm2 mm2 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 100 × 2P 80 to 325 250 × 2P 4/0 to 600 240 95 to 300 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 100 × 2P 80 to 325 4/0 × 2P 4/0 to 600 240 95 to 300 M12 (28 3 3 2 t t o o 3 4 5 0 4) 20346 -, +1 150 × 2P 125 to 325 - 250 to 600 - 125 to 300 <5> +3 80 × 2P 80 to 325 - 3/0 to 600 - 70 to 300 M10 (15 1 9 8 t t o o 2 2 0 3 4) 38 38 to 200 1 1 to 350 120 120 to 240 M12 32 to 40 (283 to 354) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 125 × 2P 100 to 325 350 × 2P 250 to 600 120 × 2P 95 to 300 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 125 × 2P 125 to 325 300 × 2P 300 to 600 300 95 to 300 M12 32 to 40 (283 to 354) 20415 -, +1 200 × 2P 150 to 325 - 300 to 600 - 150 to 300 <5> +3 100 × 2P 80 to 325 - 3/0 to 600 - 70 to 300 M10 18 to 23 (159 to 204) 32 to 40 60 60 to 200 1 1 to 350 120 120 to 240 M12 (283 to 354) <1> Gauges listed here are for use in Japan. <2> Gauges listed here are for use in the United States. <3> Gauges listed here are for use in Europe and China. <4> When an EMC filter is installed, additional measures must be taken in order to comply with IEC/EN 61800-5-1. Refer to EMC Filter Installation on page 432. <5> Drive models CIMR-L20085 to 20415 require the use of closed-loop crimp terminals for UL/cUL compliance. Use only the tools recommended by the terminal manufacturer for crimping. Note: Use crimp insulated terminals or insulated tubing for wiring these connections. Wires should have a continuous maximum allowable temperature of 75°C 600 V UL approved vinyl sheathed insulation. Ambient temperature should not exceed 40°C. Table D.5 Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications (Three-Phase 400 V Class) For Asia<1> For U.S.A<2> For Europe and China<3> CI M M o R d - e L l Terminal Reco G m a m ug e e nded Ap G p a li u c g a e ble Reco G m a m ug e e nded Ap G p a li u c g a e ble Reco G m a m ug e e nded Ap G p a li u c g a e ble S S c i r z e e w N Ti g T m o h r t ( e q lb n u . i i e n n g .) mm2 mm2 AWG, kcmil AWG, kcmil mm2 mm2 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2 2 to 5.5 14 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 2 to 5.5 14 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6 4 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 6 -, +1, +2 2 2 to 5.5 - 14 to 10 - 2.5 to 6 M4 (10 1 . . 6 2 t t o o 1 1 3 .5 .3) B1, B2 2 2 to 5.5 - 14 to 10 - 2.5 to 6 3.5 2 to 5.5 10 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 2 2 to 5.5 12 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 2 2 to 5.5 14 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6 40009 -, +1, +2 2 2 to 5.5 - 14 to 10 - 2.5 to 6 M4 (10 1 . . 6 2 t t o o 1 1 3 .5 .3) B1, B2 2 2 to 5.5 - 14 to 10 - 2.5 to 6 3.5 2 to 5.5 10 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 3.5 2 to 14 10 12 to 6 2.5 2.5 to 16 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 3.5 2 to 14 10 12 to 6 2.5 2.5 to 16 2.1 to 2.3 M4 40015 -, +1, +2 3.5 2 to 14 - 12 to 6 - 4 to 16 (18.6 to 20.4) B1, B2 2 2 to 5.5 - 12 to 10 - 4 to 6 2.0 to 2.5 3.5 2 to 5.5 10 14 to 10 2.5 2.5 to 6 M5 (17.7 to 22.1) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 5.5 3.5 to 14 10 10 to 6 4 2.5 to 16 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 5.5 3.5 to 14 10 10 to 6 4 2.5 to 16 2.1 to 2.3 M4 40018 -, +1, +2 5.5 3.5 to 14 - 12 to 6 - 4 to 16 (18.6 to 20.4) B1, B2 2 2 to 5.5 - 12 to 10 - 4 to 6 2.0 to 2.5 3.5 3.5 to 5.5 10 12 to 10 4 4 to 6 M5 (17.7 to 22.1) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 5.5 to 14 8 8 to 6 6 6 to 16 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 8 5.5 to 8 8 10 to 6 6 6 to 16 M5 3.6 to 4.0 (31.8 to 35.4) -, +1, +2 14 5.5 to 14 - 10 to 6 - 6 to 16 40024 2.7 to 3.0 B1, B2 3.5 2 to 8 - 10 to 8 - 6 to 10 M5 (23.9 to 26.6) 5.5 5.5 to 8 8 10 to 8 6 6 to 10 M6 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 6 8 to 6 10 10 to 16 3.6 to 4.0 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 8 to 14 8 8 to 6 6 6 to 16 M5 (31.8 to 35.4) -, +1, +2 14 14 - 6 - 6 to 16 40031 2.7 to 3.0 B1, B2 5.5 3.5 to 8 - 10 to 8 - 6 to 10 M5 (23.9 to 26.6) 5.4 to 6.0 8 5.5 to 14 6 10 to 6 10 6 to 16 M6 (47.8 to 53.1) D
| Model CIMR-L | Terminal | For Asia<1> | Column | For U.S.A<2> | Column | For Europe and China<3> | Column | Screw Size | Tightening Torque Nm (lb.in.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Recommended Gauge mm2 | Applicable Gauge mm2 | Recommended Gauge AWG, kcmil | Applicable Gauge AWG, kcmil | Recommended Gauge mm2 | Applicable Gauge mm2 | ||||
| 20346 <5> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 100 × 2P | 80 to 325 | 250 × 2P | 4/0 to 600 | 240 | 95 to 300 | M12 | 32 to 40 (283 to 354) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 100 × 2P | 80 to 325 | 4/0 × 2P | 4/0 to 600 | 240 | 95 to 300 | |||
| -, +1 | 150 × 2P | 125 to 325 | - | 250 to 600 | - | 125 to 300 | |||
| +3 | 80 × 2P | 80 to 325 | - | 3/0 to 600 | - | 70 to 300 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) | |
| 38 | 38 to 200 | 1 | 1 to 350 | 120 | 120 to 240 | M12 | 32 to 40 (283 to 354) | ||
| 20415 <5> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 125 × 2P | 100 to 325 | 350 × 2P | 250 to 600 | 120 × 2P | 95 to 300 | M12 | 32 to 40 (283 to 354) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 125 × 2P | 125 to 325 | 300 × 2P | 300 to 600 | 300 | 95 to 300 | |||
| -, +1 | 200 × 2P | 150 to 325 | - | 300 to 600 | - | 150 to 300 | |||
| +3 | 100 × 2P | 80 to 325 | - | 3/0 to 600 | - | 70 to 300 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) | |
| 60 | 60 to 200 | 1 | 1 to 350 | 120 | 120 to 240 | M12 | 32 to 40 (283 to 354) |
| Model CIMR-L | Terminal | For Asia<1> | Column | For U.S.A<2> | Column | For Europe and China<3> | Column | Screw Size | Tightening Torque Nm (lb.in.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Recommended Gauge mm2 | Applicable Gauge mm2 | Recommended Gauge AWG, kcmil | Applicable Gauge AWG, kcmil | Recommended Gauge mm2 | Applicable Gauge mm2 | ||||
| 40005 40006 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | 14 | 14 to 10 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | M4 | 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | 14 | 14 to 10 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | - | 14 to 10 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| B1, B2 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | - | 14 to 10 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| 3.5 | 2 to 5.5 | 10 | 14 to 10 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | ||||
| 40009 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | 12 | 14 to 10 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | M4 | 1.2 to 1.5 (10.6 to 13.3) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | 14 | 14 to 10 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | - | 14 to 10 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| B1, B2 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | - | 14 to 10 | - | 2.5 to 6 | |||
| 3.5 | 2 to 5.5 | 10 | 14 to 10 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | ||||
| 40015 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 3.5 | 2 to 14 | 10 | 12 to 6 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 16 | M4 | 2.1 to 2.3 (18.6 to 20.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 3.5 | 2 to 14 | 10 | 12 to 6 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 16 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | 3.5 | 2 to 14 | - | 12 to 6 | - | 4 to 16 | |||
| B1, B2 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | - | 12 to 10 | - | 4 to 6 | |||
| 3.5 | 2 to 5.5 | 10 | 14 to 10 | 2.5 | 2.5 to 6 | M5 | 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1) | ||
| 40018 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 5.5 | 3.5 to 14 | 10 | 10 to 6 | 4 | 2.5 to 16 | M4 | 2.1 to 2.3 (18.6 to 20.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 5.5 | 3.5 to 14 | 10 | 10 to 6 | 4 | 2.5 to 16 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | 5.5 | 3.5 to 14 | - | 12 to 6 | - | 4 to 16 | |||
| B1, B2 | 2 | 2 to 5.5 | - | 12 to 10 | - | 4 to 6 | |||
| 3.5 | 3.5 to 5.5 | 10 | 12 to 10 | 4 | 4 to 6 | M5 | 2.0 to 2.5 (17.7 to 22.1) | ||
| 40024 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 14 | 5.5 to 14 | 8 | 8 to 6 | 6 | 6 to 16 | M5 | 3.6 to 4.0 (31.8 to 35.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 8 | 5.5 to 8 | 8 | 10 to 6 | 6 | 6 to 16 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | 14 | 5.5 to 14 | - | 10 to 6 | - | 6 to 16 | |||
| B1, B2 | 3.5 | 2 to 8 | - | 10 to 8 | - | 6 to 10 | M5 | 2.7 to 3.0 (23.9 to 26.6) | |
| 5.5 | 5.5 to 8 | 8 | 10 to 8 | 6 | 6 to 10 | M6 | 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) | ||
| 40031 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 14 | 14 | 6 | 8 to 6 | 10 | 10 to 16 | M5 | 3.6 to 4.0 (31.8 to 35.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 14 | 8 to 14 | 8 | 8 to 6 | 6 | 6 to 16 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | 14 | 14 | - | 6 | - | 6 to 16 | |||
| B1, B2 | 5.5 | 3.5 to 8 | - | 10 to 8 | - | 6 to 10 | M5 | 2.7 to 3.0 (23.9 to 26.6) | |
| 8 | 5.5 to 14 | 6 | 10 to 6 | 10 | 6 to 16 | M6 | 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) |
Source page
Page 440
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 440 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
D.3 UL and CSA Standards
For Asia<1> For U.S.A<2> For Europe and China<3> CI M M o R d - e L l Terminal Reco G m a m ug e e nded Ap G p a li u c g a e ble Reco G m a m ug e e nded Ap G p a li u c g a e ble Reco G m a m ug e e nded Ap G p a li u c g a e ble S S c i r z e e w N Ti g T m o h r t ( e q lb n u . i i e n n g .) mm2 mm2 AWG, kcmil AWG, kcmil mm2 mm2 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 to 22 6 6 to 4 16 16 to 25 5.4 to 6.0 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 to 22 6 6 to 4 16 16 to 25 M6 (47.8 to 53.1) -, +1, +2 14 14 to 22 - 6 to 4 - 16 to 25 40039 2.7 to 3.0 B1, B2 8 5.5 to 8 - 10 to 8 - 6 to 10 M5 (23.9 to 26.6) 5.4 to 6.0 8 8 to 14 6 8 to 6 16 10 to 16 M6 (47.8 to 53.1) R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 14 14 4 6 to 4 16 10 to 16 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 14 14 4 6 to 4 16 10 to 16 4 < 0 4 0 > 45 -, +1 22 14 to 38 - 6 to 1 - 16 to 35 M8 (79. 9 7 t t o o 1 9 1 7.4) B1, B2 14 8 to 14 - 8 to 4 - 10 to 16 8 8 to 14 6 8 to 6 16 10 to 16 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 22 14 to 22 3 4 to 3 16 16 to 25 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 22 14 to 22 3 4 to 3 25 16 to 25 4 < 0 4 0 > 60 -, +1 30 22 to 38 - 4 to 1 - 25 to 35 M8 (79. 9 7 t t o o 1 9 1 7.4) B1, B2 14 14 to 22 - 6 to 3 - 16 to 25 14 14 to 22 6 6 16 16 to 25 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 30 22 to 60 2 3 to 1/0 25 16 to 50 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 30 22 to 60 2 3 to 1/0 25 25 to 50 40075 -, +1 38 30 to 60 - 3 to 1/0 - 25 to 50 M8 9 to 11 <4> (79.7 to 97.4) +3 22 14 to 60 - 6 to 1/0 - 16 to 50 22 14 to 22 4 6 to 4 16 16 to 25 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 38 30 to 60 1/0 2 to 1/0 35 25 to 50 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 38 30 to 60 1 2 to 1/0 35 25 to 50 40091 -, +1 60 30 to 60 - 3 to 1/0 - 25 to 50 M8 9 to 11 <4> (79.7 to 97.4) +3 30 22 to 60 - 4 to 1/0 - 25 to 50 22 14 to 22 4 6 to 4 16 16 to 25 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 60 38 to 100 3/0 1/0 to 4/0 50 35 to 95 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 60 60 to 100 2/0 1/0 to 4/0 50 35 to 95 40112 -, +1 100 60 to 100 - 1/0 to 4/0 - 50 to 95 M10 18 to 23 <4> (159 to 204) +3 50 30 to 100 - 3 to 4/0 - 25 to 95 22 22 4 4 25 25 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 80 60 to 100 4/0 3/0 to 4/0 70 50 to 95 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 80 80 to 100 4/0 3/0 to 4/0 70 70 to 95 4 < 0 4 1 > 50 -, +1 50 × 2P 50 to 100 - 1 to 4/0 - 35 to 95 M10 (15 1 9 8 t t o o 2 2 0 3 4) +3 60 50 to 100 - 1/0 to 4/0 - 50 to 95 22 22 to 30 4 4 to 2 35 25 to 35 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 150 30 to 150 300 2 to 300 95 35 to 95 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 150 30 to 150 300 2 to 300 95 35 to 95 40180 -, +1 80 × 2P 38 to 150 - 1 to 250 - 35 to 150 M10 18 to 23 <4> (159 to 204) +3 80 22 to 80 - 3 to 3/0 - 25 to 70 22 22 to 150 4 4 to 300 50 50 to 150 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 150 38 to 325 400 1 to 600 120 95 to 300 U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 150 38 to 325 400 1/0 to 600 120 95 to 300 4 < 0 4 2 > 16 -, +1 200 80 to 325 - 3/0 to 600 - 70 to 300 M10 (15 1 9 8 t t o o 2 2 0 3 4) +3 125 38 to 325 - 1 to 325 - 35 to 300 22 22 to 200 2 2 to 350 70 70 to 240 <1> Gauges listed here are for use in Japan. <2> Gauges listed here are for use in the United States. <3> Gauges listed here are for use in Europe and China. <4> Drive models CIMR-L40045 to 40216 require the use of closed-loop crimp terminals for UL/cUL compliance. Use only the tools recommended by the terminal manufacturer for crimping. Note: Use crimp insulated terminals or insulated tubing for wiring these connections. Wires should have a continuous maximum allowable temperature of 75°C 600 V UL approved vinyl sheathed insulation. Ambient temperature should not exceed 40°C. 440 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Model CIMR-L | Terminal | For Asia<1> | Column | For U.S.A<2> | Column | For Europe and China<3> | Column | Screw Size | Tightening Torque Nm (lb.in.) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Recommended Gauge mm2 | Applicable Gauge mm2 | Recommended Gauge AWG, kcmil | Applicable Gauge AWG, kcmil | Recommended Gauge mm2 | Applicable Gauge mm2 | ||||
| 40039 | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 14 | 14 to 22 | 6 | 6 to 4 | 16 | 16 to 25 | M6 | 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 14 | 14 to 22 | 6 | 6 to 4 | 16 | 16 to 25 | |||
| -, +1, +2 | 14 | 14 to 22 | - | 6 to 4 | - | 16 to 25 | |||
| B1, B2 | 8 | 5.5 to 8 | - | 10 to 8 | - | 6 to 10 | M5 | 2.7 to 3.0 (23.9 to 26.6) | |
| 8 | 8 to 14 | 6 | 8 to 6 | 16 | 10 to 16 | M6 | 5.4 to 6.0 (47.8 to 53.1) | ||
| 40045 <4> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 14 | 14 | 4 | 6 to 4 | 16 | 10 to 16 | M8 | 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 14 | 14 | 4 | 6 to 4 | 16 | 10 to 16 | |||
| -, +1 | 22 | 14 to 38 | - | 6 to 1 | - | 16 to 35 | |||
| B1, B2 | 14 | 8 to 14 | - | 8 to 4 | - | 10 to 16 | |||
| 8 | 8 to 14 | 6 | 8 to 6 | 16 | 10 to 16 | ||||
| 40060 <4> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 22 | 14 to 22 | 3 | 4 to 3 | 16 | 16 to 25 | M8 | 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 22 | 14 to 22 | 3 | 4 to 3 | 25 | 16 to 25 | |||
| -, +1 | 30 | 22 to 38 | - | 4 to 1 | - | 25 to 35 | |||
| B1, B2 | 14 | 14 to 22 | - | 6 to 3 | - | 16 to 25 | |||
| 14 | 14 to 22 | 6 | 6 | 16 | 16 to 25 | ||||
| 40075 <4> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 30 | 22 to 60 | 2 | 3 to 1/0 | 25 | 16 to 50 | M8 | 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 30 | 22 to 60 | 2 | 3 to 1/0 | 25 | 25 to 50 | |||
| -, +1 | 38 | 30 to 60 | - | 3 to 1/0 | - | 25 to 50 | |||
| +3 | 22 | 14 to 60 | - | 6 to 1/0 | - | 16 to 50 | |||
| 22 | 14 to 22 | 4 | 6 to 4 | 16 | 16 to 25 | ||||
| 40091 <4> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 38 | 30 to 60 | 1/0 | 2 to 1/0 | 35 | 25 to 50 | M8 | 9 to 11 (79.7 to 97.4) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 38 | 30 to 60 | 1 | 2 to 1/0 | 35 | 25 to 50 | |||
| -, +1 | 60 | 30 to 60 | - | 3 to 1/0 | - | 25 to 50 | |||
| +3 | 30 | 22 to 60 | - | 4 to 1/0 | - | 25 to 50 | |||
| 22 | 14 to 22 | 4 | 6 to 4 | 16 | 16 to 25 | ||||
| 40112 <4> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 60 | 38 to 100 | 3/0 | 1/0 to 4/0 | 50 | 35 to 95 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 60 | 60 to 100 | 2/0 | 1/0 to 4/0 | 50 | 35 to 95 | |||
| -, +1 | 100 | 60 to 100 | - | 1/0 to 4/0 | - | 50 to 95 | |||
| +3 | 50 | 30 to 100 | - | 3 to 4/0 | - | 25 to 95 | |||
| 22 | 22 | 4 | 4 | 25 | 25 | ||||
| 40150 <4> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 80 | 60 to 100 | 4/0 | 3/0 to 4/0 | 70 | 50 to 95 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 80 | 80 to 100 | 4/0 | 3/0 to 4/0 | 70 | 70 to 95 | |||
| -, +1 | 50 × 2P | 50 to 100 | - | 1 to 4/0 | - | 35 to 95 | |||
| +3 | 60 | 50 to 100 | - | 1/0 to 4/0 | - | 50 to 95 | |||
| 22 | 22 to 30 | 4 | 4 to 2 | 35 | 25 to 35 | ||||
| 40180 <4> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 150 | 30 to 150 | 300 | 2 to 300 | 95 | 35 to 95 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 150 | 30 to 150 | 300 | 2 to 300 | 95 | 35 to 95 | |||
| -, +1 | 80 × 2P | 38 to 150 | - | 1 to 250 | - | 35 to 150 | |||
| +3 | 80 | 22 to 80 | - | 3 to 3/0 | - | 25 to 70 | |||
| 22 | 22 to 150 | 4 | 4 to 300 | 50 | 50 to 150 | ||||
| 40216 <4> | R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 | 150 | 38 to 325 | 400 | 1 to 600 | 120 | 95 to 300 | M10 | 18 to 23 (159 to 204) |
| U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 | 150 | 38 to 325 | 400 | 1/0 to 600 | 120 | 95 to 300 | |||
| -, +1 | 200 | 80 to 325 | - | 3/0 to 600 | - | 70 to 300 | |||
| +3 | 125 | 38 to 325 | - | 1 to 325 | - | 35 to 300 | |||
| 22 | 22 to 200 | 2 | 2 to 350 | 70 | 70 to 240 |
Source page
Page 441
D.3 UL and CSA Standards
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 441 sdradnatS ecnailpmoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 441 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Recommendations Yaskawa recommends using closed-loop crimp terminals on all drive models. UL approval requires the use of UL Listed crimp terminals when wiring the drive main circuit terminals on Models CIMR-L20085 to 20415 and 40045 to 40150. Use only crimping tools as specified by the crimp terminal manufacturer. Yaskawa recommends crimp terminals made by JST and Tokyo DIP (or equivalent) for the insulation cap. Table D.6 matches the wire gauges and terminal screw sizes with Yaskawa - recommended crimp terminals, tools, and insulation caps. Refer to the appropriate Wire Gauge and Torque Specifications table for the wire gauge and screw size for your drive model. Place orders with a Yaskawa representatives the Yaskawa sales department. Table D.6 Closed-Loop Crimp Terminal Size Wire Gauge Terminal Screws C M r o im de p l T N e u r m mi b n e a r l Machine No. Tool Die Jaw Ins M u o la d t e io l n N o C . ap Code<1> 14 AWG M4 R2-4 YA-4 AD-900 TP-003 100-054-028 M4 R5.5-4 YA-4 AD-900 TP-005 100-054-029 12 / 10 AWG M5 R5.5-5 YA-4 AD-900 TP-005 100-054-030 M4 8-4 YA-4 AD-901 TP-008 100-054-031 8 AWG M5 R8-5 YA-4 AD-901 TP-008 100-054-032 M4 14-NK4 YA-4 AD-902 TP-014 100-054-033 M5 R14-5 YA-4 AD-902 TP-014 100-054-034 6 AWG M6 R14-6 YA-5 AD-952 TP-014 100-051-261 M8 R14-8 YA-5 AD-952 TP-014 100-054-035 M6 R22-6 YA-5 AD-953 TP-022 100-051-262 4 AWG M8 R22-8 YA-5 AD-953 TP-022 100-051-263 M8 R38-8 YA-5 AD-954 TP-038 100-051-264 3/2/1 AWG M10 R38-10 YA-5 AD-954 TP-038 100-061-114 1/0 AWG M8 R60-8 YA-5 AD-955 TP-060 100-051-265 1/0 AWG × 2P M10 R60-10 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-321, TD-311 TP-060 100-051-266 2/0 2 A /0 W A G W × G 2P M10 70-10 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-323, TD-312 TP-080 100-054-036 1 AWG × 2P 2 AWG × 2P M10 38-L10 YF-1, YET-150-1 TD-224, TD-212 TP-038 100-051-556 3/0 AWG M10 80-10 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-323, TD-312 TP-080 100-051-267 M10 80-L10 YF-1, YET-150-1 TD-227, TD-214 TP-080 100-051-557 3/0 AWG × 2P M12 80-L12 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-323, TD-312 TP-080 100-051-558 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-324, TD-312 4/0 AWG M10 R100-10 YF-1, YET-150-1 TD-228, TD-214 TP-100 100-051-269 4/0 AWG × 2P M10 100-L10 YF-1, YET-150-1 TD-228, TD-214 TP-100 100-051-559 M12 100-L12 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-324, TD-312 TP-100 100-051-560 M10 R150-10 YF-1. YET-150-1 TD-229, TD-215 TP-150 100-051-272 250 / 300 kcmil M12 R150-12 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-325, TD-313 TP-150 100-051-273 250 kcmil × 2P M10 150-L10 YF-1, YET-150-1 TD-229, TD-215 TP-150 100-051-561 300 kcmil × 2P M12 150-L12 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-325, TD-313 TP-150 100-051-562 350 kcmil M10 180-10 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-326, TD-313 TP-200 100-066-687 400 kcmil M10 200-10 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-327, TD-314 TP-200 100-051-563 350 kcmil × 2P M12 180-L12 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-326, TD-313 TP-200 100-066-688 400 kcmil × 2P M12 200-L12 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-327, TD-314 TP-200 100-051-564 500 kcmil M10 325-10 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-328, TD-315 TP-325 100-051-565 600 / 650 kcmil 500 kcmil × 2P M12 325-12 YF-1, YET-300-1 TD-328, TD-315 TP-325 100-051-277 600 kcmil × 2P <1> Codes refer to a set of three crimp terminals and three insulation caps. Prepare input and output wiring using two sets for each connection. Example 1: Models with 300 kcmil for both input and output require one set for input terminals and one set for output terminals, so the user should order two sets of [100-051-272]. Example 2: Models with 4/0 AWG × 2P for both input and output require two sets for input terminals and two sets for output terminals, so the user should order four sets of [100-051-560]. Note: Use crimp insulated terminals or insulated shrink tubing for wiring connections. Wires should have a continuous maximum allowable temperature of 75°C 600 Vac UL-approved vinyl-sheathed insulation. D
| Wire Gauge | Terminal Screws | Crimp Terminal Model Number | Tool | Column | Insulation Cap Model No. | Code<1> |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Machine No. | Die Jaw | |||||
| 14 AWG | M4 | R2-4 | YA-4 | AD-900 | TP-003 | 100-054-028 |
| 12 / 10 AWG | M4 | R5.5-4 | YA-4 | AD-900 | TP-005 | 100-054-029 |
| M5 | R5.5-5 | YA-4 | AD-900 | TP-005 | 100-054-030 | |
| 8 AWG | M4 | 8-4 | YA-4 | AD-901 | TP-008 | 100-054-031 |
| M5 | R8-5 | YA-4 | AD-901 | TP-008 | 100-054-032 | |
| 6 AWG | M4 | 14-NK4 | YA-4 | AD-902 | TP-014 | 100-054-033 |
| M5 | R14-5 | YA-4 | AD-902 | TP-014 | 100-054-034 | |
| M6 | R14-6 | YA-5 | AD-952 | TP-014 | 100-051-261 | |
| M8 | R14-8 | YA-5 | AD-952 | TP-014 | 100-054-035 | |
| 4 AWG | M6 | R22-6 | YA-5 | AD-953 | TP-022 | 100-051-262 |
| M8 | R22-8 | YA-5 | AD-953 | TP-022 | 100-051-263 | |
| 3/2/1 AWG | M8 | R38-8 | YA-5 | AD-954 | TP-038 | 100-051-264 |
| M10 | R38-10 | YA-5 | AD-954 | TP-038 | 100-061-114 | |
| 1/0 AWG 1/0 AWG × 2P | M8 | R60-8 | YA-5 | AD-955 | TP-060 | 100-051-265 |
| M10 | R60-10 | YF-1, YET-300-1 | TD-321, TD-311 | TP-060 | 100-051-266 | |
| 2/0 AWG 2/0 AWG × 2P | M10 | 70-10 | YF-1, YET-300-1 | TD-323, TD-312 | TP-080 | 100-054-036 |
| 1 AWG × 2P 2 AWG × 2P | M10 | 38-L10 | YF-1, YET-150-1 | TD-224, TD-212 | TP-038 | 100-051-556 |
| 3/0 AWG | M10 | 80-10 | YF-1, YET-300-1 | TD-323, TD-312 | TP-080 | 100-051-267 |
| 3/0 AWG × 2P | M10 | 80-L10 | YF-1, YET-150-1 | TD-227, TD-214 | TP-080 | 100-051-557 |
| M12 | 80-L12 | YF-1, YET-300-1 | TD-323, TD-312 | TP-080 | 100-051-558 | |
| 4/0 AWG | M10 | R100-10 | YF-1, YET-300-1 YF-1, YET-150-1 | TD-324, TD-312 TD-228, TD-214 | TP-100 | 100-051-269 |
| 4/0 AWG × 2P | M10 | 100-L10 | YF-1, YET-150-1 | TD-228, TD-214 | TP-100 | 100-051-559 |
| M12 | 100-L12 | YF-1, YET-300-1 | TD-324, TD-312 | TP-100 | 100-051-560 | |
| 250 / 300 kcmil | M10 | R150-10 | YF-1. YET-150-1 | TD-229, TD-215 | TP-150 | 100-051-272 |
| M12 | R150-12 | YF-1, YET-300-1 | TD-325, TD-313 | TP-150 | 100-051-273 | |
| 250 kcmil × 2P 300 kcmil × 2P | M10 | 150-L10 | YF-1, YET-150-1 | TD-229, TD-215 | TP-150 | 100-051-561 |
| M12 | 150-L12 | YF-1, YET-300-1 | TD-325, TD-313 | TP-150 | 100-051-562 | |
| 350 kcmil | M10 | 180-10 | YF-1, YET-300-1 | TD-326, TD-313 | TP-200 | 100-066-687 |
| 400 kcmil | M10 | 200-10 | YF-1, YET-300-1 | TD-327, TD-314 | TP-200 | 100-051-563 |
| 350 kcmil × 2P | M12 | 180-L12 | YF-1, YET-300-1 | TD-326, TD-313 | TP-200 | 100-066-688 |
| 400 kcmil × 2P | M12 | 200-L12 | YF-1, YET-300-1 | TD-327, TD-314 | TP-200 | 100-051-564 |
| 500 kcmil 600 / 650 kcmil 500 kcmil × 2P 600 kcmil × 2P | M10 | 325-10 | YF-1, YET-300-1 | TD-328, TD-315 | TP-325 | 100-051-565 |
| M12 | 325-12 | YF-1, YET-300-1 | TD-328, TD-315 | TP-325 | 100-051-277 |
Source page
Page 442
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 442 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
D.3 UL and CSA Standards
Installing Input Fuses
NOTICE: If a fuse is blown or a Residual Current Device (RCD) is tripped, check the wiring and the selection of the peripheral devices to identify the cause. Contact Yaskawa before restarting the drive or the peripheral devices if the cause cannot be identified. Factory Recommended Branch Circuit Protection
Yaskawa recommends installing one of the following types of branch circuit protection to maintain compliance with UL508C. Semiconductor protective type fuses are preferred. Alternate branch circuit protection devices are also listed in Table D.7. Table D.7 Factory Recommended L1000A AC Drive Branch Circuit Protection
L1000A in Heavy Duty Mode (C6-01 = 0) D C ri I v M e R M -L o del AC Drive Input Amps MCCB Rating Amps<1> Time De A l m ay p F s u < s 2 e > Rating No R n a -t t i i m ng e A D m el p a s y < F 3 u > se Ra S ti e n m g i ( c B F o u u n s s d s e u m A c a m to n p r n e F r u e s ) e < 4> Three-Phase 200 V Class 20008 7.5 15 12 20 FWH-70B (70) 20011 11 20 17.5 30 FWH-70B (70) 20018 18.9 35 30 50 FWH-90B (90) 20025 28 50 40 75 FWH-100B (100) 20033 37 60 60 100 FWH-200B (200) 20047 52 100 90 150 FWH-200B (200) 20060 68 125 110 200 FWH-200B (200) 20075 80 150 125 225 FWH-300A (300) 20085 82 150 125 225 FWH-300A (300) 20115 111 200 175 250 FWH-350A (350) 20145 136 250 225 350 FWH-400A (400) 20180 164 300 250 450 FWH-400A (400) 20215 200 400 350 600 FWH-600A (600) 20283 271 500 450 800 FWH-700A (700) 20346 324 600 500 900<5> FWH-800A (800) 20415 394 700 600 1100<5> FWH-1000B (1000) Three-Phase 400 V Class 40005 4.4 15 7 12 FWH-70B (70) 40006 6 15 10 17.5 FWH-70B (70) 40009 10.4 20 17.5 30 FWH-90B (90) 40015 15 30 25 40 FWH-80B (80) 40018 20 40 35 60 FWH-100B (100) 40024 29 50 50 80 FWH-125B (125) 40031 39 75 60 110 FWH-200B (200) 40039 47 75 75 125 FWH-250A (250) 40045 43 75 75 125 FWH-250A (250) 40060 58 100 100 150 FWH-250A (250) 40075 71 125 110 200 FWH-250A (250) 40091 86 150 150 250 FWH-250A (250) 40112 105 175 175 300 FWH-350A (350) 40150 142 225 225 400 FWH-400A (400) 40180 170 250 250 500 FWH-500A (500) 40216 207 350 350 600 FWH-600A (600) <1> Maximum MCCB Rating is 15 A, or 200% of drive input current rating, whichever is larger. MCCB voltage rating must be 600 Vac or greater. <2> Maximum Time Delay fuse is 175% of drive input current rating. This covers any Class CC, J or T class fuse. <3> Maximum Non-time Delay fuse is 300% of drive input current rating. This covers any CC, J or T class fuse. <4> When using semiconductor fuses, Bussmann FWH and FWP are required for UL compliance. Select FWH for 200 V Class and 400 V Class models and FWP fuses for 600 V models. <5> Class L fuse is also approved for this rating.
442 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Drive Model CIMR-L | L1000A in Heavy Duty Mode (C6-01 = 0) | Column | Column | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| AC Drive Input Amps | MCCB Rating Amps<1> | Time Delay Fuse Rating Amps<2> | Non-time Delay Fuse Rating Amps<3> | Bussmann Semiconductor Fuse Rating (Fuse Ampere)<4> | |
| Three-Phase 200 V Class | |||||
| 20008 | 7.5 | 15 | 12 | 20 | FWH-70B (70) |
| 20011 | 11 | 20 | 17.5 | 30 | FWH-70B (70) |
| 20018 | 18.9 | 35 | 30 | 50 | FWH-90B (90) |
| 20025 | 28 | 50 | 40 | 75 | FWH-100B (100) |
| 20033 | 37 | 60 | 60 | 100 | FWH-200B (200) |
| 20047 | 52 | 100 | 90 | 150 | FWH-200B (200) |
| 20060 | 68 | 125 | 110 | 200 | FWH-200B (200) |
| 20075 | 80 | 150 | 125 | 225 | FWH-300A (300) |
| 20085 | 82 | 150 | 125 | 225 | FWH-300A (300) |
| 20115 | 111 | 200 | 175 | 250 | FWH-350A (350) |
| 20145 | 136 | 250 | 225 | 350 | FWH-400A (400) |
| 20180 | 164 | 300 | 250 | 450 | FWH-400A (400) |
| 20215 | 200 | 400 | 350 | 600 | FWH-600A (600) |
| 20283 | 271 | 500 | 450 | 800 | FWH-700A (700) |
| 20346 | 324 | 600 | 500 | 900<5> | FWH-800A (800) |
| 20415 | 394 | 700 | 600 | 1100<5> | FWH-1000B (1000) |
| Three-Phase 400 V Class | |||||
| 40005 | 4.4 | 15 | 7 | 12 | FWH-70B (70) |
| 40006 | 6 | 15 | 10 | 17.5 | FWH-70B (70) |
| 40009 | 10.4 | 20 | 17.5 | 30 | FWH-90B (90) |
| 40015 | 15 | 30 | 25 | 40 | FWH-80B (80) |
| 40018 | 20 | 40 | 35 | 60 | FWH-100B (100) |
| 40024 | 29 | 50 | 50 | 80 | FWH-125B (125) |
| 40031 | 39 | 75 | 60 | 110 | FWH-200B (200) |
| 40039 | 47 | 75 | 75 | 125 | FWH-250A (250) |
| 40045 | 43 | 75 | 75 | 125 | FWH-250A (250) |
| 40060 | 58 | 100 | 100 | 150 | FWH-250A (250) |
| 40075 | 71 | 125 | 110 | 200 | FWH-250A (250) |
| 40091 | 86 | 150 | 150 | 250 | FWH-250A (250) |
| 40112 | 105 | 175 | 175 | 300 | FWH-350A (350) |
| 40150 | 142 | 225 | 225 | 400 | FWH-400A (400) |
| 40180 | 170 | 250 | 250 | 500 | FWH-500A (500) |
| 40216 | 207 | 350 | 350 | 600 | FWH-600A (600) |
Source page
Page 443
D.3 UL and CSA Standards
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 443 sdradnatS ecnailpmoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 443 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals Wire low voltage wires with NEC Class 1 circuit conductors. Refer to national state or local codes for wiring. If external power supply used, it shall be UL Listed Class 2 power source only or equivalent. Refer to NEC Article 725 Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 Remote-Control, Signaling, and Power Limited Circuits for requirements concerning class 1 circuit conductors and class 2 power supplies. Table D.8 Control Circuit Terminal Power Supply Input / Output Terminal Signal Power Supply Specifications Open Collector Outputs P1, C1, P2, C2, DM+, DM- Requires class 2 power supply Digital inputs S1-S8, SN, SC, SP, HC, H1, H2 Use the internal LVLC power supply of the drive. Use class 2 for Analog inputs / outputs +V, -V, A1, A2, AC, AM, FM external power supply. Drive Short Circuit Rating This drive is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 600 V ac maximum (Up to 240 V in 200 V class drives, up to 480 V for 400 V class drives), when protected by Bussmann Type FWH fuses as specified in Input Fuses on page 340. CSA Standards Compliance CSA for Industrial Control Equipment The L1000 is CSA certified as Industrial Control Equipment Class 3211. Specifically, the L1000 is certified to: CAN/CSA C22.2 No.04-04 and CAN/CSA C22.2 No.14-05. FigureD.9 Figure D.9 CSA Mark CSA for Elevator Equipment The L1000 is tested and complies with CSA B44.1-04/ASME A17.5-2004 standard. This standard is used by CSA to evaluate the L1000 to Class 2411 (Elevator Equipment). FigureD.10 CSA B44.1 / ASME A17.5 Figure D.10 CSA B44.1-04/ASME A17.5-2004 Mark D
| Input / Output | Terminal Signal | Power Supply Specifications |
|---|---|---|
| Open Collector Outputs | P1, C1, P2, C2, DM+, DM- | Requires class 2 power supply |
| Digital inputs | S1-S8, SN, SC, SP, HC, H1, H2 | Use the internal LVLC power supply of the drive. Use class 2 for external power supply. |
| Analog inputs / outputs | +V, -V, A1, A2, AC, AM, FM |
Source page
Page 444
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 444 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
D.3 UL and CSA Standards
Drive Motor Overload Protection
Set parameter E2-01/E5-03 (motor rated current) to the appropriate value to enable motor overload protection. The internal motor overload protection is UL Listed and in accordance with the NEC and CEC.
E2-01/E5-03: Motor Rated Current (IM Motor/PM Motor) Setting Range: Model Dependent
Default Setting: Model Dependent Parameter E2-01/E5-03 (motor rated current) protects the motor if parameter L1-01 is not set to 0 (default is 1, enabling protection for standard induction motors). If Auto-Tuning has been performed successfully, the motor data entered to T1-04/T2-04 is automatically written into parameter E2-01/E5-03. If Auto-Tuning has not been performed, manually enter the correct motor rated current to parameter E2-01/E5-03.
L1-01: Motor Overload Protection Selection
The drive has an electronic overload protection function (oL1) based on time, output current, and output speed, which protects the motor from overheating. The electronic thermal overload function is UL-recognized, so it does not require an external thermal relay for single motor operation. This parameter selects the motor overload curve used according to the type of motor applied.
Table D.9 Overload Protection Settings Setting Description 0 Disabled Disabled the internal motor overload protection of the drive. Selects protection characteristics for a standard self cooled motor with limited cooling capabilities when running below 1 Standard fan-cooled motor (default) the rated speed. The motor overload detection level (oL1) is automatically reduced when running below the motor rated speed. Selects protection characteristics for a motor with self-cooling capability within a speed range of 10:1. The motor 2 Drive duty motor with a speed range of 1:10 overload detection level (oL1) is automatically reduced when running below 1/10 of the motor rated speed. 3 Vector motor with a speed range of 1:100 Selects protection characteristics for a motor capable of cooling itself at any speed - including zero speed (externally cooled motor). The motor overload detection level (oL1) is constant over the entire speed range. Selects protection characteristics for a constant torque PM motor. The motor overload detection level (oL1) is constant 5 Permanent Magnet motor with constant torque over the whole speed range. Selects protection characteristics for a standard self cooled motor with limited cooling capabilities when running below 6 Standard fan cooled motor (50 Hz) the rated speed. The motor overload detection level (oL1) is automatically reduces when running below the motor rated speed. When connecting the drive to more than one motor for simultaneous operation, disable the electronic overload protection (L1-01 = 0) and wire each motor with its own motor thermal overload relay. Enable the motor overload protection (L1-01 = 1 to 3, 5) when connecting the drive to a single motor, unless another motor overload preventing device is installed. The drive electronic thermal overload function causes an oL1 fault, which shuts off the output of the drive and prevents additional overheating of the motor. The motor temperature is continually calculated while the drive is powered up.
444 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Setting | Description | Column |
|---|---|---|
| 0 | Disabled | Disabled the internal motor overload protection of the drive. |
| 1 | Standard fan-cooled motor (default) | Selects protection characteristics for a standard self cooled motor with limited cooling capabilities when running below the rated speed. The motor overload detection level (oL1) is automatically reduced when running below the motor rated speed. |
| 2 | Drive duty motor with a speed range of 1:10 | Selects protection characteristics for a motor with self-cooling capability within a speed range of 10:1. The motor overload detection level (oL1) is automatically reduced when running below 1/10 of the motor rated speed. |
| 3 | Vector motor with a speed range of 1:100 | Selects protection characteristics for a motor capable of cooling itself at any speed - including zero speed (externally cooled motor). The motor overload detection level (oL1) is constant over the entire speed range. |
| 5 | Permanent Magnet motor with constant torque | Selects protection characteristics for a constant torque PM motor. The motor overload detection level (oL1) is constant over the whole speed range. |
| 6 | Standard fan cooled motor (50 Hz) | Selects protection characteristics for a standard self cooled motor with limited cooling capabilities when running below the rated speed. The motor overload detection level (oL1) is automatically reduces when running below the motor rated speed. |
Source page
Page 445
D.3 UL and CSA Standards
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 445 sdradnatS ecnailpmoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 445 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 L1-02: Motor Overload Protection Time Setting Range: 0.1 to 5.0 min Factory Default: 1.0 min Parameter L1-02 determines how long the motor is allowed to operate before the oL1 fault occurs when the drive is running at 60 Hz and at 150% of the full load amp rating (E2-01/E5-03) of the motor. Adjusting the value of L1-02 can shift the set of oL1 curves up the y axis of the diagram below, but will not change the shape of the curves. FigureD.11 Operation time (minutes) 10 7 3 Cold start (Characteristics when an overload occurs 1 at a complete stop) 0.4 Hot start (Characteristics when an overload occurs during continuous operation at 100%) 0.1 Motor current (%) 0 100 150 200 E2-01 = 100% motor current Figure D.11 Protection Operation Time for General Purpose Motors at the Rated Output Frequency L1-03 Motor Overload Alarm Operation Selection Setting Description 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop 2 Fast-Stop 3 Alarm Only (default setting) L1-04 Motor Overload Fault Operation Selection Setting Description 0 Ramp to Stop 1 Coast to Stop (default setting) 2 Fast-Stop D
| Setting | Description |
|---|---|
| 0 | Ramp to Stop |
| 1 | Coast to Stop |
| 2 | Fast-Stop |
| 3 | Alarm Only (default setting) |
| Setting | Description |
|---|---|
| 0 | Ramp to Stop |
| 1 | Coast to Stop (default setting) |
| 2 | Fast-Stop |
Source page
Page 446
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 446 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
D.4 Safe Disable Input Function
D.4 Safe Disable Input Function
This section explains the Safe Disable function and how to use it in an elevator installation. Contact Yaskawa if more information is required.
Safety Standards
The TUV mark indicates compliance with safety standards. FigureD.12
Figure D.12 TUV mark Standard Models (CIMR-LA)
Table D.10 Safety Standards and Applicable Harmonized Standards for CIMR-LA Safety Standards Applicable Harmonized Standards IEC/EN 61508 series (SIL2) Functional Safety IEC/EN 61800-5-2 (SIL2) Safety of Machinery ISO/EN ISO 13849-1/AC: 2009 (PL d (Cat.3)) EMC EN 61800-3: 2004/A1: 2012 IEC 61800-3: 2004/A1: 2011 Models in Compliance with IEC/EN 61508 SIL3 (CIMR-LF) Table D.11 Safety Standards and Applicable Harmonized Standards for CIMR-LF Safety Standards Applicable Harmonized Standards IEC/EN 61508 series: 2010 (SIL3) Functional Safety IEC/EN 62061: 2005 (SILCL3) IEC/EN 61800-5-2: 2007 (SIL3) Safety of Machinery ISO/EN ISO 13849-1/AC: 2009 (PL e (Cat.3)) EMC IEC/EN 61326-3-1: 2008 (EMC-related) The Safe Disable function is in compliance with these standards. Specifications
The Safe Disable inputs provide a stop function in compliance with “Safe Torque Off” as defined in the IEC/EN 61800-5-2. Safe Disable inputs have been designed to meet the requirements of the ISO/EN 13849-1 and IEC/EN 61508. A Safe Disable Status Monitor for error detection in the safety circuit is also provided.
Table D.12 Specifications for Safe Disable Function • Inputs: 2 Safe Disable inputs H1, H2 Signal ON level: 18 to 28 Vdc Inputs / Outputs Signal OFF level: -4 to 4 Vdc • Outputs: 1 Safe Disable Monitor output EDM (DM+, DM-) CIMR-LA: less than 1 ms Response Time from Input Open to Drive Output Stop CIMR-LF: less than 3 ms Response Time from Input Open of H1 and H2 Terminals to CIMR-LA: less than 1 ms EDM CIMR-LF: less than 4 ms CIMR-LA: PFD = 5.15E-5 Demand Rate Low CIMR-LF: PFD = 8.14E-6 Failure Probability Demand Rate High or CIMR-LA: PFH = 1.2E-9 Continuous CIMR-LF: PFH = 1.96E-9 The Safe Disable inputs satisfy the following requirements (DC from EDM considered) Performance Level CIMR-LA: Performance Level (PL) d according to ISO/EN 13849-1 CIMR-LF: Performance Level (PL) e according to ISO/EN 13849-1 HFT (Hardware Fault Tolerance) N = 1 Classification of Subsystem Type B 446 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Safety Standards | Applicable Harmonized Standards |
|---|---|
| Functional Safety | IEC/EN 61508 series (SIL2) |
| IEC/EN 61800-5-2 (SIL2) | |
| Safety of Machinery | ISO/EN ISO 13849-1/AC: 2009 (PL d (Cat.3)) |
| EMC | EN 61800-3: 2004/A1: 2012 IEC 61800-3: 2004/A1: 2011 |
| Safety Standards | Applicable Harmonized Standards |
|---|---|
| Functional Safety | IEC/EN 61508 series: 2010 (SIL3) |
| IEC/EN 62061: 2005 (SILCL3) | |
| IEC/EN 61800-5-2: 2007 (SIL3) | |
| Safety of Machinery | ISO/EN ISO 13849-1/AC: 2009 (PL e (Cat.3)) |
| EMC | IEC/EN 61326-3-1: 2008 (EMC-related) |
| Inputs / Outputs | Column | • Inputs: 2 Safe Disable inputs H1, H2 Signal ON level: 18 to 28 Vdc Signal OFF level: -4 to 4 Vdc • Outputs: 1 Safe Disable Monitor output EDM (DM+, DM-) |
|---|---|---|
| Response Time from Input Open to Drive Output Stop | CIMR-LA: less than 1 ms CIMR-LF: less than 3 ms | |
| Response Time from Input Open of H1 and H2 Terminals to EDM | CIMR-LA: less than 1 ms CIMR-LF: less than 4 ms | |
| Failure Probability | Demand Rate Low | CIMR-LA: PFD = 5.15E-5 CIMR-LF: PFD = 8.14E-6 |
| Demand Rate High or Continuous | CIMR-LA: PFH = 1.2E-9 CIMR-LF: PFH = 1.96E-9 | |
| Performance Level | The Safe Disable inputs satisfy the following requirements (DC from EDM considered) CIMR-LA: Performance Level (PL) d according to ISO/EN 13849-1 CIMR-LF: Performance Level (PL) e according to ISO/EN 13849-1 | |
| HFT (Hardware Fault Tolerance) | N = 1 | |
| Classification of Subsystem | Type B |
Source page
Page 447
D.4 Safe Disable Input Function
Source page
Page 448
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 448 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
D.4 Safe Disable Input Function
Using the Safe Disable Function
The Safe Disable inputs offer a stop function in compliance with “Safe Torque Off,” as defined in IEC/EN 61800-5-2. Safe Disable inputs have been designed to meet the requirements in Table D.10 and Table D.11. A Safe Disable Status Monitor for error detection in the safety circuit is also provided.
Safe Disable Circuit
The Safe Disable circuit consists of two independent input channels that can block the output transistors (terminals H1 and H2). The input can either use the drive internal power supply or an external power supply. Use jumper S3 on the terminal board to select between Sink or Source mode with either internal or external power supply. A photocoupler output is available to monitor the status of the Safe Disable terminals DM+ and DM-. Refer to Output Terminals on page 68 for signal specifications when using this output. Additionally a Safe Disable monitor function can be assigned to one of the digital outputs (H2- = 58).
FigureD.13 Main Power 24 Vdc Control Safety Relay or PLC HC Circuit with safety functionality Safety Jumper S3 Feedback Outputs Setting: SOURCE H1 Gate Block 1 NPower ModuleP H2 Gate Block 2 DM+ >=1 DM- Drive M Figure D.13 Safe Disable Function Wiring Example (Source Mode) Disabling and Enabling the Drive Output (“Safe Torque Off”) Figure D.14 illustrates a Safe Disable input operation example.
FigureD.14 Motor coasts Output to stop Frequency Drive is ready for operation Up/Down Command Run Stop
H1, H2 Input ON (Safe Disable off) OFF (Safe Disable activated)
Drive Output Normal operation Safe Torque-Off Baseblock (Not Safe!) Figure D.14 Safe Disable Operation Entering the “Safe Torque Off” State Whenever either one Safe Disable input or both inputs open, the motor torque is shut off by switching off the drive output. If the motor was running before the Safe Disable inputs opened, it will coast to stop, regardless of the stopping method set in parameter b1-03.
Notice that the “Safe Torque Off” state can only be achieved using the Safe Disable function. Removing the Up/Down command stops the drive and shuts the output off (baseblock), but does not create a “Safe Torque Off” status. Note: To avoid an uncontrolled stop during normal operation, make sure that the Safe Disable inputs are opened first when the motor has completely stopped.
448 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Column | Column | Safety Outputs | Column | Column |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| Gat H2 | e Blo |
Source page
Page 449
D.4 Safe Disable Input Function
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 449 sdradnatS ecnailpmoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 449 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 Returning to Normal Operation after Safe Disable The Safe Torque-Off state can be left by simply closing both Safe-Disable inputs. If the Up/Down command is issued before the Safe-Disable inputs are closed, then the drive operation depends on the setting of parameter L8-88. • If L8-88 is set to 0, the Up/Down command needs to be cycled in order to start the motor. • If L8-88 is set to 1 (default), the drive will start the motor immediately when the Safe Torque-Off mode is left, i.e., the Safe Disable inputs are enabled. Additionally when L8-88 is set to 1, then parameter S6-16 (Restart after Baseblock Selection) can be used to determine how the drive behaves when the Safe-Disable inputs are opened and closed while the Up/Down command is kept active. When S6-16 is set to 0, the drive will not restart (default) and the Up/Down command needs to be cycled. When S6-16 is set to 1, then the drive will restart as soon as the Safe-Disable inputs are closed. Safe Disable Monitor Output Function and Digital Operator Display The table below explains the drive output and Safe Disable monitor state depending on the Safe Disable inputs. Table D.13 Drive Output and Safe Disable Monitor State depending on the Safe Disable Inputs Drive Model Input 1 S , a H f 1 e - D HC isab I l n e p I u n t p 2 u , t H2-HC Sa E fe D D M is ( a D b M le + , M D o M n - it ) or, Safe H D 2 is - ab le = M 5 o 8 nitor, Drive Output Digital Operator Display Off Off Off On Safely disabled, “Safe Torque Off” Hbb (flashes) On Off On On Safely disabled, “Safe Torque Off” HbbF (flashes) CIMR-LA Off On On On Safely disabled, “Safe Torque Off” HbbF (flashes) On On On Off Baseblock, ready for operation Normal display Off Off On On Safely disabled, “Safe Torque Off” Hbb (flashes) On Off Off On Safely disabled, “Safe Torque Off” HbbF (flashes) CIMR-LF Off On Off On Safely disabled, “Safe Torque Off” HbbF (flashes) On On Off Off Baseblock, ready for operation Normal display Safe Disable Status Monitor With the Safe Disable monitor output (terminals DM+ and DM-), the drive provides a safety status feedback signal. This signal should be read by the device that controls the Safe Disable inputs (PLC or a safety relay) in order to prohibit leaving the “Safe Torque Off” status in case the safety circuit malfunctions. Refer to the instruction manual of the safety device for details on this function. Digital Operator Display In contrast to terminals DM+/DM-, the safe disable monitor function that can be programmed for a digital output (H2- = 58) is a software function and can be used for EN81-1 conform one contactor solutions but not as an EDM signal according to IEC/EN 61800-5-2. When both Safe Disable inputs are open, “Hbb” will flash in the digital operator display. Should only one of the Safe Disable channels be on while the other is off, "HbbF" will flash in the display to indicate that there is a problem in the safety circuit or in the drive. This display should not appear under normal conditions if the Safe Disable circuit is utilized properly. Refer to Alarm Codes, Causes, and Possible Solutions on page 280 to resolve possible errors. If a fault in the safety circuit of the drive is detected, “SCF” will be displayed in the LCD operator. This indicates damage to the drive. Refer to Fault Displays, Causes, and Possible Solutions on page 267 for details. Validating Safe Disable Function When you start-up, replace parts or conduct maintenance, you must always perform the following validation test on the safe disable inputs after completing the wiring. (Check results should be maintained as a record of tests performed.) • When the H1 and H2 signals turn OFF, confirm that “Hbb” is displayed on the LCD operator, and that the motor is not in operation. • Monitor the ON/OFF status of the H1 and H2 signals and confirm the EDM signal by referring to Table D.13. If the ON/OFF status of the signals do not coincide with the display, the following must be considered: an error in the external device, disconnection of the external wiring, short circuit in the external wiring, or a failure in the drive. Find the cause and correct the problem. • In normal operation, confirm the EDM signal by referring to Table D.13. D
| Drive Model | Safe Disable Input | Column | Safe Disable Monitor, EDM (DM+, DM-) | Safe Disable Monitor, H2- = 58 | Drive Output | Digital Operator Display |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Input 1, H1-HC | Input 2, H2-HC | |||||
| CIMR-LA | Off | Off | Off | On | Safely disabled, “Safe Torque Off” | Hbb (flashes) |
| On | Off | On | On | Safely disabled, “Safe Torque Off” | HbbF (flashes) | |
| Off | On | On | On | Safely disabled, “Safe Torque Off” | HbbF (flashes) | |
| On | On | On | Off | Baseblock, ready for operation | Normal display | |
| CIMR-LF | Off | Off | On | On | Safely disabled, “Safe Torque Off” | Hbb (flashes) |
| On | Off | Off | On | Safely disabled, “Safe Torque Off” | HbbF (flashes) | |
| Off | On | Off | On | Safely disabled, “Safe Torque Off” | HbbF (flashes) | |
| On | On | Off | Off | Baseblock, ready for operation | Normal display |
Source page
Page 450
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 450 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
D.5 EN81-1/20 Conform Circuit with one Motor Contactor
D.5 EN81-1/20 Conform Circuit with one Motor Contactor
The safe disable circuit can be utilized to install the drive models CIMR-L in an elevator system using only one motor contactor instead of two. In such a system the following guidelines must be followed to comply with EN81-1 or EN81-20: • The circuit must be designed so that the inputs H1 and H2 are opened and the drive output shuts off when the safety chain is interrupted. • A drive digital output must be programmed as Safe Disable feedback (H2- = 58). This feedback signal must be implemented in the contactor supervision circuit of the controller that prevents a restart in case of a fault in the Safe Disable circuit or the motor contactor. • All contactors and wiring must be selected and installed in compliance with EN81-1 or EN81-20. • The safe disable inputs H1 and H2 must be used to enable/disable the drive. The input logic must be set to Source Mode. Refer to Sinking/Sourcing Mode Selection for Safe Disable Inputs on page 73 for details on setting jumper S3.
The figure below shows a wiring example.
Safety Chain Circuit Elevator Controller
Contactor Close Contactor Check Command (Restart Permission)
K01
24 Vdc K1
Drive H1 H2 HC Up/Down; Speed selection; ... Safe Disable Monitor (H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 58) Yaskawa CIMR-L(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)(cid:3)
K2
Note: 1. The drive output will immediately shut off when either of the inputs H1 or H2 is opened. In this case the brake should apply immediately in order to prevent uncontrolled movement of the elevator. 2. Terminals H1 or H2 must be closed prior to setting the Up/Down command.
450 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 451
D.6 EN81-20 Conform Circuit with No Motor Contactor
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 451 sdradnatS ecnailpmoC SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 451 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 D.6 EN81-20 Conform Circuit with No Motor Contactor The safe disable circuit can be utilized to install the drive models CIMR-LF in an elevator system with no motor contactor. In such a system, the following guidelines must be followed to comply with EN81-20: • The circuit must be designed so that the inputs H1 or H2 are opened and the drive output shuts off when the safety chain is interrupted. • The safe disable inputs H1 and H2 must be used to enable/disable the drive. The input logic must be set to Source Mode. Refer to Sinking/Sourcing Mode Selection for Safe Disable Inputs on page 73 for details on setting jumper S3. The figure below shows a wiring example. Safety Chain Circuit Elevator Controller Drive Ready Command Status Monitor K01 24 Vdc K1 K2 Drive H2 H1 HC Up/Down; Speed selection; ... Safe Disable Monitor (H2-(cid:3)(cid:3) = 58) Yaskawa CIMR-L(cid:3)(cid:3)F(cid:3) M Note: 1. The drive output will immediately shut off when either of the inputs H1 or H2 is opened. In this case the brake should apply immediately in order to prevent uncontrolled movement of the elevator. 2. Terminals H1 or H2 must be closed prior to setting the Up/Down command. 3. A drive digital output must be programmed as Safe Disable feedback (H2- = 58). This feedback signal can be implemented in the contactor supervision circuit of the controller that monitors a fault in the Safe Disable circuit. D
Source page
Page 452
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 452 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
D.6 EN81-20 Conform Circuit with No Motor Contactor
452 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 453
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 453 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Appendix: E
Quick Reference Sheet
This section provides tables to keep record of the drive specification, motor specification and drive settings. Fill in the data after commissioning the application and have them ready when contacting Yaskawa for technical assistance.
E.1 DRIVE AND MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 E.2 BASIC PARAMETER SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 E.3 USER SETTING TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 453
Source page
Page 454
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 454 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
E.1 Drive and Motor Specifications
E.1 Drive and Motor Specifications
Drive Specifications
Design revision order AC drive model MODEL : CIMR-LC4A0009BAA REV : A MAX APPLI. MOTOR : 4kW Normal Duty Amps / I O n u p t u p t u s t p s e p c e if c ic if a ic t a io t n io s ns I O N U P T U P T UT : : A A C C 3 3 P P H H 3 0 8 -4 0 8 -4 0 8 V 0 0 V - 2 5 0 0 0 /6 H 0 z H 9 z . 2 1 A 0.4A 7 IN J D 4 .C 8 ONT.EQ. S H o e f a tw vy a r D e u v ty e r A si m on ps MASS : 3.5 kg PRG : 7010 15 Lot number O / N : FILE NO : E131457 Serial number S / N : IE2 Loss 1.9% PASS YEG IP20 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN 2-1 Kurosaki-shiroishi, Yahatanishi-Ku, Kitakyushu 806-0004 Japan Items Value Model CIMR-L
Serial Number Software Version (PRG)
Options used (Option cards, braking transistor, etc.)
Motor Specifications
Induction Motor
Items Value Items Value
Manufacturer Motor Rated Current A Model Motor Base Frequency Hz
Motor Rated Power kW Number of Motor Poles
Motor Rated Voltage V Motor Rated Speed r/min Permanent Magnet Motor
Items Value Items Value
Manufacturer Induction Voltage Constant mVs/rad Model Induction Voltage Constant mV/(r/min)
PM Motor Rated Power kW PM Motor Rated Current A
PM Motor Rated Voltage V Number of PM Motor Poles d-Axis Inductance mH PM Motor Base Speed r/min
q-Axis Inductance mH Encoder Offset Motor Speed Encoder (if used)
Items Value Items Value Manufacturer Type Number
Interface Resolution
454 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| Items | Value |
|---|---|
| Model | CIMR-L |
| Serial Number | |
| Software Version (PRG) | |
| Options used (Option cards, braking transistor, etc.) |
| Items | Value | Items | Value |
|---|---|---|---|
| Manufacturer | Motor Rated Current | A | |
| Model | Motor Base Frequency | Hz | |
| Motor Rated Power | kW | Number of Motor Poles | |
| Motor Rated Voltage | V | Motor Rated Speed | r/min |
| Items | Value | Items | Value |
|---|---|---|---|
| Manufacturer | Induction Voltage Constant | mVs/rad | |
| Model | Induction Voltage Constant | mV/(r/min) | |
| PM Motor Rated Power | kW | PM Motor Rated Current | A |
| PM Motor Rated Voltage | V | Number of PM Motor Poles | |
| d-Axis Inductance | mH | PM Motor Base Speed | r/min |
| q-Axis Inductance | mH | Encoder Offset |
| Items | Value | Items | Value |
|---|---|---|---|
| Manufacturer | Type Number | ||
| Interface | Resolution |
Source page
Page 455
E.2 Basic Parameter Settings
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 455 ecnerefeR kciuQ teehS SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 455 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 E.2 Basic Parameter Settings Use these tables to keep record of the most important parameters. Have these data available when contacting the technical support. Basic Setup Item Setting Value Memo Item Setting Value Memo Control Mode A1-02 = Up/Down Command Selection b1-02 = Speed Reference Selection b1-01 = Speed Reference Selection d1-18 = Mode V/f Pattern Setup Item Setting Value Memo Item Setting Value Memo V/f Pattern Selection E1-03 = Middle Output Frequency E1-07 = Max. Output Frequency E1-04 = Mid. Output Freq. Voltage E1-08 = Maximum Voltage E1-05 = Min. Output Frequency E1-09 = Base Frequency E1-06 = Min. Output Freq. Voltage E1-10 = Motor Setup Item Setting Value Memo Item Setting Value Memo Motor Rated Current E2-01 = Number of Motor Poles E2-04 = Induction Motor Motor Rated Slip E2-02 = Motor Line-to-Line Resistance E2-05 = Motor No-Load Current E2-03 = Motor Leakage Inductance E2-06 = Motor Rated Power E5-02 = Motor q-Axis Inductance E5-07 = Motor Rated Current E5-03 = Motor Induction Volt. Const.1 E5-09 = PM Motor Motor Poles E5-04 = Encoder Offset E5-11 = Motor Stator Resistance E5-05 = Motor Induction Volt. Const. 2 E5-24 = Motor d-Axis Inductance E5-06 = Encoder Resolution F1-01 = Multi-Function Digital Inputs Terminal I U n s p e u d t Setting Val N ue a m an e d Function Memo Terminal I U n s p e u d t Setting Val N ue a m an e d Function Memo S3 H1-03 = S6 H1-06 = S4 H1-04 = S7 H1-07 = S5 H1-05 = S8 H1-08 = Analog Inputs Terminal Input Used Setting Value and Function Name Memo A1 H3-02 = A2 H3-10 = Multi-Function Digital Outputs Terminal Output Used Setting Value and Function Name Memo M1-M2 H2-01 = M3-M4 H2-02 = M5-M6 H2-03 = Multi-Function Photocoupler Outputs (P1-C1, P2-C2) Terminal Used/Reserved Setting Value and Function Name Memo P1-C1 H2-04 = P2-C2 H2-05 = Monitor Outputs Terminal Output Used Setting Value and Function Name Memo FM H4-01 = AM H4-04 = E
| Item | Setting Value | Memo | Item | Setting Value | Memo |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Control Mode | A1-02 = | Up/Down Command Selection | b1-02 = | ||
| Speed Reference Selection | b1-01 = | Speed Reference Selection Mode | d1-18 = |
| Item | Setting Value | Memo | Item | Setting Value | Memo |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| V/f Pattern Selection | E1-03 = | Middle Output Frequency | E1-07 = | ||
| Max. Output Frequency | E1-04 = | Mid. Output Freq. Voltage | E1-08 = | ||
| Maximum Voltage | E1-05 = | Min. Output Frequency | E1-09 = | ||
| Base Frequency | E1-06 = | Min. Output Freq. Voltage | E1-10 = |
| Column | Item | Setting Value | Memo | Item | Setting Value | Memo |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Induction Motor | Motor Rated Current | E2-01 = | Number of Motor Poles | E2-04 = | ||
| Motor Rated Slip | E2-02 = | Motor Line-to-Line Resistance | E2-05 = | |||
| Motor No-Load Current | E2-03 = | Motor Leakage Inductance | E2-06 = | |||
| PM Motor | Motor Rated Power | E5-02 = | Motor q-Axis Inductance | E5-07 = | ||
| Motor Rated Current | E5-03 = | Motor Induction Volt. Const.1 | E5-09 = | |||
| Motor Poles | E5-04 = | Encoder Offset | E5-11 = | |||
| Motor Stator Resistance | E5-05 = | Motor Induction Volt. Const. 2 | E5-24 = | |||
| Motor d-Axis Inductance | E5-06 = | Encoder Resolution | F1-01 = |
| Terminal | Input Used | Setting Value and Function Name | Memo | Terminal | Input Used | Setting Value and Function Name | Memo |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| S3 | H1-03 = | S6 | H1-06 = | ||||
| S4 | H1-04 = | S7 | H1-07 = | ||||
| S5 | H1-05 = | S8 | H1-08 = |
| Terminal | Input Used | Setting Value and Function Name | Memo |
|---|---|---|---|
| A1 | H3-02 = | ||
| A2 | H3-10 = |
| Terminal | Output Used | Setting Value and Function Name | Memo |
|---|---|---|---|
| M1-M2 | H2-01 = | ||
| M3-M4 | H2-02 = | ||
| M5-M6 | H2-03 = |
| Terminal | Used/Reserved | Setting Value and Function Name | Memo |
|---|---|---|---|
| P1-C1 | H2-04 = | ||
| P2-C2 | H2-05 = |
| Terminal | Output Used | Setting Value and Function Name | Memo |
|---|---|---|---|
| FM | H4-01 = | ||
| AM | H4-04 = |
Source page
Page 456
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 456 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
E.3 User Setting Table
E.3 User Setting Table
Use the Verify Menu to see which parameters have been changed from their original default settings. • The diamond below the parameter number indicates that the parameter setting can be changed during run. • Parameter names in boldface type are included in the Setup Group of parameters.
No. Name S U et s t e in r g No. Name S U et s t e in r g A1-00 Language Selection C5-01 Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 1 A1-01 Access Level Selection C5-02 Speed Control Loop Integral Time 1 A1-02 Control Method Selection C5-03 Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 2 A1-03 Initialize Parameters C5-04 Speed Control Loop Integral Time 2 A1-04 Password C5-06 Speed Control Loop Primary Delay Time Constant A1-05 Password Setting C5-07 Speed Control Loop Settings Switching Speed A2-01 to User Parameters, 1 to 32 C5-08 Speed Control Loop Integral Limit A2-32 C5-13 Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 3 A2-33 User Parameter Automatic Selection C5-14 Speed Control Loop Integral Time 3 b1-01 Speed Reference Selection C5-16 Speed Control Loop Delay Time during Position Lock b1-02 Up/Down Command Selection C5-17 Motor Inertia b1-03 Stopping Method Selection C5-18 Load Inertia Ratio b1-06 D U i p g / i D ta o l w In n p C ut o m Re m a a d n in d g Selection while in Programming C5-19 S P p o e si e t d io C n o L n o t c ro k l Loop Proportional Gain Time during b1-08 Mode C5-20 Speed Control Loop Integral Time during Position Lock b1-14 Phase Order Selection C5-50 Set Vibrational Frequency Filter b2-08 Magnetic Flux Compensation Value C6-03 Carrier Frequency b4-01 Timer Function On-Delay Time C6-06 PWM Method b4-02 Timer Function Off-Delay Time C6-09 Carrier Frequency during Rotational Auto-Tuning b6-01 Dwell Speed at Start C6-21 Inspection Operation Carrier Frequency b6-02 Dwell Time at Start C6-23 Carrier Frequency during Initial Motor Pole Search b6-03 Dwell Speed at Stop C6-31 Carrier Frequency during Rescue Operation b6-04 Dwell Time at Stop d1-01 Speed Reference 1 b7-01 Droop Control Gain d1-02 Speed Reference 2 b7-02 Droop Control Delay Time. d1-03 Speed Reference 3 b8-01 Energy Saving Control Selection d1-04 Speed Reference 4 b8-16 Energy Saving Control Constant (Ki) d1-05 Speed Reference 5 b8-17 Energy Saving Control Constant (Kt) d1-06 Speed Reference 6 C1-01 Acceleration Ramp 1 d1-07 Speed Reference 7 C1-02 Deceleration Ramp 1 d1-08 Speed Reference 8 C1-03 Acceleration Ramp 2 d1-18 Speed Reference Selection Mode C1-04 Deceleration Ramp 2 d1-19 Nominal Speed C1-05 Acceleration Ramp 3 (Motor 2 Accel Time 1) d1-20 Intermediate Speed 1 C1-06 Deceleration Ramp 3 (Motor 2 Decel Time 1) d1-21 Intermediate Speed 2 C1-07 Acceleration Ramp 4 (Motor 2 Accel Time 2) d1-22 Intermediate Speed 3 C1-08 Deceleration Ramp 4 (Motor 2 Decel Time 2) d1-23 Releveling Speed C1-09 Emergency Stop Ramp d1-24 Inspection Operation Speed C1-10 Accel/Decel Setting Resolution d1-25 Rescue Operation Speed C1-11 Accel/Decel Switching Speed d1-26 Leveling Speed C1-12 Motor 2 Acceleration Time d1-27 Motor 2 Speed Reference C1-13 Motor 2 Deceleration Time d1-28 Leveling Speed Detection Level C1-15 Inspection Deceleration Ramp d1-29 Inspection Speed Detection Level C2-01 Jerk at Accel Start d6-03 Field Forcing Selection C2-02 Jerk at Accel End d6-06 Field Forcing Limit C2-03 Jerk at Decel Start E1-01 Input Voltage Setting C2-04 Jerk at Decel End E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection C2-05 Jerk below Leveling Speed E1-04 Maximum output speed C3-01 Slip Compensation Gain E1-05 Maximum Voltage C3-02 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time E1-06 Base Frequency C3-03 Slip Compensation Limit E1-07 Middle Output Frequency C3-04 Slip Compensation Selection during Regeneration E1-08 Middle Output Frequency Voltage C3-05 Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency C4-01 Torque Compensation Gain E1-10 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage C4-02 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time E1-11 Middle Output Frequency 2 C4-03 Torque Compensation at Forward Start E1-12 Middle Output Frequency Voltage 2 C4-04 Torque Compensation at Reverse Start E1-13 Base Voltage C4-05 Torque Compensation Time Constant E2-01 Motor Rated Current 456 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Name | User Setting |
|---|---|---|
| A1-00 | Language Selection | |
| A1-01 | Access Level Selection | |
| A1-02 | Control Method Selection | |
| A1-03 | Initialize Parameters | |
| A1-04 | Password | |
| A1-05 | Password Setting | |
| A2-01 to A2-32 | User Parameters, 1 to 32 | |
| A2-33 | User Parameter Automatic Selection | |
| b1-01 | Speed Reference Selection | |
| b1-02 | Up/Down Command Selection | |
| b1-03 | Stopping Method Selection | |
| b1-06 | Digital Input Reading | |
| b1-08 | Up/Down Command Selection while in Programming Mode | |
| b1-14 | Phase Order Selection | |
| b2-08 | Magnetic Flux Compensation Value | |
| b4-01 | Timer Function On-Delay Time | |
| b4-02 | Timer Function Off-Delay Time | |
| b6-01 | Dwell Speed at Start | |
| b6-02 | Dwell Time at Start | |
| b6-03 | Dwell Speed at Stop | |
| b6-04 | Dwell Time at Stop | |
| b7-01 | Droop Control Gain | |
| b7-02 | Droop Control Delay Time. | |
| b8-01 | Energy Saving Control Selection | |
| b8-16 | Energy Saving Control Constant (Ki) | |
| b8-17 | Energy Saving Control Constant (Kt) | |
| C1-01 | Acceleration Ramp 1 | |
| C1-02 | Deceleration Ramp 1 | |
| C1-03 | Acceleration Ramp 2 | |
| C1-04 | Deceleration Ramp 2 | |
| C1-05 | Acceleration Ramp 3 (Motor 2 Accel Time 1) | |
| C1-06 | Deceleration Ramp 3 (Motor 2 Decel Time 1) | |
| C1-07 | Acceleration Ramp 4 (Motor 2 Accel Time 2) | |
| C1-08 | Deceleration Ramp 4 (Motor 2 Decel Time 2) | |
| C1-09 | Emergency Stop Ramp | |
| C1-10 | Accel/Decel Setting Resolution | |
| C1-11 | Accel/Decel Switching Speed | |
| C1-12 | Motor 2 Acceleration Time | |
| C1-13 | Motor 2 Deceleration Time | |
| C1-15 | Inspection Deceleration Ramp | |
| C2-01 | Jerk at Accel Start | |
| C2-02 | Jerk at Accel End | |
| C2-03 | Jerk at Decel Start | |
| C2-04 | Jerk at Decel End | |
| C2-05 | Jerk below Leveling Speed | |
| C3-01 | Slip Compensation Gain | |
| C3-02 | Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time | |
| C3-03 | Slip Compensation Limit | |
| C3-04 | Slip Compensation Selection during Regeneration | |
| C3-05 | Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection | |
| C4-01 | Torque Compensation Gain | |
| C4-02 | Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time | |
| C4-03 | Torque Compensation at Forward Start | |
| C4-04 | Torque Compensation at Reverse Start | |
| C4-05 | Torque Compensation Time Constant |
| No. | Name | User Setting |
|---|---|---|
| C5-01 | Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 1 | |
| C5-02 | Speed Control Loop Integral Time 1 | |
| C5-03 | Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 2 | |
| C5-04 | Speed Control Loop Integral Time 2 | |
| C5-06 | Speed Control Loop Primary Delay Time Constant | |
| C5-07 | Speed Control Loop Settings Switching Speed | |
| C5-08 | Speed Control Loop Integral Limit | |
| C5-13 | Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain 3 | |
| C5-14 | Speed Control Loop Integral Time 3 | |
| C5-16 | Speed Control Loop Delay Time during Position Lock | |
| C5-17 | Motor Inertia | |
| C5-18 | Load Inertia Ratio | |
| C5-19 | Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain Time during Position Lock | |
| C5-20 | Speed Control Loop Integral Time during Position Lock | |
| C5-50 | Set Vibrational Frequency Filter | |
| C6-03 | Carrier Frequency | |
| C6-06 | PWM Method | |
| C6-09 | Carrier Frequency during Rotational Auto-Tuning | |
| C6-21 | Inspection Operation Carrier Frequency | |
| C6-23 | Carrier Frequency during Initial Motor Pole Search | |
| C6-31 | Carrier Frequency during Rescue Operation | |
| d1-01 | Speed Reference 1 | |
| d1-02 | Speed Reference 2 | |
| d1-03 | Speed Reference 3 | |
| d1-04 | Speed Reference 4 | |
| d1-05 | Speed Reference 5 | |
| d1-06 | Speed Reference 6 | |
| d1-07 | Speed Reference 7 | |
| d1-08 | Speed Reference 8 | |
| d1-18 | Speed Reference Selection Mode | |
| d1-19 | Nominal Speed | |
| d1-20 | Intermediate Speed 1 | |
| d1-21 | Intermediate Speed 2 | |
| d1-22 | Intermediate Speed 3 | |
| d1-23 | Releveling Speed | |
| d1-24 | Inspection Operation Speed | |
| d1-25 | Rescue Operation Speed | |
| d1-26 | Leveling Speed | |
| d1-27 | Motor 2 Speed Reference | |
| d1-28 | Leveling Speed Detection Level | |
| d1-29 | Inspection Speed Detection Level | |
| d6-03 | Field Forcing Selection | |
| d6-06 | Field Forcing Limit | |
| E1-01 | Input Voltage Setting | |
| E1-03 | V/f Pattern Selection | |
| E1-04 | Maximum output speed | |
| E1-05 | Maximum Voltage | |
| E1-06 | Base Frequency | |
| E1-07 | Middle Output Frequency | |
| E1-08 | Middle Output Frequency Voltage | |
| E1-09 | Minimum Output Frequency | |
| E1-10 | Minimum Output Frequency Voltage | |
| E1-11 | Middle Output Frequency 2 | |
| E1-12 | Middle Output Frequency Voltage 2 | |
| E1-13 | Base Voltage | |
| E2-01 | Motor Rated Current |
Source page
Page 457
E.3 User Setting Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 457 ecnerefeR kciuQ teehS SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 457 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 No. Name S U et s t e in r g No. Name S U et s t e in r g E2-02 Motor Rated Slip F5-03 Terminal P3-C3 Output Selection E2-03 Motor No-Load Current F5-04 Terminal P4-C4 Output Selection E2-04 Number of Motor Poles F5-05 Terminal P5-C5 Output Selection E2-05 Motor Line-to-Line Resistance F5-06 Terminal P6-C6 Output Selection E2-06 Motor Leakage Inductance F5-07 Terminal M1-M2 Output Selection E2-07 Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 1 F5-08 Terminal M3-M4 Output Selection E2-08 Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 2 F5-09 DO-A3 Output Mode Selection E2-09 Motor Mechanical Loss F6-01 Operation Selection after Communications Error E2-10 Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation F6-02 External Fault from Comm. Option Detection Selection E2-11 Motor Rated Power External Fault from Communication Option Operation E3-04 Motor 2 Maximum Output Frequency F6-03 Selection E3-05 Motor 2 Maximum Voltage F6-04 bUS Error Detection Time E3-06 Motor 2 Base Frequency F6-06 Torque Limit Selection from Comm. Option E3-07 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency F6-08 Reset Communication Parameter E3-08 Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage F6-35 CANopen Node ID Selection E3-09 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency F6-36 CANopen Communication Speed E3-10 Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage H1-03 Terminal S3 Function Selection E4-01 Motor 2 Rated Current H1-04 Terminal S4 Function Selection E4-02 Motor 2 Rated Slip H1-05 Terminal S5 Function Selection E4-03 Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current H1-06 Terminal S6 Function Selection E4-04 Motor 2 Motor Poles H1-07 Terminal S7 Function Selection E4-05 Motor 2 Line-to-Line Resistance H1-08 Terminal S8 Function Selection E4-06 Motor 2 Leakage Inductance H2-01 Terminals M1-M2 Function Selection E5-02 Motor Rated Power H2-02 Terminals M3-M4 Function Selection E5-03 Motor Rated Current H2-03 Terminal M5-M6 Function Selection E5-04 Motor Poles H2-04 Terminal P1-C1 Function Selection (photocoupler) E5-05 Motor Stator Resistance (Single Phase) H2-05 Terminal P2-C2 Function Selection (photocoupler) E5-06 Motor d-Axis Inductance H3-01 Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection E5-07 Motor q-Axis Inductance H3-02 Terminal A1 Function Selection E5-09 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 H3-03 Terminal A1 Gain Setting E5-11 Encoder Offset H3-04 Terminal A1 Bias Setting E5-24 Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2 H3-09 Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection F1-01 Encoder 1 Resolution H3-10 Terminal A2 Function Selection F1-02 Operation Selection at PG Open Circuit (PGo) H3-11 Terminal A2 Gain Setting F1-03 Operation Selection at Overspeed (oS) H3-12 Terminal A2 Bias Setting F1-04 Operation Selection at Deviation H3-13 Analog Input Filter Time Constant F1-05 Encoder 1 Rotation Direction Selection H3-16 Offset for Terminal A1 F1-06 PG 1 Pulse Monitor Output Division Ratio H3-17 Offset for Terminal A2 F1-08 Overspeed Detection Level H4-01 Terminal FM Monitor Selection F1-09 Overspeed Detection Delay Time H4-02 Terminal FM Gain F1-10 Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Level H4-03 Terminal FM Bias F1-11 Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Delay Time H4-04 Terminal AM Monitor Selection F1-14 PG Open-Circuit Detection Time H4-05 Terminal AM Gain F1-18 dv3 Detection Selection H4-06 Terminal AM Bias F1-19 dv4 Detection Selection H4-07 Terminal FM Signal Level Selection F1-20 PG Option Card Disconnect Detection 1 H4-08 Terminal AM Signal Level Selection F1-29 dEv Detection Condition Selection H5-01 Drive Node Address F1-50 Encoder Selection H5-02 Communication Speed Selection F1-51 PGoH Detection Level H5-03 Communication Parity Selection F1-52 Communication Speed of Serial Encoder Selection H5-04 Stopping Method After Communication Error (CE) F1-63 PG-E3 R Track Selection H5-05 Communication Fault Detection Selection F1-66 to H5-06 Drive Transmit Wait Time Encoder Adjust 1 to 16 F1-81 H5-07 RTS Control Selection F3-01 DI-A3 Option Card Input Selection H5-09 Communication Fault Detection Time F3-03 DI-A3 Option Data Length Selection H5-10 Unit Selection for MEMOBUS/Modbus Register 0025H F4-01 Terminal V1 Function Selection H5-11 Communications ENTER Function Selection F4-02 Terminal V1 Gain L1-01 Motor Overload Protection Selection F4-03 Terminal V2 Function Selection L1-02 Motor Overload Protection Time F4-04 Terminal V2 Gain L1-03 Motor Overheat Alarm Operation Selection F4-05 Terminal V1 Bias (PTC thermistor input) F4-06 Terminal V2 Bias L1-04 Motor Overheat Fault Operation Selection (PTC thermistor input) F4-07 Terminal V1 Signal Level Selection Motor Temperature Input Filter Time F4-08 Terminal V2 Signal Level Selection L1-05 (PTC thermistor input) F5-01 Terminal P1-C1 Output Selection L1-13 Continuous Electrothermal Operation Selection F5-02 Terminal P2-C2 Output Selection L2-05 Undervoltage Detection Level (Uv) E
| No. | Name | User Setting |
|---|---|---|
| E2-02 | Motor Rated Slip | |
| E2-03 | Motor No-Load Current | |
| E2-04 | Number of Motor Poles | |
| E2-05 | Motor Line-to-Line Resistance | |
| E2-06 | Motor Leakage Inductance | |
| E2-07 | Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 1 | |
| E2-08 | Motor Iron-Core Saturation Coefficient 2 | |
| E2-09 | Motor Mechanical Loss | |
| E2-10 | Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation | |
| E2-11 | Motor Rated Power | |
| E3-04 | Motor 2 Maximum Output Frequency | |
| E3-05 | Motor 2 Maximum Voltage | |
| E3-06 | Motor 2 Base Frequency | |
| E3-07 | Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency | |
| E3-08 | Motor 2 Mid Output Frequency Voltage | |
| E3-09 | Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency | |
| E3-10 | Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage | |
| E4-01 | Motor 2 Rated Current | |
| E4-02 | Motor 2 Rated Slip | |
| E4-03 | Motor 2 Rated No-Load Current | |
| E4-04 | Motor 2 Motor Poles | |
| E4-05 | Motor 2 Line-to-Line Resistance | |
| E4-06 | Motor 2 Leakage Inductance | |
| E5-02 | Motor Rated Power | |
| E5-03 | Motor Rated Current | |
| E5-04 | Motor Poles | |
| E5-05 | Motor Stator Resistance (Single Phase) | |
| E5-06 | Motor d-Axis Inductance | |
| E5-07 | Motor q-Axis Inductance | |
| E5-09 | Motor Induction Voltage Constant 1 | |
| E5-11 | Encoder Offset | |
| E5-24 | Motor Induction Voltage Constant 2 | |
| F1-01 | Encoder 1 Resolution | |
| F1-02 | Operation Selection at PG Open Circuit (PGo) | |
| F1-03 | Operation Selection at Overspeed (oS) | |
| F1-04 | Operation Selection at Deviation | |
| F1-05 | Encoder 1 Rotation Direction Selection | |
| F1-06 | PG 1 Pulse Monitor Output Division Ratio | |
| F1-08 | Overspeed Detection Level | |
| F1-09 | Overspeed Detection Delay Time | |
| F1-10 | Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Level | |
| F1-11 | Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Delay Time | |
| F1-14 | PG Open-Circuit Detection Time | |
| F1-18 | dv3 Detection Selection | |
| F1-19 | dv4 Detection Selection | |
| F1-20 | PG Option Card Disconnect Detection 1 | |
| F1-29 | dEv Detection Condition Selection | |
| F1-50 | Encoder Selection | |
| F1-51 | PGoH Detection Level | |
| F1-52 | Communication Speed of Serial Encoder Selection | |
| F1-63 | PG-E3 R Track Selection | |
| F1-66 to F1-81 | Encoder Adjust 1 to 16 | |
| F3-01 | DI-A3 Option Card Input Selection | |
| F3-03 | DI-A3 Option Data Length Selection | |
| F4-01 | Terminal V1 Function Selection | |
| F4-02 | Terminal V1 Gain | |
| F4-03 | Terminal V2 Function Selection | |
| F4-04 | Terminal V2 Gain | |
| F4-05 | Terminal V1 Bias | |
| F4-06 | Terminal V2 Bias | |
| F4-07 | Terminal V1 Signal Level Selection | |
| F4-08 | Terminal V2 Signal Level Selection | |
| F5-01 | Terminal P1-C1 Output Selection | |
| F5-02 | Terminal P2-C2 Output Selection |
| No. | Name | User Setting |
|---|---|---|
| F5-03 | Terminal P3-C3 Output Selection | |
| F5-04 | Terminal P4-C4 Output Selection | |
| F5-05 | Terminal P5-C5 Output Selection | |
| F5-06 | Terminal P6-C6 Output Selection | |
| F5-07 | Terminal M1-M2 Output Selection | |
| F5-08 | Terminal M3-M4 Output Selection | |
| F5-09 | DO-A3 Output Mode Selection | |
| F6-01 | Operation Selection after Communications Error | |
| F6-02 | External Fault from Comm. Option Detection Selection | |
| F6-03 | External Fault from Communication Option Operation Selection | |
| F6-04 | bUS Error Detection Time | |
| F6-06 | Torque Limit Selection from Comm. Option | |
| F6-08 | Reset Communication Parameter | |
| F6-35 | CANopen Node ID Selection | |
| F6-36 | CANopen Communication Speed | |
| H1-03 | Terminal S3 Function Selection | |
| H1-04 | Terminal S4 Function Selection | |
| H1-05 | Terminal S5 Function Selection | |
| H1-06 | Terminal S6 Function Selection | |
| H1-07 | Terminal S7 Function Selection | |
| H1-08 | Terminal S8 Function Selection | |
| H2-01 | Terminals M1-M2 Function Selection | |
| H2-02 | Terminals M3-M4 Function Selection | |
| H2-03 | Terminal M5-M6 Function Selection | |
| H2-04 | Terminal P1-C1 Function Selection (photocoupler) | |
| H2-05 | Terminal P2-C2 Function Selection (photocoupler) | |
| H3-01 | Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection | |
| H3-02 | Terminal A1 Function Selection | |
| H3-03 | Terminal A1 Gain Setting | |
| H3-04 | Terminal A1 Bias Setting | |
| H3-09 | Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection | |
| H3-10 | Terminal A2 Function Selection | |
| H3-11 | Terminal A2 Gain Setting | |
| H3-12 | Terminal A2 Bias Setting | |
| H3-13 | Analog Input Filter Time Constant | |
| H3-16 | Offset for Terminal A1 | |
| H3-17 | Offset for Terminal A2 | |
| H4-01 | Terminal FM Monitor Selection | |
| H4-02 | Terminal FM Gain | |
| H4-03 | Terminal FM Bias | |
| H4-04 | Terminal AM Monitor Selection | |
| H4-05 | Terminal AM Gain | |
| H4-06 | Terminal AM Bias | |
| H4-07 | Terminal FM Signal Level Selection | |
| H4-08 | Terminal AM Signal Level Selection | |
| H5-01 | Drive Node Address | |
| H5-02 | Communication Speed Selection | |
| H5-03 | Communication Parity Selection | |
| H5-04 | Stopping Method After Communication Error (CE) | |
| H5-05 | Communication Fault Detection Selection | |
| H5-06 | Drive Transmit Wait Time | |
| H5-07 | RTS Control Selection | |
| H5-09 | Communication Fault Detection Time | |
| H5-10 | Unit Selection for MEMOBUS/Modbus Register 0025H | |
| H5-11 | Communications ENTER Function Selection | |
| L1-01 | Motor Overload Protection Selection | |
| L1-02 | Motor Overload Protection Time | |
| L1-03 | Motor Overheat Alarm Operation Selection (PTC thermistor input) | |
| L1-04 | Motor Overheat Fault Operation Selection (PTC thermistor input) | |
| L1-05 | Motor Temperature Input Filter Time (PTC thermistor input) | |
| L1-13 | Continuous Electrothermal Operation Selection | |
| L2-05 | Undervoltage Detection Level (Uv) |
Source page
Page 458
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 458 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
E.3 User Setting Table
No. Name S U et s t e in r g No. Name S U et s t e in r g
L3-01 Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration n8-35 Initial Rotor Position Detection Selection L3-02 Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration n8-36 High Frequency Injection Level L3-05 Stall Prevention Selection during Run n8-37 High Frequency Injection Amplitude L3-06 Stall Prevention Level during Run n8-62 Output Voltage Limit L4-01 Speed Agreement Detection Level n8-81 High Frequency Injection during Rescue Operation L4-02 Speed Agreement Detection Width High Frequency Injection Amplitude during Rescue L4-03 Speed Agreement Detection Level (+/-) n8-82 Operation L4-04 Speed Agreement Detection Width (+/-) n8-84 Polarity Detection Current L4-05 Speed Reference Loss Detection Selection n8-86 Magnet Pole Search Error Detection Selection L4-06 Speed Reference at Reference Loss n9-60 A/D Conversion Start Delay L4-07 Speed Agree Detection Selection o1-01 Drive Mode Unit Monitor Selection L4-13 Door Zone Level o1-02 User Monitor Selection After Power Up L5-01 Number of Auto Reset Attempts o1-03 Digital Operator Display Unit Selection L5-02 Fault Output Operation during Auto Reset o1-04 V/f Pattern Setting Units L5-06 Undervoltage Fault Reset Selection o1-05 LCD Contrast Control L6-01 Torque Detection Selection 1 o1-06 User Monitor Selection Mode L6-02 Torque Detection Level 1 o1-07 Second Line Monitor Selection L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1 o1-08 Third Line Monitor Selection L6-04 Torque Detection Selection 2 o1-10 User-Set Display Units Maximum Value L6-05 Torque Detection Level 2 o1-11 User-Set Display Units Decimal Display L6-06 Torque Detection Time 2 o1-12 Length Units L7-01 Forward Torque Limit o1-20 Traction Sheave Diameter L7-02 Reverse Torque Limit o1-21 Roping Ratio L7-03 Forward Regenerative Torque Limit o1-22 Mechanical Gear Ratio L7-04 Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit o1-23 HBB Non Display Select L7-16 Torque Limit Process at Start o2-01 LO/RE Key Function Selection L8-02 Overheat Alarm Level o2-02 STOP Key Function Selection L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection o2-03 User Parameter Default Value L8-05 Input Phase Loss Protection Selection o2-04 Drive Model Selection L8-06 Input Phase Loss Detection Level o2-05 Speed Reference Setting Method Selection L8-07 Output Phase Loss Protection Selection o2-06 Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Disconnected L8-09 Output Ground Fault Detection Selection o3-01 Copy Function Selection L8-10 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection o3-02 Copy Allowed Selection L8-11 Heatsink Cooling Fan Off Delay Time o4-01 Cumulative Operation Time Setting L8-12 Ambient Temperature Setting o4-02 Cumulative Operation Time Selection L8-15 oL2 Characteristics Selection at Low Speeds o4-03 Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting L8-27 Overcurrent Detection Gain o4-05 Capacitor Maintenance Setting L8-29 Current Unbalance Detection (LF2) o4-07 DC Bus Pre-charge Relay Maintenance Setting L8-35 Installation Selection o4-09 IGBT Maintenance Setting L8-38 Automatic Torque Boost Selection o4-11 U2, U3 Initialization L8-39 Reduced Carrier Frequency o4-12 kWh Monitor Initialization L8-55 Internal Braking Transistor Protection o4-13 Number of Travels Counter Reset L8-62 Operation Selection at Input Phase Loss o4-15 Maintenance Alarm Snooze Period L8-77 Oscillation Suppression o4-16 Maintenance Monitoring Selection L8-88 Safe Disable Operation Mode S1-01 Zero Speed Level at Stop L8-89 Current Monitoring Selection S1-02 DC Injection Current at Start L8-99 Current Monitoring Level S1-03 DC Injection Current at Stop n1-08 Leakage Current Vibration Control Selection S1-04 DC Injection / Position Lock Time at Start n2-01 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Gain S1-05 DC Injection / Position Lock Time at Stop n2-02 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 1 S1-06 Brake Release Delay Time n2-03 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 2 S1-07 Brake Close Delay Time n5-01 Inertia Compensation Selection S1-10 Run Command Delay Time n5-02 Motor Acceleration Time S1-11 Output Contactor Open Delay Time n5-03 Inertia Compensation Gain S1-12 Motor Contactor Control During Auto-Tuning Selection n5-07 Speed Feedback Compensation Selection S1-26 Emergency Stop Start Level n5-08 Speed Feedback Compensation Gain (P) S2-01 Motor Rated Speed n6-01 Online Tuning Selection S2-02 Slip Compensation Gain in Motoring Mode n6-05 Online Tuning Gain S2-03 Slip Compensation Gain in Regenerative Mode n8-01 Initial Polarity Estimation Current S2-05 Slip Compensation Torque Detection Delay Time n8-02 Pole Attraction Current S2-06 Slip Compensation Torque Detection Filter Time Constant n8-29 q-Axis Current Control Gain during Normal Operation S3-01 Position Lock Gain at Start 1 q-Axis Current Control Integral Time during Normal n8-30 Operation S3-02 Position Lock Gain at Start 2 (Anti-Rollback Gain) n8-32 d-Axis Current Control Gain during Normal Operation S3-03 Position Lock Gain at Stop d-Axis Current Control Integral Time during Normal S3-04 Position Lock Bandwidth n8-33 Operation S3-10 Starting Torque Compensation Increase Time 458 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
| No. | Name | User Setting |
|---|---|---|
| L3-01 | Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration | |
| L3-02 | Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration | |
| L3-05 | Stall Prevention Selection during Run | |
| L3-06 | Stall Prevention Level during Run | |
| L4-01 | Speed Agreement Detection Level | |
| L4-02 | Speed Agreement Detection Width | |
| L4-03 | Speed Agreement Detection Level (+/-) | |
| L4-04 | Speed Agreement Detection Width (+/-) | |
| L4-05 | Speed Reference Loss Detection Selection | |
| L4-06 | Speed Reference at Reference Loss | |
| L4-07 | Speed Agree Detection Selection | |
| L4-13 | Door Zone Level | |
| L5-01 | Number of Auto Reset Attempts | |
| L5-02 | Fault Output Operation during Auto Reset | |
| L5-06 | Undervoltage Fault Reset Selection | |
| L6-01 | Torque Detection Selection 1 | |
| L6-02 | Torque Detection Level 1 | |
| L6-03 | Torque Detection Time 1 | |
| L6-04 | Torque Detection Selection 2 | |
| L6-05 | Torque Detection Level 2 | |
| L6-06 | Torque Detection Time 2 | |
| L7-01 | Forward Torque Limit | |
| L7-02 | Reverse Torque Limit | |
| L7-03 | Forward Regenerative Torque Limit | |
| L7-04 | Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit | |
| L7-16 | Torque Limit Process at Start | |
| L8-02 | Overheat Alarm Level | |
| L8-03 | Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection | |
| L8-05 | Input Phase Loss Protection Selection | |
| L8-06 | Input Phase Loss Detection Level | |
| L8-07 | Output Phase Loss Protection Selection | |
| L8-09 | Output Ground Fault Detection Selection | |
| L8-10 | Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection | |
| L8-11 | Heatsink Cooling Fan Off Delay Time | |
| L8-12 | Ambient Temperature Setting | |
| L8-15 | oL2 Characteristics Selection at Low Speeds | |
| L8-27 | Overcurrent Detection Gain | |
| L8-29 | Current Unbalance Detection (LF2) | |
| L8-35 | Installation Selection | |
| L8-38 | Automatic Torque Boost Selection | |
| L8-39 | Reduced Carrier Frequency | |
| L8-55 | Internal Braking Transistor Protection | |
| L8-62 | Operation Selection at Input Phase Loss | |
| L8-77 | Oscillation Suppression | |
| L8-88 | Safe Disable Operation Mode | |
| L8-89 | Current Monitoring Selection | |
| L8-99 | Current Monitoring Level | |
| n1-08 | Leakage Current Vibration Control Selection | |
| n2-01 | Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Gain | |
| n2-02 | Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 1 | |
| n2-03 | Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant 2 | |
| n5-01 | Inertia Compensation Selection | |
| n5-02 | Motor Acceleration Time | |
| n5-03 | Inertia Compensation Gain | |
| n5-07 | Speed Feedback Compensation Selection | |
| n5-08 | Speed Feedback Compensation Gain (P) | |
| n6-01 | Online Tuning Selection | |
| n6-05 | Online Tuning Gain | |
| n8-01 | Initial Polarity Estimation Current | |
| n8-02 | Pole Attraction Current | |
| n8-29 | q-Axis Current Control Gain during Normal Operation | |
| n8-30 | q-Axis Current Control Integral Time during Normal Operation | |
| n8-32 | d-Axis Current Control Gain during Normal Operation | |
| n8-33 | d-Axis Current Control Integral Time during Normal Operation |
| No. | Name | User Setting |
|---|---|---|
| n8-35 | Initial Rotor Position Detection Selection | |
| n8-36 | High Frequency Injection Level | |
| n8-37 | High Frequency Injection Amplitude | |
| n8-62 | Output Voltage Limit | |
| n8-81 | High Frequency Injection during Rescue Operation | |
| n8-82 | High Frequency Injection Amplitude during Rescue Operation | |
| n8-84 | Polarity Detection Current | |
| n8-86 | Magnet Pole Search Error Detection Selection | |
| n9-60 | A/D Conversion Start Delay | |
| o1-01 | Drive Mode Unit Monitor Selection | |
| o1-02 | User Monitor Selection After Power Up | |
| o1-03 | Digital Operator Display Unit Selection | |
| o1-04 | V/f Pattern Setting Units | |
| o1-05 | LCD Contrast Control | |
| o1-06 | User Monitor Selection Mode | |
| o1-07 | Second Line Monitor Selection | |
| o1-08 | Third Line Monitor Selection | |
| o1-10 | User-Set Display Units Maximum Value | |
| o1-11 | User-Set Display Units Decimal Display | |
| o1-12 | Length Units | |
| o1-20 | Traction Sheave Diameter | |
| o1-21 | Roping Ratio | |
| o1-22 | Mechanical Gear Ratio | |
| o1-23 | HBB Non Display Select | |
| o2-01 | LO/RE Key Function Selection | |
| o2-02 | STOP Key Function Selection | |
| o2-03 | User Parameter Default Value | |
| o2-04 | Drive Model Selection | |
| o2-05 | Speed Reference Setting Method Selection | |
| o2-06 | Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Disconnected | |
| o3-01 | Copy Function Selection | |
| o3-02 | Copy Allowed Selection | |
| o4-01 | Cumulative Operation Time Setting | |
| o4-02 | Cumulative Operation Time Selection | |
| o4-03 | Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting | |
| o4-05 | Capacitor Maintenance Setting | |
| o4-07 | DC Bus Pre-charge Relay Maintenance Setting | |
| o4-09 | IGBT Maintenance Setting | |
| o4-11 | U2, U3 Initialization | |
| o4-12 | kWh Monitor Initialization | |
| o4-13 | Number of Travels Counter Reset | |
| o4-15 | Maintenance Alarm Snooze Period | |
| o4-16 | Maintenance Monitoring Selection | |
| S1-01 | Zero Speed Level at Stop | |
| S1-02 | DC Injection Current at Start | |
| S1-03 | DC Injection Current at Stop | |
| S1-04 | DC Injection / Position Lock Time at Start | |
| S1-05 | DC Injection / Position Lock Time at Stop | |
| S1-06 | Brake Release Delay Time | |
| S1-07 | Brake Close Delay Time | |
| S1-10 | Run Command Delay Time | |
| S1-11 | Output Contactor Open Delay Time | |
| S1-12 | Motor Contactor Control During Auto-Tuning Selection | |
| S1-26 | Emergency Stop Start Level | |
| S2-01 | Motor Rated Speed | |
| S2-02 | Slip Compensation Gain in Motoring Mode | |
| S2-03 | Slip Compensation Gain in Regenerative Mode | |
| S2-05 | Slip Compensation Torque Detection Delay Time | |
| S2-06 | Slip Compensation Torque Detection Filter Time Constant | |
| S3-01 | Position Lock Gain at Start 1 | |
| S3-02 | Position Lock Gain at Start 2 (Anti-Rollback Gain) | |
| S3-03 | Position Lock Gain at Stop | |
| S3-04 | Position Lock Bandwidth | |
| S3-10 | Starting Torque Compensation Increase Time |
Source page
Page 459
E.3 User Setting Table
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 459 ecnerefeR kciuQ teehS SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 459 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分 No. Name S U et s t e in r g No. Name S U et s t e in r g S3-12 Starting Torque Compensation Bias in Down Direction T2-01 Auto-Tuning Mode Selection S3-14 Torque Compensation Diminish Speed T2-04 Motor Rated Power S3-15 Torque Compensation Diminish Time T2-05 Motor Rated Voltage S3-16 Torque Limit Reduction Time T2-06 Motor Rated Current S3-20 Dwell 2 Speed Reference T2-08 Number of Motor Poles S3-21 Dwell 2 End Speed T2-09 Motor Base Speed S3-25 DC Injection Gain in Regenerative Operation T2-10 Single Phase Stator Resistance S3-26 DC Injection Gain in Motoring Operation T2-11 Motor d-Axis Inductance S3-27 Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 1 T2-12 Motor q-Axis Inductance S3-28 Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 2 T2-13 Induced Voltage Constant Unit Selection S3-29 Analog Input from Load Cell with Load Condition 1 T2-14 Motor Induced Voltage Constant S3-30 Analog Input from Load Cell with Load Condition 2 T2-16 Encoder Resolution S3-34 Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 T2-17 Encoder Offset S3-35 Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 2 Speed Reference for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder T2-18 S3-37 Position Deviation Level to Apply Anti-Rollback Torque Characteristics Bias 1 Rotation Direction for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Position Deviation Level to Apply Anti-Rollback Torque T2-19 Characteristics S3-38 Bias 2 S3-39 Anti-Rollback Integral Gain S3-40 Anti-Rollback Movement Detection S3-41 Position Lock Gain at Start Reduction S4-01 Light Load Direction Search Selection S4-02 Light Load Direction Search Method S4-03 Light Load Direction Search Time S4-04 Light Load Direction Search Speed Reference S4-05 Rescue Operation Torque Limit S4-06 Rescue Operation Power Supply Selection S4-07 UPS Power S4-08 UPS Operation Speed Limit Selection S4-12 DC Bus Voltage during Rescue Operation Rescue Operation Power Supply Deterioration Detection S4-13 Level S4-15 Speed Reference Selection at Rescue Operation S5-01 Short Floor Operation Selection S5-02 Nominal Speed for Short Floor Calculation S5-03 Short Floor Minimum Constant Speed Time S5-04 Distance Calculation Acceleration Time Gain S5-05 Distance Calculation Deceleration Time Gain S5-10 Stopping Method Selection S5-11 Deceleration Distance S5-12 Stop Distance S5-13 Direct Landing Minimum Speed Level Motor Contactor Response Error (SE1) Detection/Reset S6-01 Selection S6-02 Starting Current Error (SE2) Detection Delay Time S6-03 SE2 Detect Current Level S6-04 Output Current Error (SE3) Detection Delay Time S6-05 Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time S6-06 Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time During Run S6-07 Brake Response Monitor Selection S6-08 Brake Response Error (SE4) Fault Reset Selection S6-10 Overacceleration Detection Level S6-11 Overacceleration Detection Time S6-12 Overacceleration Detection Selection S6-15 Speed Reference Loss Detection S6-16 Restart after Baseblock Selection T1-01 Auto-Tuning Mode Selection T1-02 Motor Rated Power T1-03 Motor Rated Voltage T1-04 Motor Rated Current T1-05 Motor Base Frequency T1-06 Number of Motor Poles T1-07 Motor Base Speed T1-08 Encoder Resolution (pulses per revolution) T1-09 Motor No-Load Current (Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 and 2) T1-10 Motor Rated Slip (Stationary Auto-Tuning 2) E
| No. | Name | User Setting |
|---|---|---|
| S3-12 | Starting Torque Compensation Bias in Down Direction | |
| S3-14 | Torque Compensation Diminish Speed | |
| S3-15 | Torque Compensation Diminish Time | |
| S3-16 | Torque Limit Reduction Time | |
| S3-20 | Dwell 2 Speed Reference | |
| S3-21 | Dwell 2 End Speed | |
| S3-25 | DC Injection Gain in Regenerative Operation | |
| S3-26 | DC Injection Gain in Motoring Operation | |
| S3-27 | Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 1 | |
| S3-28 | Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 2 | |
| S3-29 | Analog Input from Load Cell with Load Condition 1 | |
| S3-30 | Analog Input from Load Cell with Load Condition 2 | |
| S3-34 | Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 | |
| S3-35 | Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 2 | |
| S3-37 | Position Deviation Level to Apply Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 | |
| S3-38 | Position Deviation Level to Apply Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 2 | |
| S3-39 | Anti-Rollback Integral Gain | |
| S3-40 | Anti-Rollback Movement Detection | |
| S3-41 | Position Lock Gain at Start Reduction | |
| S4-01 | Light Load Direction Search Selection | |
| S4-02 | Light Load Direction Search Method | |
| S4-03 | Light Load Direction Search Time | |
| S4-04 | Light Load Direction Search Speed Reference | |
| S4-05 | Rescue Operation Torque Limit | |
| S4-06 | Rescue Operation Power Supply Selection | |
| S4-07 | UPS Power | |
| S4-08 | UPS Operation Speed Limit Selection | |
| S4-12 | DC Bus Voltage during Rescue Operation | |
| S4-13 | Rescue Operation Power Supply Deterioration Detection Level | |
| S4-15 | Speed Reference Selection at Rescue Operation | |
| S5-01 | Short Floor Operation Selection | |
| S5-02 | Nominal Speed for Short Floor Calculation | |
| S5-03 | Short Floor Minimum Constant Speed Time | |
| S5-04 | Distance Calculation Acceleration Time Gain | |
| S5-05 | Distance Calculation Deceleration Time Gain | |
| S5-10 | Stopping Method Selection | |
| S5-11 | Deceleration Distance | |
| S5-12 | Stop Distance | |
| S5-13 | Direct Landing Minimum Speed Level | |
| S6-01 | Motor Contactor Response Error (SE1) Detection/Reset Selection | |
| S6-02 | Starting Current Error (SE2) Detection Delay Time | |
| S6-03 | SE2 Detect Current Level | |
| S6-04 | Output Current Error (SE3) Detection Delay Time | |
| S6-05 | Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time | |
| S6-06 | Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time During Run | |
| S6-07 | Brake Response Monitor Selection | |
| S6-08 | Brake Response Error (SE4) Fault Reset Selection | |
| S6-10 | Overacceleration Detection Level | |
| S6-11 | Overacceleration Detection Time | |
| S6-12 | Overacceleration Detection Selection | |
| S6-15 | Speed Reference Loss Detection | |
| S6-16 | Restart after Baseblock Selection | |
| T1-01 | Auto-Tuning Mode Selection | |
| T1-02 | Motor Rated Power | |
| T1-03 | Motor Rated Voltage | |
| T1-04 | Motor Rated Current | |
| T1-05 | Motor Base Frequency | |
| T1-06 | Number of Motor Poles | |
| T1-07 | Motor Base Speed | |
| T1-08 | Encoder Resolution (pulses per revolution) | |
| T1-09 | Motor No-Load Current (Stationary Auto-Tuning 1 and 2) | |
| T1-10 | Motor Rated Slip (Stationary Auto-Tuning 2) |
| No. | Name | User Setting |
|---|---|---|
| T2-01 | Auto-Tuning Mode Selection | |
| T2-04 | Motor Rated Power | |
| T2-05 | Motor Rated Voltage | |
| T2-06 | Motor Rated Current | |
| T2-08 | Number of Motor Poles | |
| T2-09 | Motor Base Speed | |
| T2-10 | Single Phase Stator Resistance | |
| T2-11 | Motor d-Axis Inductance | |
| T2-12 | Motor q-Axis Inductance | |
| T2-13 | Induced Voltage Constant Unit Selection | |
| T2-14 | Motor Induced Voltage Constant | |
| T2-16 | Encoder Resolution | |
| T2-17 | Encoder Offset | |
| T2-18 | Speed Reference for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristics | |
| T2-19 | Rotation Direction for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristics |
Source page
Page 460
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 460 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Automatic Torque Boost Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 Auto-Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 101, 104 Auto-Tuning Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Index Auto-Tuning Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266 Auto-Tuning Fault Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Auto-Tuning Fault Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 99 Symbols Auto-Tuning for Permanent Magnet Motors. . . . . . . . . . . .97, 100 -. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Auto-Tuning Input Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 100 +1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Auto-Tuning Interruption and Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 +2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Auto-Tuning Mode Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 +3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . .100 +V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 B Numerics B1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 24 V Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 B2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 A Backing Up Parameter Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 A/D Conversion Error (CPF02). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Baseblock (bb). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 A/D Conversion Error (CPF35). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Baseblock Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 A/D Conversion Start Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Basic Auto-Tuning Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 A1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Basic Procedure Required to Install the Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 A1-02 (Control Mode) Dependent Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 A2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 bb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 A2 Signal Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Before Auto-Tuning the Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 68 boL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267, 280 AC Reactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Bottom Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Accel/Decel Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Brake Close Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Accel/Decel Setting Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Brake Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Acceleration Error (Er-09). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Brake Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 Acceleration Ramps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Brake Release Delay Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Access Level Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 152 Brake Response Error (SE4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Adjusted Slip Calculation Error (End4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Delay Time . . . . . . . . .255 Adjusting Position Lock at Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Brake Response Error (SE4) Detection Time During Run . . . .256 Adjusting the Torque Compensation at Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Brake Response Error (SE4) Fault Reset Selection. . . . . . . . . .256 Adjustments for Riding Comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Brake Response Monitor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Eliminating Problem with Hunting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Brake Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116, 241 Eliminating Problem with Rollback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Brake Sequence Using Torque Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Eliminating Problem with Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Brake Sequence Using Torque Compensation at Start . . . . . . .117 AEr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Brake Sequence without Torque Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . .116 ALARM (ALM) LED Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Brake Sequence without Torque Compensation at Start . . . . . .116 Alarm (Er-02). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Braking Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Alarm and Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Braking Resistor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 Alarm Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Braking Resistor Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Alarm Outputs for Maintenance Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Braking Transistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Alarm Register 007FH Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Braking Transistor Overload (boL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267, 280 Alarm Register Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Braking Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Allowable Frequency Fluctuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344, 345 Broadcast Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Allowable Voltage Fluctuation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344, 345 B-Type Insulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 ALM LED Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 bUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267, 280 Altitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 bUS Error Detection Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 C AM/FM Signal Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 C1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Ambient Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 C2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Ambient Temperature Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 350 Cable Length Between Drive and Motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Analog Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 CALL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Analog Input Filter Time Constant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Cannot Change Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145 Analog Input from Load Cell with Load Condition 1 . . . . . . . 246 Cannot Reset (CrST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Analog Input from Load Cell with Load Condition 2 . . . . . . . 246 CANopen Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Analog Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Capacitor Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Analog Monitor Card Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Capacitor Maintenance Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Anti-Rollback Integral Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Capacitor Maintenance Time (LT-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Anti-Rollback Movement Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Car Acceleration Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Carrier Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172, 344, 345 Anti-Rollback Torque Bias 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Carrier Frequency and Current Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 AO-A3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Carrier Frequency Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 AO-A3 Option Card Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Carrier Frequency during Initial Motor Pole Search . . . . . . . . .172 Attachment for External Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Carrier Frequency during Rescue Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172 460 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 461
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 461 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Carrier Frequency during Rotational Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . 172 CoPy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 CE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 281, 405 Copy Allowed Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 CE Low Voltage Directive Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Copy Error (ECE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 CE Mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Copy Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 CF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Copy Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Changing Parameter Settings or Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Copy Function Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Checksum Error (ECS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Copy Unit Error (CSEr). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Closed Loop Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 CopyUnitManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Closed Loop Vector control for PM motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 CPEr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 CN5-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 CPF00, CPF01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 CN5-B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 CPF02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 CN5-C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 CPF03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Coast to Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 CPF06. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Cold Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 CPF07. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Command Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 CPF08. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Command Messages from Master to Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 CPF20, CPF21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Communication Error (iFEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 CPF22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Communication Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 CPF23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Communication Fault Detection Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 CPF24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Communication Fault Detection Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 CPF25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Communication Option Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 CPF26 to CPF35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Communication Option Node ID Setting Error (CANopen) CPyE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 (AEr). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 CRC-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Communication Parity Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 CRC-16 Checksum Calculation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Communication Speed of Serial Encoder Selection. . . . . . . . . 187 CrST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Communication Speed Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 CSEr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Communications Enter Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Cumulative Fan Operation Time as a Percentage Communications Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 of the Specified Maintenance Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Comparing Parameter Settings (flashing) (vrFy). . . . . . . . . . . 292 Cumulative Operation Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Component Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Cumulative Operation Time of the Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Conducted Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Cumulative Operation Time Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Connecting a DC Reactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Cumulative Time the Capacitors are Used as Connecting a Noise Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 a Percentage of the Specified Maintenance Period . . . . . . . . . 301 Connecting an AC Reactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Current Detection Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Current Detection Error (Er-12). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Connecting Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Current Monitoring Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Connecting the Drive and Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Current Monitoring Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Connecting to a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Current Unbalance Detection (LF2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Connecting to a PC (USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Cyclic Redundancy Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Continuous Electrothermal Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . 213 D Control Board Connection Error (CPF03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Daily Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Control Board Connection Error (CPF23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Daily Inspection Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Control Circuit Error (CPF00, CPF01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Data Error (ErE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Control Circuit Error (CPF20, CPF21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 d-Axis Current Control Gain during Normal Operation . . . . . 232 Control Circuit Error (CPF26 to CPF34). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 d-Axis Current Control Integral Time during Normal Control Circuit Input Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Control Circuit Output Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 DC Bus Overvoltage (ov). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276, 283 Control Circuit Terminal Arrangement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 DC Bus Pre-charge Relay Maintenance Setting . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Control Circuit Terminal Block Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 DC Bus Undervoltage (Uv1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198, 278 Control Circuit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 DC Bus Voltage during Rescue Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Control Fault (CF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 DC Injection Current at Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Control I/O Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 DC Injection Current at Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Control Method Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 DC Injection Gain in Motoring Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Control Mode Dependent Parameter Default Values . . . . . . . . 394 DC Injection Gain in Regenerative Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Control Mode Mismatch (CPEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 DC Injection Time at Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Control Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26, 94 DC Injection Time at Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Control Mode Selection Error (oPE06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 DC Reactor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Control Modes and their Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Deceleration Ramps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Control Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 393 Defaults and Setting Ranges by Display Unit Selection Control Power Supply Voltage Fault (Uv2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 (o1-03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Control Terminal Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Defaults by Drive Model Selection (o2-04). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31 dEv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269, 281 Cooling Fan Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 dEv Detection Condition Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Cooling Fan Maintenance Time (LT-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 dFPS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Cooling Fan Operation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 DI-A3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 DI-A3 Option Card Data Length Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Cooling Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 461
Source page
Page 462
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 462 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
DI-A3 Option Card Input Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Dwell Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 DI-A3 Option Card Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Dwell Speed, Dwell Time at Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 Diagnosing and Resetting Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Dynamic Braking Transistor Fault (rr). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Digital Input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 322 E Digital Input Card Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 E (G). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Digital Input Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 E3-01 (Motor 2 Control Mode) Dependent Parameters. . . . . . .394 Digital Input Reading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 ECE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Digital Input Sink / Source / External Power Supply ECS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 EdE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31, 81 EEPROM Memory Data Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Digital Operator Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 EEPROM Write Error (Err). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Digital Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 EF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Digital Operator Installation Methods and Required Tools. . . . 41 EF0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270, 281 Digital Operator Menu and Screen Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 EF3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270, 281 Digital Operator Remote Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 EF4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270, 281 Digital Operator Remote Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 EF5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270, 281 Digital Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 EF6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270, 281 Digital Output Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 EF7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270, 281 Dimensions for IP20/NEMA 1, UL Type 1 Enclosure EF8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270, 281 200 V Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 44 EiF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 DIP Switch S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 72 Electrical Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Disabling and Enabling the Drive Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Elevator Emergency Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 DM- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Elevator Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 DM+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Elevator units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 DO-A3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 EMC Filter and Drive Installation for CE Compliance. . . . . . .433 DO-A3 Option Card Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 EMC Filter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 Door Zone Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 EMC Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Door Zone Reached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 EMC Guidelines Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 Drive Capacity Setting Fault (oPE01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Emergency Stop Start Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Drive Cooling Fans and Circulation Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 EN81-1 Conform Circuit with one Motor Contactor. . . . . . . . .450 Drive Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31 Encoder 1 Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Drive Derating Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Encoder 1 Rotation Direction Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 Drive Does Not Allow Selection of Rotational Encoder Adjust 1 to 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187 Auto-Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Encoder Communication Data Error (oFC53). . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Drive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 87 Encoder Communication Timeout (oFC52). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Drive Model Mismatch (dFPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Encoder Disconnected (PGo). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 284 Drive Model Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Encoder Disconnected (PGoH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 284 Drive Motor Overload Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Encoder Error (oFC54) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Drive Overload (oL2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Encoder Feedback Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Drive Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Encoder Offset Auto-Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 101 Drive Ready . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Encoder Offset for PM motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Drive Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Encoder Option AD Conversion Error (oFC50) . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Drive Short-Circuit Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Encoder Option Analog Circuit Error (oFC51) . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Drive Slave Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Encoder Resolution Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Drive Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Encoder Rotation Direction Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Drive Standard Connection Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Encoder Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 Drive Transmit Wait Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Encoder Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 Drive Unit Signal Fault (CPF24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Encoder Z Pulse Fault (dv1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269 Drive Watt Loss Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Encoder Z-Pulse Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 DriveWizard Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 322 End. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 Droop Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 End1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 During Baseblock (N.C.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 End10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 During Baseblock (N.O.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 End2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 During Down Direction (Multi-Function Digital Outputs) . . . 201 End3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 During Frequency Output (Multi-Function Digital Outputs). . 202 End4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 During Regeneration (Multi-Function Digital Outputs) . . . . . 202 End5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 During Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 End6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 During Torque Limit (Multi-Function Digital Outputs). . . . . . 202 End7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 dv1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 End8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 dv2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 End9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 dv3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Energy Saving Control Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 dv3 Detection Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Energy Savings Constants Error (oPE16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 dv4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Enter Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 dv4 Detection Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Enter Command Necessary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 dv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Enter Command not Necessary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 dv7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Enter Command Settings when Upgrading the Drive . . . . . . . .423 dv8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 462 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 463
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 463 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Enter Command Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 Ferrule Terminal Types and Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Enter Data from the Motor Nameplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Ferrule-Type Wire Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Entering the "Safe Torque Off" State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Field Forcing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 EPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Flux Position Detection (sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Er-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Er-02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Formula to Calculate the Amount of Voltage Drop . . . . . . . . . . 61 Er-03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Forward Regenerative Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Er-04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Forward Torque Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Er-05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Frequency Accuracy (Temperature Fluctuation) . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Er-08. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Frequency Control Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Er-09. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Frequency Reference Selection 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Er-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Frequency Setting Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Er-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Frequency Setting Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Er-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 FrL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Er-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31 Er-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Front Cover Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 31 Er-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 F-Type Insulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Er-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Function Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Er-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Function Key (F1, F2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Er-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Function Key 1 (F1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Er-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Function Key 2 (F2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Er-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Functions for Terminals S3 to S8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 ErE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Err. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 G Error Reading Data (rdEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 General Precautions when Using Thermal Overload Relays. . 341 Error Writing Data (CPyE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 General Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Errors and Displays When Using the Copy Function. . . . . . . . 266 GF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 E-Type Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Ground Fault (GF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 European Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Ground Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 EvE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Ground Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Delay Time . . . . . . . . . 185 Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 H Excessive V/f Setting (End1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 H1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 H1/H2 Sink/Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 External 24 Vdc Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 H2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 External Digital Operator Connection Fault (oPr). . . . . . . . . . 276 Hbb. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 External fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 HBB Non Display Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 External Fault (input terminal S3) (EF3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 281 HbbF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 External Fault (input terminal S4) (EF4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 281 HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 External Fault (input terminal S5) (EF5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 281 HCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 External Fault (input terminal S6) (EF6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 281 Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31 External Fault (input terminal S7) (EF7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 281 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 External Fault (input terminal S8) (EF8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270, 281 Heatsink Overheat (oH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274, 283 External Fault from Communication Option Detection Heatsink Overheat (oH1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Heatsink Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 F High Current Alarm (HCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 High Frequency Injection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Fan Connector Cable (CN6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 High Frequency Injection Amplitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Fan Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 High Frequency Injection Amplitude during Rescue Fan Finger Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31, 312 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Fan Relay Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 High Frequency Injection during Rescue Operation . . . . . . . . 231 Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 311 High Frequency Injection Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Fault (Multi-Function Digital Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 High Speed Limit Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Fault Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 High Speed Limit Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Fault History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 390 High Speed Reference Has Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Fault Output Operation during Auto Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Hot Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Fault Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Fault Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Hybrid IC Failure (CPF22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Fault Reset Command Active (Multi-Function Digital Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 I Fault Reset Methods. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 ID Mismatch (EPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Fault Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 IEC/EN61800-3 C2 Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434, 435 Fault Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 389 iFEr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Fault Trace / History Register Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 IG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Fault Trace Contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 IGBT Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 263 IGBT Maintenance Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Ferrule Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 IGBT Maintenance Time (90%) (LT-4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 463
Source page
Page 464
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 464 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
IGBT Maintenance Time (90%) (TrPC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 LCD Contrast Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 IGBT Short Circuit (SC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Induced Noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 LCD Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Induced Voltage Constant Unit Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Display Unit Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Inductance Error (Er-19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Monitor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Induction Voltage Error (Er-18). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Leakage Current Vibration Control Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Inertia Compensation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120, 227 Leakage Inductance Alarm (End6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287 Inertia Compensation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Leakage Inductance Error (Er-13). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Inertia Compensation Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 LED Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Initial Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 LED Operator Initial Polarity Estimation Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Display Unit Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Initial Rotor Pole Search Error (Er-22) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Monitor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Initial Rotor Position Detection Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Leveling Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Leveling Speed Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175 Initialize Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 153, 236 Leveling Speed Reference Has Priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Input Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344, 345 LF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Input Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 LF2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 Input Phase Loss (Multi-Function Digital Outputs). . . . . . . . . 203 Light Load Direction (Multi-Function Digital Outputs) . . . . . .203 Input Phase Loss (PF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Light Load Direction Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Input Phase Loss Protection Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Light Load Direction Search Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344, 345 Line-to-Line Resistance Error (Er-04). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 Input Voltage Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 LO/RE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84, 91 Input-Side Noise Filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 LO/RE (LOCAL/REMOTE) Key Function Selection. . . . . . . .236 Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 300 LO/RE LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Inspection Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 LO/RE Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Inspection Operation Carrier Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Load Inertia Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 Inspection Operation Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 LOCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Inspection Operation Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Locations of Jumpers and Switches on the Terminal Board . . . .72 Inspection Speed Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Loopback Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Low Voltage Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Installation Method Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Low Voltage Wiring for Control Circuit Terminals. . . . . . . . . .443 Installation Orientation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 LT-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282, 302 Installation Orientation and Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 LT-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282, 302 Installation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 LT-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282, 302 Installation Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 LT-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282, 302 Installing a Braking Unit: CDBR Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 M Installing a Leakage Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 M1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Installing a Magnetic Contactor at the Power Supply Side . . . 337 M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Installing a Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB). . . . . . . . . 336 M3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Installing a Motor Thermal Overload (oL) Relay . . . . . . . . . . 341 M4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Installing Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 M5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Installing the Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306, 308, 314 M6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Intermediate Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 MA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Internal Braking Transistor Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Machinery Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Inversion Detection (dv3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Magnet Pole Search Error Detection Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Inversion Prevention Detection (dv4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Magnetic Flux Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 IP20 Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Magnetic Flux Compensation Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 IP20/NEMA 1, UL Type 1 Enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Main Circuit Connection Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53, 66 J Main Circuit Terminal and Motor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Jerk at Accel End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Main Circuit Terminal Block Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Jerk at Accel Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Main Circuit Terminal Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Jerk at Decel End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Main Circuit Terminal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Jerk at Decel Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Main Circuit Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Jerk below Leveling Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301, 302 Jerk Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Maintenance Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Jumper S3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 72, 73 Maintenance Monitor Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Jumper S5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Maintenance Monitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258, 390 K Maintenance Period (Multi-Function Digital Outputs) . . . . . . .202 Maintenance Period Reached by the IGBTs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Keys and Displays on the Digital Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Max. Current during Leveling Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 kWh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Max. Motor Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 kWh Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 345 kWh Monitor Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Maximum Output Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 345 L Maximum Output Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 345 L1000 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Language Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 464 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 465
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 465 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Source page
Page 466
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 466 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
O (oFb03 to oFb11, oFb12 to oFb17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 oC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-C oFA00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 (oFC03 to oFC11, oFC12 to oFC17). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 oFA01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Option Card External Fault (EF0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270, 281 oFA05, oFA06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Option Card Fault at Option Connector CN5-A (oFA01) . . . . .272 oFA10, oFA11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-B (oFb00) . . . . . . . . . .273 oFA12 to oFA17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-B (oFb01) . . . . . . . . . .273 oFA30 to oFA43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-B (oFb02) . . . . . . . . . .273 oFb00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-C (oFC01) . . . . . . . . . .273 oFb01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Option Card Fault at Option Port CN5-C (oFC02) . . . . . . . . . .273 oFb02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Option Card Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 oFb03 to oFb11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Option Communication Error (bUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267, 280 oFb12 to oFb17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Option Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 oFC00. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 oFC01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 oS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276, 283 oFC02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Output Contactor Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 oFC03 to oFC11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Output Contactor Open Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 oFC12 to oFC17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Output Current Error (SE3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 oFC50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Output Current Error (SE3) Detection Delay Time. . . . . . . . . .255 oFC51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Output Current Imbalance (LF2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 oFC52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Output Ground Fault Detection Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222 oFC53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Output Phase Loss (LF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271 oFC54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Output Phase Loss Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 oH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274, 283 Output Speed Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 oH1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Output Terminal FM Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 oL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Output Voltage Detection Error (voF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279, 284 oL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Output Voltage Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 oL2 Characteristics Selection at Low Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 oL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 283 Output-Side Noise Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 oL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 283 ov . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276, 283 Online Tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Overacceleration Detection (dv6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270 Online Tuning Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Overacceleration Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 oPE01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Overacceleration Detection Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 oPE02. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Overacceleration Detection Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 oPE03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Overcurrent (oC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 oPE04. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Overcurrent Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 oPE04 Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Overheat Alarm Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 oPE05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 oPE06. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Overload Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346, 444 oPE07. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Overload Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 345 oPE08. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Overload Tolerance for Internal Braking Transistor . . . . . . . . .224 oPE10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Overspeed (oS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276, 283 oPE16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Overspeed Detection Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 oPE18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Overspeed Detection Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 oPE20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Overtorque Detection 1 (oL3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275, 283 Open Loop Vector Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Overtorque Detection 2 (oL4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275, 283 Operation Error Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Overvoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Operation Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262, 265 P Operation Selection after Communications Error . . . . . . . . . . 189 P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Operation Selection at Deviation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Operation Selection at Overspeed (oS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Parameter Access Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Operation Selection at PG Open Circuit (PGo) . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Disconnected. . 237 Parameter Range Setting Error (oPE02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 Operation Status Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258, 387 Parameter Selection Error (oPE08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Operator Function Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Parameter Setting Error, Online Tuning Parameter Operator Programming Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Setting Error (oPE18). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 oPr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Parameter Settings in the Drive and Those Saved to Option Card Connection Error at Option Connector CN5-A the Copy Function are not the Same (vFyE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 (oFA00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 PASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Option Card Connection Error at Option Port CN5-C Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 (oFC00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Password Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 Option Card Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Password Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149 Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-A Performance Life Monitors Maintenance Monitors. . . . . . . . . .301 (oFA05, oFA06, oFA10, oFA11, oFA12 to oFA17, Performance Life of the Inrush Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 oFA30 to oFA43) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Periodic Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Option Card Error Occurred at Option Port CN5-B 466 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 467
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 467 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Source page
Page 468
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 468 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
S6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 S7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Soft Charge Bypass Relay Maintenance Time (LT-3) . . . . . . . .282 S8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Soft-Charge Bypass Circuit Fault (Uv3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Safe Disable Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Software version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Safe Disable Circuit Fault Signal Input (HbbF). . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Sourcing Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Safe Disable Function Wiring Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Sourcing Mode (PNP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Safe Disable Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 SP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 73 Safe Disable Input Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Safe Disable Input Sink / Source / External Power Supply Speed Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Speed agree 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Safe Disable Monitor Output Function and Digital Speed Agree 1 Time Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 Operator Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Speed agree 2 (Multi-Function Digital Outputs). . . . . . . . . . . .199 Safe Disable Signal Input (Hbb) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Speed Agree Detection Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216 Safe Disable Status (Multi-Function Digital Outputs). . . . . . . 203 Speed Agreement Detection Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Safe Disable Status Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Speed Control Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Safe Torque Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Speed Control Loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 Safety Circuit Fault (SCF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Speed Control Loop Delay Time during Position Lock. . . . . . .171 Safety Hazard Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Speed Control Loop Integral Time during Position Lock . . . . .171 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170 Safety Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Speed Control Loop Proportional Gain Time during Position Safety Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171 SC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 277 Speed Control Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 346 SE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Speed Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 SE1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Speed Detection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 SE1 Detection/Reset Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Speed Detection 1 Time Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 SE2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Speed Detection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 SE2 Detect Current Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Speed Detection 2 Time Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 SE2 Detection Delay Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Speed Detection 3 (Multi-Function Digital Outputs) . . . . . . . .200 SE3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Speed Detection 4 (Multi-Function Digital Outputs) . . . . . . . .201 SE3 Detection Delay Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Speed Detection PG1 Counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 SE4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Speed Deviation (dEv). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269, 281 SE4 Detection Delay Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Gain . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Second Line Monitor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant . . . .226 Self-Diagnosing Function of the Serial Communication Speed Loop Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Interface Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Speed Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86, 173 Self-Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Speed Reference at Reference Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Separate Speed Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Speed Reference Bias. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 Serial Communication Stand By (CALL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Speed Reference for Auto-Tuning of PG-E3 Encoder Serial Communication Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Serial Communications Cable Connection Terminals . . . . . . . 402 Speed Reference Loss Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Set Vibrational Frequency Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Speed Reference Loss Detection Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Setting Motor Parameters Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Speed Reference Missing (FrL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257, 271 Setting Sink/Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Speed Reference Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 157 Setup Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Speed Reference Selection at Rescue Operation. . . . . . . . . . . .249 Setup Group Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Speed Reference Selection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Setup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Speed Reference Setting Method Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Setup Procedure for Elevator Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Speed Reference Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Setup Troubleshooting and Possible Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Speed Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 346 Shielded Twisted-Pair Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Speed Selection Using Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Short Floor Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Stall Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Simplified Setup Using the Setup Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Stall Prevention During Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Sinking Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Stall Prevention Selection during Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Sinking Mode (NPN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Stall Prevention Selection during Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Sinking/Sourcing Mode Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Standard Connection Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 SI-S3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Starting Current Error (SE2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Slave Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Starting Current Error (SE2) Detection Delay Time . . . . . . . . .255 Slip Compensation for Elevators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Starting Torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 346 Slip Compensation Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Starting Torque Compensation Increase Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Slip Compensation Gain in Motoring Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Start-Up Flowcharts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Slip Compensation Gain in Regenerative Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Stationary Auto-Tuning 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Slip Compensation Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Stationary Auto-Tuning 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Stationary Auto-Tuning for Line-to-Line Resistance . . . . . . . . .99 Slip Compensation Selection during Regeneration . . . . . . . . . 166 Stator Resistance Error (Er-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Slip Compensation Torque Detection Delay Time. . . . . . . . . . 243 Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Slip Compensation Torque Detection Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 STo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Slip Compensation Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 STOP Button Input (Er-03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288 SN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67, 73 STOP Key Function Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 468 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 469
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 469 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Stopping Method after Communication Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Torque Specifications, Three Phase 200 V Class. . . . . . . . 61, 437 Stopping Method Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Torque Specifications, Three Phase 400 V Class. . . . . . . . 63, 439 Storage Temperature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Traction Sheave Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 SvE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Travel Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Switched Phase Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Travel Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Switches and Jumpers on the Terminal Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 TrPC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284, 302 Switching Between LOCAL and REMOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Tuning Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 T Types of Alarms, Faults, and Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Types of Auto-Tuning for Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 T/L3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Types of Auto-Tuning for Permanent Magnet Motors. . . 100, 101 Task Complete (End) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Temperature Derating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 U Terminal A1 Function Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 U/T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Terminal A1 Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 U2, U3 Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Terminal A1 Signal Level Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 UL and CSA Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Terminal A2 Function Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 UL/cUL Mark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Terminal A2 Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 UL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 284 Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 UL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 284 Terminal AM Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Undertorque Detection 1 (UL3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 284 Terminal AM Monitor Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Undertorque Detection 2 (UL4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278, 284 Terminal AM Signal Level Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Undervoltage (Uv) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Terminal Block Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Undervoltage Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Terminal Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31, 33 Undervoltage Detection Level (Uv). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Terminal Board Connection Error (CPF07, CPF08) . . . . . . . . 268 Undervoltage Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Terminal Board Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Unit Selection Terminal Board Mismatch Error (oPE04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Accel/Decel Ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Terminal Board not Connected (CPF25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Elevator Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Terminal Board Wiring Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Jerk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Terminal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Speed Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Terminal Connections for Communication Unit Selection for MEMOBUS/Modbus Register 0025H . . . . 405 Self-Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Up/Down Command Error (EF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Terminal Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31, 55 Up/Down Command Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Terminal Cover Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Up/Down Command Selection while in Programming Mode. 159 Terminal FM Monitor Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Up/Down Command Source Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Terminal FM Signal Level Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Terminal Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 UPS Operation Speed Limit Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Terminal M1-M2 Function Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 UPS Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Terminal M3-M4 Function Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 USB Copy Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150, 322 Terminal M5-M6 Function Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Terminal P1-C1 Function Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 USB Port (type-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 30, 31 Terminal P1-C2 Function Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 User Monitor Selection after Power Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Termination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 User Monitor Selection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101, 102, 103, 104 User Parameter Automatic Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 156 Third Line Monitor Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 User Parameter Default Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 236 Through mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 199, 206 User Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 156 Tightening Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 69 User Parameters 1 to 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Timer Function On-Delay Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 User Set Speed Agree 1 Time Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Timer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 User-Set Display Units Decimal Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Torque Compensation (Multi-Function Analog Inputs). . . . . . 206 User-Set Display Units Maximum Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Torque Compensation at Forward Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 User-Set Speed Agree 1 (Multi-Function Digital Outputs) . . . 197 Torque Compensation at Reverse Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 User-Set Speed Agree 2 (Multi-Function Digital Outputs) . . . 200 Torque Compensation Diminish Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Using a PM Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Torque Compensation Diminish Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Using Braking Units in Parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Torque Compensation Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Using the Safe Disable Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Torque Compensation Time Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Uv. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 1. . . . . . . . 246 Uv1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Torque Compensation Value with Load Condition 2. . . . . . . . 246 Uv2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Torque Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Uv3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Torque Detection 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 V Torque Detection 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 -V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Torque Detection Selection 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 V/f Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Torque Detection Selection 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 V/f Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Torque Limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219, 346 V/f Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Torque Limit Process at Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 V/f Pattern for Motor 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Torque Limit Reduction Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 V/f Pattern Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Torque Limit Selection from V/f Pattern Setting Error (oPE10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Communications Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 V/T2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 469
Source page
Page 470
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 470 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
vAEr. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Verify Error (EvE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Verify Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Verifying Parameter Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 vFyE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Vibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Viewing Fault Trace Data After Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 voF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 284 Voltage Class, Capacity Mismatch (vAEr). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 vrFy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 W W/T3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Watt Loss 200 V Class Three Phase Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Watt Loss 400 V Class Three Phase Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Wire Gauge, Three Phase 200 V Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 437 Wire Gauge, Three Phase 400 V Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 439 Wire Gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 69 Wire Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Wiring Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Wiring the Control Circuit Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Within Position Lock Bandwidth (Multi-Function Digital Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Write Data Error (EiF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Write Impossible (EdE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Writing Parameter Settings (CoPy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Writing to Multiple Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Z Z Pulse Correction Error (Er-21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Z Pulse Noise Fault Detection (dv2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Zero Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Zero Speed Level at Stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Zero-Speed Time Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
470 YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual
Source page
Page 471
SIEP_C710616_33J_9_0.book 471 ページ 2023年4月25日 火曜日 午後5時57分
Revision History
The revision dates and the numbers of the revised manuals appear on the bottom of the back cover. MANUAL NO. SIEP C710616 33B <1>-0 Web Revision number Revision number Published in Japan December 2009 Date of publication
Date of Publication R N e u v m is b io e n r R N e u W v m i e s b b io e n r Section Revised Content
April 2023 <9> 0 All Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation. Appendix D.2 Revision: EMC Directive Compliance Back cover Revision: Address November 2021 <8> 0 All Revision: Upgraded the software version to PRG: S7207. Chapter 8 and Revision: Input Fuse Model Appendix D.3 Back cover Revision: Address November 2015 <7> 0 Front cover Revision: Format All Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation. Appendix D.5 Revision: EN81-1/20 conform circuit with one motor contactor Appendix D.6 Addition: EN81-20 conform circuit with no motor contactor Back cover Revision: Address, format June 2014 <6> 0 All Addition: Models CIMR-LF in compliance with IEC/EN 61508 SIL3 Safety Integrity Level 3 Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation December 2013 <5> 0 All Revision: Review and corrected entire documentation. Upgraded the software version to PRG: 7017 and PRG: S7200. Back cover Revision: Address September 2012 <4> 0 All Addition: Smaller drive capacities added along with corresponding data Three-phase 200 V: CIMR-L2A0008 and 2A0011 Three-phase 400 V: CIMR-L4A0005 and 4A0006 Revision: Review and corrected entire documentation January 2012 <3> 0 Front cover, Revision: Format back cover All Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation September 2010 <2> 0 All Addition: Larger drive capacities added along with corresponding data Three-phase 200 V: CIMR-L2A0215 to 2A0415 Three-phase 400 V: CIMR-L4A0180 to 4A0216 Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation Back cover Revision: Address December 2009 <1> 0 All Revision: Ground wiring Appendix D Revision: EN81-1 conform circuit with one motor contactor October 2009 − − − First Edition
YASKAWA ELECTRIC SIEP C710616 33J YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A Technical Manual 471
| Date of Publication | Revision Number | Web Revision Number | Section | Revised Content |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| April 2023 | <9> | 0 | All | Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation. |
| Appendix D.2 | Revision: EMC Directive Compliance | |||
| Back cover | Revision: Address | |||
| November 2021 | <8> | 0 | All | Revision: Upgraded the software version to PRG: S7207. |
| Chapter 8 and Appendix D.3 | Revision: Input Fuse Model | |||
| Back cover | Revision: Address | |||
| November 2015 | <7> | 0 | Front cover | Revision: Format |
| All | Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation. | |||
| Appendix D.5 | Revision: EN81-1/20 conform circuit with one motor contactor | |||
| Appendix D.6 | Addition: EN81-20 conform circuit with no motor contactor | |||
| Back cover | Revision: Address, format | |||
| June 2014 | <6> | 0 | All | Addition: Models CIMR-LF in compliance with IEC/EN 61508 SIL3 Safety Integrity Level 3 Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation |
| December 2013 | <5> | 0 | All | Revision: Review and corrected entire documentation. Upgraded the software version to PRG: 7017 and PRG: S7200. |
| Back cover | Revision: Address | |||
| September 2012 | <4> | 0 | All | Addition: Smaller drive capacities added along with corresponding data Three-phase 200 V: CIMR-L2A0008 and 2A0011 Three-phase 400 V: CIMR-L4A0005 and 4A0006 Revision: Review and corrected entire documentation |
| January 2012 | <3> | 0 | Front cover, back cover | Revision: Format |
| All | Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation | |||
| September 2010 | <2> | 0 | All | Addition: Larger drive capacities added along with corresponding data Three-phase 200 V: CIMR-L2A0215 to 2A0415 Three-phase 400 V: CIMR-L4A0180 to 4A0216 Revision: Reviewed and corrected entire documentation |
| Back cover | Revision: Address | |||
| December 2009 | <1> | 0 | All | Revision: Ground wiring |
| Appendix D | Revision: EN81-1 conform circuit with one motor contactor | |||
| October 2009 | − | − | − | First Edition |
Source page
Page 472
英文 No.6-5 (A4) YEU向けインバータ製品用 新ロゴ
YASKAWA AC Drive L1000A
AC Drive for Elevator Applications
Technical Manual
YASKAWA EUROPE GmbH Philipp-Reis-Str. 6, 65795 Hattersheim am Main, Germany Phone: +49-6196-569-300 Fax: +49-6196-569-398 www.yaskawa.eu.com E-mail: info@yaskawa.eu.com DRIVE CENTER (INVERTER PLANT) 2-13-1, Nishimiyaichi, Yukuhashi, Fukuoka, 824-8511, Japan Phone: +81-930-25-2548 Fax: +81-930-25-3431 www.yaskawa.co.jp YASKAWA AMERICA, INC. 2121, Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A. Phone: +1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292) or +1-847-887-7000 Fax: +1-847-887-7310 www.yaskawa.com
In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture thereof, the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Regulations. Therefore, be sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules, regulations and laws that may apply. Specifications are subject to change without notice for ongoing product modifications and improvements. © 2009 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION MANUAL NO. SIEP C710616 33J <9>-0 Published in Japan April 2023 23-2-11_YEU Original instructions
Technical data
Highlighted specifications
| Specification | Value | Page |
|---|---|---|
| Refer to European Standards on page430 and UL and CSA Standards on page437. | YEG | 3 |
| Motor Power (kW) | Three-Phase 200 V Class | Three-Phase 400 V Class | 25 |
| Motor Type | Induction Motors | Permanent Magnet Motors | Comments | 26 |
| Control Mode | V/f | OLV | CLV | CLV/PM | - | 26 |
| Parameter Setting | A1-02 = 0 | A1-02 = 2 | A1-02 = 3 | A1-02 = 7 | Default Setting is V/f Control. | 26 |
| Basic Description | V/f control | Open Loop Vector control | Closed Loop Vector control | Closed Loop Vector control for PM motors | - | 26 |
| Type of Applications | Motor Type | IM | IM | IM | PM | - | 26 |
| PG Option Card | N/A | N/A | YES | YES | - | 26 |
| Control Characteristics | Speed Control Range | 1:40 | 1:200 | 1:1500 | 1:1500 | May fluctuate with characteristics and motor temperature. | 26 |
| Application-Specific | Auto-Tuning | Line to line resistance | • Rotational • Stationary • Line to line resistance | • Rotational • Stationary • Line to line resistance | • Stationary • Stationary Stator Resistance • Encoder Offset • Rotational Back EMF Constant | Automatically adjusts parameter settings that concern electrical characteristics of the motor. | 26 |
| Description | C Drive | ontroller Power Supply Cable for Rescue Operation | Quick Start Guide | 27 |
| Quantity | 1 | 1 | 1 | 27 |
| No. | Customized Specifications | 28 |
| No. | Enclosure Type | 28 |
| No. | Region Code | 28 |
| No. | Environmental Specification <3> | 28 |
| No. | Voltage Class | 28 |
| Three-Phase 200 V Class | Three-Phase 400 V Class | 28 |
| Drive Model | Max. Motor Capacity (kW) | Rated Output Current (A) | Drive Model | Max. Motor Capacity (kW) | Rated Output Current (A) | 28 |
| Environment | Conditions | 37 |
| Installation Area | Indoors | 37 |
| Ambient Temperature | IP20 enclosure: -10 to +50°C Drive reliability improves in environments without wide temperature fluctuations. When using the drive in an enclosure panel, install a cooling fan or air conditioner in the area to ensure that the air temperature inside the enclosure does not exceed the specified levels. Do not allow ice to develop on the drive. | 37 |
| Humidity | 95% RH or less and free of condensation | 37 |
| Storage Temperature | -20 to 60°C | 37 |
| Surrounding Area | Install the drive in an area free from: • oil mist and dust • metal shavings, oil, water or other foreign materials • radioactive materials • combustible materials (e.g., wood) • harmful gases and liquids • excessive vibration • chlorides • direct sunlight | 37 |
| Altitude | 1000 m or lower, up to 3000 m with derating (Refer to Drive Derating Data on page348.) | 37 |
| Vibration | 10 to 20 Hz at 9.8 m/s2 20 to 55 Hz at 5.9 m/s2 (CIMR-L20008 to 20180, 40005 to 40150) 2.0 m/s2 (CIMR-L20215 to 20415, CIMR-L40180 to 40216) | 37 |
| Orientation | Install the drive vertically to maintain maximum cooling effects. | 37 |
| Installation Method | Description | Installation Support Sets | Model | Required Tools | 41 |
| External/Face-Mount | Simplified installation with the digital operator is mounted on the outside of the panel with two screws. | - | - | Phillips screwdriver (#1) | 41 |
| Internal/Flush-Mount | Encloses the digital operator in the panel. The digital operator is flush with the outside of the panel. ( | Installation Support Set A (for mounting with screws through holes in the panel) | EZZ020642A | Phillips screwdriver (#1, #2) | 41 |
| Drive Model CIMR-L2 | Dimensions (mm) Figure W H D W1 H0 H1 H2 H3 D1 t1 t2 | Weight d (kg) | 43 |
Related products
Products covered by this document
- CIMR-LC2A0008BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC2A0011BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC2A0018BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC2A0025BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC2A0033BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC2A0047BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC2A0060BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC2A0075BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC2A0085BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC2A0115BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC2A0145BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC2A0180BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC2A0215BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC2A0283BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC2A0346BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC2A0415BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC4F0005BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC4F0006BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC4F0009BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC4F0015BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC4F0018BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC4F0024BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC4F0031BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC4F0039BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC4F0045BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC4F0060BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC4F0075BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC4F0091BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC4F0112BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC4F0150BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC4F0180BAAProduct page
- CIMR-LC4F0216BAAProduct page